Skip to main content

Full text of "Te Karere"

See other formats


THE MESSENGER 







FEBRUARY 



1952 



MONTHLY MAGAZINE OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 




LC 

/ love you, 


)VE 

/ love you because you 






Not only for what you arc. 


. Ire helping me to make 






But for what 1 am 


Oj the luml'cr of my life 






When I am with you. 


Not a tavern 
But a temple; 
Out of the works 






I lore you. 


Of my every day 






Not only for what 


Not a reproach 






You have made of yourself. 


But a sony. 






But for what 








You arc making of me. 


I lore you 

Because you hare done 

More than any creed 






1 love yen 


Could hare done 






For the pari of me 


To make me good, 






Thai you bring out; 


. Ind more than any fate 






I love you 


( ould have done 






For putting your hand 


To make me happy. 






Into my heaped-uh heart 


You have done it 






. 1 ud passing over 


Without a touch. 






All the foolish, weak things 


Without a word. 






That you can't help 


Wit hint a sign. 






Surely seeing there. 


Yt u hare done it 






. Ind for drawing out 


By being yourself. 






Into the light 


Perhaps that is what 






. Ill the beautiful belongings 


Being a friend means. 






That no one else has looked 


After all. 






Quite far enough to find. 


By Roy 


Croft. 





ABOUT OUR COVER 

CENTRAL WAREHOUSE OF THE MORMON WELFARE PROGRAM 
SALT LAKE CITY. 

The Church Welfare Plan represents a determined effort by God- 
fearing- men and women, directed by revelation, to seek out and apply 
the best available thought and knowledge to the basic problems of 
economic social welfare. 



TE RARERE 



Established 1907 



Volume 46 



Number 2 



February, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley 

Grover D. Jensen 

Bruce P. Sloan 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) 
John A. Osburn 



Tumuaki Mihana 
Hekeretari o te Mihana 

Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Mission Recorder 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 



"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, 0.1. New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; £2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



CONTENTS 



Editorial: 

From the Editor's Pen 

Special Features: 

Evidence for Belief 
Preparing to Meet God 

The Pearl of Great Price 

Back to Our Homeland 

A Dream Come True 

Why I Left My Wife and Children to Fulfill a Mission 

Call to New Zealand 

Seek Ye Learning 

Church Features: 

The President's Page 

Women's Corner 

Evidences and Reconciliations 

This World Church 

The Sunday School in New Zealand 

L.D. Prophets Speak 

Here and There in the Mission: 

Here and There in the Mission 
Featuring the Districts 

Tekihana Maori: 

Nga Pou-tokomanawa o Roto 



Te Hitori o Te H.ihi 












tin 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE 

He kupu Aroha 



By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 



*A^ 



had ordained 

■ them Elders in every church, 
and had frayed with fasting, they com- 
mended them to the Lord, on whom 
they believed." 

This was way back in the clays of 
Paul, one of the missionary Greats 
of all time. I think he felt that when 
he left, his ministry would be in good 
hands because he had ordained Elders, 
who would take responsibility and hold 
the Church together by the Great 
Power he had conferred upon them. 

Elders have been ordained and the 
same expected of them in every age in 
which the Gospel has been upon the 
earth and so it is, still. 

I ask a question to 530 men in the 
New Zealand Mission, "If all foreign 
Elders should be removed from this 
mission, at some future time, would 
you be so girded with the spirit of 
your calling that the Work of the 
Lord would still go on?" Approxi- 
mately four out of every hundred of 
the Church membership of this mission 
are ordained elders. If only half of you 
were active, it would mean that a 
president, two counsellors and a clerk 
could serve each 200 people. What a 
power for the further spread of Truth 
to those who are still in the throes 
of darkness. What a force of ministers 
to take care of the needs of the poor 
and the sick and the aged, with the 
help of over a thousand others who 



hold the Aaronic Priesthood, with the 

authority to officiate in the outward 
ordinances of the Church. 

In the Hui Parihas, convening from 

tunc to time, we are asking our Dis- 
trict Presidents to invite the Elders 
of the districts to be present and to 
join in the programmes of our con- 
ferences and we hope to have at our 
next Hui Tau the greatest gathering 
i f Elders that our mission has ever 
seen. 

Fellow Elders, have you studied 
lately the duties and responsibilities of 
the calling you accepted at the time 
of your ordination? Yours is a greater 
power than the aggregation of physi- 
cal force that exists in the world. 
Yours, in righteousness, is the Power 
of God among men and no man-made 
power can stand against it in any 
emergency. 

Brethren, those who have not yet 
felt the urge of this Great Power 
vested in you, drag out your Bibles, 
your Doctrine and Covenants and 
your Book of Mormon and read again 
the duties of an Elder in the Church 
and see just how near you are measur- 
ing to the great responsibilities and 
whether you are enjoying the blessings 
of the Power you possess to the ex- 
tent that you should. "Ye are the Salt 
of the Earth, and if the salt shall 
lose its savour, wherewith shall the 
earth be salted." Kia ora tonu tatou. 



48 



TE KARERE 




Wotnett'f Cwiu 



%■ 



ft 



By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 



AS I travel over the Mission to 
observe, learn and become ac- 
quainted with the people, my testi- 
mony, that this is the Lord's work 
and that we have not yet reached 
the limit of our possibilities in bring- 
ing others into active service in the 
Church, is strengthened. 

We must continue to encourage 
work in the Church and we must 
magnify our callings if we are to be 
happy. Paul, speaking to Titus, says : 
"This is a faithful saying, and these 
things I will that thou affirm con- 
stantly, that they which have believed 
in God might be careful to maintain 
good works. These things are good 
and profitable unto men." 

With a little planning and good use 
of our time we shall find time to 
serve the Lord and time to take care 
of our families and homes which must 
not be neglected. It might be well 
to become a little more germ conscious 
inasmuch as it's summer and fly time. 
Flies are germ carriers and we should 
wage war against them. A good screen 
door and a window or two fitted with 
screens would do wonders to keep 
them out of the house. Then if our 
yards are kept clean and our garbage 
kept in covered containers the fly 
problem could be reduced considerably. 

In this matter of sanitation, it's the 
little things that count such as wash- 
ing our hands before we handle food, 



being sure the pots and kettles we use 
to cook the food in are clean and 
scoured. There is a right and a wrong 
way to do everything, we are told, 
even to washing dishes. They can 
be washed in hot soapy water, then 
rinsed in hot water and allowed to 
drain in a rack without being dried 
with a towel, and are more sanitary 
than when dried with a soiled towel. 
This method also saves time. "Cleanli- 
ness is next to Godliness," we are told. 
The Lord blessed us with soap and 
water. Let's use it to keep our homes 
clean and sanitary. Our homes need 
not be elaborate but they can be clean 
and sweet and a haven of rest, when 
our day's work is done. 

And now a word about Relief 
Society. I have had two very nice 
visits with your President, Sister 
Polly Duncan. She is hoping, as I am, 
that the branches where it is possible 
to carry on the lesson work, will get 
started on the Book of Mormon 
lessons for this New Year. Let me 
call your attention to the lessons for 
the work meeting : "The art of mend- 
ing." This is something we should all 
learn to do and the lessons in the 
magazine will be a great help. 

It is also canning time. May I call 
your attention to an article in the 
August l l ^51 Relief Society magazine, 

(Continued on Page 56) 



February, 1952 



49 



EDITORIAL . . . 



Twm iUc Editors ?&* 



EVERYONE living upon the earth 
has someone he loves. The love 
he feels for that person is a guide 
in helping him on the roadway of life, 
an inspiration when overcoming pit- 
falls that confront him and an incen- 
tive in living a better life. Depending 
on the circumstances, that person 
might be a husband or wife, parents 
or family, pal or sweetheart, or that 
person might be the greatest source 
of love in the universe — our Heavenly 
Father. 

Many of us have put the love of 
these people, and others, ahead of our 
love of God. "That isn't so," you say, 
but I'm afraid its true. And I'm afraid 
too many of us are too willing to put 
our Father in second place when we 
have to make a choice between pleasing 
ourselves or Him. We may obtain 
pleasure in making this choice, but the 
true joy we receive comes from know- 
ing we are obeying our Father's will 
and doing the things He has asked us 
to do. 

Jesus Christ, when He was here 
on earth, taught us that love is the 
foundation of religious life. The found- 
ation and the heart of true worship 
of God is love — a love for God and a 
love for our fellow men. In fact, the 
whole message He taught during the 
three years of His ministry had its 
basis, and was centred around the law 
of love. He told "a young lawyer" at 
one time that, "On these two com- 
mandments hang all the law and the 
prophets." (Matt. 22:40.) That is, 
upon these two commandments hang 
the teachings of God to man. 

It has been said that this "law of 
love" is contradictory to the teachings 
of the Old Testament and therefore 
Christ taught an altogether different 



doctrine. Nothing could be further 
from the truth. In the beginning the 
law of love was set up, but because 
of wickedess a "carnal" law was given 
to the people. This did not do away 
with the principle of love but rather 
supplemented it until the people were 
ready to receive this great principle 
in its fullness, once again. When 
Christ gave us these two greatest com- 
mandments in the law, He was doing 
no more than quoting from the Holy 
Scriptures. "Thou shalt love the Lord 
thy God" from Deut. 6:5; and "Thou 
shalt love thy neighbour" from Lev. 
19:18. It can be seen from reading 
the Old Testament that although the 
children of Israel were not commanded 
to live the law of love, God certainly 
had not done away with the principle. 
If He had, wouldn't He also have 
said, "Ye have forsaken me so now I 
shall forsake you?" Then He would 
have been living the law He had given 
them. This shows that the "carnal 
law" is not an eternal principle and 
that the law of love is the "eternal 
law" God has given us to live. 

The last discourse Christ gave His 
apostles, before his crucifixion, was 
on the way they should love their 
Heavenly Father, their Saviour and 
their fellow men. There is not time 
nor space enough to quote the whole 
discourse but it may be found in the 
gospel of John, Chapters 13, 14, 15, 
16, and 17. Here the Saviour told His 
disciples many principles pertaining to 
the kingdom of* God and ended with 
a prayer that they might love one 
another as the Father loved the Son. 
In this discourse Jesus told them how 
they could show their love to God 
by "keeping His commandments." 
Further explaining He said, "He that 
hath my commandments and keepeth 
them, he it is that loveth me: and he 



50 



TE KARERE 



that loveth me shall be loved of my 
Father, and I will love him" (John 
14:21). and again, "If ye keep my 
commandments ye shall abide in my 
love" (John 15:10). Then only to the 
extent that we keep the command- 
ments that Christ has given us do 
we show our love for Him, and as 
long as we keep His commandments 
His love will abide with us. 

But do we keep His commandments 
by loving one another as we should? 
Let us examine ourselves and see. 

Do we as Latter-day Saints and the 
children of our Father in Heaven, love 
our neighbours as we should? It is 
easy to say we do, but are we happy 
when we see them getting ahead or 
do we try to pull them down? Are 
we happy when evil befalls them or 
does our heart sorrow with them in 
the day of their adversity? Do we 
gloat over their sins and delight in 
the gossip, or small talk, we hear 
about them? Many times we come 
across members who seem to be living 
the letter of the law and doing the 
other duties they should be doing. 
When they are at Church or walking 
down the street they seem to be fine, 
but when we walk into their places 
of business it is^a different matter. 
In their business dealings they are al- 
ways trying to cheat their competitor, 
who is in reality their neighbour. Do 
we do unto others as we would desire 
them to do unto us ? I hope we do, 
for this is the fulfillment of the law 
(Gal. 5:4). 

At times we ask, "DO WE 
REALLY LOVE OUR ENEM- 
IES?" If we have the pure love of 
Jesus Christ that we should have, we 
can. Jesus showing us the way, we 
should forgive our enemies for the 



wrong they commit against us. We 
have the written testimony of many 
of the prophets of old, showing forth 
their love towards their enemies ; and 
if they could do it we certainly can. 
It will not come overnight, and just 
because we love them doesn't mean we 
always agree with what they say or 
do ; but we must forgive them, for for- 
giveness must come before love is 
made secure. Therefore, let us forgive 
and strive for the pure love of Christ 
that will enable us to keep this com- 
mandment. We should and we must, if 
we are to be obedient to "every word 
that proceedeth out of the mouth of 
God." 

Again I ask, do we keep the com- 
mandments by loving one another ? Do 
we love God? If we do we must love 
our fellow men also, for we cannot 
love God unless we love our fellow 
men with all our hearts. If we do not 
love our fellow men and yet say we 
love God we are liars according to 
the prophets. 

Beloved, let us love one another; 
for love is of God; and everyone that 
loveth is born of God, and knozvcth 
God. 

He that loveth not, knozvcth not 
God; for God is love. 

If a man say, I love God, and hatcth 
his brother, he is a liar: for he that 
loveth not his brother whom he hath 
seen, hozv can he love God whom he 
hath not seen? 

And this commandment have zve 
from Him, That he zvho loveth God 
loveth his brother also. 

—I John 4:7-8, 20-21. 

Let us strengthen ourselves with the 
bond of love that our light might 
shine before men and that they may 
see our good works, because of it. and 
glorify our Father which is in Heaven. 
— B.P.S. 



February, 1952 



51 



EVIDENCE for BELIEF 



By ELDER LOUIS C. MIDGLEY 




THE Psalmist says, "Truth shall 
spring out of the earth ; and 
righteousness shall look down from 
Heaven." This is said by the Latter- 
day Saints to be a prophecy that 
finds its fulfillment in the coming forth 
of the "American Scripture." We have 
been attempting in our own little way 
to demonstrate the accuracy as far as 
history, etc., is concerned of this 
"American Scripture" and thus pro- 
vide a more general knowledge of the 
vast amount of evidence that supports 
our whole hearted faith in this "new 
revelation." The 85 Psalm, from which 
we have already quoted a key passage, 
tells us that the God of David and 
Solomon "will speak : for he will speak 
peace unto his people, and to his 
saints." Let me quote the 85th Psalm 
from the fourth verse to the last. 
"Turn us, O God of our salvation, and 
cause thine anger toward us to cease. 
Wilt thou be angry with us for ever? 
Wilt thou draw out thine anger to all 
generations ? Wilt thou not revive us 
again: that thy people may rejoice in 
thee? Show us thy mercy, O Lord, 
and grant us thy salvation. I will 
hear what God the Lord will speak: 
for He will speak peace unto His 
people, and to His saints : but let them 
not turn again to folly. Surely His 
salvation is nigh them that fear Him ; 



that glory may dwell in our land. 
Mercy and truth are met together; 
righteousness and peace have kissed 
each other. Truth shall spring out of 
the earth ; and righteousness shall look 
down from Heaven. Yea, the Lord 
shall give that which is good ; and 
our land shall yield her increase. 
Righteousness shall go before Him 
and shall set us in the way of His 
steps." Without going into a long 
commentary on this scripture let it 
be said that when this "truth shall 
spring forth out of the earth" great 
things can be expected, even to the 
extent of the Lord granting "salvation 
to His people and to His saints." The 
question that naturally arises concern- 
this Book of Mormon is, does it actu- 
ally provide us with any new truth 
so necessary for salvation? We have 
already provided in the four earlier 
numbers of this series on the Book of 
Mormon a brief introduction to some 
of the more imposing and important 
evidences that this "new revelation" 
provides us with. They represent a 
great deal of historical truth and they 
demonstrate the existence of immortal 
beings, but then some will no doubt 
hold that God was already known to 
exist before the Mormon account came 
into existence or else their would have 
been no first prayer by the boy Joseph 
Smith and also that mere historical 
truth is of no value when we are con- 
sidering the salvation of men's souls. 
Our "new revelation" is more than 
just a good honest history. To be sure 
it is a true historical record and it 
does establish the existence of God 
both by its own teaching, by the way 
it came forth and the age to which 
it was first introduced, but even more 
than this it teaches men that it is 
necessary to have faith in God — to 
believe that He lives — and then to 
exercise intelligence and turn away 
from error and wrong doing by re- 



52 



TE KARERE 



pentance and baptism and the laying 
on of hands. It teaches what to Mor- 
mons are first principles of mortal 
existence and its emphasises those ever 
so necessary principles over and over 
again and stresses them as necessary 
so that no man could miss them re- 
gardless of his education. To quote 
Orson Pratt, "The Book of Mormon 
contains some wonderful things about 
the colonization of this country soon 
after the flood, the history of a certain 
nation that lived here some sixteen 
or seventeen centuries ; then of another 
nation that succeeded it, and that 
lived here some 600 years before 
Christ, and down to the time that 
the records were hid up. Great things, 
historically, are revealed in it concern- 
ing prophecies that are yet to take 
place, and that have already taken 
place — when this record was trans- 
lated. Not only this, but it contains 
the Gospel of the Son of God. I mean 
the first principles of the Gospel — the 
principles of faith in God and in His 
Son Jesus Christ ; repentance — turn- 
ing away from sin, from all unright- 
eousness ; baptism by immersion in 
water for the remission of sins ; the 
gifrt and power of the Holy Ghost 
to be shed forth upon those who 
should receive this record — that is, re- 
ceive its truths and obey them." 

It is to be granted that the Book 
of Mormon does not say all that is 
to be said about God or His Gospel 
as the Mormons teach it. Our Book 
of Mormon tells us, "And whoso re- 
ceiveth this record, and shall not con- 
demn it because of the imperfections 
which are in it, the same shall knoiv of 
greater things than these." The Book 
of Mormon contains the first principles 
of the Gospel, many wonderful pro- 
phecies, the story of men's follies and 
the judgment that they received and 
last but not least a history unsurpassed 
for accuracy and clarity, but even 
more that it has as its purpose, and 
is capable of establishing, a faith in 
God and a knowledge of His exist- 
ence. Greater truth is promised to the 



believer who accepts the teachings of 
the book. None should think that be- 
cause the "new revelation" is full 
of faith and repentance and because 
it does not try to pass as a treatise 
on theology, that Mormonism is shal- 
low or incomplete, or that Mormons 
are just "good simple folk" who don't 
keep up with current thought. Nothing 
could be further from the truth. Mor- 
mons have, as students of the Doctrine 
and Covenants and Pearl of Great 
Price, know more than an abundance 
of reason in their theology and a very 
striking, scientific cosmology of the 
universe. No one need think that Mor- 
monism is shallow even though some 
saints are shallow in many respects. 
It is not my place to go into, any of 
Mormonism's sublime teachings or 
philosophy of Mormonism, only to 
state that they are there and that those 
who receive the first principles have 
access to the greater things — the 
greatest of all being salvation. Re- 
member our Psalm ? "Shew us thy 
mercy, O Lord, and grant us thy 
salvation," and again, "I will hear that 
God the Lord will speak : for He will 
speak peace unto His people, and to 
His saints — " And how? The answer, 
"Truth shall spring out of the earth 
and righteousness shall look down 
from Heaven." Great things have been 
revealed to the faithful saints and we 
can justly say that the 85 Psalm has 
been fulfilled. 

The 33rd verse of the 121 section of 
the Doctrine and Covenants expresses 
the position that the Church takes 
toward the "greater things" that shall 
be shown forth to the ones who re- 
ceive the "new revelation," "How long 
can rolling waters remain impure? 
What power shall stay the heavens ? 
As well might man stretch forth his 
puny arm to stop the Missouri River 
in its decreed course, or to turn it up- 
stream, as to hinder the Almighty 
from pouring down knowledge upon 
the heads of the Latter-day Saints." 
Mormons certainly believe that the 
Almighty has poured down knowledge 



February, 1952 



53 



upon their heads and that the know- 
ledge is important and necessary to 
this world of ours with all its turmoil 
and strife. Well might Isaiah in the 
29th Chapter say, in speaking of the 
restoration of our "new revelation," 
that the Lord "will proceed to do a 
marvellous work among this people, 
even a marvellous work and a 
wonder : for the wisdom of their wise 
men shall perish, and the understand- 
ing of their prudent shall be hid." 

We have attempted to demonstrate 
in our first four articles that first 
faith was the product of evidence pre- 
sented to the mind and secondly that 
in our Book of Mormon there existed 
ample evidence to establish a true and 
lasting faith in God. We have at- 
tempted to show in this number that 
our long hoped for "new revelation" 
has introduced a system of truth, a 
complete, all-embracing philosophy, 
and God's Kingdom on earth and that 



the Book of Mormon, while being the 
first, is by no means the only portion 
of truth that Latter-day Saints are in 
possession of and that those who act 
to the plainness of the Gospel" may 
have truth poured down upon them 
and receive salvation. 

Well may the Prophet Moroni say, 
"And whatsoever thing is good is just 
and true ; wherefore, nothing that is 
good denieth the Christ, but acknow- 
ledged that He is." Mormonism has 
indeed made theology the science of 
science with its "truth that came from 
the earth." And the Saints may stand 
up with much pride with our great 
evidence that God exists — the Book 
of Mormon. Our great desire should 
be for all men to investigate and em- 
brace the Church that teaches with 
revelation. 

(To be continued.) 



. . . HUI TAU . . . 

Hui Tau for 1952 has been scheduled to be held at Korongata 
over Easter Week-end, April 13th. 

Watch the Te Karere for any further announcements. 

HUI TAU BOARD 

SIDNEY J. OTTLEY (Mission President). 

ELDER J. H. KING (Hawke's Bay District President). 

BROTHER R. HARRIS (Chairman). 

BROTHER ERU TE NGAIO (Secretary). 



54 



TE KARERE 



Preparing to Meet God 



By BROTHER JAMES MARSHALL 



IF any of the Saints from other 
districts were to visit us down 
South, they would find that we are 
much the same as other Church 
branches. We go along smoothly at 
times, and also we have our struggles. 
We like to talk about the Gospel, and 
we have many chances to discuss the 
source of our happiness with others 
who are non-membrs of the Church. 

Most people are curious about the 
Church and want to know what it is 
all about. No doubt many of you have 
been asked, "What is the purpose of 
your Church?" 

There are many ways in which we 
could answer, but all of our answers 
could probably be summed up in a 
statement of Alma : "This life is the 
time for men to prepare to meet God ; 
yea, behold the day of this life is the 
day for men to perform their labours." 

We teach this doctrine and claim 
that we are members of the True 
Church of Christ, that we have the 
Gospel restored, and in our midst the 
power to act in the name of God in 
establishing His Kingdom here upon 
the earth. The Gospel is here to teach 
people about this Kingdom and the 
power of the Priesthood can make it 
possible for them to enter into it 
through the waters of baptism. We 
also claim that the will of the Lord 
has and is being revealed to us, and to 
the world, through the prophet who 
stands at the head of His Church. 

When we make these claims, we 
take upon ourselves quite a responsi- 
bility. Not only are we saying that 
these things are taught by the Church, 
but that ive believe and are living 
these teachings to the best of our 
ability. 



When we speak in testimony meet- 
ing and other meetings, we sometimes 
bear testimony to the fact that this 
Gospel embraces all truth ; not just 
spiritual truths as written in the scrip- 
tures, but also the truths of science 
and health. In fact, all the keys to a 
balanced and full life. 

Are we preparing to meet God by 
seeking these truths, and learning to 
understand them? If so, we will be 
able to meet with all types of people 
and explain the Gospel to them in an 
understandable manner. There are 
many ways in' which a person can be 
interested in the Church. Not all can 
be convinced by scripture alone. Some 
will be attracted by the "Word of 
Wisdom," some by the Welfare Plan 
or various other phases of this Gospel. 

That is one great benefit about this 
business of the Gospel embracing all 
truth. There is always some door that 
can be opened to each person so that 
they can be brought in where they 
can see the whole house. Some people 
of course will be able to understand 
the scriptures first pop, but many will 
never get past them, unless some other 
approach is made. 

The missionaries aren't able to spend 
all their time with each person, even 
if they wish to do so. It is at this stage 
that we who live here can do the most 
good. But first we must determine to 
attend our meetings and LISTEN to 
the talks and lessons prepared for us. 
We will find that some speakers will 
build their talks on scripture, some 
on the writings of others, some will 
use cold scientific facts and others 
logic. All speak on much the same 
subjects, but each has a different 
method of presenting facts. 



February, 1952 



55 



When we hear a method used that 
appeals to us we should study along 
the same line. As confidence is built 
up in our ability to grasp the facts 
of our chosen study, if we try, we 
will find it easier to branch out into 
other sources of knowledge. Fields 
that we had previously referred to as 
boring (boring because we were un- 
able to understand them) will become 
easy to understand, and therefore in- 
teresting. 

We need never be afraid to go 
afield for knowledge because all truth 
comes from God ; but we will be wise 



to keep our minds and hearts close 
to the written words of scripture. 
When I want farts I like to go to 
books other than Church publications 
for them, and I have never yet had to 
queer the writngs of Church authori- 
ties. 

Knowledge is fine, but it is only 
perfected by wisdom. Let us all pre- 
pare for eternity by seeking truth and 
putting it to work side by side with 
wixlom. Let us perform our labours 
by giving our knowledge to others, by 
sustaining our officers, by building our 
branches, and when we do these things 
we will be prepared to met God. 




WOMEN'S CORNER (Continued 

"Can when you Can." I was especially 
interested in this paragraph : "Instead 
of making the syrup for cold-pack 
canning of fruit, I measure the dry 
sugar right into the jars and add 
enogh hot water to fill them each ap- 
proximately one-fourth full. I give this 
a quick stir, put in the fruit, and then 
add additional clear water if necessary. 



from Page 49) 

This way, I am sure of having a uni- 
form amount of sugar in each jar of 
fruit." 

"Time flies on wings ot lightning," 
so we should begin thinking about 
a nice programme for March 18th, the 
Relief Society birthday. Sister Duncan 
suggests a nice programme and social 
to honour our oldest Relief Society 
members and celebrate our birthday. 



TE KARERE : SUBSCRIPTION CONTEST 

The "TE KARERE" Subscription Contest was won by Sister Ellen 
J. Blair of 43 Lake Road, Frankton Junction. The contest ended the 
1st of February and Sister Blair was head and shoulders above all 
others entered in the contest. Congratulations, Sister Blair. You will 
receive your leather-bound Triple Combination in the near future. 



TE KARERE 



THE PEARL OF GREAT PRICE 

By ELDER LEROY D. JOHNSON 
53 E. 33rd So., Salt Lake City, Utah, U.S.A. 




AS you all know, we as members 
of this Church have four price- 
less books which are called the 
"Standard Works," The Bible, the 
Book of Mormon, the Doctrine and 
Covenants and the Pearl of Great 
Price are recognized by the Church 
as the revealed Word of God to man- 
kind during different times and places 
in the history of the world. Of these 
four books we all hear a great deal 
about the first three while on the other 
hand comparatively little is known 
about the fourth. What is this fourth 
book? Where did we get it? What 
does it contain? These are the points 
which I shall try to briefly cover. 

In the year of 1828 a Frenchman 
by the name of Antonio Sebolo was 
travelling through Egypt and became 
very interested in the ancient cata- 
combs of that country. After obtain- 
ing permission from the proper 
authorities, he employed four hundred 
and thirty-three men for four months 
at about sixpence per day. On June 
7, 1831, he finally entered one of 
the catacomb which contained several 
hundred mummies, although there 
were only eleven that were preserved 
well enough to be moved. Having 
obtained .his much sought for treasure 
he set sail for home, but due to sick- 



ness, while in transit from Alexandria 
to Paris, he had to stop at Trieste. 
It was at this place that he willed 
his mummies to his nephew, Michael 
H. Chandler, and some 10 days later 
he died. 

However, Mr. Chandler, who had 
been living in Ireland, had left for 
America not knowing of his newly- 
acquired mummies. So it was that 
after many moves the mummies 
reached New York in 1833 where they 
were claimed at the custom house. 
Mr. Chandler, upon opening the mum- 
mies, found two rolls of papyri along 
with other smaller pieces. Unable to 
find a translator for the papyri, he 
began exhibiting the items to the pub- 
lic, inquiring after an able translator 
wherever he went. Almost everywhere 
he was told of a Joseph Smith, who 
had translated other ancient records. 
It was not until July 3, 1835, however, 
that Mr. Chandler arrived at Kirk- 
land, Ohio, where Joseph Smith was 
at the time residing. Mr. Chandler 
presented Joseph with one of the frag- 
ments which had been partly trans- 
lated. Retiring to his room, Joseph 
translated the fragment and returned 
it to Mr. Chandler, who, on July 6th 
of the same year, gave Joseph a cer- 
tificate stating, to all interested, that 
he (Joseph Smith) was capable of 
translating the Egyptian hieroglyphics. 

The Church purchased the four 
mummies that Mr. Chandler had with 
him at the time, of which were three 
men an one woman. Finding the two 
papyri in the casket with the woman, 
Joseph at once began to translate 
them, discovering that one of them 
was a record of Abraham and the 
other a record of Joseph who was sold 
into Egypt. The mummies and papyri 
Were shown to a great number o\ 



February, 1952 



57 



people at Kjrkland during the follow- 
ing two years, offering concrete proof 
of the abilities of Joseph Smith in the 
translating of ancient writings. The 
mummies, along with the papyri, 
eventually found their way to Chicago 
where it is believed that these items 
were destroyed by the Great Chicago 
Fire of 1871. 

The historical and religious value 
remained, however, as several years 
before, in 1842, the printing of these 
items had begun in the Nauvoo news- 
paper "Times and Seasons." Shortly 
after they had also been published in 
the "Millennial Star," a periodical 
printed in England. It was not until 
1851 in England that Pres. Franklin 
D. Richards, a member of the Quorum 
of the Twelve and President of the 
European Mission, brought together 
the following writings : First, the 
Book of Abraham which was taken 
from the papyri telling the story of 
the prophet of the same name, and 
also telling of his dealings with the 
Lord — history which has never before 
been given to men on the earth since 
ancient times ; second, the Book of 
Moses. This book is similar to the 
first few chapters of Genesis, although 
it is an altogether different account 
of these happenings. It was revealed 
directly to the Prophet in this dispen- 
sation ; third, the writings of Joseph 
Smith. These are divided into two 
categories : (a) an extract from a 
translation of the Bible (Matthew 
23:39; 24:1-55), and (b) extracts 
from the history of Joseph Smith tell- 
ing the account of his birth, early 
history and how he obtained the 



"Golden Plates"; fourth, the Articles 
of Faith, a concise declaration of the 
Latter-day Saints' beliefs. These were 
published under one cover and received 
its name, "The Pearl of Great Price" 
which indeed it is. It will be noted 
that the writings of Joseph was not 
printed. This was because at the time 
of the Prophet's untimely death he 
had not translated it and therefore 
this book could not be published. 

It was some 27 odd years, however, 
before the first English edition was 
printed in the United States, at Salt 
Lake City. Since its first publication 
it has been translated into eight lan- 
guages : Welsh in 1852, German in 
1882, Danish in 1883, Dutch in 1911, 
Hawaiian in 1914, Maori in 1919, 
Samoan in 1944, and Spanish in 1948. 

Within this little book is a wealth 
of knowledge on the Pre-existence, 
the Creation, Astronomy, Celestial 
Marriage and many other subjects we 
would not understand if it were not 
for these writings. The challenge is 
left for anyone to find a more compre- 
hensive, a more informative or a more 
beautifully written book than the Pearl 
of Great Price. 

I bear you my testimony that I 
know this book is true and that Joseph 
Smith was and is a Prophet of God 
as are all the succeeding presidents 
up to and including Pres. David O. 
McKay. 

May God bless us all to seek after 
His teachings, I pray in Jesus' name. 
Amen. 



Any fool can try to defend his mistakes — and most fools do. 
58 TE KARERE 



Back to Our Homeland . . 



By MYRA MASON 



IT is with a heart full of gratitude 
and thankfulness to my Heavenly 
Father for His many wonderful bless- 
ings that I say how lovely it is to be 
back with my lovely family who are 
so dear to me, and in the land of my 
birth and with the people of good old 
New Zealand. I am thankful that 
Pres. Young was inspired to call us 
on such a marvellous trip, and I pray 
that as I go through life I will 
show my appreciation unto my Father 
in Heaven by keeping His command- 
ments and serving in His Church. 

First of all, I bring greetings to the 
Latter-day Saints of New Zealand 
from hundreds of returned mission- 
aries. They love you, their prayers 
and faith are with you, and they are 
doing all they can to help this mission 
along. Their fondest memories are of 
this land and they pray God's choicest 
blessings will be upon you. They want 
you to be strong and active in the 
work of the Lord, and be worthy 
members of the Church. Their wives 
say all they hear is about the people 
of New Zealand, and they, along with 
the elders, send their love. 

Their hospitality unto us was be- 
yond words of expression — nobody 
could have done more. They took us 
into their homes, where we were able 
to meet with their lovely wives and 
families. They took us to see all the 
plaecs of interest, and they did every- 
thing possible to make our stay a 
happy one. We feel very much in- 
debted to them, and it seemed all we 
could do was to say, "Thank you, 
and God bless you for your kindness 
and generosity." They are all so busy, 
but not too busy to carry on the Lord's 
work and they are surely a credit to 
the Church. 

What a joy it was to meet with our 
brothers and sisters who we had not 
seen for so many years. They have 



been privileged to gather to the land 
of Zion and enjoy the blessings and 
privileges that are there. They have 
the wonderful blessings of being able 
to do temple work and be with the 
body of the Church. 

We have many blessings to be 
thankful for here. We have the same 
four Standard Works to study, the 
same Priesthood, Spirit and organiza- 
tion right here in this land. We have 
the opportunity of reading the sermons 
of our Church leaders, and of being 
active. Truth is truth no matter where 
we find it, and we can study and gain 
a testimony of the divinity of the 
Gospel here as well as there. Let us 
be humble and put forth our best 
efforts to understand and live the 
Gospel. 

It was our privilege to meet with 
Pres. McKay and his counsellors, and 
as we shook the hands of such great 
men we could feel a beautiful feeling 
go right through us. We heard their 
words of counsel given at Conference. 
There was nothing new given, but the 
same Gospel as we have was uttered 
through the mouths of these great 
men, touching your very soul. 

. It was a thrill to meet and talk 
with the Primary Presidency in Zion, 
to attend Primary Stake meetings, and 
to go through the two Children's Hos- 
pitals. In the old hospital I had the 
opportunity of telling of the children 
of New Zealand. There were 35 
patients and 1,000 out-patients. This 
hospital is financed by the Primary 
children's "Birthday Pennies" and fifty 
specialists give of their scientific ser- 
vice free of charge for the welfare of 
these little children. 

I was also privileged to go through 
the beautiful new hospital where the 
children will be able to lie in bed and 

(Continued on Page 67) 



February, 1952 



59 



A DREAM COME TRUE 



By MURIEL C. HAY 




I AM almost afraid to go to sleep 
at night for fear I shall awaken 
and find that the last nine months have 
been only a dream. But what a beauti- 
ful dream — the fulfillment of my 
heart's desire. To gather to the central 
Stakes of Zion, to have the privilege 
of entering five of the Temples of the 
Most High and not only doing work 
myself, but also for the dead, was a 
joy beyond all earthly treasures. 

The privilege of attending the Relief 
Society Conference and there meeting 
with the General Board, listening to^ 
their eloquent sermon, their spiritual- 
ity, love and timely advice was worth 
travelling 7,000 miles to hear. To see 
the Tabernacle filled to overflowing 
with Relief Society sisters, not for 
one meeting but for four sessions was 
an inspiring sight. To listen to the 
''Singing Mothers" as they rendered 
their choruses during the Relief 
Society Conference and also for the 
opening sessions of the General Con- 
ference was an inspiration to all. My 
thoughts turned to my New Zealand 
sisters, especially our Polynesian sis- 
ters who have such a natural gift for 
singing. How you would have ab- 
sorbed that beautiful music. I pictured 



and compared oar small group of 
"Singing Mothers" at the 1951 Hui 
Tau, and a prayer went from my 
heart that at Hui Tau this year there 
would be a greater interest taken in 
our "Singing Mothers" and the work- 
not left to just a willing few. Music 
is a prayer to God and you who are 
gifted in singing can indeed praise 
Him in that way. 

It was an honour and a great joy 
to represent the New Zealand Relief 
Society at this conference. When Sis- 
ter Pickering, the secretary of the 
General Board, called for representa- 
tives of the various Stakes and Mis- 
sions, it was a thrill to have four 
New Zealand representatives stand — 
Sisters Young, Mclntyre, Mason and 
myself. But still greater was the thrill 
to hear the exclamations echo through- 
out the building as we stood. It 
touched our hearts, and a few minutes 
later I felt an arm creep around my 
waist and a very sweet lady whisper- 
ing in my ear, "Do you know my son 
who is on a mission in New Zealand?" 
And the joy it brought to her when I 
answered, "Yes," and went on to tell 
her what a fine missionary son she 
had. Mothers are the same the world 
over. They love their sons and have 
a great faith in them when they go 
into the mission field. 

Several times I had the privilege 
of personally meeting with Sister 
Spafford and her counsellors and also 
Sister Pickering. Their farewell mes- 
sage to me was, "Sister Hay, we want 
you to take our love back to the New 
Zealand sisters and encourage them 
all you can in the great work. We are 
interested in every one of them." And 
I know that they are. They are very 
gracious and lovely women who are 
devoting their time and talent to help- 



60 



TE KARERE 



ing the women of the Church to have 
a better understanding of what is re- 
quired of them in this world, and how 
they can help themselves and their 
fellow men. 

The theme of the Conference, both 
Relief Society and General, was cent- 
ered around the home. All were asked 
to bring about a closer relationship 
between husband and wife, parents 
and children. The women were asked 
to support the Priesthood. 

The General Conference was one of 
the highlight of our trip. To be right 
there in the Tabernacle with all the 
General Authorities was something I 
shall never forget. The gratitude of 
all the members of our party goes out 
to Tumuaki Cowley, who was instru- 
mental in having reserved seats for us 
at each session. As we saw the thous- 
ands who were unable to gain admis- 
sion to the crowded Tabernacle we 
were most grateful. Speaking of Elder 
Cowley, we found when we went to 
the States that we haven't as much 
claim on him as we may think, for he 
is loved by all and has a great work 
to do among the people in his home- 
land. He and Sister Cowley did all it 
was possible to do in making our stay 
a happy one. They opened their home 
to us and we felt welcome at all 
times. It was surprising how often our 
steps led to the Cowley home. Some- 
times to rest, sometimes to eat, some- 
times for counsel and sometimes to 
recapture a New Zealand atmosphere. 
We always found what we went for. 

Four days before we left Salt Lake 
City, we were blessed in having Elder 
Cowley take us to meet the First 



Presidency of the Church. President 
McKay was in a meeting, but he left 
it to meet us. If ever a man radiates 
spirituality and love it is President 
McKay. How he does cherish his 
memories of his New Zealand trip, and 
his parting words to us were, "Will 
you promise me something? When 
you return to your homeland, will you 
take with you my great love for those 
people and tell them I hope that some 
day I will be able to return to them ; 
for it was there I gained such a strong 
testimony." He then told of the experi- 
ence he had of interpretation of 
tongues while addressing an assembly 
at Puketapu. 

I cannot find words eloquent enough 
to express our thanks to our relations 
and the returned missionaries, their 
wives and parents who did so much 
for us. I wish I had the space to tell 
of some of our experiences that will 
always be cherished by four New Zea- 
landers who travelled thousands of 
miles and ate hundreds of meals with 
so many of the saints of Zion. Our 
deepest gratitude goes to all who con- 
tributed in any way to make our trip 
to the "Land choice above all others" 
so wonderful. I return feeling very 
humble and with a heart full of 
thanks. Let us make New Zealand a 
"Land of Zion." The Gospel is the 
same here as in Salt Lake City. I love 
New Zealand and I love the people 
here. 

Up, awoke defenders of Zion, 
The joe's at the door of your homes. 
Let each hear I be the heart of a lion, 
( ' nyielding and proud us he roams. 

— Penrose. 



February, 1952 



61 



Why I Left My Wife And Two Children To 
Fulfill A Mission Call To N.Z. 

By ELDER GEORGE WILLIAM PAGET 
1376 W. 6th So., Salt Lake City, Utah, U.S.A. 



AS we all know the war and its 
threat has created a necessity for 
all young men of the best fighting 
age in America to be conscripted into 
the armed services of their country. 
This great call of manpower has 
created a major scarcity of young men 
who can leave their homes to enter 
the army of service to create right- 
eousness, and seek out the honest in 
heart of the people of the earth. Be- 
cause of this scarcity, the First Presi- 
dency has sent out a Church-wide call 
to all seventies quorums to fill their 
natural functions as the missionary 
quorum of the Church. Most of the 
seventies now in the Church are older 
men married with families. This has 
created a bit of a problem and placed 
before those considered a choice 
whether they will leave their happy 
marriages and vocations to go on a 
mission. To me, however, it would be 
impossible to turn down a mission call 
after one has been in the temple and 
made vows with our Father in 
Heaven. I don't see how anyone could 
even stop and question whether or 
not he should accept a mission call. 
If we believe we are called of God, 
then we should also believe that 
through our righteousness, diligence 
and sincerity He will provide a way 
whereby we will not lose financially, 
and we will be brought even closer 
and find more joy "in our marriage 
by the natural rewards of success and 
happiness which always comes from 
unselfish service in the Lord's work 
while here on earth. 

If there was some question or doubt 
whether or not we should sacrifice 
in this manner, all we would have 



to do to have our doubts appeased 
is to read about some of the mission- 
aries in the early days of the Church. 
They left their wives and families 
when both they and their families were 
in ill-health and poverty stricken and 
went out without purse or script, using 
only a strict faith that their cause was 
just. Today no such sacrifice is placed 
on one who is sick or who cannot 
have either his family or quorum sup- 
port him. We also have, today, collec- 
tions of good books written over the 
years as evidence of our beliefs, from 
which we can get both knowledge and 
testimony of the Gospel. We also have 
the many findings of science which are 
proofs that our Book of Mormon is 
true. These and many other things 
which have come to light have made 
a mission call today comparatively 
easy. 

Soon after the call came from the 
First Presidency, the Seventy's 
Quorum to which I belong made the 
decision to contribute equally for the 
support of three of its members to go 
on missions. I was called, so there are 
many supporting me out here. They 
all know as do I that this is actually 
a blessing to help further the work 
of the Lord. They are now serving 
in their ways back home while I am 
serving out here. When I go home 
one of them will have the privilege 
of going out under the same conditions 
as I have. They are being blessed, and 
will be blessed when they come out 
here in the same manner as I am. 
This will overall strengthen the whole 
quorum, and any quorum that is doing 
the same thing. It is also offering 
many a way to serve the Lord. 



62 



TE KARERE 



I miss my wife and family very 
much out here, but I have my work 
and contacts. Being actively engaged 
in the Lord's work pretty well uses 
up my time so as to not allow for 
much to be spent in homesickness. 
The real sacrifice of loneliness is with 
the family at home. They are trying 
to carry on in the same place and 
everything reminds them of their hus- 
band and father. The wife in most 
of these cases gets a job, for some- 
thing to keep her occupied and make 
the time pass more rapidly. Having 
a job also supplies her with a means 
of having the necessities of life and a 
few of the luxuries without feeling 
that she is being a burden. But most 
of all my wife wants to be a part 
of this mission in every way possible. 
This gives them a feeling that they 
are a part of it. Also, to me, their 
biggest help is the letters they write 
and their support through encourage- 
ment, faith and prayer. Just knowing 
their every prayer is with me gives 
me new determination for a good, 
righteous mission. Some people have 
said to me, "Don't you love your wife 
and children?" Yes, I love them, and 
I give thanks to my Father in Heaven 
for giving them to me. Without them 
there wouldn't be anything worth liv- 
ing for. With them we can work to- 
gether towards eternal life in the 
highest degree of Glory. This mission 



is part of our labours to gain that 
Glory, and I feel that this fulfilling of 
a mission is in no way showing a lack 
of love for my wife, but rather a 
stronger certainty of the deep, eternal 
love I have for her when all things 
are considered. After all, there is 
nothing of material wealth that is 
worth looking forward to in this life. 
We can't take with us the riches of 
the earth, but we can take the things 
we have earned for our eternal life. 

My wife and I know that this is 
the true Church of Jesus Christ. We 
have tried to have a good home life 
by living the Gospel and setting the 
right example for our children, so that 
they, too, could be raised with the 
teachings of the true Church of Jesus 
Christ. We know that this mission 
will make us more qualified in both 
knowledge and example to raise our 
children in the light of the Gospel. 
The things we learn and the increase 
of spirit that we fill, as we progress 
in the truth, we feel certain will 
bring a spiritual influence of peace 
and love in our home, and that this 
unity will merge into the lives of our 
children and help prepare them to 
honourably meet life both religiously 
and socially. Therefore I arn thankful 
and feel deeply honoured at this call 
to come out here to New Zealand to 
fill a mission. 



Always keep your ambitions just out of reach, and never let yourself 
catch up with them. 



One of the nicest things about telling the truth is that you don't hare 
to remember ivhat you said. 



February, 1952 



63 



EVIDENCES and RECONCILIATIONS 

Is It Wrong To Doubt? 



By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



DOUBT usually means uncertainty. 
You doubt the presence of gold 
in the ore, though there are yellow 
flakes in it ; or that the man is a 
thief, though stolen goods are found 
in his possession; or that a principle 
of the Gospel is correctly interpreted 
by the speaker. What you really mean 
is that the evidence in your possession 
is insufficient to convince you that 
there is gold in the ore, or that the 
man is a thief, or that the Gospel 
principle has been explained correctly. 
Doubt arises from lack of evidence. 

Intelligent people cannot long endure 
such doubt. It must be resolved. Proof 
must be secured of the presence of 
gold in the ore, or of the dishonesty 
of the man, or of the correctness of 
the doctrinal exposition. Consequently, 
we set about to remove doubt by gath- 
ering information and making tests 
concerning the subject in question. 
Doubt, then, becomes converted into 
inquiry or investigation. 

After proper inquiries, using all the 
powers at our command, the truth 
concerning the subject becomes known, 
or it remains unknown to be un- 
ravelled perhaps at some future time. 
The weight of evidence is on one 
side or the other. Doubt is removed. 
Doubt, therefore, can be and should 
be only a temporary condition. Cer- 
tainly, a question cannot forever be 
suspended between heaven and earth ; 
it is either answered or unanswered. 
As the results of an inquiry appear, 
doubt must flee. 

In other words, doubt, whichever is 
or should be a passing condition, must 
never itself be an end. Doubt as an 
objective of life is an intellectual and 
a spiritual offense. A lasting doubt 
implies an unwillingness on the part 



of the individual to seek the solution 
of his problem, or a fear to face the 
truth. Doubt should vanish as it ap- 
pears, or as soon as proper inquiry can 
place it either with the known or the 
unknown facts of life ; with the solv- 
able or the unsolvable ; with the know- 
able or the unknowable. 

The strong man is not afraid to 
say, "I do not know ;" the weak man 
simpers and answers, "I doubt." 
Doubt, unless transmitted into inquiry, 
has no value or worth in the world. 
Of itself it has never lifted a brick, 
driven a nail, or turned a furrow. To 
take pride in being a doubter, without 
earnestly seeking to remove the doubt, 
is to reveal shallowness of thought 
and purpose. 

Perhaps you are questioning the 
correctness of a Gospel principle. Call 
it doubt if you prefer. Precede to take 
it out of the region of doubt by exam- 
ination and practice. Soon it will be 
understood, or left with the many 
things not yet within the reach of man. 
But remember : failure to understand 
one principle does not vitiate other 
principles. When proved false, one 
doctrine may cast distruct upon other 
doctrines, but the others must be tested 
for their own correctness. 

Doubt of the right kind — that is, 
honest questioning — leads to faith. 
Such doubt impels men to inquiry 
which always opens the door to truth. 
The scientist in his laboratory, the 
explorer in distant parts, the prayer- 
ful man upon his knees — these and 
all inquirers like them find truth. They 
learn that some things are known, 
others are not. They cease to doubt. 
They settle down wtih the knowledge 
they possess to make the forces of 
(Continued on Page 75) 



64 



TE KARERE 



THIS WORLD CHURCH 
and its PEOPLE 





461 NOW declare the first shovel 
-ll of dirt raised over the site of 
the Los Angeles Temple which is to 
be reared to the glory of God and to 
the salvation of His people." 

With these words, President David 
O. McKay launched the construction 
programme of the imposing edifice by 
tossing aside the first dirt from the 
gilded shovel. 

The ceremony of ground breaking 
took place on the temple site, Santa 
Monica Boulevard and Selby Avenue, 
in Westwood, before a specially in- 
vited group of 250. Following the 
ground breaking, President McKay 
dedicated the site for the erection of 
the temple. 

The attractive building will stand 
on a hill overlooking a wide area of 
Los Angeles County and will be read- 
ily accessible from all sections of the 
city. Its one single spire will stand 
approximately 265 feet high and will 
be mounted by a figure of the Angel 
Moroni sounding a trumpet, similar 



to the one on the central spire of the 
Salt Lake Temple. Many Church and 
civic leaders were present at the ex- 
ercises. The mayors of Los Angeles 
and Beverly Hills districts were lead- 
ing civic officials. The First Presi- 
dency and other General Authorities 
were leading Church officials. 

There has also been chosen a site 
for a temple in Oakland, California. 
This site has not yet been dedicated, 
however. 

Explorers Make 36-Mile Trek 
Over Historic Pioneer Trail 

Thirty-six miles of the trail which 
was blazed by Brigham Young and 
the Latter-day Saint Pioneers in 1847 
was recently walked over again by a 
group of young L.D.S. boys approxi- 
mately 15 years of age. This pro- 
gramme was adopted as a project to 
help build a pioneer trail tradition in 
the heart of every young man taking 
the trip, and for the preserving for 
future generations the route of the 
trail, its stories and legends, and its 
historic spots. 

Each scout who successfully com- 
pleted the trail trek report form was 
given a "I have walked the pioneer 
trail" button. A brief report of ex- 
periences on the trip and a short state- 
ment of historical facts about points of 
interest along the way was submitted 
from each boy. Some of the outstand- 
ing spots visited along the way were 
wagon tracks on the original pioneer 
trail in the soft sandstone. They also 
found markers for two pony express 

stations. They stopped at the summit 



February, 1952 



65 



of Big Mountain, where Brigham 
Young caugt his first glimpse of the 
valley of the Great Salt Lake on July 
23, 1847. After this they inspected a 
point a mile and a half down the 
mountain where the pioneer wagons 
were "rough-locked" and men with 
ropes on the upper side prevented them 
from overturning. They stopped for a 
while at the site of Brigham Young's 
last camp and at the monument near 
where he paused for a few minutes 
observing the valley and said to Wil- 
ford Woodruff, in whose wagon he 
was riding, "It is enough. This is the 
right place. Drive on." 

Pioneer Region Officials 
Inspect Welfare Projects 

The Pioneer Welfare Region will 
meet its 1951 welfare budget in a 
dozen separate projects, heads of the 
region reported after a recent tour of 
inspection. 

The region's varied programme — in- 
cluding projects from baking bread to 
making shoe leather and from powder- 
ing milk to raising fish — is coming 
along in "fine shape." 

At the Liberty Stake soap factory 
it was reported that the entire 1951 
budget is finished, except for one item. 
The factory has turned out 1,067 pints 
of blueing, 16,438 packages of cleanser, 
61,774 bars of laundry soap, 71,782 
packages of soap powder, 72,229 bars 
of toilet soap and 13,939 packages of 
water softener, he said. The factory 
produces soap products for the entire 
Church. 

The inspection group inspected a 
new project at the main Welfare 
Square in Salt Lake City. This project 
is a new addition to process powdered 
milk for the entire Church. Already 
being conducted are projects in bott- 
ling fresh milk and buttermilk, can- 
ning of condensed milk, and process- 
ing of cottage cheese and butter. 

The Wells Stake has filled its 1951 
project of 6,000 square feet of sole 
leather and is well along on 9,000 



square feet of upper leather for shoes 
for the entire Church. More than 
20,000 dollars in machinery has been 
installed, President Fred W. Schwen- 
diinan reported. He said the leather 
product being produced, after several 
years of experimenting, is one of the 
finest in the country. 

Production at the Granite Stake 
Bakery is up to schedule. Their bakery 
is to produce 40,000 loaves of bread 
through the year for Pioneer Region. 

A thousand new fruit trees are just 
now coming into production at the 
Pioneer Stake fruit and dairy farm 
managed by Thirty-second and Thirty- 
third Wards, the inspection group re- 
ported. Raspberries, grapes, apples, 
pears and peaches have been or soon 
will be harvested also. 

The group visited the Pioneer Re- 
gion feed lot and found 200 beef cattle 
and calves in good condition. They are 
not ready for market yet. 

Temple View Stake with its poultry 
project is to furnish 22,892 dozen eggs 
and 3,000 pounds of chicken meat. 
Their output is right on schedule also. 

Pioneer Stake's farm has a new ad- 
dition—a fish pond. The first 3,000 
feed fish were installed in the pond 
only last week. Bass will be put in 
when the feed fish are well established. 
The farm also produces milk, pork, 
chickens, rabbits, and vegetables. 

North Jordan's Stake's farm is do- 
ing well on its nroduction of hay, 
grain, sugar beets, and peas. 

Grantsville Stake has a 121-acre 
farm, 41 acres irrigated, 80 acres dry 
farm. Barley and wheat are the chief 
crops. 

Tooele Stake has grain, pork and 
poultry projects on 120 acres... Some 
22,892 dozen eggs are due from that 
project this year and production is on 
schedule, the group reported. 

They also visited the Oquirrh Stake 
hay, grain, and beef project. 

This is in brief the accomplishments 
of on welfare district of the Church. 
The same achievements are being car- 



66 



TE KARERE 



Tied on — some on larger scales and 
some on smaller — throughout the en- 
tire Church. The president of this in- 
spection group reports, "We have a 
fine, enthusiastic group, with excellent 
spirit, working on the various pro- 
jects." 

Georgia Youth 
Achieves High Honour 

The honour of representing the 
State of Georgia as the Future Farm- 
ers of America representative and 
speaker at the American Institute of 
Co-operation was recently conferred 
on Jackie Williams, a son of Bishop 
and Mrs. Jesse G. Williams, of Ax- 
son, Georgia. 

"Farmer Co-operative Education for 
High School Youth" was the subject 
of his speech delivered at the Institute 
held on the campus of the Utah State 



Agricultural College. He and his 
chapter won the coveted distinction 
and honour by being placed first in 
a contest sponsored by the Cotton 
Co-operative Exchange. 

Jackie is 15- years of age and a 
member of the Aaronic Priesthood. 
He is President of the Teachers' 
Quorum in his ward and is a versatile 
and popular young man. His activities 
include : Vice-president of the junior 
class in high school ; president of the 
Pearson Chapter of Future Farmers 
of America ; and secretary of the State 
of Georgia FFA Organisation. He 
has also participated in a number of 
public speaking contests. 

This young man is commended for 
his many achievements, and for the 
honour he has brought to himself, his 
parents, the Pearson Chapter of FFA, 
his school, the State of Georgia, and 
his Church. 



BACK TO OUR HOMELAND (Continued from Page 59) 



overlook Temple Square and the 
whole city, while receiving the best 
of treatment. The children have 
worked hard to raise money for this 
building but it is a structure that they 
can be proud of, and continue to help. 
It made my heart glad to know that 
New Zealand had donated a small por- 
tion to help those poor children who 
need medical attention. 

The Primary Presidency are inter- 
ested in our work here in New Zea- 
land and send their love and greet- 
ings. Primary is just the same in 
Zion. We have the same books to 
study, and where we have enough 
children we can follow all of the 
classes from the same lesson manuals. 
They especially encourage the parents 
to have the "Children's Friend" in 
their homes and encourage them to 
read the rich wealth of material 
printed in them. 



The highlight of our trip was the 
privilege of going through five of the 
Temples, of being married for time 
and eternity and of being sealed to 
our parents. It was also a joy to be 
able to do work for our ancestors. 

If there is any advice I could give 
you, it would be to gather your genea- 
logy and prepare your lives for this 
great privilege; for this is one of the 
commandments of God. 

I know this work is true, and if we 
obey it and all the commandments of 
God, we will come forth in the resur- 
rection of the just to dwell with our 
Father in Heaven. 

In conclusion I would reiterate the 
elders' message to you, whether mem- 
ber, officer or whatever your calling : 
"Fulfill to the utmost the responsi- 
bilities that are yours." 

May the Lord's blessings be with 
us all in this, I humbly pray in the 
name of Jesus Christ. Amen. 



February, 1952 



67 



Here and There 

IN THE MISSION 



unit i < 1 1 1 1 ■ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • i j ■ i ■ 1 1 1 




Four Elders Depart for Home 

Departing from New Zealand Dec. 
27th on the Monowai we said good- 
bye to Elder James Howard Xeilsen 
and Elder Bill B. Webb. Elders Niel- 
sen and Webb are extending their 
knowledge after their mission by 
travelling around the world before re- 
turning home. They each hope to 
continue their education by entering 
university upon their arrival back in 
Zion. 




After his arrival in New Zealand 
Elder Webb was sent to the Welling- 
ton District where he laboured in 
Palmerston North for the first part 
of his mission. Shortly after Hui Tau 
he was assigned to Waikato District. 
After labouring a short time in the 
district, Elder Webb was called to fill 
the office of District President, which 
position he was holding at the time 
of his release. 

Departing on the Aorangi January 
15th were two more missionaries 




Elder J. H. Neilsen 



Elder Bill B. Webb 



Elder Neilsen arrived on the plane 
(in Sept., 1949) which was the first 
aircraft to convey L.D.S. missionaries 
to their field of labour. He was as- 
signed to the Mahia District where he 
laboured for about eighteen months. 
He was the presiding elder in the dis- 
trict for the latter part of this period. 
For the remaining period of his mis- 
sion he has been in charge of the ac- 
tivities of the work on the college at 
Frankton Junction. 



headed for the land of Zion. They 
were Elder Royal Rigby and Elder 
Norman P. Ensign. 

Elder Rigby arrived in the country 
after travelling across the "many 
waters" on the Aorangi, Jan., 1950. 
His first field of labour was in the 
Waikato District where he laboured 
till Hui Tau. At Hui Tau he was 
transferred to the Wairarapa District 
where he laboured the remainder of 



68 



TE KARERE 



his mission the last 16 months being 
the presiding elder of that district. At 
Hawaii he plans to stay for a week 
enjoying the islands there and then 
will return to the States via the Lur- 
line. 



District for three months. Then he 
was transferred to Hawke's Bay Dis- 
trict where he laboured the next year. 
Since Hui Tau he has laboured in 
the Bay of Plenty District and on 
the college at Frankton Junction. 











Elder Royal Rigby 

Elder Ensign also arrived on the 
Aorangi Jan., 1950. He was first as- 
signed to labour in the Bay of Islands 



Elder N. P. Ensign 

Upon his return he intends to go 
into the poultry business if conditions 
exist which will allow him to do so. 



Arriving Missionaries 

Arriving the 30th Nov. on the Wai- 
runa there arrived in the mission three 
new missionaries and one member 
who are to be ambassadors of the 
Gospel of Jesus Christ. 



" V '"% 



f 



ft. 



Elder F. R. Kawallis 

Elder Fredrick R. Kawallis is from 
Logan, Utah. Elder Kawallis holds 
a B.S. degree in the field of Physics. 
He has held various positions in his 



ward back home, two being Asst. 
Ward Clerk and Ward Teaching 
Supervisor. As the Church authorities 
have called the Seventies to fill mis- 
sions many have answered this call 




Elder G. W. Paget 

and Elder Kawallis is one of those 
"fatihful servants." His first assign- 
ment has been to the Hawke's Bay 

District. 



February, 1952 



69 



Also arriving on the Wairuna was 

another Seventy, his wife and daugh- 
ter. Elder J. Lash Smith and Sister 
I 'ivimi Smith have answered the call 
of the First Presidency to fulfill a 
mission as husband and wife to the 
"land of the long white cloud." With 
them has come their daughter, Kay 
Dawn, who will continue her school 
studies while she is in the land of 
New Zealand. The Smiths also have 
two other daughters back in Utah who 
are married. Elder Smith was a dairy 
farmer back home. This is his second 
mission to the south-west Pacific area. 
He fulfilled a mission to Australia 
about 25 years ago. Sister Smith is 
well known among many of the saints 
in N.Z. as she is a former resident 
of the country. She was born in 
South Africa, after which she moved 
to Australia where she lived most of 
her younger life. Then she lived in 
New Zealand for a short time before 
going to the States where she married 
her husband. About four years ago 
she returned to N.Z. for a short visit 
to see some of her friends and rela- 
tives. The Smiths have been assigned 



swered the "call to the Seventies." His 
name is Elder George William Paget 
and he hails from Salt Lake City, 
Utah. Elder Paget lias left his wife 
and family of two girls (see Page 62) 
in filling the call to do the Lord's 
work. Elder Paget has a brother who 
has been in the mission over a year. 

Elder Basil E. De Witt arrived the 
day after Xmas on the Aorangi. Elder 
De Witt is a native of Australia who 
migrated to Zion after accepting the 
Gospel in his homeland. There he has 
obtained many choice blessings 
through obedience to the Lord's will. 
Elder De Witt is an interior decorator 
by trade, and when the Church build- 
ings have been built he will be called 
to supervise the interior decorating of 
them. He has a great deal of experi- 
ence for this sort of work : along with 
doing many large buildings in Zion 
he has done many of the ward houses 
for the Church, but the highlight of 
his career has been in doing the 
decorating of the Mesa, Arizona, and 




Elder J. Cash Smith 
Sister Vivian Smith 



to the Mahia District, where Elder 
Smith will be the new District Presi- 
dent. The Smiths come from Smith- 
field, Utah. 

On the Ventura, arriving in the 
country on the 12th of Dec, there was 
still another missionary who has an- 



the Hawaiian Temples. In coming to 
this land Elder De Witt has left nine 
children, who are all married, and 35 
grandchildren in America — some of 
whom he has not as yet seen. Elder 
De Witt's first assignment has been 
to the Whangarei District. 



70 



TE KARERE 



Home Missionary Released 

After fulfilling an honorable mission 
Elder Richard H. Kehoe was released 
last Dec. 2nd. Elder Kehoe is a con- 
vert to the Church and has returned 




Elder R. H. Kehoe 

to live in Maromaku with those who 
were the means of showing him the 
"light of the Gospel." Elder Kehoe 
spent his whole mission in the Wai- 
kato District. 

Work for the Dead Progresses 

Arriving the 26th of Dec. on the 
Aorangi after an enjoyable eight- 
month stay, the Joseph Hays (see 
Page 60) and Norman Masons (see 
Page 59) returned from their trip 
to Zion, where they were doing vicari- 
ous work for the dead in the Temples 
of the Lord. 

Leaving on Jan. 15th, aboard the 
Aorangi, there were some thirteen 
saints leaving to do this great vicari- 
ous work. This is the largest group 
to leave the country for this work in 
fifteen or more years. Those compris- 
ing the group were : Sis. Rangi 
Davies; Sis. Rauangi Hapuku of Te 
Hauke Branch, Hawke's Bay ; Philip 
Aspinall of Te Horoera Branch, 
Poverty Bay; Sis. Te Oraiti Aspinall 
of Te Horoera Branch, Poverty Bay ; 
Sis. Margaret Aspinall of Te Horoera 
Branch, Poverty Bay ; Sis. Francis K. 
Allen of Wanganui Branch, Taranaki ; 
Sis. Lucy Marsh of Heretaunga 



Branch, Hawke's Bay; Sis. Arapera 
Kauwhata of Ngawha Branch, Bay of 
Islands ; Hirini T. Heremaia of Kai- 
kohe Branch, Bay of Islands ; Hemi 
Whautere Witehira of Kaikohe 
Branch, Bay of Islands ; Te Hoko 
Whitu of Huria Branch, Bay of 
Plenty; Hemi Kupa of Ohiti Branch, 
Hawke's Bay; and Sis. Tauaraia 
Joyce of Utakura Branch, Bay of 
Islands. 

We of the mission wish all you 
good people a bon voyage and may 
you enjoy the work in which you 
are engaged to the fullest. 

Also leaving on the Aorangi is 
Sister Doreen Amaru who is taking 
her four children to Salt Lake to live 
for the next two years. There she will 
join her husband, Wi Pere, who is 
taking post graduate courses at the 
University of Utah. Upon their re- 
turn Bro. Amaru intends teaching at 
the new L.D.S. college being con- 
structed at Frankton Junction. 

We have a new cook here at Rem- 
uera. She is Polly Tarawhiti, who 
with her husband, Rue, have come 
from Porirua to live in the Mission 
Home. Rue is working on the new- 
chapel. Sister Polly is taking the 
place of Sister Joan Bush. Sister 
Bush did a fine job while she was 
here and our loss is another's gain. 

New "Te Karere" Editor 

Once more the editor of the Te 
Karere has been released and a new- 
editor sought. After being in the mis- 
sion office for six months, Elder" Stan- 
ley E. Richards has been released from 
the editorship and sent to Hamilton 
to be District President of the Wai- 
kato District. We wish to extend to 
Elder Richards our heartfelt thanks 
for the fine job he has done in giving 
us the type of articles which have 
helped the readers extensively. Our 
best wishes go to him in his new 
calling. 

Your new editor for the Tt Karere 
is Elder Bruce P. Sloan. 



February, 1952 



71 



The Sunday School In New Zealand 

By ELDER ROBERT M. GOODMAN 




SPECIAL MEETINGS . . . 

THE "Special Meeting" we will dis- 
cuss this month will be the 
Prayer Meeting-. The first and fore- 
most reason for this gathering is to 
condition the officers and teachers for 
his or her work in the Sunday School. 
It is here, along with personal prayers, 
that they seek out divine help in 
delivering their Gospel Message, be it 
'an actual lesson or be it through an 
inspirational meeting. Our teaching 
force is drawn from the congregation, 
thus making them inexperienced and 
new to the field of teaching and pre- 
siding. We come from every walk of 
life. Our livelihood may be made as 
a butcher, a baker, a store clerk, or 
a farmer, but whatever it may be most 
of us are not full-time teachers. After 
working at our source of income 
the other six days of the week we 
find it difficult to enter into the Sun- 
day School without divine help and 
purposeful preparation and do justice 
to the lesson and to those who have 
come to listen. Thus we must ask 
our Heavenly Father to help us. This 
runs along, of course, with careful 
preparation. "The Lord helps those 
who help themselves." This is the 
prime purpose of the Prayer Meeting. 
Remember that and you will find it 



hard to stray from the correct pro- 
cedure. This meeting is called the 

Prayer Meeting because it Is a Prayer 
Meeting and not a business meeting 
and should not be used as such. Busi- 
ness should be limited to a very mini- 
mum of routine matters only. 

TIME . . . 

(Quote 1949 Handbook) 

"If Priesthood meetings are held 
the hour immediately preceeding Sun- 
day School, one member of the super- 
intendency will be excused twenty 
minutes before the beginning of Sun- 
day School at which time the Prayer 
Meeting with the lady officers and 
teachers will convene." This meeting 
should start 15 minutes before Sunday 
School. Allowing 10 minutes for the 
actual meeting and 5 minutes for the 
officers and teachers to be in their 
places before the Sunday School 
starts. 

ORDER OF BUSINESS . . . 

1. Instructions by superintendency 
and minimum of routine matters 
and announcements for the day 
(this is a real opportunity to con- 
dition the teachers and officers with 
a rich, uplifting tone of voice and 
offer a real "God Bless You"). 

2. Sacrament Gem (recited by all). 

3. Song, or someone sing, or reading 
of inspirational bits of scripture. 

4. Offering of an appropriate prayer. 
The minute books and the S.S. 

Handbook does not call for an open- 
ing prayer in this meeting. The above 
is the correct procedure for the Sun- 
day School Prayer Meeting as out- 
lined in the S.S. Handbook and ac- 
cording to good Church procedure. 

SACRAMENT GEM 

(February and March) 
Purify our hearts, our Saviour; 

Let us j?o not far astray, 
That we may be counted worthy 

Of Thy Spirit, day by day. 



72 



TE KARERE 



L.D. PROPHETS SPEAK 



Excerpts from an address delivered at the 118th Semi- Annual 
General Conference on October 5th, 1945, in the Tabernacle. 

"The Sin of Ingratitude" 

By ELDER JOSEPH FIELDING SMITH 



I WANT to talk to you for a little 
while on the sin of ingratitude, 
which I consider to be the most pre- 
valent of all sins, for we are all guilty 
of it ; I am, you are, the people every- 
where upon the face of the earth are 
guilty of this sin in some degree. 

On one occasion, we read in the 
scriptures, a young lawyer came to the 
Saviour with a question, tempting Him 
and saying : Master, which is the great 
commandment in the law? Jesus said 
unto him, Thou shalt love the Lord 
thy God with all thy heart, and with 
all thy mind. This is the first and great 
commandment. And the second is like 
unto it : Thou shalt love thy neighbour 
as thyself. On these two command- 
ments hang all the law and the pro- 
phets (Matt. 22:36-40). 

If we observe this first law, the 
second naturally will follow, and, in 
fact, as the Saviour has pointed out, 
we will not be guilty of a breach of 
the law and the prophets in anything 
else. 

May I spend a few minutes present- 
ing before us what we all know to be 
the truth, that Jesus Christ came into 
this world to die. That was His mis- 
sion, and by that death upon the cross 
and through the shedding of His blood, 
to bring redemption, twofold, first, to 
redeem men from Adam's transgres- 
sion, to restore him again to life, to 
destroy death, gain the victory, which 
apparently Satan had won through the 
transgression of Adam. In some man- 
ner which I cannot fully explain and 
which you cannot fully explain, there 
was a necessity for an infinite atone- 
ment, a God dying for a fallen world, 
and that had to be by the shedding of 



blood, and His blood only could be 
shed to restore again that life which 
had been taken away, and bring back 
again to man the power to live for- 
ever. And through His death there 
comes to us universally, to every living 
creature, a resurrection of the dead. 
The Lord does not ask us whether 
we want to be redeemed from death 
or not. We were not responsible for 
it, and therefore, it is not held against 
us ; it is not to our charge. ( See I Cor. 
15:22.) 

That is the free gift of God the 
Eternal Father, through Jesus Christ, 
His Son, to every living soul, men, 
women, children, from the fall of 
Adam to the end of time. 

Now that is a wonderful gift. It 
comes without our asking, it comes to 
the wicked as well as to the righteous. 
In the fifth chapter of John the Lord 
speaks to the people of the time com- 
ing, and He says it was already here, 
when the dead should hear the voice 
of the Son of God and they who heard 
should live. 

Here is the word of the Lord Him- 
self that He was going to carry the 
message to the dead ; they would all 
hear ; they who were willing to re- 
ceive that message of truth and abide 
in it should have everlasting life, but 
they who would not receive it or who 
were not worthy to receive it should 
come forth just the same in the resur- 
rection to receive condemnation, but 
the resurrection was to come to all 
universally. 

He redeemed mankind from death 
universally, and He has redeemed men 
from their own sins on conditions i>\ 
their repentance, and they will not be 



February, 1952 



73 



redeemed from their sins unless they 
do repent and accept Him and wash 
their garments white in His blood and 
endure in faith to the end. It is upon 
those terms that salvation comes. 

Mow, when we stop to think that 
the Son of God created this world ; all 
things, the scriptures say, were made 
by Him, and when we think that He 
cam to this world with that mission 
which He accepted before He was 
born of Bethlehem, and by the shed- 
ding of His blood gave us life that we 
might rise in the resurrection to live 
forever; and when He, by the shed- 
ding of His blood has offered unto us 
the remission of our sins and eternal 
life, through obedience to the Gospel 
— do you not think that we owe Him 
something in return? We owe Him 
everything. 

Paul says : "We were bought with 
a price." That price was the blood of 
Jesus Christ, and we are not our own. 
Oh, if we could only understand that 
by the shedding of His blood, he 
bought us. We belong to Him. He has 
a right to tell us what to do and what 
not to do, and to command us to keep 
His commandments ; however, we have 
our agency, and we act for ourselves. 

We get into the habit of thinking, 
I suppose, that His great suffering 
was when He was nailed to the cross 
by His hands and His feet and was 
left there to suffer until He died. As 
excruciating as that pain was, that 
was not the greatest suffering that He 
had to undergo, for in some way which 
I cannot understand, but which I ac- 
cept on faith, and which you must 
accept on faith, He carried on His 
back the burden of the sins of the 
whole world. It is hard enough for 
me to carry my own sins. How is it 
with you? And yet He had to carry 
the sins of the whole world, as our 
Saviour and the Redeemer of a fallen 
world, and so great was His suffer- 
ing before He ever went to the cross, 
we are informed, that blood oozed 
from the pores of His body. 



And here is what He has said to 
the Church : For, behold, I, God, have 
Buffered these things for all, that they 
might not suffer if they would repent ; 
but if they would not repent they 
must suffer even as I ; which suffering 
caused Myself, even God, the greatest 
of all, to tremble because of pain, and 
to bleed from every p<>re, and to suffer 
both body and spirit — and would that 
I might not drink the bitter cup, and 
shrink — nevertheless, glory be to the 
Father, and I partook and finished My 
preparations unto the children of men 
(D. & C. 19:16). 

Now, when He said that if we do 
not repent we will have to suffer even 
as He did, He had no reference to 
being nailed to a cross, but it was the 
torment of mind, of spirit, that He 
had reference to, before He ever got 
to the cross, and if men will not re- 
pent, they will have to suffer even as 
He suffered. 

Now brethren, He has asked us to 
keep His commandments. He says they 
are not grievous, and there are so 
many of us who are not willing to do 
it. I am speaking now generally of the 
people of the earth. We are not willing 
to do it. That certainly is ingratitude. 
We are ungrateful. Every member of 
this Church that violates the Sabbath 
Day, that is not honest in the paying 
of his tithing, that will not keep the 
Word of Wisdom, that wilfully 
violates any of the other command- 
ments the Lord has given us is un- 
grateful to the Son of God, and when 
ungrateful to the Son of God is un- 
grateful to the Father who sent Him. 
If our Saviour would do so much for 
us, how in the world is it that we are 
not willing to abide by His command- 
ments which are not grievous, which 
do not cause us any suffering if we 
will only keep them? And yet, people 
break the Word of Wisdom; they re- 
fuse to attend to their duties as officers 
and members in the Church ; many of 
them stay away from meeting the Lord 



74 



TE KARERE 



has called upon them to support. They 
follow their own desires if they are in 
conflict with the commandments of 
the Lord. 

If we understood our position and 
we loved the Lord our God with all 
our heart, with all our soul, and with 
all our mind, or, as He has put it in 
the revelation given to us in these 
days : "Wherefore, I give unto them a 



commandment, saying thus : Thou 
shalt love the Lord thy God with all 
thy heart, with all thy might, mind 
and strength ; and in the name of 
Jesus Christ thou shalt serve Him. 
Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thy- 
self" (D. & C. 59:5, 6), then we 
would keep His commandments ; when 
we will not do this, I tell you, my 
brethren and sisters, we show ingrati- 
tude to Jesus Christ. 



IS IT WRONG TO DOUBT? (Continued from Page 64) 



nature do their bidding, knowing well 
that they will be victorious ; and that 
more knowledge will come to them, if 
sought, to yield new power. 

On the other hand, the stagnant 
doubter, one content with himself, un- 
willing to make the effort, to pay the 
price of discovery, inevitably reaches 
unbelief and miry darkness. His doubts 
grow like poisonous mushrooms in 
the dim shadows of his mental and 
spiritual chambers. At last, blind like 
the mole in his burrow, he usually 
substitutes ridicule for reason, and in- 
dolence for labour. The simplest truth 
is worth the sum of all such doubts. 
He joins the unhappy army of doubt- 
ers who, weakened by their doubts, 
have at all periods of human history 
allowed others, men of faith, to move 
the world into increasing light. 

Faith is practically the opposite of 
doubt. Faith rests securely upon 
''evidences" and "assurances." Note 
the definition by the Apostle Paul : 
"Faith is the assurance of things 
hoped for, the evidence of things not 
seen." (Hebrews 11:1, as rendered by 
Joseph Smith, Jnr., the Seer, Holy 
Scriptures, Inspired Revision.) Faith 
knows, and goes forth courageously 
to use knowledge in the affairs of men. 



It declares itself the master of things ; 
it lays mountains low ; it lifts valleys ; 
it promotes the welfare of man. 

Joseph Smith is an excellent ex- 
ample of proper doubt. The ministers 
of his day were contending for the, 
membership of the boy. He went to 
God for help, received it, and doubt 
disappeared. From that day on, doubt 
did not reappear. His doubt was lost 
in the desired knowledge he gained 
from proper inquiry. So may every 
man do. 

The unknown universe, material, 
mental, spiritual, is greater than the 
known. If we seek, we shall forever 
add knowledge to knowledge. That 
which seems dark today will be crystal 
clear tomorrow. Eternal progress 
means the unending elucidation of 
things not known' or understood today. 

No ! Doubt is not wrong unless it 
becomes an end of life. It rises to high 
dignity when it becomes an active 
search for, and practice of truth. 

Doubt which immediately leads to 
honest inquiry, and thereby removes 
itself, is wholesome. But that doubt 
which feeds and grows upon itself, 
and, with stubborn indolence, breeds 
more doubt, is evil. 



■ ■ ■ 

Overheard at a milliner's: A zvije asking her husband, "Isn't it just 
too sweet, dear?" and the husband replying, "No — it's just too dear, sweet." 



February, 1952 



75 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO 1 TE HITORI TE HAHI 

(Essentials 
in Church History) 

Translated by George R. Hall 







Te Hui Tuarua a te Hahi 

MANGAI tonu ki nga whakari- 
tenga i oti, i tu te hui a te hahi 
ki Wheiete i te 26 o Hepetema. E 
warti nga kaumatua, e wha nga Piriti, 
erua nga kai Whakaako i rokohanga 
i te wa i puare ai te hui. E toru tekau 
ma rima nga tangata kua uru i tena 
wa. huihui katoa e ono tekau ma rua. 
Xa Hohepa Mete i whakapuare te 
hui ki te imoi. i muri i korerotia e ia 
te rima o nga Upoko o Ihaia, he 
korero mo te kohikohinga, a i whai 
kupu ano ia mo taua take. I pa ano 
nga korero i te hui nei mo te "Kohatu" 
matakite a Hairama Peeti, a i roto i 
nga uiui ka tau te korero a Hairama 
Peeti me etahi atu i reira kia hate- 
peatia atu taua kohatu ; a i tena wha- 
kaotinga, ka hoki mai ano te hauora, 
me te koa ki te hunga nei. E toru 
nga ra e tu ana te hui, i tau iho ai 
te wairua o te Ariki. He maha nga 
take i oti, a ko te hunga i iriiria i mua 
atu i whakaungia ki konei Itukua akc 
ano hoki etahi inoi tapae mo Oriwa 
Kautere raua ko Pita Whitima, ta- 
maiti. hei manaaki mo raua i te mea 
kua karangatia raua ki nga Ramana. 
He mea karanga A-whakakitenga a 
Pita Whitima, tamatiti, ki tenei mi- 
hona, i roto i tenei hui. Ite pakaruta- 
nga ka whakaritea kia hui ano a te 
tahi o Hanuere 1831 ; a whakaotia ana 
ko Rawiri Whitima hei pupuri i nga 



tuhituhinga, I oti ano te iriiri o etahi 
i tenei hui, a he maha ano i tapaea 
ki etahi turanga. 

Te Karanga Kia Hipa Pitahana, 
Me Parei P. Parata 

He maha tonu i whakaatu i o ratou 
hiahia kia haere tahi ratou i te tira 
o Oriwa Kautere raua ko Pita Whi- 
tima, tamaiti, ki nga Ramana, a ta- 
paea atu ana tenei take ki te ariki, 
Mana e whakaatu mai, a te whaka- 
kitenga iho a Te Ariki, tuturu ana 
kia haere a Hipa Pitahana raua ko 
Parei P. Parata ki nga Ramana. Ko 
Hipa Pitahana tetahi o te hunga i 
iriiria tuatahitia a he kaumatua ia i 
te wa i tu ai te hui tuatahi a te Hahi. 
Ko Parei P. Parata he tangata noho 
i te koraha i nga wahi ngahere o 
Ohaio, kaore i tawhiti rawa i te pa 
o Kiriwirene (Cleveland) Nona e 
haereere ana i nga mihona a te ropu 
Kameraaiti (Cambellites) me tana 
haerenga hoki ki tana kainga tawhito 
i te Kauti o Koramapia (Columbia) 
Nu Iaaka, tona mohiotanga ki te 
pukapuka a Moramona ; na Hamurini 
(Hamlin) he minita Paputihi i kuhu 
ki roto i ana ringaringa. A i te mea 
ka oti i a ia te korero o tetahi wahi 

te pukapuka nei ka taka ke ana 
whakaaro, a haere ana a Parei P. 
Parata ki Manaahita (Manchester) 
kia kite i te Poropiti i a Hohepa Mete. 

1 reira ka tutaki kia Hairama Mete, 



76 



TE KARERE 



a na tenei a Parei i ako ki nga tikanga 
o te rongapai, a i hoatu ano hoki i 
tetahi pukapuka a Moromona. Ite 
mutunga o nga ra o Akuhata ka haere 
tahi a Parei P. Parata raua ko Hai- 
rama Mete ki Wheiete, i reira ka 
iriiria a Parata e Oriwa Kautere Mete 
ite wa o te marama o Hepetema. I 
muri tata iho ka whakapangia ia hei 
kaumatua i konei ka maro tana haere 
ki te kainga o tana papa ka timata 
tana kauwhau i te rongopai ki ona 
matua, me ana hoa tane o tona tama- 
rikitanga. Ko tana taina ko Ohana, 
(Orson) tekau ma iwa nga tail i 
tere tonu te whakarongo ki nga 
korero, a uru ana ki te Hahi. Ite 
hokinga o Parei P. Parata ki Wheiete, 
karangatia ana ia i ma roto i te wha- 
kakitenga kia haere tahi ia me Oriwa 
Kautere ki nga tahataha o Mihiuri ki 
waenganui onga Ramana. 

Te Whanatutanga 
Onga Mihingare 

Ite ngahuru o te tau 1830, ka wha- 
katika te hunga i karangatia nei kia 
haere ki nga rohe ki te Uru (West), 
tokowha ratou mihingare, a ta ratou 
mahi, he kauwhau i te rongopai ki te 
hunga katoa i tupono mai kia ratou 
i te huarahi. Ka tata ki Pawharo 
(Buffalo), wahi o Nu Iaaka, ka peka 
ratou ki te kainga o nga Iniana Kate- 
rauku (Catteraugua), ka mahue iho i 
konei e rua nga pukapuka Moromona, 
ki nga tangata e mohio ana ki te 
korero pukapuka o tenei hapu Iniana ; 
atu i konei, maro tonu ta ratou haere 
i to ratou huarahi i karia mai e ratou 
i te kainga. Nawai ra ka tae ratou 
ki Katarene, Ohaio, i tetahi wahi e 
tata atu ana ki te kainga o te kau- 
matua Parata, ka noho i reira mo 
tetahi wa ahua roa. I matau a Parei 
P. Parata kia Hirini Rikitona, ko ia 
nei tetahi o nga kai tira i te ropu 
"Akonga" i whakaturia nei e ratou ko 
Areka Kamera (CampbeW) me Waata 
Kati (Walter Scott). Ratou tokotoru 
i ta ratou ropu i whakaara ai, I wha- 
kapono ratou ki tc tikanga o te "wha- 
kapono," o te "ripeneta," me te "iriiri" 
hei murunga hara ; otira, ko te paipera 



anake ta ratou i whakapono ai hei 
arataki, hei arahi i te tangata ki te 
oranga tonutanga. A i te mea kua 
tino ngoto ki roto i o ratou whakaaro, 
"kua tino kotiti rawa te ao karakia 
ki wahi ke o te huarahi tika" whakatu 
ana ratou tokotoru i to ratou tikanga 
i runga i te hiahia nui i te whakaaro 
e tino mahi tika ana ratou, i a ratou 
e nana nei kia patata atu a ratou mahi 
ki nga tikanga i mahia e nga akonga 
a te Ariki. Ite kaha o Hirini Rikitona 
ki te kauwhau, he maha tonu nga 
wairua o ratou i whakapono ki tenei 
tikanga. 

I kaha rawa te whakapono o Parei 
P. Parata, tera e nui rawa o te hunga 
akonga hou nei e aru nai, tohe ana ia 
ki ona hoa kia roa ratou e noho ana 
i tenei wahi o Ohaio i runga i te 
whenua rahui o te rohe kite Uru 
(West). 

Hirini Rikitona 

Ko te whare i peka tuatahi ai ratou 
i Menetoa (Mentor) ko te kainga 
tonu o Hirini Rikitona. Ka mutu a 
ratou mihi kia ratou ka hoatu e nga 
kaumatua i haere atu ra he kape o te 
pukapuka Moromona; me te whaka- 
marama atu ano, "he pukapuka tenei, 
ara he tuhituhinga no nga iwi o 
Xehera i noho i Amerika ; a kua wha- 
katuria ano e te Ariki Tana hahi ki 
runga i te mata o te whenua i runga i 
te mana o te tohungatanga tapu. Ka- 
tahi ano, no tenei, te rongo o Hirini 
Rikitona ki te whakahua o te "Puka- 
puka a Moromona," me te ingoa o 
Hohepa Mete;" ana whakautu ki.nga 
korero atu" ki a ia, "kei a ia tonu te 
Paipera, a e whakapono ana ia ko 
tenei te kupu a te Atua ; otira ko te 
pukapuka a Moromona, kei te ruarua 
tonu ana whakaaro, he mana Atua, 
kei taua pukapuka, Kaore ia i pirangi 
ki te tautohe ki nga kaumatua, e ngari 
i homai tana kupu whakatau, "ka 
korerotia e ia taua pukapuka." 

Ite kaha o te tono atu a nga kau- 
matua, ka whakaae a Hirini Rikitona 
ki te tuku mai i tana whare-karakia 
hei karakiatanga mo nga kaumatua 



February, 1952 



77 



nei. He maha rawa o te htmga i luii 
mai ki nga karakia, me to ratou kaha 
ki te whakarongo ki nga Icuptl korero 
a nga kaumatna. I tc mutunga «» nga 
karakia, ka whai kupu a Hirini Riki- 
tona ki te iwi i hui mai, kia tino kalia 
ta ratou wananga i nga take tino wha- 
kamiharo kua rongo nei ratou, kei 
tupono he tino tika rawa ana korero. 
I roto i te tino hohonutanga o ona 
whakaaro, me te pirangi ona ki te 
matauranga, ka korerotia e ia te Puka- 
puka a Moromona, me te tapae atu 
ona i ana inoi kia arahina ona mahara 
e te Atua. I roto o nga wiki e rua, 
ka huaki mai te whakaaturanga ki a 
ia, i ahei ai ia ki te whakapuaki i 
tana korero, "E hara i te kikokiko, i 
tc toto ranei i whakaatu mai ki au, 



engari na tokn Matua i tc Rangi." I 
iriiria raua ko tana hoa wahine, he 
tokomaha ano hoki o roto o taua ropu 
"Akonga," i urn mai. 

I kaha rawa te Otinga nga mahi 
a nga Kaumatua i roto i nga rohe 
o Katirana (Kirtland). Ite ao i te 
po, e karapotingia ana ratou e nga 
iwi i hui mai ; a he pakupaku te wa 
hei whakanga mo nga kaumatua. I 
koa rawa te nuinga o te hunga i wha- 
karongo ki nga kupu kauwhau ; otira 
he maha ano i haere mai, he whakahe 
te hiahia, ki nga mahi a te Ariki. 
Kaore i roa ka tu nga peka o te hahi 
hei tatutanga iho mo nga Wairua o 
te kaute kotahi mano, hei taanga ma- 
nawa mo enei kua whakapono nei. 



Seek \j& Jlzototittfy 

WHY SOME PEOPLE ARE LEFT-HANDED 



THICH hand do you use for 
writing, sewing, cutting, and 
hitting balls? If you just naturally do 
these things with your left hand, you 
are said to be left-handed. 

Whenever you use either hand, you 
do so because the brain has sent a 
message along the nerves, passing 
down the spinal cord, to the muscles 
of your hand, telling them to contract. 

There are special places, or centres, 
in the brain from which these nerves 
arise, and the centre on the right side 
of the brain is connected with the left 
hand, while that on the left side is 
connected with the right hand. 

Most babies are born with the centre 
on the left side better developed than 
the right, so that, as they begin to 



learn to do things w-ith their hands, 
they nautrally use the right hand most. 
As they grow older and go to school, 
children are always taught to write 
and draw with their right hand most, 
and so the centre on the left side of 
their brain develops more and more 
and it becomes quite natural for them 
to be right-handed. But some babies 
are born with the centre of the right 
side of their brain better developed 
than their left, and they, if left to 
themselves, would use their left hand 
most. These children usually do learn, 
with some difficulty, to write with their 
right hand, but very often they find 
it easier to hold tennis racquets and 
cricket bats, or perhaps to sew or eat, 
with their left hand, and they may 
remain "left-handed" in these ways all 
their lives. 



78 



TE KARERE 



Why You See Dark Spots After Looking At The Sun 



HAVE you ever stared up at the 
blazing sun and then wondered 
why, for a little time, dark spots ap- 
peared wherever you looked? 

If you have a camera you will 
know that at the back of it there is a 
screen on which is thrown the image, 
or likeness, of any object placed in 
front of it. Your eye is in many ways 
like a camera. When you look at the 
full moon, for example, that is the 
object in front of your "camera." Its 
image appears on a sensitive screen, 
called the retina, at the back of your 
eye, and you, with your brain, recog- 
nise it as a round, bright patch. 



The retina is a very thin layer, but 
under a microscope it can be seen 
to contain rows of very special cells, 
shaped like tiny rods and cones. These 
"rods" and "cones" contain a colouring 
substance which becomes bleached 
when very strong light falls upon it 
and recovers its colour when the light 
is taken away. When you look directly 
at the sun, the strong rays of light 
which enter the eye and reach the re- 
tina produce a strong bleaching of the 
colour in the rods and cones, and this 
takes a little time to recover. During 
this time, the rods and cones, where 
they are bleached, are not able to carry 
the sensation of light to your brain, 
and, therefore, you seem to be seeing 
dark spots. 



Why Birds Don't Get Killed When They Sit On Live Wires 



JHAT do we mean by a "live 
wire?" Let us think of any 
regular supply of electricity for light- 
ing lamps, heating electric fires or 
driving motors. There are generally 
two mains. One of these is, for reasons 
of safety, is connected with the ground, 
or "earthed," so that the electrician 
can handle it without danger when 
testing to see that all is in order. The 
other main is very carefully separated 
from the earth or "insulated" by sup- 
ports of porcelain, and by coverings 
of rubber (with outer protection or 
"armour") inside the house. This is 
the "live wire," and electricity will 
pass through any conductor, or partial 
conductor, connected between the live 
main and the earth. In the house the 



connection is always made first to the 
switch, and from the switch to the 
lamp or other piece of apparatus, 
whose far end is joined to the earthed 
main. Of course, the part of the switch 
which is handled is also most carefully 
insulated. Closing the switch completes 
the circuit, and the electric current 
rushes through the lamp from the live 
main to earth. If by misfortune we 
were to touch the live main, since we 
are usually standing on the ground, 
more or less well earthed, the electric 
current would pass through us and ad- 
minister a shock, of severity depending 
on the voltage of the mains. But the 
bird can rest on the overhead live 
wire safely, because the circuit through 
him to the earth remains incompleted. 



"Good manners," said Emerson, "are made up of petty sacrifices." 
February, 1952 79 



FEATURING THE DISTRICTS 



By ELDER MILLARD B. RICE 
Claresholm, Alberta, Canada 




AS we look over New Zealand we 
find in the Taranaki District two 
beauties of nature, Mount Egmont and 
the Wanganui River. So also it is that 
we have two fully organized branches 
to go with them, the Manaia Branch, 
under Bro. Turake Manu, and the 
Wanganui Branch, under the guidance 
of Bro. Robert McCarthy. We have 
had a branch working in Taihape, but 
since many of the members left, we 
have not had enough leaders to carry 
on that branch. 

During the convention week re- 
cently, in the Wellington District, we 
had several representatives from this 
district attend, and they have brought 
back with them some very stimulating 
activities. Right now we are working 
on a floor show which combines the 
two branches, using eight couples 
dressed all in pink. We wish to put it 
on at our Hui Pariha to be held at 
Manaia on February 29th to March 
2nd, as a pre-requisite to putting it 
on at Hui Tail. It was last November 
that we had our M.I. A. Spring Festi- 
val in Manaia which brought some 



good comments, by non-members, on 

the conducting of such a clean, whole- 
some recreational event. 

It isn't Christmas without a tree all 
decked out with gifts, ornaments and 
imitation snow, so we had one for our 
Primary children. They put on an im- 
pressive play of the birth of our 
Saviour, thus bringing to our minds 
this memorable day and showing the 
important part that little children play 
in our lives. 

As we know it is the Church doc- 
trine to "gather to Zion," and we are 
doing our part here ; gathering closer 
together by having a carload of repre- 
sentatives visit the other branch every 
fortnight for our Sunday worship. 
With closer contact we have grown 
together and stronger and are becom- 
ing "one even as our Father in Heaven 
and His Son are one." Although we 
have had 20 baptisms last year the dis- 
trict is smaller than it was at this 
period a year ago. Some of our con- 
verts have moved into the Wellington 
District and the shifting of two other 
families leave many vacancies in the 
district. Brother Thomas Baker and 
family have gone to "a land choice 
above all other lands" (Zion-Canada), 
and Sister Francis Allen has gone to 
"the House of the God of Jacob" at 
Hawaii, under the guiding hand of 
Sister R. Davies. In one afternoon we 
were able to gather Sister Allen's 
passport and pictures, income tax 
clearances, money and tickets besides 
packing and helping her get away. 

We have finished tracting the Durie 
Hill area here in Wanganui and have 
several fine investigators, but have 



80 



TE KARERE 



been handicapped without a chapel, in 
bringing them out to a meeting. To 
help with this we are building up 
funds in both branches towards build- 
ing a chapel and know that by small 
means the Lord brings about His 
mighty works. 



And now, when we have to leave 
this beautiful panorama which we 
elders call "home" in Xew Zealand, 
we hope that others following us may 
enjoy the many wonderful experiences 
that we have had while being here. 



Wairaia Distract 



By ELDER ROBERT B. FOX 
2596 Fruitland Drive, Ogden, Utah. 



r E of the Wairau District take 
great pleasure in the opportun- 
ity of reporting on the activities of 
our District. The Wairau District has 
not been as well known in the past as 
many of the districts of the North 
Island. The stronghold, or main body 
of the Church has generally been up 
North ; however, in the past few 
months, the Church in this district has 
been greatly strengthened. Not especi- 
ally by converts, but by the present 
members starting to attend their meet- 
ings regularly and accepting responsi- 
bilities. Although our progress may 
not be outstanding, it is quite notice- 
able. 

There are now four missionaries 
labouring in the district, two of which 
are in Blenheim and two in Nelson. 
The centre and headquarters of the 
district is in "Sunny Nelson," known 
to vacationers as the garden city, for 
the climate is excellent and the ground 
fertile, which also is the reason so 
much fruit is raised in the surround- 
ing area. If I'm not too much mis- 



taken, I believe the Wairau holds the 
New Zealand record for the total 
hours of sunshine per year. 

As stated, Nelson is the centre of 
Church activity in the district, and 
has a fully organized branch. Our Nel- 
son Relief Society sisters are doing a 
good work and have completed several 
quilts. We hope they have set an ex- 
ample so the other sisters of the dis- 
trict will follow. 

In GrovetOWll we now have a re- 
cently organized branch of the Church 
which we hope will grow stronger in 



February, 1952 



81 



the future. There is also a Home Sun- 
day Sehool at Picton where one of 
the sisters is doing a fine job teach- 
ing the youngsters the principles of 
the Gospel. Last but not leasl we have 
a fairly large Sunday School org 
tion at D'Urville Island. If things go 
well, before too long we may be able 
to organize a branch at the Island; 
for the present this has been held up 
because of shearing and other activi- 
ties. In the early days of the Church 
D'Urville Island was the stronghold 
of these parts. Many of the m< 
lived there and early-day elders wen. 
also stationed right on the Island. In 
New Zealand history D'Urville Island 
holds a place of prominence also, as 
some of the old Maori battles took 
place around there and much Maori 
folk lore come from this well-known 
place. Recently, on the 29th and 30th 
December, a Hui Pariha was held on 
the Island at which President Ottley 
and family attended. Although their 
stay was short we appreciated the 



counsel and advice given during Tu- 
muaki's first visit to the South Island. 

The fruit season is at hand and that 
means canning. Tins have been ord- 
ered by several of the members. They 
plan to haw some fruit on hand, which 
the Church has always advocated an 1 
Tumuaki Young stressed so strongly. 
We have in the district a hand-canniniz 
machine which is quite handy and will 
be at the disposal of the members. 

As of late there hasn't been too 
much proselyting around the Nelson 
area but the elders in Blenheim have 
s me very good friends and quite a 
few serious investigators of the Church 
and the Gospel of Jesus Christ. 

In closing we would like to take 
this opportunity to wish all the readers 
of the Te Karere our best wishes for 
the years ahead, and may we go forth 
more determined than before, to over- 
come our weaknesses and to be strong 
in the work of the Lord. 




No matter what happens there is always someone who knew it would. 



Charity should begin at home. What causes so much trouble is that 
so many people don't stay home long enough to begin it. 



Be hearty in your approbation and lavish in your praise. 
82 TE KARERE 



DON'T QUIT 



When things go wrong, as they sometimes will, 
When the road you're trudging seems all up hill, 
IV lien the funds are low and the debts are high. 
And you want to smile, but you liave to sigh, 
When care is pressing you down a bit. 
Rest if you must, but don't you quit. 

Life is queer with its twists and turns. 

As every cue of us sometimes Icarus, 

And many a failure turns about, 

When he might have won had he stuck it out; 

Don't give up, though the pace seems slow — 

You may succeed with another blow. 

Often tlie goal is nearer than 

It seems to a faint and faltering man ; 

OfiCii the straggler has given up 

linen he might have captured the victor's cup; 

And lie learned, too late, when the night slipped dozen 

PIozc close he was to the golden crown. 

Success is failure turned inside out — 

The silver tint of the clouds of doubt. 

And you can never tell how close you are. 

It may be near when it seems afar; 

So stick to the fight when you're hardest hit — 

It's when things seem worse that you musu't quit. 

— Author Unknown. 



M.A.C. Old Boys' Association 



BUILDING FUND REPORT 

IT APPEARS that the appeal for funds by 
the above group has never been fully under- 
stood. So here it is. 

We appeal to EVERY WAGE EARNING 
MEMBER to donate 1 - per week for the build- 
ing of the school where your children will be 
educated. You may not have children who are 
school age now but what about the future? 
Where will your children and your children's 
children get a better education than at a school 
directed by the Spirit of the Lord? 

In view of the drive in purpose, time, 
amount and method of payment, etc., we have 
decided to extend the closing month (the drive 
was started in September and was to conclude 
at Hui Tau) until the month of June, 1952. 

METHOD: Pay in your 1 - weekly (or 
total amount for 6 months) to your Branch 
President or those designated by your D.P. and 
he will receipt you therefore. 

Kia Kaha Mai and GIVE!! 

SPECIAL GREETINGS to all M.A.C. Old 
Boys from the Oldest M.A.C. Boy, Tumuaki 
Ottley. It is his wish for members of the as- 
sociation to have as its interest and objective 
the building of the new school. 

No reita— E OHO— MARANGA— TAKA- 
TU, in other words, BE ON THE ALERT. 

Send your name and address to T. Clarke, 
82 Wellington St., Auckland, and he will send 
your agenda for M.A.C. meeting regarding 
"Ways and means by which you can help the 
NEW SCHOOL/' 






In \\(jjii4^ 
'U J ^v/ 

THE MESSENGER 




4^ 



ti 



Ti 



I J 1 I J I I i 

# * f 



MARCH 



1952 






MONTHLY MAGAZINE OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 



Just a little act of kindness. 
Just a little word of cheer, 

Help to make our liznng pleasant. 
Minimize both doubt and fear. 

Jesus said. "Be meek and lowly," 
And He governs men with love, 
Just as God, our Heavenly Father, 

Governs in that Court above. 

Jesus never hurt the feelings 

Of a person, (/real or small; 
Always He teas kind and friendly — 

We're assured He loves us all. 

All the world is now in turmoil. 

Caused by gross unfriendliness. 
Peaee will follow Christian living — 

Be the watchword Kindliness. 

— Lizzie O. Borgeson White 



THIS MONTH'S COVER: The only known photograph 
to be in existence of THE NAUVOO TEMPLE. 



TE KARERE 



Established 1907 



VoUme 46 



Number 3 



March, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley 

Grover D. Jensen 

Bruce P. Sloan 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) 
John A. Osburn 



Tumuaki Alihana 
Hekeretari o te Mihana 

Etita 

. . Kaiwhakamaori 
Mission Recorder 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 



"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 
Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; £2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 



(Printed for transmissk 



in New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



CONTENTS 



Editorial: 

From the Editor's Pen 

Special Features: 

Evidence for Belief 

Wise Counsel Not Heeded Then As Now 

Seek Ye Learnnig 

Church Features: 

The President's Page 

Women's Corner 

A Special Request From the Mission Seen 

Evidences and Reconciliations 

This World Church and Its People 

The Sunday School in New Zealand 

L.D. Prophets Si>< 

And These Signs Shall Follow 

Here and There in the Mission: 

Featuring the Districts 

Here and There in the Mission 

Tekihana Maori: 

Ko Wai Ma Nga Kai Aralii Apopo . , 
Nct Pou-Tokomanawa <> Roto i Te Hitorl 



102 
104 
106 
118 




y i 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE 

He Kupu Aroha 



By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 



THERE is a question in my mind 
as I travel up and down through 
the Mission (through the Church, for 
that matter) whether there should be 
justification in one saying: "This is a 
rich man's home or this is a poor 
man — this is a Maori house or this 
is a Pakeha home." 

I have concluded, since I am not a 
rich man, and since I have a home 
and since I have visited and studied 
many homes of varying degrees of 
wealth and poverty, that such a dis- 
tinction should not exist. 

There are very few people, certainly 
very few Latter-day Saint people, who 
are too poor to buy a supply of soap 
or who have not access to an abund- 
ance of water, who could not, by care- 
ful planning, afford a board or two 
of timber, or a gallon or two of paint 
or a piece or two of glass for the 
needed repair of the home they love. 
Neither are there, I am quite sure, 
many people among us who could not 
save enough to buy a set of new 
window curtains or a piece of linoleum 
or a few new shrubs and a pound of 
grass seed. Not all at once, of course, 
but if planned ahead, the sacrifice of 
ten ice cream cones would buy a piece 
of glass for the poor little window 
that has been out for ages, and the 
picture money of the family for one 
month would put new curtains on the 
front windows. What Dad lost on one 
horse race would have painted the 



house and the money that is spent 
for things that the Lord commanded 
us not to use would buy enough lino- 
leum to cover all New Zealand. 

A few pencil figures would be very 
interesting and educational. I'll make 
you some, one of these days. For the 
present, let me tell you a true story. 

Right near my home lives a little 
old lady who is about the happiest 
little old lady I know. 

Some twenty-five years ago her 
husband died and left her with a large 
family and a mortgage on their home, 
and that was about all. There was no 
Government DOLE or SUBSIST- 
ENCE, not even the Church Welfare 
Programme. But the Gospel was 
there and she was just humble enough 
to believe that the Lord meant what 
He said and that He keeps His 
promises to the faithful. 

Her home was very plain, but good. 
She had a little piece of land which 
took much work to cultivate and care 
for, and she had the good sense to 
teach her children to work and to 
work with them. Of course, the 
brethren and sisters gave her a hand 
occasionally but she asked for no 
favours. She was first to pay her 
tithing and was always on hand with 
other donations in proportion to her 

(Continued on Page 96) 



88 



TE KARERE 



■ 



Wtonm's Cvmm, 






By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 



1 ATTENDED a meeting last even- 
ing that was most inspirational. At 
this meeting fourteen women were set 
apart as workers in the Relief Society, 
each one having a special job to do. 
Three members of the Priesthood 
came to give these sisters a blessing 
fitted to each individual need. These 
brethren brought a most wonderful 
spirit with them and as they left the 
meeting the sisters were so impressed 
there was silence for several minutes. 
The spirit of humility was there, 
clothed with a new strength and a 
desire to go forth and do their job 
with courage and efficiency. These 
women have realized that where much 
is given much is expected 

All branches of the mission are not 
fortunate enough to have a full organ- 
ization on account of numbers, but 
the Relief Society programme is flex- 
ible enough that few in number ran 
enjoy it and have the Spirit of tin- 
Lord to help them, for He lias said: 

"That if two of you shall agree on 
earth as touching anything thai they 
shall ask. it shall be done for them of 
my Father which is in Heaven. For 
where two or three are gathered to- 
gether in my name, ///<•>■<• am 1 in the 
midst of them" I Man. 18:19 20. 1 It 
atifying to Know the listen all 



over the mission want to follow the 
lessons and the outline as nearly as 
possible under their circumstances, and 
now that the magazines are coming 
through better we should all enjoy our 
work more. 

Let's encourage our young women 
to come to Relief Society. They can 
help with the music and take part in 
the lessons. They are the ones who 
have the education and can contribute 
so much to the organization. In turn 
the older women can teach these young 
folks to sew and mend and be good 
homemakers. 

By the time this copy ^i the 7V 
Karere reaches you you will have 
finished the lemons in the July 1951 
magazine and will he ready for the 
.\ulmi-i number. We hope there i> at 

least one copy of the lessons for the 
month of March. We have no more 
August issues lure at the V 

1 Ionic. 

We hope yOU are all leanc 

I onie. Let I'- Sum an Evening 
Hymn," Page 352 in the blue hymn 

hook, to he sung at 1 lui Tan. 
Don't fol 

Birthday, March 17th. 



) "a nnis! take joy with yon 01 

March, 1952 



'From the Editors' Pee . . . 

Riches Vs. Eternal Life 



THE first of the ten commandments 
was that we should have no other 
gods before the Lord our God ( Exodus 
20:3). All of us realize this and we 
say we don't have any other gods. 
This may be true to the extent that 
we don't pray to these other gods ; 
but many of us do have other gods 
which we are devoted to, and worship. 
We may be conscious of our worship- 
ping these gods or we may worship 
them unconsciously, but whatever the 
case may be if we are worshipping 
them we are not obeying the com- 
mandment of the Lord. 

The specific "god" I have in mind 
at present is the consideration and 
devotion we give to the riches of the 
world. Of course, we have to have 
the means of living, and that comfort- 
ably, but what is meant is that we 
should not be attracted to or try to 
acquire an abundance of the riches of 
this world. Why shouldn't we seek 
to be rich, you might ask? We can 
find our answer in the First Epistle 
of Paul to Timothy, "They that will 
(are minded to) be rich fall into 
temptation and a snare, and into many 
foolish and hurtful lusts, which drown 
men in destruction and perdition. For 
the love of money is the root of all 
evil : which while some coveted after, 
they have erred from the faith, and 
pierced themselves through with many 
sorrows (6: 9-10)." This "root of all 
evil — the love of money" is one of the 
greatest, if not the greatest, means 
Satan has in luring us away to wor- 
ship "gods" other than the Lord. He 
knows that if he can get us to put our 
trust in the carnal security of the 
world he can lead us down to hell. 
This may sound harsh to some but 
it is according to the scriptures. 



It seems that many times ancient 
Israel was lead astray through this 
means, for the prophets chastized them 
because of their "sins" and made it 
known that because of this, the "good 
things" had been withheld from them. 
We can gather from this that once we 
begin barkening to the lust for gold, 
we are going to also start loosing the 
"good things" or, as President Brig- 
ham Young said, "The Latter-day 
Saints who turn their attention to 
money-making soon become cold in 
their feelings towards the ordinances 
of the house of God. They neglect 
their prayers, become unwilling to pay 
any donation ; the law of tithing gets 
too great a task for them ; and they 
finally forsake their God, and the pro- 
vidences of heaven seem to be shut 
from them — all in consecmence of this 
lust after the things of this world, 
which will certainly perish in handling, 
and in their use they will fade away 
and go from us." (See Pro. 11 :28.) N 

The New Testament also condemns 
this practice of seeking after riches 
and tells us very plainly it should not 
be done. The Saviour had occasion to 
explain this to His disciples- when one 
asked what he should do to inherit 
eternal life. You remember that after 
the Lord gave him commandments. 
which he had observed from his youth, 
He advised him to give his riches to 
the poor and, "come, follow me." "But 
the young man was sad at that saying, 
and went away grieved: for he had 
great possessions." Then Jesus said to 
His disciples, "How hardly shall they 
that have riches enter into the king- 
dom of God !" And the disciples were 
astonished at His words. But Jesus 
answereth again, and saith unto them, 
"Children, how hard is it for them 
thai trust in riches to enter into the 



90 



TE KARERE 



kingdom of God! It is easier for a 
camel to go through the eye of a 
needle, than for a ricl^ man to enter 
into the kingdom of God." Another 
time the Saviour spoke, to those listen- 
ing to Him, that "a man's life con- 
sisted not in the abundance of the 
things he possesseth." Then He spoke 
a parable unto them concerning a 
certain rich man who, storing up the 
abundance of his riches, put his trust 
in them. But when his ".soul" was re- 
quired the "fruits and goods" he had 
stored were no longer his, and because 
of his lust he, having no treasure in 
heaven, consigned himself to hell. Like 
so mnay other scriptures this tells 
us that if we trust in the abundance 
of our riches we strengthen ourselves 
in our wickedness. (See Pslams 52:7.) 

We see around us each day those 
who are building barns that they might 
put their riches in. But even more, 
we see those seeking for the substance 
whereby they might be in a position 
that they could build barns. We see 
so many who are seeking for them- 
selves and not giving the least thought 
for his neighbour's good, that, unless 
they are careful, they will find that 
they, like the rich fool, have no treas- 
ure in heaven. Let us remember the 
vision which John had concerning 
those who "lusted" after the carnal 
riches of the world. It is recorded in 
the Book of Revelation, Chapter 18. 
A special reference could be noted of 
verses 16 and 17, "... thai great city, 

that was clothed in fine linen, and 
purple, and scarlet, and decked with 

gold and precious stone . and pearls ! 
For in one how so greai riches is 
come to naught." If all these "delii a 
<ies" and riches arr going to come to 
such a sudden and abrupt ending, why 
is it v. diligentl) to p 

them, especially when we arc told «r 

shouldn't ? 'Iliis question w as an 

earlier be< ause if Satai 

to love these thing lie I no* that 

"lie thai loveth silver shall not I 

i Red w iih lilver ; nor he that loveth 



abundance with increase" and there- 
fore he will be able to lead us astray 
to worship the "god" of money, which 
is himself. 

We have quoted many "ancient" 
prophecies, but in this dispensation the 
Lord has also exhorted us not to be 
deceived by the "riches of the world." 
Jacob, the son of Lehi, taught the 
people, "But wo unto the rich, who 
are rich as to the things of the world. 
For because they are rich they despise 
the poor, and they persecute the meek, 
and their hearts are upon their treas- 
ures ; wherefore, their treasure is their 
God. And behold, their treasure shall 
perish with them also (11 Xephi 9:30). 
This same man later proclaimed, "Be- 
fore ye seek for riches, seek ye for the 
kingdom of God. And after ye have 
obtained a hope in Christ ye shall 
obtain riches, if ye seek them — to cloth 
the naked, and to feed the hungry, 
and to liberate the captive, and ad- 
minister relief to the sick and the 
afflicted.- (Jacob 2:18-19.) This is in 
keping with the later history of the 
Xephites when they (the Xephites) 
(\'.(\ obtain riches through their "steadi- 
ness' in "establishing the affairs of the 
C "hurch." 

But we do not have to go back into 

history to learn these things, for the 

Lord has given commandments to us 
in this generation. We read. 

seek the riches which it is the will of 

the bather to give unto you, ye shall 
be the richest of all people, for ye shall 
have the riches of eternity; and it 
must need be that the riches of the 
earth are mine t<- give ; but I i 
of pnde. lest ye become as the 

Xephites of Old." I l>. 8 

we are warned that "riches 

will (anker our SOuU" u' we ^\^ not 
use our substance in a righteOUS 

manner, 

I >.. w< t« .i« h .>ur i hildren of these 

things or are wt setting i bad example 
emi I n the revelation c< »n< i 



March, 1952 



91 



the teaching of our children the Lord 
has said, "Now, I, the Lord, am not 
well pleased with the inhabitants of 
Zion, for there are idlers among them ; 
and their children are also growing up 
in wickedness; they also seek not earn- 
estly the riches of eternity, but their 
ryes are full of greediness. These 
things ought not to be and must be 
done away from among them. These 
sayings are true and faithful ; where- 
fore transgrass them not, neither take 
therefrom." (Ibid 68:31-32, 34.) 



Brothers and sisters, let us go forth 
seeking the riches of eternity; for then 
shall we be rich indeed. And let us 
always remember that commandment 
the Lord gave unto us when He said, 
"SEEK NOT FOR RICHES BUT 
FOR WISDOM, and behold, the mys- 
teries of God shall be unfolded unto 
you, and then shall you be made rich. 
Behold, HE THAT HATH ETER- 
NAL LIFE IS RICH." (Ibid 6:7.) 

What greater blessing could we 
obtain? 

— B.P.S. 




HUI TAU ANNOUNCEMENT 

Haere Mai! Haere Mai! Haere Mai! 

HUI TAU will be held this year at Korongata, Hastings, over 
Easter Week-end (April 12-14). 

Kai tickets will be £1 for adults. Buy yours early! (Arrange- 
ments for children can be made on the Marae.) Whether you are 
planning to attend Hui Tau or not, you are invited to purchase a Kai 
ticket to help make this year's Hui a financial success. 

HUI TAU BOARD 

SIDNEY J. OTTLEY (Mission President). 

ELDER J. H. KING (Hawke's Bay District President). 

BROTHER R. HARRIS (Chairman). 

BROTHER ERU TE NGAIO (Secretary). 



SONGS TO BE PREPARED BY ALL CHOIRS 
FOR MASS SINGING AT HUI TAU 

Kia Kotahi 
Hallelujah Chorus 

Individual Choirs may choose their own numbers to be sung in 
the different sessions. 

MUSIC COMMITTEE 

JOHN JOSEPH 
SID DAVID 
RICHARD MARSH 



92 



TE KARERE 



EVIDENCE for BELIEF 



Is There A Discrepancy Between The 
Latter-Day Scriptures? 

By LOUIS C. MIDGLEY, Bountiful, Utah 



HP HE Church has come in for criti- 
-!■- cism because of what some have 
thought to be an inconsistency between 
two of our Latter-day scriptures. The 
particular incident that is being re- 
ferred to is the supposed inconsistency 
of the righteousness of David and 
Solomon in having many wives. We 
read in the Book of Mormon, "Behold, 
David and Solomon truly had many 
wives and concubines, which thing 
was abominable before me, saith the 
Lord." Then from the Doctrine and 
Covenants we read, "David also re- 
ceived many wives and concubines, 
and also Solomon and Moses my ser- 
vants, as also many others of my ser- 
vants, from the beginning of creation 
until this time: and in nothing did they 
sin save in those things which they 
received not of inc." It is said by some 
that there exists an inconsistency, so 
it is my purpose to attempt to correct 
the impression gained by just glibly 
reading two scriptures, and also to 
point out a very important moral 
lesson from the explanation thai is to 
be given. 

In the Book of Jacob we find the 
words which Jacob, the brother of 

X'ephi, spake unto the people of Xephi, 
"I'ut the woid of ( ,,,i| burthens me 

because of your grosser crimes. For 
behold, thus saith the I »ord : This 
people begin to wax in iniquity ; they 
understand not the scriptures, for they 
seel, to ex< use themselves in commit- 
i >redoms, be< ause of the things 
win. ii wen- written concerning I »a\ id, 
and Solomon, lu's son, Behold, I).i\hI 
and Solomon truly bad many wives 




and concubines, which thing was 
abominable before me. saith the Lord 
(Jacob 2:23, 24).- We rind that the 
Xephites misunderstood the scriptures 
concerning David and Solomon and 
began to practice something that "was 
abominable before me." We find in 
reading further in the Book of Jacob 
the reason God lead the Xephites out 
of Jerusalem was to prevent this 
branch (the Xephites) from commit- 
ting the "abominable thing" and thus 
raise up a righteous branch. God then 
informs the Xephites. "For there shall 
not any man among you have save 
ii be one wife; and concubines he shall 
have none." This c. unmandment is 

given with the provision that God can 

if I le Chooses allow plural mv ■ 

for we read further on, "For if I will, 
saith the Lord of Hosts, raise up 

seed unto me, I will command un- 
people; otherwise they shall hearken 
unto these things." < These thii 
fera to the commando 

plural in. in-., 

So i. n we haTC HOI attempted tO 

clear the supposed inconsistency, but 



March, 1952 



93 



have only attempted to explain what 
Jacob was speaking about. We have. 
however, failed to offer an explanation 
for what this "abominable thing" is 
that Jacob referred to. 

The contention will here be put 
forth that the "abominable thing" that 
was committed in Jerusalem by Solo- 
mon and David and which caused God 
to lead the Nephites to America to 
escape was not necssarilv having many 
wives, but was marrying women that 
were not ^i Israel who had beliefs in 
gods Other than Jehovah. In the Book 
of Jacob we read, "For behold, I, the 
Lord, have seen the sorrow, and heard 
the mourning of the daughters of my 
people in the land of Jerusalem, yea, 
and in all the lands of my people, 
becau e of the wickedness and abom- 
inations of their husbands. And I will 
not suffer, saith the Lord of Hosts, 
that the cries of the fair daughters of 
this people, which I have led out of 
the land of Jerusalem, shall come up 
up unto me against the men of my 
people." It would only be natural for 
the daughters of Israel to mourn if 
the men married out of Israel, and so 
the Bt -ok of Mormon begins to help 
us in supporting our contention ; but 
we must turn to the Bible to find out 
just what the "abominable thing" was 
that was committed in Jerusalem that 
caused God to lead the Nephites away 
to the new land. 

In Exodus (34:11-16) we read, 
"Observe thou that which I command 
thee this day : Take heed to thyself, 
lest thou make a covenant with the 
inhabitants of the land whither thou 
goest, lest it be for a snare in the 
midst of thee : But ye shall destroy 
their altars, break their images, and 
cut down their groves : For thou shalt 
worship no other god : For the Lord, 
whose name is Jealous, is a jealous 
God : Lest thou make a covenant with 
the inhabitants of the land, and they go 
a whoring after their gods, and do 
sacrifice unto their gods, and one call 



thee and thou eat of his sacrifices : 
And thou take of their daughters unto 
thy sons, and their daughters go a 
whoring after their gods, and make 
thy sons go a whoring after their 
gods." Israel is told here not to have 
anything to do with the other nations; 
especially not to marry with them be- 
cause that would cause the Israelites 
"to go a whoring after*' their .^'ds. 

Again in Deut. (7:1-4). "When the 
Lord thy God shall bring thee into 
the land whither thou goest to possess 
it, and hath cast out many nations 
before thee — seven nations greater and 
mightier than thou : And when the 
Lord shall deliver them before thee, 
thou shalt smite them, and utterly 
destroy them ; thou shalt make no co- 
venant with them, nor shew mercy 
unto them: Neither shalt thou mike 
marriages with them ; thy daughter 
thou shalt not give unto his son, nor 
his daughter shalt thou take unto thy 
son. For they will turn away thy son 
from following me, that they may 
serve other gods ; so will the anger 
of the Lord be kindled against you, 
and destroy thee suddenly." And again, 
in Deut. "(17:16-17). "But he shall 
not multiply horses to himself, nor 
cause the people to return to Egypt, 
to the end that he should multiply 
horses ; for as much as the Lord hath 
said unto you, Ye shall henceforth 
return no more that way. Neither shall 
he multiply wives to himself, that his 
heart turn not away: neither shall he 
greatly multiply to himself silver and 
gold." 

Xow to the direct proof that the 
"abominable thing" was not having 
more than one wife, but marrying out 
of Israel and then following after the 
gods of the other nations. From 
I Kings (11:1-8) we read, "But King 
Solomon loved many strange women, 
together with the daughter of Pharaoh, 
women of the Moabites, Ammonites, 
Edomites, Zidonians, and Hittites ; of 
the nations concerning which the Lord 



94 



TE KARERE 



said unto the children of Isreal. Ye 
shall not go in to them, neither shall 
they come in unto you; for surely they 
will turn away your heart after their 
gods: Solomon clave unto these in 
love. And he had seven hundred wives, 
princesses and three hundred concu- 
bines : and his wives turned away his 
heart. For it came to pass, when Solo- 
mon was old, that his wives turned 
away his heart after other gods ; and 
his heart was not perfect with the 
Lord his God, as was the heart of 
David his father. For Solomon went 
after Ashtoreth the Goddess of the 
Zidonians, and after Milcom the abom- 
ination of the Ammonites. And Solo- 
mon did evil in the sight of the Lord, 
and went not fully after the Lord, as 
did David his father. Then did Solo- 
mon build a high place for Chemosh, 
the abomination of Moab, in the hill 
that is before Jerusalem, and for 
Molech, the abomination of the child- 
ren of Ammon. And likewise did he 
for all his strange wives, which burnt 
incense and sacrificed unto their gods." 
In Nehemiah we read, ". . . . and made 
them swear by God, saying, Ye shall 
not give your daughters unto their 
sons, nor take their daughters unto 
your sons, or for yourselves. Did not 
Solomon, King of Israel, si>i by these 
things? Yet among many nations was 
there no king like him, who was be- 
loved of his God, and God made him 
king over all Israel : nevertheless even 
him did outlandish women cause to sin. 
Shall we then hearken unto you to do 
all this great evil, to transgress against 
our God in marrying strange wives?" 
(Read 13:23-27.) In Malachx (2:11, 
12) we read, "Judah hath dealt 

treacherously, and an abomination i> 

COmmited in Israel and in Jerusalem ; 

for Judah hath profaned the holiness 

of the Lord which loved, and hath 

married the daughter of a strangi 
The Lord will cul off the man that 

doeth this, the master and the scholar, 

out of the tabernai lea oi Fa< i »b, and 
him that ofrereth an offering unto the 

Lord of rlOftt." 



We can see plainly that the "abom- 
inable thing" that the Xephites were 
excusing themselves of, was marrying 
out of the Church to the Lamanites 
and that the "abomination" committed 
by the children of Israel was not 
having more than one wife but select- 
ing their wives from outside of Israel 
and then being led to follow some 
other gods than the God of Israel. 
With Solomon it is apparent at once 
what the "abominable thing" he did 
was. With David it is not so apparent. 
David's error was his adultery with 
Bathsheba and the killing of Bath- 
sheba's husband, Uriah. The Doctrine 
and Covenants (132:39) says con- 
cerning David, "David's wives and 
concubines were given unto him of me, 
by the hand of Nathan, my servant. 
and other of the prophets who had 
the keys of this power; and in none 
of these things did he sin against me 
save in the case of Uriah and his 
wife; and, therefore, he hath fallen 
from his exaltation, and received his 
portion; and he shall not inherit them 
out of the world, for I gave them 
unto another, saith the Lord." In 
// Samuel (12:8) we tind Nathan 
putting his seal of approval on David's 
many wives and also informing us that 
he, Nathan, gave the wives to David. 
"And I gave thee thy master's house, 
and thy master's wives into thy bosom, 

and gave thee the house of Israel and 

of Judah; and if that had been tOO 
little, I would moreover have given 

thee such and such things." 
It is little wonder that the daughters 

of the Israelites in Jerusalem and 

the daughters of the Nephites were 

mourning when the men and even their 

husbands went off to marry out of the 

Church and to marrv "the itrangC 

women," violating the laws t >i God. 
The object lesson to be drawn from 

this exposition is simply this The 
members of the Church should not 

marry out of the ( hureh. for to do 

is to invite disaster to in- led awaj 

from the Church If this rule applied 



March, 1952 



95 



to the Israelites and to the Nephites 
it certainly applies to the members 
of the Church today. Many times we 
hear Church authorities plead with 
us not to marry outside of the Church 
and we think nothing of it. Possibly 
this article has, in some way, helped 



to explain why we should marry 
within the Church. Remember the 
words of Malachi, "The Lord will 
cut off the man that doeth this (marry 
out of the Church), the master and 
the scholar, out of the tabernacles of 
Jacob." 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE (Continued from Page 88) 



ability. She was frugal but not miserly 
and spent her small earnings with 
wisdom that comes of necessity. 

The story is a long one, but this 
is the result — The children all finished 
school. One son has filled a mission 
abroad and another has filled a local 
mission. The children have all done 
their part in the Priesthood quorums 
and the ward organizations. They are 
all well married and they now contri- 
bute to the welfare of. their mother 
in her later years and she goes and 
comes as she pleases, and enjoys life 
every day. 

Her home ? Oh, yes, it is the same 
home, sturdy and strong, and it is 
surrounded with a beautifully kept 
lawn and gardens of lovely flowers. 
Trees of fruit and gardens of berries 
and vegetables are all around the 
house. Inside, it is clean and well kept. 
She smilingly meets her friends and 
is never ashamed to invite them into 
her humble home. Her friends are 
happy to visit with her and the 
stranger who calls at her door would 
never be led to say, "This is a home 
of poverty." Rather would the casual 
or careful observer say, "This is a 



dwelling of peace and plenty." Nothing 
is lavish, nothing is expensive, but 
nothing speaks of poverty. It is home, 
and the children who were reared in 
that home love to come back to it 
and are proud to bring their friends 
home to enjoy its peace and hospitality. 

Oh, yes, she had help, plenty of 
help. "THE LORD HELPS THOSE 
WHO HELP THEMSELVES" and 
He keeps His promises. 

Is yours a home of which you are 
proud? If not, why not? Latter-day 
Saints have a higher percentage of 
HOME -OWNERS than any like 
number of people in the world, and if 
they will live their religion and faith- 
fully try, they can have the most 
beautiful homes in all the world. 

It takes money to build a house, but 
faith and work and planning ahead 
can make a most beautiful home. 

Look around you, e hoa ma, and let's 
see where we shall commence. KIA 
KAHA KI TE WHAKAPAI NGA 
KAINGA. KO TE KAINGA TE 
WHAKA ATU RANGA OTE 
HIAHIA OTE NGAKAU. 



96 



TE KARERE 



Wise Counsel Not Heeded 
Then As Now 

By BRIGHAM YOUNG 
Discourse Delivered in the Tabernacle, May 15, 1865 



EDITOR'S NOTE: The general 
Authorities have once again been 
counselling the Saints to have "at least 
two years' supply of food, clothing, 
bedding, etc., on hand." This article 
is therefore just as potent today as 
when it was given. 

ARE we going to live our religion 
— to be tlit- servants and hand- 
maids of the Almighty ? Are we going 
to continue in the faith, and try to 
grow in grace and in the knowledge 
of the truth ? If we are, the prophecies 
will be fulfilled on us. We shall have 
the privilege of seeing the blest, and 
will be blest. 

I look at things as a man looking 
philosophically; I look at things be- 
fore us in the future as a politician, 
as a statesman, as a thinking person. 
What is going to be the condition of 
this people and their surrounding 
neighbours? Do we not see the storm 

gathering/ It will come from the 
north-east and the SOUth-east, from the 
east and from the west, and from the 
north-west. The clouds an- gathering; 
the distant thunders an- audible, and 
tell of destruction, want, and famine. 
Bui mark it well, if we live according 
to the I loiy Priesthood best< »wed upon 

US, while God hears rule in tin- midst 



of the mountains, I promise you, in 
the name of Israel's G'od, that He will 
give us seed-time and harvest. We 
must forfeit our right to the Priest- 
hood before the blessings of the 
Heavens cease to come upon us. Let 
us live our religion and harken to 
the counsel given to us. 

And here let me say to you. buy 
what flour you need, and do not let it 
be hauled away. Have you a horse, 
or an ox, or a wagon, or anything 
else, if it takes the coat off your back, 
or the shoses off your feet, and you 
have to wear moccasins, sell them and 
go to the merchant who have it to sell, 
and buy the flour before it is hauled 
away. Why did you not buy it when 
it was cheap? There is a saying that 
wit dearly bought is remembered. Now 
buy your wit. bny your wisdom, buy 

your counsel and judgment, bny them 
dearly, so that you will remember. 
)'.'/( were last fall counselled to sup- 
ply yourselves With bread-stuffs, when 

flour could have been bought for 

whistling a time, and the seller would 

have whistled one-half of it to induce 

you to bny. Why have the children 

of this world been wiser in this day 

than tlie children ^i light ? 

—J. of D., Vol. 11 :ol>4. 



Jt^^tf&m^ 



Don't jutt I hint: o( ourselves, hut the other person, ond Jus 
and Hitds, 



March, 1952 



97 




A Special Request from the Mission 
Secretary 

By ELDER GROVER D. JENSEN 

Brigham City, Utah, U.S.A. 

Let me illustrate what difficulty this 
would overcome. Say, for example, 
John Jones pays tithes in March. In 
April he pays again, only the payment 
is receipted to Johnny Jones. Next 
month the same person pays giving his 
name as Honi Jones. Let's see what 
has happened. Three different names 
are sent into the office, each bearing 
tithing credit. We make out three 
cards and have record of three separ- 
ate accounts. Then at the end of the 
year we report three part tithe payers 
to Zion in place of one full tithe payer. 
Brothers and sisters, this is a situation 
which bears your attention and con- 
sideration. Please help us to be sure 
we are reporting correctly to the First 
Presidency. It may be that some of 
you who are wonderful Latter-day 
Saints living your religion to the ut- 
most are reported to the Brethren in 
Zion as part tithe payers because of 
this very difficulty. All the time as I 
was typing the final report I had a 
prayer in my heart that it would be 
correct and that an untrue report 
would be given of no one. 

Near the close of the year the 
Branch President will arrange for the 
Annual Tithing Settlement. Every 
member of the Branch will be invited 
to attend. Opportunity will be given 
to those who have made payments to 
examine their accounts and see that 
proper credits have been given. Then 
a statement may be made as to whether 
or not the tithe is full or part. If the 
tithe payer does not attend, the judg- 
ment is left to the Branch President. 
However, in all fairness it is more 
desirable for the member himself to 
(Continued on Page 101) 



JE here in the office have recently 
had the privilege of preparing 
for the First Presidency of the Church 
the Annual Tithing Report. As I 
worked on this report compiling the 
data requested, I more deeply felt the 
importance of this great principle. The 
instructions for the preparation of the 
report cautioned us to be very careful 
and efficient as to ensure against error. 
Several difficulties were noted which 
may, with your help, be overcome in 
future years. 

First let us suggest that you who 
are members of the Church make 
special effort to find out the name 
under which your record appears in 
your District. // it is wrong, request 
a change. Then when you know what 
name you are known by on the records 
insist that it correctly appears on all 
your tithing receipts. In this way you 
will ensure that correct credit is given 
to the proper person on the Mission 
Records. . Take special care to do this 
if you happen to pay tithes in another 
district other than your own where 
vou are not known. 



98 



TE KARERE 



EVIDENCES and RECONCILIATIONS 



How May a Testimony 
Gospel Be 



of the Truth of the 
Obtained? 



By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



MEMBERS of the Church fre- 
quently "bear testimonies" one 
to the other. They declare that ihey 
know the restored Gospel to be true, 
and voice the joy found in the pos- 
session of the Gospel. 

Such testimonies are statements of 
certainty of belief. They imply that 
the united experiences and powers of 
the man or woman confirm the truth 
of the Gospel. Doubt is dismissed. 
Faith becomes the ruling power. 

The beginning of a testimony is 
faith in God as the Father of the 
spirits of men ; then in a divine plan 
of salvation for all men, with Jesus, 
the Christ, at the head ; and finally 
in the restoration of the Gospel or 
the plan and Priesthood authority 
through the instrumentality of the 
Prophet Joseph Smith. 

The learned and the unlearned, the 
youth and the veteran, the high and 
the humble, may bear such a testi- 
mony alike. To each one may come 
the conviction that truth is the sub- 
stance of the Gospel and its claims. 
The man, rich in learning and experi- 
ence, may be able to marshal more 
evidences for his belief than the adoles- 
cent lad ; but, Mine both have tested 
the Gospel with the means at their 
command, and found il not wanting, 
they may both claim respeel for their 
separate testimonies. 

A conviction of the truth ol the 
Gospel, a testimony, must be soughl 
if it is to be found. It doe-, n.it come 
a- tin- dew fn.m heaven. It is the 
result of man's eagerness to know 
truth. Often il require battle with 
ti .i'lii ji .11 , f< irmer i ipinii »n and ap 



petites, and a long testing of the Gospel 
by every available fact and standard. 
"Faith is a gift of God," but faith 
must be used to be of service to man. 
The Lord lets it rain upon the just 
and the unjust, but he whose field is 
well ploughed is most benefitted by 
the moisture from the sky. 

Specifically, what must a person do 
in his quest for a testimony ? 

First, there must be a desire for 
truth. That is the beginning of all 
human progress, in school, in active 
life, in every human occupation. The 
desire to know the truth of the Gospel 
must be insistent, constant, overwhelm- 
ing, burning. It must be a driving 
force. A "devil-may-care" attitude will 
not do. Otherwise the seeker will not 
pay the required price for the testi- 
mony. 

A testimony comes only to those 
who desire it. Saul, as an enemy of 
Christ, was sincere in his persecutions. 
As his desire for truth developed, the 
Lord could bring to him the conviction 
of his error. Running through the 
Pauline epistles is the glorification oi 
truth as the foundation of all wisdom. 

The absence of a living love of truth 
explains the chaotic conditions on 

earth. Without such desire for truth. 
appetites and passions dominate human 
a. it.. ns, resulting in cruelties and other 
evils to satisfy ambitions ^\ darkness. 

Desire must precede all else in the 
winning of a testimony. 

a testimony 

must recognize his OWII limitations 

Me is on a royal load, " 

u ai <ls the pala. e i>\ truth, in w hub 



M., 



1952 



MM 



all human good may he found. There 
are truths beyond the material uni- 
verse. Indeed, a testimony may be said 
to begin with the acceptance of God, 
who transcends as well as encompasses 
material things. The seeker for a testi- 
mony feels the need of help beyond 
his own powers, as the astronomer 
uses the telescope to enlarge his 
natural vision. The seeker for a testi- 
mony prays to the Lord for help. 
Such a prayer must be as insistent and 
constant as the desire. They must move 
together as the palm and back of the 
hand. Then help will come. Many a 
man has strayed from the road because 
his desire has not been coupled with 
prayer. 

Prayer must acompany desire in the 
quest for a testimony. 

Third, an effort must be put forth 
to learn the Gospel, to understand it, 
to comprehend the relationship of its 
principles. The Gospel must be studied, 
otherwise no test of its truth may 
sanely be applied to it. That study 
must be wide, for the Gospel is so 
organized that in it is a place for 
every truth, of every name and nature. 
That study must be constantly con- 
tinued, for the content of the Gospel 
is illimitable. 

It is a paradox that man will gladly 
devote time every day for many years 
to learn a science or an art ; yet will 
expect to win a knowledge of the 
Gospel, which comprehends all sciences 
and arts, through perfunctory glances 
at books or occasional listening to 
sermons. The Gospel should be studied 
more intensively than any school or 
college subject. They who pass opinion 
on the Gospel without having given it 
intimate and careful study are not 
lovers of truth, and their opinions are 
worthless. 

So important is the Gospel, the 
guide to human conduct, that it would 
be well for every lover of truth to 
set aside fifteen to thirty minutes daily 
for the study of the Gospel. Such 



regular study will in a few years yield 
mastery of Gospel principles. 

To secure a testimony, then, study 
must accompany desire and prayer. 

Fourth, the Gospel must be woven 
into the pattern of life. It must be 
tested in' practice. The Gospel must 
be n^ed in life. That is the ultimate 
te>t in the winning of a testimony. 

The theoretical acceptance of the 
law of tithing has really no meaning 
in life. Only when the law is obeyed 
can fair judgment be passed upon it. 

The Word of Wisdom may be dis- 
cussed pro and con, but obedience to 
it will reveal its true value. The only 
way to test the value of attendance 
at meetings is to attend meetings. One 
must "live the Gospel" to learn of its 
truth. 

Certainly the experience of others 
who have consistently obeyed Gospel 
requirements is of value to the seeker 
after a testimony. Children are wise 
in accepting the experiences of their 
parents. Beginners do well to trust 
those who are seasoned in Gospel 
living. But, there comes a time when 
every person must find out for him- 
self, in his own daily life, the value 
of the Gospel. A sufficient testimony 
comes only to him who "stands upon 
his own feet." 

There are those who presume to 
judge the Gospel and the testimonies 
of Church members upon purely theo- 
retical grounds. They do not have a 
strong desire for truth, will not pray, 
nor will they give ample study to the 
system. Least of all will they practice 
the precepts of the Gospel. Such 
judges deserve perhaps more pity than 
ridicule. Their method is without 
honour in the halls of truth. 

A testimony of the truth of the 
Gospel comes then from: (1) Desire, 
(2) Prayer, (3) Study, and (4) 
Practice. 

This is really the formula given by 
Moroni, the Nephite Prophet : 



100 



TE KARERF 



And when ye shall receive these 
things, I would exhort you that ye 
would ask God, the Eternal Father, 
in the name of Christ, if these things 
are not true ; and if ye shall ask with 
a sincere heart, with real intent, hav- 
ing faith in Christ, He will manifest 
the truth of it unto you, by the power 
of the Holy Ghost. And by the poivcr 
of the Holy Ghost ye may know the 
truth of all things. (Book of Mormon, 
Moroni 10:4, 5.) 



Thousands have tried this approach 
to truth; and have found the testi- 
monies they sought. So far, no one 
who, with flaming desire, sincere 
prayer, earnest study, and fearless 
practice, has sought the truth of "Mor- 
monism" has failed to find it. Some, 
for lack of courage, though truth 
stared them in the face, have kept it 
to themselves. But, the approach never 
fails, so declares fearlessly the 
CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS. 



A SPECIAL REQUEST FROM THE 

MISSION SECRETARY (Continued from Page 98) 



make the statement. This information 
is later compiled and sent to the First 
Presidency. The amount of tithing paid 
and the faithfulness of the members 
are matters for the Branch Presidency 
only, and are not to be generally 
known or discussed. As you pay your 
tithes keep a record of your payments 
with the idea of taking them to this 
settlement with you to make compari- 
son. This will eliminate a great deal 
of error. 

This is the work of the Lord \ 
ed in. Tithing is the practical 
principle revealed to finance lli^ Cause. 
But the beautiful thing of tit!'. 
nient lies not alone in the magnificent 
structures the revenue finances, nor 
with the hungry it feeds, the naked it 
clothes, nor the shelterless it i 
Neither is it wholly contained in the 
fact that the tithes of the Church add 
to make it possible for the < lospel to 
be preached to "every nation, and 

kindred, and tongue and people" in 

preparation for the coming of the Lord 
Jesus < Ihrist. I'm to me the real beauty 
of tithi i ..ix iik nt i per onal, and two- 
fold. Firsl it helps us to enlarge our 
capacity to give, thus adding si 
to our souls to overcome selfishness. 
When jelfishne overcome, intelli- 

and new spiritual power 

is manifest in our daily labours with 

i .mi fell* m men. \1 \o the imp* i 



of material things lessens in our eyes 
and we gain a truer perspective of life 
— thus gaining a priceless gift which 
is a true sense of values. Secondly, 
tithe paying establishes communion 
with the Lord. Obedience to the laws 
of God bring inward joy and complete 
satisfaction. By paying our tithes we 
become in a real sense a partner with 
the Lord. Being His partner we will 
find prayer easier, faith stronger, and 
our ability and desire to have a pro- 
found spirit of the Gospel of truth in 
our homes i i . . i 

In this short effort 1 have not en- 
deavoured to define tithing nor to 
establish its functions from the scrip- 
tures. However, it has been my soul 
wish to encourage you to be bus 
like in your payments. In so 
you will benefit yourself greatly and 

assist the clerks to omit error. 

In closing lei me thank you Mr 
your patiences and commend you for 
j i ui- fine efforts in tl 

Jesus ( 'brist. and quote from th< 

trine and G 

"Whatsoever you record on earth shall 

i ded in heaven and what 

you do nol record on earth shall not 
irded in heaven : for out of the 

cording to their own v 

Miit to the 

|( ih \ .a' the ("bin. ' 



March, 1952 



THIS WORLD CHURCH 
and its PEOPLE 




"I Am Not Ashamed of 
The Gospel of Christ" 

EATON ROUGE, LA. — What 
would your reaction be, if you 
were asked to go to the business sec- 
tion of your own home town, and 
there on one of the most busy street 
corners lift up your voice in defense 
of the Gospel ? Your first thoughts 
might be — "I wouldn't mind it in some 
other town, but not here where every- 
one knows me." Yes, this so-called 
"pride" might keep a number of us 
from doing it. But the youth in Baton 
Rouge don't mind it at all. 

Every Friday night here in the 
capital city of Louisiana, a street 
meeting is held on a very busy corner 
in downtown Baton Rouge. Not only 
do the missionaries participate in this 
activity, but also they have the full 
co-operation of the youth of the Baton 
Rouge Branch. These young people 
first began by helping the missionaries 
sing and hand out literature, but be- 
fore long they became eager to take 
their turns in doing the preaching. 
Melrose Watts, a convert to the 
Church of only two years was the first 
to humble herself in this position. 
Hearing Melrose gave Kathleen Fick- 
land, a high school student, a great 
desire to do the same thing, and she, 
too. was given the opportunity. The 
following week, little 15-year-old Ruby 
Fickland, sister to Kathleen, asked if 
she might stand on the street corner 
and tell the citizens of her home town 
that the Gospel has been restored to 
the earth again. Seeing and hearing 



this small girl was truly a sight to 
behold! Since then others have joined 
the ranks of these young people. 

How very fitting the words of Paul, 
in his epistle to the Romans, when 
he said, "For I am not ashamed of 
the Gospel of Christ !" These young 
people have proved beyond doubt that 
the)' are not "ashamed of the Gospel 
of Jesus Christ." 

Sabbath Day Kept by 
L.D.S. Soldiers in Korea 

It was Sunday morning in Korea. 
There was fighting as usual on the IX 
Corps front. 

Big guns were booming and shells 
were pouring into the Communist 
front line. In a wide valley below, 
machine guns occasionally chattered. 
Then from atop one of the highest 
hills in Korea came the strains of the 
hymn "O Ye Mountain High." A 
group of Mormon soldiers were hold- 
ing their weekly Sunday services. 

Since they have no L.D.S. chaplain, 
the men of the 213th Armoured Field 
Artillery Battalion have taken it upon 
themselves to conduct their own ser- 
vices. They have managed to hold 
some form of worship every Sunday 
since they first boarded ship to come 
to Korea. 

Most of the credit for the organiza- 
tion can be attributed to three men, 
two Lieutenants and a Sergeant. These 
men have worked diligently to give 
members of the battalion the nearest 
thing possible to regular Mormon 
services. 



102 



TE KARERE 



The group leader had been set apart 
before leaving for Korea and had pre- 
viously served as a Mormon mission- 
ary. 

The enthusiasm demonstrated by the 
213th has inspired other Mormons in 
the IX Corps zone to similar religious 
efforts. 

A conference will be held in the 
near future to bring L.D.S. men to- 
gether from all over the central front. 
One of the purposes of the meeting 
will be to co-ordinate services so that 
they all will have an opportunity to 
attend Sunday services. 

President McKay Invited 
to White House Meet 

President David O. McKay returned 
home after attending a White House 
conference of 100 leading churchmen, 
industrialists and financiers at Wash- 
ington, D.C. Confidential in nature, 
the conference was called to acquaint 
those invited with the problems facing 
the nation. President McKay told 
newsmen following the sessions Mon- 
day that the conference was "very 
much worth while" and that "the pur- 
poses of the meeting were commend- 
able." 

He said that President Truman 
spoke briefly, followed by Secretary 
of State, Dean Acheson, who was 
pressed with many questions on foreign 
affairs. 

Hymn Book in . Braille 
Published for Blind 

\t a shoii bul impressive eremony 
held recently a1 the Twentieth Ward 
Chapel (Ogden, Utah), Pres. Laur- 
ence S. Burton presented to Elder 
Jesse Anderson and Irene Jones, repre 
senting the blind oi the stake, a hymn 
book in Braille published for the blind 

,.| ( )••<!, 11 Stake. 

I- Id i \n'l' rson is the representative 
in the Ogden area for "The Societj 
For tin- Aid -I the SightU i." Hi 

and ins i o workers tea. h hand 



typing, Braille and assist blinded 
people to adjust to this handicap and 
find their place again in society. 

Elder Anderson is an accomplished 
vocalist and musician, and gives of 
his talent to teach music in Braille, 
also the stories of the origin of ihe 
Latter-day Saint songs. Through this 
endeavour he came to realize the 
necessity for a Braille edition of the 
best loved L.D.S. hymns. He presented 
a proposal to his bishop who in turn 
recommended that it be made a stake- 
wide project. Immediate response to 
appeals for funds came from the mem- 
bership of the nine wards of the stake. 
Plates were made and 75 song books 
run off for immediate distribution. 
Now that the plates are made, subse- 
quent editions may be printed for 
about half the original cost, to assist 
others so handicapped. 

"Australian Post" Features 
Missionaries in Recent Issue 

'"What is the driving force behind 
the Latter-day Saints?" This question 
is asked, and then answered fairly, in 
a recent issue of "The Australian 
Post," a magazine comparable to the 
"Saturday Evening Post" of the 
United States. 

Ron Testro, a staff member, with 

John Cato, "Post" photographer, spent 
two days at the mission-wide confer- 
ence ot" the elders <»|" the Australian 
Mission at Melbourne, interviewing 
the young men. taking pictures, and 
attending the meetings. 

In addition to the long and friendly 

article about the Church, the magazine 
layout also includes eight pictures 
showing differn! activities ot" the con- 
fereni e. 

There is a picture of an elder lead- 
ing the singing from the I i 
I [ymn Book. President « -e. i 
( hristensen of the Australian M 
is shown m a meeting with his 86 

and ais.. lata • eat 
. ream u ith them. 

(Continued on Page 1 D8 | 



March, 1952 



103 




k 



The Sunday School In New Zealand 

By ELDER ROBERT M. GOODMAN 
622 Evarts St., Ne., Washington, D.C. 

2. The report of the assistant super- 
intendent having charge of music, 
records and enlistment work. 

3. Report of Superintendent oil his 
duties and plans and forthcoming 
programmes to better the Sunday 
School work. 

( As further explanation for the 
above actions, a report of the duties 
of each member of the superintend- 
ency, not including the secretary, 
should he given at this time. This 
serves a dual purpose ; it not only 
informs the superintendent of his coun- 
sellors' activities, but also will keep 
fresh in their minds just what their 
duties are — The specific duties of 
each member may be found in the S.S. 
Handbook.) 

4. Preparation of programme for next 
Sunday School session. 
(Filling out superintendent's memo- 
randum form.) 

This includes preparation and 
checking on assignments for the 
faculty meeting. 

a. Summary of recommendations 
thereon. 

b. Formulation of recommenda- 
tions thereon. 

c. Follow-up of enlistment work. 

5. Miscellaneous business (as is 
arises). 

a. Socials. 

b. Plans and appointments for 
conferences with departmental 
heads, severly. 

(1) Superintendent to encourage 
teacher's adherence to Church 
standards. 

(a) Payments of tithes. 

(b) Attendance at sacrament meet- 
ings. 

(c) Observance of Word of Wis- 
dom. 



SPECIAL MEETINGS .... 

THIS month the "Special Meeting" 
we will discuss will be the 
SUPERINTENDENT'S WEEKLY 
COUNCIL MEETING. This meeting 
is one of the most important, if not 
THE most important, of all three of 
the S.S. Special Meetings. 

This is the gathering where business 
is discussed and programmes made 
out, etc. Therefore, this is the meet- 
ing that must be held in order to 
have any form of a reverent, orderly 
Sunday School. A reverent, orderly 
Sunday School is the only type of 
meeting of this nature that we could 
possibly ask that the Spirit of the 
Lord dwell. The Branch Superintend- 
ent should meet together with only 
his counsellors and secretary once a 
week and hold this business meeting 
at an appointed time and place. This 
meeting is designed to handle the 
temporal affairs of the S.S. and should 
not be confused or combined with any 
other meetings. It should be held 
seven days prior to the Sunday you 
are planning for. 

ORDER OF BUSINESS .... 

1. The report of the assistant super- 
intendent having charge of class 
work. 



104 



TE KARERE 



c. Plan for presentation of Sunday 
School problems to Branch 
auxiliary executives. 

d. Consideration and application 
of Mission and District recom- 
mendations. 

e. Preparation of special pro- 
grammes for such occasions as : 
Mother's Day, Easter, Christ- 
mas and Sunday Evening Ex- 
ercises. 

f. Pupil placement. 



g. Ways of assisting in lesson 
preparation of teachers. 
The above is the second of the 
Special Meetings. Brethren, I surely 
hope that you will see the good and 
the advantages in this meeting and put 
it to use. 

SACRAMENT GEM 

(February and March) 

Purify our hearts, our Saviour: 
Let us go not far astray, 

That we may be counted worthy 
Of Thy Spirit day by day. 



We have recently received the following material in the Mission 
Office .... 

The Have-More Plan 12/- 

Big Blue Hymn Books (388 Pages) 8/- 

Little Red Hymn Books (48 Pages) 1/- 

Pearl of Great Price 8/- 

Doctrine and Covenants 12/- 

SUNDAY SCHOOL DEPARTMENT 

Roll and Minute Books 6/- 

S.S. Handbooks (1951 edition, latest) 2/6 

S.S. Quarterly Report Forms Free 



THIS WORLD CHURCH AND ITS 

At the time the article was prepared 
there were three young lady mission- 
aries serving and they arc Featured 
in two pictures, "American Pretty 
Girls Who Heard the 'Call.'" 

Two photographs show a baseball 
and football game in action by the 
young missionaries after their serious 
meetings. There is also a picture of 
the young men eating, following their 
two-day fast. 

A hit of history of the restoration 
of the Church through the Prophel 
Joseph Smith is given, with a number 
of statistic s concerning the t Tun h 
and its members. 

( nil, luding the arti< Ic Mr. 

writes : "The I alter da\ Saintl I 

the Book of Mormon to be • 

■ n world w hat tin Bible is to 

ili, i .i tern world 



PEOPLE (Cont. from Page 103) 

"They work for peace and love on 
earth between fellow men. Saints and 
Gentiles worship the same God, and 
in a world of peace, they say both 

have freedom to give homage and 
praise to the Lord. 

"Throughout the world the Mor- 
mons have preached their faith and in 

many places have built magnificent 
temples. Some of the American chapel s 
are beautifull) designed and furnished, 
and are surrounded hy fine gardens. 

The temples are a worthy monument 
to a religion that, for its thousands ^i 
adherents, means enduring comfort m 

a world iA trouble." 

The mis! m of the 

Church is discussed at length as well 
as the high standards of morality <\ 
.!. ted bj the Church and includes 
complimentai it the 

Word of Wisdom 



March. 1952 



L.D. PROPHETS SPEAK . . . 

-t Excerpts from an address delivered at the Semi-annual General 
Conference, October 4, 1947, in the Tabernacle. 



Spiritual Re-birth and Death 



By HAROLD B. LEE 



SOME weeks ago I had an inter- 
view with a young man who is 
just making a remarkable recovery 
from very serious wounds that he re- 
ceived on the European battlefield. In 
an explosion of a land mine this young 
man had suffered a severe spinal in- 
jury that had almost completely para- 
lyzed him, and when the rescue squad 
came and was carrying him off the 
field, the enemy turned loose a burst 
of machine gun fire from which he 
suffered six bullet wounds in his chest. 
He was taken to the hospital in what 
was thought to be a dying condition. 
As he lay there on his cot after having 
been treated by the surgeons, a chap- 
lain came to him wearing an insignia 
of a sectarian church. He asked this 
young man what his religion was. On 
being told that he was a Latter-day 
Saint, the chaplain said : "Well, then, 
perhaps you would rather I would not 
pray for you?" 

"Oh, yes," said the young man, "I 
would like to have you pray for me if 
you feel inclined to." 

The young man said the chaplain 
prayed for about twenty minutes. The 
burden of his prayer and the chief 
thing that he could remember of what 
the chaplain said was this that sus- 
tained him and put into him the feeling 
that he wanted to live : 

O, God, help us that in our Jiving 
we arc not afraid to die and that in 
our dying ice are not afraid to live. 

I have thought about that prayer 
many times since, and I have asked 
myself the question : How many thou- 



sands are there among us today who 
are living such lives that would make 
them, unless they repent, afraid to die, 
and that in their dying they might be 
afraid to live hereafter? 

The purpose of the Gospel of Jesus 
Christ is to teach men to live so that 
when they die, in the words of the im- 
mortal "Thanatopsis" : 

Thou go not, like the quarry-slave 

at night, 

Scourged to his dungeon, but, sus- 
tained and soothed 

By an unfaltering trust . . . 

The Apostle Paul defined the Gospel 
as the "power of God unto salvation," 
and to the Apostle James the Gospel 
was the "perfect law of liberty." 

The Master enlarged upon that 
latter definition in His statement to 
those who listened to His words when 
He said : 

// ye continue in my word, then 
are ye my disciples indeed; and ye 
shall know the truth, and the truth 
shall make you free. (John 8:31-32.) 

Revelation given to us in our day 
(D. & C. 29:41-44) makes more un- 
derstandable the answer the Master 
made to Xicodemus who came to Him 
asking what he must do to be saved. 
In answer the Master replied, "Ye 
must be born again" — born of the 
water and of the spirit, or he could 
not see nor enter the kingdom of 
Heaven. 

Baptism by immersion symbolizes 
the death and burial of the man of 
sin ; and the coming forth out of the 



106 



TE KARERE 



water, the resurrection to a newness 
of spiritual life. After baptism, hands 
are laid upon the head of the baptized 
believer and he is blessed to receive 
the Holy Ghost. Thus does the one 
baptized receive the promise or gift 
of the Holy Ghost or the privilege of 
being brought back into the presence 
of one of the Godhead, by obedience 
to whom and through his faithfulness 
one so blessed might receive the guid- 
ance and direction of the Holy Ghost 
in his daily walks and talks. To re- 
ceive such guidance and such direction 
from the Holy Ghost is to be spirit- 
ually reborn. 

Unfortunately, there are many of 
those who are blessed to receive the 
Holy Ghost and that companionship 
of one of the Godhead in their mortal 
lives who fail of their blessings. This 
was taught plainly by the Master in 
the parable of the sower who was 
represented as the teacher of the 
Gospel. He classified those to whom 
the Gospel was taught into four diff- 
erent groups ! Of one group He said, 
in effect : "These are those who re- 
ceived the seed by the wayside, and 
the birds came quickly and caught it 
up and stole it away," suggesting 
those who heard the word but lacked 
understanding and the devil was quick 
to take the word away from their 
hearts lest they would receive it and 
would believe to their salvation. 

Another class he compared to those 
who received the seed on stony ground, 
and it began to take root, but when 
the sun came out, it was scorched and 
withered away because it had not much 
root, suggesting those who received the 
seed and for a time had joy in that 
understanding, but then when persecu- 
tion and affliction comes because of 
the word, they become offended and 
dwindle in the belief. 

Another group of those who hear 
the Gospel are the ones who receive 

it as among thorns, and the thorns 

after a tune choked out the seed. 



These, he said, were like those who 
let the cares of the world, the deceit- 
fulness of riches, and the pleasures and 
the lusts of the world, destroy their 
activity in the Church that might have 
brought them safely into eternal life. 

Fortunately, there were some who 
received the Gospel in good ground, 
and these brought forth some a 
hundred-fold, some sixty-fold and 
some thirty-fold. And that is just 
about the way the active membership 
of the Church seems to be grouped 
among us today, some giving full 
hundred percent service and some, 
unfortunately, only thirty-fold. 

Again, in this day the Lord gave 
us a revelation that suggested clearly 
the reasons why some men fail of 
their blessings. He said : 

Because their hearts are set so much 
upon the things of this world, and 
aspire to the honours of men, that 
they do not learn this one lesson — 
that the rights of the Priesthood arc 
inseparably connected with the powers 
of Heaven, and that the powers of 
Heaven cannot he controlled nor 
handled only upon the principles of 
righteousness. That they may be con- 
ferred upon us, it is true; but when 
7cv undertake to COVST our sins, Of 
to gratify our pride, our vain am- 
bition, or to exercise control or domin- 
ion or compulsion upon the souls of 
the children of men. in any degree 

of unrighteousness, behold, the heavens 
withdraw themselves; the Spirit of 
the Lord is grieved; and when it is 
withdrawn, . Imen to the Priesthood 

or the authority of that man. Behold, 
ere he is WWOre, he is left unto himself, 
to kick against the pricks. tt> persecute 
the saints, mid to fu/ht a<hiinst God, 

(I). & C 121 :35 38 I 

That it seems tO me. .is u e have 
experienced it. is ah< nit the piDgl i 

way that men begin to t.iii away They 
first begin to "kick against the pricks." 
I have wondered what that means 



March, 1952 



These, no doubt, are the pricks of the 
Gospel. I wonder, perhaps, if they are 
not these things President Clark called 
"restraints," the restraints of the Word 
of Wisdom, the restraints imposed in 
keeping the Sabbath Day holy, in- 
junctions against card playing, the re- 
straints imposed by following out the 
welfare programme. And so we might 
go on. These are the restraints against 
which some people seem to rebel and 
are kicking constantly against — the 
"pricks" of the Gospel. 

I remember in this connection what 
somebody said in classifying human- 
kind. He said there were only three 
kinds of people in the world — "Saints, 
Ain'ts, and Complaints," and perhaps 
the "Complaints" would represent 
those who seem to be kicking against 
the pricks. These are the ones who 
next begin to "persecute the Saints" 
and, finally, "to fight against God." 

I remember a few years ago, upon 
assignment from the Presidency and 
the Council of the Twelve, I inter- 
viewed a man who, because of his 
sinning, had fallen away and had been 
excommunicated from the Church. He 
said to me : I want to bear you this 
testimony that the last few years have 
been a pretty rugged road. When I 
received the pronouncement of the 
court that excommunicated me from 
the Church, it was just as though 
someone had turned off the light to 
my soul. I was left in complete dark- 
ness from that time forward." 

In the Masteri's sermon on the 
Mount He made an expressive declar- 
ation when He said : 

Blessed are the pure in heart: for 
they shall see God. (Matt. 5:8.) 

You will remember that in His life- 
time there were some who saw Him 
only as the son of the carpenter. 
There were some who said that be- 
cause of His words He was drunken 
with strong wine — that He was a 
winebibber. There were some who 



even thought Him to be possessed of 
devils. Only those who were the pure 
in heart saw Him as the Son of God. 

So it is today. There are some who 
look upon the leaders of this Church 
and God's annointed as men who are 
possessed of selfish motives. By diem 
the words of our leaders are always 
twisted to try to bring a snare to the 
work of the Lord. Mark well those 
who speak evil of the Lord's an- 
nointed for they speak from impure 
hearts. Only the "pure in heart" see 
the "God" or the divine in man and 
accept our leaders and accept them as 
prophets of the Living God. 

The testimonies of our leaders, in 
this connection, have been very signifi- 
cant to me. I remember hearing Presi- 
dent Grant on several occasions say: 

Whenever certain individuals who 
are not living good lives begin to 
compliment me and to speak well of 
vie, I say to myself, "Heber J. Grant, 
what's the matter of you; you must 
not be doing your duty, or this kind 
of person wouldn't feel so kindly to- 
ward you." 

I remember the prophetic pronounce- 
ment that was made from this stand 
by President George Albert Smith a 
short time ago when he said: 

Many have belittled Joseph Smith, 
and those who have will be forgotten 
in the remains of mother earth and 
the odour of their infamy will be ever 
with them, but honour, majesty, and 
fidelity to God attached to Joseph 
Smith's name and exemplified by him 
will never die. 

I wish that statement could be heard 
to all the ends of the earth. I want 
to bear you my testimony that the 
experience I have had has taught me 
that those who criticise the leaders 
of this Church are showing signs of 
a spiritual sickness which, unless 
(Continued on Page 117) 



108 



TE KARERE 



FEATURING THE DISTRICTS . . 




The Cook Islands 

By ELDER ORTON L. WILKINS, Phoenix, Arizona, U.S.A. 

EIA orana e te au taeake i te enua 
o Nu Tirani e i te au enua o teia 
ao hei. 

"And it came to pass that Hagoth, 
he being an exceedingly curious man, 
therefore he went forth and built him 
an exceedingly large ship . . . And be- 
hold, there were many of the Ncphites 
who did enter therein and did sail 
forth with much provisions . . . ." 
(Alma 63:5-6.) 

From America they came, and 
peopled the islands of the sea. The 
people among whom we are working 
are descendants of these Nephite 
people from the days of the Book of 
Mormon, and are in many ways like 
them. As we labour among them we 
see that they are a people whose lives 
are built on simple faith in the Lord. 

It is this people to whom the Church 
came back in the years close to the 
turn of the century. Two missionaries 
came to Rarotonga from Tahiti to 
establish the Gospel here in the Cook 
Islands. They stayed about a year and 
then returned to Tahiti without bring- 
ing one soul into the Church. The 
people were nol ready for the Cospel 
in those days and the Lord waited 
until the years of the Second World 
War until He saw fit to let the Gospel 
once again come to this people. Elder 
Fritz Kroger came to Rarotonga as 
the firsl missionary since the early 
days, and he sowed the seeds of the 
( lo pel whi< h have borne fruit I fe 
-111*1 the elders who have followed him 
have had the privilege of baptizing 222 
souls into the ( hunk 

Rarotonga was the first island in 

the- group tO receive the ( iotpel, and 

then in I teceraber oi 1949 Elder I Euane 
( !hadwi< k and I angai ■ m Kainuku, i 



Maori Priest, went to Aitutaki, the 
second island in the group to receive 
the elders of the Church. From that 
time until now the Church there has 
grown to where we have almost 70 
members at present. 

In September of 1950 Elder Melvin 
Tagg, along with another Maori bro- 
ther, Harry T. Strickland, went on 
a tour of the southern group, spending 
a short time on three of the islands. 
They stopped for two weeks in Mauke 
and while there baptized four con- 
verts, one of whom was the daughter 
of the queen of the island. Since that 
time we have had to leave Mauke 
without missionaries due to the short- 
age of elders, and are labouring on 

the two original islands of Rarotonga 

and Aitutaki. with the district office 

in Rarotonga. 

Our work fof the past year in 

Rarotonga has been for the most part 
building a place for the tnissii 

tO live in. We were able to secure a 

section of land on the beach of one of 

the Villages, Of) the main side of the 
island where a mission home has heen 

built. The buildings are of nath i 

struction and have the picturesque 

co, onul leaf roofs w e had to cut 



March. 1952 



109 



the bush off the section and by doing 
so were able to saw enough lumber 
to build one of the houses and part 

ot the second one. 

A lot of good has been done among 
the non-members of the Church by a 
number of concerts which have been 
given from time to time. In the past 
two years we have put on two Gold 
and Green Balls in Rarotonga and 
they have been "the talk of the is- 
land." The people have never seen 
anything like them before. 

We have a fully organized Branch 
in Rarotonga and the local brethren 
are in charge. All of the auxiliaries 
of the Church are functioning well, 
under the leadership of the Saints, 
with the elders in an advisory capacity. 
We have a number of Primaries in 
the different villages, one of which is 
made up entirely of non-members. 

The truck which President Young 
sent over to us has enabled us to do 
much good missionary work in many 
different ways, and the Lord certainly 
has blessed us in our various activities. 

On the Island of Aitutaki we have 
been able to do a lot of preaching, 
as we have not had the building pro- 
jects to worry about, but have been 
able to spend our time visiting the 
people. We have secured a section of 
land here, but due to the fact that the 
lease is not yet final we have been 
unable to go ahead with the building 
of a mission home, and are now living 
in the original house which was built 
by Elder Chadwick and his companion. 
We have all the materials on hand for 
two nice little houses, which will be 
native style, of course. One will serve 
as a sleeping room and office while 
the other will be a living room and 
kitchen. Along with the help of the 
Saints, and other friends, we dug a 
well on the land which will finally be 
ours, as the only water supply on the 
island is either from wells or rain. 



The elders are in charge of the 
Branch in Aitutaki as none of the 
brothers hold the High Priesthood as 
yet. The.re is also a Relief Society 
and an M.I. A. organization function- 
ing at present. 

Our first concert on Aitutaki was 
put on last November and we drafted 
a lot of help from the non-members. 
With their help our few members put 
on a concert which the people say 
was one of the best they have ever 
seen, and the new head teacher for 
the Aitutaki School said he never 
expected to see anything as well done 
or as beautiful here in the islands. 
Because of the way in which the people 
received our concert we decided to put 
on a Gold and Green Ball, and are now 
in full swing preparing for it. By the 
time you people are reading this article 
it will either have been a howling suc- 
cess or a big failure. I am sure that 
with the blessings of the Lord it will 
be the former. 

Over here we feel somewhat like a 
stepchild of the Mission. Although 
there is a lot of similarity between 
the languages, they are different. We 
only see the Mission President oc- 
casionally and we are cut off from 
X.Z. in general. 

Our living here is much different 
to that of the elders in New Zealand. 
Some of our houses have gravel floors 
and we live on native foods, never 
getting fresh meat unless a boat comes 
in. There are no movies to attend in 
Aitutaki and no newspaper, so we 
haven't the slightest idea as to what 
is going on in the world. We do have 
all the things that mean the most, 
though. We have good companions, 
work among fine people and the never- 
ending blessings of our Father in 
Heaven are with us. 

The future holds much more growth 
than the past, as there are ten more 



110 



TE KARERE 



islands to which we will some day 
send elders. This is a most fertile 
field for missionary work and it will 
continue to grow in the years to come. 
Just like the coral reefs which sur- 
round these beautiful islands, the 



Gospel will grow slowly but surely 
until it forms a breakwater against 
the storms on the sea of the lives of 
God's chosen people living here. 

Yes, the Lord has blessed us here 
in the Cook Islands. 



By ELDER AND SISTER J. CASH SMITH 
Smithfield, Utah. 



ON taking out your map of New 
Zealand and tracing your way up 
the East Coast towards the north, you 
run into the Mahia Peninsula. Much 
of the early history of the Church in 
New Zealand is connected with this 
famous landmark. It was here in the 
Mahia District that the Gospel of 
Jesus Christ was first accepted to 
any great extent by any sizeable num- 
ber. It is therefore "the seed plot" of 
the New Zealand Mission. No matter 
in what district you go, throughout 
the New Zealand Mission you will 
find faithful Latter-day Saints who 
have come from the Mahia District. 
This is the home of about 780 Saints. 
They are organized into five branches 
and four neighbourhood Sunday 
Schools. 

Recently Elders Christensen and 
Collings, under the direction of Elder 
King, made a ten-day trip to the 
southern end of the district, travelling 
part time on horse-back and bicycles, 
visiting Saints, some who had not seen 
elders for five years. 

( loming recently to the Mahia I )is- 

tt r it t are Elder and Sister J. Cash 

Smith and their daughter, Kaj Dawn, 
who will make their headquarters at 

Xnhaka. With their automobile, and 
the help of the Other elders, the 

Smith are attempting, during the com- 
ing year, to visit each branch and 
neighbourhood Sunday S< hod at 1. .1 1 

On© •' mi piith. 



The Lord has been kind to the 
good people of Mahia — they are indeed 
blessed. Here at Xuhaka, the centre 
of the District, is a beautiful carved 
house which is a great asset in help- 
ing to promote the work of the Lord 
to the people of the world. People 
from all walks of life come to its doors 
where we, as missionaries, are able to 
expound the Gospel unto them. Many 
good contacts and friends are made in 
this manner. 

In this beautiful building comes joy 
and sadness both. Recently we had a 
joyous one a wedding, uniting Willie 
Watene and Annie Pirihi in solemn 
bonds m|' matrimony. She was a beauti- 
ful bride and the groom very hand- 
some. Later that same da\ our be- 
loved Sister Te Aroha Mete passed 
away. This sister has passed on to her 
Father in Heaven to another sphere 
of life for sin- has fulfilled that pas- 
sage of scripture which tells us. "lie 
that endureth to the end. the same 

shall be saved." She was horn in the 
Church <>7 years ago and has spent a 
lifetime of service serving her fellow 

men. Never having had children of 

her own she has fostered main, learn- 
ing the tine meaning 

FOSTER MOTHER 

The ties which bind hit to </ child 
ttronger (/»/</ more lttsiin<i than 
flesh <"'</ blood alone, 
V01 thonld we pity one 



March, 1<>52 



1 1 1 




Who learned from years of desperate 

dearth 
Hozv very little motherhood 
Depends on giving birth. 

That same evening Bro. Phil Hopi 
from Gisborne passed away very sud- 



denly. Thirty-seven years of age, he 
was rhourned by many. He was well 
liked for his genial smile and good 
nature which helped greatly in being 
superintendent of the Gisborne Sun- 
day School. 

We are looking forward to our first 

Hui Pariha in many years and we are 
very busy preparing for it. All 
branches have promised good support 
and we feel with everyone behind us 
it is going to be a great success. 

The eyes of the world are upon us 
so do not hide beneath the bushel, but 
let your light so shine that others see- 
ing your good works might use your 
example and magnify themselves to 
greater heights. We can help each 
other, individually or as a group, in 
this way if we will put forth the effort 
to do so. This is what our Saviour 
wants us to do. 



Mass CUoUs tflcei 



All Choirs of the Mission will meet together as a 
climax to the HUI TAU PAGEANT and sing the beauti- 
ful "KIA NGAWARI." Prepare your Choir now for this 
occasion. The arrangement of "Kia Ngawari" that will 
be sung is the arrangement now on sale in most music 
shops at 2/- per copy. We also have them on sale here 
in the Mission Office at 2/- per copy but with the proceeds 
going toward the Auckland Chapel Fund. We will look 
forward to your Choir being present in all its glory. 



TE KARERE 



Ko Wai Ma Nga Kai Arahi Apopo 



By PETER N. BRYERS 



TENA koutou e nga iwi katoa me 
nga hoa aroha. I ahau e noho ana 
i te Hui Tau kua pahemo ake nei e 
whakarongo ana i nga korero a nga 
kai kauwhau me nga ahuatanga o te 
Hahi i nga ra kei te haere mai, me 
nga mahi ka mahia e te Hahi i nga 
ra e heke iho nei. Ko toku whakaaro 
nui rawa e penei ana. "Ko wai ma 
nga kai whakahaere mo te hahi i nga 
ra e heke iho nei ? E kore te hahi e 
arahina tonutia e nga apiha e whaka- 
haere ana i te Hahi inaianei. No reira, 
whakaaro, ka arahina te Hahi e nga 
tamariki o enei ra. Ko nga tamariki 
o enei ra, ka whakaritea hei kai wha- 
kahaere mo te Hahi i nga ra kei te 
haere mai. No reira ko te patai tenei 
ma tatou. "E whakaakona ana ranei 
ratou. Ara nga tamariki ki nga tika- 
nga o te Hahi ?" E ako ana ranei ratou 
i nga mahi o te Hahi kia rite ratou 
hei kai whakahaere. Me tahuri o tatou 
whakaaro ki nga tikanga o te Rongo- 
pai i whakawhiwhia ki a tatou i roto 
i to tatou tamarikitanga. 

I pera ranei me nga akoranga i 
whakawhiwhia ki nga tamariki o naia- 
nei ? E pehea ana o tatou whakaaro 
ki tenei whakaakoranga, e pai ana, e 
kino ana ranei ? 

Me whakaako tatou ia tatou tama- 
riki ki nga mea papai i whakawhiwhia 
Ida tatou, ki nga matua. 

Ko nga mea e akona ana ki a ratou 
inaianei, e arahiana ia ratou hei kai 
whakaako mo apopo. 

N'ui atu nga whakaakoranga o tenei 
hahi i nga whakaakoranga o era atu 
hahi katoa puts noa i te a< >. 

Ho reira, ka inoi te l [ahi Id nga 
kai whakahaere mo nga ra K « ■ i te 
haere mai, Ida whai alma pai, Ida 
whai hinengaro kaha, kia whai main 



pai ano hoki, ma o tatou tauira e nui 
atu ai o ratou matauranga. Mehemea 
kahore ano tatou kia timata inaianei 
tonu kei hea te wahi pai rawa mo te 
whakaako ia tatou tamariki ? I roto 
i te whare wai piro, i te reihi (race 
track) ranei? Kahore, kei nga kura, 
kei nga kainga, me nga whare karakia? 
ko era nga wahi papai rawa mo tenei 
mahi. E ma ana nga tamariki, no 
reira, ko nga mea e akona ana e ratou 
inaianei ka mau tonu i a ratou tae 
atu ki o ratou matenga. Kia whakaako 
tatou ia tatou tamariki i te ahuatanga 
o te tikanga o te Kupu o te Mataura- 
nga me era atu tikanga nui o te Rongo 
Pai, kei taka ratou. E matakitaki ana 
nga tamariki ki a tatou mahi ia wa 
ia wa, no reira, e hoa ma, kaati te 
totohe me era atu mahi a te Rewera. 
Me pupuri tatou i nga tikanga katoa 
o te Hahi. E whakahaua ana nga 
Hunga Tapu kia pupuri i era atu 
tikanga, haun.ua te tikanga te Kupu 
te Matauranga. T whakaakona nga 
akonga e te Karaiti i tana mihana ki 
tenei a<>. Naana ratou i whakaako. 
Nga Hunga Tapu. Kei te pupuri ratou 

i enei nua. I roto i nga kain.ua te 
Hunga Tapu e taea ana <.■ nga tamariki 
te ako i etahi o nua tikanga papal 

rawa hei pain.ua mo ratou. M.i te 

pupuri i nua tikanga o te Rong 

c nua matua. ka hiahia nua tamariki 
ki te whakarite i nua main katoa te 

Hahi i nga ra kei te haere mai. 

Nga Whakatauki | proverbs > JJ 6, 
"Whakatupuria ake te tamaiti i te 
ara a haere ai ia. \ ka kaumatua, <■ 
kore c mahue i a ia." 

Ko • , me nga kawenata 

\i< tenei ano. me I 
he tamariki a nga matua i Hiona, i 
roto ranei i etahi o ona taldwa kua 
oti te whakatu, ■ kahore. e aki 
ratou kia matau ki te whakaakoranga 



March, 1952 



113 



o te ripeneta, o te whakapono hoki 
ki a te Karaiti te Tama a te Atua ora, 
ki te rumaki, me te hoatutanga o te 
Wairua Tapu, he mea na te whaka- 
pakanga o nga ringaringa, i te mea 
ka waru nga tau, ka tau tena he ki 
runga i nga matenga o nga matua. 

"No te mea ko tenei ka meinga hei 
ture ki nga tangata katoa e noho ana 
i Hiona, i roto ranei i etahi o ona 
takiwa kua oti te whakatu." 



E hoa ma, kia kaha ki te ako i 
enei mea papai. Kei te tino mohio 
ahau ki te pupuri tatou ki enei mahi 
papai o te Hahi ka whiwhi tatou i nga 
manaakitanga nunui a te Atua. No 
reira, kia kaha i nga \va katoa, kia 
ngawari. 

Ma te Atua e manaaki e tiaki i roto 
i a koutou mahi papai. E whakakaha 
hoki i o koutou wairua. 




HERE and THERE in the MISSION 



New Arrivals 

Arriving via the Sierra on the 28th 
of January another couple came to the 
land of the "long-white-cloud" to pro- 
claim the restored Gospel to the people 
living within our mission field. Thev 



have had experience that will be valu- 
able wherever they are called to labour 
while they are here. The Browns left 
their business dealings in the hands 
of their children, as they will be taking 
care of a much more important busi- 




are ELDER ENOCH E. BROWN 
& SISTER ELIZABETH BROWN, 
who hail from Coalville, Utah. Elder 
and Sister Brown have been active in 
the Church throughout their lives and 



ness for the next year or so. They are 
the pa rents of five children and seven- 
teen grandchildren. The Brown's first 
assignment has been to the Hawke's 
Bay District. 



114 



TE KARERE 



SEEK YE LEARNING 



Why You Dream 



ALL people dream sometimes when 
they are asleep. Some even "day 
dream" when they are awake, and if 
you are one of these, you may find 
it easier to understand what real 
dreams are. When you are day-dream- 
ing, all kinds of thoughts and fancies 
pass through your mind. Many of 
these are things yon wish for, hut 
know that you arc not likely to have. 
You know that these thoughts and 
fancies are not real, hecause, when 
you are awake, that part of your 
mind with which you use your will 
and reason (your "conscious mind") 
is also awake. But there is another 
part of your mind called the "sub- 
conscious, " which is always storing 
up memories and wishes and know- 
ledge, and which is kept under control 
by the conscious mind. When yon sleep 



the conscious mind sleeps also, and the 
subconscious mind is no longer under 
its guiding influence. Then all its 
thoughts and wishes come to the sur- 
face as dreams, though they seem to 
you like real happenings. 



Sometimes they are pleasant hap- 
penings and you remember them as 
pleasant dreams. Sometimes they are 
disagreeable and even frightening, and 
then yon awake out of a bad dream, 
or what is called a nightmare. These 
bad dreams are often caused by some 
pain or discomfort, such as indigestion 
alter a late or heavy supper. You are 
not able to realise with your conscious 
mind that it is only bodily discomfort 
and so it appears in your subconscious 
mind as a terrifying dream. 



What The Sun Is Made Of 



THE sun looks like a bright, shining 
globe, which normally giv< 
a brilliant light that we cannot bear 
to look at it for long. It can be seen 
better on a fogg> morning or through 

smoked glass, when il appears as a red 

iphere 

We know that the sun lias an "a1 
niospiicre," like the atmosphere that 
urrounda the earth, but the gases are 
not i bi'-tl- 0x3 gen and nitn >gen, but 

li' dr 11 and helium, a well as many 

metals in the form i 1 gases Altogether 

■ different elements have been 

tracked down in the mih. Some extend 

in the atmosphere onlj about 500 

•;. helium and < al 

' 111111 extend to upw ard l 'i 9,000 miles 



The highest temperature we kaow 
on earth, about 6,000 degrees, is the 

lowest on the sun. At the centre the 
temperature is believed to l>e between 
30 and 60 million degrees ! Tin 1 
which the sun gives out 
of this terrific temperature mea 

tour million tons 
Fortunately for us, the sun is so large 
thai even this huge loss van go 01 

millions of years without our I 
much less heat. We find that the sun. 
in axis, but 
be. an e of the great temperature and 

fluid ' all the surla 

not move al the same rate. At the 

While in other parts it 

days 



March. 19. r >l! 



Ill 





• 


NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 


1- 




ROTO 1 TE HITORI TE HAHI 






(Essentials 


A • A. 




in Church History) 


; JL '^^ 




Translated by George R. Hall 


™ 





Haere Tonu Te Hunga Mihingare 

IPAU te rua ki te torn wiki e 
noho ana nga kaumatua mihingare 
nei i Katirana, kote haerenga, ka 
mahue iho ma te iwi i uru hou mai 
ki te Hahi e mahi nga whakahaere o 
te Peka. I muri tata iho ka uru mai 
enei ki te Hahi, Ko Hirini Rikitona, 
ko Wherariko G. Wiremu, ko Ihaka 
Morei, Ko Hoani Mateko, ko Rai- 
mana Waiti ; ko Eruera Patereti, ka 
ahua roa ka uru hei mema mo te 
tohungatanga. 

Ka oti nei ta ratou mahi nui, ka 
mahue iho etahi hei kai tiaka i te 
kahui iti nei, ko to ratou haerenga i 
to ratou huarahi me te mau ano ratou 
i a Takuta Wherariko G. Williams 
kia haere i to ratou tira. Ka tae ratou 
ki tetahi wahi e rima tekau maero te 
tawhiti atu ki te hauauru o te Kote- 
rene. I atiu ratou i te whenua i nohoia 
tuatahitia e Parei P. Parata ; i honei 
ka noho ratou he kauwhau ano te 
mahi i te rongopai. He nui te takatu 
i pa ki te iwi i to ratou rongonga i 
enei mea, tetahi take i tino takatu ai 
ko te hau atu o nga rongo o nga mahi 
i mua noa atu o te taenga atu o nga 
mihingare. Ko Haimona Kaata tenei 
ka uru mai, a ahakoa ra he nui tonu 
te kawa mai o te whakatete a te hoa 
riri me ta ratou apitihana, kaore i roa 
ka tu he peka ka uru mai etahi atu 
tangata, tae rawa pea ki te ono tekau 



te rarangi ingoa o te peka. Ka tae te 
ropu mihingare nei, ka patata atu ki 
te riu o Ohaio, ka torotoro haere i 
nga Iniana Waniote (Wyandots), i 
whakamanuhiritia ratou, a, i koa hoki 
te hunga Iniana ki nga korero wana- 
nga mo o ratou tupuna o roto i te 
pukapuka a Moromona. He maha tonu 
nga ra e noho ana ratou i Hihinati 
(Cincinatti). I raru ratou i konei i te 
kore Poti hei kawe i a ratou ki ko 
atu, haere ana ma raro waewae ki 
Hato Rui (St. Louis). Kua waenganui 
i naianei te hotoke kua pehi iho nga 
taumahatanga o nga nuku whenua 
kaore nei e haeretia ana e te tangata. 
Whanatu tonu ratou tae noa ki In- 
dependence, Jackson County, Missouri, 
i taua wa he pou teihana noaiho nei 
no nga mahi o tera wahi o nga rohe 
o te United States. No te tau 1831 i 
tae ai ratou ki Independence, no te 
timatanga tata iho o taua tau. I tenei 
wa kua taea e ratou te haere o te 
kotahi mano e rima rau maero, i ma 
roto i te ngahere, i te wa tino pukeri 
o te marangai, o te tau. E wha ma- 
rama ratou ki te huarahi otira i taua 
wa poto, h maha nga mano tangata 
o te pakeha i rongo e kauwhautia ana 
te rongopai, apiti atu ki enei ko nga 
iwi e rua o nga Iniana. Kua ara nga 
whare karakia ki etahi wahi, kua kaha 
rawa nga mahi i roto i nga wahi o te 
huarahi i haeretia nei e ratou. Ko 



116 



TE KARERE 



tenei te haere tuatahi tonu ki te taha 
hauauru o te teita o Xu Iaaka, o nga 
Mihingare o te Hahi, a ko nga whaka- 
otinga o konei i hira hei painga nui 
mo te Hahi i roto o nga tau Maha i 
muri mai. 

Te Haringa i Haria Ai Te Puka- 
puka a Moromona Ki Nga Ramana 

I roto i nga rohe whenua o nga 
Ramana tetahi huakitanga a nga kau- 
matua i mahi kauwhau i te rongopai 
ki nga Terawea (Delaware), he hapu 
Iniana, I hoatu kia ratou he pukapuka 
Moromona, i tangohia atu e ratou i 
runga i te tino hari o ratou ngakau 
Na Oriwa Kautere i whakamarama 
kia ratou te putanga mai o te Puka- 
puka a Moromona ; a na tetahi tangata 
ko- Puuru te ingoa i whakamaori nga 
korero ki nga Iniana ; ko Puuru tetahi 
i whakapono ki nga kauwhau a nga 
kaumatua. I hoatu hoki ki nga Iniana 
mohio ki te korero pukapuka etahi 
kape o te Pukapuka a Moromona. Ko 
te korero whakmihi tenei a ratou ki 
nga kaumatua. "E whakawhetai ana 
matou ki o matou hoa o te kiri ma, 
i haere mai nei i te whenua mamao, 
a i roto i nga whakamamaetanga, kua 
korerotia mai e ratou etahi korero pai ; 
te tino pai rawa, ko te korero mo te 
pukapuka o matou tupuna, uru rawa 
te koa ki konei (me te papaki i tana 
manawa). Kaore i tino roa rawa te 
main pai nei e noho tuturu ana, i te 



mea kua tae ke nga rongo ki nga 
rohe kua nohoia i Mihiuri, a na nga 
puahae o nga piriti o nga hahi ka 
tonoa a ratou tangata, a na enei i pana 
nga kaumatua hia puta ki waho o 
nga pa o nga Iniana, me te ki he 
whakakaporaru noaiho ta ratou mahi 
ite "Marie o nga hapu Iniana." A ki 
te kore ratou e nuku, ka tukua atu 
ma nga hoia ratou e whakanuku. I 
roto i te pa pouritanga mai o te apiti- 
hana ka unu nga kaumatua nei i a 
ratou, a, ko te mutunga tenei o te 
Mihona tuatahi ki nga Ramana; I 
timata atu ano hoki i konei ta ratou 
mahi ki nga pakeha o nga riu o Tiaki- 
hana Kauti. Heiaha, i te mea kua 
rangona ketia nga korero o te oranga 
tonutanga ki nga hapu nunui e toru 
o nga Iniana ; ki nga Kateraauku 
(Catteraugus), o Xu Iaaka, ki nga 
Waniote o Ohaio, ki nga Terawea o 
Mihiuri. I konei ka tau te korero ki a 
hoki a Parei P. Parata ki Katirana, 
a tera pea i reira ki Xu Iaaka, ki te 
kawe i nga ripoata o a ratou mahi, 
ki te tirotiro i nga peka i whakaturia 
e ratou i o ratou haerenga, a ki te 
tiki pukapuka ano hoki. Xo Pepuere 
i timataria ai e ia tana haere, ko 
tana kotahi. I Katirana ka tutaki 
raua ko te Poropiti. i haere mai te 
Poropiti ki tenei wahi, a i hoatu e 
Parei P. Parata ana ripoata katoa ki 
a Hohepa Mete, ki te Poropiti o te 
Hahi. 



-&j£# 



L.D. PROPHETS SPEAK (Continued from Page 108) 



i urbed, will bring about eventually 
spiritual death. I want i" bear my 
testimony as well that those who in 
public seek by their criticism t<> be 
little our leaders or bring them into 
disr< I'nte, u ill bring upon then 

more hint than iiih.ii those whom they 



seek thus to malign. I have watched 
over the years, ami I have read of 
tin- history "i man) "i those who fell 
in- in this ( hni . h and 1 want • 
iv that n.« apostate whi 
lei't this Church ever prospered as an 
iiitlueiK e in his community tin • 



March, 1952 



117 



And these signs shall follow 



THE POWER OF EVIL MADE MANIFEST AND OVERCOME 

Testimony of CLARENCE H. TINGEY 
President of the Australian Mission from 1929 to 1935. 



IN 1929 a young man from Northern 
Utah came into the Mission. His 
mother had died some years previous, 
leaving the husband and the boy among 

her survivors, who continued to live 
upon the farm that was owned by the 
family. Later the father became very 
ill. He had cherished the thought that 
some day the boy would fill a mission. 
And during his illness his son had 
promised him that, should he be called, 
he would gladly go. 

The father died, and the boy con- 
tinued to run the farm, living alone. 
Then, one day in 1929, the opportunity 
for him to keep his promise to his 
father came. But just how to manage 
affairs, he did not know. 

His quorum and good neighbours 
came to his rescue. They promised to 
take over and carry on until he should 
return. And so he accepted the call, 
boarded up the windows of his house 
and left his property in the hands of 
his friends. 

Some time after he had been in the 
field a report came to the office from 
the president of the district which con- 
tained an account of a circumstance 
which the young man, above referred 
to, and several other elders experi- 
enced in the district mentioned. Briefly 
action, or attack, but managed to reach 
the pulpit and succeeded in pronounc- 
ing a few words of closing prayer, 
stated, the report was as follows : — 

At the conclusion of the regular 
Sunday evening services, the young 
missionary of whom I was writing, 
was called upon to offer the benedic- 
tion. As he arose to do so, he was 
suddenly seized with a noticeable re- 
after which he hastened out of the 
building through a convenient exit. 



Two of his companions who had 

observed that something was wrong, 
followed him and found him pacing 
back and forth in a narrow passage- 
way between the church building and 
another on the adjoining property. He 
was suffering extreme mental and 
physical distress. His face was drawn 
and twisted, his eyes were bulging, and 
he was mumbling incoherently. His 
companions helped him into the living 
quarters of the missionaries. 

The convulsive attack persisted, and 
several attempts were made to admin- 
ister to him, but the power that had 
taken possession of his body resisted 
the attempts of administration, until, 
finally, the evil influence was rebuked. 

The departure of this evil power 
from the elder's body was recognized 
by all of the missionaries present, and 
after the final administration all trace 
of the attack left the elder and all 
sat down, completely exhausted. After 
a few moments the young man arose 
and explained that during the time 
he was under the spell of the power 
that attacked him he seemed to be in 
the presence of his father, who was 
trying to converse with him, but that 
there was a barrier between them that 
could not be penetrated. And he added : 

"Brethren. I hope none of you will 
ever do as I have done. For the past 
month I have repeatedly prayed for 
an increased testimony of the truth of 
this work and have asked the Lord 
to use me as an instrument through 
which the power of the Priesthood 
might be made manifest. I know that 
Jesus Christ is the Son of God and 
that Joseph Smith is a true prophet 
of God."— Dated August 20, 1945. 



118 



TE KARERE 



THE GUY IN THE MIRROR 



When you get what you want in your struggle for self. 
Ami the world makes you king for a day. 

Then go to the mirror and look at yourself. 
And see what that guy has to say. 

For it isn't a man's fattier, or mother, or wife, 

Whose judgment upon him must pass. 
The feller whose verdict counts most in his life. 

Is the guy staring back from the (/lass. 

lie's the feller to please, never mind all the rest. 

For lie's with you clear to the end. 
And you've passed your most dangerous, difficult test. 

If the guy in the (/lass is your friend. 

You may be like Jack Horner and "chisel" a plum. 

And think that you're a wonderful guy. 
But the man in the glass says you're only a hum. 

If you can't look him straight in the eye. 

You can fool the whole world (town the pathway of 

wars. 

And get pais on the back as you pass, 
But your final reward will be heartaches or fears 
If you've cheated the auy in tlu 

I 'likimw 11. 



I DON'T CARE 



what you 




Your Lessons just aren't 
as good unless you sub- 
scribe to: — 

The Instructor 
Magazine 

15 - Per Year 



"THE INSTRUCTOR," 

514 Remuera Road, 
Auckland, S.E.2. 










uu 



u?M 



*4. 9. 91 



ad\a. 



V 






the >n:svi:\«.iit 




APRIL :: 1952 



MONTHLY MAGAZINE Of THE CHURC H 01 JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 



About Our Cover 



I N accordance with my determination to ask of God, I retired to 
the woods to make the attempt. It was on the morning of a 
beautiful, clear day, early in the spring of eighteen hundred and 
twenty. It was the first time in my life that I had made such an 
attempt, for amidst all my enxieties I had never as yet made the 
attempt to pray vocally. 

After I had retired to the place where I had previously designed 
to go, having looked around me, and finding myself alone, I kneeled 
down and began to offer up the desires of my heart to God. I had 
scarcely done so, when immediately I was seized by some power 
which entirely overcame me, and had such an astonishing influence 
over me as to bind my tongue so that I could not speak. Thick 
darkness gathered around me, and it seemed to me for a time as if 
I were doomed to sudden destruction. 

But, exerting all my power to call upon God to deliver me of 
the power of this enemy which had seized upon me. end at the very 
moment when I was ready to sink into despair and abandon myself 
to destruction — not to an imaginary ruin, but to the power of some 
actual being from the unseen world, who had such marvellous power 
as I had never before felt in any being — just at this moment of erreat 
clarm, I saw a pillar of light exactly over my head above the bright- 
ness of the sun, which descended gradually until it fell upon me. 

It no sooner appeared than I found myself delivered from the 
enemy which held me bound. When the lierht rested upon me I saw 
two Personages, who.-e brightness and glory defy all description, 
standing above me in the air. One of them spake unto me, calling 
me by name, and said, pointing to the other — "THIS IS MY BE- 
LOVED SON. HEAR HIM!" 

My object in going to inquire of the Lord was to know which 
of all the sects was right, that I might know which to join. No 
sooner, therefore, did I get possession of myself, so as to be able to 
speak, than I asked the Personages who stood above me in the light, 
which of all the sects was right — and which I should join. 

I was answered that I might join none of them, for they were 
all wrong; and the Personage who addressed me said that all their 
creeds were an abomination in his sight; that those professors were 
all corrupt; that: "they draw near to me with their lips, but their 
hearts are far from me; they teach for doctrines the commandments 
of men, having a form of godliness, but they deny the power thereof." 

He again forbade me to join with any of them; and many other 
things did he say unto me, which I cannot write at this time. When 
I came to myself again, I found myself lying on my back, looking 
up into heaven. When the light had departed, I had no strength; but 
soon recovering in some degree. I went home. And as I leaned up to 
the fireplace, mother inquired wh? ! the matter WcS. I replied, "Never 
mind, all is well — I am well enough off " I then said to my mother, 
"I have learned for myself that Presbyterianism is not true " It 
seems as though the adversary was aware, at a very early period of 
my life, that I was destined to Drove a disturber and an annoyer of 
his k : ngdom; else why should the powers of darkness combine 
against me? Why the opposition and persecution that arose against 
me, alrrost in rry infancy? 

I had actually seen a light, and in the midst of that light I saw 
two Personages, and thev d:'d in reality speck to me; and though I 
was ha*ed and persecuted for saying that I had seen a vision, yet it 
was true; and while they were persecuting me, reviling me. and 
speaking all manner of evil against me falsely for so saying, I was 
led to say in my heart: Why persecute me for telling the truth? I 
have actually seen a vision; and who am I that I can withstand God, 
or why does the world think to make me deny whr-t I have actually 
- c een? For I had seen a vision; I knew it, and I knew that God knew 
it, and I could not deny it, neither dared I do it; at least I knew that 
by so doing I would offend God, and come under condemnation 

— Excerpts from Joseph Smith's Own Story; P. of G.P. 



TE KARERE 



Established 1907 



Volume 46 



Number 4 



April, 195° 



Sidney J. Ottley 

Joseph Hay 

George R. Biesinger 

Grover D. Jensen 

James A. Larsen 

John A. Osburn 

Bruce P. Sloan 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) 



Tumuaki Mihana 

. . Kaunihera Tuatahi 

Kaunihera Taurua 

Hekeretari o te Mihana 

. . Assistant Secretary 

Mission Recorder 

Etita 

. . Kaiwhakamaori 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 

"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; £2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in New Zealand as a rejfistered newspaper.) 



CONTENTS 



Editorial: 

"Another Witness" to Christ's Resurrection . . 



Special Features: 

Authorities of th. Church Of Jesus Christ of L D 

Mission Officer! 

Our Missionaries 

Programme for Bu! Tao 1952 

Menu for Hoi Tan 1961 

Church Features: 

Tin President*! Pace 

Women'i Corner 

lw i. lime ...i.i Eta oncilial ions 

Ti,. - World Church and it People 



8 


181 




LSI 




i«a 








i ii 




r:i 







e nnd There in the MlselOBI 

ii. Te and ti,. n In tl 
District Aettvit) tit 



i eiiih.m.i Maori > 

Pou -i ,,i 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE 

He Kupu Aroha 






By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 



THE GREATEST NEWS OF 
THE YEAR — "HUI TAU." 
Yes, that is where friends meet and 
reminisce and count the . blessings 
and other experiences of the year. 

That is where elders and sisters 
from across the sea exchange news 
from home and find out that the 
world is still going round there as 
well as it it here. 

There it is that testimonies flow 
freely under the Spirit which comes 
from unity of the fatih of many. There 
it is that the petty differences of the 
past are forgotten in the maize of 
beauty and harmony and love, inter- 
mixed to dispel all gloom and show 
forth that the Lord has not forsaken 
His people and that amid the strife 
of nations His Great Power and Love 
is still the moving force that impels 
men to righteousness and happiness. 

True, United Nations' conventions 
and assemblies, parliaments, congres- 
sional bodies, welfare league, unions 
and a thousand other organizations 
have their place so far as they go, 
but after all is said and done, the 
hearts of men cannot be legislated or 
forced into righteousness. The soul's 
desire of the inner man determines 
man's attitude toward his fellow man 
and his God, and the world is the sum 
total of the men who live in it. 



And so the "HUI TAU," where 
several thousand men, women and 
children meet for a week of devotion, 
singing lovely hymns of praise, speak- 
ing words of wisdom and counsel, 
calling upon the God of Abraham, 
Isaac and Jacob (the One and Only 
True God), in a single voice and joy- 
ously mingling in dance, games, 
pageantry and music to make our 
hearts rejoice in the accomplishments 
of humble effort during a year past. 

"HUI TAU," the voice of thousands 
with the heart of One, sanely and 
rapturously thanking God for His 
Mercies, and invoking His Spirit as 
a guide and Leader for the year ahead. 

Thousands of people without the 
stench of tobacco nor the contaminat- 
ing influence of liquor, without pro- 
fanity or vulgarity, with hearts bent 
on culture and beauty. 

"TO YOUR TENTS O ISRAEL." 
for it is "HUI TAU" time again, 
where we shall renew our hopes and 
our faith and our love for one another. 

"ME HAERE TATOU KI TE 
HUI TAU, KIA WHTWHIA AI 
TATOU I TE KIA WAIRUA, KIA 
KORE TATOU E MATE KAT. 
Aaaa. Ake TONU ATU " KA KITE 
TATOU IA TATOU I TE I "HUI 
TAU." 

Kia Ora Tatou. Na tou teina Aroha. 



124 



TE KARERE 




5 



Women's Cotote* 



fct 



By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 



HOME again! after five weeks, at- 
tending six Hui Parihas and sev- 
eral branch Relief Societies. A bit 
tired but well and happy in the thought 
that some little good had been accom- 
plished and our testimonies strength- 
ened through listening to others. 

As we flew from Christchurch to 
Dunedin and from there to Wellington 
I read a little pamphlet tucked in 
the pocket of the seat in front of me. 
It explained how the pilot up front 
had been trained for his job and 
through means of radio was in con- 
stant touch with ground forces 
long as he stayed "on the beam" there 
was nothing to worry about. The 
Steady hum of the motors assured us 
we were on the beam, so we were 
able to "fly through tlie air with the 
I of case" at a hundred and 
eighty-five miles per hour. Wonderful, 
isn't it? Saves so much time, wear 

and tear. 

Arc we trained for our job of 
living and teaching the Gospel l>\ ex- 
ample ? Do we keep in constanl tomb 

with the band tbat guides and duvets 

our a< tioni 10 tbat we keep %n the 

beam i " 



We had a plan to follow from the 
beginning of our journey on this earth. 
We were all born with a spark of 
spirituality and if we cultivate it we 
enjoy more and more of the Spirit 
of our Heavenly Father. It is this 
Spirit that give- us encouragement and 
urges us to do good. It lights the way 
and keeps us "on the beam." Let us 
not forget tbat the medium of prayer 
is the means of keeping in touch with 
our Heavenly Father. "Prayer is the 
passport to spiritual pov« 

Everybody is talking about Hui Tan 
now. The Relief Socierj 
working furiously t<> get their . 

ready in time. This will be my first 
Hui Tan. 1 know I have a lot t" learn 
but I can't help wondering where our 
plan has been all year. Why weren't 
these articles started right ftftl 

received your assignment at Hui Tau 
last year: Let's tr\ to make a plan 
this year tbat will give U s tune | 
good job and st ill not ba\e to ru»b. 

tie has said, "In plannin 
work, put your head into u before 

yOU put your foot into it" [{ 

.'. when 1 hii Tau i ames around. 



April, 1952 






From the Editor's Pee . . . 

"Another Witness" To Christ's 
Resurrection 



THEX charged he his disciples that 
they should tell no man that lie 
was Jesus the Christ. From that time 
forth began Jesus to shew unto His 
disciples, how that He must go unto 
Jerusalem, and suffer many tilings of 
the ciders and chief priests and scribes, 
and be killed, and be raised again the 
third day (Matt. 16:20-21). 

With these words the Saviour began 
to teach His disciples that He was to 
die for mankind and although many 
times later He spoke to them on the 
subject they never fully realized what 
He meant, for we read further : 

And as they came down from the 
mountain. He charged them that they 
should tell no man what things tliey 
had seen, till the Son of man was 
risen from the dead. And they kept 
that saying with themselves, question- 
ing one with another what the rising 
from the dead should mean (Mark 
9:9-10). 

We have all heard the story of 
the crucifixion many times, but on 
this occasion (the anniversary we cele- 
brate in commemoration of our Lord's 
death) it might be well to open our 
Xew Testaments and read again the 
story of the greatest miracle ever per- 
formed upon the face of the earth — 
the death, burial and resurrection of 
our Lord and Saviour, Jesus Christ. 
(This story may be found in Matt. 26 
to 28; Mark 14 to 16; Luke 22 to 
24; and John 18 to 21.) 

As mortal beings we can hardly 
imagine the agony and pain Jesus went 
through while on the cross. How then 
could we begin to imagine the suffer- 



ing of the night before in Gethsemane? 
Few of those present at His cruci- 
fixion knew of the spiritual pain and 
torment He had undergone the pre- 
vious night, although most of them 
wouldn't have cared even if they had 
have known. Looking down at His 
brothers and sisters who were there 
to perform this horrible crime, must 
have caused Him even more suffering 
than He was already going through, 
and in God-like mercy He prayed : 
"Father, forgive them; for they know 
not what they do." 

A short time later even one of the 
men who was crucified beside Him 
began to mock and revile Him, along 
with the crowd. But the other had a 
deeper understanding of the situation 
and rebuked him, saying, "Docst thou 
not even fear God, since thou art under 
the same sentence? And we, indeed 
justly; for we receive zAiat is due for 
the deeds we have done; but this man 
has done nothing ainiss." And he said 
to Jesus, "Remember me when thou 
earnest in thy kingdom." And He 
said to him, "Indeed I say to thee, 
This day thou shalt be with Me in 
paradise." (Luke 23:40-43, Greek 
translation.) 

A)id when the sixtJi hour was come, 
there was darkness over the whole 
land until the ninth Jiour. And at the 
ninth hour Jesus cried with a loud 
voice, saying, Eloi, Eloi, lama sabach- 
thani? which is, being interpreted, My 
God, My God, why hast thou forsaken 
Mc? (Mark 15~:33-34.) That the 
supreme sacrifice of the Son might be 
accomplished in all its fullness, the 
Father seems to have withdrawn His 



126 



TE KARERE 



immediate Presence, leaving to the 
Saviour of men the glory of a com- 
plete victory over the powers of sin 
and death. 

This period of utter forsakenness 
soon passed, however, and then came 
the only words from the Saviour's lips 
which record any emotion of physical 
pain, "I thirst." But even therein John 
saw the fulfillment of prophecy (John 
19:28; compare Psalms 69:21.) 

When Jesus, therefore, had received 
the vinegar, He said, It is finished: 
And when Jesus had cried with a 
loud voice, He said, Father, into Thy 
hands I commend My spirit: and 
having said thus, He gave up the 
ghost. And, behold, the veil of the 
temple was rent in twain from the top 
to the bottom; and the earth did quake, 
and the rocks rent. Now when the 
centurion, and they that were with 
him, watching Jesus, saw the earth- 
quake, and those things that were 
done, they feared greatly, saying. 
Truly this zcas the Son of God. And 
all the people that came together to 
thai sight, beholding the things which 
were done, smote their breasts, and 
returned. And all his acquaintance, 
and the women that follozi'cd him 
from Galilee, stood afar off, beholding 
these things. (Compilation of Matt. 
27:51, 54; Luke 23:46, 48-49; and 
John 19:30.) 

When His body had been brought 
down off the cross there was no need 
of breaking His bones for He had 
given His life of His own choice, but 
to be certain He was dead, one of the 
soldiers with a spear pierced His side, 
and forthwith came there out blood 
a tut water. And he that sazc it bare 
record, and his record is true: and he 
knoweth that he saith true, that ye 
might believe. Here again John saw 
the fulfillment of scripture (John 
19:34-35, 36-37). 

At the present time it is not proposed 
to make- a lengthy discussion on where 
Chris! went nor what He did while 



His body lay in the tomb. Suffice it to 
say that He (His spirit) went to the 
spirit world and there taught the 
gospel to those who had been "in the 
prison" as Isaiah foretold (Isaiah 24: 
22; 42:6-7). 

Then after the Sabbath had past, 
Mary Magdalene and other devoted 
women came to further annoint the 
body of the Lord. Here we have the 
first word of the Lord's resurrection 
when an angel appeared to them and 
said, "Why seek ye the living among 
the dead? He is not here, but is risen. 
Remember hoiv He spake unto you 
when He was yet in Galilee, saying, 
The Son of man must be delivered 
into the hands of sinful men, and be 
crucified, and the third day rise again. 
But go your way, tell His disciples 
and Peter that He goeth before you 
ijito Galilee: there shall ye see Him, 
as He said unto you. And they re- 
membered his zvords (Compl. Luke 
24:5-8; Mark 16':7). And after they 
had told the eleven, "arose Peter, and 
ran unto the sepulchre; and stooping 
down, he beheld the linen clothes laid 
by themselves, and departed, wonder- 
ing in himself at that which z^'as come 
to pass. For as yet they knezi' not the 
scripture, that He must rise again from 
the dead (Compl. Luke 24:12; John 
20:9; see Tohn 12:23-24, 32-33; Luke 
24:25-27). 

Then Christ appeared to Mary 
(John 20:11-18) before ascending to 
His Father and afterwards to other 
favoured women (Matt. 28:9-10). 
Mary and the other women told the 
Apostles but they still did not compre- 
hend for "their words seemed to them 
as idle tales, and they believed them 
not" (Luke 24:11). Alter all that 
Christ had taught the Apostles con- 
cerning Him rising from the dead they 
still weren't able to accept the actuality 
of the event until later when He ap- 
peared to them. f 

Nex1 the resurrected Saviour ap- 
peared to Simon Peter (I.uke 24:34) 
(Continued on Pai?e 130) 



April, 1952 



127 



EVIDENCES and RECONCILIATIONS 

What Shall Be Done With Personal 
Spiritual Manifestations 

By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



THE doctrine that the Lord may 
and does reveal His will to men 
en earth is a cornerstone of the faith 
of the Latter-day Saints. The restora- 
tion of the Gospel in these latter days 
was initiated by the direct appearance 
of the Father and the Son to Joseph 
Smith. Since that time every forward 
step of the Church has been the result 
of a revelation of the Lord's will by 
direct appearance of Himself or of 
other heavenly messengers or by 
equally direct inspiration from the 
Spirit of the Lord. The Church has 
ever been and is now led by revelation 
— authoritative guidance from divine 
sources. 



It is a cornerstone of equal im- 
portance, that every member of the 
Church may and should obtain a per- 
sonal testimony of the truth of the 
Latter-day work. He must not rest 
his final convictions upon the testi- 
mony of others. The humblest member 
of the Church, if he seeks properly, 
may know with full assurance that 
the Gospel is true. None need know- 
it better than he. However, to secure 
such firm knowledge he must receive 
assurance of it from the Author of 
Truth ; that is, he must be guided 
by the spirit of revelation. The con- 
clusion is clear : Every member of the 
Church of Christ may be guided by 
inspiration from the Lord in the 
affairs of his own life. 

t 
This doctrine is beautifully set forth 
in several of the foundation revelations 
given to the Prophet Joseph Smith. 



For example : — 

And the Spirit giveth light to every 
man that eometh into the world; and 
the Spirit eidighteneth every man 
through the world, that hearkeneth to 
the voice of the Spirit ( D. & C. 
84:46). 

On another occasion the Lord said 

to the Church : 

But ye are commanded in all tilings 
to ask of God, who giveth liberally; 

and that which the Spirit testifies unto 
you even so I would that ye should do 
in all holiness of heart . . . seek ye 
earnestly the best gifts . . . and always 
retain in your minds what those gifts 
are, Suit are given unto the Church 
. . . To some is given one, and tt> 
some is given another, that all may 
be profited thereby . . . He that 
asketh in the Spirit asketh according 
to the will of God; vehercforc it is 
done, even as he asketh (D. & C. 46:7, 
8, 10, 12, 30). 

Apparently every person has a gift, 
according to his needs or the service 
he may render. 

The history of the Church is replete 
with evidence of the guidance of the 
Church as a whole and of every faith- 
ful member by the spirit and power of 
revelation. Those who have been at 
the head of the Church stand out in 
bold relief as men who have done 
work beyond human power. The mul- 
titude of Church members bear wit- 
ness to an inspired knowledge of the 
truth of the latter-day message, and 



128 



TE KARERE 



often to wonderful, faith-promoting 
visions of eternity that have been 
opened to them. The Church is grate- 
ful for the possession of the gift of 
revelation. 

Revelations are given for a two- 
fold purpose : to furnish guidance for 
the Church, and to give comfort to 
the individual. 



Revelations for the guidance of the 
Church are given to officers of the 
Church, but only within the limits of 
their official jurisdiction. Thus, lay 
members of the Church cannot and do 
not receive revelations for the guid- 
ance of and Church organizations, but 
only for themselves. The bishop has 
a claim upon divine inspiration for the 
direction of ward affairs, but no fur- 
ther. The spirit of revelation directs 
the stake president in his official stake 
duties, but no further. The president 
of the Church alone, who may officiate 
in all of the offices of the Church, 
receives revelation for the Church as 
a whole, to which stake presidents, 
ward bishops, and all other officers 
of the Church are amenable. This 
preserves a full and logical order with- 
in all Church activities. 



True revelation comes from the 
Lord. The evil one, ever vigilant in 
his work of destruction, tries to simu- 
late with an evil purpose every gift 
of God. Therefore, he presents false 
doctrines or man-made commandments 
through the suggestions of evil spirits 
or evil-minded men. To protect the 
Saints, and to maintain truth within 
the Church, the power of discerning 
between truth and error is given to 
the officers of the Church. The bishop 
for his ward, the stake president for 
his stake, and the President of the 
Church for the whole Church have 
this gift of discernment given them. 
Note the clear, beautiful words of 
the I ,ord upon this sub j eel : 



And unto the bishop of the Church, 
and unto such as God shall appoint 
and ordain to watch over the Church 
and to he elders* unto the Church, arc 
to have it given unto fhem to discern 
all those gifts lest there shall be any 
among you professing and yet be not 
of God . . . 

That unto some it may be given 
to have all those gifts, that there may 
be a head, in order that every member 
may be profited thereby (D. & C. 
46:27, 29). 

By this power and in this order, 
evil inspirations within the Church are 
recognized and rejected. 

Divine manifestation for individual 
comfort may be received by every 
worthy member of the Church. In that 
respect all faithful members of the 
Church are equal. Such manifestations 
most commonly guide the recipients to 
the solution of personal problems ; 
though, frequently, they also open the 
mind to a clearer comprehension of 
the Lord's vast plan of salvation. They 
are cherished possessions, and should 
be so valued by those who receive 
them. In their very nature, they are 
sacred and should be so treated. If a 
person who has received such a mani- 
festation by dream, vision, or other- 
wise, feels impressed to relate it be- 
yond his immediate family circle, he 
should present it to his bishop, but 
not beyond. The bishop, then, may 
decide upon its further use, if any, or 
may submit it to those of higher 
authority for action. The gift was a 
personal one, not for the Church as a 
whole; and the recipient is under obli- 
gation, in harmony with the estab- 
lished order, not to broadcast it over 
the Church. 

It is Unwisdom, tlH'ivf.ua', for those 

who have received such manifestations 
tn send copies to others, to relate 

them by word of mouth in diverse 



April, 1952 



129 



places, and otherwise to scatter abroad 
a personal, sacred experience. There 
are times and places where testimony 
may be borne of our knowledge that 
the restored Gospel is of the Lord, 
and of the goodness of the Lord to us, 
and when we may present evidence of 
our faith. It would be well to remem- 
ber that the Lord Jesus Christ, while 
on earth, usually instructed those 
whom He had healed or otherwise 
blessed, that they should not tell others 
of the occurrence. Some things are 
done for the public good, others for 
private welfare. 

It should also be kept in mind that 
a message is carried by every spiritual 
experience. Revelation always has a 



purpose related to man's eternal pro- 
gress. The message should always be 
of more importance to the recipient 
than the substance or vehicle of the 
manifestation. Our spiritual experi- 
ences, if sound, point the way to our 
own salvation. Life's efforts should be 
directed towards the treading of that 
way to the satisfaction of the Giver of 
all gifts, from whom the spirit of 
revelation issues. 



*This revelation was given before the 
organization of the First Presidency and 
the cal'ling of the Twelve Apostles. At 
this time the head of the Church was 
called the First Elder. 



FROM THE EDITOR'S PEN (Cont 

and then to two of His disciples on 
the road to Emmaus (Luke 24:13-15) 
before finally appearing to the Apostles 
(Luke 24:36). Then eight days later 
He again appeared to the "eleven" 
who were assembled, as it seems Jesus 
had appointed, and there He showed 
Thomas His resurrected body (John 
20:26-28). A short time later He ap- 
peared "at the Sea of Tiberias" (John 
21) and John proclaimed, "This is now 
the third time that Jesus shetved him- 
self to His disciples, after that He 
was risen from the dead" (v. 14). We 
also have the written testimony that 
the resurrected Christ appeared to 
others for we read, "He zvas seen of 
Cephas, then of the twelve: After that, 
He was seen of above five hundred 
brethren at once; of zvhom the greater 
part remain unto this present, but some 
are fallen asleep. After that, He was 
seen of James; then of all the 
Apostles. And last of all He zvas seen 
of me also" (I Cor. 15:5-8). 

Now these things have been written 
that we might believe that Jesus is the 
Christ, for John, speaking of his own 



inued from Page 127) 

book, has said, "These arc written, 
that ye might believe that Jesus is 
the Christ, the Son of God; and that 
believing ye might have life through 
His name" (John 21:31). Not only 
then but also in our generation the 
resurrected Christ has once again ap- 
peared to men (see D. & C. 76 : 22-23; 
110:1-4). 



Now this is our testimony and we 
know it is true ; for the Holy Ghost 
bears record to our souls (see John 
15:26). Jesus is the Christ. He opened 
the doors of the resurrection and ap- 
peared to His Apostles of old, just 
as He appeared to Joseph Smith 
eighteen centuries later. If He did 
not, how did Joseph Smith obtain the 
golden plates the Book of Mormon 
was translated from? Therefore, if 
Christ is true so also is the Book of 
Mormon what is claims to be — another 
witness "that Jesus is the Christ," 
the Son of the Living God and the 
Saviour of the zvorld. 

— B.P.S. 



130 



TE KARERE 



Authorities of the Church of 
Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints 

DAVID 0. McKAY PRESIDENT 

STEPHEN L. RICHARDS 1st COUNSELLOR 

J. REUBEN CLARK, Jr 2nd COUNSELLOR 

COUNCIL OF THE TWELVE APOSTLES: 

JOSEPH FIELDING SMITH MARK E. PETERSEN 

JOHN A. WIDTSOE MATTHEW COWLEY 

ALBERT E. BOWEN HENRY D. MOYLE 

HAROLD B. LEE DELBERT L. STAPLEY 

SPENCER W. KIMBALL MARION G. ROMNEY 
EZRA TAFT BENSON 

PATRIARCH TO THE CHURCH: 

ELDRED G. SMITH 

ASSISTANTS TO THE COUNCIL OF THE TWELVE 

THOMAS E. McKAY GEORGE Q. MORRIS 

CLIFFORD E. YOUNG STAYNER RICHARDS 

ALMA SONNE ELRAY L. CHRISTIANSEN 

JOHN LONGDEN 

FIRST COUNCIL OF THE SEVENTY: 

LEVI EDGAR YOUNG OSCAR A. KIRKHAM 

ANTOINE R. IVINS S. DILWORTH YOUNG 

RICHARD L. EVANS MILTON R. HUNTER 

BRUCE R. McCONKIE 

PRESIDING BISHOPRIC: 

LeGRAND RICHARDS PRESIDING BISHOP 

JOSEPH L. WIRTHLIN FIRST COUNSELLOR 

THORPE B. ISAACSON SECOND COUNSELLOR 

April, 1952 131 



Mission Officers 



President SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 

First Counsellor JOSEPH HAY 

Second Counsellor GEORGE R. BIESINGER 

Secretary GROVER DWIGHT JENSEN 

Assistant Secretary JAMES A. LARSEN 

Recorder JOHN ALBERT OSBURN 

Supervisor of All Women's Auxiliaries ALICE W. OTTLEY 

Editor of "Te Karere" BRUCE PAXMAN SLOAN 

AUXILIARY PRESIDENCIES 
GENEALOGY (Whakapapa): 

President JOSEPH HAY 

Research Director RANGI DAVIES 

PRIMARY: 

President MYRA MASON 

First Counsellor THELMA CURNOW 

Second Counsellor WIKITORIA WHATU 

Secretary MURIEL MASON 

RELIEF SOCIETY: 

President POLLY DUNCAN 

First Counsellor ANNIE KAMAU 

m Second Counsellor MURIEL HAY 

Secretary JOAN BUSH 

Magazine Director POLLY TARAWHITI 

SUNDAY SCHOOL: 

President ROBERT M. GOODMAN 

Secretary CATHERINE RICHARDS 

Y.M.M.I.A.: 

President JACK RICHARDS 

Field Director ROBERT M. GOODMAN 

Y.W.M.I.A.: 

President AWHITIA HIHA 

Field Director VIRGINIA PAXMAN 

DISTRICT PRESIDENTS 

Auckland BRO. WILLIAM PERROTT 

Bay of Islands ELDER PAUL W. MENDENHALL 

Bay of Plenty ELDER VERNON LOWERY 

Cook Islands ELDER ORTON WILKINS 

Hauraki ELDER KEITH GLEAVE 

Hawke's Bay ELDER JAMES H. KING 

King Country ELDER JOHN FORD 

Mahia ELDER JOSEPH CASH SMITH 

Otago ELDER KEITH F. SCOVILLE 

Poverty Bay ELDER RONALD M. COSGROVE 

Taranaki ELDER DONALD W. WILLIAMS 

Waikato ELDER STANLEY E. RICHARDS 

Wairarapa ELDER JAMES H. KING 

Wairau ELDER ROBERT B. FOX 

WelHr -ton ELDER NED R. WINWARD 

Whar-arei ELDER MALCOLM B. STEPHENSON 

132 TE KARERE 



PROGRAMME for HUI TAU, 1952 



THURSDAY, APRIL 10th— Arrival at Marae. 
5:00 p.m. Kai. 
9:00 p.m. Dance sponsored by Hui Tau Committee and M.I.A. 

FRIDAY, APRIL 11th: 

6:30 a.m. Karakia in sleeping quarters, with the exception of 
Elders and Lady Missionaries who will meet every 
morning at that hour at place to be designated. 
7:00 a.m. Kai. 
10:00 a.m. M.I.A. Officers' and Teachers' meeting; Jr. Tennis. 
12:00 Noon Kai. 
2:00 p.m. Trios and Choruses. 
5:00 p.m. Kai. 
6:30 to 8:00 p.m. Relief Society Officers' and Teachers' Meeting; 

Mission and Branch Music Directors' Meeting. 
8:00 p.m. Primary Programme. 

SATURDAY, APRIL 12th: 

6:30 a.m. General Karakia — Elders and Sisters meeting at 

regular place. ** 

7:00 a.m. Kai. 

8:00 a.m. Primary Officers' and Teachers' meeting; Genealogical 
Officers' and Directors' meeting. 
10:00 a.m. First General Session of Conference. 
12:00 Noon Kai. 
2:00 p.m. Second General Session. 

4:00 p.m. Special Meeting for Branch and District Presidents. 
5:30 p.m. Kai. 

7:30 p.m. M.I.A. Programme and Pageant of New Zealand 
Mission. 

SUNDAY, APRIL 13th: 

6:30 a.m. General Karakia and Elders and Lady Missionaries 
meeting. 

8:00 a.m. General Priesthood meeting — opening exercises to- 
gether and then separate Elders dept., Aaronic dept. 
and Adult Members of Aaronic dept. General Relief 
Society meeting. 
10:00 a.m. Third General Session of Conference (presentation of 

General and Mission Officers. 
12:00 Noon Kai. 

2:00 p.m. General Session. 

4:00 p.m. Sunday School Officers' and Teachers' meeting. 

5:30 p.m. Kai. 

7:00 p.m. Final General Session. 

MONDAY, APRIL 14th— M.I.A. DAY: 

6:30 a.m. General and Missionary Karakia as usual. 

7:00 a.m. Kai. 

12:00 Noon Kai. 

5:00 p.m. Kai. 

April, 1952 145 



MEM for HUI TAU, 1952 



THURSDAY: 

DINNER 

Beef, Puha, Potatoes, Tomato Sauce, Bread, Butter, Stewed Apples, 

Custard, Jam, and Cocoa. 

FRIDAY: 

BREAKFAST 

Steak and Onions, Mashed Potatoes, Bread and Butter, Jam and Cocoa. 

LUNCH 

Pipis, Eels, Maori Bread and Butter, Apples, Tomatoes, Jam, Cheese, 

Water Biscuits, and Cocoa. 

DINNER 

Beef, Potatoes, Pumpkin, Cabbage, Relish, Pickles, Steamed Pudding, 

Custard, Bread and Butter, Cordial. 

SATURDAY: 

BREAKFAST 

Stew, Kumara, Potatoes, Bread and Butter, Jam, Cocoa. 

LUNCH 

Potatoes, Salad, Cold Meats, Tomatoes, Lettuce, Bread and Butter, 

Jam, Cordial. 

DINNER 

Beef, Watercress, Marrow, Potatoes, Chutney Pickle, Creamed Rice, 

Peaches, Cordial. 

SUNDAY: 

LUNCH 

Stew, Bread and Butter, Jam, and Cocoa. 

DINNER 

Pork, Beef, Poultry, Potatoes, Pumpkin, Kumara, Marrow, Puha or 

other Greens, Pickles, Sauce, Relish, Bread and Butter, Jam, Cake, 

Trifle, Fruit Salad, Jelly, Steam Pudding. 

MONDAY: 

BREAKFAST 

Steak and Onions, Potatoes, Bread and Butter, Jam, Cocoa. 

DINNER 

Beef, Pork, Potatoes, Kumara, Pumpkin, Greens, Steam Pudding, Trifle, 

Fruit Salad, Biscuits, Jam, Bread and Butter, Cocoa, Cordial. 

TUESDAY: 

BREAKFAST 

Stew and Potatoes, Bread and Butter, Cocoa, Cordial. 
146 TE KARERE 



Ue&c and lJnwe> in ike }HU$ioti 



President Ottley Calls 
Counsellors to Help in the Work 

On March 4th Elder Joseph Hay 
was set apart as 1st Counsellor to 
Pres. Ottley under the, hands of Pres. 
Ottley with Elder Grover D. Jensen 
assisting. 

President Hay will have as a special 
assignment the Supervisor of the 
Genealogical work of the mission. 

On March 8th Elder George R. 
Biesinger was set apart as 2nd Coun- 
sellor to Pres. Ottley in the New 
Zealand Mission. 

President Biesinger's principle as- 
signment will be as advisory council 
to the presidency in all matters of con- 
struction and maintenance of mission 
properties. 

More Missionaries Arrive 

The S.S. Aorangi has once again 
brought some missionaries to proclaim 
the restored Gospel to the inhabitants 
of the land of New Zealand. Stepping 
off the ship on the 26th of Februanry 
were five elders. They are : — 

ELDER DARREL FRANK BUR- 
BANK who comes from Taber, Al- 
berta, Canada, where he has been 
working on the family farm. His first 
field of labour is to the Bay of Islands 
District. 

ELDER RALPH SEYMOUR 
HUNSAKER is from Tremonton, 
Utah, and was a dairy farmer before 
he was called to the "land-of-the-long- 
white-cloud." Elder Hunsaker has been 
assigned to the Wellington District. 

ELDER THERON CHENEY Le- 
BARON has been going to school at 
the Brigham Young University for 
the last two years where he has been 
studying animal husbandry. He has 



met Joe Hapi and Albert Whaanga 
and they, along with the "adopted 
sons" of New Zealand who are attend- 
ing the "Y," send their aroha to the 
saints out here. Elder LeBaron has a 
counsin in the field at the present time 
although it isn't likely they will see 
each other as Elder LeBaron has been 
assigned to labour in Wellington while 
his cousin is in the Cook Islands. 

ELDER ALPHEUS C. LEE- 
THAM is another "70" who has an- 
swered the call of the First Presi- 
dency. He comes to us from Phoenix, 
Arizona, and has been active in his 
ward duties where he has gained ex- 
perience that will be helpful on his 
mission. His job at home was book- 
keeping, although he has had experi- 
ence as a funeral director and builder. 
Elder Leetham's wife will be coming 
out to join him within the next few 
months. They have raised three child- 
ren and also have three grand-children. 
Their two sons have each fulfilled 
missions. Elder Leetham has been sent 
down to the South Island where he 
will labour in Dunedin. 

Another elder who comes to us from 
Canada is ELDER KENNETH KAY 
MILNER. His home town is Ray- 
mond, in the Province of Alberta. 
Elder Milner was doing construction 
work before he received his call to 
promulgate the Gospel. Whangarei has 
been Elder Milne's first assignment. 

Local Missionary Called 

On March 4th ELDER RICHARD 
AHMU was set apart by President 
Ottley as a missionary to proclaim 
the Gospel "t" [esus Christ. The pre- 
ceding evening Elder Alumi was given 
a farewell social at the Auckland 
Maori Community Centre. Elder 
Ahmu came from Samoa about two 

(Continued on Paije 154) 



April, 1952 



147 



THIS WORLD CHURCH 
and its PEOPLE 



Work Begins on 

Los Angeles Temple Site 

Rough grading of the area con- 
tiguous to the Los Angeles Temple 
site got under way on November 6, 
1951, when heavy equipment began 
the preparatory work. 

A bulldozer, tournapull and a huge 
diesel-powered grader swung into ac- 
tion in the early morning. This rough 
grading for streets and walks must be 
completed before excavation for the 
temple proper and actual construction 
can get under way. The work is ex- 
pected to take about a week to com- 
plete, according to the contractor. 

Following the rough grading, 
streets, curbs and sidewalks will be 
put in and utilities such as water, gas 
and electrical power will be installed. 
This is expected to take several 
months. 

It is planned that all of this work 
will be finished before any construc- 
tion on the temple will start. 

The equipment, belonging to mem- 
bers of the South Los Angeles Stake, 
will be operated nine hours a day, six 
days a week, until all of the heavy 
grading is completed. 



By the close of the first day several 
thousand yards "I* earth had been 
moved and work was well under way 
in preparing the site for construction. 

This preparatory work was begun 
just six weeks and four days after the 
dedication of the site by President 
David O. McKay on September 21. 

Young Priest Chosen 
President of School 

In a recent election held at the 
Stadium High School of Tacoma, 
Washington, two outstanding L.D.S. 
young people were chosen as officers 
of the student body. 

Franklin E. Seal, a priest in the 
Aaronic Priesthood, was chosen presi- 
dent and Lorna Perry became secre- 
tary by over-whelming majorities. 

It is noteworthy that in a school 
with less than a dozen L.D.S. students 
among an enrollment of 1,470 that two 
of them should be .so honoured by 
their classmates. 

Franklin has been an outstanding 
deacon, teacher and priest in the 
Aaronic Priesthood of his ward. The 
training that he has received through 
his priesthood work has given him 
vision, self-confidence and desire to 
succeed. He is already directly re- 
sponsible for at least one conversion 
to the Gospel. 



— HUI TAU BOARD — 

SIDNEY J. OTTLEY — Mission President. 

ELDER JAMES H. KING — District President, Hawke's Bay. 

RAHIRI HARRIS — Chairman, Hui Tau Board. 

ERU TE NGAIO — Secretary-Treasurer, Hui Tau Board. 

And Hui Tau Board Members from various Districts. 



TE KARERE 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO I TE HITORI TE HAH I 

(Essentials 
* in Church History) 

WAHNGA TUATORU 

Translated by George R. Hall 




TE WA O NGA MAHI I OHAIO ME 

MIHIURI TE NUKUNGA O TE HAHI 

I NU IAAKA KI OHAIO 

"He Whakatupuranga Whanoke" 

EO Oketopa te marama i te tau 
1830, ka karangatia a Etera Teia 
(Ezra Thayer) raua ko Noropa Tuiti 
(Northrop Sweet) e te Reo Whaka- 
kitenga i konohitia nei e raua, kia 
haere ki te kauwhau i te rongopai ki 
tetahi Whakatupuranga Whanoke. 
''Ko taku maara waina e ai ki ta 
te Ariki, kua pirau i ona wahi katoa, 
a ruarua nei i mahue iho hei whaka- 
arotanga atu, a kaore he morehu e 
mahi ana i te pai, ruarua noa nei i 
mahue iho, a, e kotiti ke ana hoki 
enei i nga rurenga a nga mahi tohu- 
nga, o roto i nga whakaaro pirau. He 
pono, he pono taku e mea atu nei kia 
koutou, Naku tenei hahi i whakatu, 
Xaku i karanga kia puta mai i roto 
i te koraha ; a ka penei ano taku 
kohikohi i aku i whiriwhiri ai o roto 
o nga whanga e wha o te whenua, o 
te tokomaha e whakapono ana ki an 
e whakarongo ana hoki ki toku reo." 

Te Karangatanga o Eruera Pata- 
reti Raua Ko Ohana Parata 
(Edward Partridge & Orson Pratt) 
No Noema a Ohana Parata, te taina 
o Parei P. Parata, i tae mai ai ki 
Wheite ki te whakarongo korero me- 
hemea e pewhea ana nga mahara o te 



Ariki mona. He mea iriiri ia na tana 
tuakana na Parei P. Parata. i mua 
tata atu, i Kanana (Canaan, Columbia 
County, N.Y.), Ia Tihema ka tae mai 
a Hirini Rikitona i Ohaio pera ano 
te take o tana haere mai. ko tana 
hoa haere mai ko Eruera Patariti, he 
taitamariki, kaore ano i uru ki roto i 
te hahi. I te aonga ake o te ra o tana 
taenga mai, ka rongo a Eruera Pata- 
riti i te pai o nga korero, iriiringia ana 
ia e Hohepa Mete, a i muri mai ka 
whakaungia e Hirini Rikitona hei 
mema mo te hahi. Tokorua raua, ara 
a Ohana Parata me Eruera Patariti i 
karangatia ki te mahi minita, a i rongo 
hoki i korero whakamihi mo raua, me 
nga manaakitanga a te Ariki mo te 
kaha o to raua whakapono me to raua 
hiahia kia mahi i te mahi a te Atua. 
"A ko tenei whakahaunga aku. e ai 
ta te "Ariki ka tukua atu e ahau ki 
nga kaumatua o taku hahi a ko te 
hunga katoa e awhi mai ana i runga 
i te whakaaro kotahi, ka tapaea. ka 
tonoa i runga i nga kupu kua kore- 
rotia e ahau." 

Ko Hirini Rikitona Hei 
Kai Tuhituhi 

I wliakahaungia a Hirini Rikitona 
Kei hoa haereere mo Hohepa Mete, 

"kia kaua rawa ia e whakatviv ia 

Hohepa. Ko ia ano hold hei kai tuhi- 
tuhi, a ka hoatu ki a ia nga karai- 



April, 1952 



149 



piture, i hangaia atu i roto i taku uma, 
hei whakaora i aku i whiriwhiri ai. 
E ai ta te Ariki i korero ai. 
Te Whakakahokinga Mai o Etahi 
o Nga Karaipiture i Ngaro 

Kua timata noatia ake, i runga i te 
whakahau a te Ariki te whakatikatika 
o nga karaipiture i runga i ta te Wai- 
rua i akiaki ake ai. Kua waiho ano 
hold hei korerorero ma te hungatapu 
te pewheatanga o nga karaipiture 
ngaro. I o ratou hahautanga i roto i 
nga rarangi o te pukapuka a Moro- 
tnona ka kitea iho, he maha rawa nga 
mea whaitikanga kua tangohia a kua 
ngaro i nga wa i haerea ai te pai- 
pera i roto inga Tauiwi. Kua korero 
te Ariki he maha o enei ka whaka- 
hokia mai e ia, i tena wa, i tena wa, 
i te wateatanga i etahi o nga mahi o 
te hahi, e whakakitea mai ana ki te 
poropiti nga karaipiture i ngaro, a ko 
Hirini Rikitona tana kai tuhituhi. I 
muri tata iho i te taenga o Hirini Riki- 
tona ki Wheiete, ka whakakitea mai e 
te Ariki nga tuhituhinga a Enoka, i 
kitea ra i roto i nga korero a Hura, 
a he .nui te hari i pa ki nga hunga 
tapu i tenei meatanga. Ko enei whaka- 
kitenga mai te whakaotinga o tetahi 
wahi o te Pukapuka a Mohi i apitia 
ki roto i te Peara Utu Nui. 

Te Whakahau Kia 
Nuku Ki Ohaio 

I muri tata mai i te otinga o te 
whakahokinga mai o nga kupu a 
Enoka, ka rangona ano te reo, whaka- 
hau o te Ariki. "Me mutu te whaka- 
tikatika i nga karaipiture, kia tae ra 
ano ki te wa e hiki ai a Hohepa Mete 
ki Ohaio. E ai ta te Ariki, "kei te 
kaha te pehi mai a te hoa riri, a he 
whakaaro kia koutou i penei ai. Otira 
kaua e kaika te haere, me maatua wha- 
kakaha i nga peka o te hahi i Nu 
Iaaka ,tera noa ake i te peka o Kore- 
wira, te peka kaha te whakapono o 
nga mema." Kaore i waiho te whaka- 
hau a te Ariki mo Hohepa me nga 
taaina anake engari i amiki ki te katoa 
o te hunga tapu, katoa, katoa, me 
nuku ki Ohaio nga hunga tapu o roto 



i te rohe o Xu Iaaka, i mua i te 
hokinga mai o Oriwa Kautere i tana 
mihona ki nga Ramana. 
Te Hui Hanuere o Te Tau 1831 

I a Hanuere 1831 ka tu te hui 
ki Wheiete. Konga take noa nei i 
tuatahi te whiriwhiria ; i muri ko te 
whakakitenga mai a te Ariki i ana 
whakaaro i hikitia ai te hahi ki te 
Uru (Tirohia Ako-Kawe. . 38.12) a 
kei te whakamamaetia katoatia nga 
mea o te rangi me nga mea o te ao 
a e whanga ana nga anahera i te 
whakahaunga nui, kia kokoti iho i te 
ao, kia kohikohia nga taru kino ; kia 
tahuna ai ratou; a nana, he ngakau 
tapatahi to te hoa riri." I whakaatu 
mai ano te Ariki, kei te runanga te 
hoa riri i roto i o ratou wahi ngaro, 
kia whakamatea a Hohepa Mete me 
te Hahi. Otira ka riro Maana tonu 
e arahi te hunga tapu ki te whenua 
o te kupu whakaari ; a ka waiho mo 
ratou tenei whenua, me a ratou tama- 
riki i muri atu i a ratou, mo ake tonu 
atu, ki te nana o ratou manawa ki te 
rapu i tenei whenua hei whenua papa- 
tupu mo ratou. Ko tenei korero, mo 
Hiona, kaore ano i whakakitea mai i 
tenei wa. 

I whakahaua ratou kia hui ki Ohaio 
a kei reira hoatu ai e te Atua te ture, 
me nga mea katoa e tika ana kia 
whakamohiotia kia ratou. Me hoko o 
ratou taonga me o ratou whenua ; ko 
nga paamu kaore e taea te hoko, me 
reti. Me whiriwhiri etahi tangata 
whaiwhakaaro hei tiaki hei whaka- 
haere i nga tikanga mo te hunga 
rawakore, mo te hunga e mate ana, 
hei kawe i a ratou ki te wahi i whiri- 
whiria e te Atua hei huinga mo ratou. 

I te tatanga ki te mutunga o nga 
ra o Hanuere ka nuku a Hohepa Mete 
me tana wahine, a Hirini Rikitona 
me Eruera Pateriti ki Katirana, a na 
Nuere Witini ratou i whakamannlilri ; 
he roa tonu te wa i noho ai a Hohepa 
me tana wahine i tenei kainga ; e 
manaakitia, e arohaina ana i te kainga 
nga Witini, i roto i te aroha Karai- 
tiana. 



50 



TE KARERE 



Te Peka i Katirana 

Ko te peka o te Hahi i Katirana i 
whakaturia i runga i te ture "Huihui" 
(common stock), i whakatopuria nga 
taonga ki te pukai huihui, ka kiia na 
te katoa. Kua tu noa atu tenei tikanga 
i mua i to ratou urunga ki roto i te 
hahi, otira na te uru mai o nga wairua 
kino ki waenganui i a ratou i taukume- 
kume ai ratou ki wahi ke o nga 
tikanga o te rongopai. 

Te Homaitanga i Te Ture Hei 
Kawana Mo Te Hahi 

I te wha o Pepuere ka puaki mai 
te kupu a te Ariki, kia hui nga kau- 
matua o te Hahi ki te runanga i "Tana 
Kupu," tera e homai e la Tana Ture, 
hei kawana i te Hahi. I tukua iho ano 
e te Ariki etahi whakahau, kia hangaia 
he whare mo Hohepa Mete, hei noha- 
nga mona, hei wahi e mahi ai ia i nga 
mahi whakamaori i nga karaipiture 
tawhito e homai e te Ariki ki a Ia. 
Kua takoto te tikanga kia riro i a 
Eruera Pateriti te tari Pihopa o te 
Hahi, a kia whakapau katoa ia i ona 
ra ki nga mahi o tenei turanga. Kia 
mahuetia e ia ana mahi hokohoko o 
tana toa, kia mahi ia i nga mahi hei 
painga mo nga mema o te hahi. 

I Katirana, i te aroaro o nga kau- 
matua tekau-ma-rua, i te iwa o nga 
ra o Pepuere, ka whaka-kitea mai e 
te Ariki Tana Ture hei kawana i te 
Hahi, i te ritenga o Tana Kupu i 
whakaaringia mai e ia i Wheiete. Ko 
tenei whakakitenga (Ako-Kawe. 42) 
me ki he rarangi ture hei kawanata- 
nga, hei arahi i nga mema o te hahi. 
Ta ratou whakahangai mo nga ture 
o te whenua, me nga ture whakatika- 
tika i te tu tika o te tinana (moral 
law), i marama katoa te whakaatu 
mai me te whakaunga. I te mea, he 
mema no te Hahi, me ngohengohe 
ratou ki nga kawenata me nga tikanga 
o te Hahi e whaka-kitea mai kia 
ratou i tena wa, i tena wa. E whaka- 



kitea mai ano hoki etahi o nga kawen- 
ata e u ai to ratou noho i Ohaio a i 
muri mai, i roto i te Hiruharama Hou 
te pa o Hiona ; tera e whakaaturia mai 
te turanga o taua pa. I whakamara- 
matia mai nga mahi ma te pihopa me 
etahi atu apiha o te Hahi. I whakahe- 
ngia te tangata mangere ; e ai ta te 
Ariki "e kore te tangata nohonoaiho 
e kai i te kai e kuhu i nga kakahu a 
te tangata mahi." I korerotia mai ano, 
ko te paipera me te pukapuka a Moro- 
mona te Mataawaka o nga tikanga 
katoa e whakaakona ana e te hahi. 
Kaua e tu hei kai whakaako te hunga 
katoa kaore i te whiwhi e te wairua. 
I whakamaramatia mai ano te ahua 
o te karakia i te hunga e pangia ana 
e te mate. Nga tohutohu ki te hunga 
tapu i a ratou e noho huihui ana, kia 
aroha ratou kia ratou. Ko tenei tetahi 
whakakitenga tino whai tikanga i hua- 
kingia mai ki te Hahi. 

Te Wahine Matakite 

I muri mai o te whaka-kitenga i 
tuhia i runga ake nei, ka puta he 
wahine matakite, a he maha tonu i 
whakapono ki ana korero, a i whai atu 
i a ia. I hokia ano nga tohutohu mo 
tenei ahua, pera i nga tohutohu mo 
te kohatu a Hairama Peeti i whaka- 
kotiti ra i a ia me etahi o te Hunga 
Tapu. Te tino matotorutanga o nga 
tohutohu iho a te Ariki, ko te u ki 
te awhina me te hapai ake i a Hohepa 
Mete i roto i te taumahatanga nui e 
whakawahangia nei e ia. 

Etahi Whakakakitenga Whaiti- 
ka.n?a i Rukea Mai Ki Te Hahi 

I te raumati 1831, lie maha rawa 
nga whakakitenga i rukea iho. I te 
whiin o Maehe ka huaki iho nga wha- 
kakitenga e korerotia ra i nga "Akora- 
nga me nga Kawenata" tekiona -45. 
Tirohia kei reira nga korero mo tenei 
wahi. 

(Continued on Page 154) 



April, 1952 



151 



DISTRICT ACTIVITY 
NEWS 



Bay of Plenty News Report 

A FITTING theme tor the Bay of 
Plenty Hui Pariha held at Ma- 
ngakino January 26th and 27th was 
taken from Matthew 24:14. 

Materially this Hui was a success 
because of the planned effort in having 
the canteen make sufficient to cover 
all expenses locally, plus being able 
to make a donation to the District 
Fund. 

Spiritually it was a great success 
due largely to the presence of Tumu- 
aki Ottley, whose quiet and sincere 
personality was reflected in his simple 
preaching. This was the keynote to 
all Sunday meetings. 

The usual activities prevailed on 
Saturday with leadership meetings in 
the afternoon. At night the Primary, 
Welfare and M.I. A. presented the 
Gospel from different angles and they 
gave a good programme. Throughout 
the Hui the beautiful singing of the 
Huria Choir was inspiring. 

While sleeping accommodation was 
not the best the eating arrangements 
were excellent — all catering being done 
by Mrs. Hart of Xo. 3 Camp. Credit 
is also due to the Ministry of Works 
and the Waikato Hydro Welfare Assn. 
for their co-operation in allowing the 
use of cinema and gymnasium for 
meetings. 

Through the efforts of the elders 
and all district workers the Gospel has 
and is truly being preached in Ma- 
ngakino. 




Hawke's Bay District 
Monthly Report 

The month of February was a very 
special oik- for the Saints of Waima- 
rama. On this occasion a Hui Pariha 
was held, this being the second Hui 
held since it has been organized as a 
branch. The preparations which in- 
volved tremendous efforts and much 
faith, as everyone will agree, went off 
without a hitch under the very efficient 
hands of the Branch Presidency, Re- 
lief Society and others who generously 
assisted in this undertaking. 

The highlight and main feature of 
this conference, of course, was when 
President Ottley gave a stirring ad- 
dress with the topic, "Choose Ye This 
Day Whom Ye Shall Serve. As For 
Me and My House, We Shall Serve 
the Lord." 

Three things were especially asked 
of the saints: (1) Punctuality, (2) 
Preparation, and (3) Reverence. The 
Mission Sunday School Supervisor 
was very emphatic on organizations 
adhering to the above three principles. 

Under the auspices of the Hawke's 
Bay District W T elfare very generous 
contributions was made by our chair- 
man, Bro. B. D. Fdwards, in supply- 
ing land, seed and implements for the 
cultivation of potatoes and one or two 
other crops that have been planted. 

The Pukehou, Waipawa and Wai- 
marama Branches are carrying on with 
similar projects, for which District 
President James King and his coun- 
sellors are grateful. 



152 



TE KARERE 



Canning of pears has come to an 
end and preparations are now under 
way for the canning of peaches. 

Special note: It is sad to announce 
that owing to a persistent and painful 
illness, Bro. Jerry Thompson will not 
be available this canning season. In 
past years he has been responsible in 
assisting many families in the district 
in obtaining and distributing fruit. 
May it please Almighty God, there- 
fore, that Jerry be restored to normal 
health and strength. 

Wairarapa District Report 

By Margaret Ha eat a 

On the 23rd and 24th of February, 
and on the marae, Ngatauewaru Pa, 
Te Ore Ore, Masterton, where the 
Maori Prophet Patangaroa prophesied 
the coming of the Church, the Wai- 
rarapa District held their annual Hui 
Pariha in ideal weather. 

The conference opened with the 
Primary children of the Hiona, Hare- 
hana and Glanston Branches present- 
ing a beautiful programme. A special 
feature being a play presented in the 
from of the Children's Friend by the 
children of the Gladston Branch. 

The Gold and Green Ball had its 
own attraction in the floor show and 
the Hulawaiians Orchestra. This 
brought to a close a happy and suc- 
cessful evening. 

A leadership meeting was held prior 
to the Primary programme and Gold 
and Green Ball, President and Sis'ter 
Ottley giving the different organiza- 
tions helpful instructions concerning 
the work of each. 

The Hui Atawhai and Priesthood 
meetings began the programme for 
Sunday, each meeting having a good 
attendance. Bro. Steel of Palmerston 
North was ordained an elder in the 
Priesthood meeting. 



The morning and afternoon General 
Sessions had many inspiring talks and 
wonderful testimonies were given by 
the various speakers. The majority of 
these talks were recurded by Bro. 
Steve Scirkovich. The saints of this 
district indeed felt blessed with the 
presence of Tumuaki and Sister Ott- 
ley, Bro. and Sister Hay, all the mis- 
sionaries of the district, and the saints 
from various districts who visited our 
meetings. 

The Genealogy meeting, which was 
very interesting indeed, had a well pre- 
pared programme with Bro. Wiremu 
Naera conducting. 

The Mission M.I. A. sisters, Awhitia 
Hiha and Virginia Paxman, have been 
visiting the district and the M.I.A. 
Branches are grateful for their visits. 

Whangarei District 

By Tatalii Tiki Ruaran 

"A Sermon Without Words" 

The Chinese have a saying that: "one 
picture is worth ten thousand words." 
This is Dutch to many, but to sub- 
stantiate and prove this theory we of 
the W r hangarei District advise and 
cordially invite you to visit our largest 
Branch as soon as the opportunity pre- 
sents itself. There you will behold the 
occidental application of this Or 
truth amid Polynesian environs 
Te Horo Branch. Pipiwai R.D. 

To arrive directly at the focal point 
of interest, we wish to humbly an- 
nounce that the favoured hand that 
painted and recorated the Hawaiian 
Temple at Laie. Honolulu. has 
wrought an inspiring wonder in our 
midst. 

Elder De Witt's artistic interpre- 
tations in various paintings and murals 
now gracing the window and across 
the stage in the Marae Hall. Tan 
Henare, has broughl forth cries o\ 

wonderment and praise from Saints 



April, 1952 



153 



and friends alike, both Maori and 
Pakeha. In addition to having created 
an intense interest among- previously 
uninterested and indifferent groups, it 
has also aroused and revived an active 
investigation in the doctrines and prac- 
tises of our wounderful Church. 

Suffice to summarize the facts, that 
in a comparatively short space of time, 
Elder De Witt has helped endear the 
Gospel message in t'-.e hearts of many. 
Also carrying it into the homes and 
hearts of others, who were previously 
veritable fortresses, impregnable to the 
word of the Gospel. 

Ten thousand times ten thousand 
words cannot adequately express the 



far-reaching and favourable effects of 

this "Sermon Without Words" which 
meets and greets all who perceive it. 

At the reception-farewell tendered 
Elder De Witt on February 22nd in 
"that Hall," with deep appreciation the 
sound of many voices, hands and feet 
echoed and re-echoed from those walls, 
ceiling and floor, and ceased not, for 
it re-echoes still throughout the dis- 
trict, spreading further and further 
afield. 

He came into our midst with few 
friends, he has left without a friend, 
for we say he has left them all in the 
Whangarei District. 



HERE AND THERE IN THE MISSION (Continued from Pa?e 147) 



years ago and was just recently or- 
dained to the Priesthood. He has been 
assigned to labour in the Bay of 
Plenty District. 

To these new missionaries we 
wish the best of luck and the Lord's 
blessings to attend them in their work. 

Saints Arrive Back 
From Hawaiian Temple 

After spending a short period in 
Hawaii, going through the House of 
the Lord for themselves and their an- 
cestors, we welcome back a party of 
saints to the land of New Zealand. 

Arriving on the S.S. Aorangi the 
26th of February were Bro. Phillip 
Aspinall, his wife, Sister Te Oraiti 
Aspinall, their daughter, Margaret As- 
pinall, Sister Arapera Kauwhata, Bro. 
Hemi Whautere, and Sister Tauaraia 
Joyce. 



Stepping off the Aorangi they ex- 
pressed the joy they had received do- 
ing this work and also commented on 
how they appreciated this privilege 
and opportunity. 

Also arriving on the same ship was 
Bro. Te Hoko Whitu who was also 
doing Temple work for his ancestors 
during his stay in Hawaii. 

Although Bro. Whitu was well 
along in years he was known by all 
aboard ship, both going to and coming 
from the Temple, for his active mind 
and body. 

After arriving back in the country 
it was less than a week before the 
Lord called this faithful brother to 
his eternal rest. Yes, he has been taken 
from our midst but the work he has 
done will always remain with us. 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA O ROTO I TE HITORI O TE HAHI 
(Continued from Page 151) 



Ko Hiona Te Wahi 
Whakamaru (Refuge) 

Ko Hiona, te Hiruharama hou, ka 
whakaarangia, ka hangaia a ka emi 
mai ki reira te hunga pono, te hunga 
tika o nga iwi katoa, me te waiata i 
a ratou waiata o te Hari mau tonu. 



Ko tenei anake te iwi e kore e kitea 
i roto i nga whawhai o te ao ; ko te 
take, ko tenei anake te iwi e kore 
e mau i te hoari hei patu i tona hoa 
tata. Ko tenei anake te iwi e rere ki 
Hiona hei whakamaru mona ; i te wa 
e mura ana te riri i runga i te whenua 
i mua i te haerenga mai o te Ariki. 



154 



TE KARERE 



To All Te Karere Readers 

pOR the past few months you have been read- 
ing articles, written by your District Presi- 
dents, on the several districts you are living in. 
These articles have taken the place of the 
"News of the Field" section we featured some 
time ago. There have been many inquiries about 
this section of the "Te Karere" and comments 
made that the people here feel something is 
missing in the magazine. 

Well, we have done something about it, or 
at least have been trying to do something about 
it. As you will notice, we have a section in this 
issue called "District Activity News." It isn't 
very long, is it? You can see the reason though 
— only four out of sixteen districts have a report 
enclosed. 

You say you'd like to see every district 
represented in this section?? Good, Here's 
how you can. Every district does or should 
have a District Representative. Ask your Dis- 
trict President who your District "Te Karere" 
Representative is. If there is none, ask him to 
choose one. 

These District Representatives are going to 
need the help of all of you, and if you really 
want the "District Activity News" section in 
your "Te Karere" you will want to give them 
all the co-operation they desire. 

The District "Te Karere" Representative 
will see that these articles get to the office so 
they will be published. Of course, the articles 
have to get to the office before the report can be 
published so the District Representative holds 
a position which you want taken care of. 

IF YOU WILL SEE THAT THE "TE 
KARERE" REPRESENTATIVE IS CHOSEN 
FROM YOUR DISTRICT. VOL WILL ONCE 
AGAIN READ OF THE HAPPENINGS 
THROUGHOUT THE MISSION. 




Modern Apostle Dies 

FARLY in the month of February ELDER JOSEPH F. 
*-* MERRILL left this mortal life and passed into the 
world beyond. Although he was 82 years old his death 
was not expected as he was in the best of health. He 
retired to his bed in the usual manner and passed away 
suddenly during the night, no one realizing of his death 
until the next morning. 

Brother Merrill was born at Richmond, Cache 
County, Utah, August 24, 1877. He received his educa- 
tion at various universities, returning to Utah to resume 
his teaching activities at the latter end of the last 
century. He was an eminent scholar, using his education 
for the furtherance of the work of the Lord. During 
the past few years he has been in charge of the "No 
Liquor-Tobacco" section of "The Improvement Era." 

He was an apostle for twentv years, being ordained 
on October 8, 1931, by Heber J. Grant. 



if A KtdisM 

fjm >v/ */. J N^j QUA**, 



JS 






4 



i 






(jUaiaa'iapa, 

THE MESSENGER 




MAY :: 1952 



MONTHLY MAGAZINE OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 



About Our Cover 

\X7 E still continued the work of translation, when in the 
»» ensuing- month (May, 1829), we on a certain day 
went into the woods to pray and inquire of the Lord 
respecting- baptism for the remission of sins, that we 
found mentioned in the translation of the plates. While 
we were thus employed, praying and calling upon the 
Lord, a messenger from Heaven descended in a cloud of 
light, and, having laid his hands upon us, he ordained us, 
saying: 

"Upon you. my fellow servants, in the name of Messiah. I 
confer the Priesthood of . laron, which holds the keys of the 
ministerial/ of angels, and of the Gospel of repentance, and of 
baptism by immersion for the remission of sins; and this shall 
never be taken again from the earth, until the sons of Levi do 
offer again an offering unto the Lord in righteousness" 

He said this Aaronic Priesthood had not the power 
of laying on hands for the gift of the Holy Ghost, but 
that this should be conferred on us hereafter; and he 
commanded us to go and be baptized, and gave us direc- 
tion that I should baptize Oliver Cowdery, and afterwards 
that he should baptize me. Accordingly we went and were 
baptized. I baptized him first, and afterwards he bap- 
tized me, after which I laid my hands upon his head and 
ordained him to the Aaronic Priesthood, and afterwards 
he laid his hands on me and ordained me to the same 
Priesthood — for so we were commanded. 

The messenger who visited us on this occasion, and 
conferred this Priesthood upon us, said that his name was 
John, the same that is called John the Baptist in the New 
Testament, and that he acted under the direction of 
Peter, James and John who held the keys of the Priest- 
hood of Melchizedek, which Priesthood he said would in 
due time be conferred on us, and that I should be called 
the first Elder of the Church, and he (Oliver Cowdery) 
the second. It was on the 15th day of May, 1829, that 
we were ordained under the hand of this messenger and 
baptized. 

(History of Joseph Smith, the Prophet, by himself — 
P. of G.P. Joseph Smith 2:68-72.) 



TE KARERE 



Established 1907 



Volume 46 



Number 5 



May, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley . . Tumuaki Mihana 

Joseph Hay Kaunihera Tuatahi 

George R. Biesinger Kaunihera Tuarua 

Grover D. Jensen Hekeretari o te Mihana 

James A. Larsen Assistant Secretary 

John A. Osburn Mission Recorder 

Albert J. Wiley Asst. Mission Recorder 

Bruce P. Sloan Etita 

David T. Briggs Asst. Etita 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) .. .. Kaiwhakamaori 

Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 

"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; £2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/ - for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



CONTENTS 



Editorial: 

From the Editor's 



Special Features: 

How the Word of Wisdom Helps in Sport 
A Two-edged Sword 

The Gospel Alphabet 

The Duty to Marry 

Happiness! A Goal to Strive For . . 



Church Features: 

The President's Page . . 

The Women's Corner . . 

Evidences and Reconciliations 

L.D. Prophets Speak 

Seek Ye Learning 

This World Church and Its People 

The Sunday School in New Zealand 

Here and There in the Mission: 
Here and There in the Mission 
District Activity News 

Tekihana Maori: 

Nga Pou-Tokomanawa o Roto i 'IV II il 



166 
167 
171 



16S 
176 

ITS 
1S1 



51 THE PRESIDENT'S PA8E 

He Kupu Aroha 

ml 



By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 



BRETHREN and Sisters —Because 
it has come to my attention sev- 
eral times of late, that persons have 
declared that they have been set apart 
to some position for life, I should like 
to make a few remarks to that subject. 

To say the least, that would be a 
dangerous promise for any person, 
either for himself or for the cause he 
represented. Men are such changeable 
animals, and Satan, the arch enemy, 
does so love to work upon that change- 
able nature that we often time find 
the Saint of yesterday as the sinner 
of today and the sinner of years gone 
by, having seen the error of his ways 
and repented, has turned to the life 
which is "Beautiful beyond all under- 
standing." 

How many persons are there within 
the range of your acquaintance whom 
you once considered as almost perfect 
beings who are now careless of the 
finer things and have become coarse 
and uncouth ? And likewise, how many 
persons among your dearest and most 
loved friends whose lives, some years 
back, were anything but desirable ? 

God chooses men and women of 
sterling worth to fill the offices of His 
earthly kingdom, but they are still in 
that probationary state of life which 
will always be so until the King of 



(.lory calls forth and says "Stand forth 
and be judged." Then, and then only 
will it be said. "Y< u have done well, 
enter ye in and receive your reward." 
Then your assignment will be per- 
manent, by reason of that great achiev- 
ment, namely filling of the second 
estate. 

May I refer you to the word of the 
Lord on this matter and then I will 
leave you for the pressing matters of 
Hui Tau preparation of which you will 
hear much in the next issue of Te 
Karcrc. 

Doctrine and Covenants, Section 121. 
Read it all from the 34th paragraph 
to the last. Then read it again — read 
it often and see how well we are filling 
the calling we have and whether we 
are exercising unrighteous dominion 
by reason of some calling to which we 
have been called and have filled with 
only indifferent zeal. (This scripture 
may also be found on the inside back 
cover.) 

May the Lord bless us all with the 
love of right and a sincere desire to 
fill all callings with only one thought 
— to show the Way to our fellow man. 

None but Patriarchs and Prophets 
are set apart for life and that pre- 
dicated on righteousness of service. 



A hoive without books is like a body without a soul. — Cicero. 
160 TE KARERE 




,.,:., 



Wont&t's CoHMh, 



By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 






LITTLE misunderstandings some- 
times grow from a "Mole Hill to 
a Mountain." A little unkind remark 
or a thoughtless word can be mis- 
construed or misquoted until its mean- 
ing is changed and be the cause of 
bringing unhappiness to someone. The 
longer we hold and nurse a grudge 
the bigger it becomes. A wise philos- 
opher once said, "The remedy for 
wrongs is to forget them." To fail to 
erase from our minds the memory 
of a wrong we think has been done, 
has a damaging effect on our person- 
alities and may even blot out some 
beautiful experience that we might 
have. President Grant said, "It isn't 
the initial expense of the grudge that 
matters, it's the upkeep that is so 
costly." 

It has been said, "To err is human, 
to forgive is divine." It is natural 
to want to retaliate, to resent, to be 
revengeful. These things are easily 
cultivated, but to forgive and forget 
takes strength of character. Bryant S. 
Hindkley says, "Forgiveness is always 
a sign of moral grandeur, an expres- 
sin of nobility." 

Paul said to the Romans (12:20, 
21), "// thine enemy hunger, feed him; 



if he thirst, give him drink; for in so 
doing thou shalt heap coals of fire on 
his head. Be not overcome of evil, but 
overcome evil with good. 

Our Savior said, "Love your enem- 
ies, bless them that curse you, do good 
to them that hate you, and pray for 
them which despitcfully use you, and 
persecute you. 

"That ye may be the children of 
your Father, zvhich is in heaven; for 
He maketh His sun to rise on the 
evil and on the good, and sendeth rain 
on the just and on the unjust. 

"For if ye love them zvhich love you, 
what reward have ye? Do not even the 
publicans the same? 

"And if ye salute your brethren only, 
what do ye more than others? Do 
not even the publicans so? 

"Be ye therefore perfect, even as 
your Father, which is in Heaven, is 
perfect" (Matt. 5:44-48). 

So let us be careful what we say, 
that we may not hurt our sisters' feel- 
ings, and be willing to forgive and 
forget that our growth may not be 
hampered, and also that our JOY 
MAY BE FULL. 



Do good to your friends to hold them ; to your enemies to gain them. — Franklin. 




May, 1952 



161 



From the Editor's Pee . . . 

Fear - - Righteousness towards God 
or a Weapon of the Devil 



ACTUALLY our title this month 
is deceiving. It seems to be ask- 
ing a question, whereas either answer 
would be correct ; but only if we use 
the correct interpretation of the word. 
Looking up a definition of the word 
fear in the dictionary we find : "To be 
apprehensive or afraid of ; to terrify ; 
drive by fear. An emotion excited by 
threatening or apprehended evil ; 
alarm ; dread ; terror ; reverence for 
constituted authority ; religious awe ; 
as, the fear of God. Fear is the generic 
term denoting an emotion excited by 
threatening evil with a desire to avoid 
or escape it ; fear may be sudden or 
lingering, in view of present, of im- 
minent, or of distant ; awe is a rever- 
ential fear." So as we have seen the 
difference of these two types of fear, 
let us now take a few examples of 
them. 

All through the scriptures we read 
of men that "feared (loved) God." 
Aren't we told to work our "own 
salvation with fear (respect of God's 
word) and trembling?" 

The other type of fear is altogether 
different, though. This fear that makes 
men terrified and frightened. It grips 
their minds and makes them feel 
panic. It turns men from strong in- 
dividuality to weakmindedness, and 
makes them lose all reason. Great 
mountains appear in his road when in 
reality his problems are minor. He 
begins to worry and spends so much 
time in this manner he has time for 
nothing else. Because of his worry he 
loses his peace of mind, and finally 
his contact with God slowly but surely 
dies. 



We read in Proverbs (23:7) that 
as a man "thinketh within himself, so 
is he." (A.S.V.) This is a truism 
which is only as natural as night 
following day or winter coming after 
fall. If we think we are happy we will 
be happy. If we think pure thoughts 
we will become pure. If we think good 
we will create good; but if we think 
evil thought our thoughts will eventu- 
ally catch up to us and our deeds will 
become evil. Then if we think we are 
afraid we surely shall be afraid — and 
our fears will overtake us. We will 
be like the Prophet Job, who, speaking 
of mortal man, cried : "The thing 
which I greatly feared is come upon 
me." In our fearfulness we will look 
for fear and we may even uncon- 
sciously seek to bring about events 
which will justify our fears. 

Xow this is not the type of fear 
the Lord is pleased in. Nay, He would 
rather see us free from the bondage 
of fear, that we might know the truth 
and become eternally free. 

"God hath not given us the spirit 
of fear; but of power, and of love, 
and of a sound mind. Be not thou 
therefore ashamed of the testimony of 
our Lord, nor of me his prisoner ; but 
be thou partaker of the afflictions of 
the Gospel according to the power of 
God, who hath saved us, and called 
us with an holy calling, not according 
to our works, but according to his 
own purpose and grace, which zvas 
(liven its in Christ Jesus before the 
world began" (II Tim. 1:7-9). 

God hath not given us this spirit 
of fear so it is only logically under- 
stood that the devil has. Also we were 



TE KARERK 



given grace in Christ Jesus before the 
world began. Could we assume from 
this that some were not given grace 
before the world began? We know 
that some of God's spirit children did 
not accept the plan or our elder bro- 
ther, and therefore were cast away 
from the presence of God. We know 
Lucifer's plan was that everyone was 
to be saved ; their free agency taken 
away, everybody would be compelled 
to salvation. We have not the time to 
discuss the advantages or disadvan- 
tages of this plan, but it should be 
seen that it was and always will be 
based upon unrighteousness. Why was 
Lucifer — the son of the morning — able 
to draw so many followers after him? 
Did he, using his subtle craftiness, 
form a campaign of propaganda to 
deceive those spirits just as he tries 
to deceive us today? They may have 
feared the thought of not having a 
guarantee to their salvation and be- 
cause of their fears they followed 
Satan's plan rather than Christ's. We 
know of their punishment, and is it not 
likely that those who fear in this life 
will be cut off from the presence of 
our Father in Heaven also ? 

Many times our Savior chastized 
His followers of their fear and on 
one occasion spoke unto them saying, 
"Be not afraid of them that kill the 
body, and after that they have no more 
that they can do. But I will forewarn 
you whom ye shall fear : Fear him 
which after he hath killed hath power 
to cast into hell ; yea, I say unto you, 
Fear him." (Luke 12:4-5.) 

On another occasion, explaining the 
signs preceding the end of the world. 
He said men's hearts would fail for 
fear — of the fearful sights and great 
signs that were to be given. 

Isaiah, speaking also of the latter- 
day, gives us comfort with these 
words: "The deseret shall rejoice, and 
blossom as the rose. It shall blossom 
abundantly and rejoice even with joy 
and singing; they shall sec the glorj 



of Jehovah, the excellency of our God. 
Strengthen ye the weak hands, and 
confirm the feeble knees. Say to them 
that are of a fearful heart, Be strong, 
fear not : behold, your God will come 
with vengeance, with the recompense 
of God ; He will come and save you. 
Then the eyes of the blind shall be 
opened, and the ears of the deaf shall 
be unstopped. Then shall the lame man 
leap as a hare, and the tongue of the 
dumb shall sing ; for in the wilderness 
shall waters break out, and streams 
in the desert — the redeemed shall walk 
there : and the ransomed of Jehovah 
shall return, and come with singing 
unto Zion ; and everlasting joy shall 
be upon their heads : they shall obtain 
gladness and joy, and sorrow and sigh- 
ing shall flee away" (excerpts of Isa. 
35. A.S.V.). 

We know this chapter deals with 
the chosen people of the Lord. We can 
see that there are those who will be 
afraid, but we can be comforted in the 
thought that He will strengthen us and 
reassure us that our fears are all in 
vain. 

This has been fulfilled, for once 
again the Lord has comforted us with 
His voice, and has given us com- 
mandments to help strengthen our 
"weak hands" and our "feeble knees." 
He has said to us, again, that the 
fear of men displeases Him and also 
has told us that we lose blessings 
because of this kind of fear. But He 
has said, "// ye are prepared ye shall 
not fear" (D.'& C. 38:30). 

Therefore let us prepare ourselves 
and let us always remember: 

Cod hath not given us the shirit of 
fear; hut of power, and of love, and 

of a sound mind. 

There is no fear in love; hut perfect 
love caste! h out fear; because fear hath 
torment. He that fearcth is noi made 
perfect in love. (II Tim. 1:7; 1 John 
4:18.) 

— B.P.S. 



May, 1952 



163 



EVIDENCES and RECONCILIATIONS 



Can the Experimental Method be 
Employed in Religion? 



By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



CIVILIZATION and enlightenment 
have come when men, using the 
experimental method, have begun to 
test the correctness of their beliefs. 
The highway to truth is paved with 
such rigid tests. 

On the contrary, the black cloud of 
superstition and confusion, twin enem- 
ies of progress, has obscured human 
vision when untested opinions or un- 
verified claims or personal guesses 
have ruled human actions, or when 
assumed authority has claimed preced- 
ence over patient inquiry. The blind 
acceptance of unsupported statements, 
or placing theories upon a pedestal for 
human worship, has always been a 
source of sorrow. 

Whenever men have set up devices 
or experiments to test the validity of 
their opinions, whenever men have de- 
manded proofs of the verity of offered 
teachings, the world has moved for- 
ward. To test current beliefs, Galileo 
dropped stones of unequal weights 
from a height ; Lavoisier weighed mer- 
cury before and after heating ; Pasteur 
filtered air through tufts of cotton ; 
Lister washed wounds with a solution 
of carbolic acid — and each destroyed 
a false belief and revealed a new truth : 
stones of all sizes fall through the air 
with equal velocity ; mercury becomes 
heavier when heated in air ; micro- 
scopic living things, in the air, are 
often capable of injury to man; in 
wounds are germs which if not de- 
stroyed may delay healing. Out of each 
of these experiments a vast volume 
of truth has grown. Our civilization 
rests upon innumerable such experi- 
ments. 

The same principle appears in the 
field of living things, from animals to 



men. The complex relationships of 
social living must be tested for their 
value, if the path of safety is to be 
found. Though experimentation in this 
field is somewhat more difficult because 
of the human will (the power to ac- 
cept or reject), yet, for example, the 
desirability of organization, co-opera- 
tion, and democracy, and the ill-effects 
of autocracy, tyranny, and dictator- 
ships, have been demonstrated by 
actual trial. 

Spiritual principles that affect human 
life are likewise subject to experiment. 
Prayer, attendance at Church meet- 
ings, the Word of Wisdom, tithing, 
are but remote beliefs until put into 
practice and thus tested for their value. 
Intelligent man cannot pass worth- 
while opinion on these and other prin- 
ciples until he has tried them himself 
or observed their effects on others. 

Authority, itself, must bow before 
the experimental method. The reality 
of authority is best established by the 
efficacy of that which it declares and 
commands. Authority which is not 
willing to submit to such a test may 
well be questioned. There are today 
innumerable fantastic cults, leading 
thousands astray, which have no 
foundation beyond the unsupported 
claims of their originators. 

This does not mean that the experi- 
mental method is the only approach 
to truth, but that it is one of the most 
important. Nor does it mean that every 
man must get drunk to learn the evils 
of alcohol. Human experience is filled 
with the sad examples of those who 
have toyed with evil and have been 
destroyed by it. We can learn from the 
experience of others, as from our own, 
as to that which is good or evil. 



164 



TE KARERE 



We can also learn from those wiser 
than we are. But in accepting guidance 
from them we must be certain of their 
wisdom. 

The Gospel of the Lord Jesus Christ 
advices men to test its truths in human 
life. It approves distinctly of the ex- 
perimental method. The Savior laid 
down the principle in a luminous state- 
ment: "My doctrine is not Mine, but 
His that sent Me. If any man will do 
His will, he shall know of the doctrine, 
whether it be of God, or whether I 
speak of Myself" (John 7:16, 17). On 
another occasion He repeated the 
thought : "If I do not the works of 
My Father, believe Me not. But if I 
do, though ye believe not Me, believe 
the works" (John 10:37, 38). The 
words of the Apostle Paul, "Prove 
all things ; hold fast that which is 
good" (I Thessalonians 5:21), are of 
the same import. There is constant 
advice in the scriptures to let the 
effects of Gospel living be evidence 
of its truth, as for example : "Let your 
light so shine before men, that they 
may see your good works, and glorify 
your Father which is in Heaven" 
(Matthew 5:16); or "Having your 
conversation honest among the Gen- 
tiles : that, whereas they speak against 
you as evil-doers, they may by your 
good works, which they shall behold, 
glorify God in the day of visitation" 
(I Peter 2:12). 

Joseph Smith, the Prophet, recog- 
nized this method of testing truth. He 
read the words of James, "If any of 
you lack wisdom, let him ask of God, 
that giveth to all men liberally, and 
upbraideth not ; and it shall be given 
him" (James 1:5); and, believing in 
God, he went into the grove to test 
the reality of the promise there made. 
Thus came the great First Vision. 

The constant promise, "Ask, and ye 
shall receive; knock and it shall be 
opened unto you" (D. & C. 4:7), is a 
form of testing truth, as well as a 
promise from God. Similarly, "Search 
diligently, pray always, and be be- 
lieving, and all things shall work to- 
gether for your .-nod" ( D.&C. 90:24). 



Promises are made for our good, and 
we are but asked to try them out. 
The law of cause and effect is as 
operative in the spiritual as in the 
material world. 

Running through the scriptures is 
the doctrine that truth as well as un- 
truth may be recognized by its effects, 
and the counsel is given to test the 
claims of the Gospel by rendering 
obedience to its principles of action. 
Obedience itself becomes but a call to 
do certain things so that certain re- 
wards may be received. Obedience may 
therefore be counted as a phase of the 
experimental method. 

All should test their religious be- 
liefs. But all such testing must be done 
in the right "spirit and by the right 
method. Every testing must be a sin- 
cere and honest search for truth. The 
truth or the goodness, not the un- 
truth or the evil, if it exists, is auto- 
matically discovered. There must be 
no bending of means or methods to 
bolster up prejudice. An honest seeker 
after truth must accept truth unhesi- 
tatingly when found, and yield full 
surrender to it. The truth-seeker must 
be single-minded — for truth. Errors 
must be thrown out, however appeal- 
ing they may be to man-made appetites. 

Only those who have thus tested the 
principles of the Gospel — for example, 
the Word of Wisdom, tithing, or meet- 
ing going — have any right to pass 
opinion on them. Others, who offici- 
ously render judgments on Gospel 
principles without trying them out in 
the correct spirit, belong to the class 
who are willing to accept unsupported 
beliefs, who have, in every age, 
brought grief to the world. 

The experimental method is applic- 
able and should be used in the field o\ 
religion as in every other field of 
human activity. Only then can a full 
conviction of its truth be won. "Prac- 
ticing our religion" is tin' most direct 
method of gaining a "testimony iA its 
truth," and that should he the con- 
stant concern i >i r\ ery I atter-day 
Saint . 



May, 1952 



165 



How the Word of Wisdom Helps in Sport 



By BRO. M. B. COUCH 



OX E cannot be truly in training if 
he uses tobacco and liquor. And 
no coach should allow a player to 
represent his club regularly it he is 
not in training. 

Actually there are no written laws 
forbidding the use (if these stimulants 
in any sports (although it would be 
best if there were), but the non-use 
of tobacco and liquor is an unwritten 
law of the athlete. It should therefore 
be faithfully enforced by them. 

Rugby is a strenuous game, as we 
all know, and players who indulge in 
such habits as smoking and drinking 
liquor are open to permanent harm or 
physical injury — because these drugs 
take away the sharpness we need, both 
physically and mentally, leaving us 
more susceptible to accidents. 

In this land of Rugby one finds it 
difficult to refrain from these habits, 
as it seems to be such popular routine 
in all sports. But those who do not 
smoke or drink, but keep their bodies 
clean, stand out as an example of 
good living and deserve the respect 
of all around them. They are not only 
looked up to for their clean living but 
they are keeping themselves in better 
physical condition for their sports. 

In our New Zealand Mission we 
have Latter-day Saints whose names 
rank tops in the honour list in the 
field of sport. Let us name a couple of 
them in the field of Rugby. 

Take Tori Reid, for instance, who 
holds the record for playing in the 
most first class games in New Zea- 
land. 

Doctor Nitama Paewai, who is con- 
sidered as New Zealand's outstanding 
half-back these last twelve years. 

Then we could take Bob Scott as 
an example of a non-member who 
neither smokes nor drinks. Because of 



his fine play Bob stands as the i 1"! 

of every football fan in the Dominion. 

These three men know full well the 
meaning of the word of wisdom or as 
it is known in athletic circles, the un- 
written law of the athlete, for they, 
and we also, have seen the benefits 
they have received from living clean 
lives. 

Speaking from experience I know 
for myself what the Word of Wisdom 
means and what it has done for me. 

No footballer under the influence of 
these deadly drugs can face the tactics 
of hard, solid Rugby for long. Their 
bodies are not in top physical condition 
and because of this they are not fit 
for much strenuous competition. 

Now before closing a gentle re- 
minder to those up and coming athletes 
who don't just make the grade. ' 
despair, the taking part in any game is 
the highest honour you can gain." 

I am grateful for the privilege of 
writing this article on "How the Word 
of Wisdom Helps in Sports" and I 
hope, Brothers and Sisters, that what 
I have written may be of some benefit 
to us all in keeping the Word of 
Wisdom. 



A SPORTING PHILOSOPHY 

Whether you die, or whether you live, 
As the wheel of fate is spun ; 

If you (/ire the game all you have to 
give 
Why bother about who wont 

The score tells only a minor part 
When you come to the best of it. 

If you have the head and you have the 
heart 
Who cares for the rest of it? 

— Grantland Rice. 



166 



TE KARERE 



A Two -Edged Sword 



SATAN is the arch-deceiver. His 
doctrine appears under many a 
guise. Always he attempts to lead 
people astray by holding before them 
false notions which on the surface 
seem much to be desired. 

One of his most appealing methods 
of reaching mankind is to make them 
believe they can get something for 
nothing. Nearly everyone has enough 
selfishness to try to get all he can at 
the lowest price. Satan plays upon 
that trait. He does so in our economic 
life, and he does so in religion. Get 
something for nothing — or for as little 
as you can. 

In economics he teaches men to do 
as little as possible to get as much as 
possible ; work as little as you can and 
collect in return all you can. He urges 
people to become parasites, to live off 
the efforts of others, or to seek sup- 
port from their government to avoid 
the necessity of self-support. Get some- 
thing for nothing. It is a doctrine of 
temptation. 

This identical philosophy is carried 
over into certain types of religion. 
Again it is to get something for 
nothing. Some teach that a person may 
have full salvation by whispering a 
few magic words. Just confess a be- 
lief in the Savior — that is all. If you 
thus confess, you get full salvation, 
and nothing can keep you from it. 
No works are necessary, for you are 
saved by grace alone, so the teaching 
goes. 

Get something — get salvation — for 
nothing but just a phrase. Just say 
"I believe." That is all there is to it, 
they declare. And they quote John 
3:16 to support their arguments. 

This unfounded fancy has become 
so popular with some that certain en- 
thusiasts go to the extent of painting 



"John 3:16" on fences, on sign posts, 
on railroad over-passes, along the 
highways, anywhere. It is magic in 
their eyes, a magic way to be saved. 
But it is black magic. And they de- 
ceive themselves, for salvation comes 
not in that manner. 

But is it not a striking thing that 
Satan would hold forth this same 
philosophy in both the fields of econ- 
omics, or every-day bread-and-butter 
living, and in religion? And is it not 
remarkable that both these expressions 
of the same false philosophy are so 
popular with people? 

The Lord has had a good deal to 
say about this matter, and His doctrine 
is just opposite to that of Lucifer. In- 
stead of teaching us to get something 
for nothing, the Lord puts a premium 
upon production. His doctrine is that 
the idler shall not eat the bread nor 
wear the garments of the labourer. 

And in religion it is the same. We 
are taught that we must work out our 
salvation. We must bring forth much 
fruit. Those branches of the vine which 
do not produce much good fruit shall 
be cut off and thrown into the fire. 
He emphasized production in His par- 
able of the unprofitable servant. Faith 
without works is dead. On Judgment 
Day we shall be judged according to 
the deeds done in the body. 

The Lord commands us to become 
perfect even as he is. In giving us this 
commandment, and teaching us that wo 
must work out our salvation, with 
prayer, and fasting, and increasing 
faith and testimony. He teaches us that 
we must put forth genuine effort for 
self-improvement. 

How do we work out our salvation? 
By participating in the activities of the 

Church which develop in our souls 
(Continued on Page 170) 



May, 1952 



167 



L.D. PROPHETS SPEAK . . . 



The Search For Truth 

By LEVI EDGAR YOUNG 
President of the First Council of the Seventy. 



I.V the dedicatory prayer in the Kirt- 
land Temple given by the Prophet 
Joseph Smith we have these words, 
"Seek ye diligently and teach one an- 
other words of wisdom, seek learning 
even by studv and also by faith" (D. 
A C. 109:7). 

But where shall wisdom be found? 
And where is the place of under- 
standing.' 

Man knoweth not the price thereof; 
neither is it found in the land of the 
living. 

The depth saith. It is not in me: 
and the sea saith. It is not with me. 

It cannot be gotten for (/old, neither 
shall silver be weighed for the price 
thereof. 

It cannot be valued with (/old of 
Opliir, with the precious onyx, or the 
sapphire. 

The (/old and the crystal cannot 
equal it: and the exchange of it shall 
not be for jewels of fine gold .... 

Behold, the fear of the Lord, that is 
wisdom; and to depart from evil is 
understanding. 

(Job 28:12-17, 28.) 

To me, one of the great defects of 
our day is the lack of wisdom. If there 
were wisdom enough in the world to 
direct the course of human conduct, 
we need not have wars. If we were 
wise enough we would search for truth 
in solving all of our problems. We 
would try to discover the causes of 
these problems, and we would seek 
more wisdom in their solution. We 
would search for the truth without 
pre'udice, but with an understanding 
mind and heart until through wisdom 
we could agree among men on impor- 
tant solutions for permanent peace and 



the betterment of mankind. Such wi>- 
dom demands that we have a deep 
faith in God, active minds, with in- 
sight and understanding of the reali- 
ties of life, and the teachings of the 
Redeemer. In the book of Ecclesiastes 
we read — 

Wisdom is better than strength . . . 
Wisdom is better than "weapons of 
war (Ecc. 9:16, 18). 

We Latter-day Saints are searching 
for truth in ourselves in order to con- 
tribute to the peace and the betterment 
of the world. Yet we cannot find truth 
without hard work, patient and sincere 
work in the form of study, over a long 
period of time. 

This is what a French writer meant 
when he said, "Nothing is really 
known until it has been known a long 
time." Wisdom considers things in the 
long run; it considers life from the 
standpoint beyond the individual, be- 
yond the local, beyond the temporary 
and changing. It looks upon society 
from a high plane and in the pattern 
of eternal progression. In other words 
the goal of wisdom is the building of 
the Kingdom of God upon the earth. 

The young people of today must be 
taught to work and study hard that 
they may establish a good beginning in 
their search for truth. We read again. 
"The things that thou hast not gath- 
ered in thy youth, how shall thou find 
them in thine old age?" How im- 
portant it is that the early education of 
our children be established. There are 
only a very few years in every life, 
when the mind is fresh and plastic and 
the memory able to retain. These years 
should not be wasted ; they should be 



168 



TE KARERE 



used to every possible advantage in 
the search for light, in the development 
and growth of thought and deeds. Let 
everyone remember that the work he 
does shall rise up in judgment against 
him, and the roots of self-respect lie 
in work done to the best of man's 
ability. 

President Joseph Young, who for 
many years was the head of the First 
Council of the Seventy, taught that 
the most effective way to satisfy one's 
noble impulses is training one's intelli- 
gence to its highest pitch, having a 
depth of faith in Almighty God. Such 
training means years of study of good 
books, years of devotion to the search 
for truth. This is what the Gospel of 
Jesus Christ demands of you and me. 

Every man to be educated on any 
rung of the ladder must have a teacher, 
not necessarily in the schoolroom, but 
he must be taught by a good book, a 
good friend, a leader. Let us not be 
accused as were the Stoics of ancient 
times that "The noourishment of re- 
ligion was drawn from the shallow 
springs of their own intelligence." 
That is our trouble today. 

Let me read to you from the Acts 
of the Apostles. One Philip is admon- 
ished by the angel of the Lord to go 
to the man of Ethiopia to be taught 
and to understand what he is reading. 
As a result the Ethiopian was con- 
verted to Christianity. 

And the angel of the Lord spake 
unto Philip, saying, Arise, and go 
toward the south unto the way that 
goeth down from Jerusalem unto Gaza, 
which is desert. 

And lie arose and went: and, behold, 
a man of Ethiopia, a man of great 
authority under Candace, Queen of the 
Ethiopians, who had the charge of all 
her treasure, and had come to Jeru- 
salem for to worship. 

Was returning, and sitting in his 
chariot read Esaias the Prophet. 



Then the Spirit said unto Philip, 
Go near, and join thyself to this 
chariot. 

And Philip ran thither to him, and 
heard him read the Prophet Esaias, 
and said, Understand thou what thou 
readest ? 

And he said, Hozv can I, except 
some man should guide me? And he 
desired Philip that he zvould come up 
and sit ivith him (Acts 8:26-31). 

The great missionary of Christ, Paul 
the Apostle, was a man that was ever 
searching for truth, ever alert, never 
at any time mentally inactive. His was 
an active mind, seeking truth in the 
university at Tarsus. He was a student 
of the great students, Gamaliel and 
Hillel. When Paul received the vision 
and was converted on the road to 
Damascus, even then was his mind 
active in his intense search to under- 
stand the word of God and obtain the 
wisdom of the great message. Paul 
knew that the life spent in the search 
of truth was not an easy one. He 
realized that his mission was to gain 
understanding of the truth of Christ 
and to teach this truth to others. Paul 
might have said : "The easier road I 
leave to others ; I have chosen the 
harder one." It was Emerson who 
said, "God gives to every man the 
choice between truth and repose ; he 
cannot have both." But when Paul 
said, "I have chosen the harder road," 
he might have added, "but I have also 
chosen the happier one," for the search 
for truth is a happy search, and in- 
teresting one, and adventuresome, ex- 
citing road to travel. 

A child begins his search for truth 
with his mother to guide him, in the 
reading of childhood rhymes and 
Stories and classics, Bible stories, tales 
of heroes, and, as he grows and de- 
velops, he continues his search in the 
study of history, certainly one oi the 
great fields in which the wisdom of the 
ages is contained. Unexcelled in the 

field of history are the ( )ld and \ew 

Testaments, in connection with the 



May, 1952 



169 



other great works of Holy Writ. We 
find in the scriptures the words of 
great poets, great writers — the highest, 
the most exalted expressions of human 
thought. 

Every student of Church history 
knows about the high school estab- 
lished in the Kirtland Temple. The 
students were taught English by read- 
ing the best literature and the ancient 
classics. The principal of the school 
was Professor H. M. Hawes. There 
were also established Hebrew, Greek, 
and Latin classes ; the professor of 
Hebrew was Joshua Seixas. I have 
found out that the attendance at these 
classes on the part of the elders was 
very large, and we have from the 
records the statement of how the Pro- 
phet Joseph Smith attended night in 
and night out the Hebrew and Greek 
classes. He undoubtedly felt and re- 
sponded to the beauty of these lan- 
guages, for only those who have 
studied Greek and Latin and Hebrew 
know of the beauty and richness of 
the literature that has come down to 
the present day from those far-off 
times. The Prophet Joseph Smith 
shows us the majesty of the statement, 
"Seek ye knowledge out of the best 
of books," and Joseph Young, presi- 
dent of all the seventies in his day, 
insisted that the seventies in their re- 
spective quorums become students of 
literature and philosophy and religion. 
Thousands of them adopted the motto 



that, "Knowledge is Power." The 
beauty of this idea lies in the fact 
that the concept of what knowledge 
means with the Latter-day Saints is 
this truth that God blesses us as we 
approach Him with deep faith and ask 
His blessing in our obtaining know- 
ledge. Our minds and hearts are 
opened, and we become students in the 
true sense of the term, for it is under 
God's direction that we learn, and 
Jesus Christ our Redeemer becomes 
our greatest teacher. 

The young student devotes himself 
to the study of literature and art, 
engineering and medicine, and what- 
ever he may choose, and in all he 
learns the truth and beauty of moral- 
ity, the truths of mature and of life 
itself, the truth by which he gains the 
understanding and knowledge of God 
through his faith. Then these young 
people are on their way to life ever- 
lasting. They put into practice our 
Thirteenth Article of Faith : 

We believe in being honest, true, 
chaste, benevolent, virtuous, and in do- 
ing good to all men ; indeed, zee may 
say that ice follow the admonition of 
Paul — We believe all things, we hope 
all things, zee have endured many 
things, and hope to be able to endure 
all things. If there is anything virtu- 
ous, lovely, or of good report, or 
praiseworthy, zve seek after these 
things. — Joseph Smith. 



A TWO-EDGED SWORD (Continued from Page 167) 



those Christ-like traits that help us to 
become like Him. That requires con- 
sistent, well-planned effort, with de- 
votion to the end. So working out our 
salvation means developing Christ-like 
characters which will make us fit to 
come into the presence of the Lord. 



Latter-day Saints should not be de- 
ceived by Satan's philosophies of get- 
ting something for nothing. That false 
doctrine is like a two-edged sword 
which destroys either way it swings, 
whether in economics or in religion. 



170 



TE KARERE 



THE GOSPEL ALPHABET 

By William A. Morton 

A is for ADAM, the father of all. 
**• He ate of the apple, and thereby did fall. 

But that was a part of the heavenly plan 

To people the earth and to glorify man. 
And Adam, our father, and dear Mother Eve 
Should honour and gratitude ever receive. 
When earth is renamed they will stand in their place, 
Crowned at the head of the whole human race. 

D is for BAPTISM. Jesus the Lord 

Was baptised. Then to miss it we cannot afford. 
For did He not say that a man, to be shorn 

Of his sins, must of Water and Spirit be born? 
Yes, this is the way that all sins are forgiven, 

And man is made fit for the Kingdom of Heaven. 
When children are eight years of age is the time 

They should follow the Savior's example sublime. 

(^ is for CHURCH, which is set up again, 

For ever and ever on earth to remain; 
The only true Church — so the Great Founder said, 

When He gave it His name, for of it He is Head. 
Within it Apostles and Prophets of God 

Teach the members to walk in the way Jesus trod. 
If we their wise counsels believe and obey. 

The Evil One never can lead us astray. 

T) is for DEACON, who each Sabbath Day, 

The Sacrament passes with cup and with tray. 
He does not baptize, nor the Spirit impart, 

But in preaching the Gospel he plays a full part. 
He often has charges of tJie meeting house, too. 

And does lots of things that the Bishop can't do. 
The Office of Deacon, though one of the least. 

Is just as important as Teacher or Priest. 

Ji is for EDEN, the Garden so fair. 

Of Adam and Eve, the original pair. 
They talked face to face with our Father in Hwven, 

And yet disobeyed, and from Jul en were driven. 
Into the lone, dreary world they were sent. 

But still they had faith and did truly repent. 
Adam offered a lamb on an altar of stone. 

Which showed haw the Savior for sin would alone. 

May, 1952 171 



G 



H 



is for FATHER, whose throne is On High. 

From Him come all blessings that mortals enjoy — 
Health, food and clothing and kindred so dear, 

And all that gives comfort and happiness here. 
How </ood of our Father to come down to eartli. 

And teach us those truths that will be of most worth 
When we pass from this life to the Kingdom above. 

Oh. siiig of His goodness, His mercy and love! 

is for GOSPEL: 'twas taken from men, 

But in due time brought back to earth once again, 
And is preached to the people of every nation, 

That they may be heirs of eternal salvation. 
To all who obey it the promise is given 

That they shall inherit the Kingdom of Heaven. 
Not servants, nor angels — as Gods they become, 

And dwell evermore in the Heavenly Home. 

is for HYRUM, the noble and brave. 

Like Joseph his brother, his life-blood he gave. 
A man without guile, and Israelite true, 

A warrior for Truth when its warriors were few. 
'Mid fiery trials he stood every test. 

And is now in that world where the righteous find rest. 
The crown of a martyr he ever shall wear, 

And Glory Celestial eternally share. 

is for ISAIAH, that Prophet of old. 

Who in the far future great things did behold. 
He spoke of the Savior, His earthly career, 

His triumph o'er death, and His coming — then near; 
The gathering of Israel in these latter days 

To the tops of the mountains, to learn of God's ways. 
And there, said the Prophet, a House they shall build 

To the name of the Lord. And his words are fulfilled. 

is for JOSEPH, fore-named "The Choice Seer"; 

His memory the Saints zcill forever revere. 
Chosen of God to restore the Great Plan, 

He opened the gates of salvation to man, 
And then "like a lamb to the slaughter" was led: 

For the sake of the Gospel he suffered and bled. 
Yes, he who beheld both the Father and Son, 

Like them bore the cross, that the crown might be icon. 

172 TE KARERE 



j 






V is for KIRTLAND, a town of much fame, 

Where the saints built a House to the Holy On*>'s name. 
There the Savior appeared, in a vision most rare, 

To Joseph and Oliver, kneeling in prayer. 
There Moses, Elias, Elijah restored 

The Keys that make straight the way of the Lord, 
That Israel might gather, and even the dead 

Redeemed by the living, to Jesus be led. 

J is for LIFE — for the life here on earth, 

*"* Where souls are prepared for their heavenly birth. 

Here faith must be tested, as sight was before 
When man was a spirit, in ages of yore. 
And blessed are they, who, when life's race is run, 

Shall hear from the Savior the plaudit "Well Done!" 
For they who do all that the Lord doth command, 

Shall "all things" receive from His bountiful hand. 

"\A spells MORONI, the one who revealed 

To Joseph the Prophet the book that was sealed 
And hid in Cumorah; now brought forth again, 

A witness for God to the children of men. 
For this precious record let praises be given 

To Him who preserved it — our Father in Heaven. 
Our souls fill wtih joy as its pages we read, 

For we find in this book just the things that we need. 

Nfor NAUVOO, Joseph's City most fair. 
Another great Temple the Saints budded there; 
The work of Elijah commenced to come forth; 

The gathering began from the ends of the earth. 
Then from Temple and homes the Lord's people were driven. 

But He will repay — 'tis recorded in Heaven. 
And the Saints, for the trials so nobly endured, 
SJtall reap full reward — of that be assured. 

Q for OBEDIENCE, first lazv of Heaven, 

Whereby come all blessings; without it — none given. 
Christ set the example; for He did alway 

The will of His Father most humbly obey. 
Yes, even to death. But from death lie arose — 

The death that He suffered for friends and for foes, 
That all, by obeying His precepts divine. 

Might cojne unto Him, each a branch of the fine. 

May, 1952 173 



p is for PRIESTHOOD, to which, we are told, 

A man must be called as was Aaron of old, 
To speak and to act in the Lord's holy name. 

To build up His Church, and the Gospel proclaim. 
Thank Cod for the Priesthood, by whom we are led. 

And their powers divine that save living and dead! 
The keys that to Joseph the Prophet were given 

To open the door of the Kingdom of Heaven. 

Qfor the QUESTION once asked of the Lord 
By (/ood Nicodemus, as writ in (rod's word: 
"Can a man be twice born, can he be born again?" 

Then tlie Savior made answer botli precious and plain: 
"Man born of the Water and Spirit must be, 

Or the Kingdom of Heaven he never can see." 
Yes, that is a doctrine the Master did teach, 

A doctrine His Saints of the present day preach. 

*D means RESURRECTION , or raised from the dead. 

The first thus to rise was Christ Jesus, our Head. 
Forty days with disciples and friends He sojourned. 

Ere He to the Heaven of Heavens returned. 
He came to this land, the the Nephites of old, 

His "other sheep," not of Jerusalem's fold ; 
The Gospel He taught them; their children He blest. 

And gave them a taste of Millenial Rest. 

C is for SAVIOR, who came from On High, 

Tor al men to suffer, for all men to die. 
On Calvary's cross He atoned for our sin. 

That we, through His merit, great glory might win. 
If we to His Gospel obedience give. 

In the Kingdom Celestial we ever shall live. 
Exalted and crowned with the Noble and Great, 

Who keep both the First and the Second estate. 

CT is for TITHING, a laze of the Lord; 

And those who obey it — how rich their reward ! 
Erom windows of Heaven, upon them shall pour 

The choicest of blessings for basket and store. 
Peace, happiness, shall in their dwellings be found, 

In hearts as in homes, the Good Spirit abound. 
Who honour this law sure protection have earned, 

And they shall escape -when the wicked are burned. 

174 TE KARERE 



7 7 is for UNITY, sought by the Lord, 

For all those who follow Him Heaven toward. 
"As I am with Thee, Father, as Thou with Me, 

Grant these my beloved disciples may be." 
So prayed the Lord Jesus. We also should pray, 

And seek to be one with our Savior alway; 
Thus hastening the time when contention shall cease, 

And o'er all the ivorld spread the Spirit of Peace. 

\7 is for VIRTUE, and blessed are they 

Whose footsteps are found in the Heavenward way ; 
Who hear the Good Word and go straightzvay and do 

What the Lord hath commanded. The faithful and true, 
Who every pure principle cherish and love, 

And overcome evil by help from above — 
These rise zvith the just to inherit all things, 

And reign in God's presence as Priests and as Kings. 

TU —WORD OF WISDOM, revealed by the Lord; 

And happy are they who give heed to His word. 
From strong and hot drinks and tobacco abstain. 

And every base appetite curb and restrain. 
To them has the promise most precious been given, 

That they sliall be blest with the wisdom of Heaven. 
The great boon of health they shall likewise enjoy, 

And death, though He threaten them, shall not destroy. 

< V" is for — what? Well, I really don't know. 

And think it quite proper for me to sav so. 
For this is a fact I have learned fairly well: 

What one doesn't know he should not try to tell. 
There are things in this world I zvould rather not knozv! 

For example, the failings of others; and so 
The faults of my brother I put on the shelf, 

And try to correct those I find in myself. 

r y is for YOUNG, lion-hearted and true. 

Called of God as was Moses, a great work to do; 
To bring to these sweet, peaceful vales of the West 

The Saints zvho by sinners had long been oppressed. 
Beloved by his people, the father and friend. 

His fame and his glory shall ne'er hare an end ; 
And millions unborn, when their harps they hare strung, 

Shall si)ig the sweet praises of President Young. 

May, 1952 175 



is for ZION, that City of old, 

Built by Enoch, who saw the great future untold. 

His people were one. and did freely impart. 

And the Lord called (hem "Zion" because pure in heart. 
From earth this fair city was taken away — 

But not for all time. There is coming a day 
When the Zion below and the Zion above 

Shall meet her and blend in the Spirit of Love. 



SEEK YE LEARNING 



WHY YOU LAUGH 



HAS it ever occurred to you how- 
strange it is that when something 
amuses you, you crinkle up your mouth 
and eyes, shout "Ha, ha," and even 
shake all over or roll on the ground? 

All these peculiar movements and 
sounds are the ways in which your 
body shows the effect of something 
that is happening in your mind. Some- 
thing which you see or hear causes a 
feeling of merriment or joyfulness in 
your mind, and this feeling, the im- 
pulse of laughter, is shown outwardly 
by all the things you do when you 
laugh. 

When you were very small you 
would often laugh heartily when there 
was nothing to amuse you. That was 
because you had so much energy to 



spare that some of it bubbled up in 
laughter. 

But sometimes you laugh at things 
which seem like little misfortunes for 
other people, as when the clown at 
the circus falls and seems to hurt him- 
self. Yet you are not glad that he is 
hurt. You know that he is only pre- 
tending, but if you did not laugh you 
might feel depressed and discouraged, 
and so laughter is useful in helping 
you to enjoy the circus. 

You laugh when you are tickled, 
too, because you feel how ridiculous 
you are yourself ; but also because you 
know that the tickling is a game in 
which you are playing a part ; you 
are not angry or depressed ; your 
laughter helps you to enjoy it. 



WHY YOU CRY 



JUST as a feeling of merriment in 
your mind is followed by laughter, 
so a feeling of distress or sorrow is 
shown by crying. 

Tears flow from your eyes, your 
breath catches and makes the noise of 
sobbing, and your voice is raised in a 
laud cry. Babies wail when they are 
distressed by hunger or cold or any 
little discomfort ; it is their way of 
calling for someone to help and com- 
fort them. Some children cry when 
they are angry, as when they are made 
to do something they do not want to 



do. It is distress which makes them 
cry, but the distress is caused because 
they find that anger is no use. Some 
children cry also from sheer temper. 

Every child is born with the power 
to strive for what he wants and when 
difficulties are put in his way they 
cause a feeling of distress in his mind. 
But a good-tempered child soon learns 
not to give way to this distress by 
crying, while a bad-tempered child 
does not try to control it. He cries 
and sobs in the hope that he will get 
what he wants. 



176 



TE KARERE 



THE DUTY TO MARRY 



Taken from "The Discourses of 
Wilford Woodruff" 

ADVICE TO THE YOUNG 
PEOPLE OF 1875: Another 
word of the Lord to me is that, it is 
the duty of these young men here in 
the land of Zion to take the daughters 
of Zion to wife, and prepare tabern- 
acles for the spirits of men, which 
are the children of our Father in 
Heaven. They are waiting for tabern- 
acles, they are ordained to come here, 
and they ought to be born in the land 
of Zion instead of Babylon. This is 
the duty of the young men in Zion ; 
and when the daughters of Zion are 
asked by the young men to join with 
them in marriage, instead of asking — 
"Has this man a fine brick house, a 
span of fine horses and a fine carriage 
(automobile) ?" they should ask — "Is 
he a man of God? Has he the Spirit 
of God with him? Is he a Latter-day 
Saint? Does he pray? Has he got the 
Spirit upon him to qualify him to build 
up the kingdom ?" If he has that, never 
mind the carriage (car) and brick 
house, take hold and unite yourselves 
together according to the law of God. 

FURTHER ADVICE IN 1889: 
There is a great destiny awaiting our 
young men. Therefore they ought to 
be temperate ; not drink whisky, not 
chew or smoke tobacco, and not mingle 
with the drunken. And it is the duty 
of those who are not married to take 
these daughters of Zion to wife, when 
thye arrive at a proper age. There are 
no better women on the face of the 




earth than those that dwell in these 
mountains of Israel. If there is any 
virtue anywhere, it exists among the 
women that live in Zion. The same 
with the men. Our young ladies are 
virtuous. There may be exceptions ; 
but the Lord has gathered together a 
people who are virtuous. My feelings 
are that every young man in Israel 
should get married when he arrives at 
a proper age. It does not cost any man 
more to provide these girls with food 
and clothing after they are married 
than it does before. It does not cost 
more for themselves. But you are then 
prepared to begin to gather some 
means around you. Do not wait until 
you have about ten thousand dollars 
and have fine horses and carriages. 
You will get them just as quickly after 
you are married, and possibly quicker, 
than you will before. 

It is our duty to get married at the 
proper time. It is the law of God. 
Therefore I would like to see you 
young men take these daughters of 
Zion to wife. 

NOTE: Words in parenthesis were 
inserted by the Editor. 



Man's chief mundane end is the pursuit of happiness. B. C. Forbes. 
May, 1952 177 



THIS WORLD CHURCH 
and its PEOPLE 



Bedfast May Soon Study 
Book of Mormon on Ceiling 

The Bedfast hospital patient, for 
whom time always drags, will soon be 
able to read the Book of Mormon 
while lying on his back. Under ar- 
rangements just completed with "Pro- 
jected Books, Incorporated," the book 
is now being filmed, and release prints 
will be available for use on special 
reading equipment now found in scores 
of hospitals. 

This equimpent is designed for Bed- 
fast patients for whom ordinary read- 
ing is impossible. A special projector 
at the bedside throws an enlarged 
image of the book page on the ceiling, 
which becomes a screen. The "pages 
are turned" by simply pushing a but- 
ton. The reader proceeds at whatever 
speed he desires, while lying on his 
back without strain. 

Projected Books, Incorporated, is a 
non-profit organization, established to 
provide Bedfast patients with some of 
the world's best literature. Its cata- 
logue contains a large number of 
books, but only three or four in the 
field of religion. The Book of Mormon 
will be included in the catalogue, which 
goes to all institutions equipped with 
projectors. 

L.D.S. Bomber Crewmen 
May Worship in Clouds 

Latter-day Saint crewmen aboard a 
B-29 bomber can hold Priesthood 
meetings above the clouds if occasion 
requires, according to Chaplain Grant 
E. Mann, the only Church chaplain in 
the Air Force. 

Eight of the 11 -man crew are also 
Church members, he said. They ar- 
rived at the Randolph Air Force Base 
in Texas individually from various 
Air Force specialists training schools, 



and were then grouped together at 
the request of the crew's 28-year-old 
aircraft commander. 

The crewmen can be found attending 
the San Antonio Branch on Sunday, 
along with scores of their fellow ser- 
vicemen. 

Atlanta Branch Raises $1,200 
By Two Building Projects 

The Atlanta Branch of the Southern 
States Mission has raised more than 
$1,200 by two recent building fund 
projects. 

In July the branch finance committee 
loaned 44 members $1 each asking 
them to engage in activities to multi- 
ply the dollars as much as possible 
during a six-week period. At the end 
of that time the members were to re- 
turn the dollars with their earnings. 

Methods used in trying to multiply 
the dollars included making and selling 
brownies, cookies, and candy, serving 
dinners, selling cosmetics, hand-paint- 
ing and selling towels and linens, mak- 
ing and selling produce purchased 
from the farmers 'market. Thirty-five 
of the 44 were successful in multi- 
plying their dollars by the deadline set. 

The time was extended an additional 
two weeks and at the end of this 
period one woman who had made 
aprons and sold them turned in $92 as 
the earnings from her original $1. 
Altogether $425 was raised by the 
project. 

The branch Relief Society raised 
another $532.36 with a bazaar during 
which they had a doughnut stand, 
country store, linen booth, apron booth, 
and confection stand with pies, cakes, 
home-made candies, assorted gift cards 
and wrappings and novelties. 

By adding donations and the sale 
of other miscellaneous items, the Re- 
lief Society totallted $783.38. 



178 



TE KARERE 



Other projects carried on in the 
branch to raise money for the new 
chapel have included a fish fry, chicken 
supper and ham supper. 

Student Wins Honours* 
At West Point 

Arlen Garn, a former student of 
Ricks College and now enrolled in 
the United States Military Academy 
at West Point, New York, recently 
won an intramural debate at the acad- 
emy that may entitle him to travel 
with the West Point debating team. 

In a letter to his parents, Cadet 
Garn said he enjoyed West Point very 
much but had little time for recreation. 
Since entering the school last July he 



has maintained a scholastic rating 12 
to 16th from the top of his class of 
about 630 freshmen. 

While upper classmen were gone for 
the holidays, Cadet Garn was made 
company commander of his group. He 
also was awarded a letter at the West 
Point cross country meet ; one of 10 
cadets in his class to gain the honour. 

He wrote that of the 2,000 cadets 
enrolled at the school he has met about 
12 Latter-day Saint boys who band 
together to hold meetings every Sun- 
day. Arlen was preparing to leave on 
a mission last spring when his call 
to the Army arrived. 

(Continued on Outside Back Cover) 



%® 



Q^uperslil 



uperstitien . . . 

Superstition is Satan's substitute for 
faith. Throughout history it has 
worked Spiritual havoc with the 
children of men. 

The attempt to invest inanimate 
objects with living power is its com- 
monest deceptive trick. Man-made 
images are set up for worship. Certain 
pools of water are said to possess 
miraculous power to heal the sick who 
may dip themselves therein. Super- 
stition leads to idolatry. Idolatry is 
begotten of evil and the powers of 
darkness and leads to sin and super- 
stition. 

The appeal of superstition is to the 
emotions, never to reason which it 
submerges. It trusts more to the 
vaulted ceiling, the stained glass, and 
dramatic ritual than to calm statement 



of unvarnished truth. There is no in- 
tellectual progress where superstition 
has found entrance. Those who are 
ruled by superstition walk in fear. 

By contrast, how glorious is faith ! 
Faith worships only the God of 
Heaven, and Him directly. Faith re- 
fueses to heed hidden signs and sym- 
bols, for it lives by truth, and truth 
ever dwells in the light. Faith is ever 
happy, for it knows that the Lord 
rules by love, and that, if the law be 
kept, there is no need of fear. 

The Gospel of Jesus Christ provides 
no place for superstition of any kind; 
and by that token Latter-day Saints 
should free themselves from every 
superstitious belief and practice. 

— Elder J (dm . I. IVidtsoe. 



'/'here is a sacrcdncss in tears. They are not the marl: of weakness, bui 
of power, '/'hey speak more eloquently than ten thousand tongues. They 
are the messengers of overwhelming grief, of deep contrition, and unspcah- 

able love. 



May, 1952 



179 



Happiness j A Goal to Strlvei|For 

By BRO. T. K. BASSETT 



r HEN God patterned man's life 
many goals were set for which 
he was to strive. Happiness is one of 
the most prominent of these goals. 
All men were created equal in their 
status upon the earth, but differences 
abound in character, temperament and 
everyday outlook on life. Therefore to 
achieve this degree of happiness, in our 
worldly life, some have to strive 
harder and persevere longer than 
others. How do we reach this goal, 
we might ask? 

Let us close our eyes for a moment 
and imagine a fertile green valley, 
set amongst the high hills. This is 
the vale of perfected happiness. Wind- 
ing up the hill and down into the 
valley is a road. This is the road we 
have to follow if we wish to live in 
the fruitful clime of this valley. We 
have to pass seven milestones on our 
uphill journey; milestones which are 
the seven pillars of happiness. Upon 
each stone is inscribed one word ; one 
word which is part of this intricate 
pattern of a happy existence on earth. 

As we climb we learn, and as we 
learn, we begin to live our lives as 
patterned by God. Let us examine 
these milestones in their ascendancy 
order : 

1. Belief. Yes, Belief in God. If we 
believe in Him that gave us this path- 
way to happiness, Him that gave us 
the strength to climb this pathway. 
Him that gave us life itself, we have 
then a firm foundation upon which to 
base our ideals. With this sincere be- 
lief in our hearts we progress upward. 

2. Truth. The word truth has sev- 
eral meanings and we must adhere to 
the meaning of the word where and 
when it may apply. To know the true 
Gospel of Jesus Christ is to be fore- 



most in the pursuit of happiness. Mem- 
bers of the Church of Jesus Christ of 
Latter-day Saints know and believe 
this true Gospel. They are thus well 
on their way to achieving their place 
in this valley of rejoicing. 

3. Prayer. So far on our journey 
we have found that we must believe 
in God and know the true Gospel of 
Jesus Christ. But believing in God and 
knowing this true Gospel brings us 
to pray in thankfulness for the many 
goodnesses God has bestowed upon us. 
Often as we have lowered our heads 
in prayer, perhaps at the opening or 
closing of a meeting or perhaps to 
bless our food, do we not feel happy 
that we have had the opportunity to 
ask of God? 

4. Contentment. Discontented people 
are never happy within themselves and 
they radiate gloom to those about 
them. If we can apply God's principles 
to our way of life we will find peace 
of mind which brings about content- 
ment and ultimately happiness. 

5. Personality. Personality is one's 
ability to interest and serve other 
people. If we can do this we should 
be happy. Personality can be raised 
by effort and practice, but the things 
we do must be to help and please even 
if it means sacrificing our own desires. 

6. Friendliness. The more friends 
we gather around us the more 
smoothly and happily will gleen our 
daily lives. A person alone in this 
world, no matter how much he may 
claim his preference of being that way, 
does not know happiness in the true 
meaning of the word. The gleeful 
laughter of a group of children at 
play, the enjoyment derived from or- 

(Continued on Page 188) 



180 



TE KARERE 



The Sunday School In New Zealand 



By ROBERT M. GOODMAN 



SPECIAL MEETINGS .... 

THIS month the meeting we will 
discuss is the third and final of 
the three Special Meetings, but by no 
means the least important. In fact, this 
meeting may, in some cases, be called 
the most needed of them all. I would 
say that this meeting is particularly 
needed here in the New Zealand Mis- 
sion as it provides for the further 
training of active teachers. This meet- 
ing is designed to take aside all the 
officers and teachers of the Sunday 
School, and others interested, once a 
month and teach them a lesson for 45 
minutes on modern ideas of teaching. 
This meeting is called the BRANCH 
(or Ward) FACULTY MEETING. 
Do not be fooled with the assumption 
that the person qualified to teach this 
lesson need be a college professor or 
one who has many scholastic merits. 
The lesson is very simply outlined in 
the INSTRUCTOR magazine once a 
month and is no different or harder 
than the regular S.S. lesson taught in 
the classes every Sunday morning. 
This meeting is to be held and con- 
ducted at the discretion of the S.S. 
Superintendency. 

SUGGESTED AGENDA .... 

1 . Song. 

2. Prayer. 

3. Lesson from the Instructor given 
(45 minutes). 

4. Business and Reports. 

5. Closing Song. 

6. Prayer. 

(Social and refreshments, or 
either, if not held on Sunday. ) 
The above is the Suggested Agenda 
as taken from the S.S. Handbook. I 
hope you can see the necessity of hav- 
ing this meeting. I also hope you can 
see, as I do, the need for better lessons 



in our Sunday Schools. If you can, 
then this is just the meeting that will 
tend to give you just that. 

Hui Tau is now over and the new 
Sunday School year should be already 
started in your Sunday School. The 
lesson material for this year should be 
just recently started in your classes. 
This Hui Tau has provided a most 
spiritual feast for us all and a general 
recharging of our spiritual storehouses. 
I enjoyed meeting most of you and 
am very sorry that time didn't permit 
me to become better acquainted with 
you fine people. Hui Tau also brought 
me a release from the position of Mis- 
sion S.S. Superintendent. One that I 
accept very reluctantly as I have en- 
joyed working with you fine people 
more than I can say. My calling takes 
me next to the islands to the north, so 
I will not have the opportunity to visit 
your S.S. again. I am being succeeded 
by a very capable man, Elder Garth 
Low, who will continue to visit you 
and provide a programme for the 
betterment of the Mission Sunday 
Schools. Be strong in your Sunday 
School work, Brethren and Sisters. 
Try at all times to better yourselves 
and your S.S. Remember that, to most 
of us, "the only place for us to learn 
the Gospel of Jesus Christ is through 
the efforts of our Sunday School 
teacher." If our teaching is poor, then 
our students are usually twice as poor. 
Keep that one thought high above your 
others in your S.S. work is my depart- 
ing thought to yon. 

May the Lord's choicest blessings 
attend you. 

SACRAMENT GEM 
(May - June) 

May we /><■ among the number 
Worthy to surround the board, 

And partake anew the emblems 
Of tin- suffering <>f cur /.<>/•</. 



May, 1952 



181 



Hue and JMetc in ike JftU&ioH 






Elder Ashby 



Sister Joxes 



Elder Thompson 



Two More Elders Released 

Once again we come to that time 
when we say goodbye to some of the 
Lord's servants who have been labour- 
ing in our land of New Zealand for 
the past two years. On the 18th of 
March ELDER LaMAR J. ASHBY 
& ELDER LEE LaRALL THOMP- 
SON boarded the S.S. Aorangi to re- 
turn to their homes back in the land 
of Zion. 

These two elders arrived together 
twenty-five months ago in the land of 
"Aotearoa" on the 15th day of Febru- 
ary, 1950. On their return trip they 
hope to do a little sightseeing in 
Hawaii and tour Western Canada for 
a week or two if the opportunity pre- 
sents itself. 

Elder Ashby was assigned to labour 
in the Waikato District for the first 
two months of his mission. Then he 
was transferred to Taranaki and the 
last year of his mission was spent 
in the Wellington District. Elder Ash- 
by hopes to be able to go back and 
work on the family farm. 

Elder Thompson spent the first 8 
months of his mission in the Welling- 
ton District. Since then he has 
laboured in the Wairarapa, Taranaki 
(Mahia), and Hawke's Bay Districts. 
Elder Thompson will help on the farm 
when he returns. He also plans on 
going to an electrical night school. 



Local Missionary Called 

On the 15th of March President 
Ottley set apart SISTER MAR- 
JORIE ROSE HANNAH JONES 
as a missionary companion to Sister 
Paxman. Sister Jones is from Frank- 
ton and is well qualified to serve in 
the capacity of the position she has 
been called to fulfill. She will labour 
in the Auckland District. 




Sister Hay 
Apology 

The Te Karere wishes to apologize 
for not announcing that SISTER 
MURIEL HAY was called as a mis- 
sionary to serve with and help her 
husband in the work Pres. Ottley has 
called him to perform. Elder and Sis- 
ter Hoy will have their headquarters 
in Auckland. 



182 



TE KARERE 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO I TE HITORI TE HAHI 

(Essentials 
in Church History) 

WAHANGA TUATORU 

Translated by George R. Hall 




RITERITE TAHI NGA WHANAU 



Te Hoko Whenua 

ITE mea kua whakahaungia nga 
Hunga Tapu o Nu Iaaka kia hiki 
ki Ohaio noho ai, i pnta ano te wha- 
kahau ki te hunga e noho ana i taua 
wahi, kia tohaina mai etahi pitopito o 
ratou whenua hei koha aroha ki nga 
tuaakana, teeina, tera e whakaeke mai 
i te whakahau a te Atua kia hiki ite 
rawhiti ki te 'uru, kia, whakanga i 
Ohaio mo tetahi wa, a ko te mutunga 
o te noho i konei, ko te hiki ki te 
nuku o te whenua i te uru. Kia tiaki 
pai ratou i a ratou moni hei tango 
whenua mai mo ratou ina tae ratou ki 
te whenua kua whakapapatuputia mo 
ratou i te pa o Hiona, a te wa e wha- 
kaaturia mai ai, kei whea taua wahi. 
Ko tenei te korero e taria atu nei, a 
kei te taenga mai o nga tuaakana me 
nga teeina i te "Rawhiti" ka whaka- 
mohiotia taua wahi kia ratou. A ka 
whakaritea ko ratou hei hoko i nga 
whenua, hei timata ano hoki i te papa- 
kamaka e tu ai te pa : a, e ai ta te 
whakahau, kei taua wa e timata ai ta 
koutou huihui mai ; koutou me o kou- 
tou whanau ; tena tangata me tona 
whanau. tena tangata me tona whanau, 
i nga whaka-taunga kia ratou a te 
Pihopa o te Hahi. 
Riterite Tahi Nga Whanau 

Ite marama o Mei 1831, ka timata 
te whakaeke o nga Hunga Tapu i 

nnuhia mai ra i \n Iaaka ki Ohaio ; 



a i taka ki a Pihopa Patereti te mahi 
tuari i nga whenua ki a ratou ; kua 
takoto hoki te tikanga kia kaua tetahi 
whanau e rahi ake i tetahi ; kia hangai 
nga tuaritanga ki nga mea e hapa ana 
i tena whanau, i tena whanau, i te 
torutoru i te tokomaha ranei. Ale hoatu 
ki te Upoko o te whanau he tewhikete 
"Taunaha" ki a ia i tetahi turanga 
papatupu mona me tona whanau, i roto 
i te hahi. Ki te taka tetahi tangata 
ki roto i te he, kaore ia e tika kia 
tono i tetahi wahi i wehea ki te Pihopa 
ma nga rawakore me te hunga kei 
roto i te mate, o roto i te hahi. Ko te 
wahi anake i tiitingia (deeded) atu 
mona, e riro i a ia. Me whakatu he 
toa, me whakaki ki nga hua i tiria 
e te iwi, kia rahi atu i te nui e rato 
ai tena tena ; e whakaarotia iho ana ka 
rato te katoa e whakawhirinaki ana ki 
nga whakaaro i hangaia ai te toa hei 
tuaratanga mo te Pihopa, mana nei e 
tuari ki te hunga katoa e hapa ana. e 
mate ana. A i tenei whakahangaitanga, 
ka tutuki etahi o nga mahi i whaka- 
tapua (consecrate) ; hei whakatikatika 
i te Hunga Tapu hei ako i a ratou, 
kia matau ratou ki nga tikanga mo 
ratou i mua i te haerenga o nga mema 
te Nali! ki Hiona No to mea, i 
Iliona. kua takoto te tikanga ko te 
"Ropu o te Kotahitanga" (United 
( >rder) e whakatapua ai nga I i 
a te iwi ki te hahi, ka waiho hei ture 



May, 1952 



183 



e whakaturia ai te Pa ; e hoatu ai e 
ahau ki tenei iwi (ki te Hunga Tapu 
o Nu Iaaka) te huarahi hei whaka- 
tikatika i a ratou i roto i te hangaita- 
nga o aku ture. Ka whakatapua e 
ahau tenei whenua mo ratou mo tetahi 
wa poto, tae noa ki te wa e rite ai i 
au, e tonoa ai ratou e au ki a hiki 
ki tetahi atu wahi. 

He Hui Whaitikanga 
i a Hune 1831 

Ite marama o Pepuere ka rangona 
te reo whakahau o te Ariki, kia hui 
nga kaumatua, o roto i nga rohe o te 
Rawhiti ki te 'Uru, o te Tuaraki 
(North) ki te Pounui (South), ki 
Katirana ; kua karangatia te hui ki 
konei, kei tenei hui e hoatu ai nga 
korero whakaako ki nga kaumatua. No 
te toru o nga ra o Hune ka puare te 
Hui no te ono ka mutu I rangaona te 
kaha o te Wairua o te Ariki, i riria 
ai nga mahi a te rewera e nana ana ki 
te Apitihana i a te Atua i tohu ai. 

Te Tapaenga i Nga Tohunga Nui 
Ko Tenei Te Tuatahi Tonu i 
Whakapakia 

No tenei hui i tapaea ai nga tohunga 
nui tuatahi tonu o te Hahi o tenei 
tuaritanga mai ki tenei ao i enei ra 
whakamutunga Nga tangata i tapaea 
ki tenei turanga ko Raimana Waiti 
(Lyman Wight), ko Hoani Matoka 
(John Murdock) ; ko Renata Kahuna 
(Reynolds Cahoon), ko Hawei Witi- 
raka (Harvey Whitlock) me Hairama 
Mete (Hyrum Smith). Xa Hohepa 
Mete, poropiti enei, tangata i whaka- 
noho hei tohunga nui. Nga tangata e 
whai ake nei nga ingoa, i tapaea ano 
hei tohunga nui i raro i nga ringaringa 
o Raimana Waiti ; ko Hohepa Mete 
(Pakeke), ko Hohepa Mete, Poropiti, 
ko Parei P. Parata ko Tame B. Maehe 
do Ihaka Morei, ko Eruera Patereti, 
ko Hohepa Wakewhira (Joseph 
Wakefield), ko Matini Harihi, ko 
Etera Teia, ko Etera Puutu (Ezra 
Booth), ko Hoani Koriri, ko Hama- 
rera H. Mete ko Hoani Whitima ko 
Hirini Rikitona. Katoa ratou i tapaea 
nei hei tohunga nui, na te Pihopa o te 



Hahi, na Eruera Pateriti i manaaki. 
I tautokona ake a Hoani Koriri raua 
ko Ihaka Morei, hei Kaunihera 
Awhina mo Pihopa Whitini i raro i 
nga ringaringa o Raimana Waiti ; ko 
enei whakaotinga he mea whakatutuki 
i runga i te whakahau iho a te Ariki. 

Te Mihona a Hoani-Nga 
Kaumatua i Karangatia Ki Mihiuri 

Ite wa e hui ana, ka puta te kupu 
a Hohepa Mete, Poropiti, "Ko Hoani 
Whakakitenga, i tenei wa, kei roto i 
nga hapu kotahi tekau o Iharaira, i 
arahina ra e Haramanea (Shala- 
maneser), kingi o Ahiria (Assyria) 
ki a whakatikatika mo te wa e hoki 
mai ai ratou i nga whaka mararatanga 
roa i runga i te mata o te whenua. 

I tenei hui te huakitanga mai o etahi 
tikanga whakamiharo i te Atua, ko nga 
whakahau kinga kaumatua kia haere 
ki te whakahuaranga i nga iwi kia 
mohio ratou ki nga whakahau o enei 
ra, he mea homai i roto i nga whaka- 
kitenga mai o roto i tena hui, e te 
mangai tonu o te Atua ki Taana Poro- 
piti. He maha nga kaumatua i kara- 
ngatia kia haere i te whenua e hinga 
atu ana ki te Hauauru ; Haere tokorua 
ai ratou, kauwhau haere ai i te rongo- 
pai ki nga wahi katoa o te whenua i 
tupono mai kia ratou ; i a ratou e haere 
nei e whakamau tonu ana o ratou 
whakaaro, ka tutataki ano ratou katoa 
ki te hui e tu ki Tiakihana Kauti, i 
Mihiuri, a te wa e tu ai te hui ki 
reira. Ko te kupu tenei a te Ariki ki 
a ratou, "Pera ano i aku korero i 
korero ai, ki te u koutou, ka huihui 
ano koutou, kia hari tahi i runga i te 
whenua o Mihiuri, he whenua kua 
whakapapatuputia mo koutou, a he 
whenua kei roto i nga ringaringa o 
koutou hoa riri i tenei ra. Otira, ko 
au ko te Ariki ka whakahohoro i 
taku e mea ai mo te pa, i te wa kua 
rite ; e karaunatia ai e au te hunga 
i kaha i u, ki te koa, ki te hari nui. 

Te Peka o Tamehana (Thompson) 

Ko nga mema o te Hahi i ahu mai 
i Korewira, Nu Iaaka, i te taenga mai 
i Ohaio, i noho ki tetahi kainga ko 



184 



TE KARERE 



Tamehana te ingoa, tekau ma ono 
maero te tawhiti atu i Katirana I nga 
rongo i tae mai, i konei te akoranga 
i a ratou ki a mau ki te ture i homai 
e te Ariki, ara ki te ture tiaki i nga 
taonga i whakatapua. I roto i tenei 
"kahui" tetahi tangata ko Remana Ko- 
peri (Leman Copley) te ingoa; no 
roto ia i te hahi "Shaking Quakers" 
i mua atu i tana urunga mai ki roto 
i tenei Hahi. He nui tonu tona whenua, 
a i tukua e ia taua whenua ki te 
Hahi i raro ite ture whakakotahi i 
korerotia ake ra, i tukua e ia ki te 
peka o Korewira, me etahi atu ano 
hoki i tuku tahi mai i o ratou whenua, 
a ka ahua roa ka mania whakamuri 
te hunga nei, ka paakaru i ta ratou 
kawenata whakatapu i o ratou whenua 
ki te Hahi. Ka takatu nga Hunga 
Tapu i tenei ahua, ka noho titengi i 
mua i o ratou hoa riri, e whainga nei 
i a ratou, i roto i to ratou raruraru 
tonoa ana a Nuera Naiti kia haere ki 
te Poropiti ki te kawe i to ratou raru- 
raru, me pewhea ratou. Ko te kupu 
i huakina mai e te Ariki, "i te mea 
kua wahia" a kua pakaru te Kawenata 
i hangaia e ratou kua kore i taea te 
whakatikatika o taua take, pai ke atu 
mehemea te tangata naana te he, i 
whiua kia toremi ki roto i te hohonu- 
tanga o te Moana. Whakahaua ana 
nga mema o te Peka kia ahu «ki 
Mihuiri, ki roto i nga rohe o nga Ra- 
mana ki te rapu oranga pera me etahi 
atu tangata ; ki a tae ra ano ki te wa 



e rite ai i te Ariki he wahi mo ratou. 
Rongo kau ratou ki tenei kupu whaka- 
hau, ko to ratou whakatikanga, ahu 
ana ki Mihiuri, ko Eruera Naiti ano 
to ratou kai arahi. I muri tata iho o 
te Hui te taenga mai o tetahi reta na 
Oriwa Kautere i tuhi mai, no te whitu 
o Mei i tuhia ai, he ripoata mai i ta 
ratou mahi ko ana hoa i roto i te 
takiwa o Mihiuri i waenganui o nga 
Ramana, me tetahi hapu he "Xawahu" 
te ingoa. He maha rawa nga hahi i 
tenei wahi, a he nui te kino me te 
rewera o roto i a ratou me to ratou 
tu mai ki te whakataka riri ki nga 
kaumatua, otira na te Atua ke te rapu 
utu. 

Te Mihona Ki Te 'Uru 

I te waenganuitanga o Hune (1831) 
ka timata te' haere o nga kaumatua ki 
te 'Uru ki nga wahi i whakaritea ra 
mo ratou i te hui. tokorua i te haere- 
nga ki tena wahi ki tena wahi. Ko 
Etera Teia anake te tangata o ratou 
kaore i haere, tonoa ana ko Heera J. 
Kiriwhini (Selah J. Griffin) hei hoa 
mo T. B. Maehe. I a ratou ka whanatu 
nei, whakamau tonu o ratou mahara 
ko te whenua papatupu i whakaaria, 
kei reira nei te wahi e tu ai a Hiona, 
e hangaia ai te Hiruharama hou. Kua 
ki ke mai te Ariki, ka whakaaturia mai 
kia ratou, i na tae ratou ki te mutunga 
mai o ta ratou haere. ki te wahi i 
tohungia hei tutukitangaatu mo ta 
ratou haere. 



THINK PURE THOUGHTS 



If it pays well to guard our lips, it 
pays just as well and even better to 
guard our thoughts, for every word 
that we speak is preceded by the 
thought. We. as Saints of the \b>st 
High, should accustom ourselves at 
all times to think such pure thoughts 
that if our minds and hearts were laid 
open before the world, nothing would 
appear which when broughl to light 



would cause us to blush. Since the 
key to every man is his thoughts, we 
should thoroughly understand that our 
habitual thoughts will completely de- 
termine our character, for the soul ; s 
truly dyed by the thoughts. Therefore, 
thoughl and character are one. Our 

reputation is what men believe US t" 

he. but our character is what God 
and angels actually know "i us. 

Elder Milton R. Hunter. 



May, 1952 



185 



DISTRICT ACTIVITY 
NEWS 




BAY OF PLENTY 

NEWS REPORT 
By Messines Rogers 

Two deaths in this district caused 
widespread shock and sorrow recently. 
Five days before he died, Te Hoko 
Whitu of Maketu, had only just 
returned from Hawaii where he had 
received his Temple endowments. His 
passing afforded an excellent oppor- 
tunity to expound the principles of 
genealogy and Temple ordinances to 
his tribal people, who are non- 
members. 

Sister Clara Greening, Tauranga, 
was taken to the hospital on a Satur- 
day afternoon and died early Sunday 
morning, following an unsuccessful 
operation for haemorrhage. She was 
District President of the Y.W.M.I.A. 
for two years. The heartfelt sympathy 
of the District is extended to her hus- 
band, three children and members of 
her family. 

Judea Branch members are under- 
going intensive rehearsals in prepara- 
tion for Hui Tau mutual activities. Re- 
lief Society members throughout the 
District, too, are hastily finishing 
quilts, aprons, and all handwork be- 
fore Easter. The Welfare canning de- 
partment of Maketu, with Brother 
Wharekura at the head, leads the field 
by a (1,000?) cans! However, Rotorna 
is not far behind ; Jim W'aerea is still 
"plugging" along! 

I doubt if the Ed. will put this in 
but, believe it or not, we have the 
cutest baby in the mission living right 
here in Rotorua. She looks like Bart 
Watene and acts like Kenva Watene ! 
Her name? CLARE! 



SPECIAL ANNOUNCEMENT ! 

Ex-District President of the Bay of 
Plenty District, Logan W. Barnard, 
was wed to Miss Carol Whittier in 
the Idaho Falls Temple on January 
30th, 1952. The members of the Bay 
of Plenty District wish them both the 
very best of health and happiness, and 
send their AROHANUI. 

HAWKE'S BAY REPORT 

Missionary System: As administra- 
tors, Brother Claude Hawea and 
George Randell, Jr. ; Secretary-Treas- 
urer, Sister Ella Hawea, Brother Hami 
Kawau has been a permanent mission- 
ary, helping out whenever he has been 
called upon. For the past two months 
these brethren have been very active 
visiting the branches throughout the 
District, encouraging and creating in- 
terest amongst the Saints in mission- 
ary work on week-ends. 

Proposed schedule for future months: 
The following branches will be visited 
by week-end missionaries : — 

May, Tamaki and Waimarama 
Branches ; June, Ohiti and Pukehou 
Branches ; July, Rakantatahi-Wai- 
pawa and Te Hauke Branches ; 
August, Heretaunga and Korongata 
Branches ; September, Pukehou and 
Waimarama Branches. 

The District President reports that 
under the very capable hands of Elders 
Ellis, Kawallis, Harvey and Lloyd that 
the Napier area has again been re- 
opened for proselyting. This town has 
ben a very difficult place to do mis- 
sionary work in the past ; so here's 



186 



TE KARERE 



hoping God in His wise purpose may 
open up the way for His servants to 
do much good. 

A report has come to hand that the 
Pukehou-Waipawa Welfare crop has 
been harvested and has been a big 
success. 

Much credit is due to the Korongata 
Tribal Committee for the very fine 
and efficient way in which their meet- 
ing houses, halls and other buildings 
have been painted, decorated and 
renovated. Keen interest has been fos- 
tered amongst the people as a whole 
who represent the committee with 
Brother Peter Edwards as the chair- 
man. Monies are raised from dinners, 
etc., and for every pound put forth 
by the tribal body the Church was to 
subscribe il. The total from the two 
sources, I believe, was to be subsidised 
by the Government pound for pound. 
This wonderful scheme resulted from 
our District President and the tribal 
chairman's discussion on beautifying 
maraes. Te Hauke Branch also has 
great plans ahead for the improvement 
of its marae and Church buildings. 

Under the supervision of Brother 
Paul Randell, preparations for the 
coming Hui Tau are well taken care 
of. Everyone is looking forward to 
Hui Tau. 

WAIRARAPA 
MONTHLY REPORT 

By Steve Scirkovich 

"Choose ye this day whom ye shall 
serve, but as for me and my house we 
will serve the Lord." Using this as an 
inspiration, the Te Harihana Branch 
choosed the 9th Day of March for the 
reorganising of all auxilaries in which 
they could continue to further the 
work of the Lord. We are happy to 
announce that these organizations have 
been carrying out their various duties, 
accordingly using the Hui Tau as an 
encouragement. The preparations for 
Hui Tau are at its best. 



On the 8th of March the M.I.A. 
members of Hiona Branch journeyed 
to the Lake Ferry by special bus for 
a picnic. With Elder King, President 
of the District, Elders Savage and 
Braithwaite, the members spent a very 
enjoyable day. We are grateful to 
Brother Steve Scirkovich for making 
this picnic possible. 

The Relief Society of the Gladstone 
Branch, on the 25th of March, held a 
programme celebrating the 110th anni- 
versary of this organization in the 
Church. The programme was con- 
ducted by Sister Hineteuirarangi Ha- 
era, President of the Branch. After 
the programme refreshments were 
served by the sisters of the Branch 
to the 40 that were present. A birth- 
day cake was the highlight of this 
party. 

We in the Wairarapa District are 
looking forward to Hui Tau, knowing 
it is more than just a place of attrac- 
tion. Here we find the life blood of 
the Church, and are able to take a 
portion of it back to the various dis- 
tricts and branches. For us to visit 
Hui Tau is to receive of this stimulus 
and go on to better works emulating 
the vision we received at Hui Tau. 
Farewell till we meet at Hui Tau ! 

• 
STATISTICS 

Blessings: 

Morris, Sally — Feb. 24th, bv Pres. 
S. J. Ottley (born Aug. 30th," 1951). 
Otaki, Wellington District. 

Riwai, Kathleen Sharon — Feb. 7th, 
by Elder Ned R. Winward (born 
Nov. 10th, 1951), Masterton Branch. 
Hapeta, Ranginui Vernon — Feb. 8th, 
by Elder Vernon Lowry, Rotorua 
Branch. 

Hapi, Adelaide— Feb. 10th. by Elder 
Glen Nielsen, Judea Branch. 

Tata, Gloria— Feb. 10th by Elder 
James K. Marshall, Judea Branch. 



May. 1952 



187 



Ruru, Naumai Priscilla — Mar. 10th, 
by Elder Vernon Lowry, Wairoa, 
Tauranga. 

Tangira, Hitana Aden — Mar. 16th, 
by Elder Glen Nielsen. Mangakino 
Branch. 

Baptisms: 

Ngahere, Winiata (convert) — Mar. 
18th, by Elder Vernon Lowry, Muru- 
para. Confiremed by Elder Richard 
Ahmu. 

Ngahere, Lola— Mar. 18th, by Elder 
Vernon Lowry, Murupara. Confirmed 
by Elder Richard Ahmu. 



Marriages: 

Akuira, Rere Evelyn, to Philys, 
Tarama (non-member), Feb. 2, 1952, 
by Elder Ned R. Winward, Home- 
wood. 

Ngahere, Winiata and Whitu, Rora 
Hoko, united in the bonds of matri- 
mony Mar. 18th, by Elder Vernon 
Lowry at Murupara. 

Deaths: 

Whitu, Te Hoko, of Maketu, passed 
away Mar. 2nd, aged 91 years (dys- 
entry). 

Greening, Ngamako Clara, Taura- 
nga, Mar. 9th (hemorrhage). 




HAPPINESS A GOAL TO STRIVE 

ganized sport, or the young couple 
strolling hand in hand along a country 
lane, all these and many more exem- 
plify the proximity of friendliness and 
happiness. Emerson once wrote, "Hap- 
piness is a perfume that you cannot 
pour upon others without getting a few 
drops upon yourself." This quotation 
sums up the essentials of Personality, 
Friendliness and Happiness ; for we 
cannot multiply happiness without 
dividing it. 

7. Love. In using the word Love 
do not be misled by the modern usage. 
This little word with so large a mean- 
ing covers Love of work, Love of 
play, Love of fellowmen and above all 
Love of God. Looking at these individ- 
ually we find that first, love of work 
brings contentment and happiness 
whereas idleness brings the reverse. 
Secondly, love of play brings about the 
mingling with our friends, sharing our 
joys, comparing our ideas and cement- 
ing the third point — love of fellowmen. 



FOR (Continued from Page 180) 

Let us live up to the commandment, 
"Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thy- 
self." Love of God covers all that has 
been written. This is the supreme 
demand upon our resources if we de- 
sire happiness ; and yet it is no de- 
mand, it is our duty. If we love God, 
are we not giving something in return 
for all that He has given us ; and are 
we not showing our thankfulness for 
all that He has bestowed upon us and 
those before us. Yes, Happiness is to 
be had for the giving, so give our Love 
to God and we shall achieve this 
abundance of joy in all we desire. 

Our imaginary journey is over: we 
have reached the valley of perfection, 
but as we open our eyes again and 
the visions fade, let us retain those 
pieces of reality that build up our 
pattern for everlasting happiness. Let 
us pass on this way of life to those 
around us that they, too, may live a 
life of joyous contentment now and 
forever. 



KNOWLEDGE is proud that it knows so much; 
WISDOM is humble because it knows so little. 



188 



TE KARERE 



SHOPPING LIST 

One of these days I must go shop- 
ping ! I am completely out of self- 
respect. I want to exchange the self- 
righteousness I picked up the other day 
for some humility which they say is 
less expensive and wears better. 

I want to look at some tolerance 
which is being used for wraps this 
season. Someone showed me some 
pretty samples of peace — we are a 
little low on that and one can never 
have too much of it. 

And, by the way, I must try to 
match some patience that my neigh- 
bour wears. It is very becoming on 
her and I think that some might look 
equally well on me. 

I might try on that little garment 
of long-suffering they are displaying. 
I never thought I wanted to wear it, 
but I feel myself coming to it. 

Also, I mustn't forget to have my 
sense of humour mended and look for 
some inexpensive, everday goodness. 
It's surprising how quickly one's stock 
of goods is depleted. 

Yes, I must go shopping soon. 



A RESEARCHER'S CREED 

ON MY HONOUR— 

I will do my best to make this my 
REASEARCH CREED. 

1. No one shall be better informed 
than I on my Family lines. To permit 
anyone else in all the world to have a 
greater knowledge of the families from 
which I am descended is a reflection 
upon my efficiency as a researcher. 

2. Every source which may possibly 
contribute an item to complete the 
record of my family shall be sought 
out and studied. 

3. There shall be no such word as 
"FAIL" in my Research Vocabulary. 
MY DEAD "ARE INTERESTED 
IN RESULTS, NOT EXCUSES. 



The man zvho knows how will always 

have a job, 
But the man zvho knows why will be 

tJiat man's boss. 



CJuppilcaiion 

Dear Lord, I am grateful to Thee this day 

For the things that Jiave made me want to pray. 

That I haz f e been pushed against the wall 

Where none but Thee eould answer my call. 

When I see my children and grandchildren dear 

Slip into pathways that bring me fear, 

And I know no how, in my weak way, 

To keep their feet from going astray. 

I want. Dear Lord, to talk to Thee, 

And know you will hear and answer me. 

The tragedies, heartaches and pain that I face 

Oidy help me to realize deeper Thy grace. 

I want to he able to talk lo Thee 

As I want my children to talk to me. 

That Thou, Pear Lord, will answer my prayers 

/Is I, with my wisdom, would answer I heir's. 

— Grace l\. Squire. 



May, 1952 



JOSEPH SMITH GIVES NEW 
CONCEPT OF MAN 



r HEN Joseph came out of the 
grove he had no need to argue 
for a theory. He knew the facts. God 
is in form like a man. He has a voice ; 
He speaks. He is considerate and kind. 
He answers prayer. His Son is a like, 
but distinct, person. He is obedient 
to the Father and the mediator be- 
tween God and man. The presumption 
of God as a mere essence or principle 
of power and force in the universe was 
for all time exploded . . . 

Joseph was not only instrumental in 
the restoration of the Priesthood under 
divine commission, but he gave an 
entirely new concept of its nature and 
duties, and its distribution, to all 
worthy men . . . 

He initiated the doctrine of new and 
continuous revelation . . . He gave 
a new concept of man — his past, pres- 
ent, and future state; the continuity 
of intelligence and intelligences ; the 
fatherhood — and motherhood, too, of 
our individual spirits ; the free agency 
and choice which were ours in the pre- 
earth life and which are ours in the 
life here ; the spiritual creation pre- 
ceding mortal creation; the relation- 
ship of body to spirit in this life and 
in the hereafter ; the transcendent 
scheme of eternal progression. Of 
special interest is the concept of the 
body as a tabernacle of the spirit . . . 

He established the universal justice 
and love of God for all his children 
as no one else has ever done. His 



theology denies the resurrection to 
none . . . 

There will be general salvation for 
all, but not exaltation — that is the re- 
ward for compliance to law and in- 
dividual goodness. Everyone shall have 
the opportunity to win this greatest 
blessing whether alive or dead, and 
through the Prophet was made pro- 
vision for holy temples within which 
the work for the dead and the living 
can be performed. 

He brought the glorious cancept of 
eternal marriage, teaching that our 
very heaven itself is little more than 
the projection of home into eternity. 
This contribution alone entitles him to 
a place on the very summit of dis- 
tinction among the world's philoso- 
phers and benefactors. 

He brought to the Church its mar- 
vellous organization, and he estab- 
lished a society divinely appointed, 
without peer in this world. 

His literary labours must not be 
forgotten. He produced more scripture, 
that is, the revealed word of God, than 
any other man of whom we have 
record. Indeed, his total scriptural 
productions would almost equal those 
of all others put together . . . 

(Elder Stephen L. Richards of the 
Council of the Twelve. Excerpts from 
remarks on the subject, "Joseph 
Smith," given in the Church Office 
Building, December, 1950.) 



Cowardice asks: Is it safe? Vanity asks: Is it popular? Conscience asks: 
Is it right? 



190 



TE KARERE 



BEHOLD, there are many called, but few are chosen. And 
why are they not chosen ? 

Because their hearts are set so much upon the things of 
this world, and aspire to the honours of men, thai they do not 
learn this one lesson : — 

That the rights of the Priesthood are inseparably connected 
with the powers of Heaven, and that the powers of Heaven 
cannot be controlled nor handled only upon the principles of 
righteousness. 

That they may be conferred upon us, it is true ; but when 
we undertake to cover our sins, or to gratify our pride, our 
vain ambition, or to exercise control or dominion or compulsion 
upon the souls of the children of men, in any degree of un- 
righteousness, behold, the heavens withdraw themselves ; the 
Spirit of the Lord is grieved ; and when it is withdrawn, Amen 
to the Priesthood or the authority of that man. 

Behold, ere he is aware, he is left unto himself, to kick 
against the pricks, to persecute the saints, and to fight against 
God. 

We have learned by sad experience that it is the nature 
and disposition of almost all men, as soon as they get a little 
authority, as they suppose, they will immediately begin to ex- 
ercise unrighteous dominion. 

Hence many are called, but few are chosen. 

No power or influnce can or ought to be maintained by 
virtue of the Priesthood, only by persuasion, by long-suffering, 
by gentleness and meekness, and by love unfeigned. 

By kindness, and pure knowledge, which shall greatly en- 
large the soul without hypocrisy, and without guile — 

Reproving betimes with sharpness, when moved upon by 
the Holy Ghost ; and then showing forth afterwards an increase 
of love toward him whom thou hast reproved, lest he esteem 
thee to be his enemy. 

That he may know that thy faithfulness is stronger than 
the cords of death. 

Let thy bowels also be full of charity towards all men, and 
to the household of faith, and let virtue garnish thy thoughts 
unceasingly; then shall thy confidence wax strong in the pres- 
ence of God; and the doctrine of the Priesthood shall distil upon 
thy soul as the dews from Heaven. 

The Holy Ghost shall be thy constant companion, and thy 
sceptre an unchanging sceptre of righteousness and truth; and 
thy dominion shall be an everlasting dominion, and without 
compulsory means it shall flow unto thee forever and ever. 

(I). & C. 121 :34-46) 



OFFICIAL SUNDAY SCHOOL MAGAZINE BEGINS 
86th YEAR OF PUBLICATION 



THE second oldest Church magazine still being pub- 
lished, "The Juvenile Instructor," began its 86th 
year of publication in early January. 

Now the official organ of the Deseret Sunday School 
Union, the magazine was originally only a "child's paper." 

First editor of the then semi-monthly periodical was 
Elder George Q. Cannon, who six years before had been 
sustained as a member of the Council of the Twelve. 
Fourteen years later he was named a first counsellor in 
the First Presidency, serving later with three Presidents: 
John Taylor, Wilford Woodruff and Lorenzo Snow. 

The first issue of "The Juvenile Instructor" was 
published on January 1, 1866, which was three years be- 
fore the coming of the railroad to Utah on May 10, 1869. 

Securing paper then by ox team across the plains 
was a real problem, and, in the first issue, the editor 
plead, "Bear with us, it will most likely be another month 
before the second number of 'The Instructor' can be 
issued. Our stock of paper is on the way, but not here 
yet, and illustrations which are ordered can hardly reach 
us in less than a month. After that we will endeavour 
to issue to date. The full number of papers, however, 
to make it a semi-monthly, will be printed and supplied 
to subscribers in the year." 

In size, "The Instructor" was then practically the 
same size as the "Church Section" of today's "Deseret 
News" (about 11 inches by 16 inches). But instead of 
the five columns common to the modern tabloid size, 
"The Instructor" was printed in three columns. 

Price of the magazine, which was eight pages, was 
"Terms: Always in advance. Single copy, for six months, 
$1.50. Single copy per annum, $3.00." 

Now, 85 years later, the magazine, despite inflation, 
is down to $2.00 a year per subscription. 

Sunday School workers are now carrying on a vigour- 
ous subscription campaign with a goal of 30,000 subscrip- 
tion set. 



"THE INSTRUCTOR IN N.Z.— Price: 15/- per Year. 




THE MESSENGEIS 

■■■■■■■■ 




MISSION PRESIDENCY 



TttvJj 



I have to live with myself, and so 

I want to be fit for myself to know; 

I want to be able as days go by 

Always to look myself straight in the eye. 

I don't want to stand with the setting sun 

And hate myself for the things I've done. 

I want to go out with my head erect; 

I want to deserve all men's respect; 

While here in the struggle for fame and pelf 

I want to be able to like myself. 

I don't want to look at myself and know 

That I'm bluster and bluff and empty show. 

I never can fool myself; and so, 

Whatever happens, I want to be 

Self-respecting and conscience-free. 

— Edgar A. Guest. 



ABOUT OUR COVER: At Hui Tau with the Mission 
Presidency and their wives. 



TE KAKEUe 



Established 1907 



Volume 46 



Number 6 



June, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley 

Joseph Hay 

George R. Biesinger 

Grover D. Jensen 

James A. Larsen 

John A. Osburn 

Albert J. Wiley 

Bruce P. Sloan 

David T. Briggs 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) 



Tumuaki Mihana 

. . Kaunihera Tuatahi 

Kaunihera Tuarua 

Hekeretari o te Mihana 

. . Assistant Hekeretari 

Mission Recorder 

Asst. Mission Recorder 

Etita 

Asst. Etita 
. . Kaiwhakamaori 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 

"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, 0.1. New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; S.I for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in £Tew Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



CONTENTS 



Editorial: 

From 



the Editor's Pen 



Special Features: 

And So to the Movies 
Latter-day Saint Courtship 
Appreciation 

Church Features: 

The President's Page 

Women's Corner 

Where Your Missionaries Went Afte 

Latter-day Saint Mission Orchestra 

Seek Ye Learning 

The Mission on Wheels 

The Sunday School in New Zealand 

Hui Tau Competition Winners 

Here and There in the Mission: 

Here and There in the Mission 

I CU ill. m. i Maori: 

Ni=i Pou-Tokomanawa <> Koto i T« n 



214 

221 



208 

•1 I 




THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE 

J 

He Kupu Aroha \ 

^ Jm 



By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 



WHAT IS YOUR MISSION IN 
LIFE? 

SOME will say to preach, some to 
teach, some to pray and some to 
heal. Who can say by what divine 
means he can save a soul? There is 
one sure answer, however. There is 
an old axiom in Boy Scouting which 
says, "He who teaches ten men to 
work is greater than he who does the 
work of ten men." Christ's great mis- 
sion was not so much in what He did 
as in WHAT HE TAUGHT MEN 
TO DO FOR THEMSELVES. He 
set the pattern and opened the way 
and gave men the Power of the Priest- 
hood and sent them forth to work out 
their own salvation and exaltation. 

The call for the missionary is upper- 
most in New Zealand today. Yes, for 
men to preach, men to teach, men to 
heal and men to pray. But most of 
all, for the moment is the great call 
for men to prepare the way for 
younger men to learn, that the next 
generation may work in the light, both 
temporally and spiritually. 

Now is the time for the branches 
of the mission to show how much 
faith they have in the Gospel as a 
means to saving the future genera- 
tions. Is there future in just working 
for the other fellow for so many 
shillings a day or in learning to pro- 
duce something on their own and be- 
coming a leader, rather than a follower 



only. The present land owners, farm- 
ers, stock-raisers, tradesmen and 
teachers will die. Who will fill the 
ranks when they pass on? It will be 
the boy of today who prepares him- 
self who will be the successful leader 
of tomorrow. And where will our 
Latter-day Saint youth and others, 
who love the truth, train? In the New 
Zealand College of the CHURCH OF 
JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER- 
DAY SAINTS. 

Your mission and mine is to get 
it ready for them as quickly as pos- 
sible for time is passing very rapidly 
away. 

Material and money have been furn- 
ished and leadership is on the job. 
All that is needed now is missionaries 
and more missionaries, who are willing 
to bare the arm and work to form 
these physical means into beautiful and 
useful buildings for the training of 
our young boys and girls in the crafts 
of life as well as the principles of life 
and Salvation as pertains to the soul. 

Yes, things are moving at the college 
and many are volunteering their ser- 
vices, and many districts and branches 
are tendering their support of these 
volunteers to do this magnificent work. 

Circular instruction has gone out 
by mail, since Hui Tau, and your 

(Continued on Page 200) 



196 



TE KARERE 



(^Q^5^Q^<^Q^o(r^Q^<^Q^G^Q^o(^^o6^Q^o6^Q^ 



s 



Women's Co*h& 

\ By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 

I 



: 






ON April 13th six new missionaries 
arrived from Zion. We enjoyed 
visiting with them at the Mission 
Home while they were waiting to be 
interviewed and assigned to their fields 
of labour. Full of the missionary spirit 
they have come to this land to help 
and give of their time and energy to 
further the work of the Lord. "I'll go 
where you want me to go and do what 
you want me to do, to the best of my 
ability," was the comment that was 
made as they left the Mission Home. 

Yes, as President Cowley says, "The 
blessings are coming to the South Sea 
Isles." They are long overdue, but they 
are coming now. With the building 
programme and these more matured 
missionaries along with the young 
elders should come changes and rapid 
growth in this Mission. Let us each 
take our responsibilities seriously and 
work together to push the work along. 

We still have happy memories of 
Hui Tau. What a wonderful time we 
had, and how happy the people seemed 
to be. I was very much impressed with 
everything at this, my first Hui Tau. 
The weather was perfect, spirituality 
ran high, hospitality was generous, and 
all activity interesting. Can we make 
it even bet icv ncxl year/ This should 
be our aim. 

Relief Society sisters should use the 
November 1951 magazine for the 
month of June. This is jusl a re- 
minder to help you keep up with the 



work outlined. You remember we 
started in February with the July 1951 
magazine. 

The assignment for Hui Tau next 
year is as follows : — 

1. A patchwork quilt to show how- 
quilts can be made from scraps of 
material found in your homes. It can 
be either cotton or woollen. If cotton 
prints are used, they should be new 
pieces left over from dresses, shirts 
or any garment that has been made 
in the home. If woollen pieces are used 
they can be cut from good used mater- 
ial. Nozv is the time to start gathering 
your material. 

2. A knitted garment such as a 
child's sweater or cardigan, a frock or 
soakers. 

3. An article or two of children's 
clothing made from old clothing or 
used material. Anything else you care 
to bring to make a nice display. A 
very practical assignment, I would say, 
but let's not leave it until two or three 
months before Hui Tau. Let's begin 
NOW! 

Sisters, we are receiving a few 
magazines back to the Mission Home 
unclaimed by sisters who have evident- 
ally changed their addresses. Will you 
please inform us where to soul them? 

We have a waiting list of Meters who 

want the magazine, so we haven't any 

to lost-. 



June, 1952 



197 



cTvem the (ocLiler s JJen 



CONSCIENCE and SIMPLICITY 
Two Gospel Principles 



IN the first chapter of the Gospel of 
John we read: "In him zvas life; 
and the life zvas the light of men. And 
the light shineth in darkness; and the 
darkness comprehended it not. That 
zvas the true Light, ivhich lighteth 
every man that cometh into the world." 

Here we find that every man that 
is born into the world is given this 
"true light." Now this light is different 
from the "other Comforter" which was 
to be given to the disciples for Jesus 
called him "Even the Spirit of Truth ; 
whom the world cannot receive, be- 
cause it seeth him not, neither knoweth 
him." Although every man receives 
this light, what is it, and what does 
it do ? It must have been important 
or John wouldn't have made special 
reference to it. 

As Christ said the world does not 
know Him, although they make some 
guesses as to His nature and purpose, 
but we as Latter-day Saints have no 
need for speculation for we have re- 
ceived further enlightenment about 
this "Light" John speaks of in his 
Gospel. In the Doctrine and Covenants 
(84:44-47) we find, "For you shall 
live by every word that proceedeth 
forth from the mouth of God. For the 
word of the Lord is truth, and whatso- 
ever is truth is light, and whatsoever 
is light is Spirit, even the Spirit of 
Jesus Christ. And the Spirit giveth 
light to every man that cometh into 
the zvorld; and the Spirit enlighteneth 
every man through the world, that 
hearkeneth to the voice of the Spirit. 
And every one that hearkeneth to the 
voice of the Spirit cometh unto God, 
even the Father." As we find here, 
the voice of the Spirit (of Christ) is 
speaking to us, as we have need, and 



if we will hearken to the voice we will 
be brought "unto God, even the 
Father." 

Again in the latter-day scriptures 
we find a clear and definite explana- 
tion as to the manner in which this 
Spirit of Christ works. In the Book 
of Mormon we read, "For behold, my 
brethren, it is given unto you to judge, 
that ye may know good from evil 
with a perfect knowledge ; and the way 
to judge is as plain as the daylight 
is from the dark night. For behold, 
the Spirit of Christ is given to every 
man, that he may know good from 
evil; wherefore, I show unto you the 
way to judge; for everything which 
inviteth to do good, and to persuade 
to believe in Christ, is sent forth by 
the power and gift of Christ ; where- 
fore ye may know with a perfect 
knowledge it is of God. But whatso- 
ever thing persuadeth men to do evil, 
and believe not in Christ, and deny 
Him, and serve not God, then ye may 
know with a perfect knowledge it is 
of the devil ; for after this manner doth 
the devil work, for he persuadeth no 
man to do good ; no, not one ; neither 
do his angels ; neither do they who 
subject themselves unto them. And 
now, my brethren, seeing that ye know 
the light by which ye may judge, which 
light is the light of Christ, see that ye 
do not judge wrongfully; for with the 
same judgment which ye judge ye 
shall also be judged" (Moroni 
7:15-18). 

So the Spirit of Christ is given to 
each and every man that he may know 
good from evil. We can term this 
effect of the Spirit of Christ as our 
conscience. This being true we should 
hearken unto our conscience if it pricks 



198 



TE KARERE 



us (for some mis-deed we may have 
performed) and remember that this 
is one of the manners in which the 
Lord works with us to keep us on the 
right path. If we do not do this our 
conscience will become weak and may 
even leave us because of constant mis- 
use. 

This is what Paul, the Apostle, 
meant when speaking of those who had 
departed from the faith in the latter 
times. For they were going to give 
"heed to seducing spirits and doctrines 
of devils ;" would speak lies in hypoc- 
risy ; and "having their conscience 
seared with a hot iron ;" because of 
their willful disregard and not taking 
heed to the Spirit of Christ (See 
I Timothy 4:1-3). 

Paul must have been a great be- 
liever in letting a man's conscience 
guide him, for he referred to this prin- 
ciple many times throughout his writ- 
ings ; and on one occasion, in speaking 
in defence of false accusations, said, 
"And herein do I exercise myself, to 
have always a conscience void of 
offence toward, and toward men." 
(Acts 24:16.) 

He, that is, Paul, told us to be 
mindful of other men's consciences, 
especially if they were weak and 
needed help in the Church. If we in- 
jured such consciences further, we 
would thereby be sinning against 
Christ. (See I Cor. 8:12.) 

The principle of conscience should 
not be discussed without mentioning 
that it is very closely connected with 
the free agency of mankind. If this 
were not true, we would never see one 
man do something that we ourselves 
would not do. Although they could do 
it our conscience would not let us. 
And when asked why we did not do 
the same, would we not answer, "Why 
is my liberty judged of another man's 
conscience?" So take the counsel given 
us and use our agency that we may 1h' 
found with grace and that our ion- 
science may not bother US at any time, 



but that we may be pure and not de- 
filed and unbelieving as some are. 
(See Titus 1:15.) 

Let us remain acceptable to God 
by doing His work and not disobedient 
to His commandments. "Now the end 
of the commandment is charity out of 
a pure heart, and of a good conscience, 
and of faith unfeigned: For our re- 
joicing is this, the testimony of our 
conscience, that in simplicity and godly 
sincerity, not with fleshy wisdom, but 
by the grace of God, we have had our 
conversation in the world." (I Tim. 
1:5; II Cor. 1:12.) 

As plain and understandable that 
the practices and doctrines of Christ 
are, it seems that man wants to be- 
lieve the mysterious. He is not con- 
tent with taking the straightforward 
and leaving well enough alone. Be- 
cause he has to take off, add to or re- 
arrange things, he has placed himself 
in a most embarrassing position. He 
now believes things which cannot be 
proven from the scriptures, and when 
asked to explain his belief his only 
answer is that, "It is a mystery we 
are not supposed to understand," or, 
"Oh ! I'm not expected to know that. 
Only the minister knows such things." 

To this I would like to ask one 
question. Who did Christ choose to 
be His disciples and did His disciples 
know His Doctrine? Of course the 
answer is obvious, for Jesus choose the 
everyday man who had led a normal 
life and He taught him His doctrine. 
He choose the humble man because 
his conscience was pure and in simplic- 
ity His doctrines could be understood. 
All were able to comprehend, for the 
Gospel was preached in a manner un- 
derstandable to all. 

Paul said he "came not with excel- 
lency of speech." nor "with enticing 
words of man's wisdom." Another 
time he also said, "He that giveth let 
him do it with simplicity" (not with a 
great show). The Lord also told His 
followers not to fast or pray before 



June, 1952 



199 



men but gave them a guide to live 
simply and honestly before God and 



Children loved the Lord, I imagine, 
for much the same reason. Here was 
a man they could love because they 
could understand the tenderness and 
affection He showed them. Here was 
a man they could admire because He 
was enough like them to understand 
their manner and humility. Here is 
the answer to Christ's statement that 
we must humble ourselves as little 
children. We must show the devotion 



which they show and then we will 
be as they. We will be child-like but 
not like children. We will be simple 
without being simple-minded. We will 
be living His simple religion and abid- 
ing by the doctrines of simplicity which 
Christ has given us. 

Let us remember that the woman 
who fought against God had MYS- 
TERY written across her forehead 
first of all and thereby she was cor- 
rupted from the simplicity which is in 
Christ. (See II. Cor. 11:3.) 

— B.P.S. 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE (Continued from Page 196) 



District and Branch Presidents are 
prepared to tell you just what to do 
to become a missionary to the College. 
It must be in order, so see your presi- 
dent first and he will direct you how 
to proceed. We will need no more 
lady volunteers for the present, but 
those who desire to help may present 
their names and will be subject to call 
when they are needed. 

Our groups are now organized so 
that the work of the camp will go 
forward in an orderly manner, and 
provision is made for study and wor- 
ship and fun and recreation that will 
make life a happy experience at the 
College ; doubly happy because we will 
be conscious of the fact that we are 
missionaries to a future generation as 
well as the one in which we live. 

The whole Mission is looking to- 
ward the Waikato these days and 



Waikato is awake to its responsibility 
to show the Mission that it is not 
asleep. 

As your President, I have often 
said and say again, "Great achieve- 
ments are not the result of great gifts 
by a few, but by the SMALL BUT 
FAITHFUL contributions of many 
people. "Twelve thousand loyal hearts 
can revolutionize the future of New 
Zealand if set to the ONE GREAT 
PURPOSE OF TRAINING OUR 
YOUTH." 

Luke 9 :62 : "No man, having put 
his hand to the plough, and looking 
back, is fit for the Kingdom of God" 
WE WILL NOT LOOK BACK— 
WE HAVE PUT OUR HANDS TO 
THE PLOUGH! 



Have a heart that never hardens, a temper that never tires, and a touch 
that never hurts. 



200 



TE KARERE 



Where Your Missionaries Went After Hui Tau 



MISSION OFFICE 

Address: 514 Remuera Road, 

Auckland. 

Elder George R. Biesinger 

Sister Audrey Biesinger 

Elder Joseph Hay 

Sister Muriel Hay 

Elder David T. Briggs 

Elder Grover D. Jensen, Sen. Elder 

Elder James A. Larsen 

Elder Garth R. Low 

Elder John A. Osburn 

Elder Albert J. Wiley 

Elder Bruce P. Sloan 

AUCKLAND DISTRICT 
Address: Box 72. 

Elder Charles W. Ashman 

Elder Donald S. Baker, Sen. Elder 

Sister Marjorie Jones 

Elder Harold C. Lloyd 

Elder LeRoy Morris 

Sister Rachael Morris 

Elder George W. Paget 

Sister Virginia A. Paxman 

BAY OF ISLANDS 
Address: Box 109, Kaikohe. 

Elder Darrel F. Burbank 

Elder Paul W. Mendenhall, D.P. 

BAY OF PLENTY DISTRICT 

Address: 31 Clinkard Ave., 

Rotorua. 

Elder Richard Ahmu 
Elder Vernon Lowry, D.P. 

No. 2 Camp, P.O. Mangakino 

Elder James K. Marshall 

Elder Glen Nielsen 

Elder Wallace L. Houchen 

COOK ISLANDS 
Address: P.O. Aitutaki. 

Elder Reo B. Cutler 
Elder Gilbert Lowry 



Elder William Thompson 
Sister Una Thompson 

P.O. Rarotonga. 

Elder Don L. Hunt 
Elder Robert W. LeBaron 
Elder Orton Wilkins, D.P. 

HAURAKI DISTRICT 

Address. Box 90, Thames. 

Elder Donald Grant Paget, D.P. 
Elder Daniel A. Burnett 
Sister Irene T. Burnett 
Elder Keith Gleave 

HAWKE'S BAY DISTRICT 

Address: Box 22, Napier. 

Elder Glen Ellis 

Elder Keith F. Scoville 

Elder Frederick R. Kawallis 

Elder Gaynard R. Harvey 

Bridge Pa, Hastings (temp.). 

Elder Basil E. DeWitt 
Elder James H. King, D.P. 

P.O. Te Hauke. 

Elder Enoch Brown 
Sister Elizabeth Brown 

KING COUNTRY DISTRICT 
Address: Box 157, Otorohanga. 

Elder John Ford 

Elder Heber Fullmer 

Elder Reece L. Glines, D.P. 

Elder Lynnwood Emmett Savage 

MAHIA DISTRICT 
Address: Box 18, Nuhaka. 

Elder George Q. Cannon III. 
Elder Horace T. Christensen 

Elder J. Cash Smith, D.P, 
Sister Vivian Smith 



June, 1952 



201 



OTAGO DISTRICT 
Address: Box 1383, Christchurch. 

Elder Willard R. Brown 

Elder Norman R. Broadhead 

Elder Morris Grant 

Elder Keith L. Newman 

Elder John E. Pitcher 

Elder Stanley B. Roberts, D.P. 

Address: Box 664, Dunedin. 

Elder William D. Fryer 
Elder Alpheus C. Leetham 
Elder Lawrence A. Stevens 
Elder Gerald R. Ursenbach 

Address Box 208, Timaru. 

Elder Robert D. Card 
Elder Paul B. Hatch 



POVERTY BAY DISTRICT 
Address: Box 422, Gisborne. 

Elder Richard A. Bigler 
Elder Cyril Clark 
Elder Ronald M. Cosgrove, D.P. 
Elder Glen H. Llewellyn 

TARANAKI DISTRICT 

Address: 26 Anzac Parade, 

Wanganui. 

Elder Calvin A. Hancock 

Elder Donald W. Williams, D.P. 



WAIRAU DISTRICT 
Address: 66 Washington Valley, 
Nelson. 

Elder Mahonri T. Brown 

Elder Kelton L. Chamberlain, D.P. 

Address: Mrs. MacDonald 
Grovetown, Blenheim. 

Elder Armond Lee Crockett 
Elder Eli R. Mitchell 

WELLINGTON DISTRICT 
Address: 40 Cuba St., Palm. Nth. 

Elder Robert F. Baker 
Elder Monte C. Scoville 

Address: 97 Knights Rd., 
Lower Hutt. 

Elder James P. Crook 
Elder Ralph S. Hunsaker 

Address: Porirua Pa. 

Elder Ned R. Winward, D.P. 
Elder Louis C. Midgley 
Elder Theron C. LeBaron 



Address: Bruce Rd., Levin. 

Elder Millard B. Rice 
Elder Alan B. Shaw 



WAIKATO DISTRICT 
Address: Box 328, Hamilton. 

Elder Glen A. Hansen 
Elder Douglas R. Kerr 
Elder Robert B. Powell 
Elder Stanley E. Richards, D.P. 
Elder Jack C. Thorpe 

WAIRARAPA DISTRICT 
Address: 42 Villa St., Masterton. 

Elder Keith Braithwaite 

Elder Robert B. Fox, Sen. Elder 



WHANGAREI DISTRICT 
Address: Box 364, Whangarei. 

Elder Jack D. Bowe 
Elder Kenneth K. Milner 
Elder James Nelson 
Elder Vaughn M. Taylor 
Elder Charles Tipine 

NEW ZEALAND COLLEGE 

Address: Tuhikaremea Rd., 
Frankton. 

Elder J. Elmer Collings 
Elder LeRoy D. Johnson 



TE KARERE 



Latter Day Saint Mission Orchestra 

By ELDER CHARLES ASHMAN 




HERE IT IS AT LAST! 

AFTER many weeks of good old 
hard "woodshedding" we have for 
you a dance band. It has by no means 
reached the art of perfection, but it 
has reached the point where it can 
successfully play for a good old "shin- 
dig." The orchestra has been given 
the distinct title of "N.Z. Latter-day 
Saint Mission Orchestra," for which 
it shall be known throughout the 
Mission for better or for worse. We, 
of course, being members of this 
orchestra are trying for the best. 

Now for the story of how the 
orchestra got its start. We thought it 
would be a great idea if we could get 
a band together to play for all of our 
mission functions. Also we thought 
it would be a good idea to get our 
music from the States, so we sent 
away for it. When we received the 
music last December we started right 
away to practice on it. It took a good 
many practices before the music we 
were trying to play even started to re- 
semble music. Each country having 
different style of playing, the two 
Samoans, a couple of Americans and 
the rest New Zealanders, we had a 
difficult time getting used to each 
other. 



We held at least one practice each 
week and when possible we would 
have more. We held all of our re- 
hearsals at the Mission Home, which 
was an ideal spot for such things. I 
am sure that those at the Mission 
Home who heard the band the first 
couple of practices thought it was a 
waste of time, besides being a disgrace 
to that art called music. But through 
the diligent practicing of all those con- 
cerned, soon harmony was heard 
through the mess of confusion. 

We were privileged to play at the 
Hui Tau Gold and Green Ball, held 
at the "Cobanna Club," near Napier. 
It was the second time the band had 
played for a dance, so there were many 
things the dancers had to put up with. 
Singing for us several times during the 
evening was New Zealand's famous 
recording and radio star — Mavis 
Rivers. Her performance was appreci- 
ated and enjoyed by all, and went to 
make the evening a bigger success. 

At this point I would like to intro- 
duce to you those who set in to make 
up this band: 

Playing 1st Alto Sax we have Mat- 
thew Chote, who has had a lot of 
experience playing in dance bands and, 
of course, does very well. 

On 2nd Tenor Sax we have Charles 
Ashman whose abilities are very 
limited. 

3rd Alto Sax we have Moody Rivers 
whose homeland is Samoa, where at 
one time he had an orchestra of his 
own. 

1st Trumpet is Tui Purcell, who also 
conies from Samoa, a very prominent 
person in the Auckland Branch, and 

whenever there i^ any need for a (lance 
band Tui Purcell is a good man to 

have on the job. 



June, 1952 



On 1st Trombone we have Jerry 
Ottiey, who lets his trombone speak 
for him. He received a lot of experi- 
ence while at home in Salt Lake City. 
He played with several dance bands 
there. 

At the piano is Kere Rei, who 
obviously needs no introduction. I 
think everyone in the mission knows 
of her outstanding talents. We are 
very lucky to have her with us and 
also we are quite proud of her. 

Ngaro Horo pulls the strings on the 
Bass to help the good cause along. He 
certainly is an asset to the orchestra. 

And last but not least is Jim 
Roberts who capably plays the guitar. 

That takes care of the orchestra . . . 
it has a grand total of 8 members. 
While at Hui Tau we had Elder 
Berrett who played the drums and 
Elder Brown the clarinet. 

As I have stated before, we are 
far from the art of perfection, but if 
time will only allow we hope that 



this orchestra will be one you aU will 
enjoy listening to and also enjoy danc- 
ing to. In the near future we hope to 
present to the mission a dance band 
that will do justice to the name of 
which it has been given. It is also the 
plan of the band to present to the mis- 
sion many new dances, which I am 
sure will be new to the mission as well 
as the country of New Zealand. I'm 
sure in months to come the band will 
be one we all will be proud of. 

In closing I would like to take this 
opportunity to publicly thank all those 
who have had any part in the success 
of this band. A special thanks goes 
to our President, who has kindly given 
us permission to have this band and 
to let it represent the mission. And 
to those who play in the band, I would 
like to thank them for the very fine 
support they have given, in diligently 
practicing, not only in our rehearsals, 
but on their own. 

It is our earnest desire and prayer 
that this orchestra will, in time to 
come, be an asset to this great mission. 



Seek Ye Learning 



WHY THE TIDE GOES OUT 



TIDES are due to the attraction of 
the sun and the moon. The water 
is piled up by the attraction, as we 
see at the seaside when the water 
comes sweeping up to a higher level 
on the beach, and then falls back again 
as the tide falls, or ebbs. 

There is a greater pull on the side 
of the earth which is towards the 
moon and the smallest pull on the side 
farthest away. High tides are drawn 
up in these two positions. The earth 
turns completely round every twenty- 
four hours, and during this period 
every point passes the two marks 



of high tide. Thus there are two high 
tides every twenty-four hours. 

But the sun also plays its part in 
making tides. Although the sun is 
much bigger than the moon, it is many 
millions of miles farther away, and, 
therefore, its comparative pull is less. 

At full moon and new moon, the sun 
and the moon are both exerting their 
pull in the same direction and excep- 
tionally high tides, called spring tides, 
occur. At half-moon the sun and the 
moon are piling up tides in different 
places. These are called Neap Tides, 
and are not so great in their change. 



204 



TE KARERE 



Hut and JJkeee in the MCs^Ioh 



Niue to Have Missionaries 

At Hui Tau President Ottley as- 
signed two elders to go over to the 
Cook Islands group and open up a 
new field of labour. Bro. Fritz Kruger 
has been doing as much missionary 
work as possible, by living his re- 
ligion, on the Niue Island for the past 
while and upon a recent visit to Auck- 
land it was made known that Niue 
would be a good place to send some 
elders. 

After looking into the situation 
Pres. Ottley agreed, and so, on the 
28th of April, Elder Wallace L. Ber- 



rett and Elder Robert M. Goodman 
boarded a plane to fly to Fiji. The 
next day Pres. Ottley left on the 
Tofua to meet them there and then 
they will proceed to Niue. 

Elder Berrett has been editor of the 
Te Karere in times past and Elder 
Goodman was released from the Mis- 
sion Sunday School to fill this new 
assignment. 

These elders have a splendid oppor- 
tunity of proclaiming the Restored 
Gospel to this "Isle" of the seas and 
we all wish them success in their 
labours. 





Elder Berrett 



Elder Goodman 



More Missionaries Arrive 

Coming to the land of "Aotearoa" 
we have six more missionaries who 
stepped off the Aorangi on the 30th 
April. They are : 

ELDER DON RAY REMING- 
TON comes to us from Salt Lake 
City, Utah. Elder Remington luckily 
was exempt from the draft and was 
able to accept a call and come out 
to New Zealand. Elder Remington 
was working before receiving his call. 
He has been assigned to work at the 
farm at least until Pres. Ottley comes 
back from his trip to the islands. 




Elder Remington 



June, 1952 



205 




Elde 



Sister Lewis 



ELDER LESTER LOWELL 
LEWIS and his wife, SISTER 
GERTIE NEILSON LEWIS, who 
come to us from Portland, Oregon. 
Elder Lewis is a convert to the 
Church and holds the office of seventy 
in the Priesthood. Within the past 
few years he has also fulfilled a stake 



mission back in Zion. Together, Elder 
and Sister Lewis have been active in 
the auxiliaries of the Church and have 
gained experience which should be in- 
valuable to them wherever they go. 
They have been sent to the Welling- 
ton District for their first field of 
labour. 




Elder Richins 



Sister Richins 



ELDER GEORGE EDWARD 
RICHINS and SISTER MYRTLE 
RALPH RICHINS left their home 
in Wanship, Utah, to come on their 
mission, doing the Lord's work. Elder 
Richins is a High Priest and was 
called from the bishopric in his ward 
to preach the Gospel to this land 
across the many waters. He also has 
fulfilled a stake mission. Sister Richins 



is well founded in the Relief Society, 
being both stake and ward president 
during her lifetime. The Richins left a 
family of two girls and a boy whom 
are al lmarried and have children of 
their own, giving the Richins a total 
of 10 grandchildren. The Richins have 
been called to labour in the Waikato 
District, where their experience will 
be used to do much good. 



206 



TE KARERE 



ELDER CLAIR RULON STEW- 
ART is another seventy, and hails 
from Clinton, Utah. Elder Stewart 
was in the services for a short time 
but upon receiving his discharge he 
accepted his call to preach the Gospel 
to every creature. Before his military 
service he was mainly helping on the 
family farm. Auckland will be his first 
field of labour. 




Elder Stewart 



Saints Arrive Back From Hawaii 

Arriving in the country after a leave 
of four months, we received back into 
the fold some of the Saints who have 
been doing vicarious work for the 
dead. Stepping off the Aorangi, which 
docked April 30th, were five of these 
hunga tapu who have been faithful to 
the whakapapa work. They were Bro. 
Hirni T. Heremaia of the Kaikohe 
Branch, Bay of Islands ; Bro. Hemi 
Kupa of Ohiti Branch, Hawke's Bay 
District; Sister Francis K. Allen of 
Wanganui Branch, Taranaki District ; 
Sister Rangi Davies, as the Genea- 
logical Supervisor, from the Rotorua 
Branch, Bay of Plenty ; Sister Raua- 
ngi Hapuku of the Te Hauke Branch, 
Hawke's Bay District ; and Sister 
Lucy Marsh of the Heretaunga 
Branch, Hawke's Bay District. 

These Saints were able to finish all 
the names which they took with them 
and expressed satisfaction in being able 
to do this work. After they had 
finished they were able to take a trip 
of the Islands, and are the first Maori 
group who have done this. We are 
happy to have them back with us and 
know they will be a great help to the 
Mission in this important work. 



Hurry ! Hurry ! Hurry ! 



Don't be left out. There is a limited supply of Bound Volumes of the 
TE KARERE now on hand. They are bound with a cloth cover which will 
look fine on your library shelf. You get them for what they cost us, so don't 
delay, send your order and £\ to: — 

THE EDITOR, Te Karcvc. 
514 Remuera Road, 
Auckland, S.E.2. 



June, 1952 



207 



The Mission on Wheels 



By BRO. HUGH H. NAPIER 



IN the early part of last year Elder 
Biesinger, in consultation with Pres. 
Young, decided to buy a truck. As 
the need was pressing and we had 
not time to wait for one to be shipped 
from America, it was decided to pur- 
chase an English make. After an ex- 
tensive search a Commer 5 ton, long 
wheelbase, was bought. 

In March the truck set out on its 
first long run. This run covered ap- 
proximately 1,100 miles down through 
Tauranga, Opotiki and Gisborne to 
Nuhaka with cement to help in the 
construction of the various offices 
needed for Hui Tau. From Nuhaka 
the truck went to Napier and then 
back up through Taupo via Rotorua 
to Hamilton and thence to Auckland. 
Then came Hui Tau. Once again the 
truck was prepared. This time with 
a canopy over its bed to protect the 
load of 75 tents and marquees for 
Hui Tau, not to mention some 9 or 
10 Elders. 

After arriving at Hui Tau the truck 
was busy carrying the Saints, who 
were to assist in the running of the 
Hui. Then after Hui Tau was over, we 
took the tents, etc., back to Auckland. 

About this time Elder Biesinger and 
Pres. Young had made an agreement 
with Bro. Geo. Chase to supply the 
Church with as much timber as we 
would need. After our return from 
Nuhaka the Commer started on the 
long run of hauling timber from Taupo 
to Auckland. This job took approxi- 
mately 8 months, in which some 58,000 
feet of Matai was trucked to Auck- 
land. As well as hauling this timber 
the Commer also did a lot of other 
work, for the trucks always work six 
days a week. During this time the 
Church received 5.000 bags of cement 
from America. This was stored in the 
Mission Home garage and later taken 



to the farm for making hollowstone 
blocks and bricks. During the trans- 
fer of the cement to the farm the 
Commer worked 24 hours a days with 
Bro. Vuna Wolfgramm and myself as 
drivers and Bro. Peter Pearse help- 
ing us. We also had the grateful help 
of our wonderful Zion Elders who 
turned out at 2 o'clock in the morning 
to help load the cement. Later a fur- 
ther 3,000 bags of cement were shifted 
from the wharf to the Mission Home 
garage, and ever since the building 
programme started both Tumuakis 
Young and Ottley have been denied 
the use of the garage. 

About March of 51 Elder Biesinger 
ordered a Chevrolet truck from the 
States. This took about 7 months and 
in November it arrived. During this 
time the Commer had been going flat 
out. Although the Chevrolet was 
equipped with a dump body it was 
not long before a greater need required 
the removal of the tray. 

About this time the Church had 
completed the financing of a mill, 
bought by Bro. Ivan Joyce of the Kai- 
kohe Branch. (This mill is situated 
about 15 miles from Kaikohe out to- 
wards the west coast.) The first trip 
of the Chevrolet was to take a new 
diesel engine up to the mill and to 
bring a load of timber back to Auck- 
land. Upon the return of the truck, 
the tray was removed and it was fitted 
with a hook for towing a timber 
trailer. Then it was sent up empty to 
the mill. Over the Xmas period the 
Chevrolet was used to truck logs down 
from the bush to the mill. After two 
weeks the truck was brought back to 
Auckland to be fitted up with the 
necessary brake gear to work the 
trailer, which the Church had pur- 
chased. Upon completion of this fitting 
the Chevrolet was set to hauling tim- 
ber from the mill to the college, in 



208 



TE KARERE 



preparation for the extensive building 
programme which is to take place 
there. This run from Auckland up to 
the mill, down to the college and back 
to Auckland entails a run of some 
512 miles, and two of these runs were 
made a week. In the period between 
Xmas and Hui Tau this year the 
Chevrolet has been constantly hauling 
timber. It has shifted approximately 
90,000 feet to the college, along, of 
course, with what has been shipped by 
rail. In the short time the Mission 
has had the Chevrolet it has travelled 
20,000 miles. Most of this has been 
done by myself, although for the last 
5 weeks Elder George Wm. Paget 
has been driving the Chevrolet. 

Shortly before Hui Tau it was de- 
cided to buy an articulated (semi) 
truck to haul timber, bricks, blocks, 
cement, etc., to any of the various 
chapels throughout the North Island. 
Until the work was ready to begin 
on these chapels the truck will be 
used to haul timber from the mill to 
the college. A visit was paid by Elder 
Biesinger and myself to the Inter- 
national Harvester Co. agents here in 
Auckland and an option was taken on 
an International truck until the neces- 
sary authority could be obtained from 
the Church authorities in Zion. In 
about two weeks permission was re- 
ceived and the truck was purchased. 
Then it was taken to Hamilton to 
have the turntable, or fifth wheel as 
it is commonly called, fitted and the 
trailer attached. The necessary braking 
equipment was also fitted. 

On the Tuesday before Hui Tau, 
this year, the truck was brought back 
to Auckland and a wooden decking 
was fitted to the trailer. Immediately 
upon completion the International was 
loaded with tents and marquees for 
Hui Tau. In the meantime the Com- 
mer and the Chevrolet had been fitted 
with canopies ready to take the Elders 
from Auckland and the boys from the 
college, who were making the long trip 
to Hastings to assist in the erection 



of the tents, etc. We left the Mission 
Home about 7 o'clock and picked up 
the Chevrolet at the college. We ar- 
rived, needless to say, covered with 
dust and very tired. Again the trucks 
completed several jobs which they 
were called upon to do. After Hui 
the tents were again loaded and the 
long journey back started. On both 
the trip down and back the only sleep 
the drivers obtained was in two-hour 
snatchs whenever they felt that they 
couldn't keep awake any longer. 
Nevertheless, both journeys were com- 
pleted in saftey, thanks to the kind 
care of our Heavenly Father. 

Since Hui Tau the Chevrolet and 
the International have been hauling 
timber to the college from the mill 
and the Commer has been carrying 
gravel, sand and dressed timber to 
the college. One of the various jobs 
which we have had has been carrying 
12,000 feet of heart rimu to a local 
drying kiln for the chapel and part 
of the college joinery work. Also the 
International carried the concrete 
power poles down to the college from 
Auckland, which are to carry power 
to the joinery factory and the workers' 
quarters. The average hours worked 
weekly by Elder Paget and myself 
with the Chevrolet and International 
is in the vicinity oi 90 hours, while 
the Commer has been working ap- 
proximately 50 to 60 hours weekly, 
Bro. John Hettig being its driver. 

Although the total cost of these 
three trucks has been well over £5,000, 
it is obvious that the mission trucks 
are earning their way and are doing 
a great job in carrying the necessary 
materials required in the building pro- 
gramme, which is now being under- 
taken throughout the mission. The 
mileage of the three trucks is about 
80,000 miles for fifteen months of 
usage. 

It is our heart-felt desire that the 
Mission trucks may roll on doing the 
Lord's work. So good hick to the 
Mission's travelling missionaries on 
wheels. 



June, 1952 



209 



The Sunday School In New Zealand 



By ELDER GARTH LOW 




IN looking over the last articles that 
Elder Goodman has put in this 
magazine, I find that he has recently 
outlined the three very essential Spec- 
ial Meetings — Prayer Meeting, Super- 
intendents' Weekly Council Meeting, 
and The Branch Facility Meeting. 
From this I gather you know all about 
these and any further comment from 
me would only be a waste of words 
(at least that is what I hope). 

I would like to remind you that the 
S.S. Quarterly Reports are still not 
coming in the way they should do. 
For the same period of last year about 
sixty percent came in, while this year 
only forty percent have come in. I 
must make a report to Zion every 
three months, and if I don't have your 
fullest co-operation the picture painted 
will not be a very nice one. Let's give 
them the facts, e hoa ma. 

We have a very good supply of the 
necessary books to make your lessons 
more interesting. When teaching your 
classes remember that you hold the 
key that will unlock the door to suc- 
cess in the Gospel, or failure. Let's 
put all we have into the work. Time is 
short, so let's make the best of it. 
You who are leaders, let's lead and 
not have to be pushed. Let's all be 
the workers not the drones. If we will 
all put our shoulder to the wheel and 



push along, we will grow with the 
work and not be left behind. Kia kaha, 
e hoa ma. 

I would like to ask you some ques- 
tions : 

Are you holding your three special 
meetings? Do you have reverence in 
your meetings ? Do you start on time ? 
Do you prepare for your classes with 
diligence, and a prayerful heart? Do 
you take the Instructor magazine? Do 
you carefully prepare your quarterly 
reports? Lastly and most of all are 
you doing your best to Live the Gos- 
pel ? If you will sincerely do these 
things you will be blessed with bless- 
ings that you never before realized in 
the Sunday School work and in your 
everyday life. 

If you are using the class book that 
comes under the group of Nursery, 
or any other group, please call it by 
that name; this will keep our reports 
straight. 

Let's prepare things to help us give 
our lessons ; these are called teaching 
aids. I am certain that you will agree 
with me when I say you will remember 
better when you have seen a picture 
show than when I tell you the same 
story. Well, so do we in our Sunday 
School work. Tell your lessons with 
pictures and the Spirit of the Lord — 
DON'T READ THEM. 

May the Lord bless you in your 
honest endeavours and give you the 
determination and strength to do what 
is right. 

I hope to soon visit you in your 
individual districts, and meet you per- 
sonally. 

SACRAMENT GEM 

(May and June) 

May we be among the number 
Worthy to surround the board, 

And partake anczv the emblems 
Of the suffering of our Lord. 



210 



TE KARERE 



UB 




Hui Tau Competition Winners 



MUSICAL NUMBERS 




JUNIOR TENNIS 


Men's Chorus: 


Boys' Doubles: 


1. Wellington 


1. 


Bay of Islands 


2. Hawke's Bay 


2. 


Whangarei 


3. Auckland 


Girls' Doubles: 


Ladies' Chorus: 


1. 


Mahia 


1. Poverty Bay 


2. 


Bay of Plenty 


2. Auckland 

3. Mahia 


Mix 


ed Doubles: 


1. 


Hawke's Bay 


Mixed Quartet: 


2. 


Bay of Islands 


1. Wellington 




BASKETBALL 


2. Hawke's Bay 


1. 


Mahia 


3. Mahia 


2. 


Wellington 


Men's Quartet: 




VOLLEY BALL 


1. Wellington 


1. 


Waikato 


2. Bay of Islands 


2. 


Whangarei 


Ladies' Trio: 


3. 


Hawke's Bay 


1. Wairarapa 




MARCHING 


2. Poverty Bay 


1. 


Hawke's Bay 


3. Mahia 


2. 


Poverty Bay 


TENNIS 


3. 


Wellington 




4. 


Bay of Plenty 


Men's Doubles: 






1. Bay of Islands 


MAORI and POLYNESIAN 


2. Bay of Plenty 




ITEMS 




Acti 


on Song: 


Ladies' Doubles: 


1. 


Hawke's Bay 


1. Hawke's Bay 


2, 


Mahia 


2. Bay of Islands 


.V 


Bay of Plenty 


June, 1952 




2 



211 



Mixed Doubles: 

1. Hawke's Bay 

2. Bay of Islands 



Haka: 


1. 

2. 
3. 


Wellington 

Waikato 

Whangarei 


Peruperu: 


1. 
2. 


Bay of Islands 
Wellington 


Junior Haka: 


1. 


Hawke's Bay 


Poi: 




1. 
2. 

3. 


Mahia 

Bay of Plenty 

Whangarei 



Stick Game: 

1. Bay of Plenty 

2. Hawke's Bay 

3. Wellington 

SAMOAN ITEMS 

1. Auckland 

2. Taranaki 

RAROTONGAN ITEM 

1. Wellington 

CAISFORD CUP 

Won by Hawke's Bay District with 
90 points. 

Second : Wellington District with 87 
points. 

Third : Bay of Islands District with 
55 points. 




AN APPRECIATION 

We wish to congratulate all those Districts that participated in the M.I. A. events 
at Hui Tau this year. Especially do we appreciate the efforts of those Districts whose 
activities showed preparation and planning. Out of 15 Districts in the Mission, 12 
were represented at Hui Tau. Next year we look forward to seeing every District on 
our entry blanks. The Bay of Islands is to be especially commended on its effort 
this year. 

There was truly a fine spirit among the participants in the various activities and 
on many an occasion, during the sports events, the spirit of true sportsmanship was 
shown. We feel that each and every one of you were happy with the final results 
and can feel in your hearts to say "well done" to those Districts that took top honours. 

We sincerely wish to thank the judges, the Hawke's Bay Saints, and all those 
who were recruited to help control various M.I.A. events for their part in the 
programme. 

Keener interest was shown this year, and this is not to be marvelled at, as the 
M.I.A. is definitely growing. We would ask you to be even better prepared next year 
than you have ever been in the past. So for the coming years let's remember: 
Better organization, better planning, better preparation, better understanding of our 
duties, which will result in better leaders of tomorrow. 

MISSION M.I.A. BOARD. 



June, 1952 



CMi 



d so to the KL 



evies 



Taken from The Improvement Era, January, 1948. 

By MARBA C. JOSEPHSON 



6 6 TIT'S a date," and Mary hangs up 
-II the phone and announces that 
she and Bob are going to take in a 
movie. And away they go — a sample 
of the endless stream of young and 
old, who, eager for entertainment, file 
into the moving picture houses 
throughout the world. And this movie 
business is an expensive one — both in 
time and in money. We seldom stop 
to think of the millions of dollars that 
are consumed in going to shows. 

But more important than the money 
and time spent, important as they are, 
are the ideas that are taken away 
from these places of amusement — 
sometimes to the everlasting good of 
the movie-goer but more often to his 
eternal detriment. 

And who are these high moguls of 
the movie industry that have made 
such inroads into the lives of all of 
us, and have done so much to shape 
our desires ? They are men and women 
who have discovered our weaknesses 
and how to play on them. One of the 
most deleterious effects of the movies 
is that they tend - to play up a set 
of false standards. Innately in all of 
us lies a desire for luxury — so what 
do the movie directors do ? They find 
some lush piece in which the actors 
loll about in magnificent homes with 
gorgeous clothes and Jewells that are 
simply fabulous, where the food is 
completely out of this world ! Oh, of 
course, in some rare instances the 
characters don't have much to start 
with but they — or the directors — do 
some Horatio Alger trick and have 
everything wonderful in the end. The 
following statement indicates how one 
writer feels : 

"The movies in the United States 
have captured the universal language 



of the human race. Our pictures have 
topped the market for years. They 
have coloured our lives, affected our 
social mores and acted as the chief 
interpreter of the United States— its 
manners, habits, and standards— 
throughout the world. I am not here 
concerned with the merits of the pro- 
duct. Whether the pictures do us jus- 
tice, whether they approximate the 
true portrayal of our folkway — those 
are subjects of separate controversy. I 
do not even care to argue whether 
they are educational or merely enter- 
tainment, for I am persuaded that 
education at its best is high entertain- 
ment and that entertainment at its 
worst can't help but be bad education." 

These influences, noted and insid- 
ious, that Mr. Ernst does not go into, 
are, of course, the very fibre of that 
with which we are concerned. When 
we consider that in all of the countries 
of the world these films are being 
shown and that many of the countries 
are producing films of their own pat- 
terned on them, we may guess that, 
for better or for worse, the movies 
are tending to create attitudes — and 
those attitudes are being crystallized 
into actions — again, for better or for 
worse. 

In a recent news release some ter- 
rible crimes had been perpetrated in 
one of the States of the Union. When 
the criminal was apprehended he was 
questioned concerning his actions. In 
the course of the trial it developed 
that he had gone to a thriller-diller 
movie, had committed the crime, then 
gone to another of the same type of 
movie which had further whetted his 
appetite, and he had gone out again 
and committed another crime. 



214 



TE KARERE 



There are those who state that it 
is impossible to trace any effect on 
the minds and hearts of those who 
attend picture shows. Yet this incident 
was reported by police who had ques- 
tioned the violator of the law. Other 
reports of a similar nature have been 
made a matter of record and could be 
cited. 

This does not necessarily mean that 
we should condemn movies unquali- 
fiedly. There are many good movies, 
but they are so interspersed with the 
bad ones that it is difficult to know 
what to see and what to avoid seeing. 
And there are no organizations or 
agencies that preview movies that can 
fully satisfy Latter-day Saints as to 
the calibre of the show. 

We have certain ideals and standards 
which must be maintained if we are 
to remain worthy of the name Latter- 
day Saint. And yet movies flagrantly 
ignore or openly violate many of these 
standards which have been given us 
by divine revelation. One example of 
this violation is smoking, which is 
accepted as the most casual action on 
the part of men and women in most 
movies. 

The smoking has nothing to do with 
the furtherance of the plot, as a gen- 
eral rule ; it merely gives the actors 
something to do with their hands — 
supplies a bit of action that could 
easily be cared for in other ways. The 
result of seeing this constant smoking, 
even upon the most stable of our 
people, tends to lessen the force of our 
ideal. We need only recall the verse 
of Pope to indicate how true this is : 

Vice is a monster of so frightful mien, 
As to be hated needs but to be seen ; 
Yet seen too oft, familiar with her fare, 
We first endure, then pity, then em- 
brace. 

Drinking, too, becomes a common- 
place among movie characters. Anyone 
who watches the casualness with which 
liquor is consumed in the movies can 



not help feeling that something should 
be done to counteract the matter-of- 
factness with which this consumption 
of liquor is accepted. In fact, all but 
the very secure believers in our prin- 
ciples of the Word of Wisdom could 
easily be misled into thinking that our 
stress on total abstinence is un- 
essential. 

Another insidious influence of the 
movies is the easy attitude towards 
love and marriage. Flirtatiousness 
and fickleness seem, for the most part, 
the qualities most sought after in the 
modern movie. It is only rarely 'that 
we find a movie that glorifies marri- 
age. One exceptional example was 
that of Madame Curie in which the 
love of the Curies became a wondrous 
thing. Their devotion carried on in 
spite of the death of Pierre. Another 
good feature of this picture was the 
strong family loyalty and love between 
the children and their parents and 
grandparents, as well as that between 
husband and wife. This movie was 
good, too, for it showed the value of 
attachment to a great cause. Because 
the Curies knew what they wished to 
accomplish, the hardships which they 
had to undergo became relatively un- 
important. This picture made the audi- 
ence feel that poverty, inadequate 
housing, loneliness, even succeeding 
failures were bearable in the face of 
the work that had to be done. Their 
indomitable will to achieve, not for 
themselves selfishly, but for the scien- 
tific world and the world at large 
through scientific application, super- 
seded all the difficulties that lay in the 
path. 

Certainly it would be unfair to state 
that the broken homes in the world 
are directly traceable to the effects of 
the movies. Yet is is undoubtedly true 
that the increasing divorce rate has 
been given an impetus by the laxity 
with which the marriage vow 1- con- 
sidered in the pictures. When the final 
judgment is taken, the movie moguls 
will have to answer for much. 



June, 1952 



215 



Another writer stated : 

"Hollywood has made anti-American 
propaganda all over the world on a 
prodigious scale. Of course, it's popu- 
lar. Men like their piece of cheese- 
cake — the cheesier the better — and the 
girls like to see love being made . . . 
How then can you expect other nations 
to respect you as a moral nation? 
You could answer, of course, with 
some degree of justice and truth: 
'Hollywood isn't America.' Granted: 
but how were we to know better 
when, as it were, the only Americans 
we could meet in the flesh happened 
to be your tourists?" 

What does this all boil down to? 
Well, it boils down to just this: If 
we wish the movies to give us what 
they could in the way of good, all of 



us who attend movies must become 
more intelligent critics of that which 
we see. Criticism, by the way, includes 
the good and the bad. A definition of 
this word reads: "The art of judging 
with knowledge and propriety the 
beauties and faults of works of art 
or literature ; hence, similar considera- 
tion of moral or logical values." 

And, strangely enough, the more 
accurately we can judge a movie, the 
better will be our judgment of the 
good movies which we elect to attend. 
As we increase the number of intelli- 
gently alert movie-goers, the better 
will be the productions that will be 
filmed — because the producers will 
learn that they can't foist just any 
old thing on us, and they will become 
more careful of that which they use as 
the basis for their wares. 



GENEALOGY NOTICE 

I greet you as the presiding Genealogical Officer of the Mission. I am 
most grateful for this calling and come to you in humility asking for your 
faith and prayers, that I may magnify my calling. 

I seek your co-operation, that the work in the New Zealand Mission may 
grow in leaps and bounds and beseech you to collect your Genealogy so it can 
be forwarded to the Temple. 

The Hawaiian Temple is short of names, so a great responsibility falls 
on our people to keep the Temple open— DON'T FAIL IN THIS GLORIOUS 
WORK. 

Kindly forward all names and addresses of your Branch and District 
Genealogical officers. Whenever a change is made please notify me. Keep all 
records to date. Do not accept money without issuing a receipt — don't trust to 
memory. 

I am looking forward to meeting you in your Districts and Branches, so I 
may become better acquainted with you and your problems. 

May the Spirit of Elijah rest upon you all that you may have the desire 
to put your heart and soul into this work. God bless you. 

Your co-worker, 

JOSEPH HAY, 

514 Remuera, Rd., Auckland. 



216 



TE KARERE 



JLatTer-clau <Z}ainl KyeuvTsh 



laij 

By ELDER STANLEY B. ROBERTS 



V 



Pleasant the snaffle of courtship, 

Improving the manners and carriage, 

But the colt who is wise will abstain 
From the terrible thorn-bit of marriage. 
—Kipling. 

TlV O E S Kipling's philosophy of 
^"^ marriage reflect the beliefs of 
the Latter-day Saints on this subject? 
The answer is obvious, and yet the 
number of people who share his views 
far exceed the combined numbers of 
the L.D.S. and select few other people 
who consider marriage a divine com- 
mandment and one of the greatest 
blessings offered us by our Heavenly 
Father. 

Innumerable articles can be found 
in our popular magazines quoting 
alarming statistics on the percentage 
of marriage failures and blasting the 
evils of divorce. These articles are 
usually climaxed by a few futile sug- 
gestions to young people as to how 
they can avoid the more common pit- 
falls and make each day of marriage a 
joyous occasion. 

In spite of these articles the divorce 
rate still accelerates and at the present 
time, in most English-speaking coun- 
tries, is over 25%. The American rate 
is almost 33%. One of every three 
couples who steer their luxury liner 
of marriage toward the harbour of 
happiness find the channel too narrow, 
the seas too rough, their preparations 
for the voyage too inadequate ; conse- 
quently, they are tossed pitifully upon 
the reef of divorce to be battered help- 
lessly by waves of anguish and tor- 
ment. 



Broken marriages fill public institu- 
tions with homeless children, denied 
the blessing of parental love and guid- 
ance. An alarming percentage of men- 
tal instability and sex crime has as 
its prime cause unhappy or broken 
marriages. The world today is groping 
blindly for a solution to its most 
glaring social problem. Attempts at 
solution have failed thus far. Isn't it 
much easier to educate someone in 
seamanship than it is to rescue the 
boat from desruction on the jagged 
reef ? The only possible solution is 
adequate training in steering the course 
of marriage through the proper chan- 
nels, thus avoiding the reef. The atti- 
tude young people have toward marri- 
age and the preparations they make 
before embarking largely determine the 
nature, success, or failure of the voy- 
age. 

L.D.S. young people, here is the 
situation. Statistics and public opinion 
say you will not be happily married. 
Your religion says you can be — on 
conditions. 




June, 1952 



217 



In 1843 the Lord gave this revela- 
tion to His people through the Prophet 
Joseph Smith : 

"And again, verily I say unto you, 
if a man marry a wife by my word, 
which is my law. and by the new and 
everlasting covenant, and it is sealed 
unto them by the Holy Spirit of pro- 
mise, by him who is annointed, unto 
whom I have appointed this power and 
the keys of this Priesthood ; and it 
shall he said unto them — Ye shall 
come forth in the first resurrection 
.... and shall inherit thrones, king- 
doms, principalities, and powers .... 
and they shall pass by the angels, and 
gods, which are set there, to their 
exaltation and glory in all things, as 
hath been sealed upon their heads, 
which glory shall be a fullness and a 
continuation of the seeds forever and 
ever (D. & C. 132:19). 

What a glorious interpretation 
placed on the covenant of marriage. 
To be eternally sealed to the one you 
love, to dwell in the presence of God, 
and to receive the blessing of eternal 
increase is the most priceless treasure 
available through the Gospel of Jesus 
Christ. The end is glorious beyond 
description ; the means of attaining 
that end must embrace all truth, wis- 
dom, and righteousness. L.D.S. court- 
ship must be exceedingly fine and pure. 



"As the twig is bent. 
is inclined." 



the tree 



Inspired men of God have given im- 
portant instruction in this matter, ob- 
servance of which will insure eterni- 
ties of marital bliss. Apostle Spencer 
W. Kimball gives young people this 

advice : 

% 

"The treasure house of happiness is 
unlocked and remains open to those 
who use the following two keys: the 
first, you must live the Gospel of 
Jesus Christ in its purity and simplic- 
ity — not a half-hearted compliance, but 
hewing to the line. The second, you 
must forget yourself and love your 



companion more than yourself. If you 

will do these things, happiness will 
be yours in great and never-failing 
abundance." 

Live the Gospel and love your COm- 

panon more than yourself. It's a small 
price to pay for an eternity of joy 
and happiness with the one you love. 
While you are courting, attend meet- 
ings together, pay tithes and offerings 
together, observe the Word of Wis- 
dom together, and pray together. 
Kneel humbly with the young person 
of your choice and ask your Eternal 
Father for His omniscient guidance in 
helping you to prepare yourselves for 
the Celestial marriage covenant. Share 
your love with God and He will guide 
you. 

Most important of all, be morally 
clean. It is a commandment of God 
and an integral part of Apostle Kim- 
hall's happiness rule number one. The 
words of a living prophet of God, 
Pres. J. Reuben Clark, Jnr., are these: 

"If you would be chaste, as God has 
commanded, then avoid conduct and 
practices that arouse the passions. A 
wise and pure boy or girl, one that 
wishes to be clean, will not "pet" nor 
"neck" nor "love-play" nor practice 
any other undue physical familiarity, 
by whatever name known. At best 
the>- are gross and provocative indis- 
cretion; at worst they are the pre- 
ludes to certain and, too frequently, 
planned transgressions. They are all 
unclean in the sight of the Lord. If 
youth will abandon these, if it will de- 
cently reclothe itself, and cultivate 
modesty — a largely lost virtue — it will 
be a long way on the road to chastity, 
which will bring untarnished happiness 
here and eternal joy in the hereafter." 

L.D.S. youth, a priceless opportun- 
ity is yours. God has given you the 
blessing of Celestial marriage and also 
the pre-requisites of obtaining that 
blessing. Eternities of unlimited joy 
and happiness are yours if you will 
but observe God's method of L.D.S. 
COURTSHIP. 



218 



TE KARERE 



Evidences and Reconciliations 



What Are The Facts 
Concerning The So-called Adam-God Theory ? 



By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



THOSE who peddle the well-worn 
Adam-God myth, usually charge 
the Latter-day Saints with believing 
that: (1) Our Father in Heaven, the 
Supreme God, to whom we pray, is 
Adam, the first man; and (2) Adam 
was the father of Jesus Christ. A long 
series of absurd and false deductions 
are made from these propositions. 

Those who spread this untruth about 
the Latter-day Saints go back for 
authority to a sermon delivered by 
President Brigham Young "in the 
tabernacle, Great Salt Lake City, 
April 9th, 1852" (Journal of Dis- 
courses, 1:50). Certain statements 
there made are confusing if read super- 
ficially, but very clear if read with 
their context. Enemies of President 
Brigham Young and of the Church 
have taken advantage of the opportun- 
ity and have used these statements 
repeatedly and widely to do injury 
to the reputation of President Young 
and the Mormon people. An honest 
reading of this sermon and of other 
reported discourses of President Brig- 
ham Young proves that the great 
second President of the Church held 
no such views as have been put into 
his mouth in the form of the Adam- 
God myth. 

In the discourse, upon which hangs 
the Adam-God myth, President Brig- 
ham Young discussed the earthly 
origin of Jesus Christ. He denied thai 
the Holy Ghost was the father of 
Jesus Christ; and affirmed that the 
Saviour was begotten by God the 
Father. He explained that "Our 
Father in I [eaven begol all the spirits 

that ever were or rver will be Upon 



this earth ; and they were born spirits 
in the eternal world. Then the Lord 
by His power and wisdom organized 
the mortal tabernacle of man." That 
is, every human being is in direct 
descent from God, the Father. In the 
course of his remarks. President 
Young was led to discuss the high 
place of Adam among the generations 
of men, for Adam "helped to make 
and organize this world," and as first 
man, the father of us all, Adam stands 
at the head of the human race, and 
will ever be the representative of his 
children before our Father in Heaven, 
the Father of our spirits. It was in 
conenction with this thought that the 
oft-quoted statement was made about 
Adam, that "he is our Father and our 
God, and the only God with whom 
we have to do." 

He spoke of Adam as the great 
patriarch of the human race, a person- 
age who had been privileged and able 
to assist in the creation of the earth, 
who would continue his efforts in be- 
half of the human family, and through 
whom many of our needs would be 
met. All this was in contradiction to 
the common doctrine the world over 
that Adam was a great sinner, and 
not to be held in affectionate remem- 
brance. Nowhere is it suggested that 
Adam is God, the Father, whose child 
Adam himself was. On the contrary, 
in the sermon of April 9th, 1852, it- 
self, there is a clear distinction made 
between Adam and Cuh\. the Father, 

in the following words: "The earth 

was organized by three distinct char- 
acters, namely Elohim, Jehovah, and 
Michael" the last previously defined 



June, 1952 



219 



as Adam. There can be DO contusion 
in this passage of the separate person- 
alities of these three great beings. 
A discourse delivered August 8, 1852, 
within four months of the discourse 
•n controversy (Journal of Discourses, 
.^ : n 4 ) contains the following: "The 
Lord sent forth Mis Gospel to the 
people; He said. I will give it to my 
-on Adam, from which Methusaleh 
received it ; and Noah received it from 
Methusaleh; and Melchizedek admin- 
istered to Abraham." Clearly, Presi- 
dent Young here distinguishes between 
God, the Father, and Adam, the first 



The sermon of April 9, 1852, also 
makes the statement that, "Jesus, our 
Elder Brother, was begotten in the 
flesh by the same character that was 
in the Garden of Eden, and who is our 
Father in Heaven." The dishonest in- 
ference has been drawn and advertised 
widely that President Young meant 
that Adam was the earthly father of 
Jesus Christ. This deduction cannot 
be made fairly, in view of the context 
or of his other published utterances 
on the subject. Adam and Eve were 
not the only persons in the Garden of 
Eden, for "they heard the voice of 
the Lord God walking in the garden in 
the cool of the day" (Genesis 3:8). 
President Young undoubtedly had this 
personage in mind, for he did not say 
Adam, but "our Father in Heaven." 

In many discourses, President 
Young refers to Jesus as the Only 
Begotten of the Father, which would 
not have been true had Adam been 
the earthly father of Jesus. At one 
time he declared (Journal of Dis- 
coures, 1:238), "I believe the Father 
came down from Heaven, as the 
Apostles said He did, and begat the 
Saviour of the World ; for He is the 
Only Begotten of the Father, which 
could not have been if the Father did 
not actually beget Him in person." On 
another occasion (Journal of Dis- 
courses, 2:42) he said, "And what 
shall we say of our Heavenly Father? 

220 



lie is also a man in perfection, and the 
Father of the man Jesus Christ, and 
the Father of our spirits." It seems 
unnecessary to offer more evidence 
that Brigham Young held the accepted 
doctrine <'f the Church, that God, the 
Father, and not Adam, is the earthly 
Father of Jesus. 

In all this, President Young merely 
followed the established doctrine of the 
Church. Joseph Smith, the Prophet, in 
discussing the Priesthood, touched 
upon the position of Adam. 

(The Priesthood) commencing with 
Adam, who was the first man, who is 
spoken of in Daniel as being the "An- 
cient of Days," or in other words, the 
first and oldest of all, the great, grand 
progenitor of whom it is said in an- 
other place he is Michael, because he 
was the first and father of all, not only 
by progeny, but the first to hold the 
spiritual blessings, to whom was made 
known the plan of ordinances for the 
salvation of his posterity unto the end, 
and to whom Christ was first revealed, 
and through whom Christ has been 
revealed from Heaven, and will con- 
tinue to be revealed from henceforth. 
Adam holds the keys of the dispensa- 
tion of the fullness of times, i.e., the 
dispensation of all the times that have 
been and will be revealed through him 
from the beginning to Christ, and from 
Christ to the end of all the dispensa- 
tions that are to be revealed. This, 
then, is the nature of the Priesthood. 
every man holding the Presidency of 
his dispensation, and one man holding 
the Presidency of them all, even Adam 
(Joseph Smith, Historv of the Church, 
Vol. 4, pp. 207-209)." 

On another occasion the Prophet 
Joseph Smith stated further: 

The Priesthood was first given to 
Adam ; he obtained the First Presi- 
dency, and held the keys of it from 
generation to generation. He obtained 
it in the Creation, before the world 

(Continued on Page 223) 

TE KARERE 



ppreciatlon 

Excerpts from a talk given at the last October General Conference 
in Salt Lake City by THOMAS E. McKAY. 



AS I was getting to my feet a state- 
ment flashed through my mind at- 
tributed to a good friend, the late J. 
Golden Kimball, when he stated, "If 
you wish to live forever, just get an 
incurable disease and take care of it." 
Yes, I confess that I am guilty of 
having such thoughts about others, and 
it is stated that the measure ye mete 
unto others shall be meted unto you 
again ; so it is all right if some of you 
are thinking that of me ; I hope that 
you are because I'd like that measure 
that I have meted to others to be 
wiped out or balanced before I go 
to the other side. I have always had 
an idea, a strong one, that it would be 
much better for all of us if we could 
repent of all our sins before we go 
to the other side. And as it has been 
stated this morning ,we may get by on 
this side by a little lying and a little 
cheating and a little stealing, but we 
will have to meet it, brothers and 
sisters, as sure as we live. The Lord 
is just, and these things will have to 
be paid for before we can progress 
as we would like to on the other side. 

I thank you, brethren and sisters, 
my dear friends, for remembering me 
in your prayers. I believe with all my 
heart in the power of prayer. I have 
always believed in and accepted prayer 
as one of the great principles govern- 
ing us in our lives, and I am thankful 
that so many are now thinking of 
prayer. They are speaking of it from 
the pulpit, in the press, and also over 
the radio. Just last highl we listened 
to a play, and the sponsors of this 
play generally make this very pertinent 
statement at the close: "More things 
arc wrought by prayer than this world 
dreams of" (Tennyson ). The other 
statement, very applicable, especially 



to this day where divorces are so prev- 
alent : "The family that prays together, 
stays together." 

I am sure that many young couples 
who have started lives opening their 
homes for themselves, have heard that 
statement and would like very much, 
perhaps, to begin again by having 
prayer in that home. I know the young 
wives would like to have it, and maybe 
the young husbands, but some of them 
perhaps do not know how to pray. I 
know we had missionaries arrive in the 
field who didn't know how to pray. 
You could tell always when a mission- 
ary came from a home where they had 
family prayers and had had the oppor- 
tunity to take part in that family 
prayer. And to avoid embarrassment 
of these young missionaries, who 
hadn't had that opportunity, because of 
neglect of their parents, I generally 
made it a point in our first meeting 
with the missionaries to help guide 
them in knowing how to pray. I told 
them, among other things, always to 
express appreciation in their prayers, 
followed by their requests, and if they 
thought of prayers divided in that 
manner, it would be of help to them, 
even if they had never prayed before. 
If they would just stand up and say, 
"We thank thee, Father in Heaven.'* 
and then name the blessings: for 
health and strength, for our parents, 
for the privilege of being in the mis- 
sion field, for the Church, for our 
citizenship, then they could go on. If 
they would just think on their feet and 
express this appreciation and then fol- 
low it by the requests that they have: 
"Continue to bless, us bless us in our 
family life tli.it peace and love and 
unity may continue, liless our brother 
who is in the war," perhaps. Well, it' 

people would just think of prayer as 

being divided in that way it might 
help them. 



June, 1952 



221 



There may be young couples who 

arc listening in who listened to that 
play last night, and when it was 
stated that "The family that prays 
together, stay together," I am sure 

they thought they would like to begin, 

and I hope that they will. 

Expressing appreciation: Do not 
forgel to express appreciation to our 

Father in Heaven for the blessings 
that we have received from Him. 

There would be more love in the 
ln-me it" we expressed appreciation for 
our wives, menfolk. We love them as 
much as ever, hut we don't tell them. 
We used to take them flowers occa- 
sionally, especially when we were 
courting them, but I am sure there are 
men listening in now who have never 
given their wives bouquets of flowers. 
This theme was developed in one of 
our stakes with scattered wards, some 
of them nearly fifty miles from where 
the conference was being held, and the 
presidency of the stake very wisely 
organized a transportation committee, 
comprised of adult members of the 
Aaronic Priesthood and adult members 
who have no Priesthood, and even 
non-members. They took their appoint- 
ment seriously, and they made it pos- 
sible for every person in that scattered 
community, stake, to be in conference. 
In that way the presidency, of course, 
had a large number of the adult mem- 
bers of the Aaronic Priesthood there. 

After this theme had been developed, 
it was told that one of the men thought 
that the speaker was speaking directly 
to him. He was working at one of the 
defence plants at the time, making a 
lot of money. The men were paid every 
two weeks. They cashed their cheques 
right there where they were working 
for convenience. As this man was 
driving home one night after receiving 
his two weeks' pay, making more in 
two weeks than he usually made in 
two months, he stopped at the drug- 
store and bought a box of candy, the 
kind he used to take to his sweetheart 
during his courting days. He saw a 
flower ship in the corner of the drug- 



>tore. and he thought, "Well, I believe 
I will get a bouquet of flowers. 1 

know my sweetheart liked dark red 
roses/' So he had the flower girl make 
up a beautiful bouquet of roses. 

He took them home, gave his USUal 
three rings to announce to his wife 
that he had arrived. She came hurry- 
ing to the door as usual, just as he was 
awkwardly pushing the door closed 
with his back. He handed the roses 
to his wife and then awkwardly pushed 
the box of candy towards her, blush- 
ing, I guess. She looked at the flowers, 
then the box of candy, then at her hus- 
band and said, "John, let me smell 
your breath." Well, he was overdoing 
it a little perhaps all at once, but as 
she placed those flowers in the vase 
(one I am told she had received at 
her wedding and had never had oc- 
casion to use), tears came into her 
eyes. And as they were munching over 
the candy in the evening, she said, 
"John, remember this is the kind of 
candy you brought me the first time 
you called to see me, and I was so 
embarrassed because father kept re- 
turning for just another piece?" 

And he said, "Yes, I do remember, 
and how pleased I was that your 
father did keep returning. I was wor- 
ried because I thought maybe he would 
not like me, and I saw that he liked 
my candy anyhow r , and maybe liked 
me." 

I want to tell you, brethren and 
sisters, we would have more love in 
our homes and in our wards and in 
our stakes if we just took time not 
only to appreciate our wives, but also 
to tell them that we love them, not 
only to appreciate what our bishops 
(branch presidents) are doing for our 
boys in the Aaronic Priesthood, but 
also put our hand on the shoulder 
of the bishop and tell him, "Bishop, 
how I do appreciate what you are 
doing for my boys." Tell the superin- 
tendent, and the Sunday School teach- 
ers, and tell your ward teachers. Next 
time they come make them feel at 



222 



TE KARERE 



home, and when they get up to say 
good-night after delivering their 
lesson, kneel down and pray with 
them, receiving their blessings. 

May we, my brethren and sisters, 
have the willpower to express our ap- 
preciation — not only to appreciate, but 
also to express that appreciation more, 
and to pray together oftener. 

And in conclusion, may I, my breth- 
ren and sisters, express with all my 
heart my gratitude to my Father in 
Heaven for giving me a testimony of 
the divinity of this work in which we 



are engaged. I know that He lives, 
that He is our Father. We are all His 
children. I know that Jesus is \;he 
Christ, and that His Church is upon 
the earth, and that the men who have 
stood at the head of this Church 
from the time of the Prophet Joseph 
Smith to the present time when Presi- 
dent David O. McKay stands at the 
head, have all been called of God, and 
they have been set apart by the laying 
on of hands to preside over che 
Church, to preach the Gospel, and to 
administer in the ordinances thereof. 
I bear you this testimony humbly, and 
in the name of Jesus Christ. Amen. 



EVIDENCES AND RECONCILIATIONS (Cont. from Page 220) 



was formed, as in Genesis 1 :26, 27, 28. 
He had dominion given him over every 
living creature . . . Our Father Adam, 
Michael, will call his children together 
and prepare them for the coming of 
the Son of Man. He (Adam) is the 
father of the human family, and pre- 
sides over the spirits of all men, and 
all that have had the keys must stand 
before him in this grand council . . . 
The Son of Man stands before him, 
and there is given him glory and 
dominion. Adam delivers up his 
stewardship to Christ (Joseph Smith, 



History of the Church, Vol. 3, pp. 385- 
387). 

The perspective of years brings out 
the remarkable fact that, though the 
enemies of the Latter-day Saints have 
had access, in printed form, to the 
hundreds of discourses of Brigham 
Young, only half a dozen statements 
have been useful to the calumniators 
of the founder of Utah. Of these, the 
sermon of April 9, 1852, which has 
been quoted most frequently, presents 
no errors of fact or doctrine, if read 
understandingly and honestly. 



You are cordially invited to attend . . . 

AUCKLAND BRANCH CONFERENCE 

FRIDAY . . . M.I.A. BALL ... to be held at Maori Community Centre. 
SATURDAY . . . PRIMARY (Parent,' Day). 
SUNDAY . . . PRIESTHOOD MEETING 

SUNDAY SCHOOL 

GENERAL SESSION. 

Service to be held at . . . 

PLAYHOUSE THEATRE — Karangahape Road. 
Make the 4th, 5th, 6th JULY 

your w* ek-end in . lucklandl .' 



June, 1952 



223 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO 1 TE HITORI TE HAHI 

(Essentials 
in Church History) 

WAHANGA TUATORU 


f 




'' 







UPOKO 16: 1831 



Te Ahua o Te Tangata Whenua 

ITE waenganuitanga o Hurae 1831, 
ka timata te tae o nga mihingare ki 
te uru o Mihiuri ; i tutataki ai ratou 
kia ratou, i heke ai o ratou roimata i 
te koa kua tae ora mai, kua puta i nga 
taumahatanga o te rongo pai, kua kite- 
kite ano tetahi i tetahi. I konei ano i 
roto i ienei rohe o nga Teita o Ameri- 
ka (U.S.A.) kua timata noa atu te 
emi mai o nga tuahua katoa o te ta- 
ngata o roto i te kino, i oma i mua i 
nga whakawhiu a te ture ; e totohu ana 
ki roto i o ratou kino ; whiroki ana o 
ratou mohiotanga, o ratou whakaaro ; 
e tupu kaha ana ko a ratou mahi kino. 
konga puahaetanga i roto i a ratou. 
ano kotahi rau tau ratou kei muri e 
aru mai ana. 

Te Hapati Tuatahi Ki Hiona 

Ko te tekau ma whitu o Hurae tenei 
1831, he ra hapati, i tu ai te karakia 
tuatahi ki Hiona ; ko Tiakihana Kauti 
tenei, i konei te huihuinga o nga kau- 
matua, me ta ratou karakia tuatahi i 
roto o Hiona, i kauwhau ai a Wiremu 
\Y. Perepe (William W. Phelps) i 
tana kauwhau ki te katoa. Ko te 
hunga i hui mai ki te karakia, no roto 
i nga momo maha o nga tu ahua 
tangata ote ao katoa. I te mutunga 
te karakia, tokorua nga tangata i 
iriiria. 



Te Taenga Mai o Te 
Peka o Korewira 

Torutoru nei nga ra i muri iho ka 
eke te peka o Korewira, i ahu mai i 
Tamehana, Ohaio, ka tatuu ki Mihiuri, 
ka noho ki runga i nga whenua o te 
taone o Ka (Kaw), he tekiona tenei 
e tungia ana e te tahi wahi o te taone 
o Kaneha (Kansas City) i tenei ra. 

Te Tuaritanga i Nga Mahi 

Ko te taumahatanga o tenei tuarita- 
nga i tau iho ki runga i nga pokihiwi 
o te Poropiti, naana i kowhiti i tenei 
wa nga kaumatua hei noho i roto i 
tenei whenua. Ko etahi i whakaingoa- 
tia i roto i etahi o nga whakakitenga 
kia noho tuturu i Mihiuri ; ko etahi 
i whakahaua kia hoki ki nga whenua 
o te Rawhiti i muri i te mutunga o 
ta ratou Mihona i te Uru. Ko enei 
nga ra i tino tuku ai te Atua i tona 
reo kia rangona e te tangata e nga 
tangata ano ra i Kowhitingia ai e la. 
a kua ngohengohe ki Ana whakahau- 
nga. Ko Wiremu Wherepe (William 
Phelps) i uru ki te hahi i te wa i 
maunu ai te kalini mihingare o te hahi 
i Ohaio ki Mihiuri ; ko tenei te tangata 
i whaia mai e te reo whakakitenga 
(ako-Kawe 55) o te Ariki. kia awhina 
i a Oriwa Kautere i roto i nga mahi 
perehi pukapuka, me nga mahi tuhitnhi 
mo nga kura o te Hahi, kia taea atu 



TE KARERE 



ai nga tamariki e nga whakaakoranga 
e ataahua ana ki ta te Ariki titiro 
iho. No tana taenga mai ki Tiakihana 
Kauti i tuaruatia ai tenei whakakitenga 
kia ia (kia Wiremu W. Wherepe). 

Ko Hirini Kiripato (Algernon Sid- 
ney Gilbert) i whakaturia hei kai 
tiaki i nga moni e riro mai i a ia mo 
nga mahi hoko whenua, hei nohanga 
mo nga Hunga Tapu. Ko Eruera 
Patereti i tapaea hei Pihopa mo te 
Hahi ; ko te mahi i whaka — ritea ma- 
ana ko te tuari ki tena, ki tena o nga 
whanau ki a rite ki nga mea e hapa 
ana i a ratou. I tenei ahua te toha- 
tohanga o nga mahi ma tena, ma 
tena; e tupu haere ai enei timatanga 
hei kaupapa mo nga tikanga e whaka- 
ritea kia tu ki runga o Hiona (Ako — 
Kawe 57-58). 

Te Whakaaturanga Mai i Te 
Wahi e Tu ai Te Pa 

Ko tenei te whakatutukinga i te 
kupu taunaha a te Atua, mo nga patai 
o te whakaaro tangata i tukua atu ki 
Tona Aroaro. Awhea te koraha te 
kowha ai ki tona whakaputiputitanga? 
Awhea a Hiona te whakaarahia ake 
ai i roto i tona kororia, a ko tewhea 
wahi hei tunga mo te Temepara, te 
wahi hei tutukitanga mai mo nga iwi 
katoa e whakaeke mai i nga ra whaka- 
mutunga? Anei te Whakautu mai a 
te Ariki. "Whakarongo e koutou e nga 
kaumatua o taku Hahi, e ai ta te Ariki 
ta to koutou Atua kua mine ngatahi 
mai koutou, rite tonu ki aku whaka- 
haunga ki roto i tenei whenua, koia 
nei te whenua o Mihiuri, koia nei ano 
hoki te whenua i whakaritea, i whaka- 
tapua e ahau, hei huihuinga atu mo te 
Hunga Tapu. No reira koia tenei te 
whenua o te kupu whakaari, te wahi 
hoki mo te pa o Hiona. Na ko te kupu 
tenei a te Ariki, a In koutou Atua, 
"mehemea e hiahia ana koutou kia 
whiwhi ki te matauranga, tenei te tna- 
tauranga." Nanaa ko te wahi e huaina 
nei ko [tipeha (Independence), ko ia 
ano a waenganui o te whenua a ko te 
wahi mo te temepara kei te taha haua- 
uru, kei runga i te tahi wahi <• tata ana 

mai ki tr wharc whakawa. No reira, 



he mea tika kia hokona mai te whenua 
e te Hunga Tapu, me nga whenua 
katoa e takoto atu ana ki te taha 
Hauauru tae noa ki te rohe o nga 
whenua mania (prairies), kia rite ra 
ki te kaha o aku akonga ki te hoko 
whenua mai. Nanaa, he matauranga 
tenei, kia whiwhi ratou ki aua whenua 
mo ake tonu atu." 

Me Pupuri Nga Hunga 
Tapu i Te Ture 

I tetahi whakakitenga i homai i 
tenei wa ano (Ako-Kawe 58), i wha- 
kahaua nga mema o te Hahi, kia ngo- 
hengohe ki te ture a te Ariki, i hoatu 
nei mo ratou, kia mau ano hoki ki 
nga ture o te whenua. Anei Tana i 
ki ai, Kaua tetahi tangata e whakaaro 
he rangatira ia, engari ko te Atua te 
rangatira mo te tangata e whakarite 
whakawa ana, rite tonu ki tana ake e 
pai ai Kaua te tangata e wahi i nga 
ture o te whenua ; no reira kia ngohe- 
ngohe ki nga mana kua whakaturia i 
enei ra ; kia tae mai ra ano ia, a ia e 
tika nei kia noho ite nohanga whaka- 
rite whakawa ; e takahia ai e Ia, Ona 
hoa riri ki raro i Ona waewae. 

I Muri o Nga Mamaetanga Nui, 
Ko Nga Manaakitanga 

"Ka whakatuturutia a Hiona ka ha- 
ngaia tonutia atu te pa ; he whakaaro 
tenei i tupu ake i roto i nga hunga 
tapu, ara i etahi o ratou ; i mahara 
ano hoki etahi, ma ratou ano e hanga 
he ture mo ratou, hei aha nga ture i 
hangaia e etahi atu ; no reira nga tohu- 
tohu i korerotia ake nei, i homaitia ai e 
te Ariki ; kia pupuri kia mau ki nga 
tikanga o te whenua. Kua whakatupato 
ke noa ake te Ariki, me te tohutohu 
ano i nga whakahaere mo runga i tenei 
whenua ka nohia nei e ratou. Kaon e 
tere hangaia te pa. 

"I tenei wa e kore koutou kanohi 
e kite, i to whakaaro o te Atua mo 
nga mea meake puta mai. me to koro- 
ria aim c puta mai ana i muri i nga 

whakapawera. Notemea hei muri o te 
whakapawera nui puta mai ai nga 
manaakitanga, no reira kei te haere 
mai lu- ra e karaunatia ai koutou ki 
te nui o te kororia ; kaore ano i 



June, 1952 



225 



mai te baora, engari kua tata. Kia 
mahara ki tend mea. kua korerotia 
atu nei e ahau kia koutou i mua; ata 
rongoatia iho ki roto i o koutou nga- 
kau, me pupuri ano ki te mea e puta 
mai a muri. Nana, he pono taku e 
mea atu nei kia koutou. mo tend take 
kouton i tonoa ai e ahau he mea e 
ngohengohe ai koutou. Kia rite ai ano 
o koutou ngakau hei kai — whakaatu 
mo nga una meake puta mai. Me 
tenei ano. kia whiwlii ai koutou ki te 
Honore mo te whakatakoto ranga i te 
turanga (o Hiona) mo te whakaatura- 
nga ano hoki i te whenua ka tu nei te 
Hiona o te Atua ki runga" (Ako- 
Kawe 58). 

Ka kite iho tatou a ka matau hoki. 
kua rahuitia te kororia me te nuinga 
o te pa o Hiona mo e tahi atu \va e 
tu mai nei, ara i ta te karaipiture wha- 
ka hua. "e tata ana te wa." Ko te iwi 
na ratou nei te noho tuatahi ki te 
ngaki i te whenua ma ratou te whaka- 
takoto o te kaupapa kainga, te whaka- 
tika i te huarahi mai mo nga hunga 
tapu. ina haere mai ratou i muri o te 
kauwhautanga i te rongopai ki nga 
wahi mamao o te ao ; no te mea ka 
riro ma nga kaumatua e akiaki nga 
iwi kia huihui mai i nga pito katoa 
te hunga na ratou nei i ngaki tuatahi 
te maara waina, mehemea ratou ka 
piripono tonu ki te katoa o nga whaka- 
haunga. 

Whakatapunga o Te Whenua 

Ko nga hunga tapu o Korewira i 
whakanohia ki te taone o Ka (Kaw). 
Ko te awhina a te poropiti i a ratou, 
ko te whakatakoto i te rakau tuatahi 
o to ratou whare, i whakaarohia ai 
e ratou hei "whare kamaka mo Hiona" 
i tenei wahi Tekau ma rua nga tangata 
na ratou te rooku i hapai he ataara- 
ngitanga mo nga hapu tekau ma rua 
o Iharaira. I whakaaturia mai ano i 
taua wa, na roto i nga inoinga maha. 
kia riro ma Hirini Rikitona e whaka- 
wahi. e whakatapu te whenua. "He 
huinga ra tenei no ratou i roto i te koa 
e ai ki ta te poropiti kia ratou," he 
whakakitenga hoki kia ratou i nga mea 
o nga ra e tu mai nei, e huaki mai 



kia ratou 1 a ratou ka tuturu ki tenei 
wahi, timatangia atu nei i te rua o nga 
ra Akuhata 1831, 

[tu a Hirini Rikitona ki te whaka- 
rite i te mahi i tohia maana. a ko enei 
ana patai ki te runanga katoa. 

"Ka tango ranei koutou i tenei 
whenua hei Whenua Papatupu mo kou- 
tou. i run.ua i te whakainoemiti i roto 
i koutou ngakau hi te Ariki ':" 

"Ae. ka tango matou." 

"Ka kawenata ranei koutou kia man 
kinga hire a te Atua i runga i tenei 
whenua ahakoa kaore aua ture i mau 
i a koutou i runga i o koutou ake 
whenua?" 

"E whakaae ana matou." 

Ka whakaae ranei koutou, kia tukua 
mai etahi o koutou. o nga taina tua- 
kana ki konei pupuri ai i nga ture a te 
Atua ? 

"K whakaae Ana Matou." 

I muri o te inoi, ka tu a Rikitona 
ka mea "Inaianei ka whaka-ingoatia e 
ahau tenei wmenua kua whakawahia, 
kua whakatapua ki te Ariki, he Whe- 
nua Papatupu hei taanga manawa mo 
te hunga tapu ara mo te hunga katoa 
e piripono ana ki te Ariki mo nga wa 
katoa, hou atu ki nga hohonutanga o 
nga wa e tu mai nei. i runga i te 
ingoa o Ihu Karaiti, Naana nei tenei 
mana i homai ki au Amine" (Tirohia 
Documentary History of the Church, 
Vol. 1. pp. 196). 

Te Ahua o Tenei Whenua 

Itua atu i te whakaingoatanga i a 
Hirini Rikitona hei whakatapu hei 
whakawahi i te whenua i karan^atia 
ano ia e te reo whakakitenga. kia 
tahuri ia ki te tuhituhi i te ahua o 
tenei whenua hei tuku atu ki nga ma- 
nga katoa te Hahi, hei titiro iho ma 
ratou. tera pea ka ngawhere te hunga 
tapu. ka ngawari ki te kohi moni hei 
awhina i te hiahia ki te hoko whenua, 
ki te kore hoki tenei awhina e hihiko, 
ko te whakaheke toto anake tetahi atu 
huarahi c taea ai te tango mai o enei 
whenua. FLo te tuhituhinga tuatahi i 
oti ia Hirini Rikitona i whakarerea; 
a, i whakahau ano te Ariki i a Hirini 
Rikitona kia tuhituhi ano i tetahi. 



226 



TE KARERE 



(/Sess or Jleacli 



eaclei* 



TJie boss drives his men, 

The leader coaches them. 
The boss depends on authority, 

The leader on good will. 
TJie boss inspires fear. 

The leader enthusiasm. 
The boss says "I" 

TJie leader says "We." 
The boss assigns the job, 

The leader aets the part. 
The boss says to get there on time, 

TJie leader gets there ahead of time. 
The boss fixes the blame for the breakdown, 

The leader fixes the breakdown. 
'The boss kno-a'S how it is done. 

The leader shows how. 
TJie boss makes work a drudgery, 

TJie leader makes work a game. 
TJie boss says "Go" 

TJie leader says "LETS GO" 

— Anon. 



(One Uifsier and the CJand 



Have you heard about the oyster? 

It's a clamm subject, true 

But there's friendly inspiration 

I hat is good tor me and you. 

We could solve so many problems, 

And our trials understand. 

It we only learned the lesson 

Of the "oyster" and the sand: 

There once was an oyster whose story I'll tell, 

Who found that some sand had got under his shell — 

Just one little grain, but it gave him a pain. 

For oysters have feelings, for all they's so plain. 

Now did he berate, this working of fate. 

That had led him to such a deplorable state? 

Did he curse out the government? (all for election? 

And cry that the sea should have given protection? 

No, he said to himself, as he lay on his shelf. 

"Since I cannot remove it, I'll try to improve it." 

Now the years rolled round as the years always do. 

And he came to his ultimate destiny — stew! 

But the small grain of sand that had bothered, him so, 

Was a beautiful pearl, all richly aglow. 

The tale has a moral, for isn't is grand, 

What an oyster can do with a morsel of sand? 

What couldn't we do if we'd only begin 

With all of the things that "get under our skin?" 



-D. H. ELTON, 

Lethbridge, Aha. 







tYj 



(jjaixatana 

the >fi:ssi:\^i:ic 



n 




HANDCART PIONEERS 



Latter Day Saints - Outcasts in 1846 
Became Pioneers 

( >l rCASTS from "civilization," with little- to eat 
and little to wear, with few expressions of sympathy, 
and less help extended in their direction, it was onl) 

natural that the Saints on the plains at tunc- would he 
dopondent. Presidenl Voting constantly laboured to 
cheer and strengthen them. In April. 1846, shortly after 
the departure from Nauvoo, he requested Elder William 
Clayton to write something that would encourage the 
people. Within two hours Elder Clayton had written 
the following remarkable hymn, and sel it to the music 
of "All is Well." an old English time: — 

Come, come, ye Sain Is, no toil nor labour fear, 

Hut with joy wend your way; 
Though hard to you this journey may appear, 

Grace shall he as your day. 
"Its better far for us to str'vue, 
Our useless cures from us to drive. 
Do this, and joy your hearts will swell — 
All is well, all is well! 

And should we die before our journey's throunh. 
Happy day, all is well! 

We then are free from toil and sorrow, too: 
With the jus! we shall dwell. 
But if our lives are spared again 
To sec the Saints, their rest obtain, 
(). how we'll make this chorus swell — 
All is well, all is well' 



ABOUT OUR COVER: Handcart Pioneers Some three 

thousand Latter-day Saints pushed and pulled their way 
across the plains. Tragedy walked with some of the 
handcart companies, particularly those led by Edward 
Martin and James G. Willie. Of the Willie Company, 
about five hundred strong, seventy-seven died en route, 
and the Martin Company lost fifty-six of its six hundred. 
Sometimes graves were scooped out in snowbanks, be- 
cause survivors were too weak and the frozen ground was 
too hard. Since July is the month that we as Latter-day 
Saints pay respect to our pioneers, this cover picture has 
been chosen for our "Te Karere." 



TE KARERE 



Established 1907 



Volume 46 



Number 7 



July, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley 

Joseph Hay 

George R. Biesinger 

Grover D. Jensen 

James A. Larsen 

John A. Osburn 

Albert J. Wiley 

David T. Briggs 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) 



Tumuaki Mihana 

. . Kaunihera Tuatahi 

Kaun:hera Tuarua 

Hekeretari o te Mihana 

. . Assistant Hekeretari 

Mission Recorder 

Asst. Mission Recorder 

Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 

"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; S,2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



(Printed for transmission 



CONTENTS 



Editorial: 

From the Editor's Pen 

Special Features: 
PoIyn< sia . . 

Evidence Within 

Who Are the Leaders of Tomorrowl 

Church Features: 

The President's Page 
The Women's Corner 
Evidences and Reconciliations 

The Sunday School in N<w Zealand 

World Wide Church 

L.I). Prophets Speak 

■s to All our <;. nealofl s W oi 
s. el v. I earning 



Hera and Tin i »• ii 


the Mission 


Here and Thai 


a la Hi" Mil i 


Featuring the 




I skihana Maori i 





289 
241 
246 






: 4w 






(r^^(F*^<s^Q^G^Q^(^^(^Q^(s^^<^^(j^<Q^<; 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE 

^ . He Kupu Aroha 



*n 



By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 



ii J\ L L thrones and Dominions, 
xm Principalities and Powers shall 
be revealed and sel forth upon all 
who have endured valiantly for the 
Gospel of Jesus Christ." (Doe. & 
Cov. 121:29.) A beautiful promise, 
beautifully stated and it would seem 
easy of access; but there are two con- 
ditional words which make the pro- 
mise not quite so simple as it would 
sem at first reading. "All who have 
ENDURED VALIANTLY for the 
Gospel of Jesus Christ." 

It is such a simple and easy thing 
to testify that "I believe the Gospel 
has been restored in the Latter Days." 
Yes, we are told that "Even the devils 
believe, and tremble." But believing 
and not even trembling denote endur- 
ance or valiance. 

Many the righteous soul who has 

[ought a good fight up to a point and 
then through disappointment, tempta- 
tion, weariness or jealousy has fallen 
into indifference, if not apostasy. 1 1« m 
many men have returned to the land 
of their childhood to find that ihe 
enthusiastic teacher of his youth had 
now become the critic or the cynic 
on the street corner? How often have 
we seen the fervent testimony wan to 



a heartless and faithless statement, if 
not an outright denial, of its former 
character? "He that endures to the end 
shall be saved," and the end is a long 
way from the starting point, even 

measured by this short life of >UTS, 
to say nothing of the eons of Eternity. 

"Valiant" anyone dares bear his 
testimony when he is among his own. 
but who are there that defy danger 
and persecution for the cause he lias 
espoused? The Prophets Noah, Daniel. 
David and The Christ, and many pro- 
phets of former and latter dispensa- 
tions, have defied the elements and 
the hatred of men and the very devil 
himself, in the power of the Priesthood 
which they bore and for the love they 
bore for the Revealed Truth of God 
Valiant until death, they sealed the 
testimony which they bore with all 
that mortal man has to give — his life. 
Theirs were lives of valiance and no 
earthly disturbance could swerve them 
from the course, once set. 

Our responsibility is not less than 
theirs. Our Eternal Salvation is based 
on the same principles of Endurance 
and Valiance as theirs. I doubt that 
the Lord, when we shall be called 
(Continued on Page 236) 



232 



TE KAPvERE 



Women's C&Utci 

Jj By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 

t 



fcl 



ONE whole week on the South 
Island, holding meetings and 
visiting with the people at Nelson, 
Blenheim, Grovetown, Christchurch, 
Timaru and Dunedin. It was all very 
nice and we feel we know the people 
and conditions better. They were all 
happy to see us and we hope our visit 
stimulated and encouraged them to 
continue with the good work they are 
doing. 

There was a fine spirit at the Con- 
ference at Dunedin and many strong 
testimonies were born. Another pleas- 
ing part was the beautiful quartette 
numbers rendered by Elders Roberts, 
Newman, Broadhead and Pitcher. This 
quartette should stay together and 
keep up the good work. Their power 
for good is limitless, to say nothing 
of the joy they receive from it them- 
selves. It is very much a part of mis- 
sionary work to sing praise to our 
Heavenly Father because He has said, 
"The song of the righteous is a prayer 
unto me." We listened to the combined 
chorus of Christchurch and Dunedin, 

tOO, and realized thai music adds so 

much to our meetings. 

At Blenheim we visited with some 
\<r\ ime investigators who made the 
i emark, "You don't go to < !hur< h to 
worship, you go to learn about your 



Church." President Ottley answered. 
"We go to learn how to worship." 
Yes, to worship means to pay divine 
honour, to respect and adore our 
Heavenly Father and His Son Jesus 
Christ. How can we do this without 
knowing somehing about them and the 
plan of life they have made for us to 
follow? "If ye love me keep my com- 
mandments." 

After travelling over the hills of the 
North Island, we welcomed the long, 
straight stretches of highway from 
Christchurch to Dunedin. We almost 
thought we were in America for 
awhile. Of course, when it comes to 
scenery, New Zealand ranks high with 
America's. 

The Relief Society organizations on 
the South Island are small in number- 
but are going forward in the work. 
Nelson Branch just has six Relief 

Society members, but were "right OH 
the button" with their lessons, as out- 
lined. I was privileged to attend their 
Social Science lesson on "The Pi 
gress of Man" and was pleased 
low the sisters participated. 

One sister travelled 17 miles, from 
Picton to Grovetown, to meet with u- 
and asked for an organization at 

(Continued on Pajft" 236) 



July, 1952 



233 



cTront the (rditer s JJen 



Service Met© God aod Mam 



£6^517 K believe in being honest, 

» ™ true, chaste, benevolent, vir- 
tuous, and in doing good to all men; 
indeed, we may say that we follow 
the admonition of Paul -We believe 
all things, we hope all things, we have 
endured many things and hope t < * he 
able to endure all things. It' then- is 
anything virtuous, lovely or of good 
report or praiseworthy, we seek after 
these things. *' (Articles of Faith, No. 
13.) 

In this brief statement the Latter- 
day Saints show the practical character 
<>f their religion — a religion that em- 
braces not only definite conceptions of 
spiritual matters and belief as to con- 
ditions in the hereafter, but also of 
present, current everyday duties, in 
which self-respect, love for fellow- 
men, and devotion to God are the 
guiding principles. 

We must seek to serve God and 
man if we intend on finding life 
eternal. This Church is so organized 
that it provides something for every 
member to do. And the doing of those 
things offers the only means by which 
members grow towards their promised 
destiny. Teachings in themselves are 
of no value to the individual, unless 
converted into deeds. And it is the 
doing of these deeds that leads to 
growth through developmenl of latent 
powers and the building of desired 
qualities of character. One could set 
passively for an eternity and hear the 
best of instruction <>r hear of the loft- 
est principles without being much im- 
proved unless these teachings and prin- 
c pies were converted into practices of 
living. It is a most wonderful thing 
about Christ's Gospel that for every 



commandment that is given, it pro- 
vides a practical means for bringing 
it about. Which results in tin- develop- 
ment of the desired qualities of mind 

and spirit. 

Religion without personal cleanliness 
or morality, profession of love for God, 
without love for fellowmen, Church 

membership without consistent conduct 
in the common affairs of life, are but 
as sounding brass and tinkling cymbals 
— noise without music, the words of 
prayer without spirit. 

"If any man among you seem to be 
religious, and bridleth not his tongue, 
but deceiveth his own heart, this nan's 
religion is vain. Pure religion and tin- 
defiled before God and the Father is 
this, To visit the fatherless and widows 
in their affliction and to keep himself 
unspotted from the world (James 
1:26-27). A good test of a man's re- 
ligion is its Utility. There arc ion 
many men that use religion as a cloak 
— and that too often as a Sunday wear 
to coyer in part the rags of sin — is but 
sacrilege. The best way to analyse a 
religious organization or creed is to 
look at the adherents and examine the 
results of their being governed by this 
religion or creed. This is as simple 
and fair as to judge a tree by the 
quality of its wood or fruit. By their 
fruits ye shall know them. 

"If a man say h 1' »ve ( r< >d and 

hateth his brother, he is a liar; for he 
that loveth not his brother whom he 
hath seen, how can he love God whom 
he hath not seen? And this command- 
ment have we from Him: That he 
who loveth God loveth his brother 
also." (1 |ohn 4:20. 21.) 



234 



TE KARERE 



We must learn to love our fellow- 
men and seek to help them overcome 
the trials and tribulations that come 
upon them. Wherefore in our service 
to our fellowmen, we are showing 
service unto God. Because when we 
seek to lift our brother or sister to a 
better way of life, we are. seeking to 
glorify our Father which is in Heaven. 
For this is what the Lord said unto 
Moses many centuries ago, "For be- 
hold, this is my work and my glory 
to bring to pass the immortality and 
eternal life of man." (Moses 1:39.) 

For God so loved the world, that He 
gave His only Begotten Son, that who- 
soever believeth in Him should not 
perish but have everlasting life. (John 
3:16.) Perhaps the greatest service 
ever manifested towards mankind or 
our Father in Heaven was when the 
Lord Jesus laid down His life, that we 
might live. 

The Gospel of Jesus Christ cannot 
be lived fully without some sacrifice 
or self-denial upon the part of the 
disciples or members. The Lord said : 
Let no man be afraid to lay down his 
life for my sake ; for whosoever layeth 
down his life for my sake shall find 
it again. And whosoever is not willing 
to lay down his life for my sake is 
not my disciple. (D. & C. 103: Z7, 28.) 

Our Father in Heaven, to whom we 
are indebted for all things we hope to 
receive in this life and in the life to 
come, has asked, and even commanded, 
the members of His Church io pay 
one-tenth of all that He has given 
them back to His Church. That in do- 
ing 50, His Kingdom might be raised 
up and that obedience, service and 
love for Him might be manifested, in- 
stead of love for gold and riches. 

I would like to insert a little poem 
at this point entitled . . . 

OTHERS 

Lord, lei me live from day to day 
In such a self -forgetful way, 
Thai even when I kneel to pray 



My prayers zAll be for others. 
Help mc in all the zcork I do 
To ever be sincere and true. 
And know that all I do for you 
Must needs be done for others. 
Let "self" be crucified and slain 
And buried deep; and all in vain 
May efforts be to rise again, 
Unless to live for others. 
And when my work on earth is done 
And my new work in Heaven begun, 
May I forget the crown I've icon 
While thinking still of — Others. 
Others, Lord, yes, Others, 
Let this my motto be; 
Help me to live for others 
That I may live like Thee. 

— C. D. Meigs. 



That we may know, that the service 
which we do for others is not in vain. 
Let us look into The Book of Mor- 
mon where we find, in Alma, Chap. 
41 : 12-1 5, the word of the Lord regard- 
ing the Restoration of all things. "And 
now behold is the meaning of the 
word restoration to take a thing of a 
natural state and place it in an un- 
natural state, or to place it in a state 
opposite to its nature — O, my son. 
this is not the case ; but the meaning 
of the word restoration is to bring 
back again evil for evil, or carnal 
for carnal, or devilish for devilish — 
good for that which is good; righteous 
for that which is righteous: just for 
that which is just: merciful for that 
which is merciful. Therefore, my son, 
see that you are merciful unto your 
brethren; deal justly, judge right- 
eously, and do good continually; and 
if ye do all these things then shall 
ye receive your reward: yea, ye shall 
have mercy restored unto you again; 
ye shall have justice restored unto you 
again; ye snail have a righteous judg- 
ment restored unt<» you again; and ye 
shall have good rewarded unto you 
again. For thai which ye do send out 

shall return unto you again, and he 

restored; therefore, the word restora- 
tion more fullj condemneth the sinner, 

and justified) him not at all. 



July, 1952 



235 



May this scripture be a guiding in- 
fluence in cur future lives, because we 
all kn«>w that there is going to be a 
day .>t' settlement, and because we love 
God ami our fellowmen enough to 
want to serve them. Ma\ the deeds 



that we do for others he Upright and 
just, >" that when our deed.- are 
weighed in the balance we also may 
have tin.- >anie restored unto us again. 
Yours truly, 

T. K. Editor- D.T.B. 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE (Con 
before the bar of Justice, will he much 

impressed with the good deeds we in- 
tended to do. nor will the fact of hav- 
ing been horn of valiant and enduring 
parents go far toward our justification 
unless we have huilded on the founda- 
tion they have set. "The Lord has 
power to raise up from the stones, 
seed to Abraham." 



tinued from Page 232) 

"We believe that through the Atone- 
ment of Christ, all mankind may he 
saved by OBEDIENCE To Till-; 
! \\\ S AND ORDINANCES OF 
Till'. GOSPEL." Obedience means 
Valour, Endurance, Long Suffering 
and Patience. There is no Royal Road, 
hut the hard and devious road, pur- 
sued to its end, will bring Salvation in 
liis Royal Kingdom. 



WOMEN'S CORNER (Continued 

Picton. So you see, the work is pro- 
gressing and Relief Society is growing. 

We have on hand at the Mission 
Home fillers for the Relief Society 
Roll and Minute Books at 12/6 each. 

We hope the sisters are all reading 
The Hook of Mormon. We have been 
asked by the General Board to call 



from Page 233) 

for a report when our lessons for this 
year are completed. We are to read 
this portion of The Hook of Mormon, 
"The Title Page . . . Brief Analysis 
of The Book of Mormon . . . Origin 
of the Book of Mormon . . . The 
Testimony of Eight Witnesses . . . 
The Book of Ether and I. Xephi 1 :8." 



MY WAGE 

/ bargained with life for a penny, 

.hid life would pay no more; 
However, 1 begged at evening 

When I counted my scanty store. 
For life is a just employer; 

He (jic'es you what you ask. 
But once you have set the :ea<jcs. 

Why you must hear the task. 
I worked for a menial's hire — 

Only to learn dismay al. 
That any wage I had asked of Life, 

Life would have paid. 



236 



TE KARERE 



Evidences and Reconciliations 

DOES THE CHURCH RECEIVE REVELATIONS TODAY 
AS IN THE DAYS OF JOSEPH SMITH? 



THE answer to this question is a 
simple, Yes. The Church of 
Jesus Christ is guided by continuous 
revelation. The Lord speaks to His 
Church now as in the time of the 
Prophet Joseph Smith, or in ages past, 
whenever the Church has been upon 
earth. 

The question merits, however, a 
fuller answer. There are at least three 
classes of revelations : 

First, there are revelations dealing 
with the organization and basic doc- 
trines of the Church. Such revelations 
form the foundation of the Church, 
upon which is built the superstructure 
of teaching and practice throughout 
the years. These revelations are neces- 
sary at the beginning of a dispensa- 
tion, so that the Church may be 
properly organized and sent upon its 
way to bless mankind. In this age, 
these indispensable revelations were 
given to Joseph Smith who was com- 
missioned to effect the organization of 
the restored Church. As given to the 
Prophet, they suffice for the salvation 
of man in this dispensation. Other 
such fundamental revelations dealing 
with organization and doctrine may, 
at the pleasure of the Lord, be given, 
for there is a universe of truth not yet 
known to us, but it will in no way 
change or abrogate the principles set 
forth in existing revelations. 

Second, there arc revelations deal- 
ing with the problems of the day. 
Though the essential doctrine, form- 
ing the foundation, framework, and 
structure of the Gospel has been re- 
vealed, the Church, directed by mortal 
men, needs divine guidance »in the 



solution of current questions. Many 
of the revelations received by the Pro- 
phet Joseph Smith were of- this char- 
acter. There were missions to organ- 
ize, cities to be built, men to be called 
into office, temples, meeting-houses, and 
homes to be constructed. The Prophet 
presented his problems to the Lord, 
and with the revealed answer was able 
to accomplish properly the work before 
him. It is comforting to know that 
our Heavenly Father helps in the 
minor as in the major affairs of life. 
The revelations directing the building 
of certain houses in the early days 
of the Church are, for example, among 
the cherished words of God, for they 
throw a flood of light upon the prec- 
ious, intimate relationships that may 
be established between God and man. 

Such revelations, directing the 
Church in the affairs of the day, have 
been received continuously by the 
Church, through the President of the 
Church. One needs only review the 
history of the Saints to assure him- 
self that such revelations hav< con- 
stantly been vouchsafed by the Church. 
Perhaps more of this type of revela- 
tion has been received since, than 
during the time of the Prophet. Be- 
cause they are not printed »n 
as revelations does not diminish their 



Third, every faithful member of the 
Church may be granted revelation for 
his daily guidaiw e. In fact, the mem- 
bers Of the (lunch can testify that 

they iii truth have and i\^ receive inch 
daily guidance. The testimony of the 



July, 1952 



237 



truth of the Gospel, the precious pos- 
session of hundreds of thousands, has 
come through the spirit of revelation. 
By desire, study, practice, and prayer, 
one must approach the testimony of 
the truth, hut it is obtained finally 
only under the spirit of revelation. It 
is by this power that the eyes (if men 
are opened to understand the principles 
and the truth of the Gospel. Without 
that spirit, truth cannot he compre- 
hended. In the words of President 
Brigham Young : 

"Without revelation direct from 
Heaven, it is impossible for any person 
to understand fully the plan of salva- 
tion. We often hear it said that the 
living oracles must he in the Church, 
in order that the kingdom of God may 
be established and prosper on the 
earth. I will give another version of 
this sentiment. I say that the living 
oracles of God. or the Spirit of revela- 
tion, must be in each and every in- 
dividual, to know the plan of salvation 
and keep in the path that leads them 
to the presence of God." (Discourses 
of Brigham Young. P. 58.) 

We may go further. Every person 
born into the earth has claim upon 
the assistance of the Spirit of God. 
That is a speceis of revelation. Con- 
sequently, all good achievements of 
man, in science, literature, or art, are 
the product of revelation. The know- 
ledge and wisdom of earth have so 
come. 

It must be remembered that revela- 
tions usually come as needed, no 
faster. The Prophet Joseph Smith 
made this clear: "We cannot expect 
to know all. or more than we now 
know, unless we comply with or keep 



those we already have received." 
I Teachings of the Prophet Joseph 
Smith, p. 256.) The question then 
should not he. "Do we receive revela- 
tions now as in the days of (he Pro- 
phet Joseph Smith?" hut rather. "Do 
we keep so fully the revelations 
already given us that we have the 
right t> i expect more ?" 

Another important principle of 
revelation in the organized Church of 
Christ is the limitation placed upon 
those who secure revelations. Even 
member of the Church may seek and 
receive revelation, hut only for himself 
and those for whom he is responsible. 

Every officer of the Church is entitled 
to revelation to help him in the field 
into which he has been called, but not 
beyond. The bishop can claim no 
revelation except for his ward duties, 
the stake president for his stake duties 
only; the President of the Church is 
the only person who can receive revel- 
ations for the guidance of the Church 
as a whole. These limitations, coming 
from the Lord, protect the orderliness 
of the Kingdom of God on earth ( see 
also Chapter 14). 

It is not the business of any individ- 
ual to rise up as a revelator, as a 
prophet, as a seer, as an inspired man, 
to give revelation for the guidance of 
the Church, or to assume to dictate 
to the presiding authorities of the 
Church in any part of the world, much 
(ess in the midst of Zion, where the 
organizations of the Priesthood are 
about perfect, where everything is 
complete even to the organization of 
a branch. It is the right of individuals 
to be inspired and to receive mani- 
festations of the Holy Spirit for their 
(Continued on Page 244) 



238 



TE KARERE 



POLYNESIA 

A BRANCH OF THE HOUSE OF ISRAEL 

By ELDER RICHARD A. BIGLER 



"TJie Migrations . . . 

PO L Y N E S I A— the very word 
breathes of the romance of the 
old sea rovers, who, in their sea-going 
canoes, accomplished the impossible. 
Where else in the annals of history 
can we point to men of more daring 
and courage in their search for new 
lands? What great European navi- 
gators would have set out in the sea- 
going canoes to range the trackless 
ocean with only the stars for guidance 
in such relentless wanderings as took 
the early Polynesians across thousands 
of sea miles ? 

As Sir Peter Buck stated : 
"They set out into the unknown 
seas to find by chance new lands to 
act as an escape from the rising- 
population on over-taxed lands." 

By chance? Or were they led by 
God, to fulfill the prophecies of the 
prophets of old that the house of 
Israel would be scattered over the face 
of the world? This has led me to com- 
pile the article you are about to read. 

FROM WHENCE THEY CAME 

Modern anthropologists are of the 
opinion that the Polynesian races 
migrated from ancient Asia. They base 
this conclusion on the fact that all 
races of people did originate in Asia. 
With such care and tireless effort they 
have tried to trace language and other 
characteristics of the Polynesians 
down from Asia down into Idonesia, 
Micronesia and thence into what we 
know as the great "Polynesian Tri- 
angle." Although these men did not 
have the complete truth, we owe much 
to them i"r their efforts in retaining 
ancient customs of the P0I3 nesian 
races, and 1 believe thai we ma] at 
cepl as being substantial!} true their 
theory thai the Polynesian race did 
migrate from Asia. It is geserall) 
agreed that the Polynesians arc of 



\m W I 

Mm 



Europoid descent, as Sir Peter Buck 
stated, "As a result of the studies 
made on the living in all parts of 
Polynesia, it is evident that the master 
mariners of the Pacific must be Euro- 
poid, for they are not characterised by 
the woolly hair, black skin and thin 
lower legs of the Negroids, nor by the 
flat face, short stature and drooping 
inner eyefold of the Mongolids." Then 
how did they suddenly appear in the 
middle of the Pacific Ocean? The pre- 
vailing opinion has been that they 
came through Indonesia, island-hopped 
through Micronesia, and then settled 
in what is the "Polynesian Triangle." 
Then, after they had come through, 
the Micronesian peoples moved in after 
them, closing the gap. As Sir Peter 
Buck stated again — "We max sum up 
the present position by saying that in 

remote ages the ancestors of the Poly- 
nesian people probably did live in some 
pari of India and worked cast, but 
myths and legends transmitted orally 
do not reach back that far. The\ must 

have sojourned in Indonesia in order 
to reach the Pacific The Polynesian 

language has affinities with the Indo- 
nesian dialects. During their stay in 

Indonesia the salt entered then" blood 
ami changed them from landsmen to 
seamen. When the preSSUI 

goloid peoples pouring in from the 



July, 1952 



239 



mainland became oppressive, the Poly- 
nesian ancestors turned their fac 
ward the eastern horizon and em- 
barked upon one of the greatest of all 
adventures." But these anthropologists 
have overlooked a very important 
thin.-;, namely the greal race of white 
people who dwelt on the American 
Continent long before the time of 
Christ. I think they have discounted 
the possibility 6f America being the 
homeland of the Polynesian race be- 
cause they did not know how they 
got there. They claim it highly im- 
probable for a race "t" people to voyage 

such a distance as from Asia to 
America, without stopping off some- 
where and leaving some trace of their 
journey. The work of uncovering the 

ruins and culture of those people on 
the American Continent is in its in- 
fancy, lint I feel sure that when a 
complete history of customs and lan- 
guage of America is completed, and is 
compared with that of Polynesia, the 
theory that the Polynesians came 
through .America will he greatly 
strengthened. 

The most important thing that these 
learned men — and most men of the 
world — have overlooked is the Revela- 
tion of God, given to Joseph Smith in 
these last days: That, and the authen- 
ticity of the "Hook of Mormon" which 
has come to the men of this world 
by the divine hand of God. To bring 
us to truth and knowledge concerning 
Him. How hlessed are we as "Latter- 
day Saints" to receive all of this know- 
ledge of things both spiritual and tem- 
poral. With these divine revelations 
given to the Saints we have the one 
that states — "The Polynesian race is 
of the 1 louse of Israel." 

The Book of Mormon is a history 
of God's dealings with men. It is a 
history of a branch of the House of 
Israel which God led away to preserve 
them and to build up a ^reat and 
mighty nation. It begins with a man 
named Lehi. a descendant of Joseph 
through Ephraim. Lehi lived in Jeru- 
salem until 600 PA*., when God com- 
manded him in a dream to take his 



family and flee into the wilderness to 

escape the coming destruction of Jeru- 

salem. Their divinely guided journey 
took them down through Arabia to 
the Arabian Sea where by command- 
ment, with the promise that they 

would be led to die "Promised Land.*' 

They built and provisioned a ship in 
which they faithfully and courageously 

embarked into the unknown sea. Thus 
commenced the epic journey of Lehi 

from Asia n. the "Promised Land." 
or what we know as the American 

Continent. As the "Hook of Mormon" 
states, the voyage was marked by 

severe storms, one of which could have 
been the "Roaring Forties"— a south- 
east monsoon— which could quite con- 
ceivably have earned them to a point 

below Australia, where this monsoon 

treminates. Then it is possible that 

they were picked up by the An'.artic 

Current, which starts somewhere be- 
low New Zealand and carries up along 
the South American Coast. By this 
route, Lehi and bis family could have 
landed somewhere along the Peruvian 
('oast without stopping at any islands 
en route. 1 will not deal further with 
these Israelites on the "Promised 
Land," but will jnst point out that 
there are passages in the "Hook of 
Mormon" which point out later migra- 
tions into the Sea Westward, or pos- 
sibly Polynesian. The first is found in 
Omni 1 :12, 13. and the second is found 
in Alma o3:5-9. I will deal with the 
first one mentioned, which is Omni 
1:12.13, when- we read: "Behold, 1 
will speak unto you somewhat con- 
cerning Mosiah who was made kin<: 
over the land of Zarahemla ; for be- 
hold, he being warned of the Lord 
that he should flee out of the land of 
X'eplh. and as many as would hearken 
unto the voice of the Lord should also 
depart out of the land with him. into 
the wilderness, and it came to pass that 
he did according as the Lord had 
Commanded him. And they departed 
out of the land into the wilderness, as 
many as would hearken unto the voice 
of the Lord: and they were led b\ 
many preachings and prophesying." 



240 



TE KARERE 



Then we find this important extract 
from the "House of Israel" by E. L. 
Whitehead, concerning their flight : 
"Our interest does not centre upon 
the people who followed Mosiah, but 
with those that did not follow him. 
Maori tradition has much to say con- 
cerning the causes of the Maori migra- 
tion from the mainland of some great 
continent to the east, which they tenta- 
tively identify as Peru — the same 
region over which Mosiah reigned. It 
is adjacent to the land Zarahemla, 
which Book of Mormon Geographers 
have established along the northern 
shores of South America, in the land 
of Nephi, which is declared to run 
parallel with the Pacific in the same 
region where the Inca Empire had 
reached its highest concentration and 
culture. 

The inrushing Lamanite hordes no 
doubt caused great consternation 
among the remnants of Mosiah's 
people left in the country. As best 
they could they tried to escape from 
Lamanites. Only to the west was there 
refuge, the "Pacific Ocean." This 
avenue of escape was opened to them. 
The strong Antartic Currents that 
flow along this region could carry 
them in a south-westerly direction, 
eventually casting them upon the 
shores of Tahiti, the first island group 
in its course. The Maori legends in- 
dicate that some might have stopped 
at Easter Island, further south and 
nearer to the American Mainland." 

This bit of information at first 
struck me as being based on a good 
deal of assumption, but when con- 
sidered in the light of a similar story 
I found in "Kon Tiki," it seemed more 
plausible: "Virakocha" is an Inca 
(Ketchua) name and consequently of 
fairly recent date. The original name 
of the sun-god, "Virakocha," mth^ 
to mean Sun-Tiki <>r Fir-Tiki. Kon 
Tiki was a high priesl and sun-king 
of the [ncas legendary "white- men," 

who had left the enormous ruins on 
the shores of Lake Titicaca. The 

legend runs that the mysterious white 



men wtih beards were attacked by a 
chief named Cari. who came from the 
Coquimbo Valley. In a battle on an 
island in Lake Titicaca the fair race 
was massacred, but Kon Tiki himself. 
and his closest companions, escaped 
and later came down to the Pacific 
Coast whence they finally disappeared 
overseas to the westward. I was no 
longer in doubt that the white chief- 
god, Sun-Tiki, whom the Incas de- 
clared that their forefathers had driven 
out of Peru on to the Pacific, was 
identical with the white chief-god. 
Tiki, son-of-the-sun, whom the in- 
habitants of all the eastern Pacific 
hailed as the original founder of their 
race. And the details of Sun-Tiki's 
life in Peru with the ancient names 
of places around Lake Titicaca, 
cropped up again in historic legends 
current among the natives of the 
Pacific Islands." 

Xow, Thor Heyerdahl, in his book 
"Kon Tiki," places the date of this war 
at 500 A.D., a far cry from 230 B.C., 
the date assigned it by the Book 
of Mormon." He was apparently 
prompted by the outdated theory that 
the islands were not inhabited until 
500 A.D. I find that the majority of 
the authorities agree — and it is con- 
firmed by Maori genealogy — that the 
first inhabitation of Polynesia oc- 
curred about 250 B.C. Does not this 
validate what we have read from the 
"Book of Mormon" and the "House 
of Israel?" So this legend of "Vira- 
kocha" telling us of the settling of 
Polynesia could then more correctly 
be dated at 230 B.C. The date ^i the 
Legend must be in harmony with the 
migrations date. Before stated. Poly- 
nesian genealogies establish the first 
migration as occurring long before 
500 A.I)., as does the study ^i diff- 
erent food plants which have under- 
gone variations which could have been 
completed since 500 VI). Furthermore, 
according to "Book of Mormon" 

chronology, there wen- no white people 

( Nephites) remaining in the laud after 
101 \ I' 

(Continued Next Month) 



July, 1952 



241 



\D&idence Jwiiliin 



By ELDER REECE L. GLINES 




Established Truth to the Divinity 
of The Book of Mormon 

THERE has been much controversj 
and many pros and cons about 

the truth and authenticity of the Book 
oj Mormon. Well over a million truth- 
seeking people have found what they 
were yearning for in the Book oj 

Mormon. Many skilled men during the 
past one hundred and twenty years 
have tried to prove it false. They have 
used any vice they could, to prove the 
non-existence of truth in the book. 
But one certain fact that stares all 
of the critics of the book in the face, 
whether good or bad, is that the 
Book of Monuoii is "Literature." This 
fact cannot be disputed, no matter 
what opinion may have as to the 
authenticity of the book : and it is 
along the line of scanning the mediums 
through which the truths of the book 
are established that we wish to direct 
our thoughts for a few enticing lines. 

Before we delve too heavily into the 
leaves of the Book of Mormon, it 
might be interesting to investigate a 
few circumstances around the "much 
proposed" author of the book, and see 
if it were possible that the book be- 
came known unto us by the "cunning 
craftiness" of man, or it came forth 



through the channels which all of the 
Latter-day Saints know and believe, 

and that is by divine revelation. 

Joseph Smith was born on the 23rd 
day of December, 1805, in the "town" 
of Sharon, Windsor County. Vermont 
IK' was brought up in the humblest of 
homes, his parents having had to shift 
from place to place in order to main- 
tain a living. Schooling was very much 
neglected because the family had not 

the means nor the opportunities t" give 
their children any amount of education. 
Let us quote the Prophet's mother as 
to this question: "As our children had, 

in a great measure, been debarred from 
the privilege of schools, we began to 
make every arrangement to attend to 
this important duty. We established 
our second son, Hyrum, in an academy 
at Hanover : and the rest, that were 
of sufficient age, we were sending to 
a common school that was quite con- 
venient. Meanwhile, myself and com- 
panion were doing all that our abilities 
would admit of for the future welfare 
and advantage of the family, and were 
greatly blessed in our labours. 

"But this state of things did not 
long continue. The typhus fever came 
into the town a' Lebanon, and raged 
tremendously. Among the number 
seized with this complaint were, first, 
Sophronia; next. Hyrum. who was 
taken while at school and came home 
sick; then Alvin : in short, one after 
another was taken down, til 1 all the 
family, with the exception of myself 
and husband, were prostrated upon 
l>c(L of sickness/ 1 I I [istory A '.he 
Prophet Joseph by Lucy Mack Smith. 
1). 52.) It seems as though the formal 
education of Joseph Smith came to an 
abrupt halt. He has been called a liar. 
deceiver, ignoramous, witch doctor, 
and many other names which deal with 
the doctrines < f deceiving and mis- 



242 



TE KARERE 



leading the human mind. I pray thee 
to read on and then decide for your- 
self if such an "ignorant youth" could 
create such a wonder for the "con- 
fusing" and "misleading" of some of 
God's chosen people. 

Before we consider the exact types 
of literature in the Book of Mormon, 
let us take the Book of Mormon just 
as literature. Knowing the test of great 
literature, we will be able to justify 
the book on the grounds as to its 
genuineness as great literature. Henry 
A. Wallace, then Secretary of Agri- 
culture, has been quoted as saying 
about the Book of Mormon: "It 
reached perhaps only one per cent of 
the people of the United States, but 
it affected this one per cent so power- 
fully and lastingly that all the people 
of the United States have been 
affected, especially by its contribution 
to opening up one of our great front- 
iers." (Xew York Times, Nov. 5. 
1937.) What is the reason for the 
affect that it has had upon the people 
of that nation and also the rest of the 
world ? 

There are certain characteristics 
which make for great literature. First, 
great literature must have a great 
theme. A theme which is narrow, com- 
monplace, petty, trivial, cannot be held 
at any great esteem in the hall of 
fame of literature. Second, the way in 
which the theme of the literature is 
expressed must be most beautiful. 

Really great literature has the power 
to excite the whole being of man. 
The more it arouses the impulses of 
man, the better the literature, and the 

better the quality. 

The approach to which the author 
of greal literature list's to bring in 
like circumstances musl varj wide 
and be innumerable so the reader will 
not tire from reading the same old 
drone of structure more than on« e or 
twice. 



Xow to our problem. How does the 
Book of Mormon stand up to the 
above tests? Does it fulfill all of the 
requirements which we have set forth ? 
Can it be rather among the great 
books, such as the Works of Shake- 
speare? Let us just consider a few- 
points which might inform us as to 
the conclusions we so earnestly seek. 

To take the theme of the Book of 
Mormon — what book could have a 
greater theme than to tell of an 
ancient civilization which dwelt for 
hundreds of years on the American 
Continent? There followed a long list 
of prophets and apostles after the 
migration of the remnant of the house 
of Joseph to the American Continent. 
Christ appeared to them there and 
taught them His Gospel. He sent His 
angels to declare the Gospel to the 
people of that "forgotten" nation. 
What book could have a greater 
theme ? 

Is the Book of Mormon beautifully 
written? Is its diction faultless? Many 
of Book of Mormon scholars will find 
it very hard to decide the answer to 
this question. We must see in reading 
the book, and then comparing it with 
the Bible, that in no place does the 
Book of Mormon compare in grandeur 
with the books of Ruth, Isaiah, 
Xahum. Job, and the Psalms. The 
words in the Book of Mormon do not 
have the "flowery" touch which the 
appealing books of the Bible have. 
The writers seems to have a \er\ 
direct, concise way of depicting their 
ideas. They seem to have something 
important to say and they waste no 
"flowery" words to say it. 

The Book of Mormon is a transla- 
tion literature. As all of US will admit, 
it would be impossible to translate 
the exact meaning of certain pas 
t'roin the aneient language into the 
English language. Joseph Smith was 
no English scholar, having very little 
schooling. We notice the lack of the 
the lovely melodj and clear way In 



July, 1952 



243 



which the learned translators of the 
Bible used. The Lord had to make use 
of the inexperienced Prophet to trans- 
late the book, so He gave him the 

Crim and Thuinmiin which enabled 
Joseph to catch some of the spirit « i 
the original writers of the book; bul 
the effectiveness i f the book 
and is limited by the lack of educa- 
tional training of the Prophet. Joseph 
did what most unlearned and unexperi- 
enced translators do, and that is being 
too literal. Take, for instance, the 
expressions "and," "and it came to 
pass." The first part of the Book of 
Mormon almost seems monotonous be- 
cause of the innumerable phrases "and 
it came to pass." 



\\ i. must conclude that the diction 
of the Book of Mormon docs not at 
all reach the high levels as that of 
the Bible. But what makes the honk 
so lasting, and what makes n create 
so profound an affect on its readers? 

The answer lies in the hut of the 

simple truths, the unusual historical 
events, and the fervent, horn 
ligious truths and doctrines which are 

contained within the hook. As I );-. 
Sidney B. S perry has stated: "Though 
the Book of Mormon has httl< 
tained literary beauty, it is a 
literature because of the unusual re- 
ligious and historical truths which it 
sets Forth with profound fervor." 

(Continued Next Month) 



EVIDENCES AND RECONCILIATIONS (Cont. from Page 238) 



personal guidance to strengthen their 
fatih, and to encourage them in works 
of righteousness, in being faithful and 
observing and keeping the command- 
ments which God has given unto them; 
it is the privilege of every man and 
woman to receive revelation to this 
end, hut no further. The moment an 
individual rise> up, assuming the right 
to control and to dictate, or to sit 
in judgment on his brethren, especially 
upon those who preside, he should he 
promptly checked, or discord, division, 
and confusion will he the result. Every 
spirit; the moment that such a feeling 
presents itself to them they should re- 
buke it. as it is in direct antagonism 
to the order of the Priesthood, and 



to the spirit and genius of this work. 
We can accept nothing as authorita- 
tive but that which comes directly 
through the appointed channel, the 
constituted organizations of the Priest- 
hood, which is the channel that God 
has appointed through which to make 
known His mind and will to the world 
(Joseph Smith, Gospel Doctrine. 51. 
52). 

All faithful Latter-day Saints have 
the assurance that the Church is led 
today as in earlier years by revelation 
from God. The history of the Church 
furnishes to all who will look for it 
ample evidence of the fact of contin- 
uous revelation within the Church. 



// we would find the same excuse tor the faults of others as zee find 
for our own, it would he a different world, and a better one. 



244 



TE KARERE 



WHO ARE THE LEADERS OF TOMORROW? 

By PETER N. BRYERS (Waihou Branch) 



GREETINGS to my Brothers, 
Sisters and Friends. I was very 
fortunate to attend Hui Tau and hear 
the speeches that were given. Several 
speakers gave talks on the First Prin- 
ciples of the Gospel, also talks were 
given as to what the Church will be 
doing tomorrow. From these speeches, 
however, a question has entered my 
mind, and that is. "Who are the 
leaders of tomorrow?'' Tho e leaders 
or officers leading the Church today 
will not always be here to guide and 
direct us. I believe that our children 
today will be the leaders of tomorrow. 
Are we as parents, teaching our child- 
ren the principles of our Church? Xow 
let us go back to the time when the 
Gospel was taught to us, when we 
were children. Are we giving our 
children the same opportunity to hear 
the Gospel, and be taught as we re- 
ceived it? 

Let us teach our children the good 
things taught to us by our parents, 
Brothers and Sisters — teach them the 
things that will make them the leaders 
of tomorrow. The teachings which are 
taught by this Church are wonderful, 
in that it takes care of our spiritual 
welfare as well as temporal welfare. 
This Church, "The Church of Jesus 
Christ of Latter-day Saints," is ask- 
ing the leaders of the future to do 
good, to learn something good, that 
will strengthen our education, that we 
might have strong testimonies of the 
Gospel. Lei us teach by example, for 
example is the greatest of teachers. 
Now the questions might he asked. 
Where is the best place tO teach Our 

children? Is it in hotels, or at race 
tracks v No! It's in the schools, homes 
and chapels. These are .-ill good places 
i"r teaching our children. The children 
that are going to be the leaders "f to 
morrow are going to school, living at 
home and attending * hnrch meetings 
in chapels. 



May we teach our children the word 
of wisdom and the principles of the 
Gospel. They watch us as parents, we 
are idles, and they are the best of 
imitators, so we should refrain from 
doing the work of the devil and keep 
the commandments and principles of 
our Church. Jesus Christ taught His 
Apostles and Disciples during His mis- 
sion on earth, not only by word of 
mouth, but by example. We should 
try and follow in the footsteps of the 
Great Exemplifier. 

In the homes of the Saints the 
children should be taught something 
that will benefit them. If we parents 
study the Gospel and always seek to 
do what is right, I believe our children 
will want to do the work of the Lord. 
Proverbs 22:6, "Train up a child in 
the way he should go and when he is 
old he will not depart from it." Also 
Latter-day Revelation tells us, "And 
again, inasmuch as parents have child- 
ren in Zion, or in any of her stakes 
which are organized, that teach them 
not to understand the doctrine of re- 
pentance, faith in Christ the Son of the 
living God, and of baptism and the gift 
of the Holy Ghost by the laying on 
of hands, when eight years old. the 
sin be upon the heads of the parents. 
For this shall be a law unto the in- 
habitants of Zion, or in any of her 
stake- ( or missions) which are organ- 
ized. My Brothers and Sisters an 1 
friends, be faithful and learn these 
good things. And not only learn them, 
bul show in our example unto our 
children that it is important to live 
and practice what we preach. I know- 
that if we do this our children will 
receive many blessings from (>\n\. 
Therefore, have strength in this work 
at all times. 'K:a Ngawari." Maj 
the I ord Mess \ ,,,, all and ma\ 1 le 
give ns strength to live exemplary 
lives as parents, is my prayer in the 
name of [esus Christ. Amen. 



July, 1952 



245 



Tin* Sunday School in 
New Zealand 



By ELDER GARTH LOW, Mission S.S. Superintendent 



IN travelling through your districts 
I find there there is a need for 
teachers which I am certain you will 
agree upon. In connection with this we 
find a beautifully outlined training 
course presented by the Church. This 
then is the advancement thai I am 
talking about. Yes, we will use this 
plan to develop teachers as well as 
leaders. Under this plan we have here 
in the office all the ne< ess 
that will be needed to carry on this 

plan. The hooks that will be needed to 

teach this course are "The Master's 
Art." "Teaching as the Direction of 

Activities," and "The Teacher's Hand- 
hook.'* These books are attractively 
outlined to give the most possible help 
in the correct method of teaching. In 

teaching our Brothers and Sisters in 
the Gospel come to life in the 
all learn much sooner by seeing as 
well as hearing, SO we must learn just 
how to teach in the most effective way. 
There are many things that will help 
US t" teach. Some of these are flannel 
boards, groove hoards, black hoards. 
maps, charts, sand tables, and film 
projectors. With these we can make 
the Gospel live and come to life in ihe 
lives of our Brothers and Sisters. 
These Teachers' Aids and how to use 
them are most effectively taught in the 
Teachers' Training Course. We need 
to know how to teach the Gospel. 
Why? So that when we are given a 
job to do we will know that we are 
doing all that is in our power to fill 
that position. When we are given such 
jobs the Lord has put die responsi- 
bility on our heads to see that II is 
Gospel is taught \'<»w if we fail, then 
we will he punished for a Sin of Omis- 
sion, in not giving the Gospel to others 
in the way that they will he able to 

246 



understand it. I, as well as you. no 
matter what calling we are given, will 
come under this. It is a threat and 
marvellous blessing to be vailed 10 
teach in the name of the Lord, and we 
should try to do all we can to show 
our willingness in complying with the 
besl prescribed means in filling these 
callings. 

From each one of your branches the 
Super! ntendency will choose those 

whom they think would make good 
teachers. These will have to he ap- 
proved by the Branch President; if he 

- lie may reject or select others 
if he (in righteousness) thinks .his 
should he done. After the prospective 

teachers have been chosen, diey will 
be introduced to tin- S.S. Superin- 
tendence, who will in turn congratu- 
late them, tell them of their important 
calling, and will also instruct them of 
the time and place of the clas^ they 
will attend. 

To teach these classes you will need 
to select a teacher, or at least a 
person who will conscientiously study 
to teach. One important fact to re- 
member to he able to teach is we must 

Lrst have a good knowledge and 
understanding of the lesson that we 

wish to put over. In other words, we 

must read over our lesson several 

tunes and gather all the material that 
is available on the subject. If we will 
then prayerfully enter the work the 
Lord will help us. 

You Branch Presidents ... write DOW 
for the necessary hooks to teach such 
classes. Let's get on the hall, for when 
you have finished this six months' 
cour>e. on the approval »f die Branch 

(Continued on Paj?e 249) 
TE KARERE 






World Wide 
Church 



Elder LeGrand Richards, Presiding 
Bishop of the Church since April, 
1938, has been accorded a signal honor 
in being made a member of the Coun- 
cil of the Twelve which his illustrious 
father, George F. Richards, headed as 
President until his death, August 8, 
1950. Elder Le Grand Richards, how- 
ever, fills the vacancy caused by the 
death of Elder Joseph F. Merrill, 
February 3, 1952. LeGrand Richards, 
both by inheritance and by preparation, 
has earned his advancement in the 
councils of the Church. 

Bishop Joseph L. Wirthlin, for four- 
teen years a member of the Presiding 
Bishopric serving under Bishop Le- 
Grand Richards, has been recognized, 
through his appointment as Presiding 
Bishop of the Church, for his long, 
faithful, able service to the people of 
the Church. 




BISHOP WIRTHLIN 
Bishop Thorpe H. Isaacson, form- 
erly second i ounsellor in the Presid- 
lishopric, was advanced to firsl 
counsellor to serve with I > i ^l i< >i > 
Wirthlin. Bishop [saacson was ap- 



pointed as second counsellor Decem- 
ber 14, 1946, and was formally sus- 
tained and set apart for this position 
in April, 1947. Through continual 
preparation Bishop Isaacson prepared 
himself for the positions which he has 
been chosen to fill. 

Bishop Carl //'. Buehner, newly ap- 
pointed second counsellor to ihe Pre- 
siding Bishop, was born in Germany 
and came to this country as a two- 
year-old child, when his parents, ex- 
periencing the spirit of gathering, left 
their home to come to this new land. 
During this past year he has travelled 
widely through the stakes of the 
Church, where his knowledge and 
vision of the programme and its opera- 
tion have called forth an enthusiastic 
response to his own vigorous testi- 
mony of this work. 




ELDER RICHARDS 

These men, sustained in general con- 
ference April 6, 1952, have earned the 

support of the Church, who will fol- 
low their inspired leadership in the 
ways of truth and righteousness. 



crrx heart tioelh good like a medicine 



Solomoi 



July, 1952 



I.. II. Prophets H|»<»;ik 



(')L Spirit 9&>rU 



Where Is The Spirit World? 



WHEN you lay down this tabern- 
acle, where are you going? Into 

the spiritual world . . . Where is the 
spirit world? It is right here. Do the 
good and evil spirit 

they do. Do they both inhabit one 
kingdom? Yes, they do. Do they go 
to the sun? No. Do they go beyond 
the boundaries of the organized earth? 
No, they do not. They are brought 
forth upon this earth, for the express 
purpose of inhabiting it to all eternity. 
Where else are you going? No where 
else, only as you may he permitted. 
Brigham Young, II > 3 :369, lune 22, 
1856. 

Is the spirit world here? It is not 
beyond the sun. but is on this earth 
that was organized for the people that 
have lived and that do and will live 
upon it. Xo other people can have it, 
and we can have no other kingdom 
until we are prepared to inhabit this 
eternallv.— Brigham Young, JD 3:372, 
June 22, 1856. 

It reads that the spirit goes to God 

who gave it. Let me render this Scrip- 
ture a little plainer: When the spirits 
leave their bodies they are in the -pres- 
ence of our Father and God; they are 
prepared then to see, hear and under- 
stand spiritual things. But where is the 
spirit world? It is incorporated within 
this celestial system. Can you see it 
with your natural eyes? Xo. Can you 
■ irits in this room? Xo. Suppose 
the Lord should touch your eyes that 
you might see, could you then see the 
spirits? Yi-v, a- plainly as you now 
see bodies, as did the servant of Elijah. 
If the Lord would permit it, and it 
was His will that it should be done, 
you could see the spirits that have 



departed from this world as plainly 
as yon imw -re bodies with your 
natural eyes. Brigham Young, JD 
3:368, June 22, 1856. 

What Beings Exist 
In The Spirit World? 

The righteous and the wicked all go 
to the same world of spirits until the 
resurrection. 

The great misery of departed spirits 

in the world of spirits, where they go 
after death, is to know' that they Came 
short of the glory that other- enjoy 
and that they might have enjoyed 
themselves, and they are their own 
accusers. — fbseph Smith lr., DHC 
5:425. June 11, 1843. 

There is a place called "Paradise," 

to which the spirits of the dead go, 
awaiting the resurrection, and their 
reunion with the body . . . This Para- 
dise, however, is not the place for 
resurrected bodies, but for departed 
spirits. -John Taylor, (iii, p. 39, pub- 
lished August. 1852. 

Xo spirit of Saint or sinner, of the 
Prophet or him that kills the Prophet, 
is prepared for their final state: All 
pas.s through the veil from this 
and go into the world of spirits : and 
there they dwell, waiting for their 
final destiny. -Brigham Young, JD 
6:294, August 15, 1852, 

The spirits of all men. as soon as 
they depart from this mortal body, 
whether they an- -< od or evil . . . are 
taken home to that God who gave them 
life, where there is a separation, a 
partial judgment, and the spirit^ of 
those who are righteous are received 



248 



TE KARERE 



into a slate of happiness which is 
called Paradise, a state of rest, a state 
of peace, where they expand in wis- 
dom, where they have respite from all 
their troubles, and where care and 
sorrow do not annoy. The wicked, on 
the contrary, have not part nor portion 
in the Spirit of the Lord, and they are 
cast into outer darkness, being led 
captive, because of their own iniquity, 
by the evil one. And in this space 
between death and the resurrection of 
the body, the two classes of souls re- 
main, in happiness or in misery, until 
the time which is appointed of God 
that the dead shall come forth and 
be reunited, both soul and body, and 
be brought to stand before God, and 
be judged according to their works. 



This is the final judgment. — Joseph 
Smith Jr., IE 7:621-622, June. 1844. 

Flesh and blood cannot go there 
(the spirit world), but flesh and bones, 
quickened by the Spirit of God, can. 
—Joseph Smith Jr., DHC 6:52, 
October 9, 1843. 

The spirits in the eternal world are 
like the spirits in this world. When 
those who have come into this world 
and received tabernacles, then died 
and again have risen and received 
glorified bodies, they will have an 
ascendency over the spirits who have 
received no bodies, or kept not their 
first estate, like the devil. — Joseph 
Smith Jr., DHC 5:403, May 21, 1843. 



^S 



THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN N.Z. (Continued from Page 246) 



Presidents, we have a teacher's certifi- 
cate to be given each teacher that has 
finished his or her class and learned 
how to teach as the Lord wished it. 
Let's use these certificates, let's learn 
how to teach the Gospel, let's live the 
Gospel. 

In the previous remarks that I have 
made I spoke of certain teachers' aids, 
which consist of flannel boards, black 
boards, charts, maps, sand tables, 
groove boards, and film projectors. 
These should be brought into our Sun- 
day School work immediately to help 
us to teach our Brothers and Sisters 
the Gospel. You are thinking now just 
how arc- we going t<> gel these things. 
That is an easy question 1<> answer. 
Firsl the groove boards we arc now 
making .is a mission project, with 
Brother Bill Jones as carpenter, the 
res i v on < mi make either in \ our dis- 
tricts or in your brandies as a district 
or branch project. The only thing 
that \ mi i .in'i make is the film pr< i 
jector and the films. These we will buj 

as a Mission and sell them "lit to 

\iiu at a cost of about two i" four 
pounds. I I will i rj t> i gh e j i >u > 



definite price later.) The films we 
will circulate all over the Mission at 
a small rental fee. 

Xext, we wish, under the direction 
of the Church authorities, to develop 
Sunday School libraries to keep the 
teaching aids in. These need to be kept 
in a place that will be safe, so they 
will not be destroyed by children or 
careless Use. You will undoubtedly 
want more information on these things, 
SO to cover both the making of the 
teachers' aids and the development of 
the libraries we have i book called 
"The Librarians Guide Book." lei's 
get these in our S.S. now. If we are 
going to go on to Eternal Progression 
as the Lord wants us to, we must learn 
and advance; we cannot stand still. 
We either <m> on. or go hack let's live 
the Gbspel, let's progress. May the 
I .onl bless y< m in your work'. 

SACRAMENT GEM 



Help US, O Lord, to realize 
The great atoning sacrifice; 

The gift of Thy Beloved S<»n, 
The Prince of Life the Holv Our 



July, 1952 



• M 



Greetings To All Our Genealogy Workers 

JOSEPH HAY, Mission Genealogy Supervisor 




MURIEL C. HAY, 
are 



along 

been 
this 



ELDER JOSEPH HAY 

E commend all who arc endeav- 
ouring to push this great work 
and urge those who have not 
awakned to the importance of 
work to at least prepare their 
own Family Group Sheets. 

It is very important for every in- 
dividual in the Church to realize that 
all ordinances performed during his or 
her lite should he properly recorded 
in the family record as well as in 
the Church records. Every ordinance 
in the Gospel is important enough to 
record, so please fill in your personal 
record sheets as well as your family 
group .sheet and your pedigree sheet. 
These sheets can he had from the 
Mission Office for twopence per .sheet, 

unless yon have paid the Genealogical 
>men1 of one pound, then this 
entitles yon to sheets free of cost. We 
also have on hand the 1950 Handbooks 
which are priced at 2/6 per copy. We 
UTge you to have one of these in your 
possession; you will find it a great 
help. 

Family Records prepared for Temple 
work must be true, complete and in 
order. This is required of us by the 

Lord. '"And as are the records on die 
earth in relation to your dead, which 



Secretary 

truly made out. so also are the 

records ,n Heaven" (D.& C 128:14), 
and again, "Whatsoever you do not re- 
cord on earth shall not he recorded in 

Heaven; for out of the I ks shall 

your dead he judged." So. brothers 
and si>ters, please try to understand 
just how important this work is. I),, 
not bar the door to progression on 
your departed dead; they probably are 
waiting to progress, but, because of 
your neglect to have this work done 

for them be prow, the door is locked 

DON'T FAIL THEM — DO IT 
NOW! They need yon and yon need 
them. Procrastination is the thief of 
time. Von never know what the mor- 
row may bring forth. 




SISTER MURIEL HAY 

We would suggest that where there 
is no Sunday School Genealogical 
class being held, that these branches 
study in your Genealogical meetings 

the hook by Archibald Bennett, "Prov- 
ing Your Pedigree." Along with this 
hook is the Teacher's Supplement 

These hooks ran be had from the 
Mis.;, , n Office as soon as they arrive 
from /ion. I am sure these will prove 

very interesting and helpful. 

We remain, your co-workers in this 
wonderful work. — Joseph II ax. Muriel 
( . Hay. 



250 



TE KARERE 



HERE AND THERE IN THE MISSION 



FOUR more elders go home to their 
families in Zion, after receiving- 
honourable releases from the New 
Zealand Mission President, Sidney [. 
Ottley. It was with tears in our eyes 
and sadness in our hearts that we bid 
farewell to these humble elders. Yet 
with a song on our lips of "God Be 
With You Till We Meet Again," we 
saw the Aorangi pull away from its 
berth on its return trip to Vancouver. 

Elder Gleave arrived in the mission 
field on the fourth day of April, 1950, 
and was assigned to labour in the 
Hauraki District, where he laboured 
until President Young saw a need for 
his services in the Otago District. 
After a short term of a year in the 
Otago District he was assigned to be 
District President of the Hauraki Dis- 
trict, where he laboured until his two- 
year mission in New Zealand was 
completed. Elder Gleave wants to at- 
tend University upon arriving home, if 
circumstances will permit. 

Elder L. D. Johnson, after arriving 
in New Zealand April 4, 1950, was 
assigned to labour in the Poverty Bay 
District. After labouring there for a 
short time he was called to labour in 
the Waikato District, where he con- 
tinued to labour on the College Farm 
and among the people in Hamilton 
until his release on May 20th. 



ELDER JOHNSON 
July, 1952 



Elder Glen Nielson, upon arriving 
in New Zealand, was called by Presi- 
dent Young to labour in the Auckland 
District, where he continued to iabour 
until his assistance was needed in the 
Otago District. The people in the 
Otago District learned to love Elder 
Nielson and respect him as a good and 
humble missionary. Later Elder Niel- 
son was again called to labour in the 
North Island — in the Bay of Plenty 
District where he continued to labour 
until he had completed his mission as 
an emissary of God to the people of 
New Zealand. 

Elder B. P. Sloan, upon his arrival 
in Wellington Harbour, was assigned 
to labour in the W'airou District. Later 
the Otago District was his field of 
labour where, upon the frigid slopes of 
Christchurch, he knocked on doors and 
preached the Restored Gospel to those 
who would listen. Eventually Tumuaki 
Ottley became aware of Elder Sloan's 
talents and called him to Auckland 
to labour as Te Karcrc Editor where 
he continued to labour until his re- 
tease. 

Most of those ciders, upon there 
arrival home, will be thinking of 
settling down with a little wahine, or 
else going to school to further their 
education. 




ELDER NIELSON 




Sock Ye Learning 



WHY IS IT DARK BY NIGHT AND LIGHT BY DAY? 



TO us it seems that the sun travel. 
round the earth, rising in the 
morning, mounting high, and then 
sinking helow the horizon. We know, 
of course, that it is not the sun mov- 
ing, but the earth turning, and it is 
this spinning of the earth on its axis 
which makes the night dark and the 
day light. It" you place a candle on 
the table and, a few inches away, an 
orange, yon will sec that the .side of 
the orange turned away from the 
candle is plunged into shadow, [f 
there is no other light in the room 
but the candle, the shadow will he so 
deep that it seems black; the onlj 
light it receives will he reflected from 
other objects. 



The earth is like that orange, and 
the candle represents the Mm, lint, 
in the case of the earth, there is 
nothing to reflect light on to tin- side 

turned away from the miii, except. 
Sometimes, the moon. As the earth 
turns, the side which has been dark 
slowly becomes light, while that which 
has been enjoying sunshine turns away 
and becomes dark. 

We do not feel this movement of 
the earth, although we are rushing 
around at a speed varying from over 

1,000 miles per hour at the equator to 
halt this figure nearer the poles. The 
atmosphere moves round with us, and 
our smallness, compared with the huge 
mass of the earth, makes the movement 
unnoticeable. 



WHAT IS AN ECLIPSE? 



AX eclipse is the cutting off of the 
light from one heavenly body by 
another. Thus, when the moon passes 
between the earth and the sun in the 
same plane, we have an eclipse of the 
sun. Usually, of course, the moon is 
not in the same place and there is 
only a partial eclipse, or no eclipse at 
all.' 

An eclipse of the moon occurs when 
the earth passes between that body and 
the sun. The earth cuts off all the 
light which usually .shines on the 
moon to make it bright. An eclipse 
of the moon must take place at full 
moon, hut. of course, not at every 
moon. When a light falls from a 
considerable distance away upon an 
object, two shadows are cast, a deep 
shadow and one that is more Faint. 
These are called the umbra and the 
penumbra. It is when a body comes 
only into the penumhra that the eclipse 
is known as "partial." 



A total eclip>e of the BUn is a 

wonderful and awe-inspiring sight. 

During the seconds of total eclipse, 
when the sun appears as a completely 
hlack circle in a darkened sky. great 
flames of fire can be seen leaping from 
the sun's surface. All the stars, usually 
invisible during the day, appear in 
the sky. 

When the apex of the heavy shadow, 
or umbra, falls outside the earth, we 
see "an annular eclipse." This shows 
the sun as a hlack circle with a hriidit 
rim all round. During recent years 
special interest has heen attached to 
eclipses because of the opportunity they 
give of observing the passage of light 
from stars near the sun. These ray- 
are found to he bent, pre.sumahly by 
the gravity of the sun, so that the 
stars appear in one place, when, actu- 
ally, they are in another nearby 
position. 



252 



TE KARERE 



WHAT IS LIGHT? 



^HAT a glorious sense is sight ! 
What an avenue into the vast 
universe we dwell in ! Without this 
sense the word light would have no 
meaning. Light enters our eyes and 
we see things. Seeing is a mental 
operation, light is the physical thing 
that causes the mental sensation. This 
step between the physical cause and 
the mental effect is one of those mys- 
teries which are as truly real as 
they are incapable of comprehension. 
But we can, and we do, understand 
a great deal about light on its physical 
side. 

The thing we see may be itself 
the source of the light, that is, it may 
be self-luminous, like the sun or the 
filament of an electric lamp ; or it may 
be seen by the light which it reflects 
or diffuses from a luminous source — 
and, evidently, we see most things by 
such borrowed light. The atoms of the 
luminous body are the real points of 
origin of the light; or, more exactly, 
it is the vibrations of the electrons in 
those atoms which start the light go- 
ing. We know very exactly at what 
speed it travels, namely, 186,000 miles 
per second in empty space, but rather 
slower through matter, such as glass 
or water. But what is it that travels? 
There are two possible answers. Light 
may be due to tiny particles, or cor- 
puscles as Newton called them. In that 
case, how gentle they must be to im- 
press the eye with vision, and yet not 
injure it despite their immense speed. 
Or light may be waves, or a steady 
flow of waves, like waves on the sea, 



or better, like ripples on a pond. Light 
certainly behaves just like waves, of 
very short wavelength (the wave- 
length means the distance from the 
crest of one wave to the crest of an- 
other), anything from 1/40000 to 
1/80000 of an inch, according to the 
colour. And as it spreads out from 
its source, it becomes fainter and 
fainter as the waves travel through 
the subtle medium called the ether. 
But, curious as it may seem, light 
can also behave as if it were particles 
shot out, and just as capable of doing 
things at the end of a journey of 
millions of miles as when they started. 
The photo-electric cell, so important 
in television, is an example of the 
action of the light-corpuscles. Some 
day we may understand clearly how- 
light can be both wave and particle 
at the same time. 

When light shines on a non-luminous 
body, it stimulates the atoms in a way 
depending on their nature. Some atoms 
absorb all the light that falls upon 
them — these are "black" bodies, while 
other atoms absorb some of the light, 
but allow the rest to be reflected. Thus 
we "see" and recognise the different 
parts of an object, with their charac- 
teristic luminous qualities depending 
on the way they have treated the light 
that illuminated them. The light finally 
reaches the eye, producing on the re- 
tina an image of the object viewed. 
How the light affects the minut< 
and cones in the retina and starts a 
nervous impulse is a question we must 
pass over. 




We should /-<• lienienl in our judgment because often the mistakes of 
others would have been ours had we had the opportunity to make them! 



July, 1952 



253 



! Featuring the Districts ! 



KING COUNTRY DISTRICT 

The "Baby of the Mission" making 
its report for July. With the total 
membership at present being 378, plus 
8 new converts, the King Country Dis- 
trict, separated from the WaikatO Dis- 
trict on February 20th, \ { )A i ). has made 
>low hut steady progress. The scat- 
tered nature of the four Branches 
uiake> concerted action difficult, hut 
with the unity characteristic of the 
Saints everywhere, some success has 
been achieved both by the efforts .if 

tlu local brethren and through the 
consistent proselyting of the elders. 
Eight new members were baptized 
(hiring the last few weeks and die sum 
of £158/5/4 was raised for the Mission 
Building Fund during die campaign. 
Welfare work has been strongly advo- 
cated and considerable work has been 
done during the last few years, but 
greater efforts are anticipated this 
coming season. Several plots of ground 
have been made available to die Dis- 
trict for raising crops, and the District 
Welfare Officer, Brother E. Archer, 
our work director, has the work well 
in hand. 

We welcome into our District Elder 
I). R. Remington from Salt Lake and 
Elder L. E. Savage from Hyrum, 
Utah, both of whom are recent arrivals 
in the Dominion. The District monthly 
leaflet. "The K.C. Messenger," keeps 
the Saints informed of District news 
and advocates "a Te Karere in every 
home." Special messages from the Dis- 
trict President and from District 
Auxiliary Officers are broadcast 
through this medium. Every effort ; - 
made to have a "Messenger" sent to 
every home in the District so that 
even the more isolated Saints are made 
to feel that they are part of this 
greatest organization on earth, The 
Church of Jesus ("hrist of Latter-day 
Saints. 



Wishing success to Te Karere and 
sending love to all X.X. Saints from 
the Kin- Country District Office. 



Statistics: 

Blessings I during current quarter > : 
Merle Florence Osborne — Taumaru- 
nui {'ranch. 

Shona Anne Pere, Matakowhai 
Branch. 

Baptisms : 

Elsie Ouida Anderson. Matakowhai 
Branch. 

Joy Margaret Jane Hooper. Otoro- 
hanga Branch. 

Melva June Hooper. Otorohanga 
Branch. 

Ngaio Lamia Hooper. Otorohanga 
Branch. 

Ruby Adela Catherine Martin 
Hooper. Otorohanga Branch. 
Muiora Aroha Maihi. Matakowhai 
Branch. 

Kathleen Margaret Thompson Mar- 
tin, Otorohanga Branch. 
Margaret McDonald Martin. Otoro- 
hanga Branch. 

Walash Te Kare Maru. Matakowhai 
Branch. 

Jewel Ngohooro Paki, Matakowhai 
Branch. 

Te Hauoterangi Kriha Reti, Mata- 
kowhai Branch. 

Aloma Wanihi Tangihaere, Aria 
Branch. 

Ordinations: 
Teachers — Maukitearoha Patuhuri 
Whatu Apiti; Ropiah Niho Rangia- 

wha : Matakowhai Branch. 
Deacons— Te Rira Te Arawaka Te 
Huia, Mahoenui Branch; Edith 
Awhitu Reti Williams, Matakowhai 
I 'ranch. 

TE KARERE 






BAY OF PLENTY 
DISTRICT NEWS 
By Messines Rogers 

We do with regret announce the 
death of another good wife and 
mother, Sister Jane Borrell Ormsby. 
Brother Tom Ormsby, we grieve with 
you in your loss and extend to you 
and your family our sincere sympathy. 

On May 17th, at Rotorua, a District 
Officers' meeting was held to form 
plans for the winter activities of the 
district in general. As a result Branch 
Conferences will be held in each of the 
five Branches during the next three 
months. Also a District Conference at 
Wairoa, including a Gold and Green 
Ball are planned for September. 

Funds for our "College Missionary 
Drive" were assessed each Branch 
per population and taxed accord- 
ingly. The sum total will support 
our allotment of three missionaries. 
As a representative of this District 
we have Brother Richard Taylor 
Ormsby of the Wairoa Branch, who 
left early in May to labour for an 
indefinite period as a college mission- 
ary. In support of the call by Tumuaki 
Ottley for good men to work on the 
college I would quote Nephi 1 :7, "I 
will go and do the things which the 
Lord hath commanded, for I know 
that the Lord giveth no command- 
ments unto the children of men, save 
He shall prepare a way for them that 
they may accomplish the things which 
He commandeth them." 



Statistical Report: 

Children given names and blessings: 
Clara Ann Popham, Wairoa Branch, 
by Taylor Onnsby, Mareh 13th ; Val- 
mai Ohia, Tauranga, by Richard 
Ormsby, March 13th ; Pauline Patricia 
Whaiapu, Tauranga, by Floyd Orms- 
by, March 23rd; Garth (arlyon, Wai- 

tao, by Elder Vernon Lowry, April 5; 
Wancn Onnsby. Waitao, by Elder 
Vernon Lowry, April 5; George For- 



sythe, Tauranga. by Elder J. K. Mar- 
shall, April 20th; Melody Ormsby, 
Tauranga, by Elder J. K. Marshall, 
April 20th ; Annette Xova, Tauranga, 
by Elder Vernon Lowry. April 20th ; 
Ella Emere Waerea, Rotorua, by 
Elder Vernon Lowry, May 4th ; 
Thomas Howard Huriwaka, Matata, 
by Elder Richard Ahmu, May 9th ; 
Margaret Rahiri, Matata, by Elder 
Richard Ahmu, May 9th ; Kataraina 
Lena, Mangakino, by Elder Glen L. 
Nielsen, May 11th: Janet Rogers, 
Mangakino, bv Elder Glen L. Nielsen, 
May 11th. 

Baptisms and Confirmations : Pua- 
wananga, Rotorua, by Elder V. Lowry, 
May 4th ; Tunis Tekaki Huriwaka, 
Matata, baptized by Elder Richard 
Ahmu and confirmed by Elder V. 
Lowry, May 9th. 

Death : Jane Borrell Ormsby. Tau- 
ranga, on April 17th, 1952. 



WAIRARAPA DISTRICT 

REPORT 
By Sister Margaret Haeata 

With the passing of Hui Tau the 
district organizations are functioning 
most satisfactorily. Changes have 
taken place in the District Board Sun- 
day Schools and Sis. Rawinia Haeata 
is the new President for the District 
Primaries. 

The Mother's Day programme was 
held on May 10th, and conducted by 
the Primary qf the Te Harihana 
Branch. May 31st saw Te Harihana 
Primary again in the limelight spon- 
soring a hangi and concert. The pro- 
ceeds From these went to buj materials 
for the Primary. The Hiona Primary 

lias been reorganized, and the new 

presidency being Sis. Eiinepa Haeata, 
president; Sis. Waioirirangi Haeata, 

1st counsellor.; Sis. Leila Thompson. 

2nd counsellor; Sis. Rawinia Mason, 
secretary. Elder King has been visiting 
the district and Elders l\ Fo* and 
Braithwaitc are tracting in the Pahia- 



July, 1952 



255 



tua area of this district. With the Hui 
Pariha in view in September the mem- 
bers in the district are looking Forward 

already for that time when we will all 
meet again in His name. 

BAY OF ISLANDS DISTRICT 
By George Randell 

The Ba\ of Islands has had a \er\ 
.spiritual awakening since the return of 
the Temple group from Hawaii. Bro. 
Hirini T. Hermaia. who was the lasl 
of the group to return, i- being 
escrted t" each branch by the District 
Whakapapa Committee. Each meeting 
has been well patronized and a spirit- 
ual feast has been enjoyed. At Wai- 
mamaku a special invitation was sent 
to the non members, and great was 
their joy to hear the travel talks ex- 
perienced by this group. Of course, a 
chance to explain the principles of the 
Gospel presented itself at this time, and 
was taken advantage of. At Waihou 
the party was expanded by the pres- 
ence of Sister Rangi Davis. Saints 
from I'takura, Kaikohe, Ngawha and 
Okaihau were there in such a great 
number that the holding capacity of 
the little chapel was taxed. 

Our District President, Elder Men- 
denhall, and his companion, Elder 
Burbank, are two busy hodies. What 
with trading, holding cottage meet- 
ings, visiting the different Branches, 
helping out with the timber trucks and 
doing the district books they are sure 
on the beam. 

Brother Ivan Joyce, manager of the 
Church's timber mill operating here, 
reports that owing to wet wintery con- 
ditions the weekly output of timber 
would be considerably reduced. 

WAIRAU DISTRICT NEWS 
By Puhanga Hemi 

Greetings from sunny Nelson, Mad- 
sen and Wairau Branches. Our Branch 
here in Xelson has seen the Sunday 
School reorganized with Bro. Hohua 



\\ arena as superintendent, Bro. Lionel 
Hippolite as 1st counsellor and Sister 
Sema Kohe as 2nd counsellor, and we 

are all behind them to help them in 
their new positions wherever we can. 

The elders went t<> Grovetown to 
officiate at the wedding of Sister Ken- 
ella Gladiola Piki McDonald to Mr. 

Paul Constantine Jameson Baker. The 

service was held in the Grovetown 

1 [all, w ith Elder Chamberlain, i ur 
District President, performing the 
ceremony. 

Tumuaki Ottley and Sister Ottley 
visited Xelson Branch and stayed at 
the home of Bro. B. Hippolite. where 
live meetings were held in one even- 
ing, much to the enjoyment of the 
Saints here. After a visit next morn- 
ing to the hospital to see Grandma 
Wetekia Elkington, who is having a 
wee rest, Tumuaki and Sister Ottley 
left for Grovetown, Blenheim, where 
they stayed at the home of the Simp- 
son family. Bro. Simpson, who is ;i 
recent convert, hails from Kansas, 
Ellis County, so Tumuaki and Sister 
Ottley were really at home. Elder 
Low, who has been through on the 
M.I. A. work, stayed in Grovetown 
with the local elders. Tumuaki and the 
elders held an elders' meeting together 
before the new Dodge, with Tumuaki 
at the wheel, left for Dunedin. 

Kia ora. 



HAWKES BAY DISTRICT 
By James L. Southon 

Our District President, Elder James 
H. King, has been in the Wairarapa 
District visiting the Saints and arrang- 
ing for a Hui Pariha to be held there 
sometimes in September (a date not 
vet fixed). 

Mutual s throughout Hawkes Bay 
are functioning exceptionally well this 
season. This, I think, is largely due 
to the untiring efforts of the M.I. A. 
district offivers and Elder King. They 
have really been on the ball. 



256 



TE KARERE 



It is announced here that the Danne- 
virke Branch Gold and Green Ball 
will be held on Friday, August 15th, 
1952. Other branches are not yet cer- 
tain of their dates so will announce 
them later. 

Adult Aaronic Priesthood Activities: 
I regret to state here that these 
organizations are not as active and as 
strong as in the past two months. It 
is urged, therefore, that they be up 
and doing. 

Missionary System : 

Although little interest was shown 
in the past, all efforts are now being 
made to get this all-important means 
of contacting Saints going in full 
force. Most of the Branch Presidents 
are co-operating 100%. 

Hui Pekas: 

Heretaunga Branch held their Hui 
Peka on the night of May 18th, 1952, 
where the Relief Society organization 
was reorganized, with Sister Nancy 
Randell called as President, because 
Brother John Carroll was called out 
to the Mission Field and who happened 
to be Sunday School Superintendent 
in the Heretaunga Branch. Brother 
Roy Kaman was set apart to take his 
place as Superintendent. Korongata 
Branch also had their Hui Peka a 
week after Heretaunga's with Elder 
J. H. King presiding and Brother S. 
Crawford, Branch President, conduct- 
ing. The presidents and secretaries of 
each auxaliary organization were 
called up to give reports of their ac- 
tivities. These were very interesting 
and inspiring. The branch secretary 
then submitted a full list of all officers 
and teachers within the branch for 
sustaining. On the whole, the Hui was 
very disappointing as many of the 
officers and teachers did not attend this 
gathering, 

TE HAUKE BRANCH 
Your reporter has had the very 

humble privilege of attending Sunday 
service at Te I [auke and to see al firsl 



hand the wonderful improvements 
made on the Marae and Church Build- 
ings. It is evident that through the un- 
tiring efforts of Elders Brown and 
DeWitt, together with that of Sister 
Brown, they were able to bring the 
Saints together in a united drive to 
straighten their buildings and marae 
up. Inside the old Church house beau- 
tiful changes have been effected. These 
things must be seen to be believed. 
Most, if not all, of the artistic colour- 
ings to the windows and paintings out- 
side as well as inside of the build'ngs 
have been made by the hand of Elder 
DeWitt, who really is a genius. 

Te Hauke intends to have the hon- 
our of holding a District Hui Pariha, 
scheduled to be held sometime in Aug- 
ust of this year, subject to approval 
by President Ottley. 

Special Nezi's — It is with sadness 
in my heart that I announce here, 
on behalf of the Saints of Heretaunga 
Branch, the passing from this earth 
life of our Brother Jury Thompson 
who has been very, very ill in the past. 
Many thanks to those who have as- 
sisted with their faith and prayers that 
our Heavenly Father might relieve 
him of his sufferings and take Brother 
Jury to His bosom. Our heartfelt sym- 
pathy goes out to Brother and Sister 
Thompson in this hour of their sorrow. 

OTAGO DISTRICT REPORT 
By Noelene Thompson 

Queen's Birthday week-end has been 
around again and brought with it our 
Semi-Annual DistnYt Conference, this 
time being held in the southern-most 
Branch in the Mission— Dunedin. 

The U.S.A. Hall. Moray Place, was 
the secene <>t" this gathering which 
lasted three days. Si \ in thirty Satur- 
day evening marked the opening with 
.1 social and dance with some interest- 
ing variations. 

Tin- old phrase "When the Saints 
Mrrt tlir Heavens Weep" apath] de- 
scribes Sunday, the 1st June. Attend- 



July, 1952 



257 



ance of many people was hindered by 
adverse weather, which was sad for 
them, for they missed that little spirit- 
ual boost which came out of all the 
sessions. Before the congregation the 
theme of the conference was, "And 
when we obtain any blessings from 
God, it is by Obedience to that law 
upon which it is predicted (D. & C. 
130:21). Many and varied were the 
inspiring talks built around these 
truths that day. 

Much appreciated was the instruc- 
tion and advice given to Sunday 
School and M.I. A. workers by Elder 
G. R. Low. Monday, of course, was 
recreation day. Basketball and volley 
ball were the main sports of the day. 
No serious casualties reported but 
quite a number of limbs and joints 
are still recovering from stiffness. 

All available talent was brought out 
during the evening at the concluding- 
concert programme arranged by the 
M.I. A. Much of the friendly, happy 
spirit which prevailed that week-end 
had its origin in President and Sister 
Ottley. We are already looking for- 
ward to their presence at our next 
Hui in October. 

Ordination to Priesthood — William E. 
J. Perriton, Teacher, Timaru Branch, 
June 1st, 1952. 



WELLINGTON DISTRICT 
REPORT 

By Karanga Wineera 

A welcome is extended to Elder and 
Sister Lewis from the District. Re- 
cently Elder Lewis has been sustained 
as Branch President of the Porirua 
Branch. Sister Tini Wineera has been 
appointed as the new District Y. W.- 
M.I. A. President following the release 
of Sister Christina Enoka under the 
supervision of the District M.I. A. A 
Golden Gleaner Spring Festival was 
held June 4th at Porirua where pre- 
sentation of Golden Gleaner certifi- 
cates and pins were awarded to Sis- 
ters Te Wira Wineera, Tiripa Katene 
and Karanga Wineera by Brother 
Kerehoma Katene. Congratulations are 
extended to these three girls on be- 
half of the District on their achieve- 
ments in gaining these honours. 

A farewell evening was held at Pori- 
rua by the Branch M.I. A. for Sister 
Waitohi Elkington who is joining her 
husband at the College in Hamilton. 

In previous years Wellington Dis- 
trict extended as far as Palmerston 
North until recently we have been 
divided into Manawatu and Wellington 
Districts. To Levin and Palmerston 
North we say Kia Kaha in your new 
District. 




The man who once most zviscly said, "Be sure you're rich, then go 
ahead," may well have added this, to wit, "Be sure you're rich before you 
quit." 



258 



TE KARERE 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO I TE HITORI TE HAHI 

(Essentials 
in Church History) 

WAHANGA TUATORU 

Translated bv George R. Hall 




Te Kororia Mo Hiona 

NA nga poropiti o nehera nga 
korero mo Hiona me tona koro- 
ria. Na Ihaia te whakaaturanga, "Kei 
nga ra whakamutunga" ka puta mai 
te ture i Hiona, ko te kupu a te 
Ariki, ka puta mai i Hiruharama, a 
taua ra e patupatua ai nga hoari hei 
hea parau. Tirohia tenei korero kei 
ta Ihaia poropititanga, Ihaia 2:1-4. 

Te Whakatapunga i Te Oneone 
Hei Tuupga Mo Te Temepara 

I te torn o nga ra o Akuhata ka 
tutaki a Hohepa Mete ratou ko Oriwa 
Kautere, ko Hirini Rikitona, ko Eru- 
era Pateriti, ko Wiremu W. Wherepe, 
ko Matini Harihi, ko Hohepa Ko 
(Coe). I tutaki te hunga hei ki te 
taha uru o te whare whakawa o 
Independence : a i konei ka tu ratou 
ka tapae i tenei wahi, ka whakatapu 
hei tuunga mo te temepara tino nui o 
nga ra whakamutunga. I panuitia te 
87 o nga Waiata a Rawiri. I pa aroha 
ai ki te manawa, no te mea kua tohu- 
ngia ka tu ki konei te Whare o te 
Ariki, ka hikitia ake ki runga i te Pa 
Tapu o Hiona; kua korerotia noatia 
ake c nga poropiti o Nehera, ka puta 
ain i konei te ture, ki nga pito katoa 
o te ao. Tirohia nga karaipiture mo 
tenei wahi korero kei a Ihaia 60:12-22. 
Tirohia ano hoki, kei te Pukapuka 
a Moromona ( Etera 13). 



Te Hui Tuatahi Ki Hiona 

I te wha o nga ra o Akuhata 1831, 
ka tu te hui tuatahi ki konei, ki te 
whenua o Hiona, i tu ki te kainga o 
Hohua Ruihi (Joshua Lewis) i te 
taone o Ka ; ko te nui nga o te maha 

te hunga i tae mai no te peka o 
Korewira, hnihui katoa ratou e toru- 
tekau matahi nga wairua i tae mai. I 
roto i a ratou te Wairua o te Ariki, 
a i ki hoki ratou i te Hari i te koa. 

1 kauwhau a Hirini Rikitona ki a 
ratou ; naana nga kupu akiaki, kia 
tupou atu ratou kia ngohengohe ki nga 
homaitanga o te rangi, kia whakato- 
ngia ai ratou (te Hunga-tapu) ki 
runga i tenei wahi kua whakapapatu- 
putia nei ratou ki roto i nga rohe katoa 

Hiona. Ko Hipa Pitahana te mea i 
whakapapakutia iho, i tona whaka- 
aturanga i tona hara : a no tenei wa 
ka whakahokia ano ia ki tona iuranga 
i tangohia ra i a ia, na te katoa ia i 
pooti kia hoki ano ki tona hiranga. 

1 kauwhau a Hohepa Mete ki te hui, 
naana nga korero akiaki i te iwi kia 
man kia ratou kawenata, i kawenata 
tia ai e ratou ki te Ariki, kia tuturu ai 
mo ratou nga manaakitanga kua oti ra 
te whakaari mai. 

He Whakahau, He Kupu Taunaha 

I te whitu o nga ra o te akuhata 
nei, ka mate a Pare Nfaiti ( Polly 
Knight I te wahine a I [ohepa \ :■. 
pakeke : i te pangia tonutia ia e Lana 



July, 1952 



259 



mate i te wa o te heke ki te Uru. I 
taua ra ano ka huaki mai he whaka 
kitenga ki te Poropiti, he homai i te 
kupu whakahau, kia mau te Hunga 
Tapu ki nga Ture i homai e te Atua 
mo ratou me te homai ano hoki i te 
kupu taunaha, ka manaakitia ratou i 
na mau ratou ki nga Lure. Ko nga 
kupu tohutohu enei i homai mo ratou. 
Ko ratou katoa i heke mai nei ki tend 
whenua pupuri ai i nga ture a te Atua, 
ka whiwhi ki nga manaakitanga kua 
taunahatia mo ratou ; ko te hunga i 
ora tonu, ka riro mo ratou te whenua, 
ko te hunga i mate, ka whakanga ratou 
i roto i nga whare nohanga o te Matua 
i te rangi. I te ra o te Ariki, me okioki 
ratou i a ratou mahi katoa ; me hui atu 
ki te whare karakia, ki te kai i te 
hapa o te hakarameta, ki ie whakaatu 
ano hoki i o ratou hara. (Ako-Kawe 
59.) 

Te Hokinga ki Katirana 
(Kirtland) 

Kua rite noa atu me hoki a Hohepa 
Mete me etahi o nga kaumatua, a i te 
iwa o Akuhata ka huri o ratou aroaro 
ka hoki ki Kaatirana ; i ahu ratou, i 
whai haere tonu i te awa o Mihiuri 
whakamau atu te haere ko Hato Rui 
(St. Louis). Ka tae ki te toru o nga 
ra e haere ana, ka tutaki ratou ki nga 
kino e mohio nuitia ana, o runga i 
enei wai. I tetahi wahi e kiia ana ko 
te piko i Makerewaina (McLlwaine) 
ka kite a Wiremu W. Wherepe i te 
Rewera e tau ana i runga i tona Kaha 
whakangaro, e eke ana i runga i nga 
wai he kite matakite te kite nei. I te 
aonga ake, i te ata ka whakakitea mai 
ki te Poropiti kia Hohepa, ie whaka- 
kitenga i puta ra kia Wiremu Wherepe. 
Nga Kino i Runga o Ni?a Wai 

A nei te whakaatu kia Hohepa Mete 
mo nga kino kua tau ki runga o nga 
wai. "Nana ko ahau ko te Ariki, i te 
timatanga, nga wai i manaakitia, otira 
ie nei nga ra o muri nei i kangaia nga 
wai e te mangai o taku pononga o 
Hoani. No reira ka puta mai te ra, 
e kore e ora nga kikokiko, ina ratou 
haere i runga i nga wai." "Ko ahau 



ko te Ariki, Kua oti ienei ie whakarite, 
a kei runga ano te kai-whakangaro i 
to reira mata, a e kore ahau e whaka- 
kore i tenei whakaritenga." (Ako- 
Kawe 61 : 17-19.) I korerotia ano hoki, 
"kua takoto te tikanga e kore te 
tangata e ora i runga o nga wai, ko 
te hunga ngakau ma anake. I tohu- 
tohungia ai nga Kaumatua kia whai 
ma nga huarahi o uta, kaua ma runga 
i nga wai o nga awa, kei tupono 
tanuku o ratou whakapono. 

Ko Te Putake o Te 
Mihona Ki Hiona 

No te 27 o nga ra o Akuhata ka 
tae a Hohepa Mete, a Oriwa Kautere 
me Hirini Rikitona ki Katirana ; kua 
tae noa atu etahi o nga Kaumatua, 
kua tutuki ta ratou mihona. Ko te 
Mihona ki Mihiuri he haere kia kite 
a kanohi i te whenua, kia mohio a 
ngakau ki te takoto o te wahi hei 
tuunga mo te "Pa o Hiona." Ki te 
tapae, ki te whakatapu ano hoki i te 
Kaupapa i tohia hei "Papatupu mo nga 
Hunga Tapu ; ki te kowhiti, ki ie iohu, 
ki te whakatapu ano hoki i te oneone 
hei tuunga mo te temepara, kua kiia 
nei ki a hangaia. Ko te hunga i noho 
atu i Hiona, kaore i hoki ki Katirana, 
i whakawhiwhia ki nga ture hei ara- 
taki, hei tiaki, hei kawana i a ratou, 
i te hunga ano hoki tera e whakaeke 
mai a taihoa, ki runga i tenei wahi kua 
tongia nei, a e kore e taea te whaka- 
ngaueue." 

UPOKO 17 

TE PUKAPUKA O NGA TURE 

— TE WHAAKITENGA I NGA 

KORORIA. TE RAPUNGA I A 

HAIRAMA 1831-1832. 

Te Konohi o Nga Hunga Tapu 
Kia Matau Ratou Ki Hiona 

He hapati te ra nei ko te 28 o nga 
ra o Akuhata, te aonga ke o te ra o 
to ratou taenga mai, i a rtaou kua 
hoki mai nei i Hiona ara Mihiuri. I 
te tuponotanga he Ra Hapati, ka hui- 



260 



TE KARERE 



hui ratou ki te karakia. He karakia 
i whiwhi ai ratou ki te wairua, i 
ripoata ai hoki ratou i a ratou mahi. 
Ko te take tuatahi o te hui, "ko te 
Tapaenga i a Oriwa Kautere hei To- 
hunga Nui, i runga i te reo o te Hahi 
i te whakahau a te Atua, i raro i nga 
ringaringa o Hirini Rikitona." E ai 
te whakaatu ake a nga tuhituhinga. 
I Mihiuri ke a Hirini Kautere i ie 
hui o Hune, i te wa i Tapaea ai te 
tuatahitanga o nga Tohunga Nui. I te 
mea kua kaha rawa te konohi o nga 
hunga tapu kia whakamohiotia ratou 
ki nga tikanga kua whakatatutia mo 
Hiona, te hoko kia riro mai te whenua, 
e totohu ai te mauri o te iwi ki te 
papatuputanga o te oneone, ka ara te 
ua o te Poropiti ki te Ariki, ka tono 
kia tukua iho te kupu, hei marama- 
tanga mo te iwi, mo tenei take. I te 
kowhatanga iho o te rangi mo ctahi 
take, ko tenei tetahi i horahia mai ; "A 
he pono hoki taku e mea tu nei kia 
koutou, i te mea ahau kia whakaaturia 
e ahau kia koutou taku e pai ai, nana 
ka whakaaturia e ahau kia koutou, 
ehara i te mea i runga i te whakahau, 
no te mea he tokomaha e kore nei e 
mea ki te pupuri i aku whakahaunga. 
Otira ki a ia e pupuri ana i aku whaka- 
haunga, ka hoatu e ahau nga mea 
ngaro o toku kingitanga, a ka ai aua 
mea he puna wai ora i roto i a ia, e 
pupu ake ana ki te orangatonutanga. 
A, nana, ko ia tenei ko ta te Ariki, 
to koutou Atua e pai ai mo tana 
Hunga Tapu, kia huihui ratou ki te 
whenua o Hiona, ehara i te mea kia 
hohoro, kei ai he ngangau, e puta ai 
he mate uruta. Nana ko te whenua o 
Hiona, e puritia ana e ahau e te Ariki, 
i roto i oku ake ringaringa. He aha 
koa, e hoatu ana e ahau, e te Ariki ki 
a Iliha nga mea a Hiha. No reira, e 
hiahia ana ahau, te Ariki kia hoko 
i nga whenua, kia kore ai c rani i 
te ao, kia whai tika ai koutou ki 
runga ki te ao kia kore ai niton e 
whakaohongia ki te riri. X" tr mea e 
mahi ana a Hatana i roto i o ratou 
ngakau kia riri kia koutou, ki te wha- 
kaheke tOtO. No reira ma te lioko 
anake, ma te whakaheke toto ranei, ka 



riro i a koutou te whenua o Hiona, ki 
te kore kahore he wahi mo koutou. A 
mehemea he mea hoko nana, ka mana- 
akitia koutou. A mehemea ma te wha- 
kaheke toto, i te mea e whakakahoretia 
ana te whakaheke toto, na, kei runga 
i a koutou o koutou hoa riri, a ka 
whiua koutou i tetahi pa ki tetahi pa, 
a i tetahi whare karakia i tetahi whare 
karakia, a he torutoru noa ake e whi- 
whi ki te whenua. Ko ahau, ko te 
Ariki, e riri ana ki te hunga hara ; e 
pupuri ana ahau i toku Wairua i te 
hunga o te Ao. (Ako-Kawe 63:22-32.) 
Me waiho ake etahi o nga korero i 
taka i tenei wa me titiro i te hitori nui. 
Ko enei e mahue ake ; "Ko te takanga 
atu ki waho o Etera Puutu." "Ko te 
hokonga mai a Oriwa Kautere raua ko 
Wiremu W. Wherepe i te mihini pere- 
hi," hei ta i nga pukapuka, i nga tuhi- 
tuhinga maha a te hahi. Ko tenei te 
wa i puta ai te Nupepa. "Evening and 
Morning Star." Te nupepa tuatahi a 
te Hahi. "Te Whakatikatikanga i te 
whakamaoritanga o te paipera i ie reo 
pakeha" ; ko te wa tena i noho ai a 
Hohepa Mete ki Hairama. "Ko te 
tuunga o te hui i karangatia mo Nowe- 
ma" ; i te mea e noho haere ana a 
Oriwa Kautere raua ko Hoani \\ ni- 
tima ki Mihiuri, ki te whakatikatika 
i etahi o nga mahi i reira, no reira ka 
karangatia tenei hui mo Nowema te 
tahi, 1831 ; hei whiriwhiri i etahi take 
i mua o to raua haerenga. Ko te wha- 
katikatikanga mo te panui i nga ture 
me nga whakahaunga iirohia Ako- 
Kawe. Wahanga tuatahi, kei konei 
nga whakamaramatanga mo tenei take. 

Kupu Apiti i Nga Whakakitenga 

I oti te korero kia perehitia kia 
tekau mano nga kape <> te pukapuka 
o nga "Ture me nga Whakahau," otira 
no muri mai no te tahi o nga ra ■ > Mei 
L832 ka kiia kia hoki iho ki te torn 
mano kape. I whai korero a Hohepa 
Mete ki Ie huilniiii.ua i nga Kauniatua. 
i mea ia. "i run.ua i te mea kua whaka- 
taungia e te Ariki. Ana manaakitanga 
nunui ki ruu.ua i a ratOU i Tana hoinai- 
tanga i nga out me nga wliakakiten.ua. 



July, 1952 



261 



e tono ana ia ki tenei hui kia whakaatu 
mai he aha ta ratou kupu whakaari 
ara kupu hinengaro mo enei ture kua 
homai nei, a ka panuitia ki te ao katoa 
i enei \va tata tonu. I muri i te panui- 
tanga o nga rarangi whakapuare, he 
niaha o nga tuakana-teina i tu ki te 
korero i o ratou whakaaro, he pono 
nga whakakitenga ka taia nei ki roto 
i te Pukapuka o nga Ture me nga 
Whakahau. E rua nga ra, ka oti nga 
take maha ka hiki te hui. 

Nga Whakahe i Puta Mo Nga 
Whakakitenga Nei 

Kaore i te katoa te tautopo awhina 
i nga ture i whakaaria nei. Ko Wiremu 
E. Makarini, katahi ano ka uru mai ki 
roto i te hahi, ko ia i patai ki te tika 
ki te pewhea ranei o te tangi o nga 
kupu o roto i aua whakakitenga. No 
tenei ka anga ano te aroaro o te Poro- 
piti ki te Ariki, a ko tenei te whakautu 
mai "Tena whiriwhiria mai tetahi ture 
i roto i te pukapuka, ae ra, ko te mea 
iti rawa o nga ture, katahi ka whaka- 
rite ko te tangata matau i roto i a 
koutou. Ae ra mehemea kei roto i a 



koutou tetahi e ahei ana ki te hanga i 
tetahi ture kia rite ki tena, katahi ka 
tika ta koutou ki, kaore koutou i mohio 
ki te pono o aua mea. Otira ki te 
kahore koutou e ahei ki te mahi i 
tetahi kia rite ki taua ture, na kei roto 
koutou i te whakaheanga ki te mea ka 
kore tonu koutou e whakaatu kei te 
pono aua mea : Xo te mea kei te mohio 
tonu koutou kahore he pohehetanga i 
roto i aua mea, a ko nga mea tika e 
heke iho ana i runga, i te Matua o nga 
whakamarama. (Ako-Kawe 67:6-9.) 

Te Huriripatanga o Wiremu 
E Makerini 

Ko Wiremu E Makerini te tangata 
tino whai whakaaro o ratou, a nana 
te whakaae me te ki ka taea, e ia te 
tuhi kia rite ki ta Hohepa Mete e 
korero nei. Otira i kite katoa nga 
Kaumatua i rokohanga i taua wa, i te 
korenga e taea e Makerini te tuhi kia 
rite ki ta te poropiti i tuhi ai, a i tu 
katoa ratou ki te whakaatu hinengaro, 
ki te korero i to ratou whakapono ki 
enei mea, hei whakaatu ma ratou ki te 
ao katoa. 




MAKE ROOM 

"The world stands out on cither side, 
No wider than tJie heart is -wide. 
Above the world is stretched the sky. 
No higher than the soul is high. 

The heart can push the sea or land 
Farther away on either hand; 
The soul can split the sky in tico 
And let the face of God shine through. 

But East and West will pinch the heart 
That cannot keep them pushed apart ; 
And he whose soul is flat, the sky 
Will care in on him by and by." 



262 



TE KARERE 



MUTUAL IMPROVEMENT ASSOCIATION 
(N.Z. Mission) 

WE HAVE at the Mission Office a full selection of 
the M.I. A. Manuals for the year 1952. These are avail- 
able on a "cash with order" basis to anyone in the Mission. 
These Manuals contain wonderful lessons on prac- 
tical Gospel themes that are not only ideal for their 
original purpose, but also as reference books for all those 
studying- the Gospel. 

Indeed, many of the Mutual Manuals are reprinted 
and sold as much-sought-after books and at a much higher 
price. 

Missionaries, Branch Officers, M.I. A. members . . . 
all those who are called upon to speak about the Gospel, 
select the books you want from the following list and 
send your order in early for prompt attention : — 

LESSON BOOKS (for Special Interest) 1/- 

LIFE AND MISSION OF THE MASTER 2/6 

THE LATTER-DAY SAINT FAMILY IN 

MODERN SOCIETY 2/6 

THE WORLD AROUND US 2/6 

(for M Men and Gleaners) 
TRUTH FOR OUR DAY 

Part one: Our Challenge Today. 
Part two : Joseph Smith, a Choice Seer. 
Part three : Important Questions for 

Our Day 7/6 

(for Junior M Men and Gleaners) 

WE LIVE, by Ralph W. Hardy 3/6 

(for Explorers) 
EIGHT DISCUSSIONS ON THE 13th 

ARTICLE OF FAITH 3/6 

(for Mia Maids) 

MAKE YOUR LIFE A SONG 4/- 

PERSONALITY 4/- 

Other Manuals: — 

N.Z. M.I.A. HANDBOOK 2/- 

N.Z. OFFICERS' AND TEACHERS' MANUAL 2/- 
CLASS TEACHERS' HANDBOOKS 

SPECIAL INTEREST 1/6 

M MEN AND GLEANERS 1 6 

BEE HIVE GIRLS 4/6 

DANCE MANUALS 5 6 

(Festivals, Square, Round Dances) 

PLAY PRODUCTION PRIMER 4/6 

SPEECH HANDBOOK— 

You, Too, Can Learn to Speak 5/6 

And for year-round reading; and entertainmenl re 
member THE IMPROVEMENT YAW . . . the ollieial 
Church magazine for all the family . . . Subscription 23 
per year; 12/- six months. 



THE TEST 



The test of a man is the fight he makes. 
The grit that he doily shows, 

The -way he stands on his feet and takes 

Fate's numerous bumps and blozvs. 
. I coward can smile when there's naught to fear, 

When nothing his progress bars. 
But it takes a man to stand up and cheer 

While some other fellow stars. 
It isn't the inciory after all, 

Hut the fight tliat a brother makes. 
The man, who, driven against the wall, 

Still stands up erect and takes 
Hie blows of fate with his head held high; 

Bleeding, and bruised and pale. 
He's the man who'll win in the by and by, 

For lie isn't afraid to fail. 
ft's the bumps you get and the jolts you get 

And the shocks that your courage stands. 
The hours of sorrow and vain regret. 

The prize that escapes your hands 
That test your mettle and prove your worth. 

ft isn't the blows you deal, 
But the blows you take on this good old earth 

That shows if your stuff is real. 



— Anonymous. 




IE >n:s si:\<.i;it J ^. g 




:- 7 4 



r 8 4 



7 9 41 



10 41 



11 



AUGUST :: 1952 



MONTHLY MAGAZINE OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 

r i • 1 1 1 1 1 § 1 1 § 1 1 * i * i * i - 1 * i • i • i • | • i > 




The Faithful Few 



// hen the meeting's called to order. 

And you look around the room. 

You're sure to see some faces that 

From out the shadows loom; 

7 hey are always at the meeting, and 

They stay until it's through — 

The ones that I would mention arc 

The always faithful few. 

They fill the many offices, and 

Arc always on the spot. 

No matter what the weather, though 

It may be awful hot; 

It may be dark and rainy. 

But they are tried and true — 

The ones you can rely on are 

The always faithful few. 

There are lots of worthy members 

Who will come when in the mood. 

When everything's convenient, 

And do a little good; 

They're a factor in the meeting. 

And are necessary, too — 

Bui the ones who never fail us are 

'The always faithful few. 

ft it were not for these faithful. 

Whose shoulders at the wheel 

Keep the institution moving 

Without a halt or reel. 

What would be the fate of meetings 

Where we claim so much to do? 

They surely would be failures but for 

The always faithful few. 

— Unknown. 



ABOUT THE COVER: The Elders' Booth at the Wai- 

kato Winter Show. Left to right Elder LeRoy Houchen, 

Elder Robert B. Powell, and Elder George E. Richens. 



Te K.arere 



(ESTABLISHED 1907) 



Volume 46 



Number 8 



August, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley 

Joseph Hay 

George R. Biesinger 

James A. Larsen 

Albert J. Wiley 

David T. Briggs 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) 



Tumuaki Mihana 

. . Kaunihera Tuatahi 

Kaunihera Tuarua 

Hekeretari o te Mihana 

Mission Recorder 

Etita 

. . Kaiwhakamaori 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 



"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 



Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; §1 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 



(Printed for transmission in New Zealand 



a registered newspaper.) 



&entents 



Editorial: 

The Youtn ot the Church 

Special Features: 

Polynesia . . 

Evidence Within 

Why Religion? 

S.-iyinj; No 

Look Up to the Spires 

The Voice of the Waiksto 

Truth Foundation of All Religion 

Church Features: 

The President's Page 

The Women's Corner . . 

Greetings to All Oi.r Genealogy Workei 
The Sunday School in New Zealand 

World Wide Church 

I.. D. Prophet s Speak 
Here and There in the Mission: 
Hen a ad There i>> ' he Mission 

featuring the Districts 

Tekihana Maori: 

N^.-i Pon-Tokomanaw« o Roto I Te Him 



280 
281 



•J lis 

269 










1 THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE I 

He Kupu Aroha \ 

t 

By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 



LMOST daily someone asks, 
"What is your attitude about 
this? Do you consider this wrong? 
Does the Church approve of such and 
such ? Is this a violation of the Word 
of Wisdom ? 

Sometimes the questioner really 
wishes to know and Heaven bless that 
person who diligently seeks to know 
the Truth that he may follow therein. 

But there are those (and their pur- 
pose is all too obvious) who ask the 
question to see if the answer will be 
the same as that given by the last 
Elder he asked it of. 

I recall, a long time ago, a person 
coming to me for a recommend to 
receive a Patriarchal Blessing. It is 
a part of the Bishop's duty to issue 
such recommends and assure himself 
that the applicant for such a blessing 
is worthy to receive it. To be a Judge 
in Israel is not an easy task. The 
person had been a member of the 
Church for many years and had lived 
rather actively in the centre stakes of 
the Church, so, naturally, was asked 
if she had not had a patriarchal bless- 
ing before. "Oh, yes," she replied, "I 
have had two of them." "Then why 
do you wish another?" I asked. The 
reply, "Oh, I just wanted to see how 
they compare." 

I had heard that woman often bear 
testimony to the fact that she knew 
that signs followed the believers, that 
God does speak to His people through 



the mouth of His annointed, by the 
power of the Holy Ghost; and still 
she would tempt God by double check- 
ing to see if the spirit spoke the same 
thing twice. Needless to say, she did 
not desire a third blessing after I 
talked with her for a little while. 

The Lord did say, "Try me and 
see," but He was speaking to those 
who have not been able to testify to 
the Truthfulness of a principle. When 
one has tried and has received testi- 
mony to his soul that God does keep 
His promises, it is rank mockery to 
either refuse to obey or to put Him 
to a second test to justify one's own 
weakness in failing to obey the law. 

The Word of Wisdom is in almost 
as plain English as it could be written ; 
the Law of Tithing is plain and very 
explicit ; the Law of Chastity is so 
plainly written in ancient and modern 
scripture that one could hardly err in 
understanding it. 

The Law of Brotherly Love is so 
universally understood and abused that 
anyone with a heart could appreciate 
it's beauty of meaning; the Law of 
Strong Language is "Swear Not At 
All" ; the Law of Honesty makes the 
answer forever plain that Covetuous- 
ness (gambling, cheating, stealing) are 
not condoned by any righteous, Christ- 
ian body and that the Lord will not 
look with any degree of allowance 
upon the disregard of these funda- 
mentals. 

(Continued on Page 277) 



268 



TE KARERE 



i 



% 



By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 



^^^^^^•^^^^^^^>^^^'' =: 0» = i> 



^1 



ISN'T it a fine thing that with each 
new day we have a chance to make 
a new beginning? No matter where 
we live or what kind of work we are 
engaged in, we all have our moments 
of discouragements. This usually hap- 
pens when a person is fatigued, or 
physically under par. Little troubles 
become big ones and things seem to 
pile up. Then is the time when Satan 
gets in a few good strokes and whis- 
pers, "Is it all worth while ? Why not 
let someone else do it?" 

It takes courage to say, "Get behind 
me, Satan, I have a job to do; it is 
my responsibility." 

The Lord has said, "I give unto 
men weakness that they may be 
humble." It is in moments of discour- 
agement that our weaknesses show up 
most and when we finally recognize 
them, we do become humble and real- 
ize that there is a power from which 
we can draw new strength and energy 
to carry on. 

So when the body and brain lias 
rested and a new day has dawned, we 
arise with new hope and say — 



"We'll brush up our courage aud try 
again. 
And polish our armour of pride; 
Though failure may seem to stalk at 
our heels, 
We'll know at least that we've 
tried." 

To the Relief Society Sisters, we 
here at the Mission Home wish to 
sincerely thank all who have contri- 
buted blankets, sheets, pillow cases and 
towels to replenish our supply. They 
have come in at a time when they were 
needed most. May the Lord bless you 
for your kindness. 

Our thanks and gratefulness is ex- 
tended also to those who have sent 
food. Tinned fruit, fresh apples and 
vegetables come in the mission car 
whenever it comes in from the dis- 
tricts. We don't know how the people 
know what we need, but when our 
potato bag gets nearly empty we find 
another one on the back porch. Our 
table accommodates twelve people and 
it is full most of the time with a 
couple eating in the kitchen. Now and 
again we have to put an extention on 
the dining room table. 

We are also grateful to the people 
who take care of us when we are 

travelling in the districts. \o people 

could be more hospitable and kind than 
VOU have been. 



August, 1952 



269 



cTrcm ike (bclilei* s J)en 



The Youth of the Church 



THE Lord, through the Prophet 
Joseph Smith, said unto the people 
of His Church, "Remember the worth 
of souls is great in the sight of God ; 
for, behold, the Lord your Redeemer 
suffered death in the flesh ; wherefore 
He suffered the pain of all men, that 
all men might repent and come unto 
Him. And He hath risen again from 
the dead, that He might bring all men 
unto Him, on conditions of repentance. 
And how great is His joy in the soul 
that repenteth ! Wherefore you are 
called to cry repentance unto this 
people. And if it so be that you should 
labour all your days in crying re- 
pentance unto this people and bring, 
save it be one soul unto me, how great 
shall be your joy with Him in the 
Kingdom of my Father. And now, if 
your joy will be great with one soul 
that you have brought unto me into 
the Kingdom of my Father, how great 
will be your joy if you should bring 
many souls unto me." 

There are many souls, young people 
inside the Church, who have little or 
no testimony of the truthfulness of 
the Gospel. There are also many young 
people outside the Church who are 
looking for the truth concerning the 
purpose of their existence here on 
earth and where after death. Also the 
way and means whereby they might 
get the best out of life. How can these 
young people find the truth concerning 
the Gospel of Jesus Christ? Can they 
obtain a testimony through merely go- 
ing to Church on Sunday and listening 
to the talks and speeches given there? 
No, although going to Church on 
Sunday is very necessary, they must 
learn the principles of the Gospel and 
put them into practice in their daily 
lives. Only through this means can a 
person gain a personal and lasting- 
testimony. 



It is our duty as members of the 
Church- to help our children to gain 
a testimony of the truth of this Latter- 
Day Work. They do not come into the 
world with this testimony ; they must 
be cultivated and converted. One of 
the things President Grant taught in 
connection with this is : He said he 
and his wife knew the multiplication 
tables and knew them very well, but 
not one of their children was horn 
with a knowledge of the multiplication 
tables. He said so also is it the case 
concerning the Gospel of Jesus Christ. 

We must teach our children the 
Gospel and help them to live it so 
that a testimony might come to them. 
Then that knowledge and testimony 
will help them throughout the years 
of their life in warding off sin and 
temptation. 

Recreation is one of the devices 
whereby we can teach our young 
people to love the Gospel of Jesus 
Christ. Good, wholesome, Latter-Day 
Saint recreation can and will influence 
our young people to live righteous 
lives. Good, wholesome amusements are 
pleasing in the sight of God when they 
are indulged in, at the proper time 
and places. "There is a time for all 
things. A time to laugh and a time 
to mourn, and a time to dance (Eccles. 
3:4). 

Elder Mark E. Peterson of the 
Council of the Twelve said in one of 
his talks, delivered at an M.I. A. Con- 
ference : "When we think of recrea- 
tion, we must accept propositions as 
being facts. First of all, "Men are 
that they might have joy" (11 Nephi 
2:25). Second, recreation is one of 
the means by which we obtain joy. 
Third, our young people are going 
to participate in some form of recrea- 
tion, good or bad, whether or not we 
co-operate with them. And fourth, you 
and I and every other worker in this 



2-r* 



TE KARERE 



Church have opportunity and the privi- 
lege of helping our young people to 
choose the right kind of recreation. 

Many of our young people have not 
learned to provide for their own en- 
joyment, so they naturally seek after 
the ready-made recreation. Many and 
varied are the amusements provided 
by the men of the world. And the men 
that run these places of amusement 
are not necessarily concerned with the 
Spiritual Welfare of these young 
people. They are merely interested in 
getting monetary gain, for themselves. 

The Church has provided a plan of 
Mutual Improvement for our young 



people. It is a very good plan, use it 
as a means of crying repentance unto 
them, and help them to gain a testi- 
mony of the Gospel so that when they 
get out in the world on their own they 
will choose the type of company and 
environment that will be uplifting and 
edifying for the Spiritual side of life 
as well as physical. We as missionaries 
from Zion, officers in the Mission or 
older members in the Mission who 
have gained testimonies of the Gospel 
are standing at the crossroads and it 
is our duty to guide this youth along 
the right path. And remember the 
worth of a soul is great in the sight 
of God. 



leneurec 



fyeUen $L 



■eaners 




These three Golden Gleaners, of the Porirua Branch, photographed with 
their mothers, were honoured at a special evening sponsored by the 
Branch, the awards being presented by the ex-Braich President, Kere- 
homa Katcne. A specially trained group of Primary girls provided a 
very colourful floor show, the music and supper being of a very high 
standard. The girls are, from left to right: Karanga Wineera, Tiripa 
Katene and Vera Wineera, and they continue to be very active in the 
activities of both Branch and District. 



August, 1952 



POLYNESIA 

A Branch of the House of Israel 
By KAMATUA TIKI-NUIRAWA 



(The Migrations) 

I WOULD also like to show another 
interesting thing in Heyerdahl's 
statement : "I was no longer in doubt 
that the white chief-god, Sun-Tiki, 
who the Incas declared that their fore- 
fathers had driven out of Peru, was, 
etc., etc." Note how he mentioned that 
the Incas declared that their fore- 
fathers had driven the white people. 
Who were the Incas ? Were they not 
what we know as Lamanites ? Yes, 
they were Lamanites, telling of how 
their Lamanite fathers had fought 
against the whites, or Nephites, and 
had driven them to the sea. 

Now, my dear reader, stop and 
ponder these things in your minds. 
Here we have evidence in the "Book 
of Mormon" and "The House of 
Israel" of a white nation (Nephites) 
that were driven into the sea through 
warfare by a dark race (Lamanites). 
Then several years later that fact is 
substantiated by a book written by 
Thor Heyerdahl ("Kon Tiki"). Also, 
consider that the first migration into 
the Polynesian Islands is recorded in 
the "Book of Mormon" and other 
church books. Can the modern anthro- 
pologist of today point to such proof 
in his theory that the Polynesians 
came from Indonesia? I say no, he 
can't. Can he point to a race of white 
people from whom the Polynesians are 
descended? Again, I can but say no. 
All I can do is thank God for the light 
and revelation that has been poured 
out upon the Saints in these last days. 

Easter Island and America 

Refer back to what was mentioned 
in "House of Israel" about these 
whites or Nephites drifting from the 



Peruvian Coast to Tahiti, one of the 
closest island groups. Or it could have 
been at Easter Island. After a study 
of the culture of Tahiti and of Easter 
Island, I find that we have traces of 
still more migrations. I will try to 
point this out in a study of Easter 
Island first. This possibility is brought 
out in "Kon Tiki" as follows : "When 
we had completed half our voyage, we 
had sailed just the distance from Peru 
to Easter Island, and had the legend- 
ary island due south of us. We had 
left the land at a chance point in the 
middle of the coast of Peru, to imitate 
an average raft putting to sea. If we 
had left the land farther south nearer 
Kon Tiki's ruined city Tiahuanaco, 
we should have got the same wind, 
but a weaker current, both of which 
would have carried us in the direction 
of Easter Island." Thor Heyerdahl 
proved beyond doubt that it was pos- 
sible to travel from South America to 
Easter Island by raft and boat. Keep 
this in mind. We find in Werner 
Wolff's book, "Island of Death," a 
clue to the fact that they came from 
South America. He finds that in the 
traditions of the Easter Islanders that 
the first migrators came from the 
Rising Sun, and, further more, show 
it was not Tiki who landed on Easter 
Island but it was a "King Hotu- 
Matua." He came in two large double 
canoes with 300 followers, and remem- 
ber they came from the rising sun. 
This suggests the possibility of another 
migration distinct from Kon Tiki's, 
from South America into Polynesia. 

Peter Buck, in his "Vikings of the 
Sunrise," states that King Hotu-Matua 
and his followers came from the Mar- 
quesas Islands in search of a beach 
that he saw in a dream, and thusly 
found Easter Island. But Werner 



272 



TE KARERE 



Wolff gives a different view of it : 
"The island was discovered by King 
Hotu-Matua, who came from the land 
in the direction of the rising sun." 

And again : "The tradition here goes 
back before the advent of people on 
the island, and states that Hotu-Matua 
and his followers came from a group 
of islands lying towards the rising sun, 
and the name of the land was 'Marae- 
to-hou,' the literal meaning of which 
is, 'The Burial Place.' In this land 
the climate was so intensely hot that 
the people sometimes died from the 
effect of the heat, and at certain sea- 
sons plants and growing things were 
scorched and shrivelled up by the 
burning sun." 

• It seems most significant that the 
land of origin was lying towards the 
rising sun and at a point where the 
heat was so intense that people died 
from the effects. The legend tells that 
in searching for the new land the first 
immigrants were striving towards the 
setting sun. Tortured by the heat, these 
natives searched for the cold. Since 
their homeland brought death to them, 
they called the land of their origin 
"The Burial Place." But the name of 
death of the old homeland was re- 
placed by the name of life for their 
new home, suggested by the organs of 
birth and life — "Navel and Uterus." 
Leaving the "Land of the Burial 
Place," they were reborn in the new 
land — "Te Pito Te Henua" — "The 
Navel of the Deep." ("Island of 
Death," P.185.) 

Let us recall the story of the Easter 
Islanders : "They came from a land 
where the climate was intensely hot, 
so much so that the people sometimes 
died from the effects of he heat, and 
at certain seasons plants and growing 
things were scorched and shrivelled 
up by the burning sun." This land was 
found in the direction of the rising sun. 
Which land lies in the direction of the 
rising sun from Easter [sland? [s it 



not the Peruvian Coast of the South 
American Continent? Then the ques- 
tion of the "hot, dry land," from 
whence came the Easter Islanders, 
arises. Could this describe Peru or 
other parts of South America ? I will 
give you an extract from "City of the 
Sacred Well," by T. A. Williard, who 
is one of the oustanding authorities 
of Ancient America. This is an ex- 
tract from a story of the ancient in- 
habitance of South America : 

"Within the province of Mani the 
water-holes, the 'satenejas', were dry. 
For weeks no rain had fallen and the 
growing corn had withered and died. 
The people were perishing of hunger 
and thirst and Ah Pu!a Zia, over- 
lord of the province, saw something- 
must be done, and swiftly, or the tribe 
of Mani would be no more." 

Here we find evidence of a drought 
on the South American Continent. I 
am not saying that this is the one that 
the Easter Islanders fled from, but I 
am just saying that there are droughts 
there. Again, in "Ancient America 
and the Book of Mormon," by Milton 
R. Hunter and Thomas Stuart Fer- 
guson, we find more evidence of 
droughts in South America: 

"A difference is noted as to the 
nature of the 'third calamity' — Ixtlil- 
xochitl specifying earthquake and vol- 
canic eruption while the 'Book of Mor- 
mon' designate drought. Later it will 
be pointed out that the 'Book of Mor- 
mon' mentions certain animals, such 
as horses, which were in Ancient 
America in Jaredite and Nephite times. 
It should be observed in the foregoing 
extract from that record that the 
'Hacks' were eaten, the people dev« Hir- 
ing them 'until they had devoured 
them all.' Thus these droughts may 
have resulted in the extermination i^i 
certain animal species in Ancient 

America." 

I lere is an extract fr< 'in the 'T>< m ik 

(1 f Mormon," Ether 9:30, during the 



August, 1952 



273 



time of the Jaradites : "And it came 
to pass that there began to be a great 
dearth upon the land, and the inhabi- 
tants began to be destroyed exceeding 
fast because of the dearth for there 
was no rain upon the face of the 
earth." And again, in "City of the 
Sacred Well," Williard points out the 
use of the sacred well of the ancient 
May's and Aztec's civilizations. When 
a drought came upon the land all the 
people would gather to the Sacred 
Well, where a beautiful young girl 
would be sacrificed — thrown into the 
well to be the wife of the "Rain God," 
to appease him so that he would again 
bring to the people the rains. It is 
also a well-known fact that in the high 
plateaus of Peru that there are fre- 
quent droughts. We know that along 
the western slopes of Peru that it is 
covered with clouds for six months 
of the year but they only have a two- 
inch rainfall annually. 

I have shown you that the South 
American Continent suffered droughts, 
and that they seemed to be quite regu- 
lar in their occurrence. If the Easter 
Islanders claim they came from a land 
towards the "rising sun" where they 
were plagued with droughts, I can see 
no other place of their origin except 
South America, along the coast of 
Peru. The striking similarity between 
the huge stone carvings found in Easter 
Island and those found in Peru, around 
Lake Titicaca, only further proves that 
they came from Peru, bringing with 
them their culture, which reappears 
on Easter Island, Pitcairn Island and 
the Marquesas Islands. I will reserve 
further detail of the similarities of the 
two cultures — South America and 



Polynesia — for my forthcoming 
articles. Thor Heyerdahl showed us 
how these people migrated and these 
marked cultural affinities indicate that 
such a migration was carried on from 
Ancient America into Polynesia. Thus 
we gain insight into the true origin of 
the early Polynesian races. 

We can now trace two different 
migrations into Polynesia from South 
America, the first being that described 
in "Kon Tiki" which probably landed 
some where in Tahiti or in the Mar- 
quesas group, as is suggested in "Kon 
Tiki" : "Tiki," the old man said 
quietly, "He was both God and chief. 
It was Tiki who brought my ancestors 
to these islands where we live now. 
Before that we lived in a big country 
beyond the sea." This statement was 
made to Thor Heyerdahl by an old 
chief on one of the islands of the 
Marquesas group. Thus we can see 
that Tiki could have landed there first, 
while King Hotu-Matua (first migra- 
tor to Easter Island) landed at Easter 
Island. We can also see the reason 
why these people migrated into the 
Pacific. Kon Tiki left South America 
and turned his face to the sun because 
of warfare. And King Hotu-Matua 
and his followers left for reasons of 
drought and starvation in their home- 
land, and they also turned their gaze 
to the west into the islands of the 
Pacific. 

E Koutou e te iwi maori me titiro 
mai koutou ki tenei tuhituhinga na nga 
mea o koutou tupuna onamata. 

(To be continued.) 




274 



TE KARERE 



(ovidence l^ithln 

(PART TWO) 
By ELDER REECE L. GLINES 



^ 6 /\ ND other sheep I have, which 
■tsL are not of this fold ; them also 
I must bring, and they shall hear my 
voice ; and there shall be one fold, and 
one shepherd. (John 10:16.) This pas- 
sage Jesus quoted to the people of 
Palestine and is contained in the Gos- 
pel of John. Many diversified and mis- 
construed opinions have been promul- 
gated as to the meaning of this pas- 
sage. This, to us as Latter-Day Saints, 
is one of the most clear passages of 
scripture in this particular Gospel, be- 
cause we have the clear and undis- 
putable record of Christ's ministry to 
the Nephite people, which record is 
contained in what is known as the 
"American Gospel," comprising for the 
most part Chapters 8-28 of 3 Nephi. 
This Gospel is comparable to the four 
• Gospels which are contained in the 
New Testament. Let us, for a few 
lines, consider some of the more im- 
portant things which are contained 
therein. 

Before we reach the 8th Chapter of 
3 Nephi, we must consider just a few 
verses from Chapter 1 (3 Nephi 1 :4- 
21). The essence of these few verses 
is not lost through translation, and 
they give us the glorious details of the 
signs that came among the Nephites 
prior to the birth of the Saviour. If 
we will reminisce just a little bit we 
will be sure to bring the prophecies of 
Samuel, the Lamanite, to recollection. 
He prophesied that there would be no 
darkness for a "day and a night and 
a day. as if it were one day and there 
were no night." He also said that a 
new star should arise in the Heavens 
as a further sign of tin- birth of the 
Saviour. In 3 Nephi these things arc 
attested to with a literal fulfilment. 

Tlu- main part of the "American 
Gospel" is contained in the chapters 
comprising Chapters 8-28. These re- 




t 



cord, for the most part, the ministry 
of the Saviour among the people of 
Nephi. 

Our first division of the Gospel to 
the Nephites is of Chapters 8-10. Since 
the death of Christ came before His 
ministry to the Nephites, these con- 
ditions are told of early in the record 
known as the "American Gospel." 
Chapter 8 deals with the cataclysms — 
the tempests, earthquakes, whirlwinds, 
and fires — that took place at the time 
of the crucifixion of the Saviour. We 
can remember from our reading of 
the "Book of Mormon" the great de- 
structions which were wrought by the 
hand of God upon the face of the 
earth. Cities were swallowed up, and 
others were drowned in the depths of 
the sea. Chapters 9 and 10 give us the 
story of the voice of the Saviour as 
He told the people the reasons for such 
destruction upon the face of the land. 
For a second time, in Chapter 10, the 
voice of Christ is heard throughout 

the land, and I lis instructions were 
very much the same as those "f Mat- 
thew 23:37-38: () ye house of Israel 
whom I have spared, how oft Will I 
gather you as a hen gathereth her 
chickens under her wings, it" ye will 

repent and return unt<< me with full 
purpose of In-art. Bui if not, house 



August, 1952 



275 



of Israel, the places of your dwellings 
shall become desolate until the time 
of the fulfilling of the covenant to 
your fathers. (3 Nephi 10:6, 7.) 

The largest section of the Gospel — 
and most important — begins with 
Chapter 11, and runs through Chapter 
26, containing the three days' ministry 
of the Saviour with the "remnant of 
the house of Joseph." This was His 
first personal appearance to the people 
of that land, and is a great dramatic 
"histoire." The Saviour appeared to 
the people as they gathered in a multi- 
tude near the temple in the land Boun- 
tiful. When the multitude saw Him, 
they were awe-stricken, and "durst 
not open their mouths." They thought 
He was an angel of God. Then Christ 
opened His mouth and spoke many 
wonderful words to them. The multi- 
tude came forth and thrust their hands 
in His side, and they knew He was 
the Saviour of the world. "And when 
they had all gone forth and had wit- 
nessed for themselves, they did cry out 
with one accord, saying Hosanna ! 
Blessed be the name of the Most High 
God ! And they did fall down at the 
feet of Jesus and did worship Him. 
(3 Nephi 11 :16.) He expounded to 
them the doctrines of baptism and the 
Gift of the Holy Ghost, which parallel 
with Matthew 16:18. Many other doc- 
trines were taught by Christ there 
but time and space will not permit. 

The next important division is in 
the next three chapters. These are 
comparable to Matthew 5, 6 and 7. 
Most of us who have read the New 
Testament, know that these contain 
the "Sermon on the Mount." The ser- 
mon here is essentially the same, but 
there are minor differences, such as 
the "Lord's Prayer." It seems rather 
evident that if Joseph Smith had 
written the "Book of Mormon," lie 
surely would have included the Lord's 
Prayer word for word, instead of 
having the gumption to alter it like 
it is in 3 Nephi 12. 



From Chapter 15 to 19, we discover 
many miscellaneous teachings of Jesus 
to them in the "promised land." He 
told of the Law of Moses being ful- 
filled with a new a greater law being- 
put in its place. Much to some scholars 
astonishment, Christ told the Nephites 
that there were "other sheep" which 
were not of the American Continent 
that He would visit. 

Not unlike the time He spent in 
Palestine and vicinity, He healed the 
sick, blessed the little children, and 
gave forth a fervant prayer to the 
Father in Heaven for the people whom 
He was visiting. "And it came to pass 
that Jesus spake unto them, and bade 
them arise. And they arose from ihe 
earth ; and He said unto them : Blessed 
are ye because of your faith. And 
now behold, my joy is full. And when 
He had said these word, He wept, and 
the multitude bare record of it, and 
He took their little children, one by 
one, and blessed them, and prayed unto 
the Father for them. And when He 
had done this He wept again. And He 
spake unto the multitude, and said unto 
them : Behold, your little ones. And 
as they looked to behold they cast their 
eyes toward Heaven, and they saw the 
Heavens open, and they saw angels 
descending out of Heaven as it were 
in the midst of fire ; and they came 
down and encircled those little ones 
about, and they were encircled about 
with fire ; and the angels did minister 
unto them." (3 Nephi 17:19-24.) Such 
was the love Jesus had for the people 
there ; and such were the wonderful 
miracles He wrought among them be- 
cause of their exceeding faith. Christ 
instituted the Sacrament of bread and 
wine to the people there, telling thc-in 
to partake of it "oft." He gave the 
Disciples power to confer the Holy 
Ghost and Baptize. Nephi was bap- 
tized and then he baptized all of those 
whom the Saviour had chosen. 

"And it came to pass that my father, 
Lehi, also found upon the plates of 
brass a genealogy of his fathers ; 



276 



TE KARERE 



wherefore he knew that he was a 
descendant of Joseph, who Was sold 
into Egypt, and who was preserved 
by the hand of the Lord, that he might 
preserve his father Jacob, and all of 
his household from perishing with 
famine. (1 Nephi 5:14.) We have 
seen here that the inhabitants of the 
American Continent were a "remnant 
of the house of Israel." Therefore, it 
is very significant that Christ should 
teach the Nephites teachings concern- 
ing the gathering of the House of 
Israel. This he does in Chapters 20 
and 21. 

In the remaining chapters more 
doctrine of the Kingdom is taught to 
the people. In Chapters 27 and 28 is 
recorded his last visit to the people 
there. He instructed them that His 
Church should be named after Him. 
Another true doctrine on which we 
strongly base our beliefs on salvation, 
that of faith and works, was taught 



to the Nephites by Christ, saying that 
men would be judged out of the things 
which "were written in the books." 

One of the last things Christ did 
when he appeared to His Twelve 
Apostles was to enquire as to their 
desired. John the beloved desired to 
tarry until the Son of Man shall come 
in His glory. Also before His ascen- 
tion to His Father in Heaven, Christ 
received the desires of His disciples of 
the "Book of Mormon" lands. All but 
three desired to be taken up into 
Heaven when their time was fulfilled; 
but the "Three Nephites" desired to 
tarry and bring souls unto the Lord. 

Thus we see the parallelism with the 
"Book of Mormon" and the Bible de- 
picting the ministry of Christ the 
Saviour among His people here on the 
earth. One thing, though, the "Ameri- 
can Gospel" makes much more plain 
those "plain and precious things" 
which are not in the Bible. 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE (Continued from Page 268) 



Am I saying that one should not in- 
quire concerning these things? Most 
certainly not. "Seek ye learning, out 
of the best books, and I would add to 
that from study in the best circles and 
conversation with the best people ; and 
when you have once learned by such 
practice, confirm it by humble and sin- 
cere prayer, and when it is once con- 
firmed and your bosom burns with its 
grandeur, never turn back. Oh, yes, we 
will be tempted and may fall slightly 
from the path and that same evil spirit 
that prompted the deviation from the 
Truth will be the identical spirit who 
will whisper, "Try him and see what 
he will say about it; perhaps he will 
justify you in your wrong." There is 
only one justification for the person 
who has fallen from the path of right, 
after having felt of the grandeur of 
its testimony. 



And that is???? "REPENT, GO 
YOUR WAY AND SIN NO 
MORE." 

Yes, your branch president or your 
district president or your mission pres- 
ident or even your class leader or 
your brother over the fence will help 
and counsel, but brother or sister of 
the Church, please don't tempt your 
God by seeking to justify that which 
you KNOW within your own heart 
is wrong. Rather purge your heart of 
evil and ask the Lord to make you 
clean, right the wrong with the person 
or persons you have wronged and 
start afresh and the same sweel 
glow will return and yon will stand 
unashamed In the presence of the Lord 

and testily to I lis ' irrat Mcivv. 

God bless you all with Faith to teach 
and Charity to forgive and Fortitude 
to STAND. 



August, 1952 



WHY RELIGION? 



By HUGH R. PIPER 



RELIGION or a faith is as old as 
the human race and has played a 
large part in the progression of man 
of all colours, races and walks of life 
down through the ages. God has been 
worshipped and thrown aside by mere 
man. Idols and images have been 
through a similar process, and even 
today, strange pagan rites and beliefs 
persist in some lands. However, every 
soul who has lived upon this earth will 
have the opportunity to hear the Gos- 
pel of Christ in its fullness, and they 
will know there is only one God to 
whom they should worship if Christian 
teachings are accepted. Even in the 
hereafter, God's gift to man, "free 
agency," will not be taken from him. 
He will be able to choose for himself. 

Now, in this mortal life, the question 
is asked — "Why Religion? What good 
will it do ?" To many people the an- 
swer is a matter of habit or tradition 
handed down from family to family, 
and going to a church is the thing to 
do, and about there, religion finishes. 

To many others it is the gateway 
to Heaven or "being saved," works 
or complete understanding of the scrip- 
tures is not necessary. Fear of a kind 
makes many go to Church and seek 
religion. This is generally a "one day 
a week" belief, anything based on fear 
is shallow and weak. 

To a great majority, religion is 
something to be avoided, like some 
avoid a plague or politics. Many say 
religion has failed in its pretexts, but 
clearer thinking and honest people will 
admit it is the people who have failed 
in trying to live up to the teachings 
of Christianity. In place of love and 
unselfishness, greed and envy has crept 
into the common people who are full 
of pride, and in turn, with virtues 
lacking, we find ourselves in a state 
of cold wars and also hot and active 
wars. 



A return to the true and full teach- 
ings of Christ is therefore obviously 
necessary if peace and prosperity is 
desired. Is this upon the earth today ? 

The Church of Jesus Christ of 
Latter-Day Saints does give to the 
people Christianity in its fullness, a 
full organization for every day of the 
week, for every age. It is in fact a way 
of life and a philosophy that is perfect 
if we would only follow clearly de- 
fined, the straight and narrow way, but 
not a narrow life — a full and wonder- 
ful one. 

Religion means to Latter-Day Saints 
a way of Salvation and progression for 
which they must work and study — 
Matthew 10 :22 tells us : "He that en- 
dureth to the end shall be saved." By 
works, faith, repentance, love and 
other virtues practised, eternal life may 
be gained, but as in any organization, 
whether of God or man, laws must be 
obeyed to gain ultimate reward. So it 
is with the Gospel of Jesus Christ or 
true religion. We must obey all laws, 
ordinances and commands clearly given 
in the scriptures. Let a few be briefly 
stated here for our good and progress. 
Faith and repentence first, then going 
down into the waters of Baptism and 
being baptised by one holding God's 
authority, and by a similar person, the 
laying on of hands for the gift of the 
Holy Ghost. Thus we have the first* 
step of conversion and a start along 
the pathway to Heaven. 

We must then use wisdom and 
moderation in all things — eating, 
habits, behaviour, work, play — in fact, 
keeping a "tight grip" upon ourselves 
at all times and depart from the ways 
of the devil. We should pay an honest 
tithing — let us not expect to gain great 
rewards without making sacrifice — do 
we get high education without pay- 
ment ? 



278 



TE KARERE 



We need to be active and sincere 
in our endeavours within the Church 
organizations and be an example of a 
true Latter-Day Saint outside the 
Church and at all times be prepared to 
"stand up" for our principles. Promul- 
gate the Gospel but have respect for 
the other man's beliefs. 

Thus we find that the Church of 
Jesus Christ is a definite way of life 



to be enveloped by a law of love. But 
Christ warned — "And ye shall be hated 
of men for my names sake" (Mat- 
thew 10:22). However, if we strive 
to live this law we will become better 
citizens and also our children. We will 
live full and useful lives and help pre- 
pare for ourselves a place in one of 
our Heavenly Father's Mansions, our 
goal and object of Religion. 



A Token of Love 
and Esteem 



A PLEASANT little ceremony was 
enacted in the Lewis Eady 
Theatre, after the primary programme, 
on Saturday, July 5th. The occasion 
was the presentation of a greenstone 
Patu Pounamu to Elder George R. 
Biesinger and his family to be held in 
common by them forever. It was the 
property of Bro. George R. Hall, who 
explained that, according to ancient 
custom, the Tohunga Builder was en- 
titled to a token of a lasting nature, 
binding him in memory to those for 
whom the service was rendered. Since 
he (Bro. Hall) was the possessor of 
such a trophy he had no alternative ; 
he was bound by duty and loyalty to 
these ancient regulations to part with 
the Oha-Ki and surrender it to a 
superior and more efficient member of 
society. There was no option but to 



say good-bye, and President Ottley, 
with joy glittering in his face, made 
the presentation complete with his 
usual lovable way. 

Belonging to the "Kawakawa" class 
of greenstone, "Oha-Ki" is considered 
to be the best of its kind. It is a 
beautiful thing, a handiwork of nature 
intended by the creator to last for- 
ever. 

A mutual understanding was arrived 
at by which the Saints and friends of 
Tonga, Samoa, and other islands of 
the sea, became identified with the 
giving, as also the Saints of Auckland 
and all Aotearoa. Thanks to Brother 
Chote of the Auckland Branch Presi- 
dency and his counsellors Eor the facili- 
ties allowed. 



August, 1952 



279 



Saying w Ko" 

By ELDER MONTE C. SCOVILLE 



VIRTUE is the most sure founda- 
tion we can build our lives upon. 
It is the bulwark or defense of life — 
that impenetrable fortress of truth that 
wards off all attacks from the evil 
enemy, temptation. By seeking always 
to follow the path of goodness, we 
build up a resistance against our foe ; 
however, it would appear that many 
of our defenses are weak. At times, 
perhaps, we wish we were strong 
enough to say "no" to questionable 
situations ; we wish that we possessed 
the courage to follow the dictates of 
our own conscience, instead of giving 
into the base imitations of happiness. 
Yet, at the moment, there seems no 
harm in having a little fun. Then, too, 
those things, or friends, inviting you 
to follow them usually offer you the 
opportunity to forget the "grind of 
life" and have a good time. But that 
so-called "good time" you had, does 
not always give a feeling of joy when 
the event is recalled in memory ; in- 
stead, present, may be a pang of re- 
morse, a source of discomfort and 
anguish to remind you of your mis- 
takes. It may also bring added worry 
troubles to the daily life routine ; and 
make it more difficult to refuse the 
next temptation falling into your path. 
Have you ever asked yourself why it 
is that one activity of pleasure brings 
a sweetness to the mind, while another 
leaves a sharp feeling of regret and 
sorrow ? Why is it that always after 
we wish we would have exerted the 
intestinal fortitude, and not given in? 
Why is it that after, when the wound 
of conscience smarts and brings us 
misery, do we wish we would have ad- 
hered to that old adage, "prevention 
is better than a cure ?" Surely one 
would much sooner be innoculated 
against a communicable disease than 



to suffer while being cured of it. Yet, 
oftimes we fool ourselves by thinking 
that a self -injection of virtue into our 
lives is not necessary — that we will be 
strong when the crisis arises. This 
sometimes turns out to be a costly 
erorr of judgment of our native capa- 
bilities ; for would not one be much 
safer immunized against the destructive 
allurements of Satan than to ignorantly 
depend upon his own weak ways in 
thinking he'll just take his chances? 
Like disease, temptation by evil forces 
is no respector of persons. As the re- 
sistance of the body's health determines 
whether or not a disease will be con- 
tracted, so the degree of power built 
up by living a virtuous life will deter- 
mine whether we will be strong enough 
to resist the disease of vice and its 
enticements. 

"The world," says Henry Drum- 
mond, "is not a playground ; it is a 
school room. Life is not a holiday, but 
an education." If each of us could 
realize this purpose embraced in life — 
that of learning truth in the instruction 
room of every-day living — would it not 
be to our advantage to pay more atten- 
tion to our teacher of happiness (the 
Spirit of God), and less attention to 
our distracting playmates of false 
pleasures (sensations manufactured by 
the devil) ? 

The next time, if there is any un- 
certainty in our minds regarding any- 
thing which could lead to evil, perhaps 
we would be wise to say "no" and 
have no regrets after ; to hearken at 
first unto the voice of conscience may 
require self-denial ; but the price we 
will pay for that initial sacrifice will 
be far less than the price of unhappi- 
ness we will be required to pay after. 



Cultivate the habit of smiling hardest when things look blackest. 
280 TE KARERE 



JLeek vlp 
Cjpires 

By OSCAR A. KIRKHAM 




— -P 



Delivered at Semi-annual General Conference October 1, 1949 



fHILE coming over to this meet- 
ing this afternoon, I had quite 
an impressive incident happen to me. 
I greatly admire these grounds. I often 
chat with the men who make the 
flowers grow and bloom. Today I met 
a familiar brother. I said : "Well, 
I see you are working today." 

"Yes, Brother Kirkham." "Don't 
you ever get tired? I see you here 
early in the morning, and I have seen 
you here late at night." "Oh, yes, I 
get tired once in awhile, but the people 
enjoy the flowers, and once in awhile 
they look up at the spires." 

I would love to put it into the heart 
of every man and woman in this 
Church that they must not grow 
weary. Way out in your own private 
lives, in service in the Kingdom of 
God, it may be that at times you may 
be weary, but I bear humble testi- 
mony because of what I have seen 
throughout the stakes of Zion and 
especially in the missionary field, that 
men with whom you have patience and 
with whom you patiently work, often 
"look up to the spires." 

I am sure witli many of the words 
of warning that have come to us dur- 
ing this conference, and as we do face 



a world of great uncertainty, so great, 
and so fraught with possible destruc- 
tion, we are almost frightened to speak 
about it at times, or they who know 
most about it are silent, and yet, in 
my humble thinking, I say, be un- 
afraid. If we are living as we should 
live, then there need be no fear. Our 
faith in God will give us strength, 
assurance, a sense of safety and secur- 
ity. We need have no fear. 

One of our great American thinkers 
has said : We do not need to fear these 
things. We need to fear whether man 
has faith in God. All my life I have 
laboured with youth, in the out-of- 
doors, largely. My humble illustra- 
tions come largely from that field. I 
know that deep within youth there is 
greatness. It is a natural law that the 
Lord will preserve the right and the 
truth, and soon you and 1 will pass 
this on to the hands of a great genera- 
tion of youth. 

I stood a few years ago with a 
group of youths in Holland where the 
tulips grow. There were aboul a 
hundred and fifty young American 

youths aDOUl me. We went down to 
see the loveliest tulip beds in the 

world. Rowers were not blooming in 



August, 1952 



281 



abundance then, but here and there 
and in the hot-houses there were some 
fine specimens. An elderly Dutch 
gardener came out when he saw we 
had arrived. I remember he held up 
a brown bulb and said : "This will 
be my prize-winner at the fair." 

All we saw were the brown husks 
of the tulip bulb, but he saw beyond 
that. He saw the prize bulb at the 
Holland fair. 

I appeal to you, do not neglect your 
duty to youth but have faith in them. 
They may look like brown bulbs today, 
but they will be prize-winners to- 
morrow. They are marching into the 
greatest world and are the greatest 
generation, in my humble opinion, that 
the world has ever seen. That is my 
faith. I only wish that I might march 
with them and be a lad of twelve years. 
The Lord will be with them and 
strenthen them. They are magnificent. 
It is thrilling to catch their spirit 
and their hope and their devotion to 
the service of the Lord. 

Out in the Zuni Indian village one 
day I followed the runner who went 
out to give his daily ceremony to the 
coming of the sun. On the hilltop he 
stretched forth his arms and chanted. 
When he started to return to the 
village, I walked over to him and 
said, "It is cloudy this morning. Do 
you always come?" 

And then he said, "Oh, the sun is 
always there." That is it. "The sun is 
always there." Let us have faith and 
know that the sun is always there. I 
would like to read one verse from 
Timothy : For God hath not given us 
the spirit of fear ; but of power, and 
of love, and of a sound mind. (II. 
Timothy 1 :7.) 

This thought I would like to suggest 
in connection with our own lives : 
There are many things that will give 
us inspiration and guidance. It is 
astonishing when you hear men frankly 
and freely bear their testimonies — 
when the message came to their hearts, 



that was the moment when the Lord 
spoke to them. I pray that the Lord 
will quicken the best within us. We 
are likely to refer to it as conscience. 
I believe that men and women who 
live humbly and prayerfully may have 
within themselves the blessing of the 
Spirit of God, the gift of the Holy 
Ghost, a power that will guide them, 
protect them, reveal to them truth, 
give them knowledge throughout their 
days, for their own blessing and pro- 
tection. 

"Somehow we must get back to 
God," said a great American, "and 
that is very difficult for modern minds 
who have lost simplicity." I shall read 
a few verses from the Nineteenth 
Psalm : Return, O Lord . . . satisfy us 
early with thy mercy; that we may 
rejoice and be glad all our days . . . 
Let thy work apepar unto thy servants, 
and thy glory unto their children. And 
let the beauty of the Lord our God 
be upon us. (Psalm 90:13-14, 16-17.) 

I pray that this spirit of a voice 
within, the Lord trying to speak to us 
and guide us, may be with us. It is a 
very personal affair. We do not need 
to wait for any great occasion depend- 
ing on someone else to assist us. His 
Spirit will be with us every day, at all 
times, if we serve God humbly and 
pray for His guidance. 

This delightful experience came in 
the form of a testimony out in the 
mission that I recently visited. A 
young missionary bearing his testi- 
mony of what it meant to the family 
for a young man to go on a mission, 
and how the Lord truly provided, re- 
cited this incident: 

When I left home I didn't know 
whether father would be able to make 
it or not in keeping up the expenses, 
but he and mother said, "Go, we'll 
do the best we can for you, Son." 

I came into the missionary field. 

We had been getting along all right, 

and last week I received a letter from 

(Continued on Page 284) 



282 



TE KARERE 










/l 



The Voice of the Waikato 



THE greatest activity in New Zea- 
land right now is centered around 
the missionary system working to con- 
struct the new College. People all over 
this area are curious about it, and they 
wonder about it. To us, this is a mark 
of the typical accomplishments of this 
Church to offer to all people the 
opportunity to prepare themselves to 
be a power for good in this life. Joseph 
Smith once made the statement that, 
"The Church must be cleansed, and I 
proclaim against all iniquity. A man 
is saved no faster than he gets know- 
ledge, for if he does not get knowledge, 
he will be brought into captivity by 
some evil power in the other world, 
as evil spirits will have more know- 
ledge, and consequently more power 
than many men who are on the earth." 
The lack of proper knowledge enslaves 
man to weakness and wrong doing. 
It forces him for lack of greater per- 
spective and understanding to be con- 
tent with ignorance, sorrow, and with 
living a much lesser law, when he 
could be appreciating a much higher 
law. Whereas the thirst and acquiring 
of knowledge makes him equal to 



understanding through hope, faith, the 
blessings of the higher law, and it 
kindles within him an emotion which 
motivates an honest man to obtain the 
higher heights on the scale of pro- 
gression. In the Doctrine and Cove- 
nants it says : "For all kingdoms have 
a law given and they who are not able 
to abide the law of the Celestial King- 
dom canont abide a Celestial Glory." 
Since we are all striving for a Celes- 
tial Glory, which is a perfect Glory 
embracing all things, it would immedi- 
ately place upon all of us a deep re- 
sponsibility to learn the laws govern- 
ing the evidences of creative work 
whether they be man himself, building 
a house, the stars in the universe, 
harvesting a crop, or anything else. 
The Prophet confirms these statements 
by enlightening us that this is the 
Glory of God. Or. in other words. 
"The Glory of God is Intelligence," 
which is, of course, the wise use of 
knowledge of truth. With this a> a 
fact, then our existence and purpose 

Of it— if we art' to eternally progress 

is to gain knowledge and use it intelli- 
gently. This then is the purpose for 



August, 1952 



283 



building the New Zealand College of 
the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter- 
Day Saints. For this school will be 
an institution of learning. This then 
is the motivating factor behind the 
sacrifices of the many who are giving 
up so much to come and be mission- 
aries to build the college. Though none • 
of them will ever attend the school 
and perhaps many of their children 
won't either, their knowledge of the 
perfect law — that of love of service, 
the great creator of good — has kindled 
within them an emotion which has 
sprung them into action. 

Realizing the great work of teaching 
and being taught, and being touched 
by the sacrifices of so many, we mis- 
sionaries, when extended an oppor- 
tunity to run a stall in the annual 
Waikato Winter Show, adopted the 
theme "The Glory of God is Intelli- 
gence" to portray to the public that 
the work on the college made a per- 
fect affect to display our theme. We 
did this by making a plaster of Paris 
plaque of the finished college and a 
poster card on which was printed part 
of the Thirteenth Article of Faith, 
which reads, "If there is anything vir- 
tuous, lovely, or of good report, or 
praiseworthy, we seek after these 
things." We created this affect by 



building the contour of the college 
with layers of cardboard. We then 
covered this with plaster of Paris. We 
carved all the buildings out of plaster 
of Paris which we set in a mould 
along with the finished school and 
grounds. 

The stall was run in shifts by mis- 
sionaries, and our efforts informed 
many passing people of the great pro- 
ject the Church is undertaking right 
here for the Glory of God, and also 
of the Christ-like spirit of those who 
are heeding the call as workers on the 
project. On various nights of the run- 
ning of the stall, all the missionaries 
then on the farm assemble inside the 
booth and sung hymns which attracted 
crowds, who were passed tracts by 
other missionaries. 

The stall proved for us to be a 
great proselyting campaign. Our bold 
statement that the Glory of God is 
Intelligence, our portrayal of ways to 
gain intelligence with our earnestness 
to seek after these things, did a lot 
towards impressing some people in this 
area, with a sense of their responsi- 
bility to learn and accept the laws of 
truth and thus gain a knowledge of the 
truth about the Gospel of Jesus Christ 
and its message of Glad Tidings. 



LOOK UP TO THE SPIRES (Con 

Father. He told the story that they 
were working hard, and they had har- 
vested a good crop, and then he told 
the story of my little brother, eleven 
years old. 

Dad said, "I have been giving your 
brother work on the binder. We were 
giving him fifty cents an acre to run 
it. He had done very well ; he had 
worked early and late. Then the day 
came when we were to pay him. The 
neighbours had sent in their cheques 
and I was going to pay him. I asked 
him : 'Now, Son, what are you going 
to do with the money?' Your brother 
said: 'Well, Father, I want a pair of 
Levis, and I want to go to the County 



tinued from Page 282) 

Fair, and the rest I want to send to 
my brother on his mission.' " 

He enjoyed that voice within. The 
Lord was guiding him in his tender 
years. He had caught the spirit that 
his brother had in missionary service. 

With the same feeling I bear my 
testimony : have patience wherever you 
are called to labour, that those for 
whom you work may "look up to 
the spires," and receive inspiration and 
comfort. Oh, listen to the voice within, 
that it may guide you safely on the 
way. Do not be disturbed by the scare 
lines of papers and commentators on 
the radio. Know that you have God 
with you if you but do His will. 



S84 



TE KARERE 



Greetings To All Our Genealogy Workers 



JOSEPH HAY, Mission Genealogy Supervisor 
MURIEL C. HAY, Secretary 



WHY GENEALOGY? 

OUR objective in doing this work 
is to obtain for ourselves and our 
forefathers Eternal Happiness. Happi- 
ness is what we are all seeking and 
is what our Father in Heaven desires 
for us. However, we can only obtain 
it by being obedient to the command- 
ments of God, and so to obtain Eternal 
Happiness or Eternal Life, which en- 
titles us to live with God, and become 
like Him, receiving a full and perfect 
exaltation in the Celestial Kingdom, 
we MUST comply with certain ordin- 
ances, such as baptism by immersion, 
Temple Endowment and the sealing for 
time and eternity, whereby parents and 
children are linked together in an 
eternal family union. 

In Malachi 4:5, 6 we read: "Be- 
hold, I will send you Elijah the Pro- 
phet before the coming of the great 
and dreadful day of the Lord. And He 
shall turn the hearts of the fathers to 
the children, and the hearts of the 
children to their fathers, lest I come 
and smite the earth with a curse." 
When Moroni visited Joseph Smith on 
September 21st, 1823, he quoted these 
verses with slight variation : "Behold, 
I will reveal unto you the Priesthood, 
by the hand of Elijah the Prophet, 
before the coming of the dreadful day 
of the Lord. And he shall plant in the 
hearts of the children the promises 
made to the fathers, and the hearts of 
the children shall turn to their fathers. 
If it were not so, the whole earth 
would be utterly wasted at His coin- 
ing." 

Following the dedication of the Kirt- 
land Temple, April 3, 1836, tin.' Savior, 
Moses, Elias and Elijah appeared 
separately t<> Joseph Smith and Oliver 
Cowdery, and this is what Joseph 
Smith had t<» say concerning Elijah's 

visit: "Another -real and glorious vir- 
ion hurst upon ds, for Elijah tin- Pro- 



phet, who was taken to Heaven with- 
out tasting death, stood before us, and 
said . . . "Behold the time has fully 
come, which was spoken of by the 
mouth of Malachi, testifying that he, 
Elijah, should be sent before the great 
and dreadful day of the Lord should 
come. To turn the hearts of the fathers 
to the children, and the hearts of 
the children to the fathers, lest the 
whole earth be smitten with a curse. 
Therefore, the keys of this dispensa- 
tion are committed into your hands ; 
and by this ye may know that the great 
and dreadful day of the Lord is near, 
even at the doors (D. & C. 110: 13- 
16). Joseph Smith and Oliver Cowdery 
explained the new and strange doc- 
trine (strange as far as the people of 
that time were concerned) of baptism 
for the dead, and made it plain that 
children here upon the earth can be 
baptized for their loved ones who have 
passed away without enjoying this 
privilege. Baptism of the living, for 
the dead, is performed in the Temples 
of the Lord, erected to His name and 
at His command in this dispensation. 
At the present time there are eight 
Temples where this work is being per- 
formed, and there is no doubt that 
as this work grows, Temples will he 
erected to take care of the work. Hav- 
ing had the privilege of doing endow- 
ment and sealing work in five of the 
Temples, I realize more fully than 
ever the importance of this great work, 
and the joy and blessing it brings to 
one who is privileged to participate in 
such work. We cannot all go to the 
Temples, hut we all can collect our 

genealogy. There are SO many people 

who are anxious to do the work for 
us, if we will hut send the compiled 

sheets over. Gel in touch with your 
Branch Officers who will be happy to 

help you in Compiling your sheet-. 
DO IT NOW I 



August, 1952 



28* 



THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN NEW ZEALAND 



By ELDER GARTH LOW 



GREETINGS from the Sunday 
School to each and every one of 
you. Truth is marching, time is passing 
and every moment that passes will 
never come again. Are you making 
the best of your time ? 

Over the last few weeks I have had 
the opportunity of visiting many of 
you in your own districts and branches 
and seeing just how you are doing and 
where you could improve. I also see 
many of the stumbling blocks that 
you must face and overcome, and with 
this thought I would like you to re- 
member that we cannot know the sweet 
without the bitter and what a dry 
world this would be, without a little 
opposition to make us realize the 
sweetness of overcoming obstacles. 
"The battle is not to the swift and 
sure, but to he that endureth to the 
end." 

In the visit of the South Island in 
the last of May and the first of June, 
I was very happy to visit with the 
Saints and partake of the spirit that 
eminates from your meetings. I know 
that you are few in numbers, but if 
you meet together often to worship 
and learn, the Lord will be with you 
and help you to grow. I trust that by 
now you have the teacher's aids in use 
and are making ready the library 
where you can keep these things. To 
make these, takes but a very little time 
and it helps so very much in the teach- 
ing of the Gospel. If you have not 
made these things yet and have put it 
off, don't do so another day ; start now 
to get together teaching aids, take time 
out to do the Lord's work. Do you 
have the class books now for your 
individual classes ? If there are ques- 
tions that you cannot find the answer 
for in your handbooks, I will be only 
to happy to help you out. You are not 
forgotten just because there is a lot 
of miles between us, and before a very 



Jew weeks (sometime in October) I 
will be down to see how you have 
advanced. 

To all of you wherever you are over 
the Islands of New Zealand, who are 
in the Sunday School work, I would 
exhort you to strive harder to prepare 
for your meetings ; start on time, see 
that everything is in order that no 
time is lost, that the spirit of the Lord 
may be with you in your meetings. 
Remember that the letter killeth, but 
the spirit giveth light. Have order and 
reverence, greet the people with a 
smile and let the Gospel light shine 
forth from you. 

I still find that there are many of 
you who are using the old lesson 
books. These are of no value to you, 
as they will be taken in their turn 
and by the use of them you will cause 
us to order incorrect numbers of books, 
thus causing a shortage of books 
throughout the year. At the present 
time we still have a partial shortage 
of certain articles. Why? First because 
reports were not sent in ; second, old 
books were used ; third, classes were 
not called by their correct names. 
These all went to cause a shortage. 
Let us not have a shortage again, let's 
correct our situation now ! 

I received an order of books from 
Zion yesterday and hope to get another 
very soon. At the present time we 
have all the necessary information on 
the teachers' training class and a repre- 
sentation of al books in the class de- 
partments. 

Now, for your quarterly reports. 
Some of you are sending in your re- 
ports a little better. Some are sending 
them in on time and others are still 
not sending them at all. Once again I 
will tell you how to send them in. 
First send the white and blue sheets 
to the Mission Office, the yellow one 
(Continued on Page 288) 



286 



TE KARERE 



World Wide Church 



Flood Provides Test of 
Church Welfare Programme 

With five Salt Lake City Ward 
areas almost wholly under water, and 
hundreds of families marooned because 
of encroaching flood waters from ram- 
paging mountain streams, the machin- 
ery of the Church Welfare Programme 
is being put to a crucial test and is 
responding magnificently. 

Rapid erection and maintenance of 
sandbag levees, orderly evacuation of 
members from partially submerged 
homes, survey of housing facilities for 
displaced familes and care of the aged 
and sick found in the danger zones 
and a multitude of kindred tasks have 
been carried forward in an organized 
and orderly fashion under the direction 
of bishops and their ward welfare 
committees, supervised by stake presi- 
dents in the areas affected. 

Ward and stake officials in the 
flooded areas have the assurance of 
directors of the General Church Wel- 
fare Programme that all the assistance 
within the gift of that great organiza- 
tion is at the disposal of the needy 
upon call of bishops and stake presi- 
dents. 

Wards most seriously affected to 
date are Jefferson, Thirtieth, Fifth and 
Arbor Wards in Temple View Stake 
and Cannon Ward and a part of 
Jordan Park Ward in Pioneer Stake 
with the possibility chat others will be 
inundated by the creeping flood waters. 

On May 1st, 1952, Church officials 
headed by President J. Reuben (lark, 
Jr., made an inspection tour of the 
Jefferson and Thirtieth Ward areas, 
the first attacked by the swirling can- 
yon flood streams, and on into the 
Cannon Ward. Members of the party 
included 1 'resident Joseph Fielding 
Smith, of the Council of the Twelve, 
Elder Harold B. Lee, of the Council 
of the Twelve and managing director 
of the Church Welfare Programme, 



Elder Marion G. Romney, also of the 
Council of the Twelve and assistant 
managing director of the Welfare Pro- 
gramme, President Fred W. Schwen- 
diman, of Wells Stake and chairman 
of the Pioneer Welfare Region, Presi- 
dent A. Lewis Elggren, Liberty Stake, 
President Adiel F. Stewart, Temple 
View Stake, and President Fred H. 
Peck, Jr., Pioneer Stake and co- 
ordinator of the Pioneer Region. The 
party was piloted by Bishop LeGrand 
Dowdle and his counsellor, W. W r ayne 
Prince, aboard a high-wheeled Army 
carry-all. 

Soon after the disastrous flood 
struck, a meeting with the managing 
directors of the Welfare Programme 
•and the regional chairmen concerned 
was held to determine a plan of pro- 
cedure in giving succor to those suffer- 
ing from the catastrophe. Underlying 
principles of the programme were re- 
capitulated and local leaders instructed 
in their responsibilities and preroga- 
tives. 
Statistics on Flood 

Statistics available as of Tuesday, 
May 6, on the flood situation in the 
wards of Temple View, Pioneer River- 
side, Wells and Liberty Stakes are as 
follows : 

Homes affected to any considerable 
extent, 647. Families evacuated, 435. 
X umber working on flood projects, 
2.661. Man-hours spent during flood, 
19,373. Trucks offered for emergency, 
103. Number reporting Monday for 
typhoid immunization shots, 2,200. 

Indian Royalty, Jonas Poweshiek, 
Convert to Church 

Jonas Poweshiek, the first member 
of the Sae and Fox Indian tribe oi 
Tama, Iowa, to accept the restored 
Gospel, was baptized recently at a ser- 
vice held in the newly constructed 
chapel at Ames, la. 

Jonas earned a rich family heritage 
from his ancestors. His great-grand- 
father was the fanuuis Chief Pow< 



August, 1952 



287 



shiek for whom Poweshiek County. 
Iowa, was named. His father, James 
Poweshiek, was the last chief of the 
Iowa Sax and Fox. His father intro- 
duced the tribal council system of 
government which is in use at Tama 
today. 

He was born in a wickiup, February 
16, 1894, on the reservation at Tama. 
la. His Indian name means "Monster 
Bear." He is a member of ihe Grizzly 
Bear Clan which is the highest in the 
tribe. 

Jonas attended several different 
schools. He went first to the Chilocco 
Agricultural School in Oaklahoma. He 
later attended Haskel Institute in Law- 
rence, Kan., and Carlisle Institute in 
Pennsylvania. While at Carlisle he was 
a classmate and close friend of Jim 
Thorpe, the great Indian athlete. 

Upon the completion of his school- 
ing, Jonas enlisted in the United States 



Army. He served in the Army for 23 
months from 1917-1919. 

Jonas was first contacted by the 
missionaries who were labouring on 
the reservation at Tama, la. One of"* 
the elders gave him a Book of Mor- 
mon and told him that there was a 
branch of the Church in Des Moines. 
Jonas met one of the members of the 
Des Moines Branch who referred him 
to the missionaries there in the city. 
They began meeting with him in the 
summer of 1951 and held regular meet- 
ings, systematically discussing the 
Gospel, until September of 1951, when 
he was baptized. 

Since joining the Church, Jonas was 
recently ordained to the office of a 
deacon in the Aaronic Priesthood. 

Jonas is a much respected person 
among his people, and is sure to be an 
influence for good among them. 



THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN NEW 

to the District President, and the pink 
one you can keep in your own branch. 
The two that are to come to the 
Mission Office should be in by the 
first Sunday of the month that follows 
the quarter. 

As a gentle reminder these are the 
Sunday Schools that have not reported 
this month. This will be incorrect if 
you have already sent in your report 
by the eight of July. — Awakino. Awa- 
rua Cambridge Rd. Home, Cleveland 
Home, Dunedin, Gordonton Hamilton, 
Horotu Home, Hangatiki, Hiona, Hoe 
O Taninui, Horoera, Hutt Valley, 
Judea, Horotui, Kaikohe Home, Kai- 
kuku, Kohunui, Mahinepua, Mahoenui, 
Maketu, Mangakino, Mangamuka, 
Manunui, Maroa Home, Matakowhai, 
Muriwai, Xelson, Ngaruawahia, Xga- 
wha, Nuhaka, Oniti, Okautete, Omahu, 
Omapere Home, Opoutama. Pakotai, 
Palmerston North, Pipiwai Home, 
Porangahau, Porirua. Portland, Puke 
Hou, Puke Hou Home, Puke Tapu, 
Rotorua, Ruatangato, Tahawai Home, 



ZEALAND (Cont. from Page 286) 

Tahaenui, Ta Kahua Home, Te Arai, 
Te Hapara, Te Harihana, Te Huake, 
Te Horo, Te Hue Hue, Te Kuiti 
Home, Te Ngae Home, Thames, Tim- 
aru, Uawa, Uriwha Home, Utakura, 
Waikiekie, Waipawa, Waitangi, Wa- 
nganui, Wellington, Whakaki Home, 
Whangarei, Warkworth Home, Whi- 
rimaki Home, Maturi Bay Home, 
Okaikau Home, Auckland, Waiomia, 
Opuawhanga, Themas, Tamaki, Nawa. 

Eighty-five out of 120 have not re- 
ported. This is very poor. 

In your reports, please do not abbre-* 
viate the words or days of the month. 

May the Lord bless you in your 
work. 

SACRAMENT GEM 
(July and August) 



Help us, O God, to realize 
The great atoning saerifiec: 

The gift of Thy Beloved Son, 

The Prinee of Life the Holy One. 



. 



L..D. Prophets Speak 



JJewer of lite J^inesihood 

By ELDRED G. SMITH, Patriarch to the Church 



I HAVE always been impressed with 
the assemblies in these conferences, 
ever since I was a small child. I have 
enjoyed very much especially the 
priesthood meetings, and as I look out 
over this audience here today and see 
this gathering" of men in the body of 
the hall who are all holders of the 
priesthood, backed by their wives or 
their sweethearts, or the other mem- 
bers of their families, I am inspired 
with the power that lies behind them. 
We have been reminded of the power 
of twelve men who in the earlier days 
did a powerful work upon the earth. 
Today we have twelve men with the 
same power and the same authority, 
the same message, the same responsi- 
bility given to them. Not only do we 
have twelve men but we also have 
thousands and hundreds of thousands 
of brethren in the Church holding the 
same priesthood, the same power to 
go out and gather the people of the 
earth and give to them that same 
power, that they may receive a testi- 
mony of the divinity of the Gospel, 
that they might also catch the spirit 
of the Lord and progress and work out 
their salvation. 

This power of the priesthood is 
more than that, it is the power to re- 
present Jesus Christ, and all that the 
men dp within the authority and power 

of that priesthood is just the same as 
if [esus Christ Himself were there 

personally doing it : that means in all 

the administration and all the ordina- 
tions and in all the other activities 
which they perform. We readily accept 
it when we tell the deacons and the 

priests and those of the \aromV 

Priesthood thai they are representing 
Jesus Chrisl when the) administer the 

sa< lament and pass it to the COn| 



tion. We readily accept it in the vari- 
ous ordinations performed by those 
holding the Melchizedek Priesthood ; 
but to me the power of the priesthood 
reaches much farther than that. We 
have also the patriarchs who are sit- 
ting over there, who are a representa- 
tion of the patriarchs in the Church. 
I think we have about a third of the 
patriarchs, maybe less, represented in 
this group, who also have the power 
to lay their hands on your heads, if 
you desire it, and pronounce blessings 
upon your heads, and with such power 
that the Lord will accept of those 
blessings, and, through your activities 
and through your efforts to fulfill 
those blessings, the Lord Himself shall 
sanction those blessings to your good. 
It goes even farther than that, to me. 
We have had many in our Church 
who have prophesied, told us of things 
to come in the future and which have 
come to pass. We have heard much 
during this conference of the pro- 
phecies of the Prophet Joseph Smith, 
which have been true prophecies, and 
prophecies are being made all the time 
today, not so outstanding probably as 
those that Joseph Smith gave in the 
beginning, but we are given warning, 
and are given counsel and advice and 
told that it we don't follow it. we will 
reap the penalty or reward in accord- 
ance to our actions and our deeds. To 
me the power of the priesthood goes 
even farther than that The power of 
the priesthood is the same power which 
Christ used in creating the earth. The 

limits of the power ^>i the priesthood 

are endless. The power of the priest- 
hood, if used correctly, under the 
proper inspiration, may command the 

elements, and they shall obe) in ac- 
cordance to the will of the I ord 



August, 1952 



289 



Miraculous Healings 
Through Priesthood 

Last Wednesday we heard several 
of the mission presidents bear testi- 
mony in the temple meeting, of the 
ministrations which have been miracu- 
lously accepted, that healings were 
made almost immediately, some were 
immediate, that the power of the Lord 
is being poured out upon this people 
all over this earth in the same manner. 
Through the administration of those 
who hold the priesthood even the ele- 
ments of the earth obey. The power 
of the priesthood is the power of 
Christ, which He had to create the 
earth and all that lives on it. Now 
if Christ has delegated that power 
to us, and we use it correctly with 
faith, then why should we hesitate to 
administer to the sick? Why should 
we hesitate to call upon His help? 
Why should we hesitate to call upon 
the elders at any time we need the 
power of the Lord with us ? 

Experiments With Atomic Bomb 

We have taught since the beginning 
of this dispensation the doctrine of the 
indestructibility of matter, and during 
the war I had the experience of work- 
ing in the plant which produced the 
materials for the atomic bomb. We 
were working, you might say, with 
an invisible ray, because we took the 
material, put it through a certain pro- 
cess which made it invisible to the eye. 
Then it was caught again in a separ- 
ated condition, separating the U235 
and U238 and other elements of uran- 
ium. As a result of using those mater- 
ials, elements of the earth were dissi- 
pated into the air. The steel tower 
for instance upon which the first 
atomic bomb was exploded, vaporized ; 
that steel tower was dissipated into 
the atmosphere. We didn't return it, 
but none of it has been destroyed. It 
has just been broken up into a differ- 
ent form. The atmosphere is full of 
materials, and wherever there is one 
law given, there is a reverse law or 



contrary law. We have learned the law 
that we may break up the elements of 
the earth to a great extent. 

Priesthood Exercised 
Through Faith 

The power of the priesthood is the 
power to call upon God who knows 
the reverse law, and in accordance to 
His will, He will exercise His power 
to call together the elements or to put 
them into action for our benefit. By 
such process beyond our mortal con- 
trol and beyond our knowledge, the 
sick can be healed ; the blind can be 
made to see ; the deaf can be made to 
hear. God has those powers, and He 
has given them to us through the 
power of the priesthood. How can we 
strengthen that faith which we have 
that will help us to use that power, 
for we cannot use the power of the 
priesthood correctly without faith. 

Our faith and our testimony are 
strengthened day by day in our actions 
and in our deeds. We have had called 
to our attention, during this confer- 
ence, many of the ways by which we 
can strengthen our testimony and 
strengthen our faith. We will go away 
from this conference remembering 
little of the words that were spoken, 
but if we can instill into ourselves the 
desire to get out and do more for our 
fellow men and our fellow workers, 
we have gained the purpose of these 
conferences, and with the help of the 
Lord we shall work harder and go 
farther and progrss faster in the work 
of th Lord here in the earth. 

I bear you my testimony, my bro- 
thers and sisters, that I know this is 
the work of the Lord and that this 
power of the priesthood which has 
been given to this people is truly the 
power of God. If we will continue 
to live as He has taught us, it shall 
be a source of happiness and joy to us 
all and shall enable us to accomplish 
the duties required of us from day to 
day in our lives. I bear you this testi- 
mony in the name of Jesus Christ. 
Amen. 



290 



TE KARERE 



Here and There in the Mission 



More Missionaries Arrive 

Elder Guy B. Christensen arrived 
in Auckland on the S.S. Alameda on 
the second day of June, along with 
Elder Charles A. Rice. An Elder 
Larsen was with them but he went on 
to Australia. 

Elder Christensen holds the office of 
a Seventy in the Logan 18th Ward and 
has filled a Stake mission, also a mis- 
sion in California, between 1929-1930. 
He has been Stake M-Men Advisor 
and a Temple Officiator. So you can 
see that he is certainly well qualified 
to preach the Gospel of Jesus Christ. 
He has been assigned to the Whanga- 
rei District. 

Elder Charles A. Rice has been as- 
signed to preach the Restored Gospel 



arrive in the mission field, was not too 
well versed in the scriptures, but he 
understands the importance of his mis- 
sion which is the main thing. We find 
in modern day revelation just how 
important our callings are. And the 
voice of warning shall be unto all 
people, by the mouths of my disciples 
whom I have chosen in these last days 
and they shall go forth and none shall 
stay them for I the Lord have com- 
manded them. (D. & C. Sec. 1:56.) 

We say to Elders Rice and Christen- 
sen, "Kia Kaha Korua Ki Te Mahi 
O Te Rongo Pai." 

For the fortnight ending July 8th 
we have enjoyed the presence of Elder 
Hilton who was on his way from 
Tahiti (where he spent thirty-three 
months as a missionarv for the 



CS O 



44 



Elder Rice 

of Jesus Christ to the people of the 
Wairarapa District. Elder Rice is a 
Seventy from the Clinton Ward, 
Clearfield, Utah. Before coming on a 
mission he spent four years in the 
Navy as a radio operator. Elder Rice, 
like the most of ns when we firsl 



Modesty in delivering 
ihrni without humiliation, 

August, 1952 



' 



Elder Christensen 

Church) to New Zealand and so on 
around the world. He is intending on 
Stopping in Scotland where his mother, 
father and sister are serving as mis- 
sionaries. Together they will journej 
to Oakland, California, where they 
will be residing. 



opinions leaves us the liberty of changing 

291 



Featuring the Districts' 

News 



BAY OF ISLANDS DISTRICT 
By George Randell 

Again I bring to you the events and 
happenings of the Bay of Islands Dis- 
trict for this month. There has been 
a trail of Hui Pekas following the 
annual sustaining of the officers of 
each branch. Elder Mendenhall and 
his district officers visited the follow- 
ing Branches : Utakura, Mataraua and 
Mangamuka, and established them 
with officers for the ensuing year. A 
very brief visit was given us by Elder 
Biesinger during this past month. 
The old man Winter is here with us 
and he is sure holding up the activities 
of Bro. Ivan Joyce and his band of 
timber workers. 

KING COUNTRY DISTRICT 
By Howard Osborne 

The King Country Hui Pariha was 
held at Otorohanga on the 21st and 
22nd of this month. That sounds a cold 
statement, but if you were there you 
would appreciate the fullness of that 
note. The weather — well, it was a 
winter-time — but the coldness and rain 
probably brought us all closer together 
than we may otherwise have been ; 
and there was some disturbing noises 
from work being done nearby, but 
these factors could not remove the 
warmness of the spiritual fellowship 
and of the wonderful counsel that was 
given above the din of rain and 
hammers. 

On Saturday evening the Primary 
and M.I. A. entertained an assembly 
of about 80 persons to an enjoyable 
programme of songs, recitations, hakas, 
action songs and playlet. The canteen 
was a favourite resort during the 
evening, nothing being left for the 
cleaners. 



Forty-one members of the Priest- 
hood answered the roll call at the 
Priesthood meeting held on Sunday 
morning. Instructive, inspiring and en- 
couraging talks were attentatively re- 
ceived by those present. Much progress 
was reported, the Gospel being well 
received by many people, and the 
building programme is well advanced 
but worthy of increased support. 

In the morning and afternoon meet- 
ings some wonderful testimonies and 
worthwhile instruction were given. 
The growth of the islands missions 
was reported on favourably by Presi- 
dent Ottley and other speakers." 

NEWS FROM THE COLLEGE 

By Sona Seldwyn 

T.K. Reporter for the College Boys 

Ko te neo tenei. Tuhikaramea te 
mihi atu nei kia koutou e nga morehu 
ote whare e Iharaira, kote tenei, te 
Mihana o Niu Tireni (or, in other 
words, Hello, folks!) 

For the first time throughout the 
history of the universe our Te Karere 
receives a report from the boys at the 
New Zealand College for the Church 
of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints. 
There are about 45 of us here working 
now and we all send our greetings to 
the members throughout the Mission 
and especially to our mothers and fam- 
ilies, informing them that we are all 
well, very happy and thankful to be 
chosen to help do this wonderful and 
necessary work. 

We thank the Branches and Dis- 
tricts for their very ready support, for 
they have helped us beyond measure. 
We thank each individual who has in 
some way assisted us in the work 
here. We appeal to you all that if 
you think you can help us in any way 



292 



TE KARERE 



individually or collectively, do so by 
all means, for this College will be 
for the benefit of your children and 
ours in the future, also a monument 
to the Faith and Work of the members 
of this Mission. 

We should continually thank our 
Heavenly Father for restoring the 
Gospel in these last days and for 
giving us the privilege of free agency 
and through this free agency we seek 
to strengthen our testimonies. E hoa 
ma, truly our testimonies have been 
strengthened. With these words we 
leave you until next month. 

WELLINGTON DISTRICT 
By Karanga Wineera 

Greetings, especially to our folks 
in Auckland and on the College in 
Hamilton. A special greeting is ex- 
tended to Brother Raha Wineera, Sis- 
ters Christina Enoka, Pauline Selwyn 
and Patricia Elkington who are 
patients in the hospitals. 

Brother Joseph Parata has been ap- 
pointed President of the Porirua 
Branch following the release of Elder 
L. Lewis who is our new District 
President. We have lost three more 
of our members, Brothers Emeron 
and David Elkington and Sister Huia 
Elkington who have moved to Auck- 
land. 

A successful Bazaar was held on the 
28th of June by the Porirua Primary 
Association. On June 29th a special 
evening was held at Porirua in re- 
membrance of the date of the Martyr- 
dom of the beloved Prophet Joseph 
Smith. To honour this occasion the 
Priesthood, under Elder L. Lewis, 
produced a pageant, reliving the Pro- 
phel Joseph Smith's Martyrdom. We 
were honoured with a visit from 
Tumuaki Ottley and Elder Low in the 
latter part of June. 

News has been received of the mar- 
riage of Lyman Bond of Sail Lake, 
one of our former Districl Presidents, 
to Patricia Millar of Salt Lake City. 



Statistics: 

Births in Porirua : Bro. and Sis. 
Robert Kite, a daughter. Bro. and Sis. 
Piri Parai, a daughter. Bro. and Sis. 
Luke Kohe, a son. 

OTAGO DISTRICT 

Greetings from way down south ! 
Owing to an acute shortage of man- 
power down this way we are unable 
to send any missionaries on the Col- 
lege Building Programme. However, 
varied activities are being planned 
within the Branches to supplement the 
weekly contributions by the members, 
to support those who are able to go. 
An activity such as the social evening 
conducted by the Christchurch M.I. A. 
on July 1st, has been proven to bring- 
very favourable results. 

In Dunedin the Church is repre- 
sented by an eager men's basketball 
team. At the beginning of June they 
were top equal with "Taxes," but on 
the 25th of the month they played 
against them and lost 21-19. The 
papers called the game the best of 
the year and made special mention 
of Elders W. Fryer and L. Stevens 
who have been picked to play in the 
trials for the representative team. 
These players are certainly succeeding 
in making the Church better known 
by their efforts. 

NEWS FROM TIMARU 

The organ that has been sitting idle 
in the corner for so many months has 
been mastered by Elder Card and the 
sweet strains that proceed from it each 
Sabbath have been the means ni in- 
creasing the attendance and bringing 
in new investigators. We also have 
a new chorister in this Branch, His 
name is Derek Workman, a recent im- 
migrant From England. 

Recenl departures from the Districl 
are Elder G. LJrsenbach, .rum Dunedin 
to Auckland : Elder W. Brown, from 
Christchurch to Rotorua; Sister Anne 

Donaldson law and her husband. to- 



August, 1952 



293 



gether with Sister Hana Blair, from 
Christchurch to Nelson; Bro. and Sis. 
Tom Read, with their three children, 
from Christchurch to Auckland; Bro. 
James W. Costello, from Christchurch 
to Ireland (just for a visit). 

The above-mentioned are all greatly- 
missed by the friends they had left 
here. The following persons have ar- 
rived to take up their lot with us : — 
Elder R. Hunsaker, to Dunedin ; Elder 
D. R. Kerr, to Christchurch ; Bro. Ta 
Strickland, from Rarotonga, who is 
attending Art School in Dunedin. 

Statistics: 

Baptisms. — James William Costello, 
June 13, 1952, by Elder J. Pitcher and 
confirmed by Elder N. Broadhead 
(Christchurch). 

Death. — Sister Minnie Murray 
Bailey, June 27th at Dunedin. 

Marriage. — Sister Anne B. M. 
Wixon to Charles G. Donaldson-Law, 
May 31st (Christchurch). 

Blessing. — Sandra Faye, infant 
daughter of Bro. and Sis. Bob Currie 
(Dunedin). 

WAIRARAPA DISTRICT 
By Rongo Paki 

Time marches on and the Wairarapa 
District has been blessed by having 
another Hui Pariha scheduled to be 
held on the 23rd and 24th of August, 
1952. Preparation has been going along 
in leaps and bounds. The aim is to 
make this Hui Pariha the best, and 
if we all do the will of the Lord, it 
will be. This time we are doing away 
with marquees and renting halls for 
all Huis in the future, because they 
are more convenient for everyone. 

In the Te Harihana Branch we are 
hard at work planning for raising 
money towards an assembly building 



as we find that where meetings are 
held at the present time too small. A 
plot of land has been donated by one 
of our brethren for the site of our 
building. Elder King, our District 
President, feels that this building is 
the beginning of Apostle Cowley's 
prediction, concerning Wairarapa Dis- 
trict eventually becoming the largest 
in the Mission. God moves in a mys- 
terious way His wonders to perform. 

At the Hui Pariha we are endeav- 
ouring to render our own choir pieces 
instead of depending on other Districts 
as has been the usual thing. The choir 
has been doing quite well considering 
that we are all learners and live far 
apart. As a choir we are going to sing 
during intervals at the "Martinborough 
Picture Theatre" as an advertisement 
for our Hui Pariha, as well as mem- 
bers of The Church of Jesus Christ 
of Latter-Day Saints. These choir 
numbers will be rendered at the 
theatre, a week before Conference, two 
nights in succession. We pray that the 
Spirit of the Lord may be with us, so 
that we may accomplish the things He 
would have us do in accordance with 
His Holy mind and will. We will see 
you at our Conference on the 23rd and 
24th August. 

Statistics: 

Ordination to Deacon. — At Glad- 
stone, William Porourangi Naera, 
April 23rd, by Elder James H. King. 

Blessings. — Baby blessed and named 
at Masterton, Leo Martin Hans Ped- 
erson on June 19th ; Father, Leo Ern- 
est Cecil Pedersen; Mother, Piki Ka- 
hakaha Whakaka. 

Death. — At Masterton, Hinerangi 
Haeata Kuku Raniera, on July 1st, 
1952. 



Some people are too tired to give a smile. Give them one of yours. 
294 TE KARERE 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO I TE HITORI TE HAHI 

(Essentials 
in Church History) 

WAHANGA TUATORU 

Translated by George R. Hall 




Etahi Atu o Nga Whakakitenga 
Whai-tikanga 

1TE mutunga o te hui, ka wha- 
kakitea mai ano e te Ariki tetahi 
tikanga hei whakatikatika, e tika ai 
te ahuatanga mo enei tangata ara 
mo Ohana Haira (Orson Hyde), 
Ruka Tionihana (Luke Johnson) Rai- 
mana E. Tionihana (Lyman E. John- 
son) me Wiremu E. Makerini (Wil- 
liam E. McLellin), na ratou hoki te 
ui ki te Atua kia whakamaramatia 
mai te ahuatanga mo ratou ; me te 
apiti mai ano i etahi kupu tohutohu, 
i etahi kupu whakahau, ki te hunga 
katoa kua noho i roto i nga rohe o 
Hiona (Tirohia Ako-Kawe 68). He 
maha o te hunga nei kua totohu ki 
roto i te mangeretanga, kua kore i 
whakaaro ake he mahi ano tetahi mea. 
No reira ka whakahau te Ariki kia 
mau ratou ki te ra hapati, kia mahara 
tonu kia ratou inoi, kia kaua e whaka- 
hawea ki te ako ki a ratou tamariki 
i nga tikanga o te Rongopai, kia 
iriiria ratou i te taenga ki te waru o 
nga tau te pakeke I roto i enei tikanga 
kei te paheke whakamuri ratou, a kei 
te whaka-pa pouri ki te Ariki. I tukua 
iho ano hoki etahi korero tohutohu 
tno te tohungatanga, me nga mana <> 
reira, hei arataki i te I lain'. I tukua 
ma Oriwa Kautere enei korero <■ kawe 
atu ina tae ki te wa e hoki ai ia ki 
I [iona. 



I te torn o nga ra o Xoema, ka 
huaki iho i te Ariki te whaka kitenga 
nui, hei kupu apiti, e mohiotia nei i 
naianei ko te "Tapiritanga" Ako-Kawe 
133. 

Te Whakawhaititanga i 
Nga Whakakitenga 

Kua takoto te korero ma Oriwa 
Kautere e kawe, ara e mau nga wha- 
kakitenga ki Mihiuri a ki reira ka 
perehitia. I roto i enei rangi, kua piki 
haere rawa te nui o nga raruraru, nga 
tautetanga o Hohepa Mete, i te mea 
hoki kua rite ko te tekaumarima o 
Xoema te ra haere mo Oriwa. Ko te 
korero tenei a te Poropiti i roto i ana 
tuhitulrnga, "I warea katoatia ahau ki 
te ata titiro ano i nga tuhituhinga o 
nga whakahau iho ate ariki me taku 
noho ano i roto i nga karakia o te 
Hui, i roto o nga wiki e rua. No te 
mea i te tahi ki te tekaumarua o 
Xoema, e wha rawa nga hui i tauna- 
hatia, hei huinga mo matou." Ko te 
tau tenei 1831. 

Te Wariu o Nga 
Whakakitenga 

I te hui whakamutunga o nga hui 
i tu nei ki Hairama i te kainga o 
Eioani Tionihana (John Johnson) i 

tukua n.na nunia kia pooti i te whaka- 
tau ta ratou wananga tauga i nga 
whakakitenga kua w liakaaturia ake 

nei. Ko tenei te tatuuranga o ta ratou 
whakatau, "Ko enei Whakakitenga 



August, 1952 



295 



kua waiho hei taonga nui mo te Hahi, 
e wariutia ana i runga noa atu o nga 
mea katoa o tenei ao." 

Ko nga painga katoa e pa ana ki 
te hahi, a e horapa atu ana ki te ao 
katoa, i puaki mai nei ma roto i te 
Pukapuka a Moromona, i puaki ake 
ano hoki no roto i nga whakakitenga 
kia Hohepa Mete, i mania katoa ki 
roto i te reo wananga o te hunga i 
pooti nei, tapatahi tonu ta ratou wha- 
kaotinga i ta ratou whakatau, "I roto 
i te matauranga nui o te Ariki, i a 
la i whakapuare nei i te huarahi ki 
te oranga tonutanga, mo tona iwi, 
otira mo te Hahi katoa, kia ngakau 
nuitia. 

Te Whakatapu-tapaetanga i 
Nga Whakahaunga Iho 

I pootitia kia tu ko Hohepa Mete 
hei tapae i nga tuakana-teina nei, i 
a Oriwa Kautere, i a Hoani Whitima 
me nga tuhituhinga tapu i tukua ki 
roto i o raua ringaringa tiaki ai, hei 
tapae ia raua me enei tuhituhinga, ki 
te Ariki. I whakataungia ano e ratou 
i raro i taua mana pooti tenei whaka- 
otinga; "I runga i te manawanui i te 
kaha, o Hohepa Mete, o Oriwa Kau- 
tere o Hoani Whitima, me Hirini 
Rikitona ki te whakawhera — whera kia 
marama te katoa, i runga i te aroha 
noa o te Atua, i ngoto ai ki te katoa 
enei mea tapu, me whakatuturu enei 
tangata hei kai tiaki i enei mea, kia 
rite ki ta nga ture o te Hahi, ko o 
ratou whanau kia whakawhiwhia papa- 
tuputia (inherit) ki te whenua o roto i 
ngarohe o Hiona, ko nga whanau o 
Hairama Mete o Karaitiana Whitima, 
Pita Whitima, Hakopa Whitima Hai- 
rama Peeti, Rawiri Whitima, Hamiora 
Mete, Wiremu Mete me Tona Karohi 
Mete (Don Carlos Smiht), :ne wha- 
kamahara atu ki te Pihopa o Hiona 
kia whaka whiwhia ki te whenua 
papatupu o roto o Hiona Na Hohepa 
Mete tonu i whakatutuki te hangaita- 
nga o tenei motini. I muri tata iho i te 
hui, ka whakatika a Oriwa Kautere 
raua ko Hoani Whitima ka haere kite 
whakatutuki i te haere i tohia ma raua. 75 



Nga Tautetanga i Waenganui 
o Te Hoa Riri 

It te tahi o nga ra o Tihema ka 
tae mai te whakahau kia Hohepa Mete 
raua ko Hirini Rikitona, kia huaki 
raua i tetahi mihona, pohiri i nga iwi 
katoa o te ao; a, e ai ta te Ariki, 
whakapohehetia o koutou hoa riri, 
pohiritia ratou kia ahu mai kia koutou, 
ki nga wahi e marama ai ki te katoa, 
ki nga wahi takitahi ranei. A ki te 
piripono korua, ka kitea nuitia te 
mumuratanga o to ratou wakama. No 
reira tukua ratou kia kawe mai i a 
ratou wakahe kaha mo te Ariki. Ko 
te putaketanga o tenei whakahau i ahu 
mai i te whakatakatunga a Etera Putu, 
he tangata kua taka ki waho o te hahi, 
a kei roto ia i nga rohe o Rawena 
(Ravenna), Ohaio, e panui haere ana 
i ana korero teka mote. Hahi I te 
taenga mai o te whakahau nei, ka whi- 
tiki a Hohepa Mete raua ko Hirini 
Rikitona i a raua, haere ana ki te 
whakatutuki i te karanga a tenei wha- 
kakitenga mo raua, ko te toru tenei o 
nga ra o Tihema. He roa'tonu te wa 
e kauwhau haere ana raua i nga wahi 
o Katirana, o Herawira (Shalersville) 
o Rawena, me etahi atu wahi, whaka- 
marama i nga tikanga, i pohehe ai te 
hoa riri, i kite ai hoki raua i te eke- 
nga ki te tika, o nga kupu whakaari 
mai kia raua. I whakawhiwhia raua 
ki te homaitanga o te Wairua o te 
Ariki, i kite hoki raua i te mutunga 
o ta te hoa riri me te whakahipanga i 
nga korero whanoke i perehitia ki 
roto i te nupepa "Ohio Star," i te 
taone o Rawena. 

Te Hui i Amahere 

I te 25, o Hanuere 1832. ka tu te 
hui ki Amahere Kauti o Rorena, Ohaio. 
(Ameherst, Loraine County, Ohio.) 
He maha rawa nga take i oti o tenei 
hui, i tau nui iho ai te Rangimarie o 
te Wairua whakakotahi. I tautoko- 
ngia ake a Hohepa Mete hei tumuaki 
mo te Tohungatanga Nui Ko te wha- 
kakitenga e mohiotia nei ko wahanga 
i nga Ako. Kawe i huakina mai i 



296 



TE KARERE 



tenei hui, i tonoa ai nga kaumatua 
kia haere a tokorua i nga wahi o te 
nuku-o-te-whenua, puta noa nga rohe 
maha. 

Te Whakakitenga o nga Kororia 

I te mutunga o te hui nei, ka timata 
ano a Hohepa Mete raua ko Hirini 
Rikitona ki ta raua mahi whakatika- 
tika i nga karaipiture. I a raua e mahi 
ana i tenei wahanga o a raua mahi, 
ka totoo ake te mohiotanga o roto i 
nga karaipiture ; o tenei korero, "ka 
whakautua nga tangata katoa kia 
rite ki nga mahi e mahia ana e tena, 
e tena ; ko te "Rangi" kua rite noa 
ake hei kainga mo te Hunga Tapu 
he rohe e karapoti ana a kei roto i 
taua rangi nga Kingitanga maha e 
karapotia ana. 

la Pepuere 16, 1832, i a raua e 
wananga ana i te "Rongopai a Hoani," 
i te mutunga o ta raua inoi, ka kowha 
te rangi kia raua, ka huaki, ka kite 
raua i te "Matua," i te "Tama" ano 
hoki. Ko te whakamaramatanga o 
tenei whakakitenga kei roto i tekiona 
76 Ako-Kawe. Ka kitea iho, ko tenei 
tetahi whakakitenga whaitikanga, o 
nga whakakitenga katoa i huakingia 
mai ki te tangata. Whaka-waipuke ana 
te maramatanga whakaatu mo nga wa 
mutunga kore, mo te huanui e iakahia 
e te tangata e matau ai ki nga mahi 
tohu a te Matua Aroha tonu, e whaka- 
ora nei la i nga mea katoa na Tona 
ringa i hanga, a i mavvehe mai i nga 
kino ; kaore i whakatete atu ki te 
maramatanga, a kaore hoki i ripeka 
ano i te "Kai Hoko" kia rite ki o 
ratou whakaaro. Kua rite moa ake he 
kainga mo tena mo tena i roto i te 
Whare Nui o te Matua, i muri ite 
murunga kia ma o ratou hara ; he 
huanui ra tenei ki te whaka oranga i 
takoto mai i mua noa atu i te hanga- 
nga o te ao, e ai ki ta te whakakitenga 
i kowha mai nei. Ka wawau noa iho 
tatou ki te tino paeke rawa i nga 
korero c tiaho ai te maramatanga mo 
tenei take, te mana, te nui o te aroha 
noa ii te Arikij e kore rawa e taea 
te korero, e kore e Kitea he kupu e 



tino marama ai ki te mohiotanga o te 
tangata. 

Ta Te Poropiti, Mo Tenei 
Whakakitenga 

Ko te whaikupu a te poropiti mo 
tenei huakitanga mai o nga rangi i 
korerotia e ia. Ko tana kupu tenei, 
"Onga mea katoa i tuhituhia e ia, 
kaore he tuhituhinga i nui atu te wha- 
kakoa ki nga hunga tapu, i tenei. E 
whakaatu mai ana i nga tikanga i wha- 
kaotia mo roto i Je rangatiratanga o te 
Ariki, i tiaho ai te maramatanga ki te 
ao katoa. Nga ture nga whakahau, nga 
kupu taunaha, pono me nga take katoa 
i pa ki te tutukitanga o te tangata 
ara ki tana tupu haere i te ao, e wha- 
kaaturia ake nei i a "Kenehi' 'tae noa 
ki nga "Whakakitenga a Hoani," o 
nga wahi karaipiture katoa kaore i 
poke i nga mahi hianga a te tangata, 
e whakaako ana i nga mohiotanga 
(theories) o nga tino wananga (o nga 
Kororia o te ao-amua). Katoa enei kua 
wherahia mai nei no roto i nga tuhi- 
tuhinga o te Ao Mutungakore." Te 
Ataahuatanga o nga whakaaro i puaki 
ake ; te tangi auriki o te reo ; te wha- 
nui o te wahi hei koringa ; e kore e 
kitea te mutunga mai ; kia whai wa 
ai te hunga katoa mo ratou nei te 
orangatonutanga, hei huringa mai mo 
ratou ki te whaki, ka piri pono ratou 
ki te Ariki, ka piko o ratou turi ki a 
Ia. Nga homaitanga ki te hunga katoa 
i piripono, nga whiu mo te hunga hara 
i teitei ki runga noa atu i nga whaka- 
aro whaiti o te tangata, i ngunguru ake 
ai a roto — "lahu mai ciwi mea i te 
Atua." 

Nga Ropu Tukino i 
Roto o Hairama 

I mua o te haerenga ki Hairama. 
Ohaio, ki reira noho ai raua, i tango 
a Hohepa Mote raua ko tana wahiiu- 
i etahi tamariki mahanga, hei whangai 
ma raua na te kaumatua na Hoani 
Matoke (John Murdock) nga tama- 
riki nei : i mate te whaea i te whaka- 
whanautanga. No te ra i whanau ai 

enei niahau.ua i whanau ai hoki nga 

mahanga a Ema Mete, otira, i mate a 



August, 1952 



297 



Ema, tango ana ia i nga mahanga a 
Matoke maana. I a Maehe, 1832, i te 

ekenga ki te tekau matahi marama te 
pakeke o nga mahanga, ka pangia e 
te mihara (measles) ; ka pa tenei hei 
potatu kia Hohepa raua ko Pmia i te 
ponana ki te tiaki i a raua mahanga. I 
te po o te 24, ote marama nei, kua 
takoto te whanau nei ki te moe ka 
rongo ake kua karapotia te whare e 
tetahi ropu o te hunga whakatoi, kaore 
i roa kua wahia mai te kuaha, kua 
uru mai, kua nanao ki ta ratou tangata 
e kinongia nei e ratou, ki te poropiti, 



toia atu ana ki waho. Ia ia e ioia atu 
ana ki waho ka matara tetahi o ana 
waewae e man ra i te hoa riri, whanaia 
ana e Hohepa tetahi o te hoa riri, 
hi nga ana tera ki raro. Ka puta i konei 
nga kangakanga ,nga korero kohu- 
kohu, ki te whakatete tonu a Hohepa 
ka kohurutia ia e ratou. I natia tona 
korokoro, hemo rawa, i tana ohonga 
ake ko Hirini Rikitonu kei reira iahi 
he mea to mai i tana kainga, e takoto 
ana ko te manawa anake e heahea ana 
kaore he mohio tanga ake ki te 
tangata. 



TRUTH FOUNDATION OF ALL RELIGION 



OUR hope of salvation must be 
founded upon the truth, the whole 
truth, and nothing but the truth, for 
we cannot build upon error and ascend 
into the courts of eternal truth and 
enjoy the glory and exaltation of the 
Kingdom of God. That cannot be done. 

We believe in righteousness. We be- 
lieve in all truth, no matter to what 
subject it may refer. No sect or re- 
ligious denomination in the world pos- 
sesses a single principle of truth that 
we do not accept or that we will reject. 

We are willing to receive all truth, 
from whatever source it may come ; 
for truth will stand, truth will endure. 
No man's faith, no man's religion, no 
religious organization in all the world, 
can ever rise above the truth. The 
truth must be at the foundation of 
religion, or it is in vain and it will 
fail of its purpose. 

I say that the truth is at the founda- 
tion, at the bottom and top of, and it 
entirely permeates this great work of 
the Lord that was established through 
the instrumentality of Joseph Smith, 
the Prophet. — President Joseph F. 
Smith. 

Our religion is nothing more nor 
less than the true order of Heaven — 
the system of laws by which the gods 
and angels are governed . . . Our re- 
ligion measures, weighs and circum- 



scribes all the wisdom in the world — 
all that God has ever revealed to man. 
God has revealed all the truth that 
is now in the possession of the world, 
whether it be scientific or religious. . . 

Our religion is simply the truth. It 
is all said in this one expression — it 
embraces all truth, wherever found, in 
all the works of God and man that 
are visible or invisible to mortal eye. 
— President Brigham Young. 

It is, in fact, the same Gospel that 
have been taught to man in every age 
and dispensation, as there is but one 
Gospel and that Gospel is adapted to 
the wants and conditions of all men. 
It is the gospel of truth and truth 
alone can make us free, free from sin 
and from the power of the adversary. 
And this is the Gospel which we have 
received and which we take the liberty 
of preaching to our fellow men . . . 

If any man has truth that we have 
not, we say, "Let us have it." I am 
willing to exchange all the errors and 
false notions I have for one truth, and 
should consider that I had made a 
good bargain. We are not afraid of 
light and truth. Our religion embraces 
every truth in Heaven, earth or hell ; 
it embraces all truth, the whole Gospel 
and plan of salvation, and the fulfil- 
ment of the whole volume of revelation 
that God has ever given. — President 
Wilford Woodruff. 



298 



TE KARERE 



Be Prepared When The 
Master Calls 



By E. E. Brown 

/;/ the land where we are going , 
When our earthly life is o'er. 
When our tired hands eease to striving, 
When our weary hearts ache no more. 
In the land of light and beauty 

II here no sadness ever came, 
To our hearts it's perfect (/lory 
What shall be our angel name. 
In the land of light and beauty 
Where no shadows ever fall 
To our souls it's perfect glory. 
Will the spirits that await us. 

Meet us at our entering their within/ 

With what name of love and rapture 

Will our welcoming there begin/ 

For our souls so dimmed with earthly strains 

Linked with thoughts of grief and blame. 

Now the one which Mortals call us. 

Will not be our angel's name. 

For the angels will not call us 

By the name we bore on earth. 

They will speak a nobler language 

Where we had our holier birth. 

There in heavenly music. 

Sweeter far than earthly claim, 

I 'cry gentle pure loving, 

Such will be our angel name. 

It has thrilled our spirits often, 

III the noblest of our dreams. 
But its beauty lingers near us. 
Only till the morning beams. 
Weary of the jarring discords 
Which the lips of mortals frame 
When shall we with joy and rapture 
. luswcr to our angels mime.' 



I DON'T CARE 

WHAT YOU 

SAY ! 



Your Lessons just aren't 
as good unless you sub- 
scribe to: — 




The Instructor 
Magazine 

15 - Per Year 



"THE INSTRUCTOR," 

514 Remuera Road, 
Auckland, S.E.2. 




. 9. 9W, 

THE MESSENGER 







SEPTEMBER :: 1952 



MONTHLY MAGAZINE OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 



Religion 



Religion is telling the truth in your trade. 

Without even counting the cost 
And having the courage to stand by the right. 

Though fortune and friends may be lost; 
Religion is thirty-six inches per yard, 

. lud sixteen full ounces per pound. 
And sixty whole minutes of -other men's time — 
„ Not watching these minutes roll 'round. 
Religion is giving a bright word or two 

To those whose dark clouds hide their sun. 
If you've got the kind of religion I mean. 

You'll find your day's labours well done. 

— Anonymous 



ABOUT THIS MONTH'S COVER: From these rich graz- 
ing lands come New Zealand's livelihood for its two 
million inhabitants, its basic industries being primarily 
farming or the processing of farm products. New Zea- 
land's place in the world economic set-up is supported 
by the cow and the sheep. New Zealanders should be very 
grateful unto their Heavenly Father for being born in 
such a beautiful land, where little or no poverty exists. 



Te Karere 



(ESTABLISHED 1907) 



Volume 46 



Number 9 



September, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley 

Joseph Hay 

George R. Biesinger 

James A. Larscn 

Albert J. Wiley 

David T. Briggs 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) 



Tumuaki Mihana 

. . Kaunihera Tuatahi 

Kaunihera Tuarua 

Hekeretari o te Mihana 

Mission Recorder 

Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 



"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; £2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



&entents 



Editorial: 

From the Editor's Pen 



Special Features: 

Evidence and Reconciliations . . 

Chastity the Guardian of the Home . . 

Church Leaders Advise on Temporal Matters 

Announcement 

Church Features: 

The President's Page 

The Women's Corner 

Seek Ye Learning 

The Sunday School in New Zealand . . 

Greetings to Our Genealogy Workrrs 

World Wide Church 

L.D. Prophets Speak 

Here and There in the Mission: 

Here and There in the Mission 
Featuring the Districts 

Tekihana Maori: 

Nc;i Pou-Tokomana 



310 
312 
31f, 

32 1 



B18 
3 1 '.» 
822 



K.,t,» i Te HIto 



m J 



By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 1 

HE KUPU AROHA 



| 



m 



$ 



SJ 






+-& 



•&-& 



i 



e — fore you make a promise Con — sid — cr ivell its importune 
I i 



M 



- P P I P- J 



L_L 



J_ 



_L 



4- 



And when made en — grave it up — on your heart 



FRIENDS, Brethren and Sisters, 
this little melody is a-round. Learn 
it — sing it — teach it to your children — 
everybody sing it — read the words 
again — then sing it again. 

What is a promise? Is it what the 
Americans call a Brush Off; just 
something to get rid of a person or a 
situation? Is it a passive assent, with- 
out any intention of fulfilling its re- 
quirements ? 

To a friend, it is the assurance that 
it will be done as spoken. To a busi- 
ness man, it is a bond. To God, it is a 
covenant. 

Mary says, "I'll meet you at the 
corner of X St. at 11.45. We will go 
to the shop and buy that Sunday 
School material and we will have lunch 
together and you will have time to re- 
turn to your job, on time." "Fine, I'll 
I'll be there," says Sally. 



Sally asks her manager for the privi- 
ledge of leaving work fifteen minutes 
early to keep her appointment with 
Mary, and her genial boss, knowing 
that Sally devotes her extra time to 
Church and child service, is happy to 
allow her the extra few minutes of 
time. 

On the corner of X St. it is raining 
and Sally has no umbrella. Twelve 
and twelve fifteen and no Mary. Sally 
is wet and very unhappy but she must 
wait ; a promise you know and after 
all, Mary might be ill, or, "I hope she 
hasn't had an accident. Besides, we 
must attend to this job so that Mary 
can prepare these things for Sunday 
School." 

Twelve forty-five — Sally is wet and 

miserable and no Mary. Twelve fifty, 

and Mary alights, nonchalantly, from 

(Continued on Page 306) 



30^ 



T E KARERE 



(5^°Q^Cr^Q^(5^Q^(?^Q^(?^C^6^Q^C?^Q^6^Q^6^Q^ 



Women's Cwm*, 

By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 



SEARCH the scriptures ; for in them 
ye think ye have eternal life : and 
they are they which testify of me. 
(John 5:39.) 

In the Relief Society we have been 
given a reading course to complete this 
year. How many of us are taking ad- 
vantage of this opportunity? For it is 
an opportunity when a certain amount 
of reading is given and a time set in 
which to do it to reach a certain goal. 
The General Board has done this to 
help us become more interested in 
searching the scriptures and becoming 
better acquainted with the Book of 
Mormon as our study course. We 
should not expect the class leader to 
do it all for us. If we do, she is the 
one who is gaining and making use 
of this wonderful opportunity. We are 
the losers, and it shows that our faith 
is not very strong. 

In the D. & C. 88:118 we read, "And 
as all have not faith, seek ye diligently 
and teach one another words of wis- 
dom ; yea, seek ye out of the best books 
words of wisdom; seek learning, even 
by study and also by faith." 

We cannot all be teachers or preach- 
ers but we can all be readers. It is 
surprising what can be accomplished 
by reading just one chapter a day 
and thai could be done al tllght, even 
alter retiring. When we get started 

on the Book of Ether, I don't believe 

we can be satisfied with one chapter. 



fcl 



Before we realize it we have read two 
or three and wish we could stay awake 
to read more. 

Pres. McKay says : "It is well to 
know, we as individuals seldom use 
more than a small part of our ability." 
his can be applied to reading as in 
many other things we do. We don't 
know how much we can do until we 
try it out and when we give it a fair 
trial we find we can accomplish more 
than we thought at first. 

Let us see to it that our name shall 
be among the number of women who 
have completed the reading course 
when this report is called for, not just 
to make a good report but to be 
counted among the number who are 
learning and improving themselves. 
This report will be called for some- 
time in December. 

At the end of September the Relief 
Society sisters will have finished the 
lessons as outlined in the magazine, if 
they have kept right up to date. Then 
they will have the month of October 
to finish up any handwork, bazaar 
work or any lessons they may have 
missed. The first Sunday night in No- 
vember will hi' Relief Society Confer- 
ence (the programme will he senl 
to you), and some of the time in 
( ). tober can be used to prepare this 

programme. Then you maj adjourn 

until the last week in February, if you 

wish, excepl for meeting once a month 

for work meeting. 



September, 1952 



305 



If you wish to carry on right 
through the year that will be permis- 
sible, but there are no lessons outlined. 
You may study something else if you 
desire. It is our hope that we can all 
start together in February, 1953, on 



the second year's Book of Mormon 
lessons and all keep together to make 
the work uniform. It makes it much 
easier for us to send you instructions 
if we have uniformity and work to- 
gether. 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE (Continued from Page 304) 



the tram and says, "I hope you haven't 
been waiting long. You know, I was 
reading the most interesting novel and 
I forgot all about the time." 

In ten minutes, they hurriedly look 
through the shop and make the pur- 
chase (all they have time to look for 
at this late moment), but it will have 
to do. Sally gets no lunch and is wet 
and miserable, and she walks back to 
her office, ten minutes late, to be met 
with a very unapproving glare from 
her boss, and knowing full well that 
there will be fireworks if she should 
ask for extra time off again. "Is it 
worth w T hile for a working girl to try 
to teach a Sunday School class ? Some- 
times, I wonder." And Mary? — Oh, 
she gets a sandwich at the milk bar 
and then decides that she will go to a 
show for the afternoon. The work for 
Sunday School class can wait. 

Mary, Mary, you have broken faith 
with your dearest friend and co- 
worker; you have broken faith with 
your Sunday School children whose 
anxious little minds are going to be 
disappointed because teacher is un- 
prepared; you have broken faith with 
your God, for didn't He say, "He who 
hath offended these little ones, hath 
offended Me ?" You didn't realize what 
you had done, did you, Mary? 



Several busy men decided to hold 
conference on a matter of business, at 
the office of Mr. A. at ten thirty. Mr. 
A. was already at his office at that 
hour and B. and C. arrived on time. 
It was necessary that they be on time 
as they had other appointments in an 
hour. D. and E. arrived ten minutes 
late. A., B., C. waited ten minutes 
(30 minutes lost). F., G. and H. 
arrived twenty minutes later (60 min- 
utes lost). The meeting was called to 
order and the business hurriedly and 
nervously taken care of and adjourned. 

Three men waiting in the outer 
office for Mr. A. had wasted 60 min- 
utes. Five men with whom B. and C. 
had appointments were held up 100 
minutes. The men who were waiting 
for F., G. H. failed to wait for them 
and the business was off. Over four 
lost hours accounted for and who can 
tell how many more, in the course of 
the day, developed ulcers and inefficient 
work? Why? Because men failed to 
keep a simple promise. 

SHAW. WE SING' ONCE MORE 
BEFORE WE LEAVE? BEFORE 
YOU MAKE A PROMISE, CON- 
SIDER ITS IMPORTANCE. AND 
WHEN MADE, ENGRAVE IT 
UPON YOUR HEART. 



306 



TE KARERE 



Zfrcm Ike Editor's 'Pen . . . 

Obedience ! The First Law 
of Heaven 



AX ancient sage once wrote: 
"Obedience to truth known is the 
king's highway to that which is still 
beyond us." Scientists and seekers after 
further truth, have observed the truths 
which they knew of, and have found 
that through obedience to these laws, 
the elements can be brought into sub- 
jection and be made to work for man's 
benefit. But if these laws are broken, 
in the subjection of the elements they 
can destroy man. Electricity, when 
brought into subjection through obedi- 
ence to the laws of electronics, becomes 
a means of warming, lighting and 
cooking for man. While we are speak- 
ing of electricity at this point an ex- 
ample could be inserted: Imagine, if 
you can, a person who has never seen 
an electric light; think of him being 
brought into your home fitted with 
modern conveniences. He tells you of 
the primitive conditions existing in the 
place from which he has been brought. 
Tis evening ; the dusk is deepening 
into darkness. The only artificial illu- 
minants he has known are candles or 
crude oil-lamps. You lead him to the 
wall, and direct his attention to the 
push-button. You bid him press the 
button, telling him that if he will do 
so the room will be immediately lighted 
up, with brilliancy beyond all he has 
ever known indoors. He is sceptical, 
suspicious, perhaps; he thinks that you 
may have arranged some kind of trap 
for him; he refuses to do your bidding 
and remains in darkness. Now, if he 
would have closed the circuit, tin- 
room would have immediately been 
flooded with Light, whether he under 
stood just how it all came about or 



not. The same can be applied to Bap- 
tism or any other ordinance of the 
Gospel, whether we understand fully 
how the blessings can come through 
complying with these commandments, 
they do come as many can testify. The 
Lord says do so and so, and I will 
bless you. John 7:16-17 gives a prom- 
ise to those who would like to know 
of the Gospel and its teachings : Jesus 
answered them, and said, My doctrine 
is not mine but his that sent me. If a 
man will do his will, he shall know of 
the doctrine, whether it be of God, or 
whether I speak of myself. It is a con- 
tract if you will do so and so, I will 
do so and so. It is also expressed in 
modern revelation to the Prophet 
Joseph Smith a contract between God 
and man : I, the Lord, am bound when 
ye do what I say ; but when ye do not 
what I say, ye have no promise. — D. 
& C., 82:10. 

We find that down through from 
the beginning of time man learned to 
be obedient. Adam learned obedience 
and complied with the commandments 
given unto him by God. Even though 
he didn't know why he was to comply 
with certain ordinances, he complied 
with them anyway because God had 
commanded it. "And after many days 

an Angel of the Lord appeared unto 
Adam, saying: Why dost thou offer 
sat rifices unto the I .ord i And Adam 
said unto him: I know not. save the 
Lord commanded it." Through Adam's 
obedience, the Lord -aw that it was 
now necessary for Adam to ho told 
why he was to offer sacrifices, that 
he mighl teach his Sons and Daughters 



September, 1952 



307 



(;f the Gospel plan. "And Adam and 
Eve in that day blessed the name of 
God, and made known all things unto 
their sons and their daughters." 
( Moses 5:6. 12.) 

We find that Enoch was so faithful 
in keeping the commandments of God 
that he was taken into Heaven with- 
out tasting death. Noah was also 
obedient to the commandments of God 
and was the means of saving his wife 
and family from destruction. Abraham 
was faithful and obedient in keeping 
the commandments of God, even to 
the offering up of his only son as a 
sacrifice. "And the Angel of the Lord 
called unto him out of Heaven, and 
said, Abraham, Abraham : and he said, 
Here am I. And he said, Lay not thine 
hand upon the lad, neither do thou any- 
thing unto him : for now I know that 
thou fearest God, . seeing thou has not 
withheld thy son, thine only son from 
me. And the Lord said, unto Abraham, 
And in thy seed shall all the nations 
of the earth be blessed ; because thou 
hast obeyed my voice." (Genesis 22:11, 
12, 18.) And Samuel said unto Saul, 
Hath the Lord as great delight in 
burnt offerings and sacrifices, as in 
obeying the voice of the Lord ? Behold, 
to obey is better than sacrifice, and to 
hearken than the fat of rams. (1 Sam- 
uel 15:22.) 

The account of the Widow's oil 
being multiplied is a good example of 
obedience and the blessings derived, 
"Now there cried a certain woman of 
the wives of the sons of the prophets 
unto Elisha, saying, Thy servant my 
husband is dead ; and thou knowest 
that thy servant did fear the Lord ; 
and the creditor is come to take unto 
him my two sons to be bondmen. And 
Elisha said unto her, What shall I do 
for thee? Tell me, what hast thou in 
the house? And she said, Thine hand- 
maid hath not anything in the house, 
save a pot of oil. Then he said, Go, 
borrow thee vessels abroad of all thy 
neighbours, even empty vessels ; bor- 



row not a few. And when thou art 
co! in- in, thou shalt shut the door upon 
thee and upon thy sons, and shalt pour 
out into all those vessels, and thou 
shalt set aside that which is full. So 
she went from him, and shut the door 
upon her and upon her sons, who 
brought the vessels to her ; and she 
poured out. And it came to pass, when 
the vessels were full, that she said 
unto her son, Bring me yet a vessel. 
And he said unto her, There is not 
a vesesl more. And the oil stayed. 
Then she came and told the man of 
God. And he said, God, sell the oil, 
and pay thy debt, and live thou and 
thy children of the rest. (11 Kings 
4:1-7.) The materialist or sceptic 
might say, "I don't believe such a thing 
could happen." Which is to say, they 
take upon themselves an attribute that 
belongs to Our Heavenly Father alone, 
"Omniscience." They blasphem against 
God, in limiting His powers to the 
mere knowledge of puny man. I be- 
lieve that the Second Book of Kings is 
a valid history of God's dealings with 
man at that time. 

The most perfect example of obedi- 
ence was expressed in the actions of 
the Saviour during His duration upon 
the earth. "Who in the days of His 
flesh, when He had offered up prayers 
and supplication? with strong crying 
and tears unto Him that w T as able to 
save Him from death, and was heard 
in that He feared. Though He was a 
Son. yet learned He obedience by the 
things which He suffered. And being- 
made perfect, He became the author of 
eternal salvation unto all them that 
obey Him. (Hebrews 5:7-9.) 

One incident occurring in the life 
of the Saviour which expressed obedi- 
ence and was pleasing in the sight of 
His Father, was His baptism. To give 
us an idea of what took place at that 
time let us review this ordinance. 
"Then cometh Jesus from Galilee to 
Jordan unto John, to be baptized of 
him. But John forbade him, saying, I 



308 



TE KARERE 



have need to be baptized of thee, and 
comest thou to me ? And Jesus answer- 
ing said unto him, Suffer it to be so 
now : ior thus it becometh us to iulfiM 
all righteousness. Then he suffered 
him. And Jesus, when He was bap- 
tized, went up straightaway out of the 
water : and lo, the Heavens were 
opened unto Him, and He saw the 
Spirit of God descending like a dove, 
and lighting upon Him : And lo a voice 
from Heaven, saying, This is My Be- 
loved Son, in whom I am well 
pleased." (Matthew 3:13-17.) And 
why was God well pleased with His 
Son? Because His Son was being 
obedient to the Plan which was set 
forth in the Great Council in Heaven, 
before the world was. Though perfect, 
He recognized the necessity of setting 
the example unto those who were to 
follow Him in the Gospel Plan. 

From reading and studying the Holy 
writ, we understand that baptism by 
immersion in water was and is per- 
formed (in the Church of Jesus 
Christ) for the remission of sins. Now 
the sceptic and unbeliever might say, 
"How can being immersed in water 
take away one's sins and make one 
clean? Has the water any cleansing 
power?" No, it isn't the water that 
cleanses one, but it is being obedient 
to the commandment of the Lord, that 
casts off the old body of sin and causes 
a rebirth or newness of life. Being im- 
merised in water is the most perfect 
example or symbol of being born 
again ; therefore it was instituted in the 
Gospel Plan. And no matter how 
simple it may seem, the Saviour in 
speaking to Nicodemus explained just 
how necessary it is to our Salvation, 
"Except a man be born of the water 
and of the Spirit, he cannot enter into 
the Kingdom of God. We must be 
obedient to this commandment!" 



"It is impossible for a man to be 
saved in ignorance," because if he is 
ignorant of the Gospel Plan how can 
he be obedient and thus receive the 
reward of eternal life ? We must study 
and find cut just what Our Heavenly 
Father expects of us, that we may be 
obedient and thus reap the reward. 
"The Glory of God is Intelligence." 
Let us use the knowledge which we 
acquire wisely and intelligently. Thus 
being obedient to the truths known, 
and obtaining freedom, progress and 
Glorifying Our Father which is in 
Heaven. 

Summed Up In a Few Words: 

Only as we learn truth and obey it 
do we find freedom and progress. 

Obedience to the laws of physics 
frees us from cold, darkness and in- 
ability and gives us heat, light and 
power. 

Obedience to the laws of health frees 
us from distress and disease and gives 
us vigour and comfort of body. 

Obedience to the laws of learning 
frees us from ignorance and super- 
stition and gives us knowledge and 
wisdom. 

Obedience to the laws of society 
would free us from strife and conten- 
tion and give us peace and harmonious 
living. 

Obedience to the laws of the Gospel 
free us from the grasp of the evil 

one and give US salvation and exalta- 
tion. 

Obedience to the laws of God would 

free US from all Opposing powers and 
give us joy inexpressible and eternal. 

— E.L.M. 



. hiy fool can criticise, condemn, and complain mid most tools </<>. 
Bui it takes char at ter and self-control to he understanding and forgiving. 



Septe 



1952 



309 



Evidences and Reconciliations 



ty&lial is lite %eed of. 



&J, 



i n a nee 



By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



IF a person has faith in God, is 
repentant and tries to live the moral 
code, why does he need to be baptized 
and receive other ordinances of the 
Gospel ? That is an old question. 

To this query, usually honestly 
made, there are several answers. 

First : The Church of Christ is 
divinely organized. It is not man-made. 
The conditions for membership have 
been clearly defined by the Lord. 
Among the requirements are several 
ordinances, baptism being the basic 
one. Ordinances are necessary because 
the Lord has so decreed. The Lord 
Himself while on earth, as an example 
to us, submitted to ordinances, as in 
baptism. There is no other way to 
membership in Christ's own organisa- 
tion. This, of course, should be a 
sufficient answer to those who believe 
that the Church was founded by the 
Lord, and that in all we do, we con- 
form to His will. We cannot go be- 
yond or around the Lord's Plan. 

Members of the Church who ask 
about the need of ordinances should 
begin with a consideration of God, His 
existence, His hand-dealings with man, 
and His laws for human salvation. 
If these fundamentals are found to be 
secure, ordinances become a welcomed 
activity in achieving the high gifts 
of the Lord. 

In the words of Wilford Woodruff : 
I have heard many men say no ordin- 
ances are necessary, that belief only in 
the Lord Jesus Christ is necessary to 
be saved. I have not learned that my- 



self from any revelation of God to 
men, either ancient or modern. But on 
the contrary, faith in Christ, repent- 
ance, and baptism for the remission of 
sin were taught by patriarchs and pro- 
phets and by Jesus Christ and His 
apostles. Baptism for the remission of 
sins is an ordinance of the Gospel. 
Says one, baptism is not essential to 
salvation. Jesus not only taught it, but 
rendered obedience Himself to that re- 
quirement, not that He was baptized 
for the remission of sins, but, as He 
said, "to fulfil all righteousness," thus 
in this, as in all other respects giving 
the example for all who follow. When 
these principles of the Gospel are com- 
plied with a man is then a fit subject 
to receive the Holy Ghost and this 
holy gift is bestowed today as it was 
anciently, by the laying on of hands 
by men possessing the authority to 
administer in the ordinances of the 
Gospel. These are the first principles 
of the Gospel which we Latter-day 
Saints believe in and teach to our 
fellow men.*l 

Second : The Lord's requirements, 
never arbitrary, follow logically from 
principle to principle. 

With regard to the ordinances of 
God, we may remark that we yield 
obedince to them because he requires 
it; and every iota of his requirements 
has a rational philosophy with it. We 
do not get up things on a hypothesis. 
That philosophy reaches to all eternity, 
and is the philosophy that the Latter- 
dav Saints believe in.*2 



310 



TE KARERE 



There are two first principles, faith 
and repentance, and two first ordin- 
ances, baptism and the laying on of 
hands for the gift of the Holy Ghost 
in the Church of Christ. These are 
closely interwoven. Faith is the first 
principle, upon which other principles 
rest, and in the end all ordinances are 
derivatives of faith. But faith must 
be expressed in human actions, else 
it cannot be known. A man proves 
his faith by his works ; he has no 
other means of doing so. The ordinance 
of baptism for example may be viewed 
as man's signature to his compact with 
God, as an acceptance of the leader- 
ship of Jesus the Christ, and as a 
promise to live the law of the Lord — 
the things that would be expected from 
one who has acquired faith. Baptism 
is a logical sequence of faith. Every 
ordinance becomes in like manner a 
necessary tangible outward evidence of 
some phase of that inward conviction 
called faith. Each ordinance, in its 
place, becomes a logical acquiescence 
with some part of the vast territory 
covered by faith. Each ordinance be- 
comes a witness of man's surrender to 
his Heavenly Father. 

Being baptized into this Church is 
only like learning the alphabet of our 
mother tongue — it is the very first step. 
But having received the first principles 
of the Gospel of Christ, let us go on 
to perfection. *3. 

Third : Ordinances give life to faith 
because they require a covenant from 
those who participate. Faith is a prin- 
ciple that demands action. Whether it 
is faith in a law doctrine, or plan 
relative to human affairs, it fails unless 
it leads to a practice, rite, or ceremony. 
Otherwise it remains an idle belief, an 
abstract conviction, a theory. The 



moment it is used, as in an ordinance, 
it flames into life, and leaps into the 
world of practical affairs, becoming a 
positive power, helpful in the world of 
men. 

Everyone who receives an ordinance 
must make a covenant, else the ordin- 
ance is not fully satisfactory. He who 
is baptized covenants to keep the law 
of the Church ; he who is administered 
to for sickness, and the administrators, 
covenant to use their faith to secure 
the desired healings ; he who receives 
the temple endowment covenants to 
use in his life that which he has been 
taught ; he who is ordained to the 
Priesthood agrees to honour it, and 
so on with every ordinance. 

That places covenants high, as they 
should be. Knowledge of itself has 
little saving power. Only as it is used 
does knowledge become of value. The 
man who learns and promises to use 
that knowledge is of value to society. 
To accept the plan of salvation with- 
out promising to comply with its re- 
quirements will result in something- 
worse than ignorance. The world 
moves forward by the efforts of cove- 
nanted people — who keep their cove- 
nants. 

So, whether from the point of view 
of obedience to the Lord's command, 
or of logical necessity, or of giving life 
to human knowledge for the good of 
mankind, ordinances are necessary and 
desirable. 

*] Discourses of Wilford Woodruff, 

p.19. 

*2Discourscs of Brigham Young, 
p.152 (1943 edition). 

^Discourses of Wilford Woodruff, 
p. 20. 



Hell Is ///«• knowledge of opportunity lost ///,• />/</<•<• 
/ mil comes face to face with the man I might have bt 



whe 



//;<• ///(/;; 



September, 1952 



311 



if Talk given at Maromaku Branch Conference, held on June 29, 1952, by Elder 
Richard Horsford. Elder Horsford joined the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day 
Saints two years ago, and has been very active in the Maromaku Branch ever since. 



Chastity the Guardian of 
the Home 

By ELDER RICHARD HORSFORD 




ACCORDING to the Thirteenth 
Article of Faith we believe in 
being Chaste and Virtuous, along with 
other things. Today I'm going to use 
these two words synonymously. One 
does not need to be widely travelled 
to discover what position immorality 
helds in the world today. It is a fast 
growing menace and the First Presi- 
dency are continually entreating all to 
be Chaste. 

Why should we be chaste? Because 
God commanded it, is the answer Pres. 
J. Rueben Clark gives to the question. 
Anyway, what is there to be gained 
by being unchaste? We were placed 
on this earth clean and pure, and given 
our free agency, yet, many have given 
up this agency and became slaves to 
sensuality which is as powerful as any 
drug. 

A growing belief, or perhaps we 
could call it an excuse, is that sex 
desire is planted in us solely for the 



pleasures of full gratification and that 
the begetting of children is just an 
unfortunate incident. Adam and Eve 
were commanded to multiply and re- 
plenish the earth, so we can see how 
erroneous this belief is. As Pres. Clark 
said, "Sex desire is planted in us in 
order to beget bodies to house the 
spirits and the pleasure and gratifica- 
tion of the desire is an incident, not 
the primary purpose of the desire." 

Another erroneous belief is that a 
man in his youth may sow his wild 
oats, yet this same man expects a 
virgin to follow him up the aisle on 
his wedding day. No young man has 
any more right to show his wild oats 
than has a young girl and he is ex- 
pected to give the same purity as he 
hopes to receive at the altar. 

This subject is one that is usually 
addressed to the unmarried people, but 
Pres. Clark does not draw the line 
there, but entreats the married to be 
chaste as well and points out that the 
prime purpose of sex desire is to beget 
children and that sex gratification may 
be had at that hazard. If parents are 
lax in their morals, what may they 
expect from their children but un- 
chastity. Unchastity is one of the many 
reasons for the growing rate of 
divorces. Marriage is not just a legal 
contract for sex gratification. 

How are we all going to guard our- 
selves against this enemy? First we 
must think clean and pure thoughts, 
for as a man or woman thinketh in 



312 



TE KARERE 



their heart, so are they. We cannot 
hide our thoughts forever for sooner 
or later they will make themselves 
evident in our actions. We are told we 
must not commit adultery, also if we 
so much as lust after a woman we are 
guilty of adultery, so from that we 
see how important it is that we think 
cleanly. Pres. George Albert Smith 
once made this statement, "What a 
man is at the close of his life will be 
the sum total of his thoughts through- 
out it." Thus we can see that our 
thoughts go a long way towards our 
success in life. 

Some people claim that sex educa- 
tion in schools as well as sex litera- 
ture be made available to the growing- 
youth as a means of overcoming im- 
morality. This has been tried in some 
places. Pres. Clark says, "I found that 
in a lot of cases the teachings only 
arouse curiosity for experience. Others 
say that these teachings tell enough 
about the reproduction of human be- 
ings to enable youth largely to escape 
parenthood. One doesn't need to know- 
all the details of reproduction pro- 
cesses in order to keep clean. 

Secondly we must choose our friends 
wisely. Our lives are determined 
largely by the influence that various 
environments have on us. Sociologists 
have proved that twin boys parted at 
birth and raised in different environ- 
ments, one good, one bad, will grow 
up in accordance with the environment 
in which they live. A person fighting 
temptation either grows very weak or 
very strong, but why take chances ? 
There are plenty of good people to 
mix with without getting too deeply 
entangled with the bad. 



Probably we have all heard of the 
girl who had at some time or other 
been dated by a comparative stranger. 
To all appearances he seems to be a 
very decent chap, but she doesn't know 
whether to accept or not. Sometimes 
the answer can be obtained from the 
whispers of "old man conscience," 
sometimes not, but should she decide to 
accept, she could be likened to a 
motorist who wishes to travel an un- 
know gorge. The motorist knows what 
a little carelessness, or a little too far 
to one side of the road or the other 
may mean an accident that will leave 
his body scarred for life and so he 
exercises extreme care, more so than 
when he is on a road he knows well. 
So with the girl, if she exercises ex- 
treme care with the stranger she may 
travel another road in life safely, and. 
who knows, it may turn out to be 
the main highway in her life. If on 
the other hand she is a bit forward and 
inviting, she will not receive as much 
respect as she may do. Remember that 
it takes two to make a bargain and if 
the girls conduct is such that she 
arouses the boy's passions then she, 
too, will be held accountable. 

To quote Pres. Clark once more 
with a further word to the young- 
women, "Any man who demands chas- 
tity as the price of his love is offering 
something that is not worth the pur- 
chase price. His love will turn to dust 
and lead you to a life of misery and 
shame and possibly curse you with a 
dreaded disease that can reoccur in 
your future generations." 

Better to be clean and have the spirit 

of the Lord to dwell in US, to guide 
us. than to be unclean and be turned 
over to the bufferings of Satan. 



//; the society of thine equals thou shall enjoy more pleasure; in the 
ciety 'i thy superiors thou shall find >n<>st profit. 



September, 1952 



313 



Seek Ye Learning 



WHAT CAUSES A FOG? 



THERE are various kinds of fog, 
such as a "ground mist," a "sea 
fog*' and the "pea soup" fog we observe 
in London and other large cities. Gen- 
erally, on the land, fog is caused in 
valleys where the ground is cold and 
moist, and the air comparatively warm. 
The absence of wind also helps the 
formation of fog, and, in fact, except 
during the summer, in London, a fog 
is almost bound to follow the dis- 
appearance of wind. Sea fogs are 
formed like clouds. Warm air contain- 
ing moisture meets cold sea, and the 
water condenses into minute drops, 
which are not big enough to fall as 
rain. Sometimes at sea, fog is accom- 
panied by a certain amount of wind. 

In addition to these fogs, there is 
"haze," which is almost entirely dust, 
fumes and similar substances. 



The fogs of our great cities, which 
descend like a black or yellow pall, are 
bad because of the impurities in the 
air. Every time we light a coal fire, 
we contribute to the next fog. The 
small pieces of carbon, which we call 
"smoke," travel upwards, float about, 
and when suitable weather conditions 
occur, descend like a cloud. One hun- 
dred and seven tons of waste matter 
sent up into the air may fall on a 
single square mile of land in London 
every year ! It is always cold during a 
fog, because the particles cut off the 
heat and ultra-violet rays from the 
sun. It is estimated that London loses 
350 hours of sunshine a year through 
the contamination of the air. 



HOW IS THE WEATHER FORECAST? 



LONG before there was anyone to 
tell us on the wireless what weather 
we are to expect, there were ways 
known to sailors and farmers of fore- 
telling the weather. They were not 
written in books, but were told by 
word of mouth. There were rhymes 
which were handed down from father 
to son. 

"A red sky at night — Is the shep- 
herd's delight ; A red sky in the morn- 
ing — Is the shepherd's warning." 

"Seagull, seagull, sit on the sand — 
It's never good weather when you're 
on the land." 

That seems to show that birds as 
well as men may be weather wise. 

There were long ago in the ancient 
world men who were able to read the 
skies ; and to this day, if you are in 



the country and want to know whether 
it is safe to plan a picnic for to-day, 
you cannot do better than ask an old 
shepherd. He watches the skies. He 
knows that if the distant hills are very 
clear, we may expect a wet or a 
windy day. He looks at the flowers, 
some of which are very sensitive to 
the atmosphere, and close up when it 
is dull. And there is nearly always in 
his cottage some seaweed, which is a 
very useful guide to tell us how much 
moisture there is in the air. The air 
has more moisture than it can carry, 
so that it gives some to the seaweed, 
and it is damp. This makes it likely 
that it may rain, but there are other 
facts to be borne in mind. 

There is over all things on this earth 
the atmosphere, which presses down 
upon us with a greater or less weight. 



314 



TE KARERE 



In order to measure what that pressure 
is, we have the instrument known as 
the barometer. That tells us only the 
weight of the atmosphere, but nothing 
about the moisture. When we look at 
the barometer, we say that it is high 
or low, or that it has risen or is fall- 
ing. Sometimes even, we read on our 
barometers the words "rainy" or "fine" 
against certain marks which show how 
the column of mercury is, for a baro- 
meter is really a column of mercury 
which registers the heaviness or light- 
ness of the air. 

But when we know what the pres- 
sure of the air is, and what the mois- 
ture is, we do not know yet all that 
we need to know. 

Speaking generally, it is more im- 
portant to notice changes in the column 
of mercury, and that is why, when we 
tap the barometer, we say that it is 
rising or falling, and we know a little 
of the weather that is coming. The 
movement on the glass tells us not so 
much of what is, but of what is com- 
ing. But today, thanks to the discovery 
of wireless and the services of the 
B.B.C., we know far more positively 
than our fathers did what the weather 
is going to be. 

At the great wireless stations, they 
can receive reports from East and 
West, North and South. Ships on 
the Atlantic can tell what is the direc- 
tion of the winds. On the waves of 
the air there comes messages from 
Iceland and the Azores and elsewhere. 
Learned men make a map of the winds, 
and this we can see in our daily papers. 
Promptly, when the news begins on 
the National or the Regional, we 
hear the announcer tell US that there 
is a high ridge of pressure over Ice- 
land or thai an anticyclone is ap- 
proaching from the Atlantic, and after- 
wards he tells us what weather we are 
t<> expe< t. Farmers, more than all 
people, listen for this report, because 



it means much to them to choose the 
right day, for example, to begin the 
harvesting of the corn. But there are 
few of us who do not listen-in for the 
"weather." 

These prophets of the weather are 
always using the words "cyclone" and 
"anticyclone," and we do not need to 
listen to them often before learning 
that when they say a cyclone is com- 
ing, they go on to tell us that the 
weather will be unsettled or rainy. 
And when they report that an anti- 
cyclone is on the way, we are prepared 
to hear that the weather will be fine. 
The cyclone in some countries is a 
tremendous force sweeping away all 
things in its paths ; but it need not be 
like that. We can see the real char- 
acter of it on our roads when little 
eddies of dust blown by the wind be- 
come like a funnel whirling round 
and round and going upwards ; these 
are cyclones ; but when we think of 
the weather, we have to think of a 
cyclone covering miles and miles of the 
sky ; they come often from a great dis- 
tance. An anticyclone is, as its name 
shows, the opposite of a cyclone. It has 
a central area with high barometer, a 
cyclone has low barometer. Some of 
the air round an anticyclone descends, 
getting warmer and drier as it reaches 
the ground, whereas there is consider- 
able ascent of air which produces rain 
in a cyclone. When there is an anti- 
cyclone, the weather, whether it is in 
winter or in summer, becomes dry. 
The cyclone brings a falling baro- 
meter, the anticyclone a rising one. 

In this country it is very useful to 
have these forecasts of the weather, 
hut there are countries in which it may 
make a difference of life and death to 
know that a tomado or cyclone is com- 
ing. And sailors « . 1 1 the sea know how 
much it means to have warning iA 
weather conditions. Today, it' the\ have 
their wireless, they are much more 

rarely taken by surprise, 



September, 1952 



315 



Church Leaders Advise on 
Temporal Matters 



HFO the Youth of the Church . . . 
-!■- we plead with you to live clean, 
for the unclean life leads only to 
suffering, misery, and woe physically — 
and spiritually it is the path to destruc- 
tion. How glorious and near to the 
angles is youth that is clean ; this 
youth has joy unspeakable here and 
eternal happiness hereafter. Sexual 
purity is youth's most precious posses- 
sion ; it is the foundation of all right- 
eousness. Better dead, clean, than alive, 
unclean. 

Times approach when we shall need 
all the health, strength, and spiritual 
power we can get to bear the afflic- 
tions that will come upon us. 

We renew the counsel given to the 
Saints from the days of Brigham 
Young until now — be honest, truthful, 
industrious, frugal, thrifty. In the day 
of plenty, prepare for the day of 
scarcity. The principles of the fat and 
lean kine, is as applicable today as it 
was in the days when, on the banks of 
the Nile, Joseph interpreted Pharaoh's 
dream. Officials now warn us, and 
warn again, that scant days are coming. 

WE RENEW OUR COUNSEL, 
and repeat our instructions : Let every 
Latter-day Saint that has land produce 
some valuable, essential foodstuff 
thereon and then preserve it ; or if 
he cannot produce an essential food- 
stuff, let him produce some other kind 
and exchange it for an essential food- 
stuff ; let them who have no land of 
their own, and who have knowledge 



of farming and gardening, try to rent 
some either by themselves or with 
others, and produce foodstuff thereon, 
and preserve it. Let those who have 
land produce enough extra to help their 
less fortunate brethren. 

The Welfare Plan should be carried 
forward with redoubled energy that 
we may care for the worthy, needy 
poor and unfortunate, and many of us 
may hereafter enter that class who 
now feel we are secure from want. 

AS THE CHURCH has always 
urged since we came to the valley, so 
now we urge every Church house- 
holder to have a year's supply of 
essential foodstuffs ahead. This should, 
so far as possible, be produced by each 
householder and preserved by him. 
This course will not only relieve from 
any impending distress those house- 
holds who so provide themselves but 
will release just that much food to the 
general national store of foodstuffs 
from which the public at large must 
be fed. 

The utmost care should be taken to 
see that foodstuffs so produced and 
preserved by the householder do not 
spoil, for that would be waste and 
the Lord looks with disfavour upon 
waste. He has blessed His people with 
abundant crops ; the promise for this 
year is most hopeful. The Lord is 
doing His part ; He expects us to do 
ours. (Message of First Presidency, 
April, 1942.) 



It's not what others do for us that builds us up, but rather what zve 
do for others. 



316 



TE KARERE 



THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN 
NEW ZEALAND 



By ELDER GARTH LOW 



OXCE again we meet in the Tc 
Karere, another month is gone 
and we have either progressed or 
retrogressed. Which have yon done, in 
your Sunday School ? 

First a few points of interest to you 
all. We now have all Sunday School 
books but the Superintendent's Hand 
Book, which will be some time yet 
in coming. The projectors I have 
spoken to you about, are not obtain- 
able, also films, much to my sorrow, 
so we will have to forget about them 
for now. 

"Fares, Please," is something that 
I hear on the tram most every day, 
yes, fares that will pay your way to 
the end of the line. There is another 
kind of fare that I am thinking of and 
that is the one that we will have to pay 
or have paid before the end of our life. 
As we move along the path of life 
we find many obstacles that must be 
surmounted and many are the trials 
that must be endured. Maybe we try 
hard or at least we think we are trying- 
hard. Then again we just sit back and 
let the other fellow think about how 
to overcome the problems. 

At times we think that everything 
i- against us, we complain bitterly if 
we have to put forth a little effort 
on our part. And often times we think- 
that the Lord should do everything for 
ns. while we just ask for help and 
never do anything to help ourselves. 
Then for a while we do put our 
shoulder to the wheel, and work hard 
for the I ,ord ; we take on new jobs 
that the Lord has for ns and do our 
best for a little season, but then once 

again we find the road a little tough 




so we become sluggish and fall into 
the background. Let us be consistent 
at all times ; the Lord dislikes a ser- 
vant that is lukewarm. Let us take up 
the cross and do our share. Don't 
leave it to those always faithful few ; 
put your shoulder to the wheel and 
push along ; be valient sons of God 
and worthy of the name. The faithful 
few never complain because they work 
so hard that they don't have time to 
think about complaining. They are the 
ones that endure to the end and blessed 
are they. Many of us fit into one of 
these groups. I wonder which one it 
is? Which one do you fit in? I am 
not trying to point my finger at any 
one person in particular at all. I just 
want you to think you are doing what 
is best for yourselves, your children. 
and in the building up of the Kingdom 
of Gbd here in Xew Zealand. The 
Lord has work for us to (1,1 and there 

is not too many to do the work. So 

if you have the opportunity to serve 

the Lord, do so with all your heart. 
We need more willing men and 

women working in the Sunday School. 

We need to help the Lord's work to 
(Continued on Page 326) 



September, 1952 



317 



(^reelings to v)ur (fyenealegij 



?ers 



By MURIEL C. HAY, Mission Genealogy Secretary. 



IT AST month I explained "Why 
H-J Genealogy?" Have you done or 
are you doing anything about it ? Have 
you some "Personal Records, Pedigree 
Charts, or Family Group Sheets ?" 
If not, these may be had from the 
Mission Office, if your Branch or 
District Committees have no supplies. 

Where there are Branch Commit- 
tees organized and functioning, hand 
your completed Family Group Sheets 
to them, when checked, who in turn 
hand them to the District Committees. 
Here they are checked again and, if 
correct, they are sent on to the Mis- 
sion Office for further checking and 
indexing before being sent over to the 
Genealogical Society in Salt Lake 
City. 

Once again I stress the necessity 
of using correct names — use the names 
you were blessed and baptized with. 
For instance, don't use "Wi' 'when in 
the Church records it is Wiremu. In- 
correct names and dates are apt to 
hold the work up and we don't want 
that. Your dead ancestors are probably 
waiting anxiously for the work to be 
done for them. So please be just as 
careful as you can in compiling your 
records. 

If it is possible try and check to 
see that some other person hasn't al- 
ready done the work. We receive quite 
a number of duplications here in the 
office. 



Quite a number fail to give baptism 
dates and this means a lot of research 
work for Sister Davies and myself. 
That is why I stress that every bap- 
tized member have a personal record 
so that when it comes to compiling 
Family Group Sheets, you have all the 
necessary data. 

Start your research work right in 
your home and it is surprising how, 
when you do that, other avenues are 
opened up whereby you can branch out. 

Please study your hand book. If you 
haven't one these can be purchased 
from the Mission Office for 2/6. These 
have been specially prepared for help 
in Branches and Districts throughout 
the many missions of the Church. 

I am sure you will all be interested 
to learn of the response to the Genea- 
logy assessments. Up to the 31st of 
July, 6 people in Auckland have paid, 
12 in Bay of Islands, 7 in Bay of 
Plenty, 1 in Hauraki, Hawkes Bay 6, 
King Country 1, Mahia 2, Manawatu 

1, Otago 2, Poverty Bay 7, Taranaki 
0, Waikato 1, Wairarapa 6, Wairau 

2, Wellington 6, Whangarei 82. 

Congratulations, Whangarei. That is 
a wondeful effort, and I want you to 
know it is appreciated by the Mission, 
and those of your ancestors who are 
waiting for this work to be done. To 
all members who have paid their as- 
sessments we say "thank you." In a 
very short time we hope to have our 
filling system working. May God bless 
you all in this very important work. 



A good laugh is sunshine in a house. — Thackeray. 
318 TE KARERE 



World Wide Church 



Former New Zealand 
Mission President Dies 

Ezra T. Du Fresne Stevenson, 87, 
of 170 Third Ave., died Thursday 
morning, July 17, in a Salt Lake hos- 
pital of complications following sur- 
gery. 

An active member of the Church of 
Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, he 
had served for 32 years in the old 
Eighteenth Ward before its division. 
At the time of his death he was a 
High Priest in the South Eighteenth 
Ward. 

Mr. Stevenson was secretary of the 
Melchezidick Priesthood committee of 
the Ensign Stake. He had served two 
missions for the Church to Xew Zea- 
land, the first in 1887 and the second 
in 1898. During his second mission he 
served as president of the Xew Zea- 
land Mission. 

He was born October 29, 1864, in 
Salt Lake City, a son of Edward and 
Elizabeth Du Fresne Stevenson. 

A lifelong resident of Salt Lake City, 
he was a graduate of the old Deseret 
University, now the University of 
Utah. He was a member of the Emeri- 
tus Club of the University. 

On July 18, 1901, he was married 
to Rhoda Richards in the Salt Lake 
Temple. 

Surviving, in addition to his widow, 
are three daughters, Mrs. Eldon R. 
(Mary) Martineau and Mrs. A. W. 
(Amelia) Brunt, both of Idaho Falls, 
Ida.. Mrs. Charles W. (Rhoda) 
Thomas, Geneva, Switzerland; Dr. 
Ralph R. Stevenson, Washington, 
I ).< ., and 1 [eber John l\. Stevenson, 
Cincinnati, ()., and 20 grandchildren. 

The funeral services were held Sat- 
urday, July 1". 1952, al the South 18th 

Ward Chapel. Elder Ernest I.. Dee, 

Board Member of the New Zealand 
Missionary Society, was tin- principal 
speaker. 



Former New Zealand Missionary 
Dies in Salt Lake City 

Heber C. Jex, 80, President of Jex 
and Company, a local outdoor adver- 
tising firm, and Jex Lumber Company, 
Spanish Fork, died Saturday morning 
in Salt Lake City of causes incident 
to age. 

A member of the Church of Jesus 
Christ of Latter-day Saints, he had 
served a mission to New Zealand, fol- 
lowing which he served a special mis- 
sion for the Mutual Improvement 
Association. He later served as a mis- 
sionary in the Bureau of Information 
of Temple Square. 

A native of Spanish Fork, he was 
born August 12, 1871, the youngest of 
11 sons and daughters of William and 
Eliza Goodson Jex, early pioneers. On 
December 22, 1898, he married Erne- 
line Bird in the Salt Lake Temple. 
Funeral services were held Wednes- 
day at 12:15 p.m. in the Capitol Hill 
Ward Chapel, Third North and Col- 
umbus St. 

Elder Matthew Cowley's 
Baccalaureate Address 

Elder Matthew Cowley, of the 
Council of the Twelve, delivered the 
Baccalaureate address to the graduates 
of Brigham Young University in the 
fieldhouse, Sunday. |une 1. 1952. In 
his address graduates are urged to 
keep faith and in his concluding re- 
marks he says: "This Institution be- 
longs to you because your obedience 
to the Gospel supports and maintains 
it. Do not forget to honour the Lord 
with the substance which you acquire 
when you ^<> forth from this Institu- 
tion of learning, because from that 
source and that substance (mil will he 

able to finance this. His great Uni- 
versity, which is destined to he the 
: of all Universities of its kind 
or of any kind in all the world.'* 



September, 1952 



"Keep the testimonies of the Gospel 
which you now have, and which many 
of you have acquired here at this 
school. Another senior bore his testi- 
mony of the divinity of the Book of 
Mormon here." 

"Why, that is worth all the sacrifice 
and effort which that young man has 
made to come to this school. The testi- 
monies of your teachers should ring 




Elder Matthew Cowley 

true and carry conviction in your 
hearts and anchor you to your faith 
as long as you shall live upon this 
fair earth." 

"Be faithful to your ideals. Be 
loyal. Be active in the Church of 
Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. The 
Church needs the vigour and vitality 
of your youth. It received its first 
great foundation from youth. The 
average age of the First Quorum of 
the Twelve in this Dispensation was 
only 29 years." 

"You young men bear the Priesthood 
of Almighty God. Exercise that Priest- 
hood for the building up of His King- 
dom. His power can come through 
you. Healing may be in your hands, 
and will be if you will claim from God 
the power which your Priesthood en- 
titles you to claim from Him." 

"I leave a witness with you that I 
know with all my heart that God lives, 
that man is made in His image. I know 



that you who have studied science 
some day will listen to your professors 
of science beg your pardon for having 
taught you things which have become 
obsolete, because science may change 
from day to day." 

"But the truths of the Gospel of 
Jesus Christ, the words of the Oracle 
of God, are always new and always 
fresh, and they never change." 

"Be actuated in your lives by a sin- 
cere testimony of the truth of the 
Gospel. You are supposed to be mis- 
sionaries as you go forth, whether you 
be men or whether you be women. 
What the world needs today is a mes- 
sage from Heaven. They are crying 
out for such a message. They want to 
hear the voice of the Oracle." 

"You carry that message to your 
friends, to your neighbours, and you 
will be engaged in that service which 
will bring about the regeneration of 
the souls of men, and which will en- 
able them to dwell with you in the 
Celestial presence of our Father in 
Heaven." 

"As I stand here in the presence of 
these men of God who occupy these 
seats, these great men who have been 
called from their vocations and their 
professions in life to be your servants, 
I want to testify to you that they are 
God's chosen servants, that they do 
represent Him, that they will never 
lead you astray if you will listen to 
them, because through them the Oracle 
of God continues to speak." 

"Let all who look upon them learn 
to fear God. Let all who look upon 
you learn to fear God, and may His 
Spirit be your guiding companion and 
direct you in all you undertake to do, 
and may I repeat again, so live as if 
you were going to marry a pure man 
or a pure woman within a month. Be 
humble before God and He will 
magnify you before men." 

"God bless you in your future activi- 
ties in life. May your worthy desires 
be realized. Mav the hidden desires 



320 



TE KARERE 



of your heart which are righteous come 
to you, and come they will if you will 
invoke the aid of your Father in 
Heaven whose Spirit permeates this 
great university. Thus I pray for you 
and for us all, in the name of Jesus 
Christ. Amen." 

From Rags to Blankets is Marvel 
Wrought at Church Welfare 
Factory — By Lee Bingham 

"Wanna see 'em make a 'silk purse 
out of a sow's ear' so to speak? Then 
go down to the newly acquired Des- 
eret Woollen Mills near Murray on 
State St. and ask genial Stewart 
Eccles, the new manager, to show you 
the works." 

"He is pleased with his new assign- 
ment and proud of the Church-owned 
blanket factory and has an interesting 
'yarn to spin' which is matched only 
by the busily whirring machines." 

We began in the basement and 
worked up as he explained the pro- 
cess of blanket manufacture from A 
to Izzard, but the most surprising 
thing to us was the transformation that 
takes place in a bundle of rags as it is 
shredded and combed and carded aTid 
spun and woven into handsome woollen 
blankets that is guaranteed to warm 
your very soul. 

The story as we were able to piece 
it together from Manager Eccles' re- 
cital goes something like this : 

Bales of discarded woollen clothing 
and materials arc furnished the Wel- 
fare by the Descret Industries which 
are shredded into a fibrous mass by 
an ingenious "rag picker." Rags form 
75 per cent of the finished product, 
to which is added 25 per i cut of virgin 
wool. Incidentally, a very large part of 
the wool is furnished from Church 
Welfare projects also. 



Each new "lay" is formed from a 
layer of rags, then a layer of wool, 
alternating until the stack is several 
feet high. Each layer is well saturated 
with wool oil and permitted to stand 
overnight to separate and process the 
strands preparatory to spinning them 
into yarn. Warp for the blankets is 
strengthened by adding rayon rags to 
the lay while the filler or woof is made 
of the residue. 

When the new and old materials 
are thoroughly mixed in a special ma- 
chine used for that purpose they go 
through successive processes of card- 
ing, spinning and weaving into one 
long rough fabric. 

After another series of finishing 
operations of burling, fulling, washing 
and napping, the fluffy blankets are 
cut into proper lengths ready for edg- 
ing, labelling and inspection. 

A force of 16 skilled workmen direct 
the various operations turning out 
about 80 blankets a day, which is a 
fraction of the capacity of the factory. 
On the first day the mill operated as a 
Church Welfare unit, 100 blankets be- 
ing manufactured, all of which were 
inscribed with coloured yarn, "Deseret 
Woollen Mills, First Day, 5-5-52." 

The newly-acquired plant, formerly 
the Utah Woollen Mills, is located in 
Murray, Utah, on a five-acre tract 
fronting on State Street and running 
west to Main Street. It consists of a 
building of brick construction equipped 
with modern machinery which can be 
usvil in the manufacture oi blankets 
and similar fabrics. 

In charge of the operation of the 
mill is a sub-committee named 1>\ the 
General Church Welfare Committee, 
(.imposed of Walter Stover as chair- 
man, with Bishop ( '.irl \\ . Buehner 
of the Presiding Bishopric, Howard 
Barker and Brianl S. Stringham as 
members. 



Eagerness i<> earn bread and butter overshadows many a golden opportunity. 



Septe 



1952 



321 



I.. II. Prophets Speak . . 






lis Not Vain to Serve the Lord" 



By SPENCER W. KIMBALL, of The Council of The Twelve. 



I PRAY for the spirit of the Lord 
to accompany my remarks. My bro- 
thers and sisters, my heart goes out 
to you who are attempting to live the 
commandments of the Lord. The 
"strength of the hills" is with you. 

It is a great joy to me, and my 
heart is overflowing with gratitude, to 
shake your hands, to look into your 
smiling faces, and to feel your spirit. 

We heard this morning that seven- 
teen thousand newly converted people 
are today enjoying the blessings of the 
Gospel of Jesus Christ, are pointed in 
the right direction, and are on their 
way toward eternal life and exalta- 
tion. Ten thousand foreign and stake 
missionaries have been instrumental in 
bringing the message to them. These 
new members are here because these 
thousands have borne witness and 
testimony to them. 

To all the millions of good, honour- 
able people who live among us, we 
extend an invitation to investigate the 
Gospel of Jesus Christ, for it is the 
power of God unto salvation and to 
exaltation. It is the pearl of greatest 
price. It is the most glorious, the most 
far-reaching, the most wonderful pro- 
gramme in the world. It is not con- 
ceived by men, but is conceived by 
God, our Eternal Father. 

Some time ago a sister said to me, 
"Why is it, Brother Kimball, that 
those who do the least in the building 
of the kingdom seem to prosper most? 
We drive a Ford ; our neighbours 
drive a Cadillac. We observe the Sab- 
bath and attend our meetings ; they 
play golf, hunt, fish, and play. We 
abstain from the forbidden while they 
eat, drink, and are merry and are un- 



restrained. We pay much as tithing 
and for other Church donations; they 
have their entire large income to 
lavish upon themselves. We are tied 
home with our large family of small 
children, often ill; they are totally 
free for social life — to dine and to 
dance. We wear cottons and woollens, 
and I wear a three-season coat, but 
they wear silks and costly apparel, and 
she wears a mink coat. Our meagre 
income is always strained and never 
seems adequate for necessities, while 
their wealth seems inexhaustible and 
wholly adequate for every luxury ob- 
tainable. And yet the Lord promises 
blessings to the faithful ! It seems to 
me that it does not pay to live the 
Gospel — that the proud and the cove- 
nant breakers are the ones who pros- 
per !" 

Then I said to her : "As I remem- 
ber, Job in his greatest distress made 
a statement which parallels yours." 

But Job answered (Zophar) and 
said . . . Wherefore do the wicked 
live, become old, yea, are mighty in 
power? Their seed is established in 
their sight with them, and their off- 
spring before their eyes. Their houses 
are safe from fear, neither is the rod 
of God upon them. Their bull gender- 
eth, and faileth not; their cow calveth 
and casteth not her calf. They send 
forth their little ones like a flock, and 
their children dance . . . They spend 
their days in wealth, and in a moment 
go down to the grave. Therefore they 
say unto God, depart from us ; for we 
desire not the knowledge of thy ways. 
What is the Almighty, that we should 
serve him ? and what profit should we 
have, if we pray ,unto him? (Job 21 :1 
7-11, 13-15.) 



322 



TE KARERE 



And the Prophet Jeremiah asked 
the same question : Righteous art thou, 
O Lord, when I plead with thee ; yet 
let me talk with thee of thy judg- 
ments : Wherefore doth the way of the 
wicked prosper ? Wherefore are all 
they happy that deal very treacher- 
ously? . . . How long shall the land 
mourn, and the herbs of every field 
wither, for the wickedness of them that 
dwell therein? (Jeremiah 12:1, 4.) 

And again Malachi quctes the Lord 
as saying : Your words have been stout 
against me, saith the Lord. Yet ye say, 
What have we spoken so much against 
thee? Ye have said, It is vain to serve 
God ; and what profit is it that we have 
kept his ordinance, and that we have 
walked mournfully before the Lord of 
hosts ? And now we call the proud 
happy ; yea, they that work wickedness 
are set up ; yea, they that tempt God 
are even delivered. (Malachi 3:13-15.) 

The parable of the wheat and tares 
is the Lord's answer . . . The kingdom 
of heaven is likened unto a man which 
sowed good seed in his field : But 
while men slept, his enemy came and 
sowed tares among the wheat, and 
went his way. But when the blade 
was sprung up, and brought forth 
fruit, then appeared the tares also. 
So the servants of the householder 
came and said unto him. Sir, didst 
not thou sow good seed in thy field 
from whence then hath it tares ? He 
said unto them, An enemy hath done 
this. The servants said nto him,. Wilt 
thou then that we go and gather them 
up? But he said, Nay; lest while ye 
gather up the tares, ye root up also 
the wheat with them. Let both grow 
together until the harvest: and in the 
time of harvesl I will say to the 
reapers, Gather ye together firsl the 
tares, and bind them in bundles to 
burn them: but gather the wheat into 
my barn. (Matt. 13:24-30.) 

And the interpretation of the parable 

given b\ the lord Himself makes clear 

that the books are not balanced daily 



but at the harvest time. The time of 
reckoning is as sure as is the passage 
of time and the coming of eternity. 
All who live shall eventually stand 
before the bar of God and be judged 
according to their works. The final 
assignments will constitute rewards 
and punishments according to deserts. 
Read Malachi further : 

Then they that feared the Lord 
spake often one to another ; and the 
Lord hearkened, and heard it, and a 
book of remembrance was written be- 
fore Him for them that feared the 
Lord, and that thought upon His name. 
And they shall be mine, saith the Lord 
of hosts, in that clay when I make up 
my jewels and I will spare them, as 
a man spareth his own son that 
serveth him. Then shall ye return, 
and discern between the righteous and 
the wicked, between him that serveth 
God and him that serveth Him not. 
(Mai. 3:16-18.) 

For behold, the day cometh, that 
shall burn as an oven ; and all the 
proud, yea, and all that do wickedly, 
shall be stubble : and the day that 
cometh shall burn them up, saith the 
Lord of hosts, that it shall leave them 
neither root nor branch. But unto you 
that fear My Name shall the Sun of 
Righteousness arise with healing in 
his wings. ( Ibid. 4:1-2.) 

The Lord admonishes I lis servants 
to remain faithful always and Watch 
therefore: for ye know not what hour 
your Lord doth come . . . But and if 
that evil servanl shall say in his heart. 
My Lord delayeth His coming; and 
shall begin to smite His fellow ser- 
vants, and to rat and drink with the 
drunken: The Lord of that servant 
shall come m a day when he looketh 
not for him. and in an hour that he 
is not aware of, and shall cut him 
asunder, and appo'nl him bis portion 
with the hypocrites: there shall be 
weeping and gnashing of teeth. ( Matt 
2-4:42, 48 51.) 



September, 1952 



323 



And the Prophet Zephaniah inter- 
prets the way of the Lord : 

And it shall come to pass at that 
time, that I will search Jerusalem with 
candles (speaking for the Lord), and 
punish the men that are settled on 
their lees : that say in their heart, The 
Lord will not do good, neither will He 
do evil. Therefore their goods shall 
become a booty, and their houses a 
desolation : they shall also build houses, 
but not inhabit them ; and they shall 
plant vineyards, but not drink the wine 
thereof. 

The great day of the Lord is near, 
it is near, and hasteth greatly, even 
the voice of the day of the Lord ; the 
mighty man shall cry there bitterly. 
That day is a day of wrath, a day 
of trouble and distress, a day of 
wasteness and desolation, a day of 
darkness and gloominess, a day of 
clouds and thick darkness . . . And I 
will bring distress upon men, that they 
shall walk like blind men, because they 
have sinned against the Lord ; and 
their blood shall be poured out as 
dust, and their flesh as the dung. 

Neither their silver nor their gold 
shall be able to deliver them in the day 
of the Lord's wrath ; but the whole 
land shall be devoured by the fire of 
His jealousy. (Zeph. 1:12-15, 17-18.) 

Then I said to the disconsolate sis- 
ter, "You have many blessings today. 
For many rewards you need not wait 
until the judgment day. You have your 
family of lovely children. What a rich 
reward for the so-called sacrifices ! 
The great boon of motherhood is 
yours. With your limitations, a great 
peace can fill your soul. These and 
numerous other blessings which you 
enjoy cannot be purchased with all 
your neighbour's wealth." 

Then I reminded her of the parable 
of the net and the fishes : 

"Again, the kingdom of heaven is 
like unto a net, that was cast into the 
sea, and gathered of every kind : 



Which, when it was full, they drew to 
shore, and sat down, and gathered the 
good into vessels, but cast the bad 
away. So shall it be at the end of the 
world: the angels shall come forth and 
sever the wicked from among the just, 
and shall cast them into the furnace 
of fire : there shall be wailing and 
gnashing of teeth." (Matt. 13:47-50.) 

No one will escape the reward of 
his deeds. No one will fail to receive 
the blessings earned. Again the parable 
of the sheep and goats gives us assur- 
ance that there will be total justice. 

"When the Son of Man shall come 
in his glory, and all the holy angels 
with him, then shall he sit upon the 
throne of '-is glory: And before him 
shall be gathered all nations : and he 
shall separate them one from another, 
as a shepherd divideth his sheep from 
the goats : And he shall set the sheep 
on his right hand, but the goats on 
the left. Then shall the King say unto 
them on his right hand, Come, ye 
blessed of my Father, inherit the king- 
dom prepared for you from the found- 
ation of the world : Then shall he say 
also unto them on the left hand, De- 
part from me, ye cursed, into ever- 
lasting fire, prepared for the devil and 
his angels : And these shall go away 
into everlasting punishment: but the 
righteous into life eternal." (Ibid. 
25:31-34, 41, 46.) 

If we can walk now by faith, if we 
can believe in the rich promises of 
God, if we can obey and patiently wait, 
the Lord will fulfil all His rich pro- 
mises to us : 

. . . Eye hath not seen, nor ear 
heard, neither have entered into the 
heart of man, the things which God 
hath prepared for them that love Him. 
(1 Cor. 2:9.) 

The blessings following righteous- 
ness are enjoyed both in mortality 
and in eternity. Hear the words of the 
Saviour : 



324 



TE KARERE 



And every one that hath forsaken 
houses, or brethren, or sisters, or 
father, or mother, or wife, or children, 
or lands, for my name's sake, shall 
receive a hundredfold, and shall inherit 
everlasting life. (Matt. 19:29.) 

And ponder upon the great promises 
made for us even in this life : 

Bring ye all the tithes into the store- 
house, that there may be meat in mine 
house, and prove me now herewith, 
saith the Lord of hosts, if I will not 
open you the windows of heaven, and 
pour you out a blessing, that there 
shall not be room enough to receive it. 

And I will rebuke the devourer for 
your sakes, and he shall not destroy 
the fruits of your ground ; neither shall 
your vine cast her fruit before the time 
in the field, saith the Lord of hosts. 

And all nations shall call you 
blessed : for ye shall be a delightsome 
land, saith the Lord of hosts. (Malachi 
3:10-12.) 

Extravagant rewards are offered. 
Blessings beyond one's understanding 
will come. The land will yield bount- 
eously and peace shall abound. The 
unfaithful, proud, and wealthy can 
never enjoy the sweet savor of the 
rewards for fasting and dispensing to 
the poor : 

"Then (if you live these command- 
ments) shall thy light break forth as 
the morning, and thine health shall 
spring forth speedily : and thy right- 
eousness shall go before thee ; the 
glory of the Lord shall be thy reward. 
Then shalt thou call, and the Lord 
>liall answer; thou shalt cry, and He 
shall say, I [ere I am . . . then shall 
thy lighl rise in obscurity, and thy 
darkness be as the noon day: And the 
Lord shall guide thee continually, and 
satisfy thy soul in drought, and make 
fat thy bones : and thou shalt be like 
a watered garden, and like a spring 

of water, whose waters fail not. 

I [saiah 58:8-11.) 



What more could one ask? The 
companionship of the Lord, light and 
knowledge, health and vigour, constant 
guidance by the Lord as an eternal, 
never-failing spring. What more could 
one desire ? 

Again rich promises : 

And (they) shall find wisdom and 
great treasures of knowledge, even 
hidden treasures ; and shall run and 
not be weary, and shall walk and not 
faint. And I. the Lord, give unto them 
a promise, that the destroying angel 
shall pass by them, as the children of 
Israel, and not slay them. Amen. 
D. & C. 89:19-21.) 

Think of it ! Knowledge — testimony 
— spiritual strength — physical vigour 
and immunity from the destroying- 
angel ! Remember also that here comes 
protection from that more deadly de- 
struction : 

And fear not them which kill the 
body, but are not able to kill the soul ; 
but rather fear him which is able to 
destrov both soul and body in hell. 
(Matt". 10:28.) 

But the Lord knows the weakness 
of men, and He says in the 58th sec- 
tion of the Doctrine and Covenants : 

I command and men obey not ; I 
revoke and they receive not the bless- 
ing. Then they say in their hearts: 
This is not the work of the Lord, for 
His promises are not fulfilled. But 
WO unto such, for their reward lurketh 
beneath, and not from above. ( D. & C 
58:32-33.) 

The Lord promises again: 

If any ^>\ yon lack wisdom, let him 
ask of God, that giveth to all men 
liberally, and npbraideth not : and it 
shall be given him. ( James 1 :5. > 

Great shall be their reward and 
eternal shall be their glorj , (D. & I 

7o : '.. ) Bui seek ye iirst the kingdom 

of God, and His righteousness; and 
all these things shall be added unto 

VOU. ( Matt. 6.33. I 



September, 1952 



325 



To those who live for tomorrow, 
the rewards are beyond their concep- 
tion. And even though some of the 
blessings are for future enjoyment, is 
it not far better to enjoy the spiritual 
luxuries of tomorrow, which is an 
eternity, rather than to revel in the 
physical comforts of today? 

Peace, joy, satisfaction, happiness, 
growth, contentment, all come with 
the righteous living of the command- 
ments of God. The one who delights 
in all of the worldly luxuries of today, 
at the expense of spirituality, is living 
but for the moment. His day is com- 
ing. Retribution is sure. 

The Lord gave us the impressive 
parable of the prodigal son. This 
squanderer lived but for today. He 
spent his life in riotous living. He dis- 
regarded the commandments of God. 
His inheritance was expendable, and 
he spent it. He was never to enjoy 
it again as it was irretrievably gone. 
No quantity of tears or regrets or 
remorse could bring it back. Even 



though his father forgave him and 
dined him and clothed him and kissed 
him, he could not give back to the 
profligate son that which had been 
dissipated. But the other brother who 
had been faithful, loyal, righteous, con- 
stant, retained his inheritance, and 
the father reassured him: "All that I 
have is thine." 

When one realizes the vastness, the 
richness, the glory of that "all" which 
the Lord promises to bestow upon His 
faithful, it is worth all its costs in 
patience, faith, sacrifice, sweat and 
tears. The blessings of eternity con- 
templated in this "all" bring to men 
immortality and everlasting life, 
eternal growth, divine leadership, 
eternal increase, perfection, and with 
it all — Godhood. 

May God bless us all that we may 
live His commandments more faith- 
fully, more perfectly day by day, I 
pray in the name of Jesus Christ. 
Amen. 




THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN N.Z. (Continued from Page 317) 

grow ; the missionaries do all they can, 
but you must do your part. Please 
don't sit back and let everyone else do 
all the work. We need you, the Lord 
needs you, but most of all you need to 
be in the service of the Lord, that 
when He comes we may be like Hini 
and that He might say, "Well done, 
thou good and faithful servant : thou 
hast been faithful over a few things. 
I will make thee ruler over many 
things. Enter thou into the joy of thy 
Lord." 



make a record this month, and every 
month throughout the year. I will be 
looking for your reports in on time 
this month. Okay ? 

May the Lord bless you to do your 
best in all you do. 



SACRAMENT GEM 
(September and October) 



The quarterly reports still need 
your fullest support. They still are not 
coming in the way they should. Let's 



Just a tiny piece of bread. 
While I eat I bow my head; 
Now I sip of -water clear 
To show I love my Saviour dear. 



326 



TE KARERE 



Here and There in the 
Mission 



More Missionaries Arrive From 
the Centre Stake of Zion 

The Pan American Strato-Cruiser 
came to a perfect landing at the 
Whenuapai Airport, on the afternoon 
of July 18th. Elder and Sister Bill 
Childes, having enjoyed a pleasant 
journey from Salt Lake City to Auck- 
land, were met by the Mission car and 
brought to the Mission Home. They 
have been called by the First Presi- 
dency on special missions to help with 
the building programme here in New 
Zealand. 

Elder Childes is a High Priest and 
was Sunday School Superintendent in 
his ward at the time of his mission 
call. He has been engaged in construc- 
tion work* most of his life and is very 
well known all over the United States. 
Sister Childes has been very active 
in Relief Society work and in Stake 
Missionary activities. I am sure that 
the members of the Waikato District 



^1 

J ism 0%%- j 




(where I understand they are soon to 
be stationed) will find these new mis- 
sionaries greatly beneficial to the mis- 
sionary work, as well as the building 
programme in that District. 

Haere-ra Elder Wallace L. Berrett 

Elder Berrett arrived in the mission 
field in November, 1950, along with 
seven other elders. He was sent first 
to the Bay of Plenty District to 
labour. After being there a short while 
he was called by President Young to 
be the editor of the Te Karcre. This 
necessitated Elder Berrett transferring 
to the office. During his duration at 
the Mission Office, he acted, besides 
editor of the Te Karerc, Superinten- 
dent of the Mission Sunday Schools. 
He laboured for seven months in the 
Otago District, mostly in the Dunedin 
area, one and a half months in the 
Hawkes Bay District before and after 
Hui Tau, then Niue Island was Elder 
Berrett's next field of labour until an 








Elder Berrett 
September, 1952 



Elder Bigler 



Elder Pai?et 



327 



unfortunate accident necessitated his 
coming to Auckland. Upon arrival 
here the doctors advised him to get 
treatment in America. 




Elder Christensen 



Elder Richard A. Biylcr, one of our 
accomplished Maori speakers, has been 
called to labour in the Cook Islands. 
His ship sailed on August the 13th 
amid cries of haere-ra and good luck 
in his mission to Rarotonga. 

Elder George Paget has been as- 
signed to a new field of labour. He 
has been called to take Elder Bigler's 
place in the Poverty Bay District. We 
say to Elder Paget, "Kia Kaha," in 
learning the Maori language and in 
preaching the Gospel to the people in 
their own tongue. 

Elder H. T. Christensen has been 
called from his labours in the Maliia 
District to labour in the newest district 
in the Mission, "Niue Island." 



* 

• * 

• 



IT'S ALL IN THE STATE OF MIND 

If you think you are beaten, you are, 
If you think you dare not, you don't, 

If you'd like to win, but you think you can't, 
It's almost certain you won't. 

If you think you'll lose, you're lost, 
For out in the world you'll find 

Success begins with a fellow's will- 
It's all in the state of mind. 

Full many a race is lost 

Ere even a step is run, 
And many a coward fails 

Ere even his work's begun. 
Think big, and your deeds will grow ; 

Think small, and you'll fall behind ; 
Think that you can, and you will — 

It's all in the state of mind. 

If you think you're out-classed, you are ; 

You've got to think high to rise ; 
You've got to be sure of yourself before 

You can ever win a prize. 
Life's battles don't always go 

To the stronger or faster man; 
But soon or late the man who win.-> — 

Is the man who thinks he can. 

—Author Unknown. 



TE KARERE 



Featuring the Districts' 

News 



WAIRARAPA DISTRICT 
By Bro. Ruanui H. MacDonald 

Kia ora enga Hunga Tapu. The 
month of July has indeed been a very 
busy month for the Wairarapa Dis- 
trict. Sister N. M. Paki has been very 
busy forming a District Choir which 
will participate at the Hui Pariha to 
be held at Martinborough, 23rd and 
24th of August, 1952. The same Choir 
will be singing at the Martinborough 
Town Hall as an advertisement for the 
forthcoming events. Bro. W. Xaera. 
D.P. of the Genealogical work, has 
also been very busy organizing Branch 
Genealogical committees. 

Week-end missionary work started 
in the Wairarapa District in the month 
of May. The names of those who have 
given time to this great work are as 
follows: Brothers E. K. Paki, R. H. 
MacDonald, T. Kawana. S. Scirko- 
vich, W. Aspinall, Sisters M. Haeata, 
R. Kawana and R. Madsen. We hope 
and pray in the near future that more 
Saints may take interest in this great 
work. 

Sister X. M. Paki is now District 
Recreational Supervisor and we pray 
for her success in her new position. 

Good news for those who know and 
love her: Sister Christina Enoka, of 
the Wellington Branch, who was a 
patient in the Wellington Hospital, is 
staying at Pirinoa. After her long 
term of illness we arc glad to say that 
on the road to recovery. 

Sister Piki Kawana has returned to 

the District and we arc glad to have 

her hack to help with the work of 

the Gospel. 



Last but not least we are thankful 
to our Father in Heaven for the two 
fine Elders we have in our District, 
and for their unwavering service in 
the work of the Lord. With the co- 
operation of the District Presidency, 
the Elders, and the Saints, we hope in 
the near future to fulfill the prophecy 
made by Apostle Cowley. That the 
Wairarapa District will rise once again 
to the position it once held as one of 
the leading Districts of the Xew Zea- 
land Mission. 

BAY OF PLENTY DISTRICT 

Xews in brief as follows : 

The Rotorua Saints farewelled the 
Ramsay Joyces who returned to Mata- 
raua, Bay of Islands, to help with the 
Church sawmill there. Our sincere re- 
gards go with this fine couple and 
their family. 

A Home Sunday School with Te 
Whana Airi Maihi as Superintendent 
and Class Teacher was formed at his 
home near Tokoroa. Phyllis Barnett 
Maihi is Secretary and Chorister. May 
the Lord bless you in your humble 
endeavours. 

During the Hui Peka at Wairoa 
several changes of officers were made 
in the various organizations. Th< 
leased will. T am sure, he blessed for 
the work they have done, however 
small or great, while new officers 
must spur themselves on to higher 
efforts in this building up of God's 
Kingdom. 

The many Distrid officers who at- 
tended Mm Peka at Mangakino helped 

to make this an inspirational one. Also 

in attendance were four of the College 
missionaries who delivered such good 



September, 1952 



329 



pep-talks that immediately one local 
Brother "packed his swag" and hiked 
off to the College. Kia ora koe„ Bro. 
Ruru ! 

A special Hui Peka was held in 
Rotorua as on that day Tumuaki Ott- 
ley paid us a visit. With him was Bro. 
Hay and their presence and wonderful 
sermons I'm sure fired us all with the 
desire to really live the Gospel Plan. 
Among our many District visitors 
were the Colleg foursome, youngest 
being Master Joseph Wharekura 
whose theme song is "Let's go to 
M.A.C." 

The local brethren are so envious 
(I could be wrong), they're all rush- 
ing to Hamilton next Saturday to 
pour concrete. 

Special announcement! Gold and 
G'ren Ball to be held September 5th 
in Matthews Hall at Judea, Tauranga ! 
And a Hui Pariha to be held Septem- 
ber 6th and 7th at Wairoa, Tauranga ! 

Statistics. — Ordination to Priest- 
hood : Te Whana Airi Haihi was or- 
dained a Priest, June 15th, 1952, by 
Elder Vernon Lowry at Tokoroa. 
Blessings : Taoitekura Jean Thompson, 
Judea, June 8th, 1952; Darryl Anne 
Briggs, Teteko, July 11th, 1952; Ken- 
neth Rerekau Jones, at Ngongotaha, 
on July 23rd ; Raymond William 
Rangi Haumata Jones, at Ngongotaha, 
July 23rd; Ngaraka Gay Withers, at 
Ngongotaha, on July 23rd, 1952. Mar- 
riage : Donald Dawson and Muriel 
Halberg (non-members) of Manga- 
kino, July 24th, 1952, by Elder Vernon 
Lowry. 

Corrections. — Ella Emere Waerea 
was christened and blessed by Elder 
Glen L. Nielsen, May 4th, at Rotorua. 
Janet Puawananga Rogers was bap- 
tized and confirmed by Elder Vernon 
Lowry, May 4th, at Rotorua. 

POVERTY BAY DISTRICT 

Greetings, e hoa ma. Once again 
we bring you the report of our ac- 
tivities. 



Of the Horoera Branch, the Sunday 
School is the most organized auxiliary 
and is held regularly in the local 
Marae. 

On the 6th of July Elder Ruwhiu 
and Elder Aspinall blessed and gave 
a name to the daughter of Mr. and 
Airs. Te Purei of Horoera. The name 
given to the baby was Rito Te Purei. 

On the 18th of July Elder Bigler 
and Elder Clarks blessed and gave a 
name to the son of Brother and Sister 
Hale. The name given to the baby was 
Tamanui Kenneth Hale. 

W T e are happy to report of the suc- 
cess of our Sunday School concert 
which was held in the Rongomaitapui 
Memorial Hall, Te Araroa. Many 
thanks to the timely appearance of 
Sister Mere Korohina who had come 
on a school holiday from the Huka- 
rere High School, also of Bro. Hemi 
Ruwhiu who is now getting read to go 
on a mission at the College in Hamil- 
ton. To these two we give credit for 
the success of our concert which 
brought the total of £56. All proceeds 
are to help our local missionary on 
the Hamilton College. 

We also had Bro. Sid Crawford here 
on a flying visit. There were also four 
of the Elders here at our concert, 
Elders Bigler, Cosgrove, Clark and 
Llewellyn. 

MAHINEPUA BRANCH 

Sister Rea Wehi Heta, a faithful 
Relief Society worker in the Mahine- 
pua Branch at Matapouri Bay, passed 
from this life on July 3rd, 1952, at the 
age of 54 years. The funeral was under 
the direction of Bro. Ruru Hohaia, 
who also performed the burial cere- 
mony. 

Many of the late Sister Heta's rela- 
tives attended to mourn over the pass- 
ing of their beloved Sister. 

(Continued on Page 334) 



330 



TE KARERE 







NGA POU-TGKOMANAWA 




ROTO 1 TE HITORI TE HAHI 




(Essentials 




in Church History) 


^JK^id^jM^ 


WAHANGA TUATORU 


mml 


Translated by George R. Hall 


IHH1 



Kua Kaha Te Kino o Te Hoa Riri 

KUA korerotia ake ra te whakaeke- 
nga o te hoa riri ki te kainga o 
Hohepa Mete, i te po, te nanatitanga 
i te poropiti, hemo rawa, Itoia e ratou 
ta ratou tangata ki ahua tawhiti atu 
i te whare, ka tu ratou ka wananga me 
pewhea ta ratou mahi ko etahi i mea 
me patu a Hohepa kia mate ko etahi 
i tahuri ki te kuhu i te pounamu pai- 
hana ki roto i te waha, otira i pakaru 
te pounamu i te akinga atu ki nga niho. 
I tahuri ano ratou ki te whakainu i 
te poropiti ki te taa, i to ratou kore 
kaha ki te whakahamama i te waha 
tahuri ana ratou ki te tihae i ana 
kakahu, kia takoto tahanga te tinana 
o te pononga a te Atua, pania ana e 
ratou te taa ki te kiri o Hohepa, me 
te aki atu ano hold i nga huruhuru 
manu ki te taa e piri mai ra i te tinana 
o Hohepa ; i muri o tenei ka .tahuri te 
iwi nei ki te akiaki ki te patu i a 
Hohepa, mahue iho ana i a ratou ki 
reira takoto ai. Ka roa e takoto ana, 
ka tae mai te ahua kaha kia Hohepa 
ka nana ki te tu ki runga, ka hinga 
ano ki raro; kia roa rawa ka maranga, 
ka hoki mai te kaha, haere ana ki te 
kainga. . . . 

I peneitia ano a I [irini Rikitona, a 
lie maha tonu nga ra e hurirapa ana 
nga tnahara i roto i a ia i te kino o te 
kohuru a te taua rewera. Note taenga 



Hohepa ki te kainga, pau katoa te po 
e mahi ana nga hoa ki te muni i nga 
huruhuru i tona tinana, ki te horoi 
hoki i te taa i tona kiri. I te hapati 
i muri mai, ka tutaki ia i te iwi, i te 
haora ano e tika ana ka whai-korero 
kia ratou. I tae mai etahi o te hunga 
kino nei ki tenei karakia, ko Haimona 
Raita (Simonds Ryder) he tangata 
tenei i taka atu ki waho o te Hahi a 
ko ia hoki te kai arahi te kai akiaki i 
te taua nei. Ko Makenetiki (McClen- 
tic) ko Wheretia Arena (Felatiah 
Allen), na Arena te kaaho wihiki i 
mau mai ma te hunga whakatoi, hei 
whakakaha i a ratou, kia toa ki te 
whakatutuki i o ratou whakaaro ko- 
huru. I te wa e kohurutia nei a Hohepa 
raua ko Hirini ka paangia tetahi o 
nga mahanga e te maatao, e whia hoki 
nga ra i muri iho ka hemo. 

Haerenga Tuarua Ki Mihiuri 

I te tahi o Aperira ka whanatu a 

1 [< ihepa Mete ratou ko Nuere K. 
\\ iiini me Tiehe Koohi (Jesse Gause) 
ka haere ki Mihiuri ki to whakarito 
i nga tikanga o te whakakitenga e man 
ake nei i roto i to wahanga 7X; o nga 
Akoranga Kawenata: he tikan.ua enei 
o hangai ana mo nga painga o to toa 
mo te hunga rawakore me to whaka- 
tapunga i nga taon.ua. No muri mai ka 

hono atu a Hirini Rikitona ki to ratou 
tira, haere tahi ana ratou. 1 \o huarahi 



September, 1952 



331 



ka hokona e ratou etahi pukapuka i 
Wiiringi (Wheeling Virginia) mo ie 
whare perehi i Hiona, no te 24 o 
Aperira ka tae ratou ki Itepeha (In- 
dependence). E rua nga ra i nuiri iho, 
ka noho runanga te Kaunihera Nui o 
te Hahi, a i konei ka tautoko te Hunga 
Tapu i a Hohepa Mete hei Tumuaki 
mo te Tohungatanga Nui ; he tautoko 
tenei i te whakatau a te hui i tu ki 
Ameheti (Amherst) i te 25, o Hanu- 
ere 1832. 

Ko Hiona Me Ona Teike (Stakes) 

I te wa e tu ana te hui i korerotia 
i runga tata ake nei, i puta he whaka- 
kitenga mo nga kaumatua, he whaka- 
hau i a ratou kia uru ki roto i tetahi 
"Kawenata Tapae" he kawenata e kore 
e taea te wahi kia pakaru. Ite mea ko 
Katirana ka meinga hei Teike mo 
Hiona, "no te mea kua tapaea e ahau 
te whenua o Hainana (Shinehah), 
Katirana i roto i nga wa i tohungia ai 
e ahau nei ano, kia Pumau ki te 
Hungatapu a te Runga Rawa, hei 
Teike i roto o Hiona. No te mea ka 
nui haere a Hiona, a ka piki i roto i 
tona Ataahuatanga, me tona Tapu ; ka 
nekehia rawatia ona rohe kia whanui 
ka whakakahangia anohoki ona Teike ; 
ae ra he pono taku e mea atu nei kia 
koutou, ka ara a Hiona, ka kakahu i 
ona kakahu whakapaipai no reira ka 
hoatu e au tenei ture kia koutou, kia 
here koutou i a koutou ki roto i tenei 
Kawenata, a ka meinga kia rite ki nga 
ture a te Ariki." 

Te Hokinga Ki Katirana 

I peka a Hohepa ratou ko nga taai- 
natuakana ki te torotoro i te Hunga- 
tapu o Korewira, i te taone o Kaa 
(Kaw), i tino koa ai te tangata whe- 
nua i to ratou taenga atu. I noho kau- 
nihere ratou i te tahi o Mei, whakaotia 
ana kia toru mano nga kape o te puka- 
puka o nga ture e perehi, kia ata tiro- 
hia marikatia te tuhituhinga o nga 
whakakitenga, ma Oriwa Kautere ra- 
tou ko Wiremu W. Wherepi (W. W. 
Phelps) me Hoani Whitima e whaka- 



tikatika kia hangai nga tuhituhinga mo 
te wa e perehitia ai hui atu ki nga 
Himene i tongia e Ema Mete kia pere- 
hitia. I te mea ano ka oti end me 
etahi atu take te whiriwhiri, ko te 
hokinga o Hohepa Mete me ona hoa 
ki Katirana. No tenei haere i pa ai te 
mate Paihana kia Hohepa Mete ; i 
whara ai a Pihopa Witini, i te whatii- 
nga o tana waewae, he maha rawa nga 
wahi i whati ai tana waewae me te 
raparapa o tona waewae ; i whaka- 
orangia raua e te mana kaha o te 
Ariki. He kupu whakamarama — "Ko 
te ingoa Teike i aim mai i Ie kupu 
pake ha 'stakes' ko tenei te ingoa o n<ja 
poupou o waho o te Tapeuaakara, o te 
teneti ranei i te koraha. Ko Hiona te 
leneti, ko nga zcalii katoa kua kainga 
tangata, e lit ana e karupoti ana 
Hiona kua huaina ko nga teike o 
Hiona ara ko nga poupou o Hiona." 



UPOKO 18 

TE WHAKATUUNGA O TE 

"TUMUAKITANGA TUATAHI O 

TE HAHI" 1832-1833 



Nga Whakakitenga Whaitikanga 

Ite timatanga o te hotoke 1832, a 
uru noa ki te Ngahuru maha tonu nga 
whakakitenga whakamiharo i huaki iho 
o te rangi, hei arahi hei mohiotanga 
hoki mo te Hahi ; mohiotanga o nga 
mea ngaro (science) kaupapa whaka- 
aro (Philosophy) ; ture hei akonga, 
nga mea pono anohoki o te taha Wai- 
rua, i whakakitea mai. . . . 

I te 22, 23, o Hepetema, i runga i 
te maha o nga uiui a nga kaumatua o 
te hahi, ka whakaaturia mai te Hitori 
me te Mana o te Tohungatanga (Tiro- 
hia Ako-Kawe 84). Nga taumahatanga 
i utaina atu ki runga i te hunga i 
tapaea mo nga turanga maha, i ata 
whakamaramatia ; nga kupu taunaha, 
whakaari ranei mo te hunga katoa i 
piripono, ka whakawhiwhia ratou ki 
te purenatanga o nga manaakitanga e 
totoo ana mai no roto i te Rangatira- 



332 



TE KARERE 



tang a o te Matua — Naana ano i wha- 
kaatu, i roto i Taana kupu oati, i 
Taana anohoki i Kawenata ai, o roto 
i te Tohungatanga ; i whakatuturutia 
ano hoki te whiu mo te hunga e wahi, 
e takahi ana i tenei kawenata, a e huri 
ke ana ki wahi ke, oti atu ki reira, 
kaore mo ratou he murunga hara i 
tenei a'o i te ao ranei e tu mai nei ; 
i ata whakamaramatia enei take ; te 
waahi e tu ai te temepara riui, awhea 
hangaia ai, etahi atu take e pa ana ki 
te whakawhaiti tanga mai i te hunga 
tapu, te whakaarahanga e hangaia ai, 

e hokona ai hoki a Hiona 

No te 27, O Noema ka puaki mai te 
whakitenga i Ako-Kawe 85. la Tihema 
6, ko tekiona 86; I te ra Kirihimete, 
te whakapuakitanga mai i te poropiti — 
tanga mo te whawhai, tekiona 87 (Kua 
tutuki tenei poropititanga) ; e rua nga 
ra i muri iho ka kowha iho ko te wha- 
kakitenga whakamiharo e mohiotia nei 
ko te "Rau Oriwa" Ako-Kawe 88, he 
koha ki te Hahi. I roto i tenei hua- 
kitanga iho, te whakaaturanga mai o 
enei take e mauake nei. . . . Ko te 
maramatanga o te Karaiti te marama- 
tanga o te "Pono" : ko taua marama- 
tanga ano te maramatanga o te ra e 
whiti iho nei o nga ao maha o nga 
whetu o roto i te "Kiko Rangi," me te 
Kaha ano hoki i oti ai enei mea katoa 
te hanga ; i hihiko ai ano hoki te ma- 
tauranga i roto i nga whakaaro o te 
tangata. Ko taua maramatanga ano te 
mataapuna o nga mea ora katoa, te 
ture whakatikatika i nga mea katoa ; 
a, e hou atu ana ki roto i te hoho- 
nutanga o te Kikorangi. Kua hoatu 
he ture mo tena Rangatiratanga mo 
tena Rangitiratanga, a e karapotitia 
ana e ona tikanga i roto i ona rohe, a 
kaore he wahi watea o roto i te "Kiko- 
rangi," lie wahi i kore lie rangatira- 
tanga i roto; rangatiratanga ralii. iti 
ranei. . . . 



Ko nga Ao kua whakanohia ki o 
ratou turanga i roto i te "Kikorangi" 
kua meinga hei kainga mo nga tama- 
riki a te "Matua Kaha Rawa." He 
manawa ora tonu kei roto i te whenua 
e nohia nei e tatou, a kei te tu mai te 
wa e mate ai tenei ao, a i muri iho, 
ka ora mai ano tenei ao, ka whakauhia 
ki te "Kororia Tikitikiorangi" a ka 
meinga hei kainga mo te hunga Tiki- 
tikiorangi. Ko te hunga i whakaaro 
kore ara kaore i piri pono, ka huia atu 
he ao ke he kainga mo ratou, kaore 
hoki ratou i totika hei noho i roto i te 
"Kororia Tikitikiorangi." Ko te hunga 
katoa e ara i te aranga mai o te hunga 
mate, ka riro ma te "Kororia" kua rite 
mo ratou e whakaoho, e whakahihiko. 
Kote hononga o te wairua ki te tinana 
te whakaotinga o te manawa ora o te 
tangata. Ko te matenga o te Karaiti 
te hokonga me te whakaoranga o taua 
manawa ora, e kiia nei he tangata. Ko 
te Aranga mai o te Karaiti i te Mate, 
te aranga e ara ai hoki te manawa ora 
o te tangata. Kei muri o nga whaka- 
aturanga a nga kaumatua, e Huaki mai 
ai nga whakaaturanga a nga "Whaka- 
rite Whakawa." Konga tohu kua wha- 
kaaria mo mua i te haerenga mai o te 
Kai-whakaora, kei te mohiotia ; te ha- 
painga ake i te hunga tika ; te wha- 
kangaromanga i te "Hahi Xui, whaka- 
rihariha ano hoki," te tutukitanga o 
te hunga kino kei roto katoa i nga 
korero pono i whakaaturia mai o roto 
i tenei whakakitenga. . . . 

la Pepuere 1833, ka hoatu e te Ariki 
kia Hohepa Mete, te ture te Kupu 
Matauranga (Word of Wisdom) 
(Tirohia Ako-kawe 89) hei taan.ua- 
manawa mo te tangata. i roto i te 
kikokiko. la Maehe 15. 1833, te wha- 
kaaturanga mai i tenei e man ake nei 
i "Ako-Kawe 93." 



^3 



Many </ person who prides himself on having an open mind merely 
has a vacant one. 



September, 1952 



331 



FEATURING THE DISTRICTS' NEWS (Cont. from Page 330) 



HAWKES BAY DISTRICT 
(Cont. from last month's report.) 

STATISTICS 
Blessings: 

Torrance Tito Jnr., son of Torrance 
and Phyllis Tito. 

Peter Nukunoa Hapi Onekawa, son 
of Peeti and Mihi Onekawa. 

Josephine Ann Hapi, daughter of 
Ivan and Miriama Hapi. 

Eruera Murray Taurau, son of 
Raniera and Rangirangi Taurau. 

Donna Te Amohaere Poutu, daugh- 
ter of Watene and Rangimoana Poutu. 

Stephine Hinemoa Puriri, daughter 
of James Rose Puriri. 

Baptisms: 

William Leon Watene, Waimarama. 

Stella Metuakare Williams, Here- 
taunga. 



Joyce Randell, Heretaunga. 
Hoori Raymond Paewai, Tatnakf. 

Ordinations: 

Edgar Mohi, Deacon, Waimarama, 
Peter Robert Matiu, Deacon, Wai- 
marama. 

Marriages: 

Heta Mita (non-member) to Te 
Atatuhi Timu (member) by Elder 
James H. King at Te Hauke. 

Ranui Parahi (member) to Nancy 
Hariata Mete at Korongata by Elder 
James H. King. 

Deaths: 

Ben Scott of Apia, Samoa, husband 
of Grace Williamson Scott, died May 
29th, 1952, at Napier Hospital of heart 
trouble. Buried at Korongata Ceme- 
tery May 31st, 1952, after a fine ser- 
vice in the Korongata Chapel. 



nneuncement 



Ka tata te Poo, Ka tata te ao; 

He rongo ra i turia; 

Kia tu wini wini, kia tu Wana wana; 

Kia tuu, whakaputaina ki waho, 

Kite whei ao, ki te ao marama; 

Tihee Mauri-ora. 

He reo karanga tenei na te Pei whairangi, 

(Bay of Islands) Ka tu te Hui Pariha ki 

Te Awarua B. of I. 20 me te 21 ongara 

O Hepetema — Haeremai — Haeremai. 

ELDER MENDENHALL, D.P. 



334 



TE KARERE 



Worth of Time 



Taken from the Church Section of the 
Deseret News (Editorial) 

WHAT IS YOUR TIME WORTH? 

Most people think of the value of time in terms of so much 
money per hour put in on a job. Some seven shillings an hour, some 
make ten or twelve shillings per hour; others make a good deal 
beyond that. And when these persons figure time that is what they 
consider it to be worth. 

But what is time really worth? 

Time is the thing of which eternity is made. Sometimes we 
think that in eternity, time will cease to be counted and that may 
be — in the terms we now know. But the fact remains that we are 
living in eternity right now — the hours and the days of our mortal 
lives are part of an eternal existence, and are of such a value that we 
hardly know how to measure it. 

Our time in mortality is given us at a probationary period. It 
is also a time of prepartion. We are told that if we wisely use this 
time we can prepare ourselves for the highest of blessings hereafter. 

In a very real sense we are filling out an apprenticeship in 
mortality. Our goal is to become perfect, even as our Father in 
Heaven is perfect. We are given the rules and instructions pertain- 
ing to this objective, and are expected to apply them here and now. 
learning the ways and the hows of perfection. 

When an apprentice tradesman figures the worth of his time 
spent as an apprentice, he does not think in terms of the few cents 
an hour he is paid while he learns his trade. He thinks in terms of 
the income he will receive as a journeyman craftsman at the end of 
his training period. Should we not learn to figure the value of all of 
our time in just that way — looking toward our great objective, of 
some time becoming like God? 

If we should thus consider the value of time, would we ever 
waste it? All ways by which we spend our time would be planned 
in such a way as to contribute to our reaching as quickly as possible 
the objective of our existence. Our work would be done in such a 
way as to encourage perfection in it. Our time spent with our 
families would have a similar end in view. Our time spent in 
recreation would not be wasted. Even recreation can be directed to 
help us grow and develop. 

We can rest and enjoy recreation in wholesome ways; or we can 
spend the same time in activities which are degrading. 

In connection with this theme, the late President Joseph F. 
Smith at one time said: "Read good books. Learn to sing and recite, 
and to converse upon subjects that will be of interest to your 
associates, and at your social gatherings, instead of wasting the 
time in senseless practices that lead only to mischief and sometimes 
to serious evil and wrongdoing; instead of doing this, seek out of 
the best books knowledge and understanding." 

"Read history. Read anything that is good, that will elevate 
the mind and will add to your stork of knowledge, that those who 
associate with you may feel an interest in your pursuit of knowledge 
and of wisdom." 

"We hear of card parties here and card parties there, and enter- 
tainments where the playing of cards is the principal amusement. 
and the whole evening is thus wasted." 

Lei US place a high value on our time. I,et u- rememher that 

everything we do affects our character, and that the great objective 

of our lives is to develop a ( 'hris t - 1 1 k e character. II we value our 

time highly, if we uai it wisely, we will make the mosl of it and 
will devote ourselves '" righteoui living, whether in work or in plaj 
If we regard our time in such ■ was. we should also be considerate 
and regard the tim< of others as just as valuable, 



Are You Numbered Among the Lost? 



out of tl I and put in 

fam:' elow would 

write me so that I may be able t»» I them. Your help 

will b< 

ELDER ALBERT J. WILEY, 

(Mission Record 
514 Remuera Road, Auckland, S.E.2. 



AUCKLAND DISTRICT 

P 

BAY OF ISLANDS 



< . 

HAWKES BAY 

H 

( OLN 1RV 
MANAWATU 

rold 



MAM 
TAR A 



WELLINGTON 

h Lilian 
WHAN' 



Baldwin, 

rihi 

dwln 



!>iW 



i 



i. 






M 






THE MESSENGER 




OCTOBER :: 1952 



MONTHLY MAGAZINE OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 



-/.(•i/af/i/ /( /riants 



no faults in the Church, and therefore 
lft me be resurrected with the Saints, whether 

end to heaven or descend to hell, 
any other place And it" we go to hell, we will 
turn the devils oul of doors and make a In . 
of it. Where this people are, there 

ty. What do we care where we are, it' the 
society be good? I don't care what a man's 
character is; if he's my friend — a true friend. 
I will be a friend to him, and preach the Gospel 
of Salvation to him, and give him good counsel, 
helping him ou1 of his difficull ies. 

Friendship is one of the grand fundamental 
principles of "Mormonism" ; it is designed to 
revolutionize and civilize the world, and cause 
wars and contentions to cease and men to be- 
come friends and brothers. Even the wolf and 
the land) shall dwell together; the leopard shall 
lie down with the kid, the calf, the young lion 
and the fatling; and a little child shall lead 
them; the hear and the cow shall lie down 

.her. and the sucking child shall play on 
the hole of the asp. and the weaned child shall 
play on the cockatrice's den; and they shall not 
hurl or destroy in all my holy mountains, saith 
the Lord of II ah). 



Joseph Smit h.) 



Te Karere 



(ESTABLISHED 1907) 



Volume 46 Number 10 October, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley Tumuaki Mihana 

Joseph Hay Kaunihera Tuatahi 

George R. Biesinger Kaunihera Tuarua 

James A. Larscn Hekeretari o te Mihana 

Albert J. Wiley Mission Recorder 

David T. Briggs Etita 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) .. .. Kaiwhakamaori 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 



"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; £2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



&entents 



Editorial: 

From the Editor's Pen 342 

Special Features: 

Evidences and Reconciliations . . . . . . . . 345 

The Wily Chief 347 

Evidence Within 349 

Polynesia 351 

Home, the Greatest Institution : Parents, the First Teachers 865 

Our Interests Increase With Genealogy 858 

I Thank God 373 

Miss America. 1052 37 I 

Church Features: 

The President's Page 840 

The Women's Corner 311 

L.D. Prophets Speak 356 

World Wide Church and Its Progress 860 

The Sunday School in New Zealand 86] 

Greetings to Our Genealogj Workers 869 

Here and There in the Mission: 

Featuring the Districts B68 



Tckihana Maori: 




By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 

HE KUPU AROHA 



•LETS SPEAK OF ALL THE BEST 
WE CAN" 

IF mankind would abide that simple 
rule of life, there would be no war. 
no contention and no sorrow. It' halt 

of mankind would obey that lovely 
e, the other half would have no 
p wer over them. 

I)., you know of < >NE THING in 
life thai hasn't a little hit of beauty 
in it: I don't The rain and mud is 
merely a promise of yrass and flowers ; 
the Steep hid IS but an indication that 
we fan .oast down the other side; the 

spill of illness reminds us that we will 

appreciate health so very much, when 
we regain it; tin- meeting with a cruel 
and unreasonable person makes one 
ap pre c iate, more fully, the kindness and 
love of his brother who is kind and 
considerate; the dark depression of dis- 
d uragement makes the dawn of a new- 
day and the glow of God's comforting 
Spirit feel more glorious than it ever 

did before, and a bitter word fade- 
away in the echo of a beautiful anthem 
or a lovely poem. 

"I would that ye he one, even as 1 
and My Father are One." is the ad- 
monition of tin- Saviour. The tw<>- 

edged sword of bitterness and discon- 
tent is the greatest divider that Satan 

evet devised. If he ran divide the 

followers of the Saviour, his demoniai 

task is completed, hut he can't do so 
entirely for there will always he those 
who |i ind Harmony and 

Love and who will despoil hi- Satanic 

plans. 



But what of those who love a lie 
and love to see men fall before his 
vile s\v< ml of hatred and had. 

It they do not repent. the\ will destroy 

themselves. The Work of Love will 

go "ii and those who love it will pro- 

and pass on to their reward with 

!• J and contentment, while die vicious 

and contentious will enter that pit of 

misery that they ha\e digged for them- 
selves. 

We are human. Our fellow nien are 
human. If we belittle OUT fellow men, 

we belittle the race to which we be- 
long. We are members I weak or 

Strong) m the Restored ( hurch of the 

Gentle Master. If we backbite and 
vilify a fellow member, we weaken 

the whole structure, and the progress 
of the whole Church is retarded by 

the faulty timber of our seK pit) and 
silly false pride. 

God hless that person, whether lie he- 
Maori. Pakeha, Jew or Gentile, who 

does not let the sharp little needle 

of talebearing, bitterness or backbiting 

• his soul, and who looks straight 

ahead and finds beauty m the most 
common and menial things. That per- 
son who sees the silver in the dark 

cloud, the wealth behind the flood and 
the Eternal |<»> beyond the trials and 
vicissitudes of life, to his community 

and his Church. 

"LET'S SPE \K OF \l l. THE 
BEST WE CAN." 

May the Lord bless you all. in 
righteousness. 



340 



TE KARERE 



^^G^Q^xC~^Q^<(7~^ - 



W&fne>n>'$ Come,*, 



By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^P 




THE word "Prepare" means, ac- 
cording to Webster, to qualify- 
beforehand, to get ready, to put in 
order. 

We all know what this means, but 
do we believe it? Is it worth a little 
time and effort before conducting a 
meeting to be prepared and to have 
at least one or two things in mind 
as to how that meeting should be 
conducted ? 

No matter what organisation we are 
working in, the advice given to us by 
those who know and have had much 
experience is, to hold a prayer meeting 
before the general assembly, to check 
over the things that are to be done 
and to ask our Heavenly Father to 
aid us in the conduct of the meeting 
of that day. It would save much time 
and eliminate much confusion. 

Class leaders of Relief Society would 
do well to qualify beforehand to get 
ready for their lesson hour, long before 
the day of their lesson. Think of the 
responsibility you have. Other women 
who are as busy as you, leave their 
work and family to come and listen 
to you, hoping to be uplifted and to 
gain strength and courage from yon. 
to carry on when they return to their 
homes. If you have nothing to give 
them, their time is w;i ted and 
yours. 



A task well begun, is half finished, 
so let us begin, before the eleventh 
hour, to be prepared when the time 
comes. "Procrastination is the thief of - 
time," and only makes one's task the 
harder to do. 

As soon as one theology lesson is 
given, it is time to prepare to give 
the next one, if you are to give it 
intelligently and keep the interest of 
your class. The other lessons, likewise. 

We often hear the quotation, "Order 
is the first law of Heaven" ; an un- 
prepared lesson disrupts the order of 
the organisation, especially when the 
lessons are to be given in proper 
sequence, one tying in with the other 
as outlined in the magazine. 

So let us make a greater effort to 
be prepared, whether it be the class 
leader, the chorister, or the work 
director, or the presiding officer or 
any member who is responsible for a 
special assignment. Remember, we are 
to be held accountable for our acts. 
If we do what we know to he right, 
there is surely a blessing awaiting us. 
Not a material blessing, perhaps, but 
the blessing of peace of mind and the 
jo\ of a task well done. 

"For (iod is not unrighteous to 
forget your work and labour of love. 
which ye have shewed toward His 

(Continued on Page 348) 



October, 1952 



341 



hum the ( littir s I'vn . . . 



A Knowledge of the Personality and Attributes of God 
are Necessary in order to Have True Faith in Him 



Tl I KK E are very feu beings in the 
u«»rltl who understand rightly the 

of mankind do not comprehend any- 
thing, either that which is past, «>r 
that which is i<» come, a> it r 
their relationship t" God. They do not 
know, neither do they understand the 
nature of that relationship, and con- 
sequently they know but 
the brute beast, <>r more than 
drink and sleep. This is all nan knows 
about l ixistence, ui ' 

is given by the inspiration of the 
Almighty. 

nothing more than 
to eat, drink and sleep, and docs not 
comprehend any of the d< 
the beast comprehends the same things, 
knows 
g more about ' knows 

as much we, unless we are able to 
comprehend by the inspiration 
mighty (»>i\. If men do not compre- 
hend the cha 

Taken from 
"The King Folletl 

ph Smith the Prophet. ) 

i neology ? It is that re- 
\ the 
r.u\ attributes of God, His re- 
lation to us, the dispensations < »f I [is 
His will with respect \> i 
our actions and His purpose with re- 
Did . ; : 

And the first principle in this re- 

Vs it tells lis 

in Hebrews 11:6, "Without Faith it is 

ible to please God." Nov 
is two kinds of Faith, namelj 
and True. A false faith is of • 



\ true 
the result derived from true 

m e. 

In order I 
the brute Beast, we .mist strive dili- 

■ k out the ti-. 
the attributes and ; I d, that 

we might hi ith and thus 

c rewards derivt d i\n i • 
i\ the reward mentioned in 
John 17 :3 "For this is life 
that they might know Thee, the only 
true God and Jesus Christ whom Thou 
hast sent." 

The simple story told by the Prophet 
Joseph Smith of the interview with 
the Father and the- Son • 
to understand the teachings of the 
Bible relating to this important . 
Ii must be remembered, however, that 
btained by 
the Prophet through a study of the 
Bible. Although a study of the Bible 
proves that the Prophet's story har- 
monizes perfectly with the teachings 
ed therein. As we now .shall 
consider, in our search for true evi- 
dence. 

God said, Let Mi make man 
in our image, after our likness; and let 
them have dominion over the fish of 

the sea. and over the fowl of the- air. 
and over the cattle, and over all the 
earth, and over ever) creeping thing 
that creepeth upon the earth. S 

I man in his own image, in the 
image of God treated he him: male 

and female created he them." 
27.) 

Fter reading this 

scripture, just how the learned men. 

throughout different ' ' have 



342 



TE KARERE 



fouled up their conception of Deity so 
much, when it is stated so very plainly. 
And how so many people in the world 
who have read the Prophet Joseph's 
simple story concerning his first vision, 
could possibly persist in staying in 
darkness when the light is brought 
forth to them. 

The following scripture gives us a 
clearer idea as to what our image and 
our likeness meant as stated in the 
First Chap, of Gen. . . "And Adam 
lived a hundred and thirty years, and 
begat a son in his own likeness, after 
his image ; and called his name Seth. 
(Gen. 5:3.) We find from these scrip- 
tures that we are literally in the image 
and likness of God and Jesus Christ, 
as Seth was in the likeness and image 
of his Father, Adam. Therefore we 
see that Our Father which is in 
Heaven has a body of flesh and bone, 
parts and passions. Now to continue 
with more scriptural evidences. 

Moses and Seventy of the Elders 
of Israel were privileged to be able 
to see the God of Israel, who is the 
God of this earth. 

Then went up Moses, and Aaron, 
Nadab, and Abihu, and seventy of the 
Elders of Israel : 

And they saw the God of Israel ; and 
there was under his feet as it were a 
paved work of a sapphire stone, and 
as it were the body of heaven in his 
clearness. (Exod. 24:9-10.) 

And it came to pass, as Moses en- 
tered into the tabernacle, the cloudy 
pillar descended, and stood at the door 
of the tabernacle, and the Lord calked 
with Moses. 

And all the people saw the cloudy 
pillar stand at the tabernacle door ; and 
all the people rose up and worshipped, 
every man in his tent door. 

And the Lord spake unto Moses jace 
In face, as a man speaketh unto his 
friend. ( Exod. 33:9-11.) 



Does anyone need to be told how a 
man speaks unto his friend? The same 
happened when the Father and the Son 
appeared unto Joseph Smith. "They 
spoke with Joseph face to face, as a 
man speaketh unto his friend." And 
there is only one thing that made this 
possible and that is the fact that God 
did create man in his own image and 
likeness. 

Paul's Testimony of the Personality 
of God gives us further evidence to 
build our faith on. He tried to make 
clear the personality and attributes of 
God by telling us that His Son Jesus 
Christ was the brightness of His glory, 
and the express image of His person, 
and that He sat down on the right 
hand of the Majesty on high. (Heb. 
1 :3.) Our Heavenly Father must have 
had a form for the Saviour to be able 
to sit to the right of His Father. 

Stephen's Testimony of the Person- 
ality of God is as valid and faith- 
promoting as any in the scriptures be- 
cause of the fact of his being stoned at 
the time of his testimony, and the last 
words which he spoke. "But he, being 
full of the Holy Ghost, looked up 
steadfastly into heaven, and saw the 
glory of God, and Jesus standing on 
right hand of God. 

And said. "Behold, I see the heavens 
opened, and the Son of man standing 
on the right hand of God." (Acts 

7:55-56.) 

From this we find out that he saw 
two separate and distinct personages. 
One the Son, standing on the right 
hand of the other, the Father. Also 
in John 14:9 when the Saviour was 
asked by Philip that they might sec 
the Father, and Jesus said unto him : 
He that hath seen Me hath seen the 
Father: and how sayesl thou then, 
Shew us the Father? This coincides 
with Paul's description of the Father 
and the Son as he explained it in his 
Epistle to the Hebrews, as the Son 

being the brightness of his glory, and 



October, 1952 



343 



the <•'. 

that we have found out that the 

u and God the Father ai 

te and distincl personagi 

g tangible bodies • 
bone, let u> stud) a few more »f the 
references found in the revelations 
which He has given to the human 
family. 

A useful God must pos 
lowing: A mouth, or Ik- cannot speak 
t-. us. 'And the Lord said tun- Moses, 
I \ I come unt«. thee in a thick cloud, 
that tin- people may hear when I speak 
with thee, and believe thee forever." 

• ; 19 9 I I l< must poss< 
<»r Ik- cannot hear prayers, *'l I 
I .ord, when I cry with my voii i 
mercy also upon me, and answer me." 
! [e must '...^-stv.. |( assions, 

or lie cannol love, hate, Ik- angered, be 

suffering, merciful ami gr 
an 1 he does i"-^^ these attributes 

as further scripture states, hm due t«» 

arcity of space, I will retrain 

from bringing them forth at this time. 

God Himself was once as we are 

now. and is an exalted man. and sits 

enthroned in yonder heavens! That is 

the greal secret. It' the veil were rent 

. and the threat God who holds 



this world in its orl.it. and w 
holds all worlds and all things b) His 
was t" make 1 [imself i 

M n 

you Would see I Inn like a man in 
form lik< yourselves in all the pi 

mi as a m.i 
Adam was i realed in the \ 
image and ' id re- 

ceived instruction from, and r 
talked ami conversed w ith I Inn. 
man talks and communes with another. 

It is the tirst principle of the ' I 
to know for 

'.. and to know thai 
a ith I lim as one man D ' 
with another, and that I i 
a man like us; yea. that God Himself, 
the Father of us all. dwelt on an 

earth, tin- same as Jesus Christ 

self did. ( '! i 
Joseph Smith.) 

Let us study out of tl • 
that we mighl he edified and I 
to strengthen our testimonies 
truthfulness of the Gospel and the plan 

which it provides. "Search tin 

tures : tor in them ye think > I 
eternal life: and they are they which 
testify of me." (John ; 



Notiee ... 

TO ALL RELIEF SOCIETY MEMBERS 

NEW .MISSION RELIEF SOCIETY SECRETARY CHOSEN 

Address all correspondence, with the exception of anything dealing 

with the magazine, to: — 

SISTER EVELYN KENNERLY, 
l 9 Dunkirk Ten i 
Mt. Albert, Auckland. 



344 



TE KARERE 



Evidences and Reconciliations 



What is the Meaning of 
Salvation? 

By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



BEFORE the Church was organ- 
ized, the Lord said to the Prophet 
Joseph Smith, "There is no gift 
greater than the gift of salvation" 
(D. & C. 6:13). This was repeated 
in several later revelations. On another 
occasion, also while the young Prophet 
was receiving his preparatory training, 
the Lord further declared that "eternal 
life ... is the greatest of all the gifts 
of God" (D. & C. 14:7). It would 
appear, therefore, that salvation is 
eternal life ; or that to obtain salvation, 
one must win eternal life. In the Bible 
and Bok of Mormon, also, eternal life, 
or everlasting life, is promised those 
who accept the Lord and His Son, 
Jesus Christ. Life and salvation are 
forever intertwined. Indeed, our own 
Church leaders have spoken and speak 
of the "gospel of life and salvation." 

This conception of the meaning of 
salvation requires a definition of life. 
Man had a pre-existent state, and will 
live on throughout eternity. He is 
immortal. It becomes necessary, there- 
fore, to distinguish clearly between life 
as mere existence, and life as some- 
thing greater that may issue from 
existence. 

Brigham Young has furnished a 
definition in thrilling words: "Salva- 
tion is the full existence of man, of the 
angels, and the Gods: it is eternal life, 
the life which was, which is, and that 
which is to come." Life, then, is more 
than mere existence: it is "full exist- 
' enee." Life is active; existence is 
static. Life is warm ; existence, cold. 
Life uses its powers to secure pro- 



gress ; it moves upward. Existence is 
today where it was yesterday, or 
lower. Life is the increasing realiza- 
tion of man's highest ideals. The Lord 
Himself has made clear the distinction, 
for He said to Moses, "This is my 
work and my glory — to bring to pass 
the immortality and eternal life of 
man" ( Pearl of Great Price, Moses 
1:39). And Jesus, the Christ, made 
the same distinction when He said, 
"I am the resurrection, and the life" 
(John 11 :25). Life in contradistinction 
to existence has always been the objec- 
tive of Latter-day Saints. Life, imply- 
ing a future of endless development, 
is the ultimate goal of the Church. 



The Prophet Joseph Smith in his 
discourses gave added meaning to this 
definition of salvation. "Salvation," he 
said, "means a man's being placed be- 
yond the power of all his enemies" 
(Teachings of the Prophet Joseph 
Smith, p.301), and "Salvation is 
nothing more or less than to triumph 
over all our enemies and put them 
under our feet. And, where we have 
power to put all enemies under our 
feet in this world, and a knowledge 
to triumph over all spirits in the world 
to come, then we are saved, as in the 
case of Jesus who was to reign until 
He had put all enemies under His 
feet, and the last enemy was death*' 
(Teachings of the Prophet Joseph 
Smith, p.297). There is no thought 
of inertia, mere existence, in such 

words. Instead, these Statements imply 

action, a battle for triumph over 

enemies without and within. 



October, 1952 



345 



The conditions which enable man 
to win eternal life arc included in the 
plan of salvation. In fact, the plan is 
but a series of invariable, unalterable 

l which in- 
man- power to triumph over 
evil. Thai means that there is know- 
quired < I eai hings of the 
Prophet Joseph Smith, p.297) ; prin- 
ciples of action to be accepted; ordin- 
ances to be received (Teachings of the 
Prophel Joseph Smith, pp.12, 331 ) : 
duties to be performed through life; 
and the complete acceptance of Jesus, 
the Christ ( John 17:3) : that is, full 
health of body, mind, and spirit to 
l»c won All this that man "might he 
raised in immortality unto eternal life" 

. D. \ C. 29:43), 

The man who uses hi- powers in 

obedience to law t<> fight all enemies 
of progress, whether ignorance, temp- 
tation, appetites, or personalities 

above existence; he lives; In- is mi the 
way t<> salvation. For him wh. 
use his powers, though h< 
life docs not function fully; the light 
of truth i.s blotted cut; the enemy may 
defeat him; he i> retreating from sal- 
vation. Salvation, then, is conditioned 
under the divine plan and with divine 
help, upon the proper exercise of the 
will of man. Complete salvation, which 
is full and eternal life, results from 
man's full endeavour to conform to 
the laws of life, tin- gospel of the 
Lord Jesus Christ. That is why we 
often say that men save themselves 
with the aid of the Lord I I). ,\ ( 
29:44, 45 i. 

Since men differ in their obedience 
to law. there must he stages of salva- 
tion. Mankind may win any degl 
salvation, from mere inert existence, 

beyond a kingdom of glory, to the 
d kingdom or highest glory. 

"In my Father's house are many man- 
kingdoms)" (John 14:2). They 

who use only a part of their powers, or 

use tin in improperly, do not live life 

fully. Only those who render obedience 



to all the duties required of them, who 
are in process of full living 
complete salvation i Tea< hings i 

• Joseph Smith, p.332). They 
become the sons of God The) will 
he where < lod and Christ i 

ilvation is eternal life as here 
defined, it m 
have begun in the pn x 
of man I o the degree that a 

uses his poW( ( arth, 

and liws fully under the law. he is 

daily achieving salvation and in 
oi salvation. But, the summation of 
our efforts will be made on the great 
day of judgment, and will determine 
the degree of our salvation, our final 
place in the hereafu r 

This meaning of salvation is simple, 
easily understood. It the body i 

kept healthy, and tit for the w • 
life, certain definite laws must he 
obeyed. If the mind is to render full 
service, it must be properly i^l and 
< d. If the spirit is to lift man 
into joy. spiritual tasks must be per- 
formed. Only under such conditions 
of fully functioning in full 

life be lived. If salvation is to be 
gained, all the powers of life must 

be Used, under the laws of .ruth. SO 

far as in man's power lu-s. There must 
be a co-ordination of these powers for 
steady progress. As we seek salvation, 
an active eternal life, we must prepare 
ourselves for it by proper activity on 

earth. 

This conception of salvation explains 
why the activities of the Chu 
earth enter into every phase of man's 
life, and why activity must ch.v 
i/e the life tO Come. 

There is much in the < lOSpel I 

revealed to man. but that which we 
know is within the easy comprehension 
of man. Certainly, the revealed mean- 
ing of salvation removes much of the 
confusion surrounding this frequently 
used term. 



346 



TE KARERE 



I 



jsieneer zjleries oiuild cJailh 



The Wily Chief 

By LE ROI C. SNOW 



(The author of this story is a sou 
of President Lorenzo Snow, and nozv 
an employee of the Church Historian's 
Office. He is well knozvn for his his- 
torical writings. — P.N.) 

THE first work done by the Church 
in Arizona was among the Indians. 
Jacob Hamblin, Ammon M. Tenny, 
Ira Hatch, Thales Haskell, Andrew 
R. Gibbon, John S. Brown, George 
Adair, Samuel U. Adair, Fred Hamb- 
lin, and James Pierce, were among the 
early missionaries to the Lamanites. 
The first crossing of the Colorado 
River was El Vado de Jos Padres 
(The Crossing of the Fathers) in 
1858. Son thereafter, they visited all 
the Hopi and Moqui Indian villages, 
including the noted "Seven Cities of 
Sebola." Moenkopi was made mission- 
ary headquarters. 

Moenkopi is an ancient Indian 
village, built in a mesa above the 
Moenkopi wash. In the spring of 1876 
a large number of missionaries, some 
with their wives and families, were 
located here. One day late in May, 
1876, they were greatly aroused by an 
Indian runner who came with the 
news that a "Mormon" party had met 
disaster by the overturn of a ferry 
boat while crossing the Colorado River 
at the mouth of the Paria, and that 
the "great 'Mormon' Chief" was 
drowned. At first it was feared that 
this might have been President Brig- 
ham Young, and there was much 
anxiety for several weeks, when finally 
definite news was received of the 
drowning of Lorenzo W. Roundy, of 
the Daniel H. Wells' party. 



A few weeks later elaborate prepara- 
tions were made for proper celebration 
of the 24th of July, Utah's Pioneer 
Day. On the morning of the 24th, all 
the women folks were busily engaged 
preparing the great feast. Most of the 
men were working in the gardens, 
down in the wash below the mesa. 
Sister Elvira Martineau Johnson called 
attention to a cloud of dust many miles 
out in the sandy desert. The women 
were fearful of danger and asked Bro. 
James S. Brown if it might be a band 
of Indians. At first Bro. Brown said 
it was perhaps simply a wind storm 
out in the desert. Sister Johnson was 
not satisfied with the answer, and ap- 
proached Bro. Brown and asked, "Is 
it not a band of Indians ? Tell us, we 
shall try to keep calm, but we want 
to know whether it is Indians or not." 
Brother Brown then answered that he 
feared it was Indians, but he hoped 
they might be friendly. He then went 
to the edge of the mesa and called 
the brethren from the gardens below. 
The people were all gathered in Moen- 
kopi, when a large band of hostile 
Navajos came up. They were led by 
Chief Piecon, who dramatically thrust 
forth a youth, saying, "Here he is, take 
him and do as you please." Brother 
Brown was astonished, as were the 
others, and asked, "What do you 
mean? What has the boy done?" 
"Punish him," replied the Indian Chief, 
"be as severe as you wish. Although 
he is my son, he deserves severe 
punishment, and we wish you to use 
him as an example, even though it 
may mean his death." "But," asked 
Bro. Brow n, "whal has the boj 

It was then explained that the hoy had 



October, 1952 



347 



and killed three cattle belong- 
.• the settler 
Sunset "ii the little Colorado River, 
thai there had been considerable steal- 
i killing of cattle. The Indian 
the practice stopped and 
■ 
most drastic punishment. 

ther Brown explained that the 
it us, that he \s < »ul«l 
accompany the chief and Ins party to 
the Sunset settlement where he be- 
lieved adjustment could be made by the 
Indians paying for the three rattle or 
replacing them. He thought the Saints 
would require no more. The band I 
s accompanied by a band 
of Piutes, who usually did the dirty 
work for the Navajos. They were 
armed with lmu> and arrows, -.aimed 
and bedecked wtih war paraph* • 
They strutted about, drawing their 
bows and threatening the people. They 
were seeking trouble. Jusl it thi 
word was given that the big feast was 
ready. The chief and others cf the 
Indians were invited to {he 
while food was distributed among all 
others of both hand-. The greal feast 
was enjoyed by all, especially the 



Indian-, for whom 

the meal all felt much better, 
and the council was resumed. It w.i- 
then that the truth was made known 
by Chief Piecon, who explained that it 
was not hi- hoy who had killed steers 
belonging to the Sunset people, but 
that tin' "Mormon" settlers of Sunsel 
had killed three animals belong 
tlu- Indians, and tlu- wily Chief had 
hoped t" have Brother Brown pro- 
nounce punishment on his son, which 
he in turn would mete out upon the 
"Mormon" people. Bro. Brown <. c- 
pressed regret that the "Mormons" 
had hem guilty of killing tlu- cattle, 
and at lii> suggestion a visit was made 
to Suneset where it wa> learned that 

the almost Starving sutlers had run 

across the stra) cattle on the range 

and. not believing that they would he 
claimed, killed them for food. The 
Saints wire very willing to make 
reparation for the damage, and the 

Indians returned to their hotlM 
fectly satisfied with die adjustment. 
This incident undoubtedl) proved to 
the Lamanites the honesty and good 

intentions of the "Mormon" people had 

welded the friendship that wa> ^r.'W- 

ing between them. 




THE WOMEN'S CORNER (Continued from Page 341) 



in that ye have ministered to 
the Saints and do minister. And we 
desire that every one of you do shew 

' igence to the full ,>>ur- 



ance of hope unto the end: that \t 
he not slothful hut followers of diem, 
who thru faith and patience, inherit 
the promises." 



)'<>ii shouldn't say it is iwt good. You should say you do not like it; and 
then, you know, you're perfectly i 

I.. C. Ingleby, ( )s;.r Wilde, p.67 



348 



TE KARERE 



xDvulence Jtyithin 



By ELDER REECE L. GLINES 



EPISTLES, PSALMS, LAMENTATIONS 

6 6T])AUL, an apostle of Jesus Christ 
-11 by the commandment of God 
our Saviour, and Lord Jesus Christ, 
which is our hope ; Unto Timothy, my 
own son in the faith." 

Such was the beginning of the First 
Epistle of Paul the Apostle to Timo- 
thy. But, this is contained in the Bible 
you say ! Are we not supposed to be 
concerned with the Book of Mormon 
and the contents therein? Surely, and 
if we will just study the book a little 
closer, we will find such a thing as 
epistles in the Book of Mormon. There 
are nine of these epistles in that Sacred 
Record. They are classified into three 
different groups, namely : pastoral, 
prophetic, and war. 

There are two examples of the 
pastoral epistles ; found in Moroni 8 :2- 
30 and in Moroni 9. Those of the 
Bible are contained in 1st and 2nd 
Timothy and Titus. They deal with the 
duties of the "shepherd" or the pre- 
siding officer of a given branch or 
centre of the Church. The two in the 
Book of Mormon are written by Mor- 
mon to his son Moroni, giving Moroni 
counsel and advice on how to run the 
affairs of the Church, since Moroni 
had recently been called into the min- 
istry. The first of these epistles is of 
utmost importance to every Latter-day 
Saint. Moroni seems to have been con- 
fronted with the idea of infant baptism, 
and being new in the ministry, was 
getting instructions concerning the 
correctness of the doctrine. Mormon 
assures Moroni that little children need 
no baptism for they cannot be tempted 
by the devil, because God has nol given 
Satan the power to tempt them. He 
also affirms thai the I ,aw • if I lircum- 
cision is done away with in the Lord. 




The second epistle to Moroni is not 
doctrinal. It deals very heavily with 
the wickedness of the Nephite people. 
Mormon is very sad with the unwill- 
ingness of the people to repent of their 
sins ; but he does not forget that 
Moroni is still in the ministry, exhort- 
ing him to keep true to the faith. An 
indication also is given that the 
Nephite people are very "ripe" for 
destruction. 

Our next consideration is that of the 
prophetic type. Some people have not 
wished to class the first of these 
epistles as an epistle, but since it con- 
tains instructions to a future trans- 
lator, it can be truly called a letter. 
The epistle is very short ; of only six 
verses. The instructions are twofold: 
the translator is told not to translate 
the part which is sealed; and second, 
he should show the plates to only 
those who "assist to bring forth the 
work." 

Moroni says that "in the month of 
three witnesses shall these things be 
established." It is found in Ether 5:2-4. 

The remaining six epistles are all 
war epistles. The firsl two are those 
dealing with the exchange of prisoners 



October, 1952 



349 






i Ammoron, 

found in Alma 54 5-14 and 54 : 

.t sharp worded replj i I 

Lmmoi 
second :ontains Ammor- 

::'',; it miyllt I 

he didn't altogeth ,; ; the 

proposal that Moroni put forth, Am- 
moron d< es final j 

The third 
longest epistle in th< ' >rmon. 

It ; - written by one General Heleman 
connecting somewhat with the epistles 
on tht 
very faith-promt tin • ut the 

: I [eleman " It breathes 
ily with the confidence those warriors 
had in < lod. The fourth 
up" that the General Moroni ga 

in, the- chief judge, for not sup- 
porting the armies in the field. He 
threatens reprisal measures unless 
something is done about the situation. 
The ending lines of his letter are irery 
fitting, even in a world of todaj 
h<-ld, I am Moroni, your chief captain. 
I seek not for power, but t<> pull it 
down. I N^-ek not for honour of the 
world, but for the glory of my God, 
and the freedom and welfare of my 
country. And thus 1 ipistle" 

(Alma 60). Epistle number five is 
Pahoran's reply to Moroni, telling 
Moroni that he has had iron 
his own but help is forthcoming. The 
last of the war epistles is an ultimatum 
for the Nephite governor, Lachoneus, 
demanding possession of Nephite lands. 
threatening the people, and telling « f 
ing wrongs, which he created, 
that were supposed to have been done 
to the Gaddianton robbers. It is written 
by Giddianhi. 

\ iew is now centered on another 

type of literature, the psalm. The 

psalm is a type of literature which lias 

feeling in it. 



along with t : 

writer. Tin- I ntains 

a vcr) large number i f them: but the 

about It is found in 2 Nt phi 4 | 

tinot report it liere in full, hut 
we must include souk- droplings 
for illustration. • it i> the yi an." 

soul ! No longer droop in sin. Rej 

• \«- place it" 
for the enemy of my soul. I > 

■ i 
Do not slacken by Btrength !•< 
of mine afflictions 
heart, and cry unto the Lord, and 
I, I will pi 
soul will rejoice in thl 

' i.'d. and tin r. ck of mj salvation." 
(2 Neplu 4:28-30. 1 Read 

then turn to the psalms . f David. You 
are sure to find the same rhythemtrical 
verse m tin ' .' •nnon as in 

the Bil 

Lamentation is the name gii i 

another type of literature. It is ;.n 

utterance of grief by the author, gen- 
erally for the wickedness of the 

and it also portrays much anguish for 
them. The lone one is ihat of Mormon; 
and he justly had the right to mourn 

for the wickedness of the people, for 

shortly after they were wiped from 

the fate of the earth by the Lama 
Let us quote a bit : "< ) that ye had re- 
pented before this great destru 
had come upon you. But behold, ye 

ne. and ii:< 
Eternal Father of Heaven, knoweth 
your stati ; and he doeth with you 
according to his justice and mercy." 

What an education it would have 

taken to have concocted .such litera- 
ture! Only a scholar could have done 
so, and at that with many \< 
learning and hard labour. Do you think 

foseph Smith wrote the Bo 

Morm 



He that endweth to the end shall be saved. Matt. X j22 



TE KARERE 



POLYNESIA 

A Branch of the House of Israel. 
By ELDER RICHARD BIGLER 

'THE MIGRATIONS" 

(The Third and Final Instalment.) 



HAWAIIAN chant of how the 
Hawaiian Islands were formed : 
Come back and dwell in Hawaii-of- 

t he -green-back, 
A land that was formed in the ocean. 
That was drawn up from the sea. 
From the very depths of Kanaloa; 
The -white coral of the ocean caves 

that was caught on the hood of the 

fisherman, 
The great fisherman of Kapaahu, 
The great fisherman, Kapu-he 'e-au-nui. 

The Hawaiian Islands 

Are found in the most northern part 
of the Polynesian Island groups. It is 
sometimes referred to as the Sandwich 
Island group, which is made up of 
about eight main islands — Hawaii, 
Maui, Kahoolawe, Lanai, Molokai, 
Oahu, Kauai, and Xiihau. Few of the 
islands of the Pacific have as much 
bearing of colourful history as have 
the Hawaiian Islands. The story of 
Hawaii-loa is indeed one of the more 
fascinating stories of migration and 
discovery that we find on all Polynesia. 
We will now take up this colourful 
history to see the possibility of a 
migration from the Americas into the 
Hawaiian Islands. As I pointed out in 
my last article, "The Book of Mor- 
mon" provides two hints of migrations 
from the Americas into Polynesia. I 
showed you first of these hints in my 
previous article and now we will take 
Up the second mention of a people 
leaving the South America in The 
Book of Mormon, found in Alma 
63:5-9. 

"And it came to pass thai Hagoth, 
he being an exceeding curious man, 
therefore, he went forth and built 



C\ 




him an exceeding large ship, on the 
boarders of the land Bountiful, by the 
land Desolation and launched it forth 
into the west sea, by the narrow neck 
which led into the land northward." 

"And behold, there were many 
Xephites who did enter therein and 
did sail forth with much provisions, 
and also many women and children 
and they took their course northward. 
And thus ended the thirty and seventh 
year." 

"In the thirty and eighth year this 
man built other ships, and die first 
ship did also return, and many more 
people did enter into it ; and they also 
took much provisions, and set out again 
to the land northward." 

".And it came to pass that they 
were never heard of more. And we 
suppose that they were drowned up in 
the depths of the sea. And it came 
to pass thai one other .ship also did 
sail forth; and whether she did go, we 
know not." 

1 will quote what the "House • f 
[srael" says about this. "This story 

doesn't mention of the fact that the 



October, 1952 



351 



Nephites went to Hawaii. It merely 
thai one of the ships, the first 
cue built by Hagoth, had landed its 
safely somewhere in the land 
northward and returned for another. 
This doesn't mean that it went to 
1 law an, for the particulars of tl 
conflict with those of the Hawaiians' 
legend which states that onlj one man 
landed there, Hawaii-loa. According 
t<> Mr. Bancroft, eminent American 
Indian historian, there i- a tribe of 
Indians n<>w living in Northen 
fornia who till in legend of the Hoh- 
ompare this name w ith that of 
>, seven in number, who tir>t 
came there in a boat '*They built their 
houses after the style of the white 
man now. These Hohgates killed many 
elk <>n land, seals and sea li"iis in 

fishing excursions from their boats. 
Some "t' these Elongates were caught 
in a typhoon and. swinging around and 
around, their boat floated steadily into 
the vast of heaven" < Natives Ra 
Bancroft, Vol. 3, p.177). 

Tlu- "Vast of I leaven* 1 to the Cali- 
fornia Mainland is westward, and it 
was in that direction that this tradi- 
tional fisherman-navigator floated. The 
( alifornian current flowing down the 
west coast of North America begins 
to make it- circuit westward at about 
the same region where the Hoi 
fishermen became entangled in a 
typhoon. While his boat comparatively 
helpless in the current became subject 

to the movement of the water and 
would eventually he tarried to the 
region >\ the Hawaiian Island 
could not get across the equatorial 
drift which runs directly westward 
through the epicenter of the California 
2nd Antartic currents for the water 
of the northern current would carry 
him irresistibly westward. 

To some this may he discarded as 

mere supposition, and without further 

substantiation The Book <>i Mormon 

thai Hagoth built his ships in 

the 37th year of the reign of the judges 



which, when calculated according to 

The B " mon chronology . 

; B.t The 
nesians in their pedigrees trace hack 
eighty generations t<» Hawaii-loa. The 
• on at cording t«» the Pol) nesian 
■ 
This established 

thorugh and exhau h into 

Maori pedigree historic- and Un- 
heard-of genealogies of other islanders. 
If we use tin- a- a unit of q . 
nient. multipl) ing eighty by I 
five, v two thousand >ears 

from 1936, tlu- date of this calculation 
to tlu- arrival of Hawaii-l 

Taking this number from 1934 
arrive at a negath irs, or 

'•4 B.t . the dab lii-loa's 

generation This i- only ten 
different from the date of H 
ship-building project. -., i- substantially 

time. 

It is so close in fact that it will he 
readily accepted that the n 
a possibility of it being the san 
allowing a margin of <-rror in the 
Hawaiian tradition or estimate of 

\ear- per generation. (The House of 

l-rael 436.) 

For those who are not too familiar 
with the -tor\ of Hawaii-loa. I will 

enlarge upon his wanderings and dis- 

. Hawaii-loa was the first pro- 
genitor of the raci' of people that we 
know a- the Hawaiian-. He and his 
navigator, Makali'i. made many fishing 
trip- to a -ea named "Sea-wh< • 
tish-do-run."" On one of his long .rips 

his very good navigator urged him to 
sail farther on. and t' I 
another sea named "Many-coloured- 
ocean-oh-Kane." They passed on to 
the "Deep-coloured-sea, " where 
came to an island Tl i 
named the island after hi'; 
Hawaii. Pleased with his discovery, 

Hawaii-loa returned to his home and 
picked up hi- wife, family and re- 
turned, and sailed hack t<> Hawaii, 
where he DC< anie the tir-t 



352 



TE KARERE 



As Whitehead pointed out in his 
"The House of Israel" there was a 
direct possibility that Hawaii-loa was 
one of the Hohgate Indian fishermen 
who was swept from the coast of 
America in a large storm out into open 
sea. where he was picked up by pre- 
vailing currents and carried to the 
Hawaiian Islands. Other anthropolo- 
gists have placed the homeland of 
Hawaii-loa at Society Islands, while 
still another has placed it at Indonesia, 
to me a fantastic assumption. Where 
are you going to find a race of Euro- 
poids that dwelt in Indonesia at the 
time of Hawaii-loa? I will point out 
the improbability of the theory that 
they came from the Society Island 
group or any other island group in 
Polynesia in a study of the Manahune. 

The Manahune Race 

Or so termed Manahune by the early 
Hawaiian people because they dwelled 
in some of the islands of Hawaii at 
the time of the appearance of Hawaii- 
loa. This is what Peter Buck has to 
say about the Manahune in "Viking 
of the Sunrise" — The Society Islands 
in the centre of Polynesia were peopled 
by an early group called Manahune. 
These were real people referred to 
both in legend and history, and perhaps 
belonging to the same period as the 
Manahune of Hawaii. They could 
readily pass the Gilberts, through a 
chain of atolls, such as the Phoenix 
Islands, Manihiki, Rakahanga, and 
Penrhyn to drop down into the lee- 
ward group of the Society Islands." 

The Anthropologist of today knows 
little about these people, only in myth 
and tradition can they trace them and 
their wanderings. But these Manahune 
were definitely Europoid people like 
the Polynesians. I believe that they 
were the descendants of the earlier 
migrations into Polynesian about 250 
B.C. or later. As I showed in my last 
article, there were earlier migrations 
from the South American Continent. 



If this was the case it is very prob- 
able that Hawaii-loa and his genera- 
tion found that the descendants of 
these early migrations, when they 
entered the Polynesian Islands in 64 
B.C., almost 200 years later, because 
the Manahune were people of whom 
Hawaii-loa had no knowledge. If the 
Manahune had come from the Society 
Islands, they would have been a distant 
relation of some sort and there would 
have been immediate recognition, 
which there was not. Consider this 
statement made by Sir Peter Buck in 
"Vicking of the Sunrise" : The type 
of terrace with raised platforms and 
upright stone pillars is reminiscent of 
the inland temples of Tahiti, attributed 
to the Manahune people of the island." 

"They worked only under cover of 
darkness. Some of the temples were 
alleged to have been completed in one 
night, the workmen stretching in a 
continuous line between the stone 
quarry and the temple site, and pass- 
ing huge stones from hand to hand. 
A chief of the later people (Hawaii- 
loa's group) employed a group of 
Manahune and, when the work was 
completed, he paid the labourers a 
single freshwater shrimp." 

This bit of information proves two 
important things. First, it was that the 
Manahune came from the Society Is- 
lands where they learned to build 
temples and things out of stone, a 
knowledge that was passed on to them 
by the first early people of Peru, who 
taught them the workings of stone. 
And it proves that Hawaii-loa could 
not have come from the Society Is- 
lands, because Hawaii-loa and his 
people had no knowledge of the work- 
ings of stone like the Manahune, and 
if they had of come from the Society 
I-lands they would have had that 
knowledge. No, the group of people 
brought in by Hawaii-loa came from 
some other land. 1 ean't see how they 

came from any other place in Poly- 
nesia because they had no knowledge 



October, 1952 



35* 




of the Manahune and the customs of 
the people in Polynesia at that time. 
It is also hard t" understand how 
the> came from Indonesia and then 
through Micronesia without \a 
more evidence of their journey. Surely, 
it they had sojurned in [ndoni 
Buck states, there would have ; 
lot "i interbreeding and a certain 
amount of them that would h... 
mained in Indonesia, and we find no 
: that today ui the Indonesian 
pe< >ples. 

Tin- possibility of Hawaii-loa's 
migration from North America into 
Hawaii l- very aptly put in "The 
House "t Israel." Then we also have 
Thor Heyerdahl's statement to :i>l\ 
with it which is found in one of his 
articles. "In the Wake of the Poly- 
nesians." "I also believe," Ik- added 
(Thor Heyerdahl) "that some 1000 
years ago a second migration to Poly- 
nesia took place: this time from 
British Columbia. This includes the 
culture of Hawaii and New Zealand, 
for example, the Maori carving and 
the tine sea-going canoes of the mid- 
Pacific Nlands." Here Heyerdahl lias 
stated the same thing that E. I.. White- 
head has said in his "The House of 
Israel," the early Hawaiians migrated 
from the North American Continent. 
Now we can see, as each year unveils 
new facts and knowledge, that the 
great civilization of whites who dwell 
on tin- Americas before and shortly 
after the time of Christ extended their 
empires into the islands of tin- I' 
But We, as Latter-day Saints, (1.. not 
have to rely upon the facts and theories 

of men to know of tin- Lineage of the 

Polynesian. All we have to do is read 

the "Book "i Mormon" which tells 
us that the House of Israel would he 

"And behold, there are many who 
are already lost from the knowledge 



of thos r wii,, aia at Jerusalem 

the more part of all the tnhes have 

been led awa> ; and the) are scattered 

I '1 upon the islands of ,! , 
to and fro upon the isles of tii, 

and whether they are none of us 
knoweth, save that we km 

all have hun led awa\ ." < 1 

22:4.) 

I have tried to show you in 
two articles how there were possibl) 
three different migrations From the 
American Continent, and also that the 
"Book o) Mormon" gives dues , 
of these migrations. I am not - 
that these are the only migratioi 
took place, for I believe that 
must have been more of winch we do 
not have record, which may COIDC to 
light in the future. 

I will end "The Migrations" now, 
as I do not want to deal further with 
the inter-island migrations that carried 
the early Polynesians all tin- way into 
Xew Zealand. Before 1 close "The 
Migrations," I must take off my hat 
to those early sea rovers of the Pacific, 
who knew no fear in their relentless 
search for new land. When I hoard the 
large ships of today, with their big 
engines, and instruments to guide us 
safely to our destination, I reflect upon 
those early seamen who, in their frail 

canoes. set into the unknown waters 
with nothing hut faith, the stars to 

guide them, and God's protection t«> 
preserve their lives. I cm not help 
thinking that we in our large ships 
are hut folowing the wake of great 
Polynesia's migration. 

No reira kia oho te nyakan Moari 
mo o koutou ritenga onamata. 

—TIKI NUIR \. 



11' hen ye deport out of that house or city, shake off the dust of your 
354 TE KARERE 



HOME - ■ the Greatest Institution 
PARENTS - - the First Teachers 



By ELDER ROBERT FOX 



&6(f\ REMEMBER, my son, and 
^JJ learn wisdom in thy youth ; 
yea, learn in thy youth to keep the 
commandments of God." 

"Yea, and cry unto God for all tin- 
support ; yea, let all thy doings be 
unto the Lord, and withersoever thou 
goest let it be in the Lord ; yea, let 
thy thoughts be directed unto the 
Lord ; yea, let the affections of thy 
heart be placed upon the Lord for- 
ever." 

"Counsel with the Lord in all thy 
doings, and He will direct thee for 
good; yea, when thu liest down at 
night lie down unto the Lord, that He 
may watch over you in your sleep ; and 
when thou risest in the morning let 
thy heart be full of thanks unto God ; 
and if ye do these things, ye shall be 
lifted up at the last day." (Alma 
37:35-37.) 

What better instruction could be 
given by a father to his son, than the 
counsel given in these verses by Alma 
to his son, Helaman. Parents hold a 
great responsibility nowadays as they 
always have, of teaching and bringing 
up their children to know right from 
wrong and to choose the right ; also to 
be familiar with the mission of the 
Saviour and His teachings. This year's 
Primary theme states : "And they shall 
also teach their children to pray, and 
to walk uprightly before the Lord." 
(D. & C. Sec. 68:28.) The Lord states 
also that if the parents do not teach 
their children these essential things, the 
sin will be upon their heads and not 
the children. 

The important point that is to be 
brought out, then, is the necessity of 




good family life and home teachings. 
Altogether too many parents depend 
upon teachers to do the work which is 
meant for them to do. Much good is 
accomplished through the Church in 
Sunday School, Primary, and M.I. A. 
The schools also do a great work, but 
neither of these institutions can take 
the place of the home, and no teacher, 
no matter how well trained, can take 
the place of the parents. At this point 
I would like to mention about one of 
the greatest armies of young men, per- 
haps the world has record of. I am 
speaking of Helamen's two thousand 
stripling soldiers. The main account of 
their battles can be found in Chapters 
56 and 57 of Alma. All of these 
soldiers were extremely young and 
without any experience in battle, yet 
not one of their lives were lost. It was 
because they had learned how to pray 
and live clean, wholesome lives while 
young and the power of the Lord was 
with them. ". . . yea, they had been 
taught by their mothers, thai it" they 
did not doubt, God would deliver 
them." ( Aluta 56:47.) 

(Continued on Page 362) 



October, 1952 



355 



L.I). l'ro|»lH»f* S|H»;ik 




Definition and Nature of the Priesthood 
What is Priesthood? 



IT i- the rule and government of 
whether on earth or in the 
1 leaven ; and it is the only legitimate 
tower, the only authority that is ac- 
Knowledged by Him i«» rule and regu- 
late the affairs of His Kingdom. When 
vrong thing shall be put right 
and all usurpers shall be put down, 
when He whose ri^ht it is to reign 
shall take the- dominion, then nothing 
but the priesthood will bear rule: it 
alone will sway the sceptre of authority 
in heaven and on earth, for this is the 
legitimacy i if I kxL Fohn Taylor, 1 1 ) 
^ugusl 11. 1872. 



the redemption of the world, has been 
and will be by virtue 
lasting priesthood Wilford Woodruff, 
MS 51 



The priesthood <>r authority in which 
we stand is the medium or channel 
through which our Heavenly Father 
lias purposed to communicate light, 
intelligence, gifts, powers, and spirit- 
ual and temporal slavatton unl 
present generation.* Lorenzo Snow, 
MS _' 39, May, 1841. 



The priesthood of the Son of God 
is the law by which the world 
were, and will continue for ever and 
ever. It is that system which brings 
worlds into existence and peoples them, 
them their revolutions their 
days, week-, months, years, their 
seasons and times and by which they 
.... go into a higher state of exist- 
Brigham Young, .ID 15:127, 
August, 1872. 



The Holy Priesthood is the channel 
through which God communicates and 

deals with man upon the earth; and 

the heavenly messe n ger s that have 
visited the earth to communicate with 

man are nun who held and honoured 

the priesthood while in the flesh; and 

everything that Cod has caused 

done for the salvation of man, from 
tiling of man Upon the earth to 



It is nothing more nor K-s> than 
the power of God delegated to man 
by which man can act in tin 
for the salvation of tin- human family, 
in the name of the Father and the 
Son and the Holy Grhost, and act 
legitimately, not assuming that author- 
ity, not borrowing it from generations 

thai are dead and gone, hut authority 

that has been given in this day in 
which we live by ministering 

and spirits from above, direct -from 

the presence of Almighty God , It 
is the same power and priesthood that 

was committed to the disciples i f 

( hrist while I le was upon die i 
that whatsoever they should hind < n 
earth should he bound in heaven, and 
whatsoever they should lose on .arth 
should In- losed in heaven. Jos< 
Smith. CR, p.5, October, 1904. 



The priesthood after the order I f 
the Son of God is the ruling, pn 

authority in the Church ... In other 



356 



TE KARERE 



words, there is no government in the 
Church of Jesus Christ separate and 
apart, above, or outside of the Holy 
Priesthood or its authority. — Joseph F. 
Smith, IE 6:705, July, 1903. 



The priesthod ... is the authority 
of God in Heaven to the sons of men 
to administer in any of the ordinances 
of His house. There never was a man 
and never will be a man, in this or 
any other age of the world, who has 
power and authority to administer in 
one of the ordinances of the House of 
God, unless he is called of God . . . 
unless he has the Holy Priesthood 
and is administered to by those holding- 
authority. — Wilford Woodruff, JD 
16:266, October 8, 1873. 



The Purpose of the Priesthood 

To restore creation to its pristine 
excellency and to fulfill the object of 
creation — to redeem, save, exalt, and 
glorify man — to save and redeem the 
dead and the living, and all that shall 
live according to its laws is the design 
and object of the establishment of the 
priesthood on the earth in the last 
days ; it is for the purpose of fulfilling 
what has not heretofore been done — 
that God's works may be perfected — 
that the time of the restitution with 
the eternal priesthood in the heavens 
(who without us, nor we without them, 
could not be made perfect), we may 
bring to pass all things which have 
been in the mind of God or spoken 
of by the Spirit of God. — John Taylor, 
MS 9:321-322, May 7, 1847. 

What is the priesthood for ? It is to 
administer the ordinances of the gospel, 
even the gospel of our Father in 
Heaven, the eternal God, the Elohim 
of the Jews and the God of the Gen- 
tiles, and all He has ever done from 



the beginning has been performed by 
and through the power of that pries l- 
hood, which is "without father, with- 
out mother, without descent, having 
neither beginning of days, nor end of 
life," and the administration of His 
servants holding this priesthood is 
binding, being the saviour of life unto 
life or death unto death. — Wilford 
Woodruff, JD 19:360, June 30, 1878. 



God has organized a priesthood, ;.nd 
that priesthood bears rule in all things 
pertaining to the earth and the 
heavens; one part of it exists in the 
heavens, another part on the earth ; 
they both co-operate together for the 
building up of Zion, the redemption of 
the dead and the living, and the bring- 
ing to pass the "times of the restitu- 
tion of all things" ; and as they are 
thus closely united, it is necessary that 
there should be a communication be- 
tween the one and the other, and that 
those on the earth should receive in- 
structions from those in the heavens, 
who are acquainted with earthly as 
well as heavenly things, having had 
the experience of both, as they once 
officiated in the same priesthood on 
the earth. — John Taylor, MS 9:322, 
May 7, 1847. 



Our Heavenly Father performs all 
His works — the creation of worlds, 
the redemption of worlds — by the 
power of the eternal priesthood. And 
no man on the earth, from the days 
of Father Adam to the present time, 
has ever had power to administer in 
any of the ordinances of life and salva- 
tion only by the power iA the Holy 
Priesthood. You will find this to be 
the case in the whole history of the 
prophets of God. Wilford Woodruff, 
JD 24:242. July 20, L883 



Uways he kind remember, everyone you meet is fighting a hard battle. 
October, 1952 357 




OI It INTERESTS INCREASE 
WITH GENEALOGY 

By ALBERT J. WILEY, Mission Recordrr 

owe it to the dead. The 

decreed that all shall hear the- 
Gospel; all shall !>«.• made acquainted 
with the mission of Jesus Christ; all 
who are willing to receive Him and 
I lis truth shall be heirs oi His Father's 
Kingdom where He and tin- Father 
dwell. Ever) man hall be judg< 
cording to his works, and according 
t<i his opportunity . <■ the 

truth, and judgment shall be based on 
the desires of the hearts of men as 
those desires have been made n 
through their works. 

"Let us, therefore, as a Church and 
as a people, and as Latter-day Saints, 
offer unto the Lord an offering in 
righteousness; and let us present in 
His holy temple a book containing 
the records of our dead which .shall 
be worthy of all acceptation."- Joseph 
Smith. 

Have you ever wondered how won- 
derful it would be if your an 
could receive the Gospel and thereby 
be freed from the bondage of sin and 
death? This is what Genealogical work 
ran do for you and this is why it is 
jary. ( H course, this is all based 
on the assumption that your ancestors 
receive the- Gospel when it is placed 
before them. 

In D. & C 2 2, "And he shall plant 
in the hearts of the children the 
promises made to the fathers," we find 
that these promises were made to the 
fathers that tlu-ir children should do 
something for them which they could 
not do for themselves. Now it is a well 
understood principle that the Lord does 
not do for man what man can do for 
himself; hut He has done for man all 

that pertains to man's salvation which 

man cannot do for himself. This is 






H\\ E von ever wondered why it 
,s necessan to do Genealogy 
work? Why the Genealogical Society 
of the Church was organized? If you 
have never had tin- thought enter your 
head this is a good time- to start think- 
ing about it. 

First of all let's sec- what Genealogy 
means and then we will have a good 
idea of what we will he- talking about. 
••\ record of descent from some an- 
cestor: a list of ancestors and their 
descendants." Quoted from Webster. 
Now that we know what it means let's 
iwn to business. 

In order to comply fully with the 
commandments of the Lord it is the 
responsibility of every Latter-day Saint 
family t<> prepare and work on their 
genealogy. We have the responsibility 
of seeking for our ancestors and link- 
ing up their ancestrial lines wtih each 
other. 

answer the first question that I 

aske-d. that being : "1 lave you ever 
wondered why it is necessary 
genealogy work?" I will say this and 

it will be as brief as possiM,.-; \ Sc . 



358 



TE KARERE 



why Jesus Christ came into the world 
and died that we might live. He took 
the responsibility of redeeming us from 
the power of death without any act on 
our part except for one condition, that 
being our repentance for our sins. 
Thereby He atoned for our sins. These 
things Jesus done because we could not 
free ourselves upon any act of our 
own; we would all be subject to death 
otherwise. Every man will have to an- 
swer for his own transgression if he 
does not accept the Gospel and Jesus 
Christ, for the Lord said : — 

"For behold, I, God, have suffered 
these things for all, that they might 
not suffer if they would repent. But 
if they would not repent they must 
suffer even as I ; which suffering- 
caused Myself, even God, the greatest 
of all, to tremble because of pain, and 
to bleed at every pore, and -to suffer 
both body and spirit — and would that 
not drink the bitter cup, and shrink. 
Nevertheless, glory be to the Father, 
and I partook and finished my prepara- 
tions unto the children of men." (D. 
& C. 19:16-19.) 

In the year 1894, President Wilford 
Woodruff had re-emphasized in a 
revelation that it was necessary, in the 
completion of temple work, to have the 
children sealed to their parents and 
the parents sealed to their parents and 
so on. The Saints were told to run 
their family record back as far as 
possible. "This," said President Wood- 
ruff, "is the will of the Lord to His 
people." 

Each generation must be joined to 
the one which went before. This means 
that each generation, linked to the pre- 



ceding generation, becomes a unit in 
the whole and complete body of Christ, 
or family organization. This is what is 
meant when we say that Adam is the 
"father of all, the prince of all the 
ancient of days." (D. & C. 27:11.) 

To the Saints in Utah at that time 
(1894) the answer came through the 
organization of the Genealogical 
Society of Utah. Under the sponsor- 
ship of the First Presidency of the 
Church, a number of men interested 
in Genealogical research. 

The organizaton of the Genealogical 
Society was organized for the express 
purpose of gathering one's Genealogy 
so that he might be able to fulfill the 
commandments of God and for the 
purpose of doing that work for the 
dead in the temples of God. This an- 
swers the second question that I asked 
that of, "Why the Genealogical Society 
of the Church was organized?" So in 
summarizing these two questions, we 
can see how important it is for each 
and everyone of us to delve into our 
forefather's past and collect all the 
names that we are able to. 

Our interests increase not only in 
the furtherance of the work that we 
have done, but our interests increase 
in blessings that wait in store for us. 

No greater salvation can come to 
the heart of man than when lie obeys 
the commandments of God. 

"Else, what shall they do which are 
baptized for the dead, if the dead rise 
not at all ? Why are they then bap- 
tized for the dead?" (1 Cor. 15:29.) 



Let is be observed, thai slovenliness is no fart of religion; that neither tins, 
nor any text of Scripture, condemns neatness of apparel. Certainly this is a duty, 
not a son. "Cleanliness is, indeed, next to Godliness." 

— John Wesley (Sermons, X". xcii, On Dress). 



October, 1952 



359 



World Wide Church 
and its Progress 



Purchase of Site in Switzerland 

An announcement "i the pui 

tzerland, for 
the first European Temple oi the 
Church of Jesus Christ d! Latter-day 
Saints was made late Tuesday, July 
22, !.> President David O. M< K 

Mi Ka> made the announce- 
ment in Glasgow, Scotland, just a few 
hours before he boarded a Scandinav- 
ian Airlines plane t<» return to the 
United States. In his announcement 
he sai<l that he had obtained the site 
t'.>r the temple at Berne and that full 
details of the costs and plans of the 
temple will be discussed later. "The 
site lia> been secured at Berne and 
further negotiations are under way," 
he said. 

- McKay told the United Press 
isgow that 40,000 of the world 
membership of 1,370,000 of the Church 
of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints 
reside in Europe and of that number 
half lived in Switzerland and Germany. 
Hi explained that the temple would 
serve the entire European area and 
would become a sacred edifice in 
Europe where the ordinances of the 
Church will be administered i<> 'die 
faithful. 

As I Yes. McKay left die Glasgow 
Airport he closed one of the outstand- 
ing chapters in his long ( are* i 

Church leader. It was an eight weeks' 

t<>ur of all European Missions of the 
Church. IK' expressed great satisfac- 
tion with the state of the Church in 
Europe. 



M.I. A. Dance Festival 

The Dance Festival held on Friday 
evening, Jinn- 13, 1952, offered the 
luck) spectators who could 
admittance more colourful dance 
pageantrj in its two-hour extrava- 
ganza than they could find in 
week's travelling. Thirty thousand 
witnessed the yreat and colourful spec- 
tacle in University of Utah Stadium. 

S>- heralded has this festival I 

and SO early did the patrons arrive t-> 
he <>n hand h< witness it. that ai 
mated Crowd of 15,000 persons Were 

unable t<» gel through tin 

Fr< 'in 141 Stakes there wen 
ensembles of Boj Scouts and Bee Hive 
(iirls. Explorers and Mia Maids, M 
Men and Gleaners, and Special In- 
terest class members. And as ] .,- 
the greensward of the Stadium is. ft, 
too, was filled to overflowing with 
nearly 6,000 dancers. 

With an astonishing wealth of 
ideas, the M.I. A. General Hoard I 
Committee built its festival around the 
theme "Dancing Through the 

And the programme was just -,' 

nstance, there was a primitive 
Maori dance entitled "» 
performed by a group of form* r 
sionaries to New Zealand: and there 
were polkas, mixers, mazurkas, min- 
uets, waltzes, ballets, rumba, tangos, 
saramba, square dances, and round 
dances, all with the objei I 
hundreds of dancers fun and thousands 

tators enjoyable entertainment. 
And in both aims, the festival de- 
liberately succeeded. 



Genius is only a great aptitude for patience. 



360 



TE KARERE 



THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN 
NEW ZEALAND 



By ELDER GARTH LOW 



PREPARE, Prepare, Prepare, for 
the time is short; there is only 
seven short days between Sundays 
when you may study your lesson to 
teach in the Gospel. It is to you teach- 
ers, leaders and parents that I write 
this article. "Many are called but 
few are chosen," and you who have 
been chosen have a beautiful oppor- 
tunity, a privilege and a obligation. 

Starting in the home as parents you 
have first been given the care of beau- 
tiful spiritual children, who have come 
and through you taken on a physical 
body. You have been given a blessing 
and if you fail, who will stand account- 
able? That's correct, you who have 
been given charge. During the week 
days while at home you must teach 
your children to "Learn Wisdom in 
Their Youth," teach them manners, 
teach them reverence, teach them the 
Gospel. It is in the home that the 
foundation is first established, so I ask 
you parents to co-operate with those 
who have been called to teach your 
children in Sunday School. I am cer- 
tain that you know your duties, but 
just need to be reminded. As a sug- 
gestion of how to develop learning and 
culture in the home and a close family 
tie, choose one night at least every 
week to have as a family home night, 
in which all the family may partici- 
pate. Then each night study a little 
from the standard works. Kneel each 
morning and each night with your 
children and thank the Lord for the 
many blessings received. If you do 
your part in the home then the teacher 
may do his or her part on Sunday. 

Now, yOU teachers, lie patient, kind, 
and try t<» make ;i study of each in- 




dividual you teach ; try to understand 
their ways and help them all you can 
to become stronger in the Gospel. You 
have a lot of time to study if you 
only take advantage of all your spare 
moments. Keep always in mind the 
fact that you are being relied on to cio 
a good job. Read your lesson over 
many times before class and know very 
well the lesson you are to present. 
Gather all the "Teaching Aids*' or 
pictures you can to make your lessons 
live. Ask the Lord to guide you, then 
dig in and study hard, for you have 
the gravest job of all, the teaching 
of the true Gospel of Jesus Christ to 
your brothers and sisters in the Gos- 
pel. Make your lesson so consistently 
interesting that everyone will want to 
be there. 

To you, leaders, parents, and teach- 
ers, do you try in your every-day life 
to prove examples to your fellowmen? 
As I have been privileged to travel 

around to the many wonderful .spirit- 
ual feasts at the llni Parihas and to 
associate with yon wonderful saints, it 

has been with much regrel that 1 left 

at the ending of each 1 Ini. Not that 



October, 1952 



361 



you don't have weaknesses and an) 

uve all do, but I feel each needs 

help in the various Branches and Dis- 

n d. herein wa> s. But one thing 

we all need is co-operation 

• ere is co-operation, but is there 
i; do you live your Gospel from 
daj . <>r ju>t when a 1 lui conies ? 
Let us help each other and lovi 
other in the ( ibspel and U »rj 
petty differences. If we 
astray the lambs art- sure to follow, 
and would you want your child or 
neighbour's child t<> follow your foot- 
are headed in the 



direction. If not, let's start now 

and ! . n to- 

morrow, S l W<\ TODAY! 



Ma; 

duties, 



God bles 



SACRAMENT GEM 
(September and October) 

Just a tiny pie 

11 'hile I eat I bow my /. 

Now I sip of water clear 

To show I lore my Saviour dear 



HCME THE GREATEST INSTITUTION, ETC. (Cent, from Page 355) 



In the home we speak our first 
words, take OUT first steps, and learn 
mer essential things. It should 
be from here that we pick u]) traits 
and habits that stick with us through 
life. It rests wtih the parents then to 
see that these habits are good ones. 

All of this responsibility is not with 

the parents alone, however. After they 
have fulfilled their duty and taught 
the children till they have reached the 
youth, so to speak, it is then 
up to the young people to live the 
teachings of their parents. 

Much then is expected of US as youth 
also. We are \>> be future leader- and 
parent- ourselves some day. We hear 
many of the older people saying, 



"When we were young we didl 
t<> do this or that, we had to work 
hard, we only got so much spending 
money, etc, etc" The) also say we 
the younger generation have gone soft 
and weak-willed and are going to the 
pack, >" to -peak. Maybe this is true 

of tlie majority of the young people; 

but let's In- different than the ma 

and learn wisdom in OUT youth, and 

learn to keep the coinmandni- 

the Lord while young. Let's take our 

Heavenly Father into our lives and 

counsel with Him in OUT problems and 

rejoice with I Iim in our s 
show the world that we as die Latter- 
day Saint youth can live Up to the 

teachings that have been given us, I 

pray in the name of Jesus ( 
Amen. 



362 



God and the dike adore, 

Hut only when i)i danger, not before; 
The danger o'er, both arc alike requited, 
dull is forgotten, ami the doctor slighted. 



TE KARERE 



Featuring the Districts' 

News 



OTAGO DISTRICT 
By Noelene J. Thomson 

Are you thinking of taking a trip 
down south? If so, why not make it 
at the end of October ? For Labour 
week-end, 25th, 26th and 27th, is the 
time scheduled for our District Con- 
ference. Brains are buzzing and com- 
mittees are coping with plans for this 
week-end. If you plan on attending 
just drop a line to Box 1383, Christ- 
church, and accommodation will be 
arranged for you. 

A Saturday evening once a month 
is set aside as party night in Christ- 
church, with each of the auxiliary or- 
ganisations taking turns in arranging 
the programmes. A most enjoyable 
evening was held on the 16th of Aug- 
ust organized by the Relief Society. 

Xews has come to hand that the 
Tabernacle Choir records are playing 
each Sunday morning over Station 
4XD Dunedin at 11 :30 a.m. This is a 
full half-hour broadcast including the 
"Spoken Word." 

Timaru, the central branch in the 
district, is still buzzing with activities. 
In the first week in August the 12 
missionaries of the district gathered 
there for their quarterly business meet- 
ing. The day culminated in a branch 
social where numerous investigators 
were able to become better acquainted 
with the Church and its members. The 
highlight of the evening was a de- 
licious supper prepared by the ladies 
of the branch, which brought an end 
to a perfect day. 

Early in August a party of seven 
travelled into Central OtagO for a 
day of ice skating. The weather was 
fine and the ice hard. Some wonderful 
exhibitions were given of the fall and 



rise style of skating. Luckily the ice 
took all the strain and a most enjoy- 
able time was had by all. 

Two of our missionaries. Elders 
Leetham and Hunsaker. are learning to 
play the guitar, but as yet no items 
are forthcoming. 

We are fortunate to have Sis. Peter- 
son and her daughter, Sis. Eve Purves, 
of Hastings, visiting our Branch here 
in Dunedin and the Branch is profiting 
from their experience. We hope the 
stay will be a long one. 

Our basketball team is now top equal 
in the competition here and as we have 
only two more games to play, we will 
have to work hard. The team travelled 
away out in the sticks to play against 
a country team one night and we were 
able to make the Church better known. 

Quite a number of our members have 
been ill, but spring is now here and 
it is causing many rapid cures. 

STATISTICS 

Birth: A baby daughter to Sister 
Cosgrove on Friday, August 22nd. at 
Dunedin. 

Baptisms : Derek Walter Workman, 
on August loth, by Elder Paul B. 
Hatch in Caroline Bay. Timaru. Con- 
firmed by Elder Robert D. Card. Aug. 
17th. Charles Cordon Donaldson Law, 
on July 3rd. by Elder D. M. Grant and 
confirmed by Elder Douglas Kerr, 
Christehurch. 

POVERTY BAY DISTRICT 
By Mary Anne Te Maari 

Kia ora. here we are again, bring- 
ing \ i >U our report. 

We have been having Home Mutual 
in the Horoera Branch for the last 
three mouths. After the Mutual we 
have a ping pong competition going. 



October, 1952 



363 



They art * * i i x i c lt-« 1 hum groups 

I Gents, and 
Juni«»r>. The winners in the 
group is as follows: Bra and Sis, 

Ginger TeMarO tirst. and Mr. and 
Mrs. I\ \\ a • I he- Juniors : 

Master Napier Dewes and Miss Lena 
Dewes first, Master Wallace Ruwhiu 
irilyn Ruwhiu second. We 
i badminton competition 
now for the lasl fortnight. 

We are -Try to announce the de- 
parturi Elders, 

Elder BigU r \\ i had a lot of Aroha 
for him and we surely miss him and 
d w.-rk amongst us. Also of one 
"t >.nr Deacon boys, Bro. Sergent 
I [e has left to make his future 
home in Hamilton. 
< >n the 17th August there was a 
s 1 meeting in Tologa Bay, Elders 
^spinal! and Ruwhiu being in attend- 
ance. All the Saint» here send their 
frienly Kia ( )ra to you all. 

WAIRARAPA DISTRICT 

By Bro. W. P. Aspinall 

Hui Pariha Conducted by 

Te Harihana Branch 

The Hui Pariha held in Martin- 
borough "ii the -'.>rd and 24th of Aug., 
1952, was a great success as I know 
the Saints who were at that Hni were 
filled with Spiritual knowledge, not 
forgetting the beautiful days the Lord 
provided for that occasion. The Dis- 
trict Choir, which was conducted by 
Rongo l'aki. was very outstand- 
ing and sin- I real w<»rk in 
>istri< t as M < 1* rister for the 
District." We also collected for our 
Hui and what money that was left 
over was to go for our Building Pro- 
ject for Te Harihana Branch as we 
have no chapel here. The mm 
the Hni was conducted by the Dis- 
trict members themselves who v 

the Hni. with the support of those 

who weren't there. 

The Histrict Board also sends their 
very best thanks to all those who Biip- 
ported, hoping we will all meet again 



at i nr next 1 lui. Apart from our 1 1m, 
we are doing our Whakapapa works 
for <ur dead and the S 
District art doing verj well The 
Whakapapa Board tor the Disti 
as follows: Bro. W. Naera, Superin- 
tendent, Sis. W. \aira. first coun- 
sellor, Bro W. 1'. Asp i nail, 
counsellor, a 

corder. With the help of the I 
know this wonderful work will pro- 
Mix fortunate in 
having a wonderful leader in Bro. 
Naera, and 1 know the Lord is with 
him. 

Our missionary work in the histrict 
has been carried out very well, con- 
ducted b) Br< vich. 

However, after all said and done, 
there i> only one ambition whii 
Latter-day Saints an- after, and that 

i> the ( dories in the Kingdom • 

and I do hope ami pray that what was 

said in our Hui Pariha may hi- a 

guiding light to u> all. As the theme 

this day whom ye 

will serve, as for me and my house 

we will serve the Lord.'" I know we 

Latter-day S i hard 

in the head. We think we know every- 
thing concerning the Gospel, hut we 
don't even know how to ]•■. 
Humbleness, my dear brothers and 
sjstt-rs. is the guiding light to love 
and happiness as thr Lord want! us 
to he sincere and loving brothers and 
pel. 

So may the Lord hle>s us all. in 
the name of Jesus our Saviour. S 
it he. 

STATIS1 U S 

liirths: Vivian Shona Chapman, 
\\ .v Scat Featherston, horn June is, 
1952. Blessed Julj 12, 1952. V 
Fay Ruka; Father, Rangi Koro I 
man. 

Charles Robert McDonald, Te Hare- 
hana. MartinborOUgh, horn lime 30th, 
1952. Blessed fuly 13th, 1952. Mother, 
Ti TeMaan ; Father, Ruanui 
1 )oiiald. 



364 



TE KARERE 



Raymond Kenneth TeMaari Choo- 
qne, Wai. Scat., born April 1, 1952. 
Blessed August 24th. 1952. Mother, 
Myra TeMaari ; father, Kenneth 
Chooque. 

Ordination : Wiremu Potae Aspinall, 
Te Harehana Branch. Ordained to an 
Elder and given the Melchizdek Priest- 
hood by Phil Turiri Aspinall on Aug. 
24th, 1952. 

YYaaka Tahuahi Enoka Jr, Te Hare- 
hana. Ordained to Deacon by Elder 
James H. King on Aug. 26th. 1952. 

MAHIA DISTRICT 

Visiting Saints to Xuhaka will be 
amazed at the beautiful enterior decor- 
ating, remodelling and painting of the 
chapel. The renovations took under two 
months untiring work, and apprecia- 
tion and thanks are due to a wonderful 
little man none other than Elder De 
Witt. Our Heavenly Father has cer- 
tainly blessed him with a gift of art. 
District President Elder J. C. Smith, 
Elders T. Christianson and G. Paget 
also deserve many merits for their 
endeavours also. 

On the opening of the chapel July 
13th. Elder De Witt was a surprised 
guest at his own birthday dinner. A 
beautiful cake adorned with 63 candles 
was witnessed by well-wishers. We 
were privileged to have our Mission 
President and Sister Ottley attend this 
occasion. 

July 18th Wairoa M.I.A. for the 
first time in the history of the Branch 
held a Gold and Green Ball. Since 
April preparations, advertisements and 
routine were planned. Enthusiastic 
Saints endeavoured much towards the 
event ; the splendid co-operation en- 
abled the Ball to be a success. Two 
floor shows were demonstrated, prov- 
ingto be the highlighl of the evening. 
and the entire function was conducted 
strictly on M.I.A. standards. Tin's Ball 
will always be remembered 1>.\ one and 
all who attended. The Wairoa M.I.A. 



was congratulated by District Presi- 
dent Elder J. C. Smith. "Well done, 
Wairoa, and keep it up." 

Adding to the list of this district's 
missionaries who are already at the 
College are Bro. James W'haanga 
from Nuhaka Branch, and Bro. Tahi- 
nga Winiana Mohaka, of the Wairoa 
Branch. Kia Ora Wheti, Sammay and 
Sis. Raiha. 

Elder Thayne Christiansen was fare- 
welled at Xuhaka prior to his depar- 
ture to Xuie Island, somewhere in the 
Pacific. He is to be a companion to 
Elder Goodman. His ever smiling 
countenance and pleasant disposition 
we in the district shall miss. 

July 21st marked the day of the 
passing away of Bro. Iriparete Pomare 
of Kaiuku Branch at the "Tahinga" 
Nuhaka. He suffered the illness of a 
stroke, and his death relieved him of 
many pains. Arohanui to his family. 

Our prayers and thoughts are for- 
ever with Elder George 0. Cannon 
who is still an inmate of the Wairoa 
Hospital. He will be there for some 
time, but is on the way to recovery 
and is an '"up" patient. 

Preparations are well under way fi >r 
the Xuhaka Gold and Green Ball, 
advertised for August 29th. In ad- 
dition to those preparations, plans are 
in circulation for a Hui Pariha fol- 
lowing the Ball. 

"Broken Barrier," the X.Z. film re- 
cently released caused keen interest 
and support among the local Saints. 
During the film the entire singing 
and chanting were beautifully rendered 
by the Xuhaka M.I.A. The scenery 
was the familiar Mahia Beach. The 
Kahungunu Memorial Hall was the 
most picturesque of scenery used in 
the film. 

From Kaiuku Branch: The son o\ 
Bro. and Sis. Tangiora, X'athan Tangi- 
ora, was the victim of an automobile 
accident which occurred in Waipawa. 

The accident proved to be fatal and 

(Continued on Page 370) 



October, 1952 



365 



NGA POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO 1 TE HITORI TE HAHI 

( Essentials 
in Church History) 

WAHANGA TUATORU 
Trot R. 1 I.m.i. 







TE WHAKATURANGA O TE "TUMUAKITANGA 

TUATAH1 O TE HAHI." "TE HOMA1TANGA O 

NGA WHAKAKITENGA WHAITIKANGA." 



"Te Kura o Nga Poropiti" 

ITE whakakitenga i tukua iho i a 
Tihcraa 27, 
i roto o nga whakahau, "ki nga kau- 
inatua.*' "Kia ako ratou, tetahi i tetahi, 
l Rangatiratanga." 
E akona ano ratou ki te kaupapa o 
nga tikanga, o nga akoranga, o roto 
i te ture o te I lahi, nga mea 
ahu atu ana ki te Rangatirataiuj 
Atua, ara nga mea katoa e tino hangai 
ana hei mohiotanga mo ratou. Kia 
noho rat«»u i Katirana whanga ai i te 
taenga mai o enei tohutohu, i mua o 
to ratou whanatutanga ki waenganui 
tauiwi : haerenga whakaniutun.ua 
i» roto i nga wa e kowhitia e te Atua 
hei "herenga i te Ture," i te "hiiri" 
ano hoki o te kupu Whakaatu 
mony), hei whakatikatika ano h..ki i 
; [unga Tapu mo te taenga mai 
•c "Whakarite Whakawa" 
e taria atu nei. Mi ngakaunui ratou 

ki te hahau i nga hua o roto 
pukapuka whaitikanga, kei reira nei 
nga korero o te matauranga e riro mai 

i te man ki te ako. j n whakapono o 

'.■an. I-', tutuki ai tenei apo ki 

a whiwhi i te matauranga, me whaka- 

tika ratou ki te whakarite i tetahi 



walii, hei whare karakia whakapuaki 
i a ratou inoi ake, i a ratou i ako ai, 
me to ratou whakapono, "He 
whai Kororia, he Whare no te Atua." 
He whare tenei hei huihuinga 
ratou huihuinga tapu; kotahJ o ratou 
e whakatu hei kai-whakaako, a kaua 
e matoru te korero ara kia ki I 
korero i te taima kotahi, 
atu me whakarongo : ma t< 
e tan 

"kur;i ropiti," kua tuturu 

lmki ko tenei te ingoa mo taua ropa 
Kua Oti ano hoki ko tel* 
mo roto i te whare o te tumuakitanga 
taua kura. A ko ia i wliakaturia hei 
tuinuaki mo taua Kura. 
ana i tona turanga i tohia mona i rot., 
i taua whare. No n-ira. ko ia e tuatalii 
UTU ki roto i te whan- o Te Atua. i 
te wahi e rangona nuitia ai ana korero 
e te whakaminenga i roto i 
papaku, kaua i te reo kaha, ai 
reo taratara. Ko te hunga e lika ana 
kia mine mai ko ng te lia'ii 

unga kua karangatia ki te mahi 
niinita. tiniata i nga tohunga I 
raw a iho ki nga rikona. "Mc mihi 
ratou kia ratou, tetahi ki tetahi i te 
mihi tu tika «> tetahi ki tetahi. 
ratou e tutil 



366 



TE KARERE 



e ma ana i nga toto o tenei whaka- 
tupuranga, a kaore o ratou whakaaro 
i parori ke, a e ki ana ratou i te wha- 
kapono. I ki ano te Ariki, kua kara- 
ngatia koutou kia main i enei mea i 
runga i te inoi, i te whakamoemiti, 
i te ritenga ki ta te Wairua e akiaki 
ai ia koutou, i a koutou mahi katoa, 
i roto i te whare o te Ariki, i roto i 
te kura o nga Poropiti, ka meinga hei 
wahi "rahui tapu'' mo koutou, hei 
tapenakara mo te Wairua Tapu e pa 
kaha ai te whakapiki i a koutou ki 
te matauranga. 

Te Haerenga Mai o Pirikama 
Ianga Me Etahi Atu 

No Hepetema 10. ka iriiria a Hori 
Arapeta Mete tamaiti a Hoani Mete, 
taina turangawhanau (cousin) ki te 
poropiti, i riiria ia ki Potama (Pots- 
dam) wahi o Nu Iaka. Tekaumarima 
ona tau i taua wa, a i roto i nga tau 
o muri mai ka kitea tona urunga 
nuitanga ki roto i nga koringa, ara i 
nga mahi o enei nga ra whakamutu- 
nga ; No te waru o nga ra o Noema, 
a Hohepa Ianga, a Pirikamu Ianga. a 
Hipa C. Kimball, me Hone P. Kiri- 
ini (Greene) i tae mai ai. i ahu mai 
ratou i Meneto (Mendon), Kauti o 
Monoro (Monroe) Nu Iaaka. Ko ienei 
te tutakinga tuatahi o Hohepa Mete 
ki enei tuakana — teina. He maha tonu 

ratou ra ki Katirana. a he maha o 
ratou tutakitanga i te Poropiti i tenei 
wa. I tetahi o ratou tutakitanga, ka 
tau te wairua "Reo Ke" ki a Pirikama 
Iaanga raua ko Hone Kiriini, ki te 
poropiti ano hoki kia Hohepa Mete. 

1 Meneto te urunga mai o Pirikima 
Ianga raua ko Hone Kiriini ki roto i 
te Hahi. 

Note raumati, no te ngahuru ranei 
o te tau 1831, i rongo tuatahi ai raua 
i te rongopai, na Hamuera H. Mete 
i whakarere iho te Pukapuka a Moro- 
niona kia Hoani Kiriini. 1 muri mai 
ka tae mai ko nga kaumatua tokorua, 
ko Arawhiu Kiwhata (Alpheus Gif- 
ford ) ko Eriara Toroongo ( Elial 
Strong) me etahi atu. ki roto i enei 



rohe kauwhau haere ai, i ngohengohe 
ai enei tangata ki te rongopai. I te 
Aperira 14, 1832, ka iriiria a Pirikama 
Iaanga e Eriaha Mira (Eleazer 
Miller). I tapaea ia hei kaumatua, uru 
tonu atu ia ki nga mahi minita, hei 
awhina i nga mahi whakatu i nga 
peka e tata ana ki Meneto, wahi o Xu 
Iaaka. 

Nga Tutanga a Te Poropiti 
i Katirana 

Ko te takurua o te tau 1832-3, i 
whakapaungia e Hohepa Mete, ki te 
whakatikatika i nga karaipiture ki te 
noho i roto i te Kura o nga Poropiti 
( ka tahi tonu nei ka tu atu, Ako-Kawe 
88), ki te noho ano hoki i roto i nga 
hui e karangatia ana kia tu i tena wa 
i tena wa. I tu etahi huihuinga i te 
marama o Hanuere, i hui mai ai nga 
kaumatua. i whakamaramatia ai te 
ture horoi i nga waewae, i tuhia ra 
i te tekau — matoru o Hoani ; i whaka- 
ritea ai, i ta Te Ariki i whakahau ai ; 
tirohia Ako-Kawe 88. 

I te rua o Pepuere ka oti te wha- 
katikatika a te Poropiti i nga karai- 
piture o te Kawenata Hou. te wahi i 
whakahaungia kia mahia e ia i taua 
wa, a, hiritia ana. kia kaua e huakina 
tae noa atu ki Hiona. He maha nga 
tuhituhinga i tuhia ki nga Hunga 
Tapu ; a he maha hoki nga pukapuka 
i tuhia i waenganui o nga kaumatua i 
Hiona me nga Kaumatua i Katirana 
mo runga i nga mahi i tohia ma ratou. 

Te Whakatunga o Te 
Tumuakitanga Tuatahi 

No Maehe 18. 1833. ka whakaruria 
te tumuakitanga tuatahi o te Hahi; 
ko Hohepa Mete te tumuaki, ko Hirini 
Rikitona raua ko Pererika G. Wiremu 
nga kaumhera. He whakatutukitan.ua 
tenei, i te whakahau i waiho iho i te 
warn o nga ra o te marama nei 
ECawe 90); i korero ai te Ariki kia 
Hohepa Mete. "Me tenei ano, he pono 
taku e mea atu nei ki ou teina, kia 
Hirini Pikitana raua ko Pererika G. 
Wiremu kua mania o raua hara, a t 



October, 1952 



367 



a t<> koutou mana ki nga kii <> 
a whakamutunga." 

ihi tan i mua atu o tenei, ara, 
s a Maehc 1832, te karangatans 

Wiremu ki tenei turanga, 
i na rct<i i te kupu whakakitenga 
(Ako-Kawe 81), kia man tonu tana 
pupuri i nga kii .. te rangatirai 
lm hituru no te Tohung I 
ianei, i whakapa ih<> ai a 1 lohepa 
Mete i ona ringaringa, tapaea ana raua 
kia what wain tahi niai ai raua me <a 
ki te whakawaha i tenei taumahatangsu 
Ka oti i konei tenei "hik 
o te hanganga o te 1 lahi. 

Ko Katirana He Teike No Hiona 

I te 23, o Maehe 1833, ka karangatia 

he Kaunihera o nga Kaumatna kia 

noho luiiluii he whakatu komiti te take, 

ko te mahi ma taua komiti he hoko 

whenua i roto i nga rohe o Katirana. 

hei kaupapa mo te hunga-tapu < hanga 

u i te Teike o I [iona. Ka roa 

e whiriuhiri ana. ka >ti ta ratou 

huihuia mai ai ratou, tn ana k-> 

Etera Teia, raua k«. Hohepa Ko, mo 

tana komiti; i muri mai, ka riro mai 

wahi oneone mo tenei ta) 
timata tonu i konei te korikori kaha 

i kaumatna ki nga main 
ana kia mahia i tana \va hei kaupapa 
turanga mo te pa o te Hunga Tapu 
• rana. 

Te Huihuinga Tuatahi 
o Te Ropu Waakatoi 

Iperira 1833 katu te huihuinga 
tuatahi o te hoa riri, o roto i Tiaki- 
hana Kauti, e torn ran pea te maha 

ratou ope, he rapu i tetahi tika- 
■ it. mi te pana i nga 
mema •> te hahi i roto «• "Tiakihana 
I tana u a ano i lmi nga kau- 
matna o roto Tiakihana Kauti ki n- 
"whakaatu luiiluii" i <» rat^n hinengaro 
ki P'to i a ratmi in<>i me a ral 
liana ki Te Ariki. kia takalna c la nga 
te hoa riri kna whaitake raua 
i naianei hei huihuinga mo ratou, 
notemea kna kaha rawa te nun., 
kin., i) te hoa riri. A kaore ano hoki 



te Hunga Tapu i tn hara kore 

• 
ta rat. 'ii pupuri i nga ture i 

uhakahaua c Te Ariki kia waiho hei 

kaupapa mo te whakaarahang 
I [iona. Ko nga puahae \\\<-- nga wl 
aro amnanin. i rangona i waenganui i 
a ratou; Eke raua nga korero raupatu 
ki te Poropiti me nga teina awhina nui 
i te 1 lain. Ko etahi o nga mema, 
i pupuri i te ture Tapae i homai nei 

lu-i kaupapa w hakaarahanya i llimia. 

a ko te ngakau maruu o r.»t<> i ctahi 
kna warewaretia. Anakoa ra enei 
ke-tanga, i n »ngo 1 e Ariki i a ratou 
inoi, a i memenge noaiho ai nga wha- 
kaari i kino te hoa riri. 

Te Whare o Te Ariki i Katirana 

I tu te hui a nga tohunga nui ite 
wha ii Mei, 1833; i tu te komiti hei 
kohi moni hei whakatu whan- kura, 
kia tutuki ai t€ whakahau i h unai i 
te whakakitenga i huaki mai i 
hema 27, 1832, me Maehe 8, 
hei whare e akona ai nga kaumatna i 
mua i to rat. hi haerenga ki te whaka- 
rite i nga karanga Powhiri i nga iwi o 
• 

Ko nga tangata i whakaturia m • 
tana komiti ko 1 [airama M' I 
Tiarete Kaata i Jared Carter I k 
nara Kahunu (Reynolds Cahoon). Ite 
mil i n nga ra o Mei, ka huaki iho an i 
te Rangi kia 1 lulu-pa Mete, he wha- 
kahau tenei ki te Hahi. kia timal 
tetahi mahi ano, he roherohe, he wha- 
nganga i nga wain he kaupapa tuunga 
mo te Teiki o Hiona i roto o Katirana. 
Ka hangaia ano hoki he whan- hei 
tari perehi, whakamaoritanga, me 
etahi atu mahi e whakahau ai t< 
kia mahia e ratou. Tere tonu te tima- 
tanga o te komiti nei ki ta ratou main. 
Tuatahi tonu ko te rapa, ko te kohi 
muni hei whakatntnki i enei whakaaro 
i waihangatia mai nei e te Atua. 1 
whakahaungia nei hoki ratou i te tua- 
tahi atu kia hanga rati in i tetahi 
ki te Ariki, hei whan- < tapae ai i a 
ratou inoi, i a rotou nohopukutanga ; 
lu-i temepara ki Tuna ingoa. 



368 



TE KARERE 



(^reelings le Uur vftenealeqij 



JOSEPH HAY, Mission Genealogy Supervisor 
MURIEL C. HAY, Secretary 




AS we travel around the Mission 
and meet with those interested in 
genealogical work, we feel there is a 
great need for more organization. \Ye 
hope these instructions will assist you 
in becoming better organized and more 
qualified to carry on this great work. 
From now on you will be known as 
District Committees and Branch Com- 
mittees respectively. These will be 
composed of a Chairman who will be 
chosen by the District and Branch 
Presidents respectively ; the Chairman 
then has the right to choose two as- 
sistants and secretary and submit their 
names to the Presiding Authority for 
approval or otherwise 

The Chairman should hold the Mel- 
chizedek Priesthood, but where no 
higher priesthood is available then an 
adult Aaronic member may be used. 
In the mission field where there are 
so few members to choose from, 
women may be chosen for assistants, if 
sanctioned by the presiding authority. 

Now the Branch Committees are 
formed, the nexl move is to choose 
visiting teachers, whose duty will be 




to visit the homes and teach the people 
how to fill in correctly their sheets 
and arouse a desire to do this im- 
portant work. So you can sec now 
necessary it is for these teachers to 
have a perfect knowledge of this work. 
Therefore we would suggest that the 
teachers meet with the committees as 
often as possible and STUDY the 
handbook thoroughly. Fill out your 
own personal record, your family 
group sheet and pedigree chart. It is 
essential for each member of the com- 
mittee and visiting teachers to have a 
handbook. For therein you will find 
the necessary instructions from Zion. 
We have been very pleased indeed with 
the orders we have received for these 
books. 

After we have travelled die niis>i> n 
we will issue a circular letter instruct- 
ing you when to commence filling in 
your reports. That will be sent to the 
Mission and compiled, then sent on to 
Zion .so they will be able to see that 

\'ew Zealand is active in Genealogical 
work. Your report blanks will be sent 
out in ^uc eour>e. 



October, 1952 



369 



\\ i meet- 

ing those interested in Genealogical 
work and hope we have been 
inspire then works. That 

the work may be pushed ahead with 
renewed era 

in filling "in group sheets, that the 
w.rk might be held valid in th< 
of the Lord when preformed. Let tu 
Pres. Woodruff, "Bless them, we 



pray Thee, in theii 
may not fall into < paring 

tlu-ir genealogies; and furthermore we 
before them new 
avenues of information and pla 
tlu-ir hands the records of thi 
that their w-rk ma) not only u 
plete I'm 
Be 1 tumble .md Prayerful. 



FEATURING THE DISTRICTS' NEWS (Cont. from Page 365) 



idd in 
Xnhaka in his honour. Deepest sym- 
pathy was extended to his family. 

i [STICS 

\nhaka 
by Branch President William 
Christy was that of Ronald < ■ 

\wa Hapi. 
Birth: A son was born to Bro. and 
Sis. II. Mitchell »n July 13th. 

L.D.S. COLLEGE 

WAIKATO DISTRICT 

By Sona Selwyn 

Hello, folks! Once again we send 
I salutations t<> you all and 

- at lnune. 

Koa ora katoa koutou, o matau hoa 
mahi. Bro. Iletarika Anarn me 
tino mohio iai te keri aw a. Ka nhhi 
ake an" matou kia Paul Randal i 
hoa, enoho mai ra i 1 law 
te pai tonu • 

Well, folks, two Distri 
the hall rolling as far as donated labour 
erned here <>n our College and 
in doing so they 1 

ample and have also increased their 
own individual testimonies greatly as 
well as niirv 

We have also apj i itly the 

effort which has heen made by the 
other districts which have taken part 



in some way, no matter how 
small, m our buildil 

This past month 
lered an epidemic of mun 
of chicken pox, and, of 
tin. hut thanks to the p; a 
loved ones at home, other than 
minor injuries sustained 

we have practical!, 
nient.s. 

Four months have now past 
the I lui Tau and one would not- 
progress lias been made- since then in 

no small degree, thanks ,, 

■ >f our cre\i wo dwelling 

bunk-houses for the boys .stand to- 
gether in line with the dining room 
and shower room and convenien 

The homes of married COUpl 
opposite and all these houses ar. 
nected by a board-v 

The joinery factor} is also growing 
steadily day by day and can n 
seen from the road clearly. 

( Outsiders an- taking more noti 
this jjreat work now. folks, so let lis 
all combine our efforts to rnaki 
College such an outstanding work, that 
people may see the fruits of our work 
and therefore fulfill the scripture found 

in Matthew 

shine before men that they ma 
your <j.M,d works and glorify your 
Father which is in I leaven. 



370 



TE KARERE 



Here and There in the Mission 



New Missionaries Arrive 

Two new missionaries arrived en 
September 11, 1952, aboard the Ven- 
tura. They were Sister Alice Bushman 
and Sister Rosabella Garner Leetham 
(wife of Elder Alpheus Leetham). 
They had a very enjoyable trip and 
are now ready to go ahead in accom- 
plishing the very necessary work which 
they have set out to do : "Preach the 
Restored Gospel of Jesus Christ to 




Sister Leetham 

those who have erred in spirit ; that 
they might help them come to an un- 
derstanding and they that murmured 
might also learn doctrine." 

But along with the joy of seeing new 
missionaries come into the field, comes 
the unhappy occasion of seeing our 
tried and seasoned missionaries leave 
at a point when missionaries are needed 
most. 

Seven Missionaries Leave 
for Home 

Elder Graver I). Jensen arrived 
aboard the Sonoma on April 5, 1950, 
along with three other elders. His 
first field of labour proved to be a 
good one, the Wellington District, 
where he continued to labour for a 
period of eight months ; then the ( >tagO 
Districl became his next field of labour 
where he continued for another eight 
months, prior to being called to the 



Mission Office to become Mission Sec- 
retary. He has laboured faithfully as 
Mission Secretary for the past four- 
teen months. 

Elder Donald S. Baker, of Leth- 
bridge, Alberta, Canada, arrived in 
Xew Zealand April 5, 1950, aboard the 
S.S. Sonoma, and was assigned to 
labour in the Whangarei District, 
where he continued to labour for seven 
months, before going to the King 




Eld 



er Jensen 



Country, but by the time three months 
was up the Whangarei District re- 
quired a District President and it fell 
to Elder Baker's lot to fill the position, 
which he filled faithfully for eight 
months. As Auckland was in need of 
a Senior Elder, he was relieved of 
his District President's job in Wha- 
ngarei and called to Auckland where 
he has continued to labour for the past 
eleven months. 

Elder Ned R. Winward, of Clifton. 
Idaho, arrived May 1". 1950, aboard 
the Aorangi and was assigned to the 
Otago District where he continued to 
labour until Hui Tan 1951 which 
amounted to ten months in that Dis- 
trict, after which he was called to 
labour in the Wellington In'strict as 
D.P. for fourteen months. And the 
last few months of his mission have 
been spent labouring in the WaikatO 
District. 



October, 1952 



371 



/:/(/,•;• Louis C. Midgley, from Boun- 
tiful, Utah, arrive! in Wellingt< 
Zealand, tugusl 14. 1950, aboard the 
S S Sonoma II - first field of labour 
was Whangarei District, after which 
he >|K-nt different periods of tinu 

and and Wellington I >istri( ts. I Ic 

ng home by w Vmeri- 

irwaj s, so that he \\ ill arrive in 

Salt Lake City in time to continue hi> 

schooling at the University of Utah 

without any loss of time. 

Vernon Lowery, from Cards- 
ton, Alberta, Canada, arrived in the 



\\w Zealand Missi time 

1 . Ibert, and wa 
to the Whangarei I h'strit I 
in \t field of lab ur was Baj of Plenty 
District, where he lab ured as 1 1 P 
until the end of hi 

/■/</■ 111 hails 

from Honolulu, Hawaii. Short' 

his arrival. December 8, 1950, he was 

ed to labour in the V. 
trict where he laboured until Hui Tau 
1951, after which he was called to 
labour in the following I » - 
Whangarei, King i '« untrj . and ' 




Elder Cannon III. 



The first and best victory is to conquer self; to be conquered bx i 
of (ill things the most shameful and vile, 

— Plato. 



372 



TE KARERE 



I THANK GOD 



By HAROLD STOKES 



BY the time this article is published, 
I shall be on my way to Zion. 
And at this time I wish to convey 
through the Te Karere my thanks, 
love and farewell to one and all. How 
many of us bearing" our testimonies 
use the three words "I thank God" 
and, having done so, realize the con- 
tents of those words ? 

Many years ago, after both my 
mother and father had passed on, I 
felt quite alone in the world. I was in 
search for something that would give 
me the answer to the why of my 
existence and what could I do, but 
pray about it. Shortly after praying 
about the matter I met two Mormon 
missionaries, Elders Whitney and 
Sterling, but was quite unaware of the 
reason why I should be meeting them. 

My home was open to them at any 
time, and I was happy to do anything 
for these Servants of God. Little did 
I realize what I had prayed for, what 
I had said and the event.; that were 
to take place. All of this began in 
1937, and on November, 1938, I was 
baptized by Elder A. Harper Wallace. 

Life had its normal course for me, 
my livelihood, my Church duties, my 
call to my God and country in the 
New Zealand Airforce. After a short 
term I was released from the Airforce. 
"Where to next ?" It may seem 
humorous now, though at the time it 
was not. I was manpowered to Mission 
President Matthew Cowley of the 
Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day 
Saints for a period of three months. 
and without pay. That was the letter 
from the Manpower Committee and I 
certainly enjoyed that time, for T 
travelled through the North Island 
with President CoWley, and met many 
of the Saints, enjoyed their hospitality, 




their love and friendship. After the 
three months were finished, I settled 
down to civilian work again and event- 
ually Presidents M. Cowley and A. 
Reed Halverson had finished their 
missions, and President Gordon C. 
Young and family were called to fill 
the positions left vacant. 

Within a short time, the Church had 
bought a "New Mission Home," and 
President Young asked me to take 
charge of the "Old Mission Home." 
Here was the Lord testing me as 
regards to my words to two Mormon 
missionaries. "If I can do anything for 
you at any time let me know." Those 
words I shall never forget, and as 
most of the Saints know. I was at the 
"Old Home" until it was taken down 
to make room for the new chapel. Two 
and a half years was my time there, 
and experiences were many for me. 
Love, laughter, friendships, blessings. 
Gospel teachings, and, yes, a few ir;ir- 
shed as well all went to make up a 
part of my life. Yet with all this in 
my memories, I am grateful to my 
Father in Heaven tor His blessings 
given to me, and that 1 was indeed 
true to my word, and with all my heart 
and mostly humbly "I thank God." 



October, 1952 



373 



About Our Cover 



I Colleen lluiHisns- Jlis* Am^i-ici ifl.VJ 



r)\< the pasl twelve months »he has 
America. During this 
e has made nine 1 1- i i > - 
the continent and visited South 
\ ery minute of her 
filled with ;i 
bustle mIi travel (mostly 

b) plane t" save tunc >. fashion 

programmes, ap- 
pearances at >i>< >rts events, and par- 
mts, parades, fairs, 
ami festivals. 

Described by the director of the 
M iss Aiirt: "the busiest 

and most popular of all Miss Vmeri- 
she has gained nation-wide i>nl>- 
licity. Front-page >t, ries by tin- hun- 
dreds have appeared in newspapers in 
ever} section of tin- country, as well 
as in many foreign countries. 

haw featured her. Radio and 
■ >n stations have told her story. 
Few if any other members of the 
Church have ever gained so much 
favourable publicity in a given time 
t lolleen Kay I lutchins who be- 
came Miss Utah of 1951, and Mi — 
America "t' 1952. 

Along with the publicity given Miss 
I Inu hins. who represents t<> the nation 
the lovely young American woman- 
hood, came publicity <>f her ideals, her 
standards, and her beliefs. And the 
way she ha> conducted herself as Miss 



America lias reflected honour upon 
herself, her family, and the Church of 

Which she is a loyal nieiliher. In all 

her activities she has steadfast!) main- 
tained high standards, has never hesi- 
tated to till people that 
mon and that training in a 
Latter-da} Saint home and continuous 
in the Church have made her 
what she is. 

*'I have never had any emb 
mint whatever in sustaining my con- 
victions," she recently wrote. "People 

in the various cities and o>nntr:< 
visited have been very much into 
in my religion. I am always happj to 
explain what distinguishes Mormonism 
from other reli 

The Mis- Vmerica contest is not 
based on physical beauty alone [i I 
wen-. Colleen Hutchins mighl not 
have w<-n it. She is ; feet 1" inches 
tall, and at 25 is the oldest girl ever 
to become Miss Ameri< a. The pa 

has as its avowed purpose the selection 

of the choicest of young American 
womanhood as portrayed by intelli- 
gence, wholesomeness, disposition, 
general culture, personality, special 

talents, voice and diction, in addition 
to beauty of face, and a generally well- 
proportioned figure. Some of tiles. 
traits are inborn; most of them have 

to he worked for. 



BOOKS Now AVAILABLE AT HEADQUARTERS 



A M UtVELLOUS WORK AND A 

WONDER 12/6 

TRUTH I Widstoe) £ 1 5 - 

I' \Y PROPHETS 

BAK I 

WILFORD 
0DRUF1 18/6 

VOICE I com Till-: I'll 11/9/- 

i 

v m.i i 

mi: isr 
' M ERICA < Vol. l I 

■ OR I HRIST 

M tNSIONS 
BIB! E STORIES FOR VO 
I. D.8 



TRIP1 "N 12/10/- 

in SH IRE 

I Mill I IKI I ill. \\( [ENTS l - I 

■ >\ I i: Till w Ml 
ONG BOOKS 
OUR BOOK OF MORMON 
OUR i 
JOSEPH SMITH. PROPHE1 

[•HE uikim 11-/1/- 

Ml.s.shiN \l^ EXPE1 
MISSIONARY BIB! I 
DO( I RINE AND CO 
PEAR] "i GREA1 PRICE 

II Ml- MORE PLAN 

m: I M LES "I r\n H n 



TE KARERE 



^Ue I Lei J^reerasUnah 



(sKepenT 



a nee 



WHAT CHANCE is there for infidelity when we 
are parting with our friends almost daily? None 
at all. The infidel will grasp at every straw for 
help until death stares him in the face, and then 
his infidelity takes its flight, for the realities of 
the eternal world are resting upon him in mighty 
power, and when every earthly support and 
prop fails him, he then sensibly feels the eternal 
truths of the immortality of the soul. We should 
take warning and not wait for the death-bed to 
repent. As we see the infant taken away by 
death, so may the youth and middle-aged, as 
well as the infant be suddenly called into etern- 
ity. Let this, then, prove, as a warning to all 
not to procrastinate repentance, or wait till a 
death-bed, for it is the will of God that man 
should repent and serve him in health, and in 
the strength and power of his mind, in order to 
secure his blessing, and not wait until he is 
called to die. 

''DO NOT Procrastinate Repent a nee." 

(Teachings of Prophet Joseph Smith.) 



Are You Numbered Among the Lost? 



The undermentioned arc members of the Church whose 
records are in the Lost Membership Record Book. They are 
listed in the Districts where they were last heard of or from. 
I appreciate the help received in locating many names that 

appeared on last month'- "'IV Kaiviv" and I h next 

month may prove just as effective, it' not mor< 
few of the names that will appear again until I am sure that 
they cannot he located. 



BAY OF ISLANDS 

Kairau. Iritana 

Pomare, Saon 
Takimoana, Teiere 
Witehira, Tiata 
Witehira, Ripeka Hohaia 

Witehira. Kataraina 

Wahapu, Anganui Wiremu Wihongi 

Wahapu, Rangi Tangiwai 

BAY OF PLENTY 
(iixidall. Eric Tomoana 
Ormsby, Jeremiah 
Waiapu, Kehi 

HAWKES BAY 
Hokianga, Atar.ta Tamihana 

KING COUNTRY 
Pumipi, 'I'. Ac 

MANAWATU 
McCleasly, David James 

or, Koreheke 
Rickard, Gordon Harold 

Kan. id. Kcita Karipiti 
T« Han. Maim 

MAHIA 
Hata, Tokokoroua 
Hoetawa, Repeka 
\\ ... rea, Tame Hawai Kira 

TARANAKI 
Falwasser, Donnie Ahura T« 

A whit ana 
Karepa 

Kerai. Makura Geoi 
■ ■ I 

WELLINGTON 
Man. Edna 

Ihaiatia. Kataraina 

I all, Edith Lilian 

WHANGAREI 

I '.a I.I 



Baldwin, Rachael 



Clark. Alice Melboun 
Conley, William 
Frost, Mabel M 

a. Wiki Tepirihi 
Peneti, li 
Pure, Hemi Toahi 

Thornton. Eva Harr i 

Tiki, Jaira 

Tebuutt, Robert Henry 

Wehi, Hami li 

WAIKATO DISTRICT 

Gentry, William 
Harihari, Kore 
Hoffman, Abraham 
Jensen. Thomas Alfred 
Moore, Alice Genevi< . 
Newcombe, Alice llene 
Newcombe, Eric Raeburn 
Ranana, Marerangi 

! atekino 
Reed, Charles Henrj 
Reed. Edith Mary 
Reed, Mary Am 
Tahawa, Pumupi Rev 
Te Rangi, Hineiruturuua 
Tukiri, TeAho Tehi Himiona 
Tupuhi, Pare 
Waharoa. Tiraroa 
Walah, Margarel 
Wharen 

Wiremu, Tamati 
Wirihai 

OTAGO DISTRICT 

. ALL OTHERS 

Siainiu, 

Kenny. Susan Gertru 

from South Africa. 

Hitchii \ • tandra 

ziel, from Tahiti.,: 

Jr. 
! lelen 
.. raid 

Takitimu. Iril 




NOVEMBER 



1952 



MONTHLY MAGAZINE OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST 
OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS MISSION IN NEW ZEALAND 



MM 



'N 




Work 



By the sweat of thy brow shall thy bread be earned, 

. I curse ///(// into a blessing turned 
Ere it was spoken by lips Divine. 
.1 gift supernal, a gift sublime! 
The bread that is earned by labour is sweet ; 
"lis they unth nothing to do whose feet 
Are ever wending the downward way, 
Who quarrel with fate each hour, each day. 
Then work, just work, 'tis a glorious thing 
7 o work and smile, to snide and sing. 
And thank the One whose will is best, 
For ivork, the blessing which bringeth rest. 

— Grace [ngles Frost. 



ABOUT OUR COVER: Sister Rose Beazley standing be- 
side her faithful old work plug. Sister Beazley is one of 
our loyal Church workers (at the present time District 
Relief Society President of the Waikato District), and has 
been honoured in the local papers and the cover of this 
month's "Te Karere" for having the most outstanding 
Maori farm of the year and which has shown the most 
marked improvement during the year. She is now in 
possession of the coveted "Ahuwhenua Trophy," pre- 
sented by the Dept. of Maori Affairs. 



Te Karere 



(ESTABLISHED 1907) 



Volume 46 Number 11 November, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley Tumuaki Mihana 

Joseph Hay Kaunihera Tnatahi 

George R. Biesinger Kaunihera Tuarua 

James A. Larscn Hekeretari o te Mihana 

Albert J. Wiley Mission Recorder 

David T. Briggs Etita 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) . . . . Kaiwhakamaori 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 

"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, 0.1. New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; S.2 for 5 years. Overseas: 11 - 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 

&onients 

Editorial: 

From the Editor's Pen 882 

Special Features: 

Evidences and Reconciliations 

Pioneer Storiea Build Faith 

The Good Shepherd 

What God Hatea 

Man Proclaimed Offspring of Deity 
The Origin of I hi Polyne ian Race i 
Furtherance of Genealogy [ntereata 
Flash. s from Canada 406 

Church Features: 

The Preeidenfa Page 888 

Th< w<. m . n'a Corn< r 

Greeting! to Our Genealogs Woi Icei 

|,D. Propheta Speak 88 1 

The Sun. lav School in N.Z. 101 

Here and There in the Mission: 

Here and There In the bfi »elon 

Featuring I h< Di itrlel ' Newi 101 

Tckihana Maori: 

Nga Pou-Tokomanawa o u..ti . T« Hitorl o Te Hah, 11] 




By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 

HE KUPU AROHA 



* i 



"Me Pehea Koe?" or 
"HOW DO YOU STAND?" 

SIX months ago the Saints assembled 
in llui Tau sustained, by vote with- 
out opposition, a missionary plan which 
bids fair, it' carried out, to be one of 
the greatest missionary efforts that 
ever >truck New Zealand. 

This plan is one by which the Saints 
and friends of the mission will virtu- 
ally BUILD a college for the educa- 
tion of the hoys and girls of the 
mission and in so doing will open the 
avenues for the present young mem- 
bership to learn the crafts and trades 
while doing this building. 

The Church and Mission has done 
and is doing its full part in acquiring 
the farm for this college and in obtain- 
ing the materials for and paying for 
es to construct this great institu- 
tion. Thousands have gone into the 
project and other thousands are con- 
tinually going into it and the work is 

Following Up their vote with action, 
many districts and individuals have 
sent men to the College to work and 
have put into effect a plan to sustain 
them while they are there. Some have 
barely started on that work, after six 
months, and some are not yet enjoying 
the spirit of it. Those who have 
entered into the spirit of it are the 
happy recipients of its blessings and 



those who are still dragging their feet 
are still asking when the Church is 
going to do something for the educa- 
tion of its children. 

District presidents, hranch presi- 
dents, organisation leaders, Latter-day 
Saints, no better agency exists or will 
exist for the care and training of our 

mission children than the completion 
of this college (and the s.n.ner it is 
completed, the sooner will we I 
the blessings of it >. 

The men and women, young and 
older, who are now working on this 
great project, are living examples of 
the present value of the project They 
are happier, cleaner, wiser and better 
people than they were before they 

came. "Ask them." Many of them have- 
already shown great promise in the 
trades winch are directed by capable 
men. All testify that they have a better 
knowledge of the Gospel than they ever 
had (even older, experienced men and 
women) and they are all happy in the 
communal life which is organised and 
satisfying. 

WHERE I" » YOU STAND in the 
matter of sustaining these men and 
women? .Are you holding up your end 
in sustaining them? Surely they don't 
ask much '"Hi' pound a week to pay 
for their kai and one pound to take 
care of their personal needs). Tin 
sacrificing their time which is as valu- 

(Continued on Page 384) 



380 



TE KARERE 



C?^C^.(7^C^.Cr^C^6^C^0^C^ o (5^Q^(P^C^ o CP^Cv^c?^Q^ 



Women's Cwtet 

By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 



rv 



fci 



DURING the month of October the 
Relief Society Sisters were re- 
ceiving the lessons which had been 
given in 1952. They are also preparing 
for their Relief Society Conference to 
be held the first part of November. 
Every branch should have had a copy 
of the programme by the 1st of Octo- 
ber or before, so that they have at 
least a month to prepare for it. We do 
hope the District Officers have for- 
warded these programmes and are 
giving the Branches all the help they 
can to make it a success. This is a 
very important programme because it 
calls for the sustaining of officers and 
a report by the President, to let the 
people know what is going on in Re- 
lief Society. The talks are centered 
around a theme which should be up- 
lifting and encouraging to all. 

When the November report is sent 
in please state whether or not you have 
had this programme. 

We feel that in some districts the 
district officers are functioning very 
well and are a big help to the branches. 
Other district officers are not doing SO 



well. We would like to encourage them 
to take their responsibilities now they 
have accepted them. If it is impossible 
to do the work on account of illness 
or some very good reason, please let 
us know so the work will not be held 
up. Our duty is to keep the ball roll- 
ing. If we cannot make personal con- 
tacts we can always use the mail. 

We hope you are all remembering 
the Reading Course. We shall soon 
call for a report on it. The report will 
call for the number of women who 
have read the following : Title Page, 
Brief Analysis of the Book of Mor- 
mon, Origin of the Book of Mormon, 
The Testimony of Three Witnesses, 
The Testimony of Eight Witnesses, 
The Book of Ether, and 1 Nephi 1-S. 

It has been suggested that after the 
Conference programme in November, 
the Relief Societies close for vacation 
until the first week in February, when 
we begin our second year's lessons oil 
the Book of Mormon. The vacation 
months may be .spent in doing hand- 
work or studying some other book <>r 
subject, if you wish to continue your 
meetings. 



// any be a hearer of the word, and not a dorr, he is like unto a man behold- 
ing his natural (aee in a gldSSl For he heholdeth himself, and aoetli his way, and 
straightway forgetteth what manner of man he was. .las. 1 :_\>-_M. 



November, 1952 



381 



//... SdiU 



p. 



The Standard Works of The Church of 
Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints 



THE following are the Standard 
Works of The Church of Jesus 

Christ of Latter-day Saints, and our 
belief concerning the same. 

The Bible, Book of Mormon, Doc- 
trine and Covenants, Pearl of Great 
Trice and Articles of Faith (Confer- 
ence Report): "We believe the Bible 
to be the word of God as far as it is 

translated correctly; we also believe 

the Book of .Mormon to be the word 
of God. (Eighth Article of Faith.) 

First on the list of the Standard 

Works of the Church comes the Bible. 
Now the Church of Jesus Christ of 
Latter-day Saints accepts the Holy 
Bible for just what it purports to be, 
nothing less, nothing more. Taken as 
a whole, tbe Bible is a collection of 
prophetic, historical, and didatic writ- 
ings, depicting, though incompletely, 
the divine dealings with mankind on 
the Eastern Hemisphere from the 
creation down to about the close of 
the first century after Christ. 

V we look through the Bible wc 
find that there is a natural division in 
the make-up of this collection of writ- 
ings, the Old Testament and the New 
Testament. These two sections are not 
based alone according to age. but there 
is a marked difference in the content 
of the two. The Old Testament con- 
tains a brief record of premosaic 
people, but more especially consists of 
Is of the Semitic people or 
Hebrews, as they lived under the law 
of Moses, and is an account of God's 
dealings with these people prior to 
what we call the Meridian of time. 
The second section comprises books 
relating to the days of Christ and the 
apostilic period immediately following, 



formerly spoken of as the books of the 
New Covenant Gradually the term 
Testament came to replace the title 

Covenant; and thus we Ipeak of tin- 
Old Testament and New Testament. 
The Saviour also made a \c\\ I 
nant with the inhabitants of the Ameri- 
can Continent, but through lack of 
humble desire tor truth among the 
people of these latter days, very lew 
of the world's inhabitants accept this 
fact. 

During my proselyting activities, 
upon my presenting the Book of Mor- 
mon as additional Scripture, which 
testifies that Jesus Christ is the 
Saviour of the world, many and varied 
are the occasions of having people con- 
front me with the scripture found in 
the last chapter of Revelations 18-19 
verses where John the Rcvelator pro- 
nounces judgment on any who might 
change, add to or mar the words of 
the Book of this Prophecy which he 
had made while on the Isle of Patmos. 
They bring forth this scripture to try 
and refute our claim that the Book of 
Mormon is the word of God and that 
it coincides with the Bible in teaching 
the Gospel of Jesus Christ ; except that 
the Look of Mormon, which has been 
translated through the gift and power 
of God, will more fully help to make 
clear and plain many of the doctrines 
which have been perverted through 
errors of translation, and conspiring 
men down through the centuries A.I). 
Xephi saw in vision the conditions that 
would prevail at this time — "And the 
angel spake unto me, saying: These 
last records (The Book of Mormon) 
which thou hast seen among the Gen- 
tiles, shall establish the truth of the 
first (The Bible) which are of the 



382 



TE KARERE 



twelve apostles of the Lamb, and shall 
make known the plain and precious 
things which have been taken away 
from them ; and shall make known to 
all kindred tongues, and people, that 
the Lamb of God is the Son of the 
Eternal Father, and the Saviour of the 
world ; and that all men must come 
unto Him, or they cannot be saved." 
(1 Nephi 13:40.) Concerning the 
scripture found in the last chapter of 
Revelations, those who are want to 
bring forth such a scripture for the 
purpose of sidestepping the Book of 
Mormon, should bear in mind the 
obvious fact that the Bible is not a 
single book, but an assembly of books. 
Indeed, the word Bible is the English 
equivalent of the Greek original Biblia, 
which is a plural noun, meaning the 
books, and not as some would have it, 
the Book. Even from the earliest time 
of which we have record regarding the 
Scriptures, these have been regarded as 
a compilation of the writings of many 
scribes, different authors, involving 
many agents and instruments. It is 
obvious that the name Bible is not of 
itself a Biblical term. Therefore we 
find that John the Revelator was un- 
doubtedly speaking only of the Book 
of Revelation, as it has come to be 
called. Yet foolish men of the day still 
cling and grasp at straws, claiming 
that the heavens are closed and that 
the Canon of Scripture is full. 

The Book of Mormon, having been 
discussed in the previous lines, we will 
go on to the remaining Standard 
Works. 

"We believe all that God has re- 
vealed, all that He does now reveal, 
and we believe that He will yet reveal 
many great and important things per- 
taining to the Kingdom of God." 
(Ninth Article of Faith. ) 

The Doctrine and Covenants is a 
compilation of revelations given during 
a period extending from 1823 to 1847. 
It covers the rise and development of 



the Church, restored in our day. It 
contains "doctrines," "covenants," and 
predictions, all of the utmost import- 
ance to every nation and every in- 
dividual on earth. These revelations 
should be read continually and should 
be studied thoroughly with a prayerful 
heart that the truths contained there- 
in might be made manifest unto us. 

The Pearl of Great Price is a 
"selection from revelations, transla- 
tions and narrations of Joseph Smith." 
It contains some visions of Moses as 
revealed to the Prophet, a translation 
of records found in Egypt, some of 
the writings of Joseph Smith, and the 
Articles of Faith. The Pearl of Great 
Price contains a great deal of material 
pertaining to the past, especially con- 
cerning the creation, the fall and the 
redemption, also Abraham's travels in 
Egypt. 

My dear Brothers and Sisters, the 
Lord has indeed been kind unto us 
in giving us these Holy Scriptures. Let 
us follow the admonition as given by 
the Saviour — "Search the scriptures, 
for in them ye think ye have eternal 
life, and they are they which testify 
of me." (John 5:39.) 

Thanks to our most loving and 
gracious Heavenly Father we have 
these Holy Scriptures to help us on 
the road of eternal progression. Like 
an iron rod as shown to Nephi in a 
vision, the Word of God is continually 
before us if we will but reach forth, 
grasp it, and keep it close to us in 
OUT daily lives. Read the Scriptures 
continually SO that we might learn to 
love them ;is we would a letter from 
a dearest friend. "Blessed is he that 
readeth and they that keep those 
things which are written therein." 

"Croud your mind with thoughts 
that are rich and high and wonderful 
This is the simplest \\.i\ to build 

strength, quality, and greatness into 
mind." Christian D. Larson. 



November, 1952 



383 



"One cannot go into a flour mill or And the sometimeorot her scents the air 



a coal nunc without being covered with 
the flying dust. No more can he read 
an evil hook without it leaving a stain 
"ii his memory and his soul." — Litt 



Surround yourself with good com- 
pany and hooks. 



And the soft goeasies </>< 

// lies in the valley of What'stheuse, 
hi tin- Province of Leitersiide, that 
Tiredfeeling is native there. 
It's the home of the listless I-don't- 

eare. 
Where the put it o [is abide. 



PERSONALITY 



Is this the kind of personality you 
wantt 

No, decidedly not! Then get l>usy and 

My friend, have you heard of the land read 

of Yaicn. More hooks, and he a man of pcr- 

On he hanks of the River Slozv, sonality. 

Where hlossoms the waitowhile flower Yes. have an attractive, dynamic pcr- 
fair. sonality. 



* 
• • 

* 



THE PRESIDENT'S PAGE (Continued from Page 380) 

Truly, your first obligation is to the 
Lord and your second is to your child- 
ren and your grandchildren. Through 
the summer season we need more men 
and more men need more kai and per- 
sonal sustenance funds. 



able as yours and you have pledged 
yourself as have parents of the mis- 
sionaries who travel among you, to 
sustain them with this meagre amount. 
How are you doing? Don't feel be- 
cause you sent a few pounds to start 
with that the job is done. Men have 
to eat four weeks out of the month 
and twelve months of the year, just 
the same as you and I do. 

Time may have been a bit lean in 
recent months for some of us, but I 
sincerely call to your attention at this 
time, when all are working and funds 
are available, to look ahead to a full 
year of support to our labour mission- 
aries. Don't be content with current 
needs only. The work season will be 
over again before many weeks and we 
will have the same struggle over again. 



A visit to the College project will 
be the best thing in the world to con- 
vince you that it is truly NEW ZEA- 
LAND'S GREATEST MISSION- 
ARY FORCE. 

I am doing my part, the Brothers 
and Sisters at the College are doing 
their part, many of the districts and 
branches are doing their part. M E 
PEHEA KOE? HOW DO YOU 
STAND? 



For every creature of God is good, and nothing to be refused, if it he 
received with thanksgiving. — 1 Timothy IV :4. 



384 



TE KARERE 



Evidences and Reconciliations 



HOW MAY MEMBERSHIP and EXALTATION in the 
CELESTIAL KINGDOM be WON? 



By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 



IT is a basic gospel doctrine that 
every person, except a very few, 
will be saved. It is an equally basic 
doctrine that salvation is graded. Every 
person will be placed in the hereafter 
according to his works. 

These truths had been forgotten in 
the dark ages of apostasy. It was then 
commonly believed that the sinner 
would forever remain in a torturing 
hell and that all who escaped that 
place of unending misery would receive 
equal places in God's Kingdom. Soon 
after the coming of the Restoration a 
glorious manifestation revealed anew 
the ancient truths. While Joseph Smith 
and Sidney Rigdon were engaged in 
the revision of the Bible, it became 
"apparent" to them "that many im- 
portant points touching the salvation 
of man had been taken from the Bible 
or lost before it was compiled. It ap- 
peared self-evident from what truths 
were left, that if God rewarded every- 
one according to the deeds done in the 
body, the term "Heaven," as intended 
for the Saints' eternal home, must in- 
clude more kingdoms than one.l While 
pondering upon this matter, the vision, 
known as Section 76 in the Doctrine 
and Covenants, was received. It threw 
a flood of light upon the nature of God, 
and His dealings with His children on 
earth. 

In essence, this vision or revelation 
explains that all except the sons of 
perdition will be saved. The traditional 

hell with its threats of lire and brim- 
stone, and of unending torture, has no 
existence. But the degree of salvation 

will vary with the jusl desserts of 

those who appear fur judgment. Those 



who in life, or in the later spiritual 
domain, deliberately did evil, or re- 
fused to comply with Gospel require- 
ments, would not receive the rewards 
given to the just and obedient. By his 
own works, every person would place 
himself in a higher or lower eternal 
home. "For they shall be judged ac- 
cording to their works, and every man 
shall receive according to his own 
works, his own dominion, in the man- 
sions which are prepared."2 

These gradations in salvations may 
be innumerable, since all members of 
the human family are different. The 
many gradations are, however, re- 
duced to three classes: (1) the celes- 
tial, the highest, as of the sun in glory ; 
(2) the terrestrial, the next, as of the 
earth; (3) the telestial, the lowest, as 
of the stars.3 

The revelation details somewhat 
fully, and with much beauty of langu- 
age, the conditions that place people 
in each of these kingdoms. Those of 
the celestial, the place where God and 
Christ dwell, have accepted Jesus and 
the ordinances of His Church. Those 
of the terrestial died without the law, 
or were not valiant in the testimony ^\ 
Jesus. Those of the telestial kingdom 
did not receive JesUS but were content 
td follow falsehood. 

These kingdoms, though very differ- 
ent, are filled w ith the children of ( lod 
the Father. Though those of the lower 
kingdom have not shown themselves 

worthy of the fullness of salvation. \ et 

the love of the Father envelops them. 

Even the glory Of the lowest, the teles 
tial. "surpasses all understanding. "4 



November, 1952 



385 



To an apostate world this was a new 
and I lis relationship 
to His children on earth. It raised G d 
to a new height in the thoughts of 
men. It invited a new love of men for 
their Eternal Father, a firmer response 
through righteous works v< II 
lor us. The malignant god of the apos- 
tasy was removed from the fears of 
humanity. 

Nevertheless, there remained the 
punishment that one in the lower 
kingdoms might by another mode of 
life have received and enjoyed a higher 
glory. The eternal memory, though 
terrible, is a more reasonable punish- 
ment than the fiery furnace taught 
through generations of time by false 
teachers. 

Moreover, those who are assigned to 
the lower kingdoms have so lived, so 
misused their opportunities, that they 
could not adapt themselves to the pre- 
vailing conditions in the higher king- 
doms. Their very capacities, by their 
own acts, have been changed to fit 
a lower glory. They would not be 
happy in a higher kingdom. They are 
unprepared for association with those 
whose lives have been in accord with 
God's truth. As we have made our- 
selves, so shall our judgment be. 

It is further recorded that though 
these kingdoms are separate, yet there 
; s inter-communication among them. 
Those in the higher may minister to 
those in the lower kingdoms. But, the 
reverse cannot be done. Those in the 
lower kingdom cannot enter a higher 
"lie. 5 Wherever a child of God may he 
placed, he is not forgotten. That is not 
the Lord's way. It shows again the 
infinite, never-ending love of God for 
His children. 

Despite this divine mercy, it must 
be remembered that though we shall 
in the hereafter find salvation in one 
of the kingdoms it is dangerous to 
allow sin to enter our lives. Brigham 
Young, speakiim upon this subject, 
said as a warning : 



** Well.' says one, 'if 1 am pretty 
sure to get a stale of -lory better than 
this. I <;ues.s I will not take the trouble 
to inherit anything more.' Well, run 
the risk of it. every man on the earth 

has the privilege. The Gospel is 

preached, sin revives, some die and 
ontend against it— some receive 

it and some do not: hut this i> the sin 
of tin- people truth is told them and 
they reject it. This i> the sin of the 
world. "Light has come into the world, 
hut men love darkness rather than 
light, because their deeds are evil.' So 

said Jesus in His day. We say. here is 
the Gospel of lite and salvation, and 
everyone that will receive it. glory, 
honour, immortality and eternal life 
are theirs; if they reject it. they take 
their chance. "(> 

Xow. the concern i>\ the Church is 
to bring all men into the celestial king- 
dom. It has no interest in the other. 
lower kingdoms. Every doctrine, prin- 
ciple and item of organization within 
the Church pertains to the celestial 
glory. The manner of entrance into 
this, the highest kingdom, is therefore 
made clear. Any person who wishes 
to enter it must have faith and repent 
from his sins. Then he must be bap- 
tized, and receive the gift of the Holy 
Ghost by one who has divine author- 
ity to perform such ordinances. There 
are principles and ordinances which in 
their entirety belong peculiarly to the 
higher kingdom. 

After having laid the foundation for 
his claim to celestial membership and 
iation, he must, to receive all 
available blessings of this kingdom, 
comply with the many requi r em ent s 
for life within the Church. He belongs 
to "those who are valiant and inspired 
with the true independence of Heaven, 
who will go forth boldly in the service 
of their God leaving others to do as 
they please, determine to do right, 
though all mankind should take the op- 
posite co-use. '7 All this having been 
done, he is qualified to enter the celes- 
(Continued on Page 414) 



386 



TE KARERE 



§)i 



Sic 



illd cja'Uk . 



The Fruits of Disobedience 

By SOLOMON F. KIMBALL 



(In this story Solomon F. Kimball 
gives us a vivid picture of a distressing 
accident and the pious conclusions of 
his honoured father, Heber C. Kimball. 
—P.N.) 

IT is difficult for some of the younger 
members of our Church to under- 
stand what the Saints have had to pass 
through since they first began to settle 
in these valleys (in Utah). In early 
days all had to work who were able. 
We had no railroads then to bring 
trainloads of coal right to our doors, 
but were compelled to burn wood. It 
took a strong man two days to go to 
the canyon and get a load of wood. 
Then it took him two days more to 
chop it into firewood. This would last 
a small family probably three weeks 
or a month. It was nothing unusual to 
see a boy of twelve or thirteen years 
of age driving a team to the canyon 
in company with his father or brother, 
who also had teams to look after. Like 
conditions prevailed in the different 
avocations of life. 

About the last of May, 1865, our 
father, Heber C. Kimball, purchased 
quite a valuable work horse from the 
Knowlton family, paying them three 
hundred and fifty dollars, cash down. 
That evening he instructed David H. 
and myself to hitch up our teams the 
next morning and go to North Mill 
Creek Canyon, east of Bountiful, after 
wood. He ent rusted the new horse to 
the care of David, who was but fifteen 
years of age a1 the time, I being three 
years older. Every morning fail km- had 
family prayers, and he never allowed 

ns boys tO go to work until tins was 

attended to. He would not only pray 
for ns, but for the horses and v. 



and even the harness. The next morn- 
ing David and I hitched up our teams 
bright and early and drove them out 
of the yard very quietly so as not to 
wake our father. We well knew that 
we were disobeying orders, and that 
if he should happen to hear us driving 
out he would call us back and have us 
put our horses back into the stable and 
remain until after prayers. This was 
not our first offence and we were quite 
successful that morning in getting 
away. Nothing unusual happened until 
after we had reached the head of the 
canyon, which is about seventeen miles 
from Salt Lake City. We loaded our 
wagons with wood, which had already 
been gotten out for us, and started 
for home, myself being in the lead. We 
had not gone far before the Knowlton 
horse began to jump about so frantic- 
ally that my brother could not manage 
him. I stopped my team and ran back 
to where he was, and finally got die 
horse quieted clown. I then told David 
that he would better drive my team 
and that I would take charge of his. 
We then drove on until we came to a 
very steep and narrow dugway, which 
was quite sidling in places. This was 
the most dangerous piece of road in the 
canyon. Not long before this. Father 
Kinney's son met with a terrible death 
in this same place. The wagon that 
he was driving tipped over into the 
creek and fell on him. In those days 
we had no brakes ^n our wagons, and 
when we came t-i a hill that was too 
steep fur the horses to hold the loaded 
Wagon hack, we locked one of the hind 

wheels and drove down in that way. 
When David readied the top ^'i this 

hill, lu- Stopped his team U UMial. 

lo( ked the wheel, and then dro\ e on 



November, 1952 



387 



down. I then drove my team to the 

brink of the hill, hut before 1 COtlld 

•jet it stopped, the Knowlton horse 
began to pitch and lunge ahead bo fran- 
tically, that it was impossible for me 
to stop him. I Fully realized the awful 

position that 1 was in. Like a flash ol 

lightning the death ol Father Kinney's 
son came before my mind. David, by 
this time, was about fifty yards on 
ahead of me. I yelled to him at the top 
of my voice, telling him to whip up and 
gel out of my way as quickly as pos- 
sible. By this time my team was run- 
ning. I had dropped one of the lines, 
and could do nothing but hold on to 
my load of wood as best I could. I 
was satisfied that if my team ran into 
his wagon in such a narrow and sidling 
place it would not only knock his outfit 
off into the raging torrent below, but 
that we would all go down together. 
The dugway next to the creek was 
probably twenty-five or thirty feet 
high, and almost perpendicular. The 
stream below was quite high and the 
bottom of it was strewn with huge 
boulders. The water rushing and beat- 
ing against them on its downward 
course made it appear as white as 
snow. This also made such a roaring 
that we could hardly hear. David 
looked back and saw my team coming 
at full speed. For the first time he 
sensed the danger that we were in 
and immediately began to put the whip 
to his horses, letting them go as fast 
as he dared. By so doing he took his 
life in his own hands in order to try 
and save me, as w : ell as himself. My 
binding chain began to loosen, as it 
was impossible for me to hold on much 
longer. At the foot of this dugway was 
a narrow and dangerous pol -bridge 
that crossed this treacherous stream. 
On crossing this bridge with loaded 
wagons under ordinary circumstances 
we had our teams walk across it as 
slowly as possible. In a miraculous 
manner David had managed to get 
his team across safely, and had reached 
a little flat on the other side, and was 
out of danger a few seconds before I 



overtook him. Bui what was to become 

of me? I Still held the ri^ht hand line 

in my hands. .\s my team was headed 
my left wheels would miss the bridge, 
on the upper side, at least three feet. 

There was just one chance left for me. 
If I could steer my horses a little to 
the right and strike the bridge 
Squarely, I believed that I would be 
able to cross it. If I should happen to 
miss it. even one-eighth of an inch, it 
meant certain destruction for myself 

and team. This was the danger spot 
of the whole canyon. I made a super- 
human effort. I pulled <mi the line as 
hard as I could under the circum- 
stances, and managed to get my team 
turned a little to the right and came 
within two inches of running off the 
bridge, on the upper side, but went 
across alright. By this time I had com- 
pletely lost my balance, and was just 
falling on to the heels of this crazy 
horse when my team crashed into my 
brother David's wagon with such tre- 
mendous force that it drove a pole 
almost through the body of the Knowl- 
ton horse, killing him almost instantly. 

So far we had not seen a human 
being in the canyon, and the lonely 
and dismal feeling that took possession 
of us nearly drove us wild. We began 
to realize the danger that we had just 
passed through, and our faces were 
as white as chalk, while our hearts 
were beating sledge-hammer blows. 
We were speechless, as well as power- 
less, and it took us some time before 
we could collect our thoughts. The 
first words that were spoken were by 
David, who said that he would never 
run away from prayers again, as long 
as he lived. I felt a little more that 
way than he did, but said nothing. I 
offered up a silent prayer, thanking 
God, my Heavenly Father, for saving 
our lives in such a miraculous manner. 

The next thing we did was to get 

the wagons and dead horse out of the 

road. We then tied faithful old "Nig" 

horse behind our wagon and drove 

(Continued on Page 390) 



388 



TE KARERE 



One (tfeecl Cykephercl 

By BRO. ERIC STEELE 



IT is certain that more able pens than 
mine have written on this theme, but 
as I can remember my mother reading 
about the good shepherd to us when 
my brothers and I were small children, 
I wish to write about this wonderful 
person. Because of the fact that I am 
now in a better position to appreciate 
all that has been done for His sheep. 

Right from the time of Father 
Adam, right down to our present day 
and age, man has never been left to his 
own devices, except when he (man) 
has denied the Power of God, and the 
Bible and Book of Mormon bear 
record of the visits of Jesus Christ 
in the various dispensations. Just as 
the Old Testament prophesies the com- 
ing of a Redeemer, so the New Testa- 
ment confirms the fulfillment of the 
same, where Jesus came and gave to 
the world a plan of eternal salvation. 

The Book of Mormon bears proof 
that the Jaredites, who came from 
Babel, had no doubt about a living 
God, because He talked to the brother 
of Jared (Moriantumer) as one man 
to another. Again, when Jesus Christ 
prepared the stones to light their 
vessels, He stood before Mahonri 
Moriancumer face to face and said, 
"Behold, I am He who was prepared 
from the foundation of the world to 
redeem my people. Behold, I am Jesus 
Christ ... In me shall all mankind 
have light, and that eternally, even 
they who shall believe on my name; 
and they shall become my sons and 
my daughters." What a beautiful pro- 
mise i" be given, and whal is more, 
to know thai it would be fulfilled. 

Like the Jaredites who migrated to 
America 2,200 B.C., the Nephites, led 
by I .elii and Nephi in 600 B.( !., were 
show ii \ i« ions of the future, righl <l<>\\ n 
to our time. [1 i an be een th I the 



Lord watched over the affairs of the 
Faithful, as a shepherd watches over 
his flock. Nephi had a vision wherein 
he saw the Virgin Mary with Jesus 
in her arms, the growth of the child 
to manhood, followed by His baptism 
and His ministry, wherein He did 
many wonderful works and established 
His Church among the Jews, followed 
by His death upon the cross, where 
He died for the sins of the whole 
world. 

However, after the death of the be- 
loved Shepherd, man was not left to 
his own devices and desires. He ap- 
peared among His Apostles in Jeru- 
salem and taught and instructed them 
in the way His Church and Kingdom 
should be operated ; and afterwards 
visited His children on the American 
Continent. Here He organized and set 
up His Church, as He did on the East- 
ern Continent. Twelve disciples were 
chosen and instructed on matters per- 
taining to the administering of the 
sacrament as well as having the privi- 
lege of witnessing many marvellous 
and beautiful things, the greatest being 
His ascension to Heaven. 

It would appear that the Nephites 
were more favoured than those in 
Palestine, as they knew the very year 
that Jesus Christ would come. This 
was foretold by Samuel the Lamanite 
who called the Nephites to repentance. 
saying, "Destruction awaiteth this 

people and nothing can save them ex- 
cept it be repentance and faith on the 
Lord Jesus Christ, who surely shall 
Cdine unto the world." Samuel also 
prophesied of OUT Lord's death and 
the si.uns that u mid accompany this 
event We know that after the earth 
had Ceased t<> tremble and the dai 
gave way 1" light that those who were 
gathered BOOUt the Temple at r.ounti- 



November, 1952 



389 



fill (being the faithful) were privileged 

to behold the Son of God, and a voice 
from Heaven saying, "Behold, my Be- 
loved Son in whom I am well pleased, 
and whom 1 have glorified my Name 

— hear ye Him." The people then saw 
a man dressed in a white robe descend- 
ing from Heaven and He came and 

■i their midst and said, "Behold, 

1 hrist, whom the Prophets 

testified shall come into the world." 

The faithful were then comforted and 

inspired by great happenings, the 

of the past days being f( I 

by the advent of the Good She] 

\> in the days of old. so in these, 
the latter days. Jesus Christ, Our 
Shepherd, has shown Himself to man, 
to the Prophet Joseph Smith who was 
instrumental in issuing in the dispensa- 
tion of the fullness of times. 



The Lord is MY Shepherd; I shall not 

want. 
He maketh me /<> lie down in green 

pastures: 
He leadeth me beside the still waters. 
lie restoreth my soul: He leadeth me 

in the paths of righteousness for His 

Name's sake. 
)'ea. though / walk through the valley 

of the shadow of death, 1 will fear 

>io evil: 
For thou art with me; thy rod mid thy 

staff they eomfort me. 
Thou prepares! a talkie before mc in 

the presence of mine enemies: 
Thou anointest niy head with <>il ; my 

<-/</> runneth 
Surely goodntSS and mercy shall 

follow me all the days of my life: 
And I will dwell in the House of the 

Lord forever. 

Psalm 23rd Chapter. 



PIONEER STORIES BUILD FAITH (Continued from Page 388) 



homeward. We arrived at the Warm 
s about 7 p.m., being two hours 
late. We there met our mothers, Sarah 
Ann and Yilate. My mother had had a 
terrible presentiment of what had hap- 
pened, just at the very time that we 
were passing through this terrible <>r- 
and had been almost frantic up 
to this time. They never expected to 
see either of us home alive. We finally 
got them pacified, and drove on home. 
It seemed that father, also, had been 
forwarned of our trouble. When we 
met him at the gate his face was 
flushed, and he was unable to speak 
a word, while big tears were running 
down his cheeks. The next morning 
we were called into the prayer room 
with the rest of the family. Before 
prayers he made a few remarks as he 
usually did. Among the things he said 
hese words, "that Satan had laid 



his plans to destroy US tWO hoys, and 
that the death of that horse saved our 

lives. Nothing but power 
said, could have saved us. as that horse 
was possessed with an evil spirit. He 
thought that if we had obeyed his 
1 1 and remained at home until 
after prayers, Satan would not have 
had the power to endanger our lives. 
He hoped that it would be a lesson 
that we would always remember. Then 
we all kneeled down, and before he 
prayed many minutes, we could begin 
o feel the blood tingling in our veins ; 
the Spirit of Clod rested down upon 118 
in mighty power. Before he was 
through there was not a person in the 
room who was not weeping. I had 
never heard such a prayer before, and 
what T heard on that occasion will re- 
main with me as long a- T live. 



390 



TE KARERE 



Editorial taken from The Church Section 



WHAT GOD HATES 



GENERALLY we think in terms 
of love when we think of the 
Lord. He is* the personification of all 
the good traits of character which we 
desire to build into our own lives. 

But although He "is love," never- 
theless there are some things which 
He is said to hate. They are referred 
to as being abominations in His sight, 
and for our own good we should know 
His attiude concerning them. 

Some of these things are mentioned 
in the Ten Commandments, such as 
taking life, worshipping before images, 
sex sin, and covetousness. But a list 
given elsewhere in the scriptures also 
deserves our serious and frequent con- 
sideration. 

"THESE SIX THINGS doth the 
Lord hate ; yea, seven are an abomina- 
tion unto Him : A proud look. A lying 
tongue. Hands that shed innocent 
blood. A heart that deviseth wicked 
imaginations. Feet that be swift in 
running to mischief. A false witness 
that speaketh lies. He that soweth dis- 
cord among the brethren." (Prov. 6.) 

All seven of these things pertain to 
one subject: that of stirring up trouble 
with and for other people. The scorn 
of a proud look, the evil of a lying 
tongue, a heart which deliberately 
plans wickedness, feet which are swift 
in running to mischief, the murderer, 
and he that stirs up discord among the 
brethren — God hates them all. 

Each expression is a description of 
a trouble-maker, one who goes about 
with evil intent, gossiping over half 
truths or untruths, blackening good 
names, sowing discord where harmony 
should prevail, speaking lies, and en- 
joying it. 



The peculiar thing about all this 
that such practices are not limited to 
the so-called wicked people. Often 
those who regard themselves as worthy 
of a halo of light indulge in some of 
these practices, and they do it at 
times in the name of righteousness and 
reform. 

Discord ! Discord ! The world is full 
of it. Because of it we are on the 
verge of another world war. Because 
of it we have strife within our own 
country, we have friendships destroyed 
in neighbourhoods, we have homes 
broken, orphans made. Because of dis- 
cord some have lost faith in human- 
kind, and even their faith in God. 

Is it any wonder that the Lord hates 
those who spread discord. Is it any 
wonder the Lord denounces those 
whose feet are swift to do mischief, 
those whose hearts deliberately devise 
ways of performing wickedness, even 
though under the cloak of righteous- 
ness ? 

When the Savour lived on earth He 
denounced more than any others the 
hypocrites. Are there any among us 
who sail under false colours, and tear 
down good names and good works in 
the name of reform, or destroy a good 
reputation because of personal pre- 
judice? Are there any among us who 
wish to appear angelic but who, in 
their private acts, are quite the 
opposite ? 

God is love, He teaches us to love 
our neighbours as ourselves. It" we 

feel we have been injured, lie invite^ 
us to turn the Other Cheek, rather than 

to injure another. It we have had our 
coal taken from us, 1 te asks us I 
our cloak also. 

(Continued on Page 400) 



November, 1952 



391 



/((an Js reclaimed Uf-f-sprini 

(Improvement Era, November, 1909) 



ADAM, our great progenitor, "The 
first num." was, like Christ, a 
pre-existent spirit, and like Christ he 
took upon him an appropriate body, 
the body of a man, and so became a 
"living soul." The doctrine of pre- 
existence — revealed so plainly, par- 
ticularly in latter days, pours a won- 
derful flood of light upon the otherwise 
mysterious problem of man's origin. 
It shows that man, as a spirit, was be- 
gotten and born of heavenly parents, 
and reared to maturity in the eternal 
mansions of the Father, prior to com- 
ing upon the earth in a temporal body 
to undergo an experience in mortality. 
It teaches that all men existed in the 
spirit before any man existed in the 
flesh, and all who have inhabited the 
earth since Adam have taken bodies 
and become souls in like manner. 

It is held by some that Adam was 
not the first man upon this earth, and 
that the original human being was a 
development from lower orders of the 
animal creation. These, however, are 
the theories of men. The word of the 
Lord declares that Adam was "the 
first man of all men" and we are 
therefore duty bound to regard him 
as the primal parent of our race. It 
was shown to the brother of Jarcd 
that all men were created in the be- 
ginning after the image of God ; and 
whether we take this t<> mean the spirit 
or the body, or both, it commits 
the same conclusion: Man began life 
as a human being, in the likei 
our Heavenly Father. 

True it is that the body of man 
enters upon it- career as a tiny germ 



or embryo, which becomes an infant, 
quickened at a certain .stage by the 
spirit whose tabernacle it is, and the 
child, after being born, develops into a 
man. There is nothing in this, how- 
ever, i" indicate that the original man, 
the first of "iir race, began life as any- 
thing le^s than a man, or less than 
the human germ or embryo that be- 
comes a man. 

Man. by searching, cannot find out 
God. Never, unaided, will he discover 
the truth about the beginning of human 
lite. The Lord must reveal Himself, or 
remain nnrevealed ; and the same is 
true of the facts relating to the origin 
of Adam's race — God alone can reveal 
them. Some of these facts, however, 
are already known, and what has been 
made known it is our duty to receive 
and retain. 

The Church of Jesus Christ of 
Latter-day Saints, basing its belief on 
divine revelation, ancient and modern, 
proclaims man to be the direct and 
lineal offspring of Deity. God Himself 
is an exalted man, perfected, enthroned 
and supreme. 

Man is the child of God, formed 
in the divine image and endowed with 
divine attributes, and even as the infant 
son of an earthly father and mother is 
capable in due time of becoming a man, 
so the undeveloped offspring of i 
tial parentage is capable, by experience 
through ages and eons, of evolving into 
a God. — Joseph F. Smith, John "R. 
Winder, Anthoii II. Lund, The First 
Presidency. 



All who would win joy must share it; happiness is horn a twin. — Byron. 



392 



TE KARERE 



reelinqs to \) 



uv vftenealcgn 



ers 



JOSEPH HAY, Mission Genealogy Supervisor 
MURIEL C. HAY, Secretary 





AFTER having attended nine Hui 
Parihas we feel we have some 
idea as to how the various Districts 
are functioning, and, generally speak- 
ing, we have been greatly impressed 
by the interest being shown. And, dear 
brothers and sisters, we surely want 
to encourage you to push on this 
work; that the spark which has been 
kindled will be fanned into a flame ; 
that you will have that desire of 
Eternal Happiness, which should be 
the objective of all Latter-day Saints. 

If each day of our lives we do some- 
thing to bless others, we will continue 
to accumulate peace, happiness, love, 
joy, saisfaction, and it will be greatly 
beneficial to us when we are weighed 
in the balance as to whether we enter 
into the presence of Our Father in 
Heaven, to dwell with Him throughout 
the eternities. 

The Lord has made it plain thai all 
blessings arc predicated upon the ob- 
servance of law. If WC want to be 



happy in the Celestial Kingdom we 
must observe the laws that govern that 
Kingdom. To receive that highest 
exaltation — a full and perfect exalta- 
ton — there are certain laws to obey. 
One is Baptism by Immersion, another 
is Temple Endowment and yet another 
is Temple Marriage. For no person 
alone can attain that highest glory ; 
Eternal Life is not an individual affair ; 
the unit of exaltation is the family. 

Please re-read Elder Wiley's article 
in the October issue of the Te Karere 
and you will understand more fully 
"Why Genealogy?" and I'm sure it 
will be an incentive to become more 
interested in Genealogy. 

We trust that by the time this issue 

reaches you all Districts and Branches 
have fully organised committees; ami 
that they are functioning successfully. 

We thank you tor your loyalty and 

co-operation ami pra) < lod to inspire 

you in this, the greatest and most im- 
portant work in these latter days. 



A wise mother and good hooks enabled me /<> succeed in life. Henry (."law 



November, 1952 



I..I). I'ropliets S|M>«-ik 



The Sacrament 
of the Lord's Supper 



The Ordinance of The Sacrament 

THE Sacrament of the Lord's Sap- 
per is a very important and sacred 
ordinance; however simple it may ap- 
pear to Our minds, it is one which will 
add to our acceptance before God or 
to OUT condemnation. 1 

I look upon the sacrament as an 
ordinance of great importance to us; 
in fact, from the days of Adam down 
to the days of Jesus Christ, there were 
sacrifices offered; not only by Adam, 
but by his posterity, by Moses and the 
House of Israel, and all the genera- 
tions of people who were led by the 
Lord — sacrifices were offered as a type 
"i the great sacrifice to be made by 
the Messiah. They offered the blood 
of bulls, rams and doves as a type of 
the great and last sacrifice and death 
of the Messiah, whose blood was shed 
for the redemption of the world. Prior 
to the death of the Saviour, the Sacra- 
ment of the Lord's Supper was ad- 
ministered to His disciples, and they 
were informed that they were to par- 
take of the bread as an emblem of the 
broken body of the Lord, and of the 
wine — or whatever is made use of as a 
substitute — in token of the shed blood 
of the Lord Jesus Christ. 2 

The sacrament is of great import- 
ance The Lord Himself ordained that 
we partake of these emblems. There 
are many people who believe it is 
necessary to be baptized and to have 
other ordinances of the Gospel per- 
formed in their behalf, and yet they 
become indifferent and careless regard- 
ing the Sacrament of the Lord's Sup- 
led of such import- 



ance by our Father in Heaven that, 

through His Beloved Son and the 
Apostles and Prophets, as recorded in 

the Scriptures, the Saints were ad- 
monished to partake of it regularly 
. . . Our Father in Heaven does not 
give US commandments Of advice that 
are not of importance.3 

I would exhort my brethren and 
sisters to receive this ordinance every 
Sabbath, when they meet together, as 
is our practice ; not following the cus- 
toms of others, for with some denom- 
inations this is administered once a 
month, with others once in three 
months, with others never, they not 
believing in outward ordinances . . . 

We are in the habit of partaking of 
the contents of the cup each Sabbath 
when we meet together, and I do pray 
you, my brethren and sisters, to con- 
template this ordinance thoroughly and 
seek unto the Lord with all your hearts 
that you may obtain the promised 
blessings by obediencr to it. Teach its 
observance to your children; impress 
upon them its necessity. Its observance 
is as necessary to our salvation as any 
other of the ordinances and command- 
ments that have been instituted in 
order that the people may be sanctified 
that Jesus may bless them and give 
unto them His Spirit, and guide and 
direct them that they may secure unto 
themselves life eternal. Impress the 
sacredness of this important ordinance 
upon the minds of your children. 4 

This ceremony has been attended to 
throughout generations that are part 
and still it is attended to. Jesus said 

I >" this unil I d me again ..." 

•'nance has been renewed to 



394 



TE KARERE 



us and is part and parcel of me new 
covenant God has made with His 
people in the latter days. It was prac- 
ticed among the ancient Saints who 
resided upon this continent, long be- 
fore it was discovered by Columbus, 
as well as upon the continent of Asia 
among the Saints that lived there. 
When we attend to this ordinance we 
do it upon the same principle that they 
did anciently, whether among the 
Saints on the American continent. 5 

In what consists the benefit we de- 
rive from this ordinance? It is in 
obeying the commands of the Lord. 
When we obey the commandments of 
our Heavenly Father, if we have a 
correct understanding of the ordin- 
ances of the House of God, we receive 
all the promises attached to the obedi- 
ence rendered to His commandments. 6 

The Purpose of the Sacrament 

When Jesus came and suffered, "the 
just for the unjust ..." the law 
of sacrifice was fulfilled, and instead 
thereof He gave another law, which 
we call the ''Sacrament of the Lord's 
Supper," by which His* life and mis- 
sion, His death and resurrection, the 
great sacrifice He had offered for the 
redemption of man, should be kept in 
everlasting remembrance . . . There- 
fore, this law is to us what the law 
of sacrifice was to those who lived 
prior to the first coming of the Son 
of Man, until He shall come again. 
Therefore, we must honour and keep 
it sacredly.7 

The Sacrament of the Lord's Sup- 
per ... is an ordinance of the Gospel. 
one as necessary to be observed by .'ill 
believers as any other ordinance of the 
Gospel. What is the object of it? It 
is that we may keep in mind continu- 
ally the Son of God who has re 
deemed us from eternal death and 
broughl ns to Hfe again through the 

power of the Gospel ... It 1 neces- 
sary to partake of the sacrament, as a 
witness to | [im thai we do remember 



Him, are willing to keep the com- 
mandments He has given us, that we 
may have His Spirit to be with us 
always — even to tne end, and also that 
we may continue in the forgiveness ot- 
sins.8 

It is one of the greatest blessings 
we could enjoy, to come before the 
Lord and before the angels and before 
each other, to witness that we remem- 
ber the Lord Jesus Ghrist has died for 
us. This proves to the Father that 
we remember our covenants, that we 
love His Gospel, that we love to keep 
His commandments and to honour the 
name of the Lord Jesus upon the 
earth.9 

On Administering To and 
Receiving The Sacrament 

I admonish you, my brethren, that 
when we officiate in administering the 
sacrament we repeat, if possible, the 
exact words given by revelation, and 
that we do so with the Spirit of the 
Lord. When we repeat these prayers 
we should feel the sentiments expressed 
by the words that we speak. Then I 
say also to those who partake of the 
sacrament, we should consider seri- 
ously the covenants we make with our 
Father. Let us pay strict attention to 
those covenants and let us see to it 
that we eat and drink worthily, for the 
blessings of our souls and for the in- 
crease of our Spiritual strength. 10 

The Lord has indicated the import- 
ance of the sacrament in another way. 
There are certain of the priesthood 
who are not permitted to officiate in 
this ordinance. The deacon or teacher 

may not administer the sacrament, and 
those who bear no priesthood cannot 
act in this capacity. The I ,ord ha! 
tainly emphasized its importance bj 
designating those- who may officiate. 

Our people haw been taught to take 

the sacrament with the right hand: 
we believe that is appropriate, and 
proper, and ao « ptable t< • our Father. 

epted 



November, 1952 



395 



with .. ad; nobody should 

receive it in that irreverent manner. 
We should partake of it in humility, 
with preparation of clean hands and 
pure hearts, and with a desire to be 
acceptable to our Father; then we will 

it worthily and rejoice in the 

g that comes t<> us by reason 

pie wonder sometimes why we 

have sickness amongst lis. The \ 
Paul in writing to the Corinthians, in 
referring to divisions that existed 
among them, together with their un- 
worthiness when partaking ^\ the 
Lord's Supper, says, '"For this 
many are weak and sickly among 
and many sleep." I )<» yon believe a 
principle of that kind? I do. 
fear God then, honour Him, and keep 
mmandments.12 

How long do you suppose a man 

may partake of this ordinance un- 
worthily and the Lord not withdraw 
His Spirit from him? Mow long- will 
he thus trifle with sacred things and 
the Lord not give him over to the 
bufferings of Satan until the day of 
redumption ? The Church should know 
if they are unworthy from time to time 
to partake, lest the servants of God 
be forbidden to administer it. There- 
fore our hearts ought to be humble 
and we to repent of our sins and put 
away evil from among us. 

Children to Receive 
The Sacrament 

The practice of administering the 
Sacrament of the Lord's Supper to the 
children of the Sabbath Schools is 
generally observed throughout the en- 
tire Church. The children are entitled 
to the sacrament by reason of the fact 
that they have not reached the years 
of accountability and are not, there- 
fore, under the same divine respon '- 



bility that falls upon them when they 
have attained the eighth year of their 

age. 14 

Many years ago, in the midst of a 
blind and pernicious religious 
ment that condemned unbaptized in- 
fants to endless perdition, the Prophet 
Joseph Smith revealed the truth that 
"Little children are alive in Christ, 
even from the foundation of the 
world," and that if parents will repent 
and be baptized "and humble them- 
selves as a little child, they shall all 
be saved with their little children." In 

harmony with this truth, Sunday 
School officers and teachers have been 
instructed to give t" each enrolled 
child, according to his age and under- 
standing, every privilege "i participa- 
tion in the benefits of the principles and 
ordinances of the Gospel, including the 
partaking of the Sacrament of the 
Lord's Supper, Whether the child was 
born in the Church or not makes no 
difference. He is worthy, through the 
atonement of Jesus Christ, to partake 
sacrament.15 



1 — Joseph F. Smith. JD 15:324, Febru- 
ary v. 

2— Wilford Woodruff, JD 22:169, June 
12, 1881. 

3 — George Albert Smith, CR, p. :{■">. 
April. 190H. 

4 — Brigham Young, JD 19:91-92, Aug- 
ust 19, 1877. 

5 — John Taylor, JD 10:113. February 

6 — Br'igham' Young, JD 2:3. Octobvr 28, 

] 868 
7 — Joseph F. Smith, JD 15:324, Febru- 
ary <•. 1878. 
8 — Joseph F. Smith, JD 19:192, Septem- 

i, 1877. 
9 — Brigham Young, JD 6:277, August 
29, 1862. 
10 — George Albert Smith. CR, p. 37. 

April. 
11 — George Albert Smith, CR, p. 36. 

April. 
12 — John Tavlor. JD 20:360. November 

BO, 1879 
13 — Joseph Smith. Jr.. DHC 2:204, March 

1 . 1 
14 — Joseph Smith. JI 37:432. July. 1902. 
15 — Joseph F. Smith, MS 75:346. May, 
1918. 



// any of you lack wisdom, let him ash of Cod, that fiircth to all men 
liberally, and upbraidcth not. — James 1 :5. 



396 



TE KARERE 



The Origin of the Polynesian Races 



By STUART MEHA 



THIS article which I have written 
up at this time pertains to, first, 
the legend handed down from genera- 
tion to generation, and which said that 
our forefathers (the ancestors of the 
Maori) had come from Hawaiki, and 
beyond, to these shores. 

And, second, on the question, per- 
sistently asked, "What are the views. 
if any, of the Mormon Church regard- 
ing the migration of the Maori?" 

Part I: 

We will begin this thesis by quoting 
in Maori the legend, which is this, I 
haramai taua i Hawaiki, tawhiti nui, 
tawhiti roa, tawhiti pamamao, ite hono 
ki wai rua. Rendered into English, a 
free translation of it would read, You 
and I have come from Hawaiki, which 
was very far away, very remote, an 
exceedingly enormous distance, we had 
come from the joining at the two 
waters. 

Because of its great import this 
historical legend had been faithfully 
conserved, and committed to memory, 
and handed down to the present day. 
Thus it is the common property of all 
Maoris. In pre-Pakeha days, the Maori 
had no written language, but all mat- 
ters pertaining to history, genealogy. 
songs pateres, incantations, rituals. 
were carefully memorised, for a special 
class of men had been chosen and 
trained, and set apart to attend to 
that kind of work. 

T, for one, do support and uphold 
the traditions which our forefathers 
handed down, whereby we came to 
know that the Fleet of Seven Tainni. 

Te Arawa, Matatua, KurahaupO, 
Tokmarn, Aotea and Takitimu — did 
come originally from Hawaiki. I d me 
call your attention to the repetitive 
use of the word tawhiti in the Maori 



traditon. To the Maori, repetition is 
emphasis, that is to say, a Maori on 
occasions in making a speech would 
repeat a word so as to give weight to 
his theme. To me the triple use of the 
word tawhiti was made to convey to 
the mind the immensity of the sea void 
into which our fathers launched their 
double riggers. According to Professor 
K. B. Cumberland, of the Auckland 
University College, the Pacific "is 
more extensive than all the land 
masses together, and occupies about a 
third of the earth's surface !" I hold 
that the repetitive use of the word 
under consideration did and does con- 
vey to the mind the vast expanse of 
the largest body of ocean water on our 
globe. And undaunted and undismayed 
our fathers launched into unknown 
and unchartered seas their frail craft, 
ever urged by some power to a goal 
thousands of miles away. Thus they 
became the greatest seamen of all 
times. 

The Fleet, on its way down the 
mighty seas, called at several islands 
of Polynesia, there to rest and re- 
cuperate, to take on provisions. How 
long it stayed at these places we are 
not given to know. We do know, how- 
ever, that some of the canoes were 
assigned to some of the islands, and 
stayed there indefinitely. It might be 
safely assumed that the period <>i rest 
was <inite protracted, as several of 

these havens were named Hawaiki 

after the original home. Then finally, 
when the time was thought propitious, 
the Fled was called together, and 

sailed with the prOWS ever towards the 

south-west And thus our fathers ar- 
rived at their long looked-for goal, 
Aotearoa the Land of the Long 

White Cloud. 

There is now, however, a new school 
of thought, sponsored by our ablest 



November, 1952 



397 



Maori scholars, and which teaches that 
the Maori in the lung dun past had 
come from Asia, in particular from 
Indonesia. With all due respect ;<■ the 

-tie attainments of the sponsors, 
• differ, and would again stoutly 
re-affirm my allegiance, it' 1 mij 

it that way, to the traditions of OUT 
fathers. 

Let it he clearly understood that I 

do not contradict any claim that in 
the long past there had been incursions 
to these shores from places other than 

Hawaiki. We know that long before 
the arrival of the Fleet, other immi- 
5, principally from Melanesia, had 
arrived here and settled about the Hay 
of Plenty. They, perhaps, from time 
immemorial, had come from Indonesia. 
I will quote Mr. Elsdon Best on this 
matter: It is, perhaps, owing to the 
fact that it (Tuhoe) is principally 
aboriginal that the Tuhoe tribe con- 
tains so many individuals showing 
traces of mixed descent. For instance, 
many show marked Melanesian char- 
acteristics, both in features and in their 
hair. Such persons have coarse fea- 
tures, flat wide noses, and thick lips, 
dark skin, and hair that if allowed to 
grow, is bushy, standing out from the 
head like the hair of a Fijian, very un- 
like the straight or rather slightly 
wavy hair so characteristic of the purer 
Polynesian. How different the other 
type, some of whom are quite light 
coloured of skin, with wavy hair, 
which if long hangs down the back. 
The features are often good, especially 
among the chieftain families, thin lips, 
straight noses, and generally of a 
comely appearance. The urukchu, a 
persistent type with very light skin 
colour, wavy auburn hair and good 
features, is another interesting example 
of mixture or persistency. (Mr. Elsdon 
in Tuhoe, the Children of the 
Folio 14, paragraph 1.) 

Here we have the two types — the one 
from Melanesia, and possibly in the 

dim past, from Indonesia, and the 



other from Hawaiki. If the Maori, as 
claimed by the new thought, had Come 

from Indonesia, or from dark Africa, 
then he would he an out and out 
gentile with no blood of Israel in him. 
We shall endeavour to show that the 

Maori is ,i the House of Israel. IIa\- 
ing now dealt with Hawaiki, and the 
thrice-repeated Tawhiti, we now come 
to tin- last part of the legend — ite lion, 
ki wai ma, the joining at the t\\" 

waters. 

Part II. 

Vs Stated, the question has been 
asked. What are the views, if any, of 
the Mormon Church regarding the 
migration of the Maori ? 

I would point out that the Church 
had always shown deep interest in 
the people of Polynesia, and in lo5<<, 

only three years after the Saints had 
settled in Utah and adjacent States, 
it had established a mission in Hawaii, 
followed with the organization of other 

missions in the Polynesian Islands. 

The Church membership in New Zea- 
land exceeds j I I.I II II I. 

The all-important question now 
arises, "Where is the bono ki wai rua" 
— joining at the two waters? For the 
answer we present to you an account 
taken from the Book of Mormon. 

Alma, Chapter 63, verses 4-8: "And 
it came to pass that in the thirty and 
seventh year of the reign of the judges, 
there was a large Company of men, 
even to the amount of five fr- 
aud four hundred men. with their wives 
and their children, departed out of the 
land of Zarahemla into the land which 
was northward. \nd it came to pass 

that Hagoth, he being an exceedingly 

curious man, therefore, lie went forth 
and built him an exceedingly largi 

ship, on the hoarders of the land 
Bountiful, by the land Desolation, and 
launched it forth into the west .sea. 
by narrow neck which led into the land 
northward. And behold, there were 



398 



TE KARERE 



many of the Nephites who did enter 
therein and did sail forth with much 
provisions, and also many women and 
children, and they took their course 
northward. And thus ended the thirty 
and seventh year. And in the thirty 
and eighth year, this man built other 
ships, and the first ship did also re- 
turn, and many more people did enter 
into it, and they also took much pro- 
visions, and set out again to the land 
northward. And it came to pass that 
they were never heard of more. And 
we suppose that they were drowned 
in the depths of the sea. And it came 
to pass that one other ship also did 
sail forth, and whither she did go we 
know not !" 

Here in these passages is the an- 
swer. We learn here, first, that the 
land of Zarahemla (in South America) 
was joined to the land northward 
(North America) by a narrow neck 
of land (Isthmus of Panama). This 
narrow neck, which joins the two 
Americas, is the hono of the Maori 
traditions. Second, that a man named 
Hagoth built an exceedingly large ship 
at the boundary line between North 
and South America. Third, when the 
ship was completed it was launched 
forth into the west sea (Pacific Ocean) 
bordering the hono or joining. Fourth, 
many of the Nephites men and women 
and children entered the ship, with 
much provisions, and sailed to North 
America. Fifth, Hagoth continued 
building other ships. The first ship 
returned, and more people entered it, 
taking much provisions, after which 
she again set sail for North America. 
Sixth, news came that the ship did 
not reach its destination, and was 
never heard of again. Assumed it had 
foundered, wtih the loss of all on 
board. Seventh, another ship also sailed 
forth, which again was reported 

missing. 

Summing up, two ships are here 
reported missing, and v. 
missing. I hold the ships did nol meet 



with disaster, but were carried away 
by sea currents, and driven before the 
winds out of their proper course, and 
finally found a haven in Hawaiki — the 
Hawaii of today. For if the ships were 
swallowed up in the depths of the sea, 
how was it then that our fathers knew 
of the existence of a certain locality 
which they named the hono ki wai rua 
— or the joining at the two waters — 
very aptly described in the Book of 
Mormon the narrow neck, as it is 
also incorporated into the legend, the 
words ite hono ki Wai rua. The very 
fact of their inclusion is proof positive 
that the two ships did not come to 
grief. And again how did our fathers 
know that this hono was bordered on 
the one side by waters, and on the 
other by the waters of the west sea? 
If the people of the ships of Hagoth 
had met the fate the Nephites sup- 
posed they did there would be no 
record of the two waters. And we 
would like to stress the fact that Ha- 
waiki was on the west side of the 
Americas, the same side that the ships 
of Hagoth were launched. What we 
have said here are the views of the 
Church regarding the migration of our 
forefathers. The Nephite people des- 
cended from Joseph, through Manna- 
sah and Ephraim, and also from Judah 
through Mulek, one of the sons of 
King Zedikiah, and because our fathers 
were of the House of Israel, no wonder 
they were led to this far-off land, for 
the Lord had said to Israel, "And die 
Lord shall scatter thee among all 
people, from the one end of the earth 
even unto the other, and there thou 
shalt serve other gods, which neither 
thou nor thy fathers have known, even 

wood and stone" (Dieut 28:64). And 
again, in the blessings which Jacob 
conferred upon his son |os t >ph. among 
other things, the patriarch said . . . 
and the arms of his hands were made 

bj the hands of the mighty 

God -I I.' »b 

The question might here be 
who had been led here to this 



November, 1952 



399 



OH end of the earth, why it was OUT 
father-, for Aotearoa. Te WaipOU- 
namu. and Rakinra. are the southern- 
most habitable lands of the earth, and 
how was it that OUT fathers were able 
to penetrate the vast sea void of the 
Pacific, and launched forth on their 
double risers, and finally reached 

their destination? Why, it was because 



the God of Jacob had strengthened 
their arms and their hands. They had 
received the blessings of the Almighty 
t<> accomplish what most people might 
say a- the impossible, to paddle their 
canoes to the Land of the Long "White 
Cloud. 

(Next Month the Maori 
Translation.) 



WHAT GOD HATES (Continued from Page 391) 



It is not REVENGE, God asks us 
t- seek. It is FORGIVENESS. It is 

n<«t hard feelings He urges us to 
cultivate, it is understanding and har- 
mony. It is not bitterness, it is kind- 

When we know the Lord hates pride, 
a lying tongue, deliberate planning for 

evil, running to mischief, bearing false 



witness, and stirring up discord, we 
of all people should avoid these things. 

The Lord loves the virtues taught by 
His Beloved Son, and has told lis 
that we must follow Him. Faith, Hope, 
Charity and Love, with an eye single 
to the glory of God, qualify us for the 
work. 



&. 



e-eperaTion 



Two fool mules — say. get this dope — 
Were tied together with a piece of rope. 
Said one to the other, "You come my way. 
While I take a nibble from this new mown hay." 
"I won't," said the other. "You come with me. 
For I, too, have some, you see." 
So they got nowhere, just pawed the dirt. 
And, oh, my goodness, that rope did hurt. 
Then they faced about — these stubborn mules, 
And said, "We're acting like human fools; 
Let's pull together. I'll go your way, 
Then come with me — we'll both eat hay." 
So they ate their hay and they liked it. tool 
And swore to be comrades good and true. 
As the sun went down they were heard to say, 
"Ah. this is the end of a perfect day." 



Anonymous. 



400 



TE KARERE 




THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN 
NEW ZEALAND 

By ELDER GARTH LOW 

what books to order for the new year. 
They tell us where you are falling 
down, how many people you have ac- 
tive in the Gospel and how much mis- 
sionary work you need to do ; if you 
are holding your special meetings and 
gaining the full value of the opportun- 
ities afforded. They tell the heads of 
the Church in Zion all of the above- 
mentioned and to us all they give a 
record that we will be able to check 
on and refer to in the years to come. 
As the Lord tells us, "What is re- 
corded on earth will be recorded in 
Heaven." We shall be judged accord- 
ing to the works we do, and out of the 
records kept this will come. So you see 
the value of and the NECESSITY 
OF RECORDS is truly great. 

The responsibility is first to the Dis- 
trict Sunday School Superintendents 
to see that their Secretaries or the ones 
that you have in charge over records, 
make certain that the Branches are 
sending in their reports. 

It is the duty of the Branch Sunday 
School Secretary to co-operate with 
the District and see that their reports 
come in on time. It is just as easy to 
develop a good habit as it is to develop 
habits that are bad. Why send them 
in late when it is easier to send them 
in on time. Please, Brothers and Sis- 
ters, let's each make it our individual 
responsibility to get these in on time. 

How are your teaching aids coming, 

and are you using them to teaeh the 

most important iiu'^;i!;c of all. the 

Gospel of JesUS Christ.' Do yon love 
tlii' ( rOSpel : [f SO, how much doe- it 

mean t<> j ou i Are j ou \\ illing I 

a little of your time to see that .someone 
(Continued on Page 403) 



^'"/ 



I DON'T know how many of you 
read this article each month, or at 
all, but I hope that it is a fair amount 
of you. Nevertheless, I would like to 
ask you to interest your friends who 
work in the Sunday School to read 
what I put in here. Not that I think 
that what I write is a masterpiece, 
no, not at all, but I think that I can 
help you to better help yourselves. 
After all, why do you think I waste 
my time to write to you, because I 
have too much time? No, that's not 
the reason, but in some small way to 
try and help you to better live the 
Gospel and teach it to others. 

There is one thing that is still 
giving me no little concern, and that 
as you should all know is that the 
quarterly reports are still in poor con- 
dition. They are not coming in on 
time and some never come in at all. 
My Brothers and Sisters, why do yon 
think we need to keep records? 1 will 
try to give you an idea of their im- 
portance: By the use of records we 
are able to tell how far you are ad 
vancing in yonr branch, and where you 
need help. They tell lis how many and 



November, 1952 



Furtherance of Genealogical Interests 

By ELDER ALBERT J. WILEY 



Questions in General: 

OX inquiry to the Genealogical 
Committee of the Mission, Bro. 
Hay handed me some questions that 
various members have asked him and 
his good wife while attending different 
1 1 iii Parihas, and with the help of 
William M. Waddoups (one of the 
members of the Convention Staff and 
Supervisor of the Polynesian Depart- 
ment of the Genealogical Society of 
the Church) 1 will try and answer 

those questions given. 

Question: 

A child is left in this world by Itself 
without mortal parents, it is adopted 
and sealed to its foster parents. Will 
this child have a chance to have its 
real parents in the hereafter? 

Answer: 

The Church has made a ruling that 
foster children must be legally adopted 
to their foster parents before sealings 
are performed. Again, inasmuch as the 
real -parents, and often the foster 
parents, are dead before the sealings 
are to be performed, the sealings are 
for eternity only. When we get into 
eternity we are likely to see our own 
parents, and will want to be sealed to 
them as their children because they 
are our own flesh and blood, and we 
will become members of the family to 
whom we rightly belong by the ties 
of Mood and nature. Too often we 
think only of this world and our re- 
lations here. 

It is my firm opinion that in most 
we will be happy in eternity if 

we are sealed to those parents who 
US birth. There may be some 

extenuating circumstances that make it 
to be sealed to foster parents. 

When there is a situation that we have 

no answer for, the matter should be 




placed before the President of the 
Temple where we desire to do the 
work and let him. whose authority it 
is to make the decision. 

Adopted children should not be 
written on the same sheet as children 
of real birth, [f the real parents arc- 
know n they should be written on the 
sheets as his father and mother. Then 
if adoption is legally made and per- 
mission is given For them to be sealed 
1-i their foster parents, it can be stated 
on the sheet. The foster parents are 
not the real blood parents of adopted 
children, therefore adopted children 
should not be made the heir. The heir 
is horn unto the parents and not made 
through adoption. 

In other words, the heir should be 
the oldest, not the first male child who 
joined the Church during his lifetime. 
If no male child joined the Church 
then the oldest female child who joined 
the Church in her lifetime becomes the 
rightful heir until such time as she has 
a son who becomes a member of the 
( hurch. That is the way the heir of 
the family is chosen. Heirship comes 
as a right of birth. The purpose of 
this heirship is to expediate index 
fding. There is no honour connected 
with this claim in any way, shape or 
form. 



402 



TE KARERE 



Question: 

What if I cannot get the sex of an 
individual for my Genealogy? 

Answer: 

The work cannot be done for an 
individual who has not got a claim on 
sex. If the party who has collected the 
work cannot find out the sex it is 
certain that it cannot be done in Salt 
Lake or any other place that the work 
is sent into. 

Question: 

Will children that die before the age 
of eight years be heirs to the Celestial 
Kingdom ? 



Answer: 

Yes, they will 



Every child. 



Question: 

Can I do work for some friends of 
mine that have past away just after 
they were baptised into the Church? 

Answer: 

I suggest that you get the informa- 
tion needed, place it on a Family 
Group Sheet and send it into the 
Genealogical Society with the request 



that you be permitted to do his temple 
ordinance work, giving the reasons 
why you wish to do it. Do you intend 
to go to a temple and do the work 
personally, or do you want one of the 
temples to have the work done? If the 
latter you need not get permission, just 
send the name in on a regular Family 
Group Sheet. He may be his own heir 
insomuch as no other member of his 
family belongs to the Church. 

I wish to asknowledge my apprecia- 
tion to Bro. Hay for this opportunity 
of writing this article on his behalf. 
Also for the answers to these questions 
given by William M. Walloups. There 
are many blessings in store for us if 
we will just put our shoulder to the 
wheel and delve into this Genealogical 
research a little deeper. The Xew Zea- 
land Mission should produce three 
times as much Genealogy as it does at 
the present time, so you see we are 
charged as members of this Church to 
plant into the hearts of the children 
the promises made to the fathers. 

May we all realize our responsibility 
as members of this great Church to 
push this work along and be blessed 
for our efforts, I pray in Jesus' Name. 
Amen. 



THE SUNDAY SCHOOL IN N.Z. 

else may gain a full testimony and 
knowledge of its glory and eternal 
nature? I hope you can say yes. I will 
give some of my time to help others 
grow by making or helping to prepare 
or obtain teaching aids. 

In the last six months travelling 
with President and Sister Ottley and 
"thcrs we have covered a distance of 
fourteen thousand miles by ear (not 

considering other means of travel), a 

little over a third of the way around 

the earth. This covers a lot of time 

and expense and I hope th.i! it ifl QOl 
in vain. I hope that von are id\ in. ing 
in the Gospel. I am grateful for the 



(Continued from Page 401) 

opportunities that I have in working in 
the Gospel and of gaining a testimony 
while working with you people. 1 hope 
that you are also gaining in some way 
and are more determined to and are 
living the Gospel a little better. 

May ( rod bless you all. 

SACRAMENT GEM 

(November and December) 

• 

"I'is good to meet each Sabbath Pay. 
.hid. in His own appointed way, 
Partake the emblems of His death, 
And faith. 



November, 1952 



403 



Here and There in the Mission 



Nuean Opposition 
Gradually Weakens 

Xiu. i. though strong, 

gradually weakens under the untiring 
efforts of the Elders of [srael in 
preaching the Gospel of Salvation unto 
a people who have been in darkness 

long a time. 

Quite a number of the people there 
have been brought into the Fold and 
are eager t<> learn more about this 
Eternal Plan of Salvation. 

The following is one of the many 
clippings sent to President Ottley, and 
is printed SO that you may he able to 
see the type of articles received by 
him and his reply to them. 

NIUEANS DO NOT WANT 

MORMONS 

A petition signed by 2.0(h) adult 

Niueans has been sent to the New 

Zealand Minister, the lion. Mr. T. 
Clifton Webb, asking that Mormon 
lilders be removed from the Island. 
The Niueans hare been (/really an- 
noyed at the advent of the Mormons, 
largely because they were brought in 
without the islanders knowing of their 
coming. Niue has been a "One Church 
Island" (London Missionary Society) 
for 106 years and although attempts 
hare been made to establish other 
faiths in the past they hare failed. So 
almost the whole adult population has 
made its protest in the only way open 
— a petition to the New Zealand 
Government. 



8th October, 1952. 
Hon. Mr. T. Clifton Webb, 
Minister of Island Territories, 
Wellington, X.Z. 
Dear Mr. Webb, 

Many persons have mailed clip- 
ping to me. of late, the caption be- 
ing "Niueans do not want Mor- 
mons." 



It appears that the alleged petition 
has been addressed to you, though 

one new-- item States that such had 

not been received by you. 

I am not particularly disturbed by 
the article or its allegations, but 
merely interested that the truth 
might he stated to all concerned. 

As to the public press, we do not 

feel any necessity for making any 

reply as it concerns none other than 

yourself and ourselves and the people 
of Niue, who probably would 
read it, anyhow. 

The stated fart of our having 
entered Niue without the knowledge 
of the Niuen people is an extrava- 
gant mis-statement, .since I met Mr. 
Larson, the resident commissioner, 
in Mr. Lewis's office in Auckland 
when I went there to apply for per- 
mit to land. Furthermore, Mr. 
Check, the resident minister 
L.M.S. Church was in Auckland at 
the time and was scheduled to sail on 
the same boat as 1. but later de- 
cided on flight and small boat to pre- 
cede me there, which he did. All 
Niue was aware that we were 
arriving. 

A glance into our labours am. ng 
other island races is all that need 
be suggested as to our purpose for 
entering them (or Niue). W< 

our missionary work without pay 
and obey the laws of the countries 
in which we labour and leave the 
people better than we find them. 

We have asked no favours from 
the Government, except the pr 
tion of the law as we abide the law. 
We accept no Government subsidies 
and ask nothing but the right to 
teach the Gospel of the Mast 
He taught it. We decline to 
tize people until they have 
taught, though many apply for bap- 
tism. Ours is a mission of teaching 



404 



TE KARERE 



and the most intelligent are the first 
to accept and we hope to utilize their 
services to teach the less intelligent 
the laws of righteousness, based on 
the free agency of man to choose his 
way of life and worship, just as 
such is granted him by his Govern- 
ment and his God. 

It might be worthy of your notice 
that the L.M.S., under the direction 
of the Reverend Mr. Check, has 
issued several very vile tracts con- 
cerning us and our people which, 
in court, would go hard with him, 
if prosecution was entered into. We 
have ignored them and our Elders 
have issued several tracts without 
reference to the former ones of his, 
but with the purpose of teaching the 
True Gospel of the Lord, Jesus 
Christ. 

We pledge you and the New Zea- 
land Government, the laws of which 
we duly respect and uphold, that our 
services to these people will be open 
and above board and that the Gov- 
ernment will be proud of the ser- 
vice rendered as it has been that 
rendered the Samoans, the New Zea- 
land Maoris, and all others (native 
and European) with whom we have 
laboured these many years. 

Any problems you feel inclined to 
refer to me I shall be most happy to 
reply to. 

Faithfully yours, 

Mission President. 
P.S. : I shall personally visit Niue 
during November. 



ELDER BASIL DEWITT, who I 
am sure is very well known all over 
the Mission, has been transferred to 
the Xiue Island District. He will stay 
there on the Island and do work 
among the natives until the next ship 
saiK for \'c\v Zealand, which will 
amount to about a month's term in 
Xiue for Elder DeWitt. I am sure tin' 
people will Irani to k>ve him for his 

artistic abilities, which are indeed mar- 
vellous, but they will love him even 




Elder DeWitt 

more so when they get a glimpse of 
the Gospel Plan and are able to par- 
take of the fruits thereof. 

History of the Old Mission Head- 
quarters and Chapel Erected in 
Auckland, Bordering on Queen St. 

President Ezra T. Stevenson con- 
ceived the idea of establishing the Mis- 
sion Headquarters in Auckland and in 
1898 began to look for a suitable loca- 
tion. After spending some time in in- 
specting different localities, the present 
site was selected and a home for the 
Elders was contemplated. In April, 
1899, at a conference held at Uawa, 
Talago Bay, the subject of establish- 
ing Mission Headquarters was pre- 
sented and the Elders were given the 
privilege of supporting the move. The 
Elders present, also Brother Charles 
Hardy of Auckland, donated to the 
cause and in all £63 was subscribed. 
Later some of the Elders travelled in 
Utah, with lime light views of New 
Zealand scenery, lecturing on the 
country and the money obtained, to- 
gether with the donations, was created 
into a fund and placed in one of the 
banks of I 'tali. Little was done from 
then until May of 1907. when Elder 
Ben E. Goddard and Pres. Hardy 

again decided on the present location. 
Vigorous action was soon taken and 

in July negotiations were made by 
which the land was secured at (24 per 

foot. Tenders were then called for 

and contract for the buildings let. 

(Continued on Page 410) 



November, 1952 



405 



Flashes from Canada 



ETE iwi, tena koutou. Tena koutou 
e in 'In i mai ra i tera w henna o te 
[ka o Maui. E lica ma, c aha koa, He 
Tawhiti roa, He Tawhiti nui. Ka we- 
hia matau i a Koutou, tuturu ana nga 
whakaaro nga Karanga mihi me te 
an 'ha o te ngaka ka hold kia koutou. 
Noreira Tena koutou, Ko enei nga 
mihanare o mua, a naianei, ko hoki- 
mai ki tend Tuawhenua e Canada e 
powhiri atu nei kia koutou. 

It is with hearts full of love, 
thoughts filled with longing for the 
[sles of the Pacific, and with a sincere 
desire to uphold the humble and loving 
spirit of Maoriland, which we learned 
to understand and respect, through the 
calling of the Church of Jesus Christ, 

which we as missionaries were happy 
to answer and fulfill in the far-off land 
— that we send greetings to you at this 
time. 

We, the returned missionaries along 
with our families united with folks 
from Xew Zealand who have immi- 
grated to this land of the Maple Leaf, 
have formed a Xew Zcalanders Club. 
The name by which we shall he known 
is Te ArOha Club. We desire to main- 
tain in our Club the spirit of Maori- 
land, "love," the spirit of the Gospel 
and the testimonies we gleaned from 
our missionary experiences, and to 
meet and receive any Xew Xeahmder 
who may happen to travel along our 
way. (Cither as a visitor on holiday or 
as an immigrant and help to keep them 
happy and make them feel at home. 

The President of the Club is Elder 
Wayne B. Leavitt, of Cardston, who 

laboured in the Mahia and Manawatu 



Districts. His wife is the former Ami- 

ria Katen< of Porirua, Sister Mildred 
Hamon is 1st counsellor, who. with her 
husband, Elder Trevor Hamon. of 

Rotorua, tilled a mission in Rarotonga. 
Sister Hamon is Candian born from 
Winnipeg, Manitoba. Elder Oswald 
Watson i.s 2nd counsellor. Elder Wat- 
son laboured as a missionary in the 
Taranaki and Wairarapa Districts. 
Australian born. Elder and Sister 
Watson and family left Australia over 

two years ago to make their home 
here in Canada. The Secretary is 

Elder Norman Sett of Rotorua, quite 
unattached as yet. Elder Sett has 

been in Canada a little over a year and 
lias been very active in Church ;ax\ 
Temple activities. 

The Club is functioning well, meet- 
ings are held each month, joyous hours 
are spent in reuniting with each other 

in sonu. laughter, speeches and Kail! 

We would appreciate letters from 
anyone in Xew Zealand who would 
write to us as a Club, conveying to us 

news < i" the mission and country. 

As this year is coming to a close 
we wish to take this opportunity t<» 
extend to all the mission, on behalf of 
the Club, "Yuletide Greetings." 

May the Lord's blessings be with 
the Saints as they march grandly on 
in the work of the Lord, into a pros- 
perous Xew Year. 

Address letters to: — 

Te Aroha Club. 

Norman Scott. 

I ardston, Alberta, 

( anada. 



Children begin by loving their parents; as they grot 
sometimes they forgive them. 



• aider they judge them ; 
—lb. 



406 



TE KARERE 



Featuring the Districts' News 



MAHIA DISTRICT REPORT 

By Polly Irwin 

The Nuhaka Gold and Green Ball 
proved a highly successful event and 
those who were responsible for spon- 
soring it were heartily congratulated. 
As a floor show the "Caprice" was 
demonstrated by M.I. A. members, this 
being the highlight of the evening. 
During the Ball, Beth Dean, the 
American Ethnie Ballet dancer, per- 
formed two rather unique numbers. 




Following this Ball, Hui Pariha took 
its scheduled course. All auxiliary or- 
ganizations met their respective mis- 
sion board advisors. In the evening 
Primary children participated in their 
programme, at the conclusion of which 
Sister Mason expressed her apprecia- 
tion. The M.I. A. rendered heir appro- 
priate (members) numbers to coincide 
with the "Love Thy Neighbour" theme. 
Elder Low also expressed his sincere 
thanks at this time. 

Sunday morning the firsl general 
session commenced at the usual 10.30, 
prior to which Relief Society and 
Priesthood meetings had been held. 

A special service was held to honour 
the memory and unveiling a stone to 
our ever beloved Sister Kate Christy. 
Hui Pariha concluded in the evening 
alter the third general session. 



Visitors included Tumuaki and Sis- 
ter Ottley, the Hays. Masons. Elders 
Cosgrove, Paget, Lewellyn. Clark, and 
members of the Poverty Bay District. 
Sisters Pare Duncan, Ani Kamau, 
Elder King of Hawkes Bay and Elder 
Low, Sunday School and M.I. A. Ad- 
visor. Last bu not least we had a jeep- 
load of our home lads or Collegiates 
from Hamilton, including Bro. Terry 
Ottley. Elder J. C. Smith thanked one 
and all who attended this wonderful 
Hui. 

The Wairoa Relief Society, a very 
faithful few in number, are endeavour- 
ing to raise funds to meet the demands 
of the grand College that we are to 
have soon. "Bring and Buy" stalls are 
being organized, and the M.I. A., after 
a very successful Ball, are also doing 
their share. 

With deep regret we announce the 
sudden death of Sister Violet Ropata 
of Tahaenui who recently died in 
Wellington. Deepest sympathy is ex- 
tended to her mother, Sister Lizzie 
Smith, of Tahaenui. 

Sister Mona Mohi, who lias been 
living at Waimarama, has returned to 
live at Nuhaka. With her family, she 
was welcomed home by District Presi- 
dent Elder Cash Smith at a cottage 
meeting. 

BAY OF ISLANDS REPORT 
By George Randell 

The Bay of Islands District report- 
ing the activities of the I )istrict 
This month has seen the passing of 

nine «>f the Hui Pekas. The last One to 
he held at kaikohe in the middle of 
October. Very noticeable has been the 
spirit of CO-Operation in the branches. 
It has been a source of joy to the 
Saints to witness the spirit of inspira- 
tion that has attended the meetings. 

The Bay oi [stands Hu P 
at Vwarua on the .'nth and 21 $\ of this 
month, brought visitor! from a- far as 



November, 1952 



407 



Hastings and Nuhaka, also the local 
boys thai arc working at the College. 
All the meetings were fully patronized 

Credit must he given the District 
President, Elder hiendenhall, for the 
Bmooth running of the whole pro- 
gramme, each organization taking part 
rendering their parts an object for the 
future. His co-worker. Elder Burbank. 
was given the hard task of managing 
the canteen. Either the people were 
very hungry, or he was a very good 
salesman, because the hot dogs ran out 
long before the Hui was over. Presi- 
dent Ottley and his good wife gave out 
some very instructive and inspirational 
talks. 

Because of the winter months ihe 
timber mill has been going through a 
period of overhauling, and is now 
ready for the commencement of timber 
cutting. 

Our District President has been in- 
disposed these last few days with a 
slight touch of influenza, but is up and 
around again at the present time. 

Kia ora, kia kaha. 

OTAGO DISTRICT REPORT 
By Miss Noelene J. Thomson 

Hello again from Otago, the land 
where the weather produces strange 
contrasts in the springtime. After 
everyone was well convinced we had 
finished with winter, especially after 
having a week of "mid-summer sun- 
shine," an unannounced snow storm 
suddenly descended upon the plains, 
continuing four to five hours and leav- 
ing a crisp layer on the ground three 
to four inches deep. This storm was 
most unusual as we had not had snow 
this winter. The drop in the tempera- 
ture that late September day was 30 
degrees in five and a half hours. 

Talking of seasons — the close of the 
basketball season in Dunedin found 
the team representing the Church on 
top of their grade; supplementing this. 
good newspaper publicity helped 
greatly the goodwill feeling towards 
the L.D.S. Church. 



Creating fresh interest in (ienealogy 
was the result of the Sunday evening 
services held by that Society on Sep- 
tember 7th in Christchurch and Dune- 
din. Although there is not a Genea- 
logical committee in Christchurch 
functioning as such, the programme 
was presented as outlined. A most un- 
expected and welcome visitor to the 
Branch that evening was Sister Rangi 
Davies whose words and mere pres- 
ence greatly added to the spirit of the 
meeting. 

Very welcome newcomers into the 
ranks of little Timaru Branch are Sis. 
Wate Chase, apprentice nurse in Tim- 
aru Hospital, also Bro. and Sis. Jack 
Scott who were recently baptized. 

In closing we leave with you our 
monthly gem of thought : 

"Small minds talk about people. 

Medium minds talk about events, 

.liul great minds talk about ideas. 

II 'hi eh are you/" 

STATISTICS 

Baptisms : Mr. and Mrs Jack R. 
Scott, Timaru ; John Richard Perri- 
ton. Timaru; Percy Smith, Dunedin; 
Earnest Smith, Dunedin ; Wyne Smith, 
Dunedin ; Yvonne Smith, Dunedin ; 
Sister Whitson, Dunedin. 

Blessings: Graeme Pcrriton, Tim- 
aru : Alan Perriton, Timaru ; John 
Perriton, Timaru ; Wilma Ruth Cos- 
grove, Timaru. 

WAIRARAPA DISTRICT 

REPORT 

By Rawinia Haeata 

Greeting to all! To the Missionaries 
who have laboured in this District we 
say, Kia Ora Koutou ! 

September ! Ah, that breathes of 
Spring, the fragrant perfume of warm 
scented flowers and blossoms. The 
gentle bleating of new born lambs. 
In visiting the branches throughout 
the district, nature has indeed been 
kind in making their journeys en- 
joyable. 



408 



TE KARERE 



Brothers John Aspinall and Eddie 
Paki are doing great work in organ- 
izing Sunday Schools. With the help 
of Elders Robert Fox and Charles 
Rice we have one organized in Glad- 
stone and one in Homewood. 

On September 6th a few members 
attended the Hawkes Bay M.I.A. 
Festival. What a beautiful gathering it 
was, meeting with the many Hunga 
Tapus, enjoying good clean sport and 
entertainment. Especially were we 
proud to have our District represented 
in the items given by the M.A.C. 
College by Bro. Glen Matenga of Piri- 
noa. Kia ora, Glen! 

Every second Sunday the District 
Board meet together for their monthly 
meetings. We are always grateful to 
have our District President, Elder 
James H. King give us counsel and 
advice. 

Te Harihana Branch is busy raising 
funds for their building project by 
holding concerts. "Good luck," Te 
Harihana. 

Gladstone Primary is a real credit 
to the District; they are 100 per cent 
in reporting and it is a pleasure to 
attend their meetings. Congratulations, 
Gladstone. It is good to hear from 
Kohuau Branch once more, and it 
won't be long now when we'll have 
more news to report. Kia kaha, Ko- 
hunui. 

Hiona Branch is still holding its 
own in having all the organizations 
function. Good on you, Hiona, keep it 
up. Credit is given to all members who 
are active in their callings. God bless 
you all: 

BAY OF PLENTY DISTRICT 
REPORT 

Too many excuses, non-attendance 
at Leadership Meetings plus bad 
weather marred an otherwise pleasant 
Hui Pariha in Wairoa, Tauranga. Bal- 
ancing the scales, however, were a 
children's class demonstration in Sun- 
day School conducted by Edna Onnsby 
and her speech on Chastity : also a well 



planned Priesthood meeting and an 
inspirational evening service. 

Relief Society members, did you go 
home and read your Books of Mor- 
mons? One straight "right" from Sis. 
Ottley and I made a bee-line for mine. 
Let's show we can take it ! Let's 
STUDY our lessons ! Let's have a 
little more SPIRITUALITY! Now 
here's where I soothe those ruffled 
feelings. 

This District may well feel proud 
of its efforts in physical and financial 
backing of the College Project. On 
September 20th a large band of work- 
ers, mainly from Tauranga, travelled 
to Hamilton to plant and sow. They 
took their own plants and seeds, food 
and cooks ! In the evening they held 
a concert in town, all proceeds going 
into the College Fund. Hurrah for 
Bay of Plenty! 

I'm sure Elder Vernon Lowry, our 
ex-D.P., will be thrilled to hear how 
well you worked. As you journey home 
on the high seas, Elder Lowry, take 
with you the love of all members of 
this District ; take with you our appre- 
ciation for all your fine efforts on our 
behalf and our regard for your great 
leadership. May God bless you ! 

Statistics — Births : A baby son was 
born to Kenya and Bartlett Watene 
at Rotorua on Monday, September 20, 
1952. (The Rotorua Branch is growing 
slowly but surely.) 

MANAWATU DISTRICT 
REPORT 

By Elder Robert F. Baker 

Kia ora nga Hunga Tapu. Greet- 
ings to you, my friends. This month of 
October will be a highlight for this, 
the Manawatn District. First, our 
newly -formed conference will hold its 
first Hui Pariha at Dannevirke, Ta- 
maki Pa, October 4 and 5; second, 
the District officers chosen in Septem- 
ber will be sustained by you at the 

Hui; third, this month will mark the 

beginning of the monthly publication 
of the Liahona— Manawatu Director, 



November, 1952 



409 



The new District's Presidency 
follows: District President, Elder 
Allan 1'.. Shaw, Levin; 1st counsellor, 
\\ i Duncan, Tamaki; 2nd counsellor, 
Elder Monte Scoville, Palmerston 

North : District recorder. Elder John 
Carrol. Levin: V. M.M.I. V. Dick 
Marsh San, Tamaki ; V.W.M.I.A.. Te 
Puia Paewai, Tamaki; Primary, Sarah 
Moko. Tamaki. 

On the 4h day of September, 1952, 

a fine young couple pulled up their 
stakes and headed north. Bro. and Sis. 
Piper have moved up to Hamilton 
where they will reside until they re- 
ceive their quota numbers to permit 
them to enter into the U.S.A. Palm- 
erston North Branch greatly appreci- 
ated the active part they took in 
furthering the work of the Lord during 
their sojourn here. The people join 
together in wishing them the 1 
to whatever they do and wherever they 
may go. 

It seems as though the Lord knows 
where He needs His children and as 
to where He can best use their talents. 



Bro. Peter Cropp has been very help- 
ful in the Palmerston Branch since his 

arrival from Hamilton. ( )ne has been 
taken and another has replaced 
position that the work of the Lord 
Can carry forth. Peter is now the 
Sunday School Superintendent and 2nd 

counsellor in the Branch Presidency in 
Palmerston North. 

Baptisms: An impressive baptismal 
ceremony conducted on the north bank 

of the Manawatu River Sunday. Sep- 
tember 14. brought another soul into 
the Kingdom of God. Brother Allan 

Steele, who has heen attending OUT 
services in Palmerston for some time, 
was lead down into the moving waters 

by Elder Robert Baker and there re- 
ceived a new birth. The small group 

in attendance enjoyed the sweet spirit 

accompanying the occasion. The beau- 
tiful Sabbath day and the humble con- 
ditions attending the sacred will, no 
doubt, add up to make it a memorable 

event in the life of this new memher. 
Let us all join in extending to him a 
warm welcome into the Fold. 



HERE & THERE IN THE MISSION (Continued from Page 405) 



Building operations were begun Sept. 
14. and by Jan. 8. 1909. the place was 
ready for occupancy. 




Pres. Stevenson 

And now. after 43 years of glorious 
service, during which time these build- 
ings, which had been erected and dedi- 



cated to the Lord, truly have served 
their purpose well, are now to be re- 
placed by a more commodious and 
beautiful chapel, erected to fit the needs 
of a rapidly growing Church popula- 
tion in Auckland. 

The last brick was placed on the 

new Chapel's tower about the middle 
of September. And now is the hour 
when we must say goodbye to the old 
Auckland Chapel which has served as 
a House of the Lord and later, during 
the construct ion of the new Chapel, as 
a storage place for equipment. The 
dismantling process started Monday. 
October 6th. 1952, and by the time 
that you receive this month's "T.K." 
the operation will have been completed. 
It is to be removed to make room 
for the landscaping of lawn and shrub- 
bery, which will beautify the grounds 
in front of the new ( 



410 



TE KARERE 



N6A POU-TOKOMANAWA 
ROTO 1 TE HITORi TE HAHI 

(Essentials 
in Church History) 

WAHANGA TUATORU 

Translated by George R. Hall 











TE WHAKATURANGA O TE "TUMUAKITANGA TUATAHI" 
O TE HAHI; NGA "WHAKAKITENGA WHAITIKINGA" 



Kua Timata Te Hanga i Te 
"Temepara o Katirana" 

KOTE tahi tenei o nga ra o Hune 
1833, kua kaha te korikori o nga 
mahi whakatikatika, kia timatatia te 
hanga i te "Temepara o Katirana" 
Kua tu te Komiti whakahaere i nga 
tikanga, a na tenei komiti i tuku nga 
panui ki nga peka katoa o te Hahi. 

I te tahi o nga ra o Hune, ka puta 
mai te kupu a te Ariki ki te poropiti ; 
ara ki te Hunga Tapu, kia kakama ki 
te whakaara i te whare nei, kua wha- 
kaaturia nei hoki, he whare tenei i 
konohi nuitia i roto i te manawanui. 
E ai ta te Ariki, "To koutou hara ki 
au kaore i te iti mai nei ; kaore i nga- 
kaunuitia e koutou aku whakahau i 
hoatu nei e ahau kia koutou, me nga 
kupu tohutohu mo te hanga i toku 
whare. Kua takoto te tikanga, he 
whare tenei hei huinga mai mo aku 
Apotoro i te wa e tohia ai ratou mo 
te mahi kokoti, e kotikoti ai ratou i 
Mga peka he o taku maara waiua, he 
kokoti wliakaniutun.ua i enei ra ; ki;i 
alu-i ai ah.au ki te whakatutuki i taku 
i pirangi ai, kia ringihia e ahau toku 
Wairua ki runga i nga kikokiko ka- 
toa."— Ac ra lie polio taku v nua atu 
m i ki a koutou, ka hoatu e ahau kia 



koutou tenei ture whakahau, ki a wha- 
kaara koutou i tetahi whare, e ahei ai 
ahau te whakawhiwhi i aku i whiri- 
whiri ai, ki te Mana i heke iho i 
Runga. No te mea he kupu taunaha 
tenei na te Matua kia koutou, e wha- 
kahau atu nei ahau ki a koutou, kia 
tatari koutou, pera ano i aku Apotoro, 
i te wa i whanga ai ratou i Hiru- 
harama." 



Xa te tiro hanga iho ki end kupu 
i mohiotia ai, tera ano e tahi whaka- 
whiwhinga, me etahi manaakitanga e 
hoatu ana ki nga kaumatua i mua i to 
ratou whakatikanga ki te nuku o te 
whenua, ki te kauwhau i te Rongopai 
ki te ao katoa. Ko roto anake i te 
temepara o te Ariki te homaitan.ua o 
enei whakawhiwhinga me enei tapae- 
nga. Xo reira ka whakahau te Ariki 
kia tere te timata onga mahi. He take 
nui rawa tenei, te kauwhau i te Rongo 
I'ai, he ruarua noa nua kai mahi. Ma 
enei whakahau ka piko nua tnahara 

o te Hunga Tapu. ki tC \\ liakatutuki 

i te whakahau o te Reo Ataa; i nuaki 

ai ratOU i roto i nua r.trurani niaha 
o 11 'I' i i tc 1 lain, me o walio ano hoki 
o te I Iain, i tUtea ai ratou <.• nua tau- 
tetanga maha i a ratou e nana ana Id 
te hanga i tc whare to ratou Ariki. 



November, 1952 



Te Mahi Tuatahi Ka Timata 

I te rima o Hune ka korikori te 
tutan.ua tuatahi tc taenia uiai te wa- 
Iccna kuhatu a licri Arapcta Mete, ko 
Hairama Mete me Reinara Kahunu, e 
rua raua he nieina no te komiti, pa 
raua 1 tiiuata te keri te kaiuaka, a 
DO iuiiri iuai ka tahuri raua ki te mahi 
kia oti ta raua i tiiuata ai. I uru uiai 
etahi atu i n^oki ai tc mahi, i ara 
hacre ai ki tona tutukitauga. 

Te Raruraru o Takuta Hurapeta 

(Dr. Hurlburt) 

I te toru o nga ra o Hune ka hua- 
ranga te take whakapae mo W hi rata 
Hurapeta (Philastus Hurlburt). Ko te 
whakapae i hara ia, i a ia i tona mi- 
hona i te rawhiti. I uiuia te take nei 
taugohia aua tana raihaua. I te 21 o 
nga ra ka tuku uiai a Whirata i tana 
piira, he koihe ara he whaki uaana i 
tana hara ; murua ana tana hara, tukua 
ana kia hoki ano ki tana turanga i 
roto i te hahi, ano hoki te hua kei te 
kaha rawa tana ripeneta. E rua nga 
ra i muri iho o tenei koihetanga i tana 
hara, ka huaranga ano te take whaka- 
pae nei ka rangona tana korero "kua 
hiangatia e ia te Atua o Hohepa 
Mete," a kaore noa ia i ripeneta no 
tenei, tapahia atu ana ia ki waho o te 
Hahi. I muri mai ka tupu i roto i a 
Whirita tetahi wairua hae, kino kia 
Hohepa, a i runga i ana korero totoa, 
pirangi ki te patu, herea ana ia e te 
ture ki te moni punga e rua rau tara, 
kia kaua ia, ara a Whirita e nanakia 
ki a Hohepa Mete. 

Kaore he take rahi rawa i runga i 
te whakahua i te ingoa o Whirita. No 

tana putan(/a ki waho te hahi i hua 
akc ai he korero. Ko ia te tuawhitu 
onga tamariki a ona maatua no reira 
ka huaima he takuta; e hara ke ia i te 
takuta. lie memo ia no te Hahi Weie- 
riona, otira i te maha o ana hara. peia 
ana ia ki z^aho o taua Hahi Xaana iu/a 
korero whakokinokino mo te Pukapuka 
a Moromona Tirohia i noa tuhituhinga 
onga wharangi a Horomona Poringi 
( Solomon Spaulding). 



UPOKO 19 

TE PANANGA, I PE1A AI KI 

WAHO O TIAKIHANA KAUTI, 

1833. 

Te Reo Whakaohiti 
o Te Poropiti 

Kua kitea e te Poropiti, kua tae 

mai ki a ia te rakikino tc niarangai, 
ka tata tc hinga hei tupuhi ki runga 
tonu i te kohamo o nga Hunga Tapu 
o roto i nga rohe o Mihiuri. I a Ilanu- 
ere 1833, ka tuhi ia ki a Wircmu W. 
Wherepe, and nga korero i tuhia atu 
e ia. "Kua takotO tc tikauga, kia 
kaupapa he wahi hei whakapuakanga i 
te kupu a te Ariki i roto itc pono i te 
tika, i enei ra whakamutunga. Ki tc 
kore a Hiona e tahuri ki tc whakatika- 
tika i a ia ano, kia tu tika ia i te aro- 
aro o tc Atua, ka kowhiti te Atua i 
tetahi iwi ano hei iwi M<»na. notemea 
c kore e haukotia mai nga mahi a te 
Atua, kia tae ra ano ki tc tutukitauga 
o te whakarapopotanga ia Iharaira, a 
ko te hunga kaore i ngohcngohe ki te 
reo o te Atua me mohio ka pa mamae 
kia ratou Tona Riri. — Kei te kopuhuri 
o matOU manawa mo te Wairua kino 
e hau mai nei nga rongo, no roto i 
to reta, i roto ano hoki i te reta a to 
tatou tuakana taina a Kiriripata ; te 
wairua c whakaparara nei i te Kaha o 
Hiona kia moumou, ano he mate 
uruta ; a ki te kore e kitea, e aia atu 
hoki i a koutou, tena e tau hei whaka- 
maoa i a Hiona e taka atu ai ki roto 
i nga whakaritenga Whakawa a Te 
Atua. Xaku tenei, na to koutou taina 
e wiwiri nei. mo Hiona tc take; e tata 
nei te taka iho, te riri o te Rangi, ki 
te kore a Hiona e ripeneta. I hangai 
ano ki enei korero nga kupu i tuhia 
mai i taua ra ano, a te hui a nga 
tohunga nui i tu ki Katirana, ki o 
ratou teina-tuakana i Hiona, apiti mai 
hoki te mihi a enei "Kua kore i roto 
i a matou te hau koa mo Hiona. Ko 
te tangi kau ake o te mapu i te aroha." 
"Kei te maiangi tonu iho ta te Atua 
Whakarite-Whakawa, ka tau iho ki 
runga o Hiona ki te kore ia e 
ripeneta." 



412 



TE KARERE 



Ka Hapai Ta Te Hoa Riri 

He timatanga no te noho o nga 
mema o te Hahi i roto o Tiakihana 
Kauti, he timatanga hoki no te wha- 
kakite mai o te apitihana i tona kanohi. 
Na nga minita i timata, i whakangau 
nga iwi noho i roto i o ratou rohe ki 
a tahuri ki te whakatupu kino, ki te 
purarau i nga hunga tapu, i to ratou 
ito. He maha rawa te hunga o te taone 
i ara ki te tukino, a nawai ra ka maha 
nga korero teka, me nga whakaraki- 
kino ka kore haere te manawanui o te 
Hunga Tapu, ko to ratou hekenga i 
whakarerea ai e ratou tenei Teite ara 
a Tiakihana Kauti. Na te minita Whi- 
nihi Uingi (Finis Ewing) i toha te 
panui ; "Ko nga Momona te Ito o nga 
whakatupuranga tangata." Na te mini- 
ta Pikiri (Rev. Pixley) i ru haere nga 
korero tekateka i roto i nga pukapuka 
panui a nga Hahi o te Rawhiti, i toha- 
toha ano hoki ia i te kahanga o ana 
kupu whanoke, ki waenganui o nga 
hapu Iniana me nga iwi o te kiri ma, 
kia tahuri ratou ki te patu i te Hahi, 
ki te whakaete kia kore atu i roto o 
Tiakihana Kauti. Te nuinga o nga 
Hunga Tapu no roto i nga Teita o te 
Rawhiti, ko nga Mihiuri no te Taha 
raro, no te Tawahanui South. Ko te 
wehi o nga Mihiuri, kei tere te tupu 

nga Hunga Tapu, a kariro i a ratou 
te mana pooti o roto i te ture. Te tino 
take ko te mahi whakatau rekareka 
tangata kei te kaha rawa i roto i enei 
rohc- i tenei \va, a ko te hiahia o nga 
Mihiuri Kia kaua e kore atu te whaka- 
taurekareka tangata i waenganui i a 
ratou. I runga o enei take- katoa ko to 
ratou tino puahae ki nga Moromona, i 
to ratou kaha ki te ahu whenua, i to 
ratou kaha ano hoki i<i to ratou wha- 
kapono. 

I te \\ hana - te tan 1832 | Spring ) 

ka timata te takakino o te hoa riri. 

1 nga haora o te po ka wawahingia 

nga wini o nga whare o te llnnga 

Tapu, me etahi atu mahi kino e taea 
ana te mahi i te wa e pouri ana. I fe 
timata I autanga tenei no nga tukino 

i te I Inii'.'.i Tapu 



Te Kaunihera o Te Ropu Hoa Riri 

la Hurae 20, 1833, ka hui he kauni- 
hera o nga Mihuriana e kino mauahara 
ana ki nga hunga tapu, ki te whare 
kooti o Itipeha ; i te wha ki te rima 
rau te maha o te hunga i tae mai ki 
taua hui. I whiriwhiria ko Riki Himi- 
hona hei Tiamana ; ko Hamuera Ruka 
raua ko J. H. Paraoanoi. hei hekere- 
tari. Ko te take i kokiritia hei runa- 
nga ma ratou ko te pana i nga mema 
o te Hahi kia kore atu i roto o Tiaki- 
hana Kauti, i runga i te rangimarie, ki 
te kore e taea e te huarahi ngawari. 
kati me whawha i te huarahi maro. 
Ka roa rawa te hunga nei e wananga 
ana i ta ratou take, ka penei te tatuu- 
tanga — "I te mea kaore e mohiotia te 
awhina mai a te ture, ki te whakaete 
atu i te kino e tau nei i waenganui i 
a tatou, he kino enei kaore i kitea atu 
e wai ma, no reira i kore ai e mohiotia 
he wahi mo enei ahua take i roto i 
nga wharangi o te ture. Kaore he 
rawenga o te whanga kia paahitia lie 
ture, no te mea ki te tatari, ka tupu 
haere tenei take, a ka nana te mahi 
kia kore atu. No reira, i runga i tenei 
alma, ma o ratou ringaringa ake e 
whawha, e pana atu e whia rau tangata 
i roto i o ratou kainga." 

Ko etahi o nga kino o nga Momona 
i korerotia, Ko a rtaou whakamana- 
mana kua taea lie merekara e ratou. 
kua riro mai te mana whakaora i nga 
turoro. Kua tau iho nga tohu Atua : 
kua korero ngatalii ratou lie kanohi. 
he kanohi, ki te Atua, ki nga anahera 
ano hoki. Kua riro mai. a kei te wha- 
kamahia e ratou nga homaitan.ua Atua. 
me nga wewetenga arero ki nga reo 
ke. 1 [e wahahuka a ratou korei 
riro noa mai te whenua i runga i te 
kore utu, me to ratou kaha ano ki te 
hoatU moni i a ratou e hoko whenua 
ana. ia ratou e ki ana, lia te Ariki i 
whakahau ; e mohiotia nei e te katoa, 
he mea hoko na ratou ki te moni nga 
whenua katoa kei roto i o ratou ringa- 
i man ana. Katoa enei hara 
ng i Momona e tika ara kia 
whiua, notemea he hara enei e tahuri 
mai ana ki te turaki i nga tikai 



November, 1952 



413 



tiaki nei i te tangata, e riaki nei i nga 
nohoanga pai, i nga whakaaro tika o 
te katoa. No reira he whakahau tenei, 
me pei mona. No reira, ka 

tuhia nga tikanga i te kupu apiti c man 
ak< nei. 

Te Kupu Whakaari a Te 
Ropu Hoa Riri 

Te kupu Apiti < 1 ) Kaore he Mo- 
mona e tukua kia heke mai ki roto i 
nga rohe <> tenei Kauti. (2) Ko te 
hunga kei konei e noho ana i naianei, 
ka hoatu kia ratou tetahi wa 
ana hei whakamene i a ratou taputapu, 
hoko ranei i o ratou whenua, kia wha- 
kamawehe atu ratou i konei. (3) Mi 
kati te tari perehi o te "Ta" (Star). 
(4) Kia tahuri nga kaumatua o te 



liahi, ki te atiati kia mutu te haere 
mai a o ratou, i tetahi wahi atu ki 
konei. (5) A ko te hunga kaore e ngo- 
hengohe i tenei panui, me tuku atu 
ratou ki te hunga matakite, ki te hunga 
o nga reo ke kia mohio ai era. ki te 
whin e whanga atu nei mo te hunga 
ka taringahoi. 

I panuitia enei tikanga, whakaaetia 
ana r to ratou komiti, whiriwhiria ana 
nga tangata tekaumarua hei haere kia 

tutaki ki nga kaumatua tuiuuakitani«a 
te Main. I hoatU ki nga kaumatua 
tenei panui me te ki atu aim, "kia tutu- 
ki tenei ture i a koutOU, kua rite 
matou whakaaro mo te hunga e tari- 
ngahoi ana ki tenei ture kua oti nei i 
a matou mo koutou. 



EVIDENCE & RECONCILIATIONS (Continued from Page 386) 



igdom. Indeed, he is then, even 
irth, in the celestial kingdom of 
God. 

Naturally, those who enter the C( les- 
tial kingdom are of various attain- 
ments. There is not absolute uniform- 
ity anywhere among the children of 
["heir innate capacities and their 
use of the law of free agency make 
them different, often widely so. There- 
fore, the members of the highesl king- 
dom an- also grouped, according to the 
Prophet Joseph Smith, into three 

To enter the highest of these de- 
in the celestial kingdom is to be 
I in the kingdom of God. Such 
exaltation comes to those who receive 
the higher ordinances of the Church, 
such as the temple endowment, and 
afterwards are sealed in marria 
time and eternity, whether on earth or 
in the hereafter. Those who are BO 
ontinue the family relationship 
lly. Spiritual children are be- 
by them. They carry on the 
work of salvation for the hosts of 
spirits. They who arc so 



exalted become even as the gods. They 
will be "from everlasting to everlast- 
ing, because they continue. "9 

To find entrance to the celestial 
kingdom, and be exalted therein, form 
the great hope of every true Latter-day 
Saint. 

The fate of the sons of perdition 
is not known. There will he few of 
them, for few know so much as to fall 
SO low. The suggestion has heen made. 
by Brigham Young and others, that 

they will lose all that they have gained 
in the long journey, from the dim be- 
ginning. They must start over again. 
But their fate is scaled from us. In 
this matter we must accept God's own 
declaration: "Eternal punishment is 
God's punishment. Endless punishment 
is Gbd's punishment. "10 

1 — History of the Church. 1 

Doctrine & Covenants. 76:111. 
8 Sec 1 Corinthians, 15:40-41. 

trine & Covenants, 76:89. 
5 [bid., 76 :8l 
6 — Discourse! <»f I'.ritfham Youn»r. 1 B I 1 

Ed., p. :'- s l. Bee also Teachings of thi- 

Proph.t .!(»-« ph Smith. 
7 — Disi-.i irsei of I'.ritfham Younff, 

Doctrine & Covenants, 131 :1. 
9 — ibid.. 132:20. 
10— Ibid.. 19:11-12. 



TE KARERE 



"About Friends" 



Those who would make friends must cultivate the 
qualities which are admired and which attract. If you 
are mean, stingy, and selfish, nobody will admire you. 
You must cultivate generosity and large-heartedness ; 
you must he magnanimous and tolerant; you must have 
positive qualities; for a negative, shrinking, apologizing, 
roundabout man is despised. You must cultivate courage 
and boldness; for a coward has few friends. You must 
believe in yourself ; if you do not, others will not believe 
in you. You must look upward, and he hopeful, cheery, 
and optimistic. 

If you are selfish, and think of nothing hut your 
own advancement; if you are wondering how you can 
use everybody to help you along; if you look upon every 
man or woman you are introduced to as so much more 
possible success capital; if you measure people by the 
amount of business they can send you, they will look 
upon you in the same way. 

If you have friends, don't he afraid to express your 
friendship; don't he afraid to tell them that you admire 
or love them. If you love anybody, why not say sn? 
If you enjoy anyone's company, why not say so? It 
costs you nothing; it may mean everything to your 
friend, and to your friendship. 

— (). S. MARDEN. 



Wait Not 



Wait not till tomorrow, for time is not ours. 
Today is appointed to (/other life's flowers, 
Wait not till tomorrow, its dawn may ne'er come, 
Today is the time to bring joy to the home. 

I! oil not till tomorrow to comfort a friend. 
Today is the day your kindness to lend; 
Wait not till tomorrow your goods ivords to 
Tomorrow may fail you, your e ha nee is today. 

Wait not till tomorrow to offer your prayer. 
Heaven's not too encumbered to list to your prayer. 
Wait not till tomorrow all wrongs to amend. 
For death may overtake you. who knoweth the end.' 



—Sarah E. Mitten. 



THE MESSEXftER 



m^'^'^mp 




■■^^■^^MBBHi 



Smother :: 1352 






MONTHLY MAGAZ 

DAY SAIN N IN NEW ZEALAr 



$ ft ft ft ft ft 'A' ft '6' A" ft 'ft' ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft # 

:«: 

:« 
m 
:<s: 
:« 
:<2: 
:<s 
:<s: 
:<s; 
:« 



M 

:<s; 

»; 
»i 
si 

Ml 



:<© 

$: 
:<s: 



is 



^mall ^lu-plici^ 



(Christmas is (Homing 

. KlSSHI.I. 

>s (iii, I stir the ea 
mas time is comimj ; 

he x'oiiiiystcrs />i 
. hnl mother's work is hitminiiu/. 

Ill with streamer thiiujs 
. Iial presents in the inaknui. 
all the air is tint/tint/ with 
spicy lliiin/s a-hal 

anil happii 



'fii ® m 8 $>. $ $ # 5>; ® & & p. & « &s ® 5?; si $ ?>. <>; » .« » 



ate Kwtm 



(ESTABLISHED 1907) 



Volume 46 Number 12 December, 1952 



Sidney J. Ottley Tumuaki Mihana 

Joseph Hay . . - Kaunihera Tuatahi 

George R. Biesinger Kaunihera Tuarua 

James A. Larsen . . . . . . Hekeretari o te Mihana 

Albert J. Wiley Mission Recorder 

David T. Briggs Etita 

George R. Hall (Hori Hooro) . . Kaiwhakamaori 



ft" 



Address Correspondence: 
514 REMUERA ROAD, AUCKLAND, S.E.2 



"TE KARERE" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of 

Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING 

WORKS, LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand. 

Subscription Rates: 6/- per 6 months; 10/- per year; S.I for 5 years. Overseas: 11/- 
per year; £2/5/- for 5 years. (U.S. Currency: $1.50 per year; $6.00 for 5 years.) 

(Printed for transmission in New Zealand as a registered newspaper.) 



Contents 



Editorial: 

From the- Editor's Pen 4 22 

Special Features: 

Who Are the Children of Abraham? 128 

Te Puea Herangi 126 

Choose You 

Construction on the Auckland Chapel Nears Completion. . . . 480 

Hui Tau i Hiona 488 

How Can I Get Along Better Willi My Brothers and Si 

Our Glorious Message 

What Is Your Future? 

The Importance of Missionary Work 448 

Te Kirihimete 1952 457 

Church Features: 

The I Page (20 

r_> 1 

'l'li' ■ ol in New Zealand 

L.D ■ ak 

World Wide <'i> irch and Its Progrea 1 

Our Genealogy Workers . 
Here and There in the Mission: 

Here - id 1 hi 1 e In 1 h ■ Mission 

Ft at urhii the Districts' News 

Tckihana Maori: 

Nga Pou-Tokomanawa Roto I Te Hitorl Te Hahi 



*s 



'^*^^>^>^*^>^^^^>^>^y^^^^9>^>^) 



Zfoe pAXtident's Page. | 

By SIDNEY J. OTTLEY 

HE KUPU AROHA 




A HOLY DAY OR A HOLIDAY? 

l|tj|l!K.\ Christ was born in Bethle- 
*** hem the shepherds were so in- 
trigued with the impression and wond- 
erment <>f the event that they forsook 
their flocks and set out to find the 
Christ Child and worship Him. The 
wist- men and merchants exhibited 
enough interest in this prophesied ful- 
fillment that they were ready to, and 
did in sacrifice their all to 

make long treks to the place indicated 
by the Star and lay rich gifts at the 
net f Him whom they honestly be- 
lieved to be the Great King who should 
come and redeem a struggling people 
from unbearable oppression 

Then there were those who wond- 
ered and those who said it was all a 
fake and prep: janda < f n ' 

zealots and cranks. 

Years have come and gone, pes, cen- 
turies, and men have still carried gifts 
to the feet of the Babe of Bethlehem 
and have lived and died by the soul 
redeeming Truths which He taught. 
And then there have been the millions 
who have wondered what it was all 
about and in that wonderment and con- 
fusion have lived and died without 
having fulfilled the measure of man's 
second estate. In truth, little better 
than had they not been born. 

And then that third and ever present 
group of the millions who discredit 

everything that doe:, not have worldly 

420 



and carnal appeal, which fails to satisfy 
the lower senses and restricts (as thej 
say) the free pursuit of the pleasures 

of the world. 

Very near is the seasi n which marks 
the anniversary of that most beautiful 
and Holy Birth. That day when men's 
activities will range from .he most de- 
vout observance of that most Sacred 
Day to the most degrading levels of 
the world's carnal indulgencies. While 
some will rehearse the advent of die 
I Man. by which men may return to the 
Author of their creation, some will 
delve more deeply into the inconsist- 
encies and indecencies of carnal sin 
and give no thought to the importance 
of the actual purpose of the day. other 
than that it affords one more day of 
respite from daily toil and one more 
opportunity to indulge in die gratifica- 
tion of their lustful desires. 

And then — the great majority who 
just don't know or just don't care. 
Christianity, so called, lias thrown up 
such a barrier of confusion thai 
many millions have lost interest be- 
yond the fact that their forefathers 
worshipped in a certain way and there- 
by concede that such is good enough, 
so why bother to search further. 

Our Creator has made provision for 

those who devoutly serve and for those 
who defile the earth by their acts of 
Inst and lasciviousness. But what al>< ut 
the wondering and indifferent millions? 
(Continued on Page 432) 

TE KARERE 






C?^Q^o(^^Q^6^Q=^^^Cb^6 : ^Q^o6^^Q^(j^Q^o6^Q=^6^Q=^ 



Wofa&tS C&i*t€b 



By SISTER ALICE W. OTTLEY 






•^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^s^ 3 ^^ 



1 -^ 



♦ */|T HRIS ™ AS '" a time of rejoic- 
Vlt' ing, thankfulness and good will 
toward men. The spirit of rejoicing- 
spreads from one soul to another, be- 
cause of the thankfulness in our hearts 
for the birth of our Saviour and what 
He did for us and causes us to love 
one another more and have good will 
toward all men. Even our enemies, if 
we have any ill-feelings we brush them 
aside, forgive and forget so all may- 
enjoy the Christmas spirit. 

I like to think of Mary, the Mother 
of Jesus, and imagine how she felt 
when the Angel Gabriel appeared to 
her and said, "Hail, thou that art 
highly favoured, the Lord is with thee : 
blessed art thou among women." This 
was an angel's greeting to her. 

In common with other daughters of 
Israel, Mary had looked forward to 
the coming of the Messiah through the 
royal line, and knew that some Jewish 
maiden was yet to become the Mother 
of Christ. Was it possible that the 
angel's words to her had reference to 
this wonderful event that was to take 
place? She had little time to think 
about these things, for the angel began 
to speak again, and said. "Fear not, 
Man : for thou hasl found favour with 
God. And. behold, thon shalt bring 
forth a son and shalt call His name 
Jesus. He shall be great, and shall be 
called the Son of the Highest; and 
the Lord God shall give unto Him the 
throne of Mis Father, David: and he 
shall reign over the house of Jacob 



forever and of His Kingdom there 
shall be no end." 

The angel could see that Alary was 
perplexed and somewhat worried as 
to how this miracle should be wrought, 
but with a humble heart listened to his 
words of comfort and assurance that 
all would be well ; for with God noth- 
ing shall be impossible. "When she 
could find her voice she said with 
humble acceptance, Behold the hand- 
maid of the Lord, be it unto me ac- 
cording to thy word." 

Then she was left to herself, with a 
secret in her soul, holier, greater and 
more thrilling than any ever borne 
before or since. It was natural she 
should seek companionship, someone 
she could confide in, someone of her 
own sex who would understand and' 
be able to give her comfort and support 
and to whom it would not be wrong 
to tell her secret. So she hurried to 
her cousin Elizabeth whom the angel 
had told her, was to bear a son who 
was to be known as John, a forerunner 
of Christ, who would be great in \\-\v 
sight of God and a blessing to the 
people. 

There was mutual joy in the meeting 
of Mary and Elizabeth For thej were 
both to be Mothers of choice spirits. 

Mow blessed they were and how thank- 
ful We should be thai we know this 
Story and have a testimony i>\ its irnlh 

fulness. Ma\ we appreciate and have 
the real spirit of i 'hristmas love one 

another and il> good toward men. 



December, 1952 



421 



'rim the C <///</• s /A'/i 



Spiritual %f.h 



jQECEMBER, the month set aside 
U for celebrating tin birth of Our 
Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ. Also 
f rejoicing for the greal Plan of 
Salvation which lie caused to be es- 
tablished in the short span of His life 
and the Redemption of mankind 
through Ilis atoning sacrifice. 

Upon Our Saviour's ascension into 
Heaven, a comforter was promised 
unto them, which was the Holy Ghost. 
And He commanded the Apostles to 
go forth and preach the Gospel to all 
pcopk- of the then civilized world. 
Those who had faith and were ba] 
by water and by the Holy Ghost were 
promised salvation. And those who had 
received the Holy Spirit should obtain 
variou - ns for their welfare 

and blessing. 

There are many gifts of the spirit 

as told us in our standard works and 
a> many of us have experienced in 
our short span of life. But there are 
many in the Church who do not stop 
to take note of these gifts which are 
placed in the Church for the growth 
and benefit of His people. A.s il tells 
US in Modern Day Revelation, as re- 
ceived by the Prophet Joseph Smith : 
"For verily \ say unto you, th< 
given for the benefit of those who love 
me and keep all my commandments, 
and him that seeketh so to do; that 
all may he benefited that seek or that 
if me. that task and not for ;i 
sign that they may consume it upon 
their lusts. And again, verily I 
unto you, I would that you should 
always remember and always retain 
in your minds what thos< 
that are given uilto the Church. For 
all have not every '/'it given unto 
them; for there are many gifts and 
to every man is given a gift by the 



Spirit of Cod. To some is giv< 
and to some is given another, thi 
may he profited thereby." 

"And again, verily I say unto you, to 
sonu is given, by tin- Spirit <■■ 
the word of w isdom. T< i an< >tl i 
given the word of knowledge, that all 
may he taught to he wise and to have 
knowledge. And again, to som< 
given to have faith to he healed. Ann 
to others u is given to have faith to 
heal. And again, to some is given the 
working of miracles. And to oth 
is given to prophesy. And to others 
the discernin \n<l again, 

it is given to some to speak with 
tongues. And to another is given the 
interpretation of tongues. And all these 
gifts come from God, for the benefit 
of the children of God." I D 
46:9-12, 17-2 ware lest ye 

are deceived; and that ye may not 
he deceived seek ye earnestly die best 
gifts, always remembering for what 
they are given.'* ( [bid. Excerpts from 
Verses 7-8.) There is a gift of Dis- 
cernment which member* 
hood shall receive, if they live for it. 
the gift to discern spirits and- t< 
nize the divinity of these gift- I 
must he remembered that the Adver- 
sary will always endeavour to counter- 
feit divine gifts. Therefore, it is 
ally important thta presiding 
should he possessed of discernment in 
order to distinguish the Spirit of Truth 
from that of error. 

Every member of the Priesthood 

who will seek to live the Gospel and 
magnify his calling will receive i ne 
or more of these gifts. 

These gifts which Our I h 
Father has saw fit to bestow upon 
those who love I tim and i bey H ; s 



422 



TE KARERE 



commandments are by far greater than 
any worldly possession ; because they 
are gifts of God, which cannot be pur- 
chased with money. An account of this 
kind can be cited from the Acts of the 
Apostles in the New Testament. "And 
when Simon (the sorcerer) saw that 
through laying on of the apostles' 
hands the Holy Ghost was given, he 
offered them money, saying, Give me 
also this power, that on whomsoever 
I lay hands, he may receive the Holy 
Ghost. But Peter said unto him, Thy 
money perish with thee, because thou 
hast thought that the gift of Gou may 
be purchased with money." 

"Men of worldly attitude complain 
that spiritual matters belong to the 
mystic realms of unreality. They can- 
not seem to realize that spiritual light 
and understanding come only as we 
comply with the laws that control. 
As the muscles of the body grow 
strong only by use, so we can become 
spiritually strong only as we exercise 
our spiritual powers." — E.L.M. 

They should be exercised in right- 
eousness and be made to grow, that 
the up-building of the Kingdom of 
God might be furthered. If we obey 
Him and exercise the gifts which we 
are endowed with, in righteousness, 
great shall be our reward upon meeting 
our Maker ; at the time when the 
accounts are balanced. The greatest of 
all gifts will be ours; which is the 
"Gift of Eternal Life" as is mentioned 
in D. & C. 14:7: "And, if yen keep 



my commandments and endure to the 
end you shall have eternal life, which 
is the greatest of all the gifts of God." 

It is explained and put forth very 
well in the words of the late President 
George Albert Smith as he spoke in 
the 118th Annual Conference on 
Eternal Life. "And now, brothers and 
sisters, it is not so important how many 
valuables you may have, how much 
property you may possess, and how 
many of the honours of men you may 
acquire, and all those things that are 
so desirable in the world, the thing 
that God has given you that is worth 
more than all the rest is the oppor- 
tunity to obtain 'eternal life' in the 
Celestial Kingdom and have as your 
companions, throughout the ages of 
eternity, sons and daughters, husbands 
and wives with whom you have associ- 
ated here on earth." 

Our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ 
made it possible for us to again attain 
the position we once held with Our 
Heavenly Father and with a resur- 
rected and immortal body go on in 
eternal progression, to higher and more 
exalted spheres. Let us, each and every 
one, set Christmas time as a time to 
express our gratitude unto Our 
Heavenly Father for the Gift of His 
Beloved Son, the Prince of Life, the 
Holy One. Rejoicing with songs in our 
hearts and on our lips Glory to God 
in the highest and on earth peace, good 
will toward men. 




December, 1952 



423 



Who Are The Children of Abraham? 

By JOHN A. WIDTSOE 
(Evidences and Reconciliations, Vol. Ill) 



A BR Ml AM. the son of Terah, 
lived in the City of Chaldees.l 
The family of Abraham had turned 
from righteousness and had become 
idolators.2 Abraham therefore, himself 
a follower of God's truth, preached 
righteousness to them, but without 
avail. For his insistence upon the w »r- 
ship of the only true and living God, 
he was persecuted and his life sought. 
So intense was the hatred of the 
idolators that it was only by the inter- 
vention <>f the Lord that he was saved 
from being offered up as a sacrifice to 
the idols of the people.3 

Abraham was a chosen spirit, des- 
tined to be a greal leader of the work 
of the Lord. He was commanded to 

move into another land to he shown 
him, where he mighl he free to worship 
the Lord of earth and the heavens. The 
Lord at that time gave Abraham a 
blessing which has sounded through 
the centuries and to which all Christ- 
ians cling: "And I will make of thee 
a nation, and I will bless thee, and 
make thy name great: and thou shalt 
be a b]e>>ing." 

"And I will bless them that bless 
Thee, and curse him that curseth 
Thee; and in Thee shall all families 
of the earth be blessed. "4 

In obedience to God's command, 
Abraham, with believing members of 
his family, moved into the promised 
land known to us as Palestine. The 
story is best told in his own words: 
"In the land of the Chaldeans, at the 
residence of my father, I. Abraham, 
saw that it was needful for me to 
obtain another place of residence." 

"And finding there was greater hap- 
piness and peace and rest for me. I 
sought for the blessings of the fathers, 
and the right whereunto I should be 



ordained to administer the same: hav- 
ing been myself a followed of right- 
eousness, desiring also to be one who 
ssed ureat knowledge, and to be 
a greater follower of righteousness, 
and to possess i rreater knowledge, 

and to be a father of many nations, 
a prince of peace, and desiring to re- 
ceive instructions, and to keep the 
commandments of God, I became a 
rightful heir, a High Priest, holding 
the right belonging to the fathers." 

"It was conferred upon me from 
the fathers: it tame clown from the 
fathers, from the beginning of time, 
yea, even from the beginning, or before 
the foundations of the earth to the 
present time, even the right of the 
first-born, on the first man. who is 
Adam, our first father, through the 
fathers, unto me." 

"1 sought for mine appointment unto 
the Priesthood according to the ap- 
pointment of God unto the fathers con- 
cerning the sei-d. "5 

After he was well settled, the pro- 
mise that the Lord had made to him 
was reiterated, especially On an occasion 
when the Lord communed with him. 

"And the Lord said. Shall I hide 
from Abraham that thing which I do; 
seeing that Abraham shall surely be- 
come great and mighty nation, and all 
the nations of the earth shall be blessed 
in him ?" 

"For I knew him. that he will com- 
mand his children and his household 
after him. and they shall keep the way 
of the Lord, to do justice and judg- 
ment : that the Lord may bring upon 
Abraham that which he hath spoken 
of him." 

The promise that in him all nations 
should be blessed, brought Abraham's 



424 



TE KARERE 



work beyond that of flesh and blood 
relationships. It made of him a uni- 
versal figure in the Lord's plan of sal- 
vation for all who were sent upon the 
earth. It would seem that the accept- 
ance of the knowledge of the gospel, 
and the possession of the Priesthood 
which Abraham bore, would make all 
mankind heirs to the blessings pro- 
mised Abraham. 8 

Modern revelation has confirmed this 
view and has cleared up the true mean- 
ing" of the phrase, "in thee and thy 
seed." In the Book of Abraham, trans- 
lated from Egyptian papyrus by Joseph 
Smith, the following statement is 
made : "My name is Jehovah, qnd I 
know the end from the beginning ; 
therefore my hand shall be over thee." 

"And I will bless them through thy 
name ; for as many as receive this 
Gospel shall be called after thy name, 
and shall be accounted thy seed, and 
shall rise up and bless thee as their 
father. "9 

There can be no misunderstanding 
of this statement. All who accept vhe 
Gospel become by adoption members 
of the family of Abraham. 

Moreover, there is in the opinion of 
many, in this process of adoption, a 
subtle change in the body as well as 
in the spirit which makes a person a 
true heir of the promises to Abraham. 
This was the view also of the Prophet 
Joseph Smith, in a discourse on the 
two comforters. "The effect of the 
Holy Ghost upon a Gentile is to purge 
out the old blond, and make him actu- 



ally of the seed of Abraham. 10 This 
is reflected in the patriarchal blessings 
of the Church which generally assign 
nearly all persons to one or the other 
of the tribes of Jacob, direct descend- 
ants of Abraham. 

This understanding of the promise 
to Abraham places a heavy responsi- 
bility upon all who accept the Gospel. 
As children of Abraham, they are 
under obligation to do the works of 
Abraham. The waters of baptism carry 
with them the promise on the part of 
the candidate that he will conform his 
life to the Gospel of Jesus Christ, 
which, of course, was the Gospel given, 
accepted, and practised by Father 
Abraham. 

The oft-asked question, "Who are 
the children of Abraham ?" is well 
answered in light of the revealed 
Gospel. 

All who accept God's plan for His 
children on earth and who live it are 
the children of Abraham. Those who 
reject the Gospel, whether children in 
the flesh, or others, forfeit the promises 
made to Abraham and are not children 
of Abraham. 



1 — Genesis 11:31. 

2 — Pearl of Great Price: Abraham 1 :5-7. 

3— Ibid. 1:5-15. 

4— Genesis 12:2-3. 

5 — Pearl of Great Price: Abraham 1:1-4. 

6 — Doctrine and Covenants 84:14-16: 

27:10; 85:3. 
7 — Genesis 18:17-19. 
8 — See the first Chapters in the Pearl of 

Great Price: Abraham. 
9 — Abraham 2:8-10. 
10 — Joseph Fielding Smith, Teachings oi 

the Prophet Joseph Smith, p. 150. 



DON'T WABBLE 



7 here is one sort of man that there is no place for in the universe, and that 
is the wobbler, the man on the fence, who never knows where he stands, who is 
always slipping about, dreaming, apologising, never daring to take a firm stand 
on anything. Everybody despises him. He is a weakling. Better a thousand 
times have the reputation of being eccentric, peculiar, and cranky eren. than 
never to stand for anything. Success, 



December, 1952 



425 



imn 



TE PUEA leilfi W^B 



Na HORI HALL 



.- : /^\ 



I k 




No te po o te Hatarei, te tekau- 
marua o Oketopa, 1952, i mate ai 
tetahi o nga Rangatira o roto i te 
Iwi Maori, e 68 ona tau. I pinea ki 
tona ingoa te taitara C.B.E. a te 
Kingi o Ingarangi, he tohu na te 
Mana o Ingarangi mo nga mahi i 
oti i a Te Puea i roto i ana iwi; 
ko ana whakaaro katoa kia oti 
tetahi paepae oneone hei okiokita- 
nga atu mo nga tamariki me nga 
mokopuna i a ratou e tupu ake ana 
ki te pakeketanga o te tangata. 

Kei te mau mahara tonu te ma- 
ha o nga marae i haerea e te Puea, 
ara i haere ia ki te arahi haere i 
ana ropu takaro ki te mahi moni 
i nga taone, hei tutukitanga mo 
ana hiahia. I kumea ai ia ki nga 
pa tata atu, kia whakata i te ruhi 
o te tinana i te haerenga i nga 
rori i tetahi taone ki tetahi taone. 
No runga ia no nga nohoanga tei- 
tei, heke rawa ia ki raro, kia ahei 



ai te kukume ake i te kahui tama- 
riki ki nga nohanga tika, ki nga 
kuhu o te whaiwhakaaro, o te ora. 
Ko tenei te tauira i waiho iho e to 
tatou ariki e Ihu Karaiti, "Ko te 
tangata e whakaiti ana i a ia, ka 
whakanuia." He maha nga tetekura 
i eke ki te tihi o nga Maunga. Ko 
tenei i a Ta Timikara nei, i a Ta 
Apirana Ngata, i a Maui Pomare 
ia Ngarimu me etahi atu; na ratou 
ano ratou i piki ki nga tihi. I tenei 
ra ka kitea maramatia te heke o 
te tekau mano tangata ki Turanga- 
waewae, Ngaruawahia. Ahaakoa he 
maroke nga mataapuna roimata 
(otira kaore i maroke), ko te ha- 
ruru o te waewae ki te marae ta 
tatou o enei ra. Na te peka o 
Akarana i tono a Hori Hooro hei 
arahi i taana ropu ki te marae hei 
hari i taana koha putiputi kia kite 
mai ai nga iwi, ae e aroha ana te 
hunga tapu i ona wahi katoa, kia 
te Puea, i tu hoki te tumuaki ki 
te whaikorero, ki te mihi ki nga 
iwi. 

Haere e hine, haere: E moe i te 
moenga roa i te urunga e kore e 
taka. 

Moe mai i te tihi o Taupiri, ko 
to wairua ia kei te Ariki o nga 
Rangi. Nui atu te pai o te mahi a 
nga apiha maori a te kawanatanga, 
i tonoa ki Ngaruawahia ki te awhi- 
na i te tangata whenua, ki te wha- 
katika i te takahi a nga mano i te 
marae o Turangawaewae, o Ma- 
hinaarangi. 



426 



TE KARERE 



"CHOOSE YOU" 



By PRESIDENT DAVID O. McKAY 



® 



HERE was a mighty host as- 
sembled many years ago in the 
City of Shechem. Israel had gathered 
there to hear the last words of their 
great leader, Joshua. Five score years 
and ten he had seen life ; he had led 
Israel faithfully through many trials ; 
he had seen their waverings ; and he 
had known their waywardness. On that 
memorable occasion he preached to 
them the words of life, reminding them 
of the many manifestations of God in 
their behalf. He reverted to the days 
of Abraham when the people went 
after strange gods. He told them how 
God had led their father, Abraham, out 
from this idolatry, how the hand of 
the Lord had led Israel out of Egypt, 
how he had given them lands not of 
their taking, how he had given them 
cities, not of their building. Continued 
he: 

"Now, therefore, fear the Lord, and 
serve Him in sincerity and in truth ; 
and put away the gods which your 
fathers served on the other side of the 
flood, and in Egypt ; and serve ye the 
Lord. 

"And if it seem evil unto you to 
serve the Lord, choose you this day 
whom ye will serve ; whether the gods 
which your fathers served that were 
on the other side of the flood, or the 
gods of the Amorites, in whose land 
ye dwell : but as for me and my house, 
we will serve the Lord." (Joshua 
24:14-15). 

If it seem evil in your sight, to serve 
the Lord, then choose you ibis day 
whom ye will serve. "But," said the 
old prophet, just before bis death, "as 

Inr me and my bouse, we will serve 
flic l.m-d." 



cho 



Then he gave the people their 



4^ 



"Whom will ye serve ?" And they 
cried with one voice, "We will serve 
the Lord." "Remember," said he, "it 
is you who make the covenant." 

". . . ye cannot serve the Lord : for 
He is an Holy God; He is a jealous 
God : He will not forgive your trans- 
gressions, nor your sins. 

"If ye foresake the Lord, and serve 
strange gods, then He will turn and 
do you hurt, and consume you, after 
that He hath done you good." 

"And the people said unto Joshua, 
Nay ; but we will serve the Lord. 

"And Joshua said unto the people, 
Ye are witnesses against yourselves 
that ye have chosen you the Lord, to 
serve Him. And they said, We are 
witnesses." (Idem. 19-22.) 

And the covenant made by the people 
that day was placed in the book of the 
law of the Lord, and an altar was built 
there as a memorial of the covenant. 
Joshua bade them goodbye and went 
the way of .all the earth. That genera- 
tion kept their covenants. You uia\ 
read the record of Israel from the 

exodus to the captn it> . and you cannot 
find a generation that served the Lord 
so faithfully as did those who cove 
nanted with the old Prophet Joshua, on 
that 'la- 



December, 1952 



427 



We, in our day, must choose whom 
we will serve. I say we canonl 
serving, part of the- time, the enemy, 
and part of the time, the Church. We 
cannot do this. The Lord has said 
plainly. "No man can serve two 
masters: for cither he will hate the 
one and love the other; or else he will 
hold to the one and despise the other. 
Ye cannot serve God and mammon." 
(Matt. 6:24.) These words are true, 
and 1 believe we should take them as 
literally as did the Prophet Joseph 
Smith take the words of James: 

"If any of yon lack Wisdom, let him 
ask of God, that giveth to all men 
liberally." (James 1 :5.) 

The Prophet believed these words 
and took them for their meaning. So 
I believe we should take Christ's words 
and know that we cannot serve two 
masters. Let us choose today whom we 
>hall serve. 

The truth that we cannot serve two 
masters is emphasized in Byron's Cain, 
and I feel to mention it here for em- 
phasis. Cain is tempted by Lucifer; and 
after the devil had let him on. telling 
him that the gospel is nothing, that 
Adam was deceived, that the Lord is 
only a cruel God, Cain says: 

"Wilt thou teach me all ?" 

"Aye." says Lucifer, "upon one con- 
dition." 

Cain : "Xante it." 

Satan: "That thou dost fall down 
and worship me, thy Lord." 

Cain: "Thou art not the Lord my 
father worships." 

Satan: "No." 

Cain : "His equal ?" 

Satan: "No, I have naught in com- 
mon with Him! Nor would: I would 
he aught above — beneath — Aught save 
a sharer or a servant of His power. I 
dwell apart : but I am great — many 
there are who worship me. and more 
who shall — be thou among the first." 

Cain: "I never as yet have bow'd 
unto my father's God, although my 



brother Abel oft implores that I would 
join him in sacrifice: Why should I 
l>o\\ to thee :" 

Satan : "I last thou ne'er bowed to 
Him?" 

Cain : "1 lave 1 not said it : Need I 

sa\ it? Could not thy mighty know- 
ledge teach thee that ?" 

Then these w^rds and Byron never 
uttered a greater truth: 

Satan: "lb- who bows not to Him 
has bow 'd to me !" 

( lain : "But I will bend to neither." 

Satan: "Ne'er the less, thou art my 
worshipper: not worshipping Nun. 
makes thee mine the same." | ( ain. 
Act. 1.) 

This truth harmonized with the 
scripture. "No man tan serve two 
masters: for either he will hate the 
one, and love the other; or else he will 
hold to the one and despise the other." 
( Matt. 6:24.) 

It is not in membership only that 
Christ wants service. He can. today as 
of old. raise up from the stones child- 
ren unto Abraham. It is not lip service 
that He wants. Speaking of the 
churches of the world, the Lord said 
to Joseph Smith: ". . .they draw near 
me with their lips, but their heart- are 
far from me." (Joseph Smith 2:19.) It 
is not lip service— then what is it? 
Faithfulness to duty. 

I am reminded now of the responsi- 
bility that rested upon those soldiers 
who followed General James Wolfe 
up the mighty heights of Quebec that 
Starlight September night. What was 
the duty upon each soldier that night? 
Nothing great — five thousand of them 
stealthily rowing down the river and 
then quietly pulling themselves up by 
the branches of the trees on the hill- 
side. What was the service demanded 
from that mighty army? Why. the ser- 
vice of order and quietness. One soldier 
that night could have frustrated Gen- 
eral Wolfe's entire plan. But each one 
had a duty- that of being quiet, that 
of remaining in rank, until, before 



428 



TE KARERE 



morning, the whole army stood on the 
Plains of Abraham, ready to take the 
fort. So it is in this great army of the 
priesthood. Each man has only a little 
duty to perform ; the performance of 
it might mean everything" to the 
quorum to which he belongs ! It might 
mean immeasurably much to the 
Church. 

There are other instances in history 
where little simple acts have expressed 
the spirit of the entire nation. One 
such comes to my mind. At one time 
during the American Revolution, Gen- 
eral Nathanael Greene had been de- 
feated ; he was alone, penniless, hungry, 
footsore. He went into an inn, and the 
proprietor said : "Hello, General 
Greene! All alone?" "Yes, alone, 
hungry . and penniless." The lady of 
the house set before him a warm 
breakfast — plain, but the best she had, 
and then, shutting the door quietly 
behind her, she brought and put in 
the general's hand a purse. "There !" 
she said, "it is all I have, but you are 
welcome to it ; take it." 

There was hanging just over the 
fireplace of that humble inn the picture 
of George III. General Green arose, 
turned the picture to the wall, and on 
the back of it wrote this line : "Hide 
your face, George, and blush." Why? 
Because that little simple act had with- 
in it the expression of th'e spirit of the 
Revolution. The spirit of freedom was 
expressed by that woman in a little 
deed of service to her country. That 
is why General Greene wrote : "Hide 
your face, George, and blush." 

So it may be in the Church ; some 
little act by a deacon, a teacher, a 
priest, an elder, a high priest, a 



seventy, an Apostle, or anyone — some 
little act may manifest his service to 
his Church and express chat loyalty 
which every young man feels, which 
every young man desires to express, 
and which can best be manifested by 
service in the work of the Lord. Let 
us choose this day, throughtout all 
Israel, to say with Joshua of old : I 
know not what ye may choose. If ye 
do not wish to serve the Lord, choose 
ye other gods ; go after the spirit of 
the world, if ye will ; ". . . but as for 
me and my house, we will serve the 
Lord." 

The line between truth and error 
has been distinctly marked, and the 
members of the Church of Jesus Christ, 
and all others, are given the choice 
of truth or error. I believe you cannot 
find throughout the Church one young 
man who if the choice be given him 
would say : "I choose to serve the 
world." Why is it then that we do 
sometimes serve the world? It is 
through ignorance or weakness. 

It is the duty of the Latter-day 
Saints to teach young people how to 
serve the Master. The Church, though 
in the world, is not of the world. There 
are two distinct armies ; they are facing 
each other. The Church stands for 
truth; the enemy is error. May God 
help us and make us feel this day our 
duty to teach the young how to serve 
God and may the blessings of our 
Father be upon the youth of Israel and 
upon all the Saints everywhere, that 
we may choose to serve Him and keep 
His commandments, for there is noth- 
ing in life that brings more happiness 
than righteous living — than serving 
God. 



After having frayed for what we think we need, the moment we arise let 
us set about to fulfil ike prayer to the best of our ability, depending upon the 
I.md to supplement what we are lacking. 



December, 1952 



429 



Construction on Auckland Chapel 
Near Completion 

By BRO. WILLIAM CURNOW 




BITH the r< ar if powerful engines 
the huge plane hearing Bishop 
Buehner and Elder Anderson took to 
the air from the Whenuapai Airfield 
and was soon out of sight. This 
marked the end of a visit to New 
Zealand of a member of the Presiding 
Bishopric of the Church and of the 
Supervising Architect of the Church. 
Their visit was for the purpose of in- 
specting and reporting on the building 
needs of the Church in this land. In 
the short space of two weeks they have 
travelled over a large part of our 
country and will take with them to 
/ion and to the First Presidency a 
first-hand account of the condition of 
the Church building programme here. 

This fact gives us need to pause 
and take stork of ourselves, of OUT 
activities and effi »rts. 



Here in Auckland the building of 
our Xew Chapel and Recreation id all 
is uppermost in our minds and all our 
efforts are directed towards the day 
when it will become an accomplished 
fact and we are able to enjoy the 
amenities and comforl it provides. 

Let us examine this building and see 
just what these amenities will be. 
First, there are two floors each of 
seven thousand five hundred square 
floor spare. The lower floor 
consists <>f a large entrance foyer 
located in the centre of the building. 
From each side of this foyer a corri- 
dor extends the full length of the 
building with eight class rooms on 
one >ide, while the other consists of 
the Mission Office, store rooms, ladies' 
and men's toilets, a 1a<-<_;e room for the 
Relief Society, with kitchen and store- 



430 



TE KARERE 



room adjoining and a lounge for the 
office staff where they can prepare 
meals for themselves, shave or cake a 
shower. Also situated on the ground 
floor is a beautiful pale green tiled 
baptismal font, with heating pipes laid 
in the floor for the warming of the 
water. The whole of this lower floor 
is to be covered with green asphalt 
tiles. Tucked away near one corner 
is a large oil-fired boiler which pro- 
vides for the central heating of the 
building. 

From this floor a wide stairway 
l